DISTINGUISHED
CLASSICS
OF REFERENCE
PUBLISHING
DISTINGUISHED
CLASSICS
OF REFERENCE
PUBLISHING
Edited By
JAMES RETTIG
ORYX PRESS
1992
The rate Arabian Oryx is believed to have insprired the myth of the unicorn. This desert
antelope became virtually extinct in the early 1960s. At that time several groups of
international conservationists arranged to have 9 animals sent to the Phoenix Zoo to be the
nucleus of a captive breeding herd. Today the Oryx population is over 400, and nearly 800 have
been returned to reserves in the Middle East.
Copyright © 1992 by James Rettig
Published by The Oryx Press
4041 North Central at Indian School Road
Phoenix, Arizona 85012-3397
Published simultaneously in Canada
All rights reserved
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and
retrieval system, without permission in writing from The Oryx Press.
Printed and Bound in the United States of America
The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of American Na-
tional Standard for Information Science — Permanence of Paper for Printed Library Materials,
ANSI 239.48,1984.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publlcatlon Data
Distinguished classics of reference publishing / edited by James
Rettig; foreword by Charles Scribner, Jr.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-89774-640-6
1 . Bibliography — Best books — Reference books. 2. Reference books-
-Publishing — History, 3. Reference books — Bibliography.
I. Rettig, James.
21035. 1.DS7 1992 91-33629
O1T.02— dc20 CIP
With love and gratitude,
the editor dedicates this book to Monica Mary Rettig
"I'm so lucky to be loving you."
Contents
Foreword: Publishing the Dictionary of Scientific Biography ix
Charles Scribner, Jr.
Introduction xiii
Documenting the Travel Experience: Baedeker Guidebooks
Harold M. Otness 1
"The Most Famous Book of Its Kind": Bartlett's Familiar Quotations
Kerry L. Cochrane 9
Black's Law Dictionary: Ninety-Nine Years, 1891-1990
Pamela S. Bradigan 18
An "Alms-Basket" of "Bric-A-Brac": Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable
Charles Bunge 24
"The Indispensable Guide": The Chicago Manual of Style
Richard D. DeBacher 31
The "Instinctive Grammatical Moralizer": H. W. Fowler and His Dictionary of Modern English
Usage
William A, McHugh 41
"The Most Amusing Book in the Language": The Dictionary of National Biography
Johannah Sherrer 54
Controlling the Beasties: Dissertation Abstracts International
Mary W. George 66
The Circle of Learning: Encyclopaedia Britannica
Sandy Whiteley 77
The Book that Built Gale Research; The Encyclopedia of Associations
Carol M.Tobin 89
Code of Courtesy from the Roaring Twenties: Emily Post's Etiquette
Richard W. Grefrath 98
"Of Permanent Use and Usefulness": Granger's Index to Poetry
Milton H. Crouch 113
A Cornerstone of Musical Scholarship: Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians
William S. Brockman 117
"Monument": Guide to Reference Books
Stuart W. Miller 129
"Unbeatable": The Guinness Book of Records
Christine C. Whittington 138
jiiiiS
vui
DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
i ,
A Household Word for Four Generations: Moody's
Elizabeth J. Wood 147
"The Bibliographical Wonder of the World": The National Union Catalog
John R. M. Lawrence 161
The Record of Record: The New York Times Index
Jo A. Cates 174
"The Jewel in the Crown": The Oxford English Dictionary
James Rettig 180
"Mom in the Library": The Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature
Mary Biggs 198
Demystifying Parliamentary Procedure: Robert's Rules of Order
Sarah B. Watstein 21 1
"Wings of Flight": Roget's Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases
Marta Lange 220
Eugene Garfield's Contribution to Bibliography: Science Citation Index
David A. Tyckoson 234
"The Baby Figure of the Giant Mass": Pollard & Redgrave's and Wing's Short-Title Catalogues
Robert W, Melton 242
Continuity in a Changing World, Statesman's Year-Book
David M. Pilachowski 259
Permanently Definitive: Strong's Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible
Edward D. Starkey 269
The World in One's Hands: Times Atlas of the World
Mary L, Larsgaard 27 8
The Legacy of Noah Webster: The Merriam-Webster Family of Dictionaries
Marie C. Ellis 286
Afternoon Tea, Parliament, and , . . Who 's Who
Linda K. Simons 306
All Things for All People: The World Almanac
Margaret Morrison 3 1 3
"The Best of Its Type": World Book Encyclopedia
Holly D. Rogerson and E. Paige Weston 322
Contributor Profiles 335
Index 339
V
Foreword: Publishing the Dictionary
of Scientific Biography
Charles Scribner, Jr.
Distinguished Classics of Reference Publishing
relates the stories of 31 major reference works,
many of them very ambitious undertakings that
from concept to completion spanned years or
even decades. One must have great admiration
for the dedicated, hard working editors who
created them. The Dictionary of Scientific Biog-
raphy was the most ambitious publishing proj ect
that I ever dreamt up. As a schoolboy I was
greatly impressed by the history of Chartres
Cathedral and used to marvel at the dedication
of the ancient French townspeople who were
willing to commence a building that none of
them would live to see finished. Frankly, I am a
little less amazed now by that part of the story.
It is obvious that they expected to see it finished.
My own experience as a publisher of the DSB
has given me a good deal of insight into the
planning of long-term projects. The truth of the
matter is that at the start no one can imagine how
long they are going to take. Perhaps it is just as
well that our chronological depth perception
fails us so often when we look into the future.
Wemightneverbeginmanyworthwhileprojects
if we knew ahead of time their actual comple-
tion dates. Dan Boorstin, the Librarian of Con-
gress, commented on this remark saying that it
constituted a proof of the existence of God.
Although th&DSB was conceived, planned,
written, and edited almost entirely by historians
of science, it was our original hope that it would
also serve a wide readership outside that special
field. We hoped that it would be useful and
interesting to historians in other fields as well as
to teachers and students, journalists, and gen-
eral readers.
It was natural that the idea for a biographi-
cal dictionary of science should have been
taken up enthusiastically by Scribners. In the
earliest years of our company's history we
were active in publishing multi-volume refer-
ence works in such fields as literature, religion,
and history. At one time — over a hundred
years ago, as noted elsewhere in this book — we
published the mnth&ditionofiheiEncyclopaedia
Britannica in the United States. In the 1920s we
entered into an agreement with the American
Council of Learned Societies to publish the
Dictionary of American Biography and in the
1950s we had begun to be active in publishing
books on science for the general reader. My
own interest in history of science had been
greatly stimulated by a little book by James B.
Conant entitled Science and Common Sense
(New Haven: Yale University Press, 1951). He
proposed that the study of history of science
would be valuable in science teaching and
especially so for beginners who would find it
easier to grasp the purposes and methods of
science by reading case histories taken from
the earlier and simpler periods in the develop-
ment of various sciences.
With all those ideas somewhat confusedly
in mind, I wrote to Dr. Charles Gillispie at
Princeton University asking to see him. I had
not met him but was familiar with his splendid
book in history of science entitled The Edge of
Objectivity (Princeton: Princeton University
&.-HW— "Jf i* **
x DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Press, 1960). I told him that I wanted to discuss
some publishing ideas in his field and had been
"nursing the hope" that he would assist us as an
advisory editor. Dr. GUlispie responded courte-
ously, and I visited him at Princeton a few days
later. In the story of th&DSB I consider that visit
as eventful as Dr. Watson's first meeting with
Sherlock Holmes. (Incidentally, Dr. Gillispie
said, "Which one of us is Sherlock Holmes?" I
said, "You, of course.") We talked about the
possibility of Scribners publishing a series of
books in history of science. Dr. Gillispie was
obviously doubtful and pointed out that most of
his colleagues were already over-committed as
far as writing was concerned. In the following
days I brooded over the difficulty of launching
any major effort in history of science. In hind-
sight, now, given our success in commissioning
articles from leading historians for the Dictio-
nary of American Biography, it seems almost
inevitable that the idea for a DAS of scientists
would dawn on us. But the inevitable is not
always perceived promptly. In any case, that
idea did finally occur to me. Considering the
subject, I have later thought it very auspicious
that this inspiration took place one morning in
the bathtub. I did not rush out shouting "Eu-
reka!" I telephoned Dr. Gillispie almost imme-
diately to see what he thought of a dictionary
approach. His response was unhesitating and
splendidly positive. He liked the idea and was
willing to help. His favorable reaction was the
decisive event in the creation of the DSB.
Without his enthusiasm the idea would almost
certainly have aborted; with his support it had
every chance of success.
During the next few months a number of
steps were taken — all of them important to our
moving ahead on the project. A luncheon meet-
ing of prominent historians of science resulted
in a request that the American Council of
Learned Societies take the DSB under its wing
in the same way it had taken the DAB. A
detailed grant proposal was prepared by Dr.
Gillispie, which was then submitted by the
ACLS to the National Science Foundation. All
this sounds very complicated if not Byzantine,
but it was absolutely necessary given the scale
of the work and the strong sponsorships it
would need to enlist the cooperation of scholars
all over the world. In such a situation the
publisher must emulate the cuckoo and lay its
egg in another bird's nest for hatching.
Once the National Science Foundation re-
sponded affirmatively with what was the larg-
est publication grant it had made until then, the
DSB was a going concern. An editorial board
was appointed under the chairmanship of
Charles Gillispie and steps were taken to make
a working list of subjects — that is, names of
scientists — for inclusion in the Dictionary. The
original estimate had been around 2,600 ar-
ticles. The final list contained twice as many, a
tolerable margin of error for reference books
and cathedrals. I might add that in the very
tentative first list of names that was typed up at
Scribners, a shocking clerical mistake was made
between the "M's" and the "N's" with the result
that Sir Isaac Newton was left out. That was
inauspicious — to say the least — and I never felt
we enjoyed the Ml confidence of physics edi-
tor Thomas Kuhn after that. I hasten to add that
Newton is in the DSB.
Each of the major reference works in-
cluded in Distinguished Classics of Reference
Publishing has generated its share of interest-
ing stories. So has the DSB. To describe in any
detail the events and trials of the decade and a
half in which the successive volumes of the
DSB were published, from Abelard to Zwelf er,
would take a book in itself. But I shall share a
couple of anecdotes given me by managing
editor Marshall DeBruhl.
It was the policy for the DSB to include no
living subject, but it was not always easy to
ascertain whether a particular scientist was still
alive or not. For example, Dame Kathleen
Lonsdale was asked to write the article on
Ralph Wyckoff, which she did. A fact checker
discovered no grounds for thinking the man had
died, which would disqualify him. Meanwhile,
Dame Kathleen died. We thereupon wrote to
Wyckoff — at his last known address — and
asked him to write the article on her. He agreed
FOREWORD: PUBLISHING THE DICTIONARY OF SCIENTIFIC BIOGRAPHY xi
but had to give up the assignment because of ill
health. It was the first case of the "author is
dead, but the subject is alive." Also, if he could
have completed the article on Dame Kathleen,
and then died, we would have had a real first in
biographical publishing. Incidentally, Wy ckoff
did not die in time for the W volume. We held
the article on him for a future supplement.
The article on Max Planck was translated
from the German language and in one passage
the author seemed to be going on and on about
Planck's knowing everything. The copy editor
asked if he would let us reduce the paragraph to
stating that Planck had a reputation for omni-
science. The author replied "Omniscience is
not sufficient."
Planning and producing the index for the
DSB turned out to be a much more difficult task
than we had anticipated. It would have been
comparatively easy had we limited ourselves to
proper names, but given the organization of the
Dictionary, which is biographical, we consid-
ered it all the more necessary that the index be
thoroughly topical as well. For a while we
hoped that it would be possible to produce the
index entirely by computer. In fact, we con-
ferred with some of the experts at IBM to
explore that possibility. But we soon learned
that computers were not up to such a job —
however well they may play chess. There
seemed to be no way to develop a foolproof
program that could cope with such statements
as "Darwin was a man of great personal grav-
ity" or "Pasteur had boundless energy as a
researcher." Computers are strong in Vespritde
geometric but weak in / 'esprit de finesse.
In the end, the longest way around turned
out to be the shortest way home and we engaged
a top-notch indexer, Julia McVaugh, to take on
the job in the old-fashioned way. Working at
Chapel Hill with a small staff of assistants, she
produced the index in ten years. The completed
job required 65,000 cards for 75,000 entries.
When these were shipped up to New York in
three batches by train we did not dare let them
out of our sight, but provided an escort for each
shipment. This part of the DSB was almost as
time-consuming and costly as our original esti-
mates for the entire work. So much for our
ability to foretell the completion of our cathe-
dral!
Although the principal purpose of theDSB
is to describe the achievements of individual
scientists from the earliest times to the present
day, I believe that it is as much a humanistic as
a scientific work — that is, if one accepts the
idea that humanism is essentially a point of
view that can be taken towards all departments
of knowledge, including science. From the
humanistic point of view, the creation of in-
creasingly comprehensive and beautiful con-
ceptual schemes in science, the production of
more and more precise scientific data, and the
continual application of scientific knowledge
to practical human needs, are all to be seen as
coordinated achievements in the life of the
mind and additions to the contents of human
experience.
I would say further that no matter how
complex or unfamiliar the subject matter of a
particular science may become or how far its
concepts and assumptions may be at variance
with our ordinary intuition, the thought pro-
cesses of scientists are not fundamentally dif-
ferent from those of other researchers in other
departments of knowledge who must apply
imagination, reason, and factual investigation
to whatever difficulties of understanding may
arise in their work. In this connection one thinks
of the simple definition of scientific method
proposed by Percy Bridgman. He called it
"Doing your damnedest with your mind — no
holds barred." One of the advantages of the
biographical approach to the history of science
is that it consistently reminds the reader that
science has no life of its own apart from the
minds of the men and women who study or
create it. That point is made implicitly by more
than 5,000 articles in the DSB, and we have
been fortunate to find a large enough pool of
experts who have kept it going through its
supplements.
Similarly, the biographical information
about the creators of the 31 landmark reference
iZSBBaSCyiSa
xii DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
works whose stories are told in Distinguished
Classics of Reference Publishing demonstrate
that these books, so often taken for granted,
owe their existence to the hard work — noholds
barred — of their editors. Anyone who has
worked on a project like thsDSB can empathize
with the difficulties the editors of these other
great reference works encountered and tri-
umphed over. Users of these indispensable
works, while they might not be able to empa-
thize, will surely sympathize. All will welcome
the opportunity Distinguished Classics of Ref-
erence Publishing offers to deepen acquain-
tance with these books and to learn more about
the stories behind them.
Introduction
"If there is such a thing as a work of reference
that I cannot read through, I have yet to find it.
Catalogues, timetables, chronicles of alum-
nus and alumna, Companions and Concor-
dances of every kind — all are a joy to me."*
This is a book for everyone who derives such
unbounded joy from reference works. Distin-
guished Classics of Reference Publishing \e\\s
the story of 31 reference books or families of
reference books that have stood the test of time
and become so indispensable that if any one of
them did not exist, we would need to create it.
Many of them have established the standards
of excellence for their respective reference
genres and all have proved themselves invalu-
able. And they have, even if not read through
from cover to cover (or through many vol-
umes), provided their users more than a bit of
joy over the years. Through an amusing ex-
ample, a strikingphotograph, a carefully drawn
map, and in innumerable other ways, all these
books have been ever fresh springs of knowl-
edge and of the joy reference works uniquely
give. Distinguished Classics of Reference Pub-
lishing shares with its readers that joy and
explains how a select number of notable ref-
erence books have evolved and refined them-
selves to provide joy, knowledge, and infor-
mation in abundance.
Any collection of this sort is bound to
engender differences of opinion about what
items ought to have been included or ex-
cluded. The 3 1 books and families of books
were chosen because they have proved them-
selves again and again. Although other refer-
ence books have similarly proved their endur-
ing value, those included here were selected
because they illustrate the value of reference
works in a variety of broad subject areas and
specific reference types. Indeed, they were
selected from a much longer list that the editor
and Oryx Press editorial staff considered ini-
tially. The selection is meant to be representa-
tive, not exhaustive. Especially significant
reference types (e.g., dictionaries and ency-
clopedias) are represented by more than one
example. For other genre, more difficult
choices had to be made to select a single
representative title to keep the scope of the
project and size of the finished book manage-
able. For example, the category of national
and trade bibliographies, represented here by
the National Union Catalog, could well have
been represented by the Union List of Serials
or Books inPrint. Choices hadto bemade. The
editor and publisher hope there will be oppor-
tunity in another volume to treat those signifi-
cant reference works not selected for this
book.
With one exception, all of the books treated
are English-language books. The single ex-
ception is the Baedeker family of travel guides.
These were included because of their shaping
influence on the vade mecum travel guide
genre and because they have long been avail-
able in English editions. The absence of elec-
tronic reference works should not be inter-
preted as a slight; these worthy tools are
simply outside the scope of this book.
In most cases a single visionary person
with determination, fortitude, and unflagging
"John Russell, "Larousse's Dictionary Is Smart and Concise," New York Times (18 April 1982), p. D29. This passage is the
opening of a review of the Larousse Dictionary of Painters.
&&t&m*S~Vi
xiv DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
dedication merits credit for the creation and
maturation of each of the reference works. In
others, for example, the National Union Cata-
log, teams of individuals made them possible
from the start. With few exceptions, such as
Post's Etiquette and Bartlett's Familiar Quo-
tations, all have become institutionalized and
are today the products of many minds and
hands. But all are alike in one telling charac-
teristic; all meet day-to-day needs for thou-
sands of ordinary people. Furthermore, all
have been refined and rendered with such care
and quality that they are unquestionably, be-
yond any similar works (for none is the only
book of its kind), a joy to their users, year after
year, edition after edition.
Distinguished Classics ofReference Pub-
lishing offers glimpses behind the scenes. The
essays tell about the people who often over-
came seemingly insurmountable obstacles to
bring these works into being, and the people
who have carried them on and made them
better over decades or generations. They ex-
plain how and why the characteristics of each
new title came over time to define its genre,
and how these reference works, many prod-
ucts of pen-and-paper processes in the nine-
teenth century, have thrived and positioned
themselves in the electronic age to move pro-
ductively into the twenty-first century.
The 3 1 chapters are organized alphabeti-
cally by the titles of the books treated. Each
chapter has a four-part structure. The first and
most important section is an analytical histori-
cal essay. This essay traces the origin of the
book, places it in its historical context, and
describes its present state and likely future
directions. The second section is a biblio-
graphic history of publication, recording vari-
ous editions, title changes, etc. These publica-
tion histories vary in form and content so as to
accommodate the complexities of and varia-
tions among the histories of the 31 books.
None of these publication histories should be
construed as an exhaustive bibliographic de-
scription or final bibliographic history of any
of these titles; telling the stories of the books
and their value through narrative, not enumer-
ating the niceties of their bibliographic histo-
ries, is the primary purpose of this book. The
third section is a selective bibliography, rarely
numbering more than 25 entries, of secondary
works about the title discussed. A headnote
introduces each bibliography, points out high-
lights, and explains the particular value of the
most significant items in the list. The fourth
section is the chapter notes; these are grouped
at the end of each chapter. As the chapter notes
show, the contributors consulted current edi-
tors for information about present operations
and future plans of their particular publica-
tions. This information was gathered through
correspondence and telephone calls and, in
the case of the editors of the New York Times
Index, through an on-site interview. On behalf
of the contributors, this book's editor thanks
these busy editors for their cooperation and
hopes that each one will be pleased with the
chapter describing their respective reference
classic.
The essays vary in length. This variation
results sometimes from the the relative signifi-
cance of the work in question, sometimes from
the extent of the secondary literature extant,
but usually from both. For example, little
information other than reviews has been re-
corded about either Granger's Index or the
Guide to Reference Books. On the other hand,
works such as the Webster dictionaries or the
short title catalogs have been the subject of
numerous reports, articles, essays, and re-
views, only the most significant of which
could be cited in their essays or listed in their
bibliographies.
As one who in the past ten years has
reviewed more than 2,000 reference books
and has read even more reference book intro-
ductions, I am well acquainted with state-
ments by editors of collective works in which
they humbly assign credit for their books'
virtues to their contributors and accept re-
sponsibility for any defects. After reading
hundreds of these statements, many of them
virtually interchangeable, one could easily be
INTRODUCTION xv
tempted to dismiss them as pro forma.. How-
ever, after having assembled a group of busy
contributors and cajoled them to meet dead-
lines, and to revise several times work they
considered finished, this editor has gained a
profound appreciation of the sincerity and
veracity of those statements. Truly, the book' s
virtues lie in the individual essays, and its
editor humbly accepts responsibility for any
shortcomings it may have.
Many persons deserve thanks for their
contributions. First and foremost I wish to
thank the 3 1 other contributors; without them
there would be no Distinguished Classics of
Reference Publishing. On their behalf I thank
the many individuals, too numerous to name
individually, who assisted the contributors in
their work by critiquing early drafts, offering
advice, etc. Art Stickney, director of editorial
development of The Oryx Press, merits spe-
cial thanks for conceiving the idea for this
book. I am grateful to him that he asked me to
carry out his fine idea and that he and his
colleagues at The Oryx Press were patient
enough to let me complete several other
projects before taking on this one. Both Anne
Thompson and John Wagner, the editors at
The Oryx Press who guided me through the
project, have provided wise counsel and en-
couragement; and their sense of humor has
provided some laughs along the way. Special
thanks are also due to Charles Scribner, Jr.,
truly a living legend in reference publishing,
for graciously providing the Foreword. I am
grateful to the College of William and Mary
for awarding me a research grant to cover
expenses related to the project. My fine col-
leagues at Swem Library at William and Mary
have been supportive and have taken an inter-
est in the book's progress. At various times
Andrew Magpantay, James Wilson, Patrick
Page, and Bob Richardson converted files that
contributors produced on IBM microcomput-
ers so I could read and.edit them on a Macin-
tosh computer; they also provided other tech-
nical assistance, GlendaPage, as fine a secre-
tary as one could wish for, helped prepare
mailings, send fax messages, field telephone
calls from contributors, and tend to other
inglorious-yet-essential chores along the way.
By providing invaluable legal advice,
Philip G. Rettig proved one more time that his
favorite pro bono client is his grateful son.
Profound gratitude goes to the late Ann J.
Rettig, who, through her tireless reading to a
young boy, instilled in him a love of books so
strong that today he is decidedly one to whom
"Catalogs, timetables . . , Companions and
Concordance of every kind" are a never end-
ing source of joy. She knew of this book in its
early stages; I wish she were here to see it
finished. My children, Chris, Tony, and
Katie — children who witness the infinite vari-
ety of reference books as newly published
review copies ebb and flow in and out of the
house almost daily — have taken an interest in
the progress of the book even though they
have expressed deep doubts that any book
about books (especially when some of those
books are in turn about yet other books!) could
be interesting to anyone. For their good humor
I am grateful; I hope their doubts are ill-
founded and that some day each of them may
open this volume at least in curiosity, if not
with burning desire to read it cover to cover.
Along with editors' statements of responsibil-
ity for their books' shortcomings, editors' ex-
pressions of gratitude to patient, long suffer-
ing spouses appear to be de rtgueur in refer-
ence book introductions. But it is with a sense
of obligation genuinely incurred rather than
obeisance to convention that I express my
deepest gratitude to my wife, Monica Rettig,
for her encouragement and support through-
out this project, Without that support, it would
not have been completed as soon nor as well.
— James Rettig
I :i t
DISTINGUISHED
CLASSICS
OF REFERENCE
PUBLISHING
w*
*m
Documenting the
Baedeker
ravel experience:
ridebooks
Harold M. Otness
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Above average" was the phrase recently used
by a Booklist reviewer to evaluate the latest
Baedeker guidebook. A few years ago such
words would have been unthinkable for this
venerable series because Baedeker was the
unquestioned leader in the guidebook field.
"Kings and governments may err," went the
jingle of A. P. Herbert, "but never Mr.
Baedeker."' One of the many bits of lore
concerning this series is the story of Kaiser
Wilhelm interrupting a high-level conference
at the palace in Potsdam to appear at a window
because, as he explained, "You see, it says in
Baedeker that at this hour I always do." 2 So
dominant was the series that the very name
"Baedeker" became the generic term for all
guidebooks, much like Kleenex and Xerox
have become identified with their types of
products.
It is not that Baedekers have fallen so low,
but rather that in recent years a fair number of
guidebook series have risen to the level of
thoroughness and objectivity that Baedeker
established over a century ago. Baedekers still
are among the best of the genre, and they
remain the gauge against which other guide-
books continue to be measured. The older
Baedekers have considerable historical refer-
ence value to attractions that no longer exist,
while the current volumes provide a vast array
of information on what is available for the
traveler today both in terms of what to see and
do, and the practical information of how to get
there, where to stay, and where to eat and be
entertained,
Baedeker Beginnings
Baedeker is an author (actually four gen-
erations of the family), a publishing company,
and the title of a guidebook series, as well as
a generic name for all guidebooks. The father
of the series was the first Karl Baedeker who
was born in 1801 in Essen. He studied at
Heidelberg University and did some local
traveling before settling into the book selling
business in Coblenz in 1827. Five years later
he bought out a bankrupt publishing house
whose titles included a somewhat scholarly
survey of the history and art of the Rhine by
Professor Johann August Klein entitled
Rheinreise von Mainz bis Koln (Coblenz: F.
Roehling, 1828). In 1835 Baedeker revised
this work, extending the geographical range
and adding to it the practical information on
transportation, lodging, food, and health
needed by travelers. In 1839 Baedeker for the
first time put his name on the title page of
another revision of this work. Any of these
three dates could be argued as the beginning of
the Baedeker guidebook dynasty.
None of these dates, however, mark the
beginning of the guidebook format. The credit
for this is often given to Pausanias, a scholar
who compiled a landmark description of the
Greek world in the second century A.D., of
which only fragments have survived. In medi-
eval times guidebooks were published for
2 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
pilgrims visiting holy shrines. Guidebooks
were a response to the increased number of
travelers; as the world become more settled
and safe, more people began traveling for
pleasure and education, In broad terms such
travel was one impetus of the Renaissance and
its consequent rapid spread of knowledge
throughout and beyond Europe. The grandees
of Renaissance tourism, traveling with reti-
nues of servants from court to court became
the "Grand Tour" aristocracy of later centu-
ries.By the early nineteenth century, the emerg-
ing middle class began to venture abroad
without servant^ tutors, and interpreters, and
a need thus arose for guidebooks.
By the beginning of the nineteenth cen-
tury, a fair number of local guidebooks were
available, but most of these concentrated on
describing the sights and their histories, rather
than pro viding the practical information to get
the traveler there. Another early guidebook
format was the "itinerary" book, which simply
listed the distances between places with a
record of the post stops where teams of coach
horses were changed. With the advent of
railways, travelers could go faster and to more
places and guidebooks were organized for the
train traveler along railroad routes. Baekeker
appeared at the beginning of this era of travel.
Murray's Contribution
While Baedeker is often credited with
creating the modern guidebook, a combina-
tion of practical travel information and a de-
scription of things to experience, the original
Karl Baedeker credited his English rival John
Murray (also both a personal name and the
name of a famous family publishing business)
with perfecting the format. The second John
Murray (his father was Lord Byron's pub-
lisher) took a trip as a young man around
northern Europe, and while doing so he com-
piled notes organized by routes which in 1 83 6
his father published as A HandBookfor Trav-
ellers in Holland, Belgium, and along the
Rhine, and throughout Northern Germany
(London: John Murray). It was a success,
quickly followed by similar works on south-
ern Germany, Austria, Hungary, and Switzer-
land. Baedeker was so impressed by the utility
of these books that he copied the format,
including eventual use of the term "hand-
book" and the flexible red covers for his own
German-language guidebooks. For years af-
terwards he sent updated information fromhis
travels to the grateful John Murray, since at
this time Murray ' s guidebooks were published
only in English, and Baedeker's only in Ger-
man. 3
Baedeker followed his Rhine guidebook
with Holland (1839), Belgium (1839), and
Germany ( 1 842) and each quickly became the
standard for German-speaking travelers. The
series soon spread overall of Europe. By 1 846
the firm was translating its titles into French,
and by 1861 into English. By 1862, when
Baedeker brought out his first London guide-
book (in German), the warmth between the
Baedeker and Murray firms had cooled, and
the former had achieved a dominance which
was to last until the beginning of World War
II.
A Family Enterprise
The compiling of guidebooks, which Karl
Baedeker had done almost single-handedly on
the spot, passed on to his capable sons and
grandsons* as well as to such outsiders as
Francis Muirhead, who authored the volumes
on the United States and Canada and served as
the English-language editor for many years,
(Translated editions were not j ust literal trans-
lations but actually reworked texts to satisfy
the needs and interests of other language
groups.) The last family member with the
name Baedeker to be active in the venture, Eva
Baedeker, passed away in 1984. This multi-
generational continuity has been the key to the
long-time standardization and high quality of
the series.
From the beginning, the strength of the
Baedekers resulted from at least five factors:
BAEDEKER GUIDEBOOKS 3
1. The thoroughness of coverage, with
even small, out-of-the-way places at
least mentioned,
2. The up-to-dateness of coverage, with
substantial revision taking place be-
tween editions, which appeared every
two or three years for most titles.
3. The wealth of detailed maps, and espe-
cially city plans, included in all titles.
Baedekers became virtual small-for-
mat atlases with their foldout maps,
panoramas, and detachable index plans.
4. The authoritative and often scholarly
introductory essays to the history and
arts of the places covered. Some of
these were signed essays, mostly by
German academics, and they added to
the accuracy and prestige of the series.
5. The unbending objectivity in the de-
scription and rating of sights (an aster-
isk system was used to denote relative
merit) and in the listing of facilities.
The early Baedekers traveled anony-
mously and, unlike many guidebook
writers today, would never accept "free-
bies," or other favors, nor would they
accept advertising of any kind. The
standard warning in the turn-of-the-
century guidebooks stated: "To hotel-
proprietors, tradesmen, and others the
Editor begs to intimate that a character
for fair dealing and courtesy towards
travellers forms the sole passport to his
commendation Hotel-keepers are
also warned against persons represent-
ing themselves as agents for Baedeker's
Handbooks."
The Baedekers always placed the well-
being and fair treatment of the traveler first,
and there was almost a paternal tone in the
handing out of advise on health, safety, and
where to get best value for the money. They
have never been tools of the travel industry,
puffing travel destinations and facilities; but
display an integrity not matched in many of
today's guidebooks. Generations of travelers
came to rely upon the Baedekers, and people
walking around with the little red volumes in
hand became common to the tourist land-
scape.
Tributes to Baedeker Quality
Because of their excellence, Baedekers
were heavily mined, often without acknowl-
edgement, by compilers of competing guide-
books, and by authors of popular travel books
of the day. Baedekers figured prominently in
Graham Greene's Stambout Train: An Enter-
tainment and E.M. Forster's Room with a
View. T.E. Lawrence is said to have used them
in the Middle East. 4
They were complimented by Evelyn
Waugh ("With his unfailing discernment
Baedeker points firmly and inobstrusively to
the essential." 5 ) and Theodore Dreiser ("Let
me here and now, once and for all, sing my
praises of Baedeker and his books." 6 ). Bertrand
Russell was influenced by their clear and
direct prose style. 7 (However Aldous Huxley
took a swipe when he wrote "How often I have
cursed Baron Baedeker for sending me through
the dust to see some nauseating Sodoma or
drearily respectable Andrea del Sarto! How
angry I have been with him for starring what
is old merely because itis old." 8 ) Mark Twain
had great fun with them: "I was aware that the
movement of glaciers is an established fact,
for I had read it in Baedeker; so I resolved to
take the passage for Zermatt on the Gorner
Glacier." 9 Indeed Baedekers were an integral
part of both the travel experience and its
resulting literature.
Baedekers and Two World Wars
In 1872Baedekermovedfrom Coblenzto
the German book center of Leipzig where it
evolved into a large publishing organization
with extensive book-making and geographi-
cal information resources. By the beginning of
World War I Baedeker coverage had extended
to North Africa, the Middle East, across Rus-
m s TlNGmSHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
sia and through Siberia as far as Peking, the
Indian subcontinent, and North America, and
worldwide coverage seemednear. But the war
halted growth of the series, and anti-German
sentiment in the 1920s encouraged the devel-
opment of other guidebook series including
the excellent Blue Guides (edited by a former
Baedeker editor), which were near clones.
The Italian Touring Club lured away
Baedeker's skilled map lithographers to work
on their own extensive series of guidebooks to
Italy and its then expanding territories. The
French published several competent series of
guidebooks, including the Michelins which
today dominate the crowded European guide-
book market. The "golden era" of Baedekers
had passed, but during that era an estimated
two million copies, in three languages, had
been sold.
Between the wars the firm updated some
titles, but concentrated on regional guide-
books to Germany for the local market. It also
began to restructure the guidebooks for the
emerging automobile traveler.
World War II was an even greater disaster
for the firm. In ways it could not envision, the
firmplayed a role in the war's destruction. The
Baedeker on Scandinavia was said to be in-
strumental in General VonFalkenhorst'splan-
ning for the 1940 invasion of Norway. In
1942, following the Royal Air Force's bomb-
ing of Lubeck, Goering supposedly ordered
the Luftwaffe to destroy every historical build-
ing in Great Britain marked in Baedeker with
asterisks. The resulting bombings of cathe-
drals and other monuments became known as
"Baedeker raids." Then, on December 3,
1943, a massive R.A.F. raid reduced Leipzig,
including the Baedeker plant, to rubble. Irre-
placeable printing plates, inventory, and ex-
tensive files were destroyed,
Baedekers after World War H
The firm rose from the ashes under the
direction of Karl Baedeker, grandson of the
founder. In 1948 he issued a guidebook to
Leipzig, which was in the Russian zone of
divided Germany. But because — with charac-
teristic family thoroughness — he showed the
location of some sensitive facilities on the city
plan, the occupying Soviets quickly censored
the book. This repressive environment caused
the firm to shift to West Germany where, with
the infusion of a fourth generation of Baedeker
family members, the firm finally found solid
footing in Freiburg in 1956.
The post- World War II Baedekers have
been aimed at the automobile travelers and
group tourists who prevail today. This manner
of travel requires a different approach be-
cause of the faster pace and special needs of
the motorist. Some of today's titles convey less
history and less detailed description of artistic
works, but more on the mechanics of getting
about. Some exceptions to their policy of not
carrying advertising have been made, but com-
mercial influence is not nearly as intrusive as
it is in most guidebook series. If Baedekers are
not what they were, they are in many ways
more suitable for today's travelers.
Their Enduring Value
Old Baedekers have gained in utility as
research sources — both for what is no longer
there, and as social history. There is no better
source for study of the evolution of tourism
than a century and a half of Baedekers. They
document how people traveled, what they
saw, and what they thought about what they
saw. From reading them we can determine
national attitudes, measure our expanding
knowledge of other countries and cultures,
and mark the impact of technology on the
development of globalization.
What can be found in these old volumes?
A plan of Budapest at the turn of the century
before it was drastically altered by industrial-
ization, wars, the automobile, and Sovietiza-
tion. A description of the major cultural monu-
ments of Berlin later destroyed in the wars. A
plan of a Paris cemetery showing the graves of
famous people. A floor plan of a museum in
BAEDEKER GUIDEBOOKS 5
Amsterdam including a listing of the artworks
then displayed by location. A survey of the
rigors of travel in Albania, including the kind
of food one was likely to encounter and the
general state of sanitation and public health. A
scholarly outline of the history of Egypt. A
geological description of the Alps actually
written by a geologist. The price of a meal, a
glass of the local wine, a night's lodging in a
modest country inn, the schedule of the "Ori-
ent Express," and the fair price of a taxi ride in
Rome. Recommendations on health precau-
tions and cures. Descriptions of the local
economy. Comments on the differences of
cultures, as then perceived. And more.
Most major reference books are impres-
sively large, but the old Baedekers measured
a mere 6Va" x 4 l A" and never exceeded 1 1/3" in
thickness; yet what they contained is astound-
ing. Through the use of thin "bible paper,"
small but varied typefaces, and a compact
style of writing that included many abbrevia-
tions, some of these volumes contained over
500 pages of dense description and up to 30
pages of double-column index entries.
The number of maps is also impressive.
Great Britain (1910 ed.) had 28 maps, 65
plans, and a panorama; Rhine (1906 ed.) had
52 maps and 29 plans; and Switzerland (1911
ed.) had 75 maps, 20 plans, and 12 panoramas.
These were veritable atlases. The larger maps,
some as much as 16 inches high and wide,
were folded and were either tipped in or in-
serted in back pockets. The city plans were
particularly rich in detail and even showed
such things as streetcar routes and individual
trees along boulevards. By the turn of the
century, most maps and plans were colored,
highly readable and attractive, and rigorously
updated with each new edition. There were
also numerous black-and-white floor plans of
cathedrals and museums. The Baedeker maps
and plans are indexed in Index to Nineteenth
Century City Plans Appearing in Guidebooks,
and Index to Early Twentieth Century City
Plans Appearing in Guidebooks, both pub-
lished by the Western Association of Map
Libraries.
Most major public and academic libraries
keep a reference set of the old Baedekers,
often set aside in special collections because
of their increasing market value. Thieves value
their maps, which can, unfortunately, easily
be cut out and sold separately. Baedekers are
collected avidly. The titles which never en-
joyed great sales, such as Russia (the first and
only English edition appeared in the unhappy
year of 1914); Indien (also published in 1914
and never in English); and Maderia (issued in
1934 in German and 1939 in English) now
bring several hundred dollars apiece when
they come on the market. Others, such as the
1929 edition of Egypt with its excellent plans
of monuments now underwater and often
claimed to be the best guidebook ever written;
Greece with its strong historical description;
and the United States are also highly valued.
The most common titles are those concerning
Italy, France, Germany, and Great Britain.
Several Baedekers have been reprinted and
efforts are being made to translate some of the
early German editions into English. Green-
wood Press issued a collection of 266 English-
language volumes up to World War II on
1,898 microfiche, with printed index. This set
is now available in microfiche from Univer-
sity Publications of America for $3,545. 10
Today's Baedekers have a decidedly more
modern look with a larger format, two sizes
(country guides being larger than city guides),
glossy paper, and abundant color photographs.
The flexible red covers remain (but of a differ-
ent design and material) and they still fit in the
pocket or camera bag. The practical informa-
tion appears at the back on bright yellow
pages. The city guides are arranged alphabeti-
cally by attraction and no longer have compre-
hensive indexes. Each volume has a large
fold-out map in back. The recent publication
history of the Baedekers is complex, and is
best told by Alex Hinrichsen in "An Account
of the History of the Firm of Baedeker." 11
Cooperative ventures were first struck with
the large German map publisher Mairs of
Stuttgart in 1951, and the Autoguides were
Ej^if/iiaarea -*s*jvii
6 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
done by this firm for many years. For a while
there were actually two separate firms issuing
Baedekers, one centered in Freiburg (Karl
Baedeker Verlag, a part of the Langenscheidt
publishing group), and one in Kemnat, near
Stuttgart (Baedeker's Autoguides, a part of
the Mairs publishing group). In 1987 the two
ventures were merged under the name of Karl
Baedeker GmbH, with headquarters at
Kemnat, The ownership is split 50-50 be-
tween Langenscheidt and Mairs. The series
continues to evolve. Both Asia and the west-
ern hemisphere are receiving more coverage,
but western Europe and the Mediterranean
continue to be the strength of the series.
The revisions are more difficult to iden-
tify today. The edition numbering has unfor-
tunately been dropped and one must search the
verso of the title page for a copyright date, but
one is not always present. However the
Baedeker tradition of rigorous revision ap-
pears to be maintained.
Today the Baedekers are unique refer-
ence tools in that both the current editions and
the older editions can be justified in a library's
reference collection, a claim none of its many
imitators can yet make.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
The Eastern Alps
Egypt
France:
Paris and its Environs
Northern France
Southern France
Germany:
Berlin and its Environs
Northern Germany
The Rhine
Southern Germany
Great Britain:
England, Wales, and Scotland
London and its Environs
Greece
Italy:
Central Italy and Rome
Italy from the Alps to Naples
Nothern Italy
Southern Italy
The Mediterranean
Norway, Sweden, and Denmark
Palestine and Syria
Russia
Spain and Portugal
Switzerland
The United States, with excursions to Mexico,
Cuba, Puerto Rico, and Alaska
Over 200 distinct titles in German, French,
and English havebeen issued with the Baedeker
imprint over the last century and a half. There
have been several German, British, French,
and American publishers' imprints over the
years, and some editions have been joint pub-
lications with the (British) Automobile Asso-
ciation, Lufthansa, Shell, and others. The de-
finitive list of titles, along with a useful num-
bering system for them, is Hinrichsen's
Baedeker-Katalog.
Pre-Wortd War / English-Language
Guidebooks
Austria-Hungary
Belgium and Holland
Modern Guidebooks
Today's list of Baedeker offerings is com-
parable. There has been some restructuring of
the guidebook series and geographical areas
are redefined from time to time. Some titles
are not currently distributed in the United
States. The following are recent titles offered
through the American distributor Prentice-
Hall:
Country Guidebooks:
Denmark
Great Britain
Egypt
Greece
France
Ireland
Germany
Israel
BAEDEKER GUIDEBOOKS 7
Italy
Japan
Mexico
Switzerland
Yugoslavia
Multi-Nation and Regional Guidebooks
Caribbean
Costa Brava
Greek Islands
Islands of the
Mediterranean
Loire
Netherlands, Belgium,
Luxembourg
Rhine
Scandinavia
Turkish Coast
Tuscany
City Guidebooks
Amsterdam
Athens
Bangkok
Berlin
Brussels
Copenhagen
Florence
Frankfurt
Hamburg
Hong Kong
Jerusalem
London
Madrid
Moscow
Munich
New York
Paris
Rome
San Francisco
Singapore
Tokyo
Venice
Vienna
Baedeker also offers a. Rail Guide to Europe/
and a series of maps under the Baedeker name
is distributed in the United States by Gousha.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The Germans are particularly keen enthu-
siasts of Baekeders, and they have conducted
seminars featuring papers by academics and
collectors from several countries (a recent one
included a cruise on the Rhine while reading
aloud appropriate passages from an early
guidebook). The Hinrichsens, in addition to
their excellent history and bibliography, pub-
lish "Reiseleben" (in German only, write for
subscription information). In England Michael
Wild, a dealer in old Baedekers, publishes an
informative newsletter "Baedekeriana" (write
for current subscription information — 21
Nursery Grove, Lincoln, LN2 IRS). Another
Englishman, L. Lawrence Boyle, a professor
of physics at the University of Kent, has
written extensively on Baedekers and is work-
ing on a book that promises to be a major
contribution.
In the United States, Herbert Warren
Wind's article in the New Yorker is the best
written and most carefully researched of the
numerous magazine articles that have ap-
peared over the years.
This bibliography is not comprehensive,
due to the vastness, and in some cases, super-
ficial natureof the literature. Many slicktravel
pieces have been based on the series, or other-
wise make use of it, but these are often deriva-
tive. Yet there are substantial writings, and
there will be more as appreciation of the series
continues to grow. Listed here are some of the
best writings, and in some cases the represen-
tative and more unusual writings, that have
been published in English (with the exception
of the Hinrichsen work).
Ayrton, Michael. "The Traveler Incognito." Harp-
ers Bazaar (June, 1959): 92+.
"Baedeker and the Modern World." The Bookman
XVII (July, 1903): 495-97.
Constable, W. G. "Three Stars for Baedeker." Harp-
ers 206 (April, 1953): 76-83.
Dunbar, Gary S. "The Way It Was Done in Leipzig:
ACommentonBaedeker'sFirst Century." Land-
scape 19 (May, 1975): 11-13.
"Enlisting Baedeker in the Army." Literary Digest
58 (June, 1918): 31.
Gebhard, Bruno. "The Doctor Travels with Karl
Baedeker." Bulletin of the New York Academy
of Medicine 46 (June, 1970): 469-78.
Hinrichsen, Alex VS. An Account of the History of the
Firm of Baedeker. Translated into English by
Michael Wild (photocopied typescript, 1988).
. Baedeker-Katalog; verzeiehnis aller
Baedeker-Reisefuhrer von 1832-1987.
HSSipK*^
8 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
! I
Holzminden, West Germany; UrsulaHinrichsen
Vertag, 1988.
Holroyd, James Edward. "Baedeker and Baker
Street." Cornhill Magazine 173 (Winter, 1962-
63): 139-45.
Knoles, George Harmon. "Baedeker's United States. "
Pacific Historical Review XiII (March, 1 944):
1-9.
Mendelson, Edward. "Baedeker's Universe." Yale
Review 74 (Spring, 1985); 386-403.
Muirhead, James f .America, the Land of Contrasts;
a Briton 's View of His American Kin, New
York: JohnLane, 1911. Chapter XII, 2 19-7 2, is
titled "Baedekeriana."
— . "Baedeker in the Making." AtlanticMonthly
91 (May, 1906): 648-60.
. "The House of Baedeker." Outlook 83
(May, 1906): 224-30.
Otness, Harold M. "Baedeker's One-Star American
Libraries." Journal of library History, Phi-
losophy and Comparative Librarianship XXI
(Summer, 1977): 222-34.
. Index to Nineteenth Century City Plans
Appearing in Guidebooks. Santa Cruz, CA:
Western Association of Map Libraries, 1980.
. Index to Twentieth Century City Plans Ap-
pearing in Guidebooks, Santa Cruz, CA: West-
ern Association of Map Libraries, 1978.
Smiles, Samuel. Memoirs and Correspondence of
the Late John Murray, With an Account of the
Origin and Progress of the House, 1 768-1843.
London: John Murray, 1891. Chapter V, 459-
83, is titled "Murray's Handbooks."
Wallace, Irving. TheSaturday Gentleman. New York:
Simon & Schuster, 1965. Chapters, l83-200,is
titled "Tourist Bible."
Wind, Herbert Warren. "The House of Baedeker."
New Yorker 51 (September 22, 1975): 42+.
NOTES
' These kinds of anecdotes appear in many sources. The
most reliable source for this one, and several others
which follow, is Herbert Warren Wind, "The House
of Baedeker," New Yorker 51 (22 September 1975):
42+.
1 Ibid., 49.
3 Samuel Smiles, Memoirs and Correspondence of the
Late John Murray, with an Account of the Origin
and Progress of the House, 1768-1843 (London:
John Murray, 1891).
4 Wind, 49.
5 Evelyn Waugh.Xaie/i-, aMediterraneanJournalQjon.-
don: Duckworth, 1930), 56.
6 Theodore Dreiser, A Traveler at Forty (New York:
Century, 1914), 307.
7 Wind, 49.
8 Aldous Huxley, Jesting Pilate; Notes and Essays of a
Tourist (New York: Duran, 1926), 37.
9 Mark Twain, A Tramp Abroad (New York: Gabriel
Wells, 1923), 127.
10 Baedeker 'sHandbook(s) for Travelers: The Complete
Collection of 266 Editions Published in English
Prior to World War II: (Bethesda, MD: University
Publications of America, 1975.)
11 Alex W. Hinrichsen, An Account of the History of the
Firm of Baedeker. Translated into English by
Michael Wild (processed, 1988).
''fltilifclil
"The Most Fam
Bartlett's Ft
is Book of Its Kind":
amiliar Quotations
Kerry L. Cochrane
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
John Bartlett, editor, publisher, and lexicogra-
pher, was born in Plymouth, Massachusetts, on
June 1 4, 1 820. He gave early evidence of a love
for reading: he was able to read a Bible verse
to his mother at the age of three; by nine he had
read the entire Bible aloud. He left the Ply-
mouth public school at 1 6 to become a clerk in
the University Book Store in Cambridge. This
bookstore, where the early works of Longfellow
and Lowell had been published, faced the
campus of Harvard College. Although em-
ployment signaled the end of his formal educa-
tion, the acquaintance with books and Harvard
professors which the bookstore made possible
was the equivalent of a university education for
Bartlett. His self-acquired erudition earned
him the respect of the literary community, and
Bartlett made the University Book Store a
cultural meeting place for faculty and students
who loved books. By 1849, at the age of 29,
Bartlett had become the proprietor of the Uni-
versity Book Store, which he managed for ten
more years. In 1851 he married Hannah
Staniford Willard, daughter of the Harvard
professor of Hebrew and granddaughter of
Harvard's thirteenth president.
Bartlett became a publisher of scholarly
works, including Harvard textbooks of classi-
cal languages and authors such as Thoreau and
Emerson. His regular customers were allowed
access to the back room, where they could
discuss their reading, and Bartlett indulgently
permitted college students to take books away
and pay when they could, His voracious read-
ing and near-total recall so impressed his liter-
ary friends that it was soon standard practice to
"ask John Bartlett 1 ' when the provenance of a
quotation was in doubt. Such requests became
so frequent that Bartlett began noting in a
commonplace book memorable passages and
literary quotations from his wide reading. The
references in this notebook, arranged chrono-
logically and listing the sources, would be-
come the basis for the first Collection of Famil-
iar Quotations.
The Early Editions
With the help of Harvard student Henry
W. Haynes, Bartlett compiled and published
the Collection of Familiar Quotations in 1855
as a service to his friends . Bartlett published the
first three editions of his work himself from the
University Book Store, and then in 1863 he
joined the Boston publishing firm of Little,
Brown & Co., which published the fourth
edition of Familiar Quotations that same year.
He edited his book through six more editions,
all of which bear the imprint of Little, Brown &
Co., and eventually became senior partner of
the firm. In recognition of his work, Harvard in
1 871 awarded Bartlett an honorary Master of
Arts degree. He was made a fellow of the
Academy of Arts and Sciences, and held hon-
orary membership in Phi Beta Kappa. Bartlett
retired from Little, Brown in 1889 to write his
Complete Concordance to Shakespeare 's Dra-
matic Works and Plays, which appeared in
ytsss*
10 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
1894. He died 1 1 years later at the age of 85.
According to Nathan Haskell Dole, editor of
the tenth edition ( 1 9 1 4), the first nine editions
of Familiar Quotations had sold 300,000 cop-
ies before Bartlett's death.
In the preface to the first edition, Bartlett
modestly mentioned that although the work
was not originally intended for publication, if
it were to be favorably received "endeavors
will be made to make it more worthy of the
approbation of the public in a future edition." 1
The public's approbation was immediate. The
1 ,000 copies of the first edition sold out within
three months, Harvard Magazine described
Bartlett' s work this way:
The book, like a good rule, works both ways;
it not only gives every facility for the detec-
tion of careless copyists, but it also enables
one to sprinkle his conversation, his writing,
and his public speaking, with the choicest
selections from the best authors, — the very
nutmeg of the English language. ... It is a
boon, an absolute boon, to lawyers, newspa-
per editors, politicians, literary people, draw-
ing-room belles, young gentlemen of limited
conversational powers, and, above all, for
students. 2
The second edition, appearing in 1856,
and 63 pages longer, was just as popular.
Familiar Quotations increased in size with
each subsequent edition: the third edition
(1858) was 446 pages long, almost twice the
size of the first; the fourth edition (1863) was
480 pages long, the fifth (1868) and sixth
(1874) each had 778 pages. The ninth edition
(1891), the final one compiled by Bartlett,
contained 1,158 pages.
The work has continued to attract praise
over the years and is considered a basic refer-
ence source. Eugene Sheehy calls Familiar
Quotations "one of the best books of quota-
tions with a long history"; it has also been
called "the most famous American book of its
kind, and in many respects the best." 3 Ameri-
can Reference Books Annual said of Familiar
Quotations', "A fairly common definition of a
'reference book' is a book that is 'consulted,
but not read,' But one always has to hasten to
add that many kinds of reference books are
read, at least by certain kinds of people. Dic-
tionaries of quotations are perhaps the best
example, and Bartlett continues to be the best
of such dictionaries." 4 In a review of the
eleventh edition the Christian Science Moni-
tor called Familiar Quotations an institution,
saying, "What the Cambridge History of Lit-
erature is to English and American letters,
Webster to the American language, the
Britannica to encyclopedias in English, Bartlett
is to English quotations This is, of course,
primarily a reference book, but it is also a
fascinating anthology of memorabilia. It is an
ideal book for the bedside table, the waiting
room, for random moments when you haven't
time to settle down to a real read. It's an
admirable book in which to browse." 5
Significant Features
Two features contribute to the "readabil-
ity" of Familiar Quotations: its chronological
arrangement, and its thorough cross-referenc-
ing. The chronological arrangement provides
a sense of historical context and of the pro-
gression of an author's thought over time
which is not present in works arranged the-
matically or alphabetically. Authors are ar-
ranged in birth date order; quotations within
each author are chronological by date of pub-
lication. The author index at the beginning
provides birth and death dates as well as the
page number of each author's first citation.
The extensive footnotes allow the reader to
follow the evolution of an idea through the
writings of several authors, or trace how dif-
ferent ages and cultures have employed simi-
lar sayings. Footnotes can also give informa-
tion about a quote such as identifying its
translator and the version in the original lan-
guage, if appropriate, and any cross-refer-
ences. The exhaustive keyword index lists
short forms of each phrase being indexed,
with page references.
The purpose of Familiar Quotations was,
according to Bartlett's preface, "to show, to
some extent, the obligations our language
BAKLETT'S FAMILIAR QUOTATIONS 1 1
owes to various authors for numerous phrases
and familiar quotations which have become
'household words.'" 6 More than just a refer-
ence source, Familiar Quotations is a living
document which records the development of
American literary taste over more than 125
years. In the first edition, more than one third
of the quotations were drawn from the Bible
and Shakespeare, with the balance of the book
comprised mainly of citations to English poets
such as Byron, Milton, and Wordsworth. In
1855 these were the primary cultural refer-
ences of the educated American. This stock of
common culture — what Americans consid-
ered "familiar" — has widened with every edi-
tion of Familiar Quotations. Through the first
ten editions the guiding principle for selection
remained the same: the book included only
those words which the general reader could
recognize as familiar. With the eleventh edi-
tion, under the editorship of Christopher
Morley, Familiar Quotations departed from
this principle. Morley was the first editor to
make a conscious effort to include what he
thought was worthy of becoming familiar:
references to contemporary literature and, in
the twelfth edition, to contemporary politics.
This is the model that has been followed to the
present day.
Bartlett edited the first nine editions of
Familiar Quotations essentially by adding to
his original work new quotations he consid-
ered worthy of inclusion. One reviewer re-
marked, "The well-known taste which has
from the first presided over the formation of
this incomparable collection, and the genu-
inely familiar character of the quotations that
have found admission to its pages, make this
book the surest of guides, if not to the popular-
ity, at least to the comparative quotability, of
the great authors of our language." 7 Refer-
ences to XheBible, theBookofCommonPrayer,
and Shakespeare accounted for only one-fifth
of the ninth edition, because so many new
sources had been added. Authors quoted for
the first time included Matthew Arnold,
Epictetus, Marcus Aurelius, and both the El-
der and the Younger Pliny. Not yet repre-
sented, however, were Rossetti, Swinburne,
Mark Twain, Hawthorne, Melville, Emily
Dickinson, Thoreau, and Walt Whitman. One
of the most significant enhancements intro-
duced in the ninth edition was the systematic
inclusion of translated quotations both from
ancient authors and from early modern writers
such as Rabelais, Montaigne, and Cervantes.
The translations had comprised only 8 pages
of the eighth edition, but made up 120 of the
ninth, Bartlett also greatly increased the amount
of parallel references given in footnotes and in
the appendix.
Newer Editions, New Editors
Bartlett seems to have intended the ninth
edition to be the last, since he began the
prefaceby saying, "The small thin volume, the
first to bear the title of this collection, after
passing through eight editions, each enlarged,
now culminates in its ninth, — and with it,
closes its tentative life." 8 But 1914 saw the
publication of a tenth edition, edited by the
poet and translator Nathan Haskell Dole, which
was six times the size of the original. In all its
years of publication, Familiar Quotations had
been enlarged but never revised. Dole left the
bulk of Bartlett's original work intact, stating
as his purpose "to incorporate in the work
quotations from those writers whose place in
literature has been achieved since the issue of
the ninth edition in 1891." 9 He attempted to
apply Bartlett's requirement that a quotation
be "distinctly worthy of perpetuation," claim-
ing that "ephemeral quotations will not be
found included in its pages." 10 Noteworthy
among newly elected authors were Nietzsche,
Shaw, George Eliot, Lewis Carroll, Hardy,
Swinburne, and Kipling. Blake, Hawthorne,
Melville, James, and Emily Dickinson were
still not recognized.
The eleventh edition, published in 1937,
was edited by the writer and poet Christopher
Morley in collaboration with associate editor
Louella D. Everett, a quotation-finder for the
?S&
^J8SS^S^^^feSM§l*l^^fe^4sSi?-.§
12 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
"Queries and Answers" department of the
New York Times Book Review. Under
Morley's editorship Familiar Quotations en-
tered a new era. In revising the tenth edition,
Dole had simply brought the book up to date,
while attempting to judge new quotations as
its original compiler might have done. The
new editors, however, not only added quota-
tions from authors who had become famous
since 1914, but examined the rest of the book
as well, inserting quotations in every histori-
cal period. Morley also was the first to delete
entries which had proven less memorable than
originally thought; this became standard prac-
tice in subsequent editions.
In the most important departure from pre-
cedent, the editors no longer adhered to
Bartlett's requirement that quotations "have
the seal of popular approval." According to
Morley, "We have tried to make literary power
the criterion, rather than the width and vulgar-
ity of fame." 1 ' This interpretation of his mis-
sion as editor allowed Morley to add the
broadest range of contemporary writers ever
seen in Bartlett's. He included references to
Auden, Pound, Langston Hughes, Bertrand
Russell, Sinclair Lewis, T.S. Eliot, and Willa
Cather, and finally cited Blake, Hawthorne,
Melville, and Emily Dickinson, As the Chris-
tian Science Monitor review of this edition
stated, "They're all here: poets, novelists,
essayists, college presidents, columnists and
critics, kings and dictators, and all the editors
of the Saturday Review. " n Morley was the
first editor of Familiar Quotations to impose
his own vision on the work. Under Morley 's
editorship Bartlett's began to anticipate an
author's fame rather than merely reaffirm it.
As Morley said in the preface, one of the
pleasures of this cooperative effort was that
"one collaborator, by long experience with
inquiries for the affable familiar ghosts of
print, knows acutely what readers want; and
the other believes himself to know what they
ought to want." 1J The size of the book re-
flected this new spirit of inclusiveness. Even
after its pruning, the eleventh edition contains
some 20,000 quotations, nearly double the
number in the previous edition.
Since the tenth and the eleventh editions
had each appeared 23 years after their respec-
tive predecessors, Morley predicted that his
1937 revision should last until 1960. But the
upheavals of the war years made him recon-
sider this remark as early as 1 940. "Man in his
Penultimate War was saying words that had to
be recorded," 14 Morley wrote. He and Everett
had been noting possible inclusions through-
out the Second World War, and in 1948 they
produced a twelfth edition which reflected the
advent of the atomic age. Sir Winston
Churchill, unrepresented in the 1937 edition,
was given 60 entries. By comparison, Bartlett
had not felt a similar inclination to add Lincoln
to the fifth edition, published three years after
his assassination. Again,Morley includedmuch
of this new material because he considered it
important, not because it was necessarily fa-
miliar. This edition included words made fa-
mous by recent events, such as Einstein's
statement that the use of the atom bomb
"brought into the world the most revolution-
ary force since man's discovery of fire." It
also contained passages which had become
significant by hindsight, such as a prescient
reference to atomic weapons from H. G.
Wells's The World Set Free, written over 30
years before Hiroshima: "The catastrophe of
the atomic bombs which shook men out of
cities and businesses and economic relations,
shook them also out of their old-established
habits of thought, and out of the lightly held
beliefs and prejudices that came down to them
from the past."
The editors and publishers all agreed that
this revision should have as its aim not the
complete reworking of the book but simply the
addition of new material. The twelfth edition
is therefore identical with the eleventh through
the entries on Kipling (page 787), after which
it is entirely new.
Little, Brown & Co . decided to reexamine
the entire text of Familiar Quotations for a
centennial edition, published in 1955. While
BARLETT'S FAMILIAR QUOTATIONS 1 3
the previous two editions had bome the stamp
of Morley 's personality and literary taste, this
one was virtually edited by committee. Emily
Morison Beck, who would become the editor
of the fourteenth and fifteenth editions, was
hired to organize the deletions andadditions to
the centennial edition, and a former assistant
in the Harvard English department, Jack
Rackliffe, became copy editor. According to
Beck, Rackliffe was able to rectify omissions
from English literature from Shakespeare
through Yeats. As she puts it, "the editing of
the centennial edition was turned upside down,
with the fellow on the bottom emerging as the
true savant and arbiter, with me, the tyro who
was cutting her teeth on quotations, in the
middle, and with the casual, uncritical editors
at the top." 15
The thirteenth edition contained a variety
of songs, ballads, nursery rhymes, and prov-
erbs, reflecting the taste for the folkloric preva-
lent at the time. In addition, there were a
number of stylistic changes. Pages were di-
vided into two columns and running heads
were added to the index pages. Ancient and
non-English authors who had formerly been
in a separate section in the back of the book
were incorporated into the main body of the
text, arranged chronologically and dated when-
ever possible. The New York Times review of
this edition noted an indication of significant
change in American taste: "One thing is cer-
tain: in the last hundred years our general fund
of quotation has both changed direction (away
from the stuffy toward the trivial, gay and
light-hearted) and increased in size." 16 This
edition increased the amount of space given to
Shakespeare, and the section of Biblical refer-
ences increased by 1 9 pages over the previous
edition, although such references now com-
prised only one-ninth of the book.
At the request of Little, Brown & Co.,
Emily Morison Beck agreed to edit the four-
teenth edition of Familiar Quotations, which
was published in 1968. She accepted on con-
dition that she be allowed to hire a staff of
scholars and experts in various fields to help
her select quotes. Beck saw the fourteenth
edition as one informed by the social upheav-
als of the late 1950s and early 1960s, which
had given us new terms like the beat genera-
tion, brinkmanship, the multiversity, and cy-
bernetics. For this edition she also reexamined
the classical quotations whose translations
dated from the nineteenth century and were
considered outdated. Homer appears in direct
translation for the first time, rather than in
Pope's verse. Zeph Stewart, professor of
Greek and Latin at Harvard, produced new
translations of classical authors for the four-
teenth edition, and in passing corrected the
omission of "Man is the measure of all things"
from Protagoras. A broadening of interest in
Eastern cultures was reflected in the insertion
of quotes from Confucius, Gandhi, and Lao-
tzu.
This edition was also the first to be in-
dexed by computer. Computerized cross-in-
dexing greatly improved access to the 20,421
quotes, and also cut production time dramati-
cally. Indexes to early editions of Familiar
Quotations had been alphabetized by hand,
which took 20 people about six months; the
computerized alphabetizing of the fourteenth
edition took about three hours.
Little, Brown & Co. published the fif-
teenth and current edition, also editedby Beck,
in 1980, Essentially an updating of the previ-
ous edition, it includes over 400 new authors
(both contemporary and historical), expands
coverage of the Koran as well as ancient
Buddhist texts, and carries fresh translations
of non-English works. Beck again compiled
the work with the help of a staff of subject
specialists in various areas, and the experts
acknowledged in the preface represent such
timely fields as ecology, the environment, and
Latin American literature. Beck includedmore
quotations produced by women and minori-
ties or inspired by social movements, and she
also introduced more popular culture into
Familiar Quotations than ithad ever seen, The
fifteenth is the first edition to contain the
words of rock musicians, and the only one to
vySw&L «. -*— jl .A
14 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
carry a quote from a cartoonist, the popular
"Keep on truckin* " by Robert Crumb, creator
of Mr. Natural and Fritz the Cat. There are
lines from songs by Bob Dylan ("For the times
they are a-changin'"), Simon and Garfunkel
("Here's to you, Mrs. Robinson"), Mick Jagger
("Well s we all need someone we can lean on") ,
and Janis Joplin ("Lord, won't you buy me a
Mercedes-Benz"), Theplay ii/airis quoted, as
are My Fair Lady, Camelot, and West Side
Story, Paddy Chaye vsky is represented by one
line from the screenplay to Network* ("I'm
mad as hell and I'm not going to take it
anymore"). In the preface Beck says, "Time
willjudge the validity ofthe fifteenth edition's
choices from contemporary life and litera-
ture." 17 Some critics have objected to this
seeming bid for "relevance" at the expense of
actual literary or cultural merit, questioning
the enduring value of such quotes as Helen
Reddy's "I am strong, I am invincible, I am
woman." As one reviewer put it, "Reading the
recent entries in this edition is like reading the
10th anniversary issue of Rolling Stone , 18 Beck
maintained that the best way to gather quota-
tions is to list important people who are
unrepresented or underrepresented in the work,
and then to cull their works for good lines.
Others have criticized Beck's editions of Fa-
miliar Quotations for avoiding topics which
seemharsh, cynical, or unpleasant. According
to one critic, the book
emerges as a one-sided chronicle, conspicu-
ously void of We Dare Not Speak Its Names.
The expanded coverage of the environment,
for example, includes no mention of nuclear
power, and the references to nuclear warfare
have a certain A-bomb archaism. Cancer
doesn'tappear evenas a metaphor in a volume
that purports to represent modem science. .. .
Bartlett's creates the impression, by quoting
exclusively from The Colossus ofMaroussi,
that Henry Miller is a travel writer. 1 *
The Future
Justin Kaplan, who is currently preparing
the sixteenth edition of Familiar Quotations
for publication in 1992, plans to rectify this
impression. Kaplan's view of what Familiar
Quotations should include is the most acces-
sible yet: "Generally, it should be useful,
timely and entertaining. Useful as a reference
book, timely as a guide to a lot of current
usage — even if ephemeral, but so is every-
thing else — and it ought to be fun to read." 20 A
Pulitzer Prize-winning biographer of Whit-
man, Twain, and Lincoln Steffens, Kaplan
intends to remove what he considers its New
England stuffiness. He sees evidence for this
in the book's neglect of Shakespeare's com-
edies in favor ofthe tragedies, and its focus on
the more uplifting pronouncements of politi-
cians. His revision will contain more refer-
ences to the comedies, and remarks like
Tammany Hall politician George Washington
Plunkitt's, "I seen my opportunities and I took
'em." In order to add some 3,000 new quotes
while keeping the book approximately at its
current size, Kaplan is deleting what he calls
"Harvard-derived allusions, outworn senti-
ments, and excerpts from commencement
speeches." He is trimming the amount of
space given to contemporary poetry in re-
sponse to the criticism that it is overrepresented
in the fifteenth edition. His edition will reflect
a broader cultural base by including more
quotes from world literature and international
figures. Kaplan also wants to include more
phrases which have become part of our every-
day speech, from Henny Youngman's "Take
my wife . . . please" to the fast-food advertis-
ing slogan "Where's the beef?" The new
edition will contain more song lyrics and lines
from movies, but Kaplan found that neither
television nor contemporary politics has pro-
duced much in the way of memorable quotes.
For example, Ronald Reagan's entries in the
new Fam iliar Quotations will not be due to his
oratory but to his own quotations of movie
lines such as "Win one for the Gipper" and
"Make my day."
On the university lecture circuit, Kaplan
says, audiences typically do not recognize the
occasional Biblical or Shakespearean quota-
tion. The technology of mass communication
provides a constant flow of ephemeral "famil-
BARLETT'S FAMILIAR QUOTATIONS 15
iar" references, while the numbers of Ameri-
cans for whom Shakespeare's words are truly
familiar seems to be decreasing. One of the
difficulties he faced was balancing quotes
from the masterpieces of the English language
with the popular references of the day. "For
Bartlett 's to he useful," Kaplan says, "it has to
reflect the fact that a great deal of current
discourse is popular language — from movies,
television, sports. Yet one of the essential
elements of 'Bartlett 's is to act as a sort of home
concordance andtoretain themajor sources of
our language, such as the Romantic poets." 21
According to Kaplan, quotations can rein-
force a sense of community or; they can ex-
clude; they enrich discourse; and they are
powerful means of communicating.
Now, Familiar Quotations continues to
be a printed information source. However,
future editions of this classic might be pro-
duced in CD-ROM or hypermedia format,
allowing for still more complete indexing and
faster access to quotations. A hypertext Fa-
miliar Quotations could include all editions of
the work with their various prefaces, digitized
graphics for images of persons who have been
the sources of quotations, and even audible
examples of the music that has provided quot-
able references. From its private first printing
to its present status as the standard American
quotation source, Familiar Quotations has
recorded the shared culture of our world
throughout the upheavals of 135 years. We
can only hope this "most famous book of its
kind" will continue to be with us as long as a
common heritage is valued.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Bartlett, John. A Collection of Familiar Quotations,
with Complete Indices of Authors and Subjects.
Cambridge, MA: John Bartlett, 1855. 295p.
Bartlett, John. A Collection of Familiar Quotations,
with Complete Indices of Authors and Subjects.
New ed. Cambridge, MA: John Bartlett, 1856.
358p.
Bartlett, John. .,4 Collection of Familiar Quotations
with Complete Indices of Authors and Subjects.
3rded. with supplement. Cambridge, MA: John
Bartlett, 1858. 446p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations; Being an At-
tempt to Trace to their Source, Passages and
Phrases in Common Use. 4th ed. Boston: Little,
Brown & Co., 1863. 480p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations; Being an At-
tempt to Trace to their Source Passages and
Phrases in Common Use. 5th ed. Boston: Little,
Brown and Company, 1868. 778p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations; Being an At-
tempt to Trace to their Source, Passages and
Phrases in Common Use. 6th ed. Boston: Little,
Brown, 1872. 778p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: Being an At-
tempt to Trace to their Source, Passages and
Phrases in Common Use. 7th ed. Boston: Little,
Brown & Co., 1875. 864p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations; Being an At-
tempt to Trace to their Sources Passages and
Phrases in Common Use. 8th ed, Boston: Little,
Brown and Company, 1882. 904p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 9th ed. Boston: Little, Brown and Com-
pany, 1891. l,158p.
Bartlett, John, Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 10th ed. revised and enlarged by Nathan
Haskell Dole. Boston: Little, Brown and Com-
pany, 1914. l,454p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations; A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 1 1th ed., revised and enlarged, edited by
Christopher Morley, and Louella D. Everett,
associate editor. Boston: Little, Brown and Com-
pany, 1937. l,578p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 12th ed., revised and enlarged, edited by
Christopher Morley, and Louella D. Everett,
associate editor. Boston: Little, Brown, 1948.
l,831p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 13th and centennial ed., completely rev.
Boston: Little, Brown, 1955. 1,6l4p.
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modern Litera-
ture. 14th ed., edited by Emily Morison Beck.
Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1968. l,750p.
16 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Bartlett, John. Familiar Quotations: A Collection of
Passages, Phrases, and Proverbs Traced to
their Sources in Ancient and Modem Litera-
ture. 15 th and 125th anniversary ed., edited
by Emily Morison Beck. Boston: Little,
Brown & Co., 1980. l,540p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Although Bartlett's work has received many-
reviews over the years, most of them are brief and
limited to comparison between new editions and
their predecessors. The items listed below, have
been chosen because they offer the reader more
than the typical book review. Some of these are
especially useful for historical or editorial back-
ground. Both Marshall and Reynolds provide bio-
graphical informationon JohnBartlett and discuss
the history of his book. These two articles are
invaluable sources of information on the develop-
ment of Familiar Quotations. For contrasting be-
hind-the-scenes views of the work, compare
McWhorter' s irreverent analysis of Familiar Quo-
tations editorial practices to the article by Beck, its
former editor.
Anderson, Melville B. "TheNew 'Bartlett's Quotations.'"
Dial 12 (December, 1991): 268-78.
Atlas, James. "A NewBartlett's Quotations, Familiar and
Otherwise." New York Times Book Review (March
29,1981): 9.
Beck, Emily Morison. "The Long, Happy Life of
'Bartlett's Familiar Quotations.'" American Heri-
tage 35 (August-September, 1984): 102-07.
"The Booklist Interview: Justin Kaplan on Bartlett's
Familiar Quotations," Booklists (February 1, 1991):
1152-53.
Goldberg, Isaac. "Who Said It?" Saturday
Review 17 (December 4, 1937): 9-10.
"Ideas." Newsweek (March 12, 1990): 75-76.
Marshall, John David. "John Bartlett and His
Quotation Book, 1855-1955." Wilson Li-
brary Bulletin 30 (November, 1955): 250-
52.
McWhorter, Diane. "Bartlett's Hall of Fame."
Harper's (May, 1981): 75-78.
Mitgang, Herbert. "A Bartlett's of Henny
Youngman as Well as Shakespeare and
Frost." New York Times Book Review
(November 21, 1988): 15.
Review of Collection of Familiar Quotations,
by John Bartlett. Harvard Magazine 6
(1855): 293-94.
Review of Familiar Quo tat ions \ 5th ed., by John
Bartlett. North American Review 109 (July,
1869): 293-98.
Review of Familiar Quotations, 9th ed., by John
Bartlett. Writer 7 (1894): 90-92.
Review of Familiar Quotations, 1 1th ed., edited
by Christopher Morley. Christian Science
Monitor (January 5, 1938): 1 1.
Review of Familiar Quotations, 15th ed., edited
by Emily Morison Beck. Choice 1 8 (Janu-
ary, 1981): 631.
Reynolds, Horace. "A Name as Familiar as
One's Own." New York Times Book Re-
view (November 13, 1955): 1.
NOTES
'Facsimile of preface to first edition, Familiar Quotations,
12th ed., rev. by Christopher Morley and Louella D.
Everett (Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1948), ix.
2 Review of Collection of Familiar Quotations, by John
Bartlett, 1855, Harvard Magazine 6 (1855): 294.
3 Eugene P. Sheehy, Guide to Reference Booh, 10th ed.
(Chicago and London: American Library Association
1986), 417-18; Literary World 1 5 (29 November 1 884):
418.
4 D. Bernard Theall, review of Familiar Quotations, 15th ed.,
ed. by Emily Morison Beck, American Reference Books
Annual 13 (1982): 69.
5 Review of Familiar Quotations, \ 1 th ed., ed. by Christopher
Morley and Louella D. Everett, 1 93 7, Christian Science
Monitor (5 January 1938): 11.
facsimile of preface to first edition, Familiar Quotations,
12th ed., ix.
7 Melville B. Anderson, "The New 'Bartlett's Famil-
iar Quotations,'" Dial 12 (December 1991):
269-70.
8 "Preface to the Ninth Edition," in Familiar Quota-
tions, 9th ed., by John Bartlett (Boston: Little,
Brown & Co., 1891).
9 "Preface to the Tenth Edition," in Familiar Quota-
tions, 10th ed., ed. by Nathan Haskell Dole
(Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1914).
10 Ibid.
11 "Preface to the Eleventh Edition," in Familiar
Quotations, I lthed.,ed.byChristopherMorley
and Louella D. Everett (Boston: Little, Brown
& Co., 1937).
12 Review of Familiar Quotations, 1 1th ed., Chris-
tian Science Monitor (5 January 1938): 11.
13 "Preface to the Eleventh Edition."
jj^r 1 "*£H
BARLETT'S FAMILIAR QUOTATIONS 17
""'Preface to the Twelfth Edition," in Familiar Quota-
tions, 12th ed., ed. by Christopher Morley and
Louella D. Everett (Boston: Little, Brown & Co.,
1948).
15 Emily Morison Beck, "The Long, Happy Life of
'Bartlett's Familiar Quotations,"' American Heri-
tage 35 (August-September 1984): 102.
,6 Horace Reynolds, "A Name as Familiaras One's Own,"
New York Times BoolcMeview ( 1 3 November 1 95 5 ) :
L
""Preface to the Fifteenth Edition," in Familiar Quota-
tions, 15thed.,ed. by Emily MorisonBeck(Boston:
Little, Brown & Co., 1980).
18 James Atlas, "A New Bartlett's Quotations, Familiar
and Otherwise," New York Times Book Review (29
March 1981): 9.
I9 DianeMcWhorter, "Bartlett'sHall of Fame," Harper's
262 (May 1981): 76, 78.
20 HerbertMitgang, "A Bartlett's of Henny Youngmanas
Well as Shakespeare and Frost," JVew York Times
Book Review (21 November 1 988): 20.
21 Ibid.
Black's Law Dictionary: Ninety-Nine
Years, 1891-1990
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
A brief history of the English and American
predecessors to Black 's Law Dictionary pro-
vides insight to some of the characteristics of
early law dictionaries and the tradition from
v/hichBlack's evolved. English law dictionar-
ies date back to sixteenth-century England
when John Rastell, brother-in-law of Sir Tho-
mas More, authored the Expositiones
terminarum legum Anglorum (1527). This
compilation included only 208 entries chosen
and designed to explain obscure terms to stu-
dents of law. The entries were mostly in Latin
and the text was almost exclusively French. 1
An expanded version of Rastell's work, known
as Terms de la ley, was later published in
parallel French and English columns.
Early English-Language
Antecedents
In 1607 John Cowell published the first
edition of The Interpreter, Like Rastell's work,
the title was designed for those learning about
the law, but there the similarities ended. Rastell
was a practicing lawyer, whereas Cowell was
a former professor of civil law at Cambridge.
Cowell wrote his dictionary in English and
included not only "obscure" words but almost
"all" law words thatneeded explanation. 2 The
Znterprefer was a larger volume than Rastell's
and a more scholarly one, and it included lay
terms such as "fish," "spices," and "furres." 3
According to Cowell, entries not related to the
Pamela S. Bradigan
art of the law were included so that lawyers
would not be ignorant of such things as beasts
or fowls.
In 1670 Thomas Blount, the author of a
general English dictionary, issued the one-
volume Nomo-Lexikon. As an antiquarian,
Blount enjoyed oddities of the English legal
past and included them in the Nomo-Lexikon.
An example of this was his inclusion of an
entry on "doitkin," defined as a coin of small
value prohibited since 1416, and the source of
the phrase, "not worth a doitkin." 4
Giles Jacob's New Law Dictionary, pub-
lished in 1729, was an important representa-
tive of its time. This huge tome was intended
to serve as a substitute for a legal education. It
included legal forms and reflected the decline
of sophisticated schools for barristers, the
expense of law books, and the increasing
number of attorneys without formal educa-
tion. Jacob's work, paralleling a phenomenon
in general language dictionaries, copied from
its predecessors by adding ordinary words to
make a larger and more impressive volume for
the consumers.
English law dictionaries were used in the
United States until 1839, when John Bouvier
published a two-volume American law dictio-
nary entitled^ Law Dictionary Adapted to the
Constitution and Laws of the United States of
America and of Several States of 'the American
Union (Philadelphia: T. and J. W. Johnson).
Bouvier was critical of the English law dictio-
naries because they were outdated and con-
tained entries copied from earlier titles with-
BLACK'S LAW DICTIONARY 19
out much alteration. In his preface Bouvier
noted that most of the matter in English law
dictionaries was written while the feudal law
was in fiill vigor and was not appropriate for
the nineteenth century. Based on these criti-
cisms, Bouvier omitted much from his dictio-
nary that English law dictionaries had in-
cluded.
Like Jacob, Bouvier wrote a work that
also offered a legal education. There was need
for such a work in the early United States;
most lawyers learned about law through an
apprenticeship rather than through formal edu-
cation at a university. Some attorneys just
studied the law on their own. Bouvier' s Law
Dictionary was in use when Black wrote the
first edition of his famous work.
Henry Campbell Black
Henry Campbell Black, a legal scholar,
was born on October 17, 1860, in Ossining,
New York. Black's parents were the Rever-
end John Henry Black and Caroline Campbell
Black. After studying the Greek and Latin
classics, Black entered Trinity College, gradu-
ating in 1880 with an A.B. A member of Phi
Beta Kappa, Black received his A.M. in 1 887
from Trinity College and an honorary degree
of Doctor of Laws in 1916.
In 1883 Black was admitted to the Bar of
Lycoming County, Pennsylvania. He prac-
ticed law in Williamsport, Pennsylvania, and
subsequently moved to St. Paul, Minnesota,
where he continued his law practice. But
Black's true interest was in legal theory, and
that led him to publish his first important book,
An Essay on the Constitutional Prohibitions
Against Legislation Impairing the Obligation
of Contracts, and Against Retroactive and Ex
Post Facto Laws (Boston: Little, Brown, 1 887).
It was accepted by the legal profession as an
authoritative source on the subject.
In 1888 Black moved to Washington,
D.C., where he came in contact with some of
the most prominent members of his profes-
sion, as well as with many others with intellec-
tual interests. In this stimulating environment
Black devoted his time to authorship. He was
most interested in studying the Constitution of
the United States, and he wrote books about
constitutional law as well as other legal topics.
Black also authored articles for law journals
and encyclopedias, and he served as the editor
of The Constitutional Law Review from 1917
until his death in 1927.
In January 1891 Dr. Black published his
first book with West Publishing Company, a
major legal publisher in St. Paul, Minnesota.
Black on Judgments was an immediate suc-
cess, requiring reprints in April 1891, and
again later in the year.
Black's Dictionary
Today, Henry Campbell Black is best
known for his law dictionary, which was first
published by West in 1891 under the title A
Dictionary of Law. Black's one-volume dic-
tionary still is a very important West publica-
tion. The dictionary includes ancient and
modern terms, phrases, and maxims used in
Ameri can and English law. In the first edition's
preface Black stated that for, "the terms ap-
pertaining to old and middle English law and
the feudal polity, recourse has been had freely
to the older English law dictionaries, (such as
those of Cowell, Spelman, Blount, Jacob,
Cunningham, Whishaw, Skene, Tomlins, and
the 'Terms de la Ley,") as also to the writings
of Bracton, Littleton, Coke and other sages of
the early law." s
Black relied upon other dictionaries and
writings of legal scholars for terms from Ro-
man and modem civil law as well as for the
terms and phrases from French, Spanish, and
Scotch law. Modern American and English
law terms were derived from codes, statutes,
reports, legal textbooks, works by legal schol-
ars, and recent English and American dictio-
naries. Quoted material was indented in an
entry and set in smaller type along with the
source of the reference. Black didnotprovide
an exhaustive list of sources consulted in
20 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
compiling the Dictionary; however, he made
acknowledgements in entries when aid was
"directly levied from those sources." 6 Black
also wrote many new definitions, for his stated
aim was "to present a definition at once con-
cise, comprehensive, accurate, and lucid." 7
The first edition, which was intended for
the student and the professional, had two
supplementary sections. One was a list of
older principal law dictionaries and the sec-
ond was a list of British regnal years. The
Dictionary contained no place or personal
name entries, illustrations, or pronunciation
aids, and usually gave no indication of the
parts of speech for an entry. Abbreviations
generally appeared at the beginning of each
alphabetical section. Synonyms and antonyms
were included under the word entries and
important variations in meanings were noted.
For example, the entry on "death" distin-
guished between the meaning of a "natural"
death and a "civil" death. 8 The entry on "debt"
included a five-paragraph section on syn-
onyms. 9
An unsigned review of the first edition
praised it as a "useful book" and criticized it
for including too many words merely because
they had been involved in a decision of a
case. 10 Examples included "dead-head," "fa-
ther," and "female." 11 The critic believed it
superfluous to include words that laity and
lawyers used in exactly the same manner. But
the reviewer praised Black for confining him-
self to definitions and not trying to offer a legal
education by including essays, as Bouvier
had.
In the second edition, published in 1910,
Black wrote about the changes to his work. In
response to demands, Black added a number
of references to cases in which terms or phrases
of the law were judicially defined. Black re-
wrote many definitions because he had re-
ceived "helpful criticism" or because he oth-
erwise saw a need for change. 12 The second
edition also included terms new to the law
which had come into use since the first edition
was published. Black included medical termi-
nology when appropriate and acknowledged
the assistance of Dr. Fielding H. Garrison. A
new supplementary section, a table of abbre-
viations, appeared in the second edition. The
70 page table primarily contained abbrevia-
tions or reference sources cited in the
Dictionary's entries.
Another change in the second edition was
a new system of arrangement which grouped
all compound and descriptive terms under the
respective headings from which they were
derived. The placement of the entry on "straw
bail" was an example of this new arrange-
ment. In the first edition, the entry on "bail"
did not include a description of "straw bail," 33
which appeared instead in a separate entry in
the "S" alphabetical section. 14 In the second
edition, however, the term "straw bail" was
defined within the entry on "bail," and a see
reference under "straw bail" pointed to "bail." 15
This new arrangement was praised by a re-
viewer who also liked the book's physical
appearance and stated that the title was "well
worthy of being pronounced the best Ameri-
can single volume dictionary of the law." 16
The third edition of the Dictionary came
out in 1933, six years after Black's death. In
the preface the publisher briefly explained the
changes in the work. New words were added
and modernized definitions were included,
along with references to updated authorities
supporting new uses of a term. The third
edition was the first to be titled Black's Law
Dictionary.
Criticism of the Dictionary
The reviews of the third edition were
generally very positive; however, Alexander
Hamilton Frey wrote that a random look at
Black's disclosed many lay terms that did not
have any unique legal definition. 17 He listed
"alehouse," "aristocracy," "chain," "double,"
"gentlewoman," and "monogram" as ex-
amples." Frey even suggested that the "pad-
ding" of the Dictionary may have been for a
commercial reason. 18
Typographical changes were made in the
fourth edition in 1951 to accommodate the
SLACK'S LAW DICTIONARY 21
enlarged contents. The type was completely
reset and arranged in wider columns, making
the text more attractive and readable. The
publishers added a five-page guide to the
pronunciation of primarily Latin words and
phrases. As in earlier editions, the Dictionary
included definitions found in the works of
early legal scholars along with new and up-
dated definitions.
In 1968 West published a revised fourth
edition, which included some changed and
updated entries. Several new supplementary
sections were added: the Code of Professional
Responsibility, the Code of Judicial Conduct,
and a table of the minimum requirements for
admission to legal practice in the United States.
The fifth edition, published by West in
1979, was produced on an IBM computer
composition system. 19 This edition's preface
clearly summarized its improvements and
changes, crediting two individuals and the
West editorial staff for the major improve-
ments. Joseph R. Nolan, Associate Justice of
the Massachusetts Supreme Court, was pri-
marily responsible for the 10,000 new or re-
vised entries, and M. J. Connolly, Associate
Professor of Linguistics and Eastern Lan-
guages at Boston College, developed the pro-
nunciation guides for all entries which posed
pronunciation difficulties. The Code of Pro-
fessional Conduct, the Code of Judicial Con-
duct, the five-page guide to pronunciation,
and the table listing the requirements for ad-
mission to legal practice were removed. The
Constitution of the United States, the United
States government organization chart, and a
listing of the U.S. Supreme Court justices and
their terms were included in the appendices.
An abridged fifth edition of Black's con-
taining over 16,000 definitions was published
in 1983. The publisher created this abridged
edition in response to the need for a compact
law dictionary that could be conveniently car-
ried and used away from a library or office.
Also in 1983, the fifth edition of Black's was
first offered online through WESTLAW, a
system of databases produced and made avail-
able by West Publishing. 20 The WESTLAW
Reference Manual explains the general data-
base search techniques and provides search-
ing tips for use with Black's.
The reviews of the fifth edition in the
printed format were generally positive. Rich-
ard Sloane, Law Librarian and Professor of
Law at the University of Pennsylvania Law
School, pointed out the work's notable virtues
and main short-comings, compared 16 spe-
cific entries in Black's to another current law
dictionary, and provided several proposals for
improvement. 21 These proposals included de-
leting a large proportion of Black's ancient
terms and its general or specialized nonlegal
terms. Sloane felt the references to cases were
helpful; however, the date the case was de-
cided needed to be included. He stated that
references made to some cases and treatises
were outdated, and more timely references
could be made. Finally, Sloane suggested
emphasizing new terms and concepts emerg-
ing in expanding branches of the law.
Sloane recognized that a publisher would
hesitate to tamper with success; however, he
felt that a future edition of Black's would
benefit from his ideas. Sloane' s comparative
review identified the Dictionary 's strengths
and weaknesses and, importantly, reaffirmed
its preeminence among American law dictio-
naries.
The Current Edition
In mid- 1990 the sixth edition of Black's
was published. In this new edition the pub-
lisher addressed points raised in Professor
Sloane 's review of the fifth edition. Many
nonlegal terms were deleted and new terms
were added. The work contains more than
5,000 new, revised, or updated words and
terms. The publisher has expanded examples
of word usages, added cross-references to
related terms, and added updated citations. 22
The preface explains that new tax, finance,
and accounting terms have been added due to
the expanding importance of financial termi-
nology. A certified public accountant served
f££C3S ^
22 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
as a contributing author and reviewed the tax
and accounting terms.
The appendices include an expanded table
of abbreviations, the Constitution of the United
States, a time chart of the United States Su-
preme Court, a United States government
organization chart, andatable of British regnal
years. Thepronunciation guides were updated
by the linguistics professor who also contrib-
uted to the fifth edition.
The importance of Black's among law
dictionaries is evident when reviewing cur-
rent bibliographies of legal reference works.
Although there are many specialized and for-
eign-language legal dictionaries, Black's is
the one most often cited as the most desirable
general law dictionary. Legal scholars, prac-
titioners, and students will benefit from the
updated edition of this well known and re-
spected title.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
A Dictionary of Law, Containing Definitions of the
Terms and Phrases of American and English
Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modern; Including
the Principal Terms oflnternational, Constitu-
tional, and Commercial Law; With a Collection
of Legal Maxims and Numerous Select Titles
from the Civil Law and Other Foreign Systems,
by Henry Campbell Black. St. Paul, MN: West
Publishing Co., 1891. l,253p.
A Law Dictionary Containing Definitions of the
Terms and Phrases of American and English
Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modern; And In-
cluding the Principal Terms of International,
Constitutional, Ecclesiastical, and Commer-
cial Law, and Medical Jurisprudence, with a
Collection of Legal Maxims, Numerous Select
Titles from the Roman, Modern Civil, Scotch,
French, Spanish, and Mexican Law, and other
Foreign Systems, and a Table of Abbreviations ,
by Henry Campbell Black. 2nd ed, St. Paul,
MN; West Publishing Co., 1910. 1,3 14p. Spine
title: Black's Law Dictionary.
Black's Law Dictionary Containing Definitions of
the Terms and Phrases of American and En-
glish Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modern, and
Including the Principal Terms oflnternational,
Constitutional, Ecclesiastical and Commercial
Law, and Medical Jurisprudence, with a Col-
lection of Legal Maxims, Numerous Select Titles
from the Roman, Modern Civil, Scotch, French,
Spanish, and Mexican Law, and Other Foreign
Systems, and a Table of Abbreviations, by the
publisher's editorial staff. 3rd ed. St. Paul, MN:
West Publishing Co., 1933. l,944p.
Black's Law Dictionary; Definitions of the Terms
and Phrases of American and English Jurispru-
dence, Ancient and Modern, with Guide to
Pronunciation, by the publisher's editorial staff.
4th ed. St. Paul, MN: West Publishing Co.,
1951. l,882p.
Black's Law Dictionary; Definitions of the Terms
and Phrases of American and English Jurispru-
dence, Ancient and Modern, by the publisher's
editorial staff. Rev. 4th ed. St. Paul, MN: West
Publishing Co., 1968. l,882p.
Black's Law Dictionary; Definitions of the Terms
and Phrases of American and English Jurispru-
dence, Ancient and Modern, by the publisher's
editorial staff, contributing authors Joseph R.
Nolan andM. J. Connolly. 5th ed. St. Paul, MN:
West Publishing Co., 1979. 1,5 lip.
Black's Law Dictionary; Definitions of the Terms
and Phrases of American and English Jurispru-
dence, Ancient and Modern, by the publisher's
editorial staff, contributing authors Joseph R.
Nolan and M.J. Connolly. Abridged 5th ed. St.
Paul, MN: West Publishing Co., 1983. 855p.
Black's Law Dictionary; Definitions of the Terms
and Phrases of American and English Jurispru-
dence, Ancient and Modern, by the publisher's
editorial staff, coauthors Joseph R. Nolan and
Jacqueline M. Nolan-Haley, contributing au-
thors M. J. Connolly, Stephen C. Hicks, and
Martina N. Alibrandi. 6th ed. St. Paul, MN:
West Publishing Co., 1990. 1,657.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Reviews of Black 's Law Dictionary have
generally been short and most biographical
data on Henry Campbell Black are brief. Two
notable exceptions are Richard Sloane's re-
view of the fifth edition in the University of
Toledo Law Review and David Hill's sum-
mary of Dr. Black's life in The Constitutional
Review,
Adams, Oscar Fay. A Dictionary of American Au-
thors. 5th ed., rev. and enl. Boston: Houghton,
Mifflin and Co., 1904.
Alexand er, Arthur A. Review of Black 's Law Dictio-
nary, 3rd ed., by the publisher's editorial staff.
BLACK'S LAW DICTIONARY 23
Georgetown Law Journal 22 (March, 1934):
657-58.
Anderson, William C. "Law Dictionaries." Ameri-
can Law Review 28 (July-August 1894): 531-
46.
Dick, Terry S. WESTLAW Reference Manual Srded.
St. Paul, MN: West Publishing Co., 1989.
Frey, Alexander Hamilton. Review of Black's Law
Dictionary, 3rd ed., by the publisher's editorial
staff. University of Pennsylvania Law Review
82 (June 1934): 886-87.
Hill, David Jayne. "In Memoriam Doctor Henry
Campbell Black." The Constitutional Review
11 (April, 1927): 67-76.
Mellinkoff, David. "The Myth of Precision and the
Law Dictionary." UCLA Law Review 3 1 (De-
cember, 1983): 423-42.
Review of A Dictionary of Law, Containing Defini-
tions of the Terms and Phrases of American and
English Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modern;
Including the Principal Terms oflntemational,
Constitutional, and Commercial Law; With a
Collection of Legal Maxims and Numerous Se-
lect Titles from the Civil Law and Other Foreign
Systems, by Henry Campbell Black. The Nation
53 (December 17, 1891): 469-70.
Review of A Law Dictionary Containing Definitions
of the Terms and Phrases of American and
English Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modem;
And Including the Principal Terms oflntema-
tional, Constitutional, Ecclesiastical, andCom-
mercialLaw, and Medical Jurisprudence, With
a Collection of Legal Maxims, Numerous Select
Titles from the Roman, Modern Civil, Scotch,
French, Spanish, and Mexican Law, and Other
Foreign Systems, and a Table of Abbreviations,
2nd ed., by Henry Campbell Black. The Ameri-
can Political Science Review 5 (May, 1911):
284.
Sloane, Richard. Review of Black's Law Dictionary,
5th ed., by the publisher's editorial staff. Uni-
versity of Toledo Law Review 1 1 (Winter, 1980):
322-30.
"A Symposium of Law Publishers." American Law
Review23 (May- June, 1889): 396-44.
Who Was Who in America. Vol. 1, 1897-1942. Chi-
cago: Marquis Who's Who, 1943.
NOTES
1 David Mellinkoff, "The Myth of Precision and the Law
Dictionary," UCLA Law Review 3 1 (December
1983): 426.
2 Ibid., 427.
3 Ibid., 428.
•'Ibid.
5 Henry Campbell Black, "Preface," in .4 Dictionary of
Law Containing Definitions of the Terms and
Phrases of American and English Jurisprudence,
Ancient and Modern (St. Paul, MN: West Publish-
ing Co., 1891), iv.
'Ibid.
7 Ibid.
'Black, Dictionary of Law, 335.
9 Md., 337.
'"Review of A Dictionary of Law Containing Definitions
of the Terms and Phrases of American and English
Jurisprudence, Ancient and Modern, by Henry
Campbell Black, The Nation 53 (17 December
1891): 470.
"Ibid.
!2 Henry Campbell Black, "Preface," in^ Law Dictionary
Containing Definitions of the Terms and Phrases of
American and English Jurisprudence, Ancient and
Modern; And Including the Principal Terms of
International, Constitutional, Ecclesiastical, and
Commercial Law, and Medical Jurisprudence, with
a Collection of Legal Maxims, Numerous Select
Titles from the Roman, Modern Civil, Scotch, French,
Spanish, and Mexican Law, and Other Foreign
Systems, and a Table of Abbreviations, 2nded. (St.
Paul, MN: West Publishing Co., 1 9 10), iii.
13 Black, Dictionary of Law, 113.
'Hbid., 1127.
"Black, A Law Dictionary, 113,1113.
16 Review of A Law Dictionary, 2nd ed., by Henry
Campbell Black, The American Political Science
Review 5(May 1911): 284.
17 Arthur A. Alexander, review of Black's Law Dictio-
nary, 3rd ed., by the publisher's editorial staff,
Georgetown Law Journal 22 (March 1934): 657-
58; Alexander Hamilton Frey, review of Black's
Law Dictionary, 3rded.,bythepublisher'seditorial
staff, University of Pennsylvania Law Review 82
(June 1934): 886-87; Review of Black's Law Dic-
tionary, 3rd ed., by the publisher's editorial staff,
Harvard Law Review 47 (November 1933): 170.
18 Frey, review of Black's, 886.
19 Kenneth G. Heimbach, Managing Editor, West Pub-
lishing Co., letter to the author, March 30, 1990.
M Ibid.
21 Richard Sloane, review oi Black's Law Dictionary, 5th
ed., by the publisher's editorial staff, University of
Toledo Law Review 1 1 {Winter 1980): 322-30; Dan
Henke, review of Black's Law Dictionary, 5th ed.,
by the publisher's editorial staff, American Bar
Association Journal 65 (September 1979): 1378-
80; Leonard Schulte, "AboutDictionaries/'F/orWa
Bar Journal 56 (February 1982): 153,
n Kenneth G. Heimbach, Managing Editor, West Pub-
lishing Co., letter to the author, 22 May 1990.
An "Alms-Basket" of "Bric-A-Brac":
Brewer's Dictionary of
Phrase and Fable
Charles Bunge
DEVELOPMENT AMD HISTORY
The first edition, of Brewer's Dictionary of
Phrase and Fable was published in the year
that Charles Dickens died. It was as firmly
rooted in and reflective of the literary, intel-
lectual, and social concerns of Victorian En-
gland as were the novels of Dickens, and, like
them, Brewer's Dictionary has entertained
and informed successive generations to the
present day. Both Dickens and Brewer ad-
dressed social problems — in Brewer's case
the need to make the fruits of nineteenth-
century scholarship accessible to aneverwid-
enirtg range of readers — but they were also
willing to respond to the Victorian hunger for
diversion and entertainment, a formula that
has stood them both in good stead for over a
century.
Ebenezer Cobham Brewer was born in
1810 into the family of a Norwich schoolmas-
ter. He worked his way through college at
Trinity Hall, Cambridge, graduating with first-
class honors in 1836. In 1848 he was awarded
the LL.D. He entered the priesthood in 1838,
probably hoping this would be an entree into
a university or scholarly career. However,
after graduating from college, he assisted his
father at the family's boardingschool, becom-
ing its headmaster when his father retired. He
traveled extensively on the Continent and
lived for a while in Paris. He read very widely
and had excellent facility with languages. 1
Around 1840, Brewer's Guide to Science
(London: Jerrold) launched a successful ca-
reer of writing informational and instructional
materials for a popular audience. The Guide
sold several hundred thousand copies and was
translated into numerous languages. In the
early 1860s Brewer started what would be a
long and fruitful association with the publish-
ing house of John Cassell. By then, Cassell,
social reformer and former temperance lec-
turer, had firmly established his publishing
company and its policy of publishing good
educational and recreational reading for the
working man. 2
Undoubtedly, Brewer's experience as a
schoolmaster and his proven ability as an
educationa 1 writer were particularly attractive
to the publisher. Brewer had an office at
Cassell's La Bell Sauvage quarters, where he
wrote and edited many of the firm's popular
works for adults and children. 3 He was the
compiler of such reference books as the
Reader 's Handbook of Famous Names inFic-
tion (London: Chatto & Windus) and the His-
toric Notebook (London: Smith, Elder), which
were considered standard sources for many
years.
The Dictionary's Antecedents
Brewer's grandson, P.M.C. Hayman,
writes that Brewer himself attributed the gen-
esis of the Dictionary of Phrase and Fable to
J3REWER 'S DICTIONARY OF PHRASE AND FABLE 25
"his boyhood habit of notetaking, which he
continued all his life." 4 This habit of making
and saving notes from one's reading, along
with correspondence between authors and their
readers, seems to have been common in
Brewer ' s day. Brewer wrote that the popular-
ity of his Guide to Science "brought me a large
number of questions on all imaginary mat-
ters." He accumulated the answers to these
questions, along with other notes and refer-
ences, in A-Z pigeonholes, and they became
the nucleus of the Dictionary, 5
The Dictionary of Phrase and Fable also
had roots in antiquarianism and the miscella-
nies of folk custom, beliefs, and curiosities it
produced, including Hone's Every-Day Book
(London: Hunt & Clarke, 1825-26), John
Timbs' Things Not Generally Known (Lon-
don; David Borgue, 1856) and other works,
and Robert Chambers' Book of Days
(Edinburgh: W. & R. Chambers, 1862-64).
Brewer called his miscellany "bric-a-brac"
and said that his entries drew in the "curious
. . ., historical trifles . . ., and references to
Scandinavian and other mythology," 6 If the
Dictionary had a tap root, it surely fed on the
nineteenth-century philology that produced
many etymological dictionaries in Brewer's
day, culminating in the Oxford English Dictio-
nary. He wrote that etymology "forms a staple
of the book," especially etymologies and ex-
planations of familiar phrases, allusions that
wouldpuzzle the common reader, and "words
that have a tale to tell." 7 And there was the
Victorian impulse toward self-improvement
and Brewer's concern for making knowledge
and literature accessible to the increasingly
literate working class. He called his work an
"alms-basket," alms being gifts for the less
fortunate, and said that he selected from his
mass of notes those items that he thought were
"best suited for popular purposes." 8 The sec-
ond ("New") edition was published in 13
installments (hence, the frequent references to
it as the 1894-95 edition), a common nine-
teenth-century strategy for making books af-
fordable to working-class people.
John Buchanan-Brown, former manager
of Cassell ' s Reference Department, points out
that a more immediate inspiration for Brewer
was William Adolphus Wheeler's Noted
Names inFiction (Boston: Ticknor and Fields). 9
Buchanan-Brown believes that Wheeler was
not only the source for some of Brewer's
entries, but that he challenged Brewer to pro-
vide information on such things as "celebrated
customs and phrases" that represented what
Wheeler called "too vast a field of enquiry"
for him to have undertaken. Indeed, Brewer's
first edition does contain entries for phrases
that Wheeler used as examples of his exclu-
sions, such as "flap-dragon" and "to carry
coals to Newcastle." 10
Brewer's, in turn, has influenced other
reference works, especially literary handbooks.
For example, Henrietta Gerwig, in the preface
to Crowell 's Handbook for Readers and Writ-
ers, acknowledged her debt to the Dictionary,
and a number of her entries were taken di-
rectly from it. 11 William Rose Benet, in his
preface to the Handbook's successor, The
Reader's Encyclopedia, expressed his plea-
sure with this association, noting thsABrewer 's
was among the reference books in his father' s
library. 12
Critical Reception
Reference book reviewers have treated
Brewer's well over the years. Early printings
contained a page of "Selections from Notices
of the Press" that quoted complimentary notes
from newspapers and periodicals of the day.
These notes pointed out features that would be
mentioned again and again for the next 120
years. The writer in The Daily Telegraph
noted that the Dictionary offered "the rare
attraction in a book of reference of being
thoroughly readable," and others noted that it
would provide much pleasure and amuse-
ment. The West Sussex Gazette and The
Manch ester Examiner recommended the work
to students, speakers, writers, and general
readers who needed explanations of allusions
26 niKTTNQUISHBP CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
or "who are in want of pertinent illustrations;'
while another reviewer characterized the
knowledge in the volume as "one of the very
best means of effecting a pleasant diversion
from the dull level of commonplace small-talk
in ordinary company." From the firstprinting
onward, reviewers agreed that Brewer 's should
"find a place in every library, whether public
or private," 11
Reviewers greeted each successive major
revision with notes of from one to several
paragraphs. The London Quarterly review of
the 1894-95 edition is typical among these. It
notes Brewer's "enormous popularity," its
improvement through updating and correc-
tion of old entries and the addition of new
ones., its delights for lovers of the curious, and
its general usefulness to other readers. 14 The
Reference Books Bulletin note on the 1989
edition strikes a similar tone. 15 In between
these, reviewers took special note of the 1970
centenary edition. For example, B. Hunter
Smeaton, writing inLibrary Journal, reflected
on Brewer's particular usefulness for items
that are likely to be absent from other refer-
ence books, 1 * and the reviewer in The Times
Literary Supplement wished that the new edi-
tion had concentrated on such items, leaving
"all the other terms to works which cover them
more fully andknowledgeably.,.."' 1
Such reviews both reflected and con-
firmed Brewer 's early- won status as a stan-
dard reference book. The same is true of its
treatment in lists of recommended reference
works. As early as 1877, Justin Winsor in-
cluded it on a list of reference books for small
libraries, albeit with note of its borrowings
from Wheeler mentioned above. 18 Alice B.
Kroeger included it in her 1902 Guide to the
Study and Use of Reference Books, (Boston:
American Library Association) as has every
edition of "Mudge" (or "WincheU" or
"Sheeny," depending on one's generation).
Likewise, Bessie Graham included it in the
first edition of her Bookman 's Manual (New
York: Bowker, I921) 1 anditisstill listedinthe
latest edition of The Reader's Adviser (New
York: Bowker, 1986-88). British guides have
been equally consistent in listing it.
Not surprisingly, Brewer's is included
among the tools that are taught in courses on
reference materials in library schools, and is
among the tools considered "vital" for all
types and sizes of libraries in a study con-
ducted by Wallace Bonk to see what sources
all library school students should be taught. 19
And John C. Larsen found that most library
schools included Brewer's among the "tried-
and-true" titles in their humanities literature
or bibliography courses. 20 Various reference
course textbooks, from Shores to Katz, have
also included Brewer 's.
Evofution and Editions
No sooner was the first printing of the
Dictionary off the press than Brewer was
noting needed corrections and addenda. While
the pagination and most of the entries re-
mained constant through the 1870 version's
numerous printings (called "editions" through
at least 26), some corrections and additions
were made on the pages, and many printings
had one or more pages of "addenda et
corrigenda." Many of these had been sug-
gested in letters from readers of the volume,
whom Brewer acknowledged in additions to
the preface. After several printings, the pub-
lisher added a "Bibliographic Appendix,"
which was a listing of English authors and
their works, based on W. Davenport Adams'
Dictionary of English Literature (2nd ed.,
London: Cassell, Petter, & Galpin, 1878).
This appendix was discontinued with the 1 923
edition.
By 1 894, the needed correction and addi-
tions were beyond what could be done "with
such clipping and verbal changes as can be
made in stereotyped plates," and a completely
reset "New Edition" was published. 21 By this
time, the publishers claimed that 100,000 cop-
ies of the volume had been produced, and the
title page of printings of the new edition indi-
cated increases in this number (e.g., "110th
BREWER'S DICTIONARY OF PHRASE AND FABLE 27
Thousand" in 1899, "129th Thousand" in
1905).
Brewer expanded the size of his dictio-
nary hy a third in the second edition. He also
corrected many entries and substituted new
items for less useful ones. His preface to the
new edition credits two sources for these
corrections and expansions. First, there were
"many hundreds of correspondents," some of
whom seem to have gone through the first
edition painstakingly, suggesting corrections,
quotations, and other changes. The other source
was the wealth of material coming out of what
Brewer dubbed "The Era of English Philol-
ogy." He wrote that he took advantage of "this
great literary movement from every available
source," very probably including the early
installments of the New English Dictionary? 1
The 1894-95 edition was reprinted nu-
merous times up through World War I. An-
other "New Edition" was published in 1923.
Buchanan-Brown says that Lawrence H,
Dawson edited this version, though he is not
mentioned on the title page or elsewhere in the
volume. 23 Revisions consisted mainly of drop-
ping numerous terms and allusions that had
fallen out of use since the 1890s, and the
addition of new terms and phrases.
By the end of World War II, Brewer 's was
much in need of revision again, and it was the
first of the Cassell reference books to receive
attention after the turmoil of the war period
subsided. 24 Cassell' s chairman, Desmond
Flower, took personal interest in the revision,
and a "Revised & Enlarged" edition came out
in 1952. 25 The unnamed editor wrote in the
volume's "Editor's Note" thatthenew edition
had been "brought up to date by the inclusion
of many forms of expression that have arisen
during the past years," including phrases that
came into use during the war, such as "blood,
toil, tears, and sweat" and the V-for-victory
symbol.
With the 1952 edition, the publishers again
adopted the practice of referring to printings
as editions. The "fifth edition" of 1959 con-
tained minor revisions within the same page
set-up, and in 1963 a "Revised Edition" (also
referred to as the eighth edition) was pub-
lished "in order to keep pace with the coinage
of new phrases." 2 *
In 1963 Desmond Flower appointed Ivor
H. Evans editor of what was to be the 1970
"Centenary Edition." Evans was recom-
mended by S. H. Steinberg, Cassell's editor in
charge of dictionaries, with whom Evans had
worked on the Dictionary of British History
(New York: StMartin's). 27 Evans, like Brewer,
was a school teacher. He was educated at
King's College, London, and the University of
London Institute of Education.
Evans completely revised the Dictionary.
He discarded many entries that seemed inap-
propriate to Brewer's original conception, es-
pecially technical expressions and other terms
for which one would be likely to consult a
general dictionary or encyclopedia. 28 Many
remaining entries were rewritten for accu-
racy, clarity, and conciseness. Some 2,000
new entries for recent and current phrases
were added, and an improved system of cross-
referencing was used.
Ivor Evans has remained editor through
two subsequent editions, the 1981 "Revised
Edition" and the 1989 "Fourteenth Edition."
His methods of collecting materials for the
Dictionary are strikingly similar to those used
by Brewer himself. "I have always read exten-
sively and have been blessed with a good
memory and always register anything that
might be worth space in Brewer 's, either as an
entry or a worthwhile quotation. I work on the
principle of Captain Cuttle in Dickens's
Dombey and Son, 'When found make a note
of . . .'" He also picks up expressions from
conversation, newspapers, periodicals, and
correspondence. Each potential new entry is
carefully checked in several sources and
weighed as to its appropriateness for Brewer's,
Entries that pass the test are placed in Evans'
equivalent of Brewer's pigeonholes to await
the next revision. 29
American publishers have published edi-
tions and printings of Brewer's parallel to
those of Cassell Except for the title pages,
these versions have been exactly the same as
28 nTSTfNGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Cassell's. The firm of Claxton, Remsen and
Heffelfinger was the American publisher into
the 1880s, and Lippincott published the vol-
ume through the 1923 edition. In 1952 George
W. Jones added the Dictionary to Harper &
Row's list of "staples," where it has more than
met the criteria of being practical and infor-
mative and having long-term sales potential. 30
Various publishers have also found Brewer 's
an attractive title to reprint. The 1894-95 edi-
tion appeared as one of Henry Altemus* cheap
reprint editions in 1898, and Avenel Books
published a reprint of the same edition in 1978
(both with a curious extraneous quotation
mark in their printed transcriptions of Brewer' s
handwritten preface that was in early printings
of the 1894-95 edition as a facsimile).
The Current Edition
The 1989 edition of Brewer's is quite
similar to that of 1870. Several small sections
of the alphabet (100 entries) in the 1989 edi-
tion were examined by this author, as were the
same sections of the 1870 edition (97 entries).
Fifty-six entries are in both editions, 37 of
them largely the same in content and wording.
Reflections of successive generations of schol-
arship and changes in usage can be found by
tracing such entries as "Stonehenge," "Barbe-
cue," and those under "Oil" through various
editions. The first edition contains 41 entries
that have not survived into the "fourteenth"
edition, e.g., "Hegemony," "New-fangled,"
"Papa," and "Swiss Family Robinson." The
latest edition contains 44 entries not found in
the first edition, e.g., "Blurb," "Heidelberg
Man," "In the Swim," and "Switched on."
The 1989 edition adds a 20-page index that
will supplement the volume's cross-refer-
ences.
Its Enduring Value
Why has a work that was so much a
product of its age survived to serve eras that
have been so different in characteristics and
needs? The answer lies in its combination of
two features that were pointed out by review-
ers of the first edition. First, Brewer empha-
sized practical reference usefulness. Through
the years, the volume has helped a broad range
of readers and writers, from the student or the
self-educated reader who wished to under-
stand literary allusions and to share the culture
they represent, to the scholar or the well-
educated writer who needed to verify a half-
remembered phrase or its source. The Dictio-
nary has been especially useful for phrases
and adages that often get left out of general
dictionaries and for lists of such phenomena as
patron saints, national anthems, or dogs of
note. Certainly, a key to the volume' s contin-
ued usefulness has been Cassell's willingness
to support revisions, so that users could find
recently coined phrases, along with now ob-
scure allusions found in literature from the
past.
The second feature that has accounted for
Brewer 's remarkable success over the years is
its delights for the browser. It is a disciplined
user, indeed, who can look up one phrase in the
Dictionary and put the book down immedi-
ately. Curiosity is a timeless human trait,
whether in the Victorian antiquarian or in the
trivia buff of the 1990s, and Brewer's has
always spoken to it. Librarians who have
bought the book for reference collections,
readers who have perused it in libraries, and
those who have it on their shelves at home will
admit, with only a little hesitation, that the
book may have been bought for its reference
value but that it is loved for its hours (or
moments, however fleeting) of browsing en-
joyment.
To keep "Brewer's" from the fate of
"Webster's"and"Roget's,"Cassell'shasreg-
is tered the name as a British trademark. On the
other hand, the publisher would like to take
advantage of the widespread familiarity with
"Brewer's" as a name, perhaps using it to
enhance the acceptance of a similar reference
tool for young people and another with a
political emphasis. 11 Since the latest edition of
BREWER 'S DICTIONARY OF PHRASE AND FABLE 29
the Dictionary has come out very recently, it
is too early for the publisher to have formu-
lated definite plans for yet another revision.
However, allusions to fables of the past and
the coinage of phrases will surely continue
apace. Just as surely, Brewer '$ Dictionary of
Phrase and Fable will continue to offer alms
to readers (and listeners and viewers) of the
twenty-first century who need help in sorting
out the bric-a-brac of their past and present.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, Giving the Deriva-
tion, Source, or Origin of Common Phrases,
Allusions, and Words that have a Tale to Tell, by
E. Cobham Brewer. London: Cassell, Petter, &
Galpin, 1870. 976p.
Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, Giving the Deriva-
tion, Source, or Origin of Common Phrases,
Allusions, and Words that have a Tale to Tell, by
E. CobhamBrewer. New Edition, Revised, Cor-
rected, and Enlarged, to which is added A
Concise Bibliography of English Literature.
London: Cassell, 1895. l,440p.
A Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, by E. Cobham
Brewer. New Edition. London: Cassell, 1923.
l,157p.
Brewer 's Dictionary of Phrase & Fable. Revised &
Enlarged, London: Cassell, 1952. 97 7p.
Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase & Fable. Revised
Edition. London: Cassell, 1963. 970p.
Brewer 's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable. Centenary
Edition, revised by Ivor H. Evans. London;
Cassell, 1970. 1,1 75p.
Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable. Revised
Edition, by Ivor H. Evans. London: Cassell,
1981. l,213p.
Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, Four-
teenth edition, by Ivor H. Evans. London: Cassell,
1989. l,220p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Neither primary nor secondary sources
regarding E. Cobham Brewer and his Dictio-
nary are plentiful. Most of the relevant Cassell
archives were destroyed in the air raid that
destroyed La Belle Sauvage in 1 94 1 . The only
easily accessible biography is the "brief mem-
oir" by his grandson, P. M. C. Hayman, that is
part of the introductory material in the 1970
Centenary Edition of the Dictionary. John
Buchanan-Brown, former manager of
Cassell' s Reference Department, has provided
a useful introduction to the 1981 and 1989
editions that places the work in its cultural
context. Ivor H. Evans' editor's preface to the
1970, 1981, and 1989 editions provides brief
information on the history of Brewer 's and on
his revisions. An understanding of John
CasselPs background and activities in pub-
lishing informational and educational materi-
als for working-class people is important to
understanding the cultural context of Brewer 's t
and Nowell- Smith's book on CasselPs pub-
lishing house will provide useful and interest-
ing insights in this regard. Likewise, good
treatments of education and reading in the
Victorian era, such as those by Richard Altick,
will provide context very helpful to under-
standing Brewer and his works,
Altick, Richard D. The English Common Reader: A
Social Histoiy of the Mass Reading Public
1800-1900. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1957,
Buchanan-Brown, John. "Introduction." InBrewer 's
Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, edited by Ivor
H. Evans, ix-xvi, 14th ed. London: Cassell,
1989.
Collison, Robert, Encyclopedias: Their History
Throughout the Ages. New York: Hafner, 1966.
Hayman, P. M. C. "E. Cobham Brewer LL.D.: A
Brief Memoir by His Grandson." In Brewer's
Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, edited by Ivor
H. Evans, v Li-xii. Centenary ed. London: Cassell,
1970.
McArthur, Tom. Worlds of Reference: Lexicogra-
phy, Learning and Language from the Clay
Tablet to the Computer. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1986.
Nowell-Smith, Simon. The House of Cassell, 1848-
1958. London: Cassell, 1958.
30 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
NOTES
I P.M.C. Hayman, "E. Cobham Brewer LL.D.: A
Brief Memoir by His Grandson," in Brewer's
Dictionary of Phrase and Fable, Centenary ed.,
ed. by Ivor H. Evans (London: Cassell, 1970),
vii-xii.
5 Simon Nowell-Smith, TheHouse of Cassell, 1848-
1958 (London: Cassell, 1958), 36-49.
'John Buchanan-Brown, "Introduction," in Brewer's
Dictionary of Phrase andFable,14thp<i., ed. by
IvorH. Evans (London: Cassell, 1989), xii.
* Hayman, ix-x.
s Ibid.
6 E. Cobham Brewer, "Preface," in Dictionary of
Phrase andFabk (London: Cassell, Petter, &
Galpin, 1870), v-viii.
7 Ibid.
8 Ibid.
9 Buchanan-Brown, xi-xii.
10 Wi)liam A. Wheeler, An Explanatory and Pro-
nouncing Dictionary of the Noted Names of
Fiction (Boston: Ticknor and Fields, 1866), v-
vi.
II Henrietta Gerwig, CrowdVs Handbook for Read-
ers and Writers (New York: Crowd 1, 1925), v.
See, for example, entries for "Abigail" and
"Abracadabra."
"WillianiRose Benft, "Preface to the FirstBdition,'*
in The Reader's Encyclopedia, 2nd ed. (New
York: Crowd 1, 1965), unpaged.
""Selections from Notices of the Press," in Dictio-
nary of Phrase andFabk, 3rd ed,by E. Cobham
Brewer (London: Cassell, Petter, & Galpin,
1872), unpaged,
"Review of D/cr/ofldry of Phrase andFable,London
Quarterly andHotborn Review 86 (July 1896);
389-90.
15 Review of Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and
Fable, Booklist 86 (1 March 1990); 1380-81.
16 B. Hunter Smeaton, Review of Brewer's Dictio-
nary of Phrase and Fable, Library Journal 97
(15 March 1972): 1002.
17 "As They Brew . . . ," The Times Literary Supple-
ment no. 3581 (16 October 1970): 7.
18 Justin. Winsor, "Reference Books in English,"
Library Journal 1 (31 March 1877): 247-49.
19 Wallace J. Bonk, Use of Basic Reference Sources
in Libraries (Ann Arbor: University of Michi-
gan, 1963), 116-28.
20 John C. Larsen, "Titles Currently Studied in Hu-
manities Courses," Journal of Education for
Librarianship 10 (Ba\\ 1969): 120-28.
21 E. Cobham Brewer, "Preface," in Dictionary of
Phrase andFabk, New ed. (London: Cassell,
1895), unpaged.
a Ibid.
M Buchanan-Brown, xv.
24 Nowell-Srniih,243.
25 Buchanan-Brown, xv.
26 "Preface," in Rev. ed. (London: Cassell, 1963), v.
11 Ivor H. Evans, letter to the author, 17 February,
1990.
28 Ivor H. Evans, "Editor's Preface," in Brewer's
Dictionary of Phrase andFable, Centenary ed.
(London: Cassell, 1970), v-vi.
w Evans, letter to author, 17 February 1990.
M Eugene Exman, The House of Harper (New York:
Harper & Row, 1967), 240, 283.
J1 Steven Cook, Assistant Editor, Reference, Cassell
Publishers, Ltd., telephone conversation with
author, 2 February, 1990.
"The Indispensable Guide": The
Chicago Manual of Style
Richard D. DeBacher
HISTORY AND DEVELOPMENT
"It is often thought of as "The Bible" in
terms of editorial style; I don 't know an
experienced editor who does not know it. "
— Nancy N. Clemente, Managing Editor,
Harvard University Press
"We like it. It is well organized, well
thought out. What else can I say after I've
said, 'I love you'?" — Sophie Sorkin,
Vice President and Director of Copy
Editing, Simon & Schuster 1
Editors and writers commonly make affec-
tionate reference to The Chicago Manual of
Style and often regard it with gospel-like rev-
erence. In fact one review of the most recent
edition bore the title, "Look-it-up heaven for
the writer." 2 While the principal authors of
that edition, Bruce Young and Catharine
Seybold, find such remarks hyperbolic and
somewhat embarrassing, few of their profes-
sional colleagues would argue with Naomi
Pascal, editor-in-chief of the University of
Washington Press, who called it, "the indis-
pensable guide for us scholarly publishers," 3
or with Laurence Urdang, whose review in
Verbatim concluded, "it must be conceded to
be the most useful editorial tool available." 4
The Chicago Manual quickly rose to its
definitive status in North America shortly
after publication of the first edition in 1906.
Like the thirteenth edition, the first appeared
as a revolution in printing technology was
unfolding. Then as now, changes in the ways
books were produced created a demand for
new standards in the preparation of manu-
scripts, the editing of text, and the setting of
type. The Chicago Manual met this need and
subsequent editions changed over the years as
printing technology evolved further. Thus, as
Mark Carroll observed in his review of the
thirteenth edition, "This grand tool is, as it
always has been since its first edition in 1906,
reflective of change and adaptation of the
publication and printing process." 5
These same trends shaped the market for
the Manual, and, over the years, the primary
focus has shifted from the needs of typesetters
and their proofreaders to those of authors and
their editors. Whereas the first line under the
title of the original edition read, "Being a
Compilation of the Typographical Rules . . .,"
the line had evolved by the eleventh edition
(1949) to read, "containing typographical and
other rules for authors, printers, and publish-
ers." The twelfth (1969) and the thirteenth
(1 982) editions claim to serve, "Authors, Edi-
tors, and Copywriters," and all reference to
typesetting has vanished from the title page.
In John Howell's words, the various edi-
tions of the Chicago Manual reflect "the pro-
cess by which the printer's manual evolved
into the editor's and author's manual," 6 The
Chicago Manual was not written to cover
matters of style that are the province of other
well known works such as The Elements of
Style, 3rd ed., by William Strunk, Jr., and E. B.
White (New York: Macmillan, 1979) or the
32 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
various prescriptive guides to grammatical
usage. Rather, The Chicago Manual of Style
covers "typographical style. . . < it tells you not
how to say or write something, but how it
should appear on the page." 7 According to
Catharine Seybold, the Manual aims to serve
editors and authors who need a reference tool
that will
help them decide what to capitalize, italicize,
put in quotation marks; how to abbreviate all
kinds of terms, to quote from other sources, to
punctuate, to form plurals of numbers, names,
etc., to compile and edit tables and indexes, to
deal with footnotes and bibliographies and
reference lists. . , . The accepted, and accept-
able, ways of coping with these matters in
good writing and good bookmaking, together
with the University of Chicago Press prefer-
ence where there w as an aUernati ve, had really
always been chiefly what was meant by the
word style in the title of the Manual. 8
Today, most manuscripts are prepared
with word processing software, and the
author's "output" on magnetic floppy disks is
frequently used in the copy editing process
and to drive typesetting equipment. With desk-
top publishing software, the same machine
used to write a document can be used edit it
and set it in type. Technology has blurred the
line that once clearly separated the writing,
editing, and typesetting functions. The next
edition of The Chicago Manual of Style is sure
to reflect the changes brought about by this
continuing technological evolution.
Early History of the Chicago
Manual
The history of The Chicago Manual of
Style is intimately tied to the history of the
University of Chicago Press, which, in turn,
traces its origins to those of the University
itself in 1892. 9 The founding President of the
University of Chicago, WilliamRainey Harper,
believed that the basic mission of his new
university should include not only teaching
and a strong emphasis on research, but the
dissemination of the fruits of scholarship as
well Thus, "From the time the University of
Chicago opened its doors in 1 892, its press has
been a department of the university. ... to
carry the wisdom of the university beyond its
own student body." 10
The new university press was assigned a
variety of tasks, including the publication of
scholarly books and journals containing the
research results of the university's faculty as
well as that of other researchers. To accom-
plish the challenging printing assignments,
Newman Miller, who served as the director of
the Press from 1 900 to 1 9 19, aimed to employ
the new technology that was effecting a revo-
lution in typesetting at the end of the nine-
teenth century. Miller persuaded the Univer-
sity Board of Trustees of the economic advan-
tage of the Mergenthaler Linotype and the
Lanston Monotype composing machines.
Faced not only with mastering these new
machines but with using them to publish schol-
arly works in Greek, Hebrew, Syriac, Arabic,
and Ethiopic, as well as technical and scien-
tific research, the printing department of the
Press established a copy editing and proof-
reading section under the direction of Louis
Warming. As Seybold recounts it:
Professors brought their handwritten manu-
scripts directly to the compositors, who did
their best to decipher them and set them in an
acceptable form. Rough proofs from this op-
eration were turned over to a growing band of
proofreaders, referred to as the 'brainery' by
the typesetters because they endeavored to
correct not only typographical errors but sty-
listic inconsistencies and even the grammati-
cal lapses of the distinguished authors. To
these hard-working souls, it inevitably be-
came apparent that some guidelines were
needed in their business. So, true to the pio-
neer spirit of the new university growing
around them, they drew up their own 'style
sheet' with a little help from interested mem-
bers of the English department and others.
This was printed in a small pamphlet and
distributed to the professorial journal editors
and others in the university community." 11
This small pamphlet, first produced in
1901, became the seed from which the first
edition of The Chicago Manual of 'Style would
grow. Newman Miller perceived both the edi-
THE CHICAGO MANUAL OF STYLE 33
torial and economic potential of the style sheet
and urged the governing board of the Press to
approve its issuance as a regular Press publi-
cation:
It is recommended by the Publication Com-
mittee that this pamphlet be issued as a regular
publication of the Press It is believed . . .
that the work will be valuable to many persons
not connected with the University, and in
order to take it out of the class of documents
which are usually given away it has been
thought wise to put a price upon it and en-
deavor to sell it through general trade chan-
nels, without special promotional efforts be-
ing put upon it." 12
The First Edition of the Manual
Accordingly, in 1906, the Press issued a
200-page book with a two-color title page
which read, "MANUAL OF STYLE. Being a
compilation of the typographical rules in force
at the University of Chicago Press, to which
are appended SPECIMENS OF TYPES IN
USE." Some 80 pages of this first Manual
cover type specimens and elaborate orna-
ments. Seventy-five pages are devoted to Rules
of Composition; 12 pages to technical terms;
and 10 pages to an appendix offering what are
called "Hints." The latter begin assertively,
"Manuscripts should be either typewritten or
in a perfectly clear handwriting. The former is
preferable." To proofreaders it advises, "The
Manual of Style is primarily meant for you.
Learn its rules by heart." To copyholders
(those who read aloud to proofreaders the
material being checked) it counsels, "culti-
vate a low, soft, clear, reading voice."
The following passage from the first
Manual, which Seybold ascribes to Louis
Warming, is quoted in full in the preface to the
thirteenth edition:
"Rules and regulations such as these . . .
cannot be endowed with the fixity of rock-
ribbed law. They . . . must be applied with a
certain degree of elasticity. . . . Throughout
this book it is assumed that no regulation
contained therein is absolutely inviolable.
Wherever the peculiar nature of the subject-
matter, the desirability of throwing into relief
a certain part of the argument, the reasonable
preference of a writer or a typographical con-
tingency suggests a deviation, such deviation
may legitimately be made. Each case of this
character must largely be decided upon its
own merits. Generally it may be stated that,
where no question of good taste or good logic
is involved, deference should be shown to the
expressed wishes of the author." 13
Later Editions
The Manual's early success was noted by
the preface to the second edition (191 0): "The
merit of the Manual is best evidenced by its
very general adoption and use in editorial
offices and proofrooms throughout the United
States and Canada." 1 ' 1 A third edition was
published a year later, and its preface by
Newman Miller attributed the need for still
further revision of the manual in part to "the
recent development of the profession of li-
brarian, with the attendant uniformity of prac-
tice recommended by the national association
of librarians, and the added experience result-
ing from a daily application of these rules to a
very varied list of publications." 15
The second, third, and fourth (1914) edi-
tions of the Manual were produced under the
guidance of John A. Powell, successor to
Warming as chief proofreader. The stature of
this position is suggested by Powell's back-
ground. A world traveler, he held a degree
from the University of London and a Ph.D.
from the University of Berlin,
The fifth (1917), sixth (1919), and sev-
enth (1920) editions of the Manual were pro-
duced under the editorial guidance of Powell's
successors including Lilian E. Bridgen.
Seybold notes "this frequency of new editions
in the early days of the Press was due largely
to additions of new typefaces by the printing
department." 16 The seventh edition, says
Seybold, "shows no vast difference from the
third. Somewhere, however the article "A"
was added before the title: 'A MANUAL OF
STYLE."" 7
34 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Commercial Viability
Press memoranda and correspondence
now stored in the Special Collections of
Regenstein Library at the University of Chi-
cago shed light on the commercial viability of
the early editions of the Manual. For instance,
before the fourth edition was issued in 1 9 14,
Newman Miller exchanged a series of memos
with Gordon Laing, for many years general
editor of the Press, about whether to publish
the Manual in cloth, paperback, or both,
On November 6, 1913, Miller wrote to
Laing, "I believe that we ought to work toward
a single edition of the Manual of Style to be put
out in cloth I am disposed to think it will
sell just as well in cloth although the paper
edition has sold rather better in the past."
Laing responded in pencil on Miller's typed
memo, "The figures show that the demand is
for the paper edition. On the face of it, it seems
tomethatitwouldbe wise to abandon the cloth
edition." Miller prevailed, and in a directive
to Laing datedNovember 19, 1913, heordered
the new revision to be issued in a single
clothbound edition. Miller then directedLaing
to revise the text "carefully ... so that we can
now look upon it as final for the next few
years, at least." 18
Miller* s concerns about the cost of updat-
ing the Manual are explained in other Press
documents that detail the several purposes for
which the book was being used. Figure 1
reproduces the data presented on a document
dated April 26, 1917, relating to the proposed
fifth edition.
Despite its widespread acceptance, sales
revenue for the Manual (called "returns" in
Figure 1) failed to cover production costs for
any edition but the fourth. Still, the Manual
served an important commercial and public
relations purpose for the Press, a function
Miller felt compelled to explain to T.E.
Donnelly, chair of the subcommittee of the
University of Chicago's Board of Trustees
that oversaw Press operations, as he sought
that body's approval for a new edition:
This title has been an evolution, at first a
convenience to the office and later developing
into a publicity asset of considerable impor-
tance. It has finally come to have a steady sale
through our trade channels, and it is only
justice to those who have contributed to the
compilation of the book to say that in many
quarters it is looked upon as an authority in
matters of style. . . .
Donnelly urged Miller to increase the
price to $2. Miller resisted, thinking $1 .50 to
be the price ceiling. Donnelly gave in and
approved the publication of 1,000 copies of
the fifth edition with a list price of $1.50,
Miller hoped the book could be made self-
sustaining and that "future corrections will not
be heavy," but these hopes seemed lost when
he wrote to the Board on September 8, 1920:
It has always been considered as more or less
of a promotion scheme, andmany copies have
been and still are given away to authors and
editors of our books and journals. The nature
of the book of course requires a constant
revision, and the manufacturing cost of each
impression is therefore considerably above
that of an average book. For both of these
reasons it has never been a paying book.
The Eighth and Ninth Editions
The birth of the eighth edition of 1925 , the
most complete revision of the Manual to date
was notto be an easy one. Laing's memo to the
file summarizes a conference held in January
1 924 at which it was decided that David H.
Stevens of the English department would be
' 'asked to revise the Manual of Style from the
academic point of view, andthatMr. Kittredge
of the Donnelley Company should be requested
to make suggestions on the typographic part of
the book." From the new edition, an abridg-
ment was to be produced, "to consist of a small
pamphlet of from 32-64 pages which we can
send to authors whose books we are publish-
ing."
Stevens finished his work on August 26,
1 924, and asked for $400 for his services,
Laing and Donald P. Bean, manager of the
Publication Department, had expected to pay
THE CHICAGO MANUAL OF STYLE 35
April 26, 1917
Manualof Style
First
Second
Third
Fourth
Published
Edition
Edition
.Edition
Edition
Nov. 1906
Mar. 1910
Dec. 1911
Feb. 1914
No. Produced
Paper
1002
999
1026
-
Cloth
-
-
460
1024
Sales
579
742
1144
955
Free
423
257
223
32
On hand
-
-
119
37
Cost
$583.50
$848.50
$1159.20
$563.01
Est. Returns
415.30
519.40
800.00
694.40
Total cost--$3, 154.21
" Est. Ret.
-$2,429.10
Proposed Fifth Edition
Number of Copies-1000
Estimated cost-
-Corrections--
Printing-
$350.00
360.00
$710.00
Estimated returns-
600.00
Figure 1 .
Replication of 1917 Internal Document Regarding Sales Figures And Projections for the Manual
from $50 to $100, and Bean's memo to Laing
of August 29, 1924, calls the invoice "prepos-
terous." Worse, Stevens' work was not ac-
ceptable and had to be rewritten, largely by
Jessie D. Whittern, head of the proofroom.
Ultimately, Laing offered Stevens $100 and a
$.20 per copy royalty on the first 2,000 copies
sold. Stevens accepted.
According to Seybold, the design of the
eighth edition was the joint effort of designer
Robert O. Ballou and A.C. McFarland, man-
ager of the Printing Department. It is not clear
whether the renowned Mr. Kittredge of the
Donnelley Company contributed to the effort.
Seybold states that the design was "noticed
with approval by Publishers ' Weekly, which
. . . mistakenly credited R.R. Donnelley 's
typographer for the improvement." 19
The preface to the eighth edition specified
the intended users as "authors, editors, adver-
tising men, printers, proofreaders, and pub-
lishers." 20 The new Manual contained a sec-
tion on selecting typography and relating the
parts (preliminaries, text, back matter, run-
ning heads, page numbers, etc.) which to-
gether create ''the personality of a book." The
rules for composition offered instructions on
dealing with legends and captions, mathemati-
cal formulas, and complex indexes. The
"Hints" moved from the appendix to the text,
comprising 18 pages,
Seybold detects and laments "a new, self-
assured air about the instructions addressed to
authors and other ignorant readers." For in-
stance, the author is admonished that in sub-
mitting copy, "he may ordinarily rely on the
judgment of his publisher with regard to typo-
graphical style. Vexation and delay are the
usual results of interference with one who is a
specialist in book-making " 2I Manuscripts sub-
mitted "in a perfectly clear hand" are still
acceptable, although typewritten manuscripts
are "preferable for many reasons." Handwrit-
ten manuscripts were not forbidden altogether
until the eleventh edition.
36 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
The ninth edition (1927) was unchanged
save for the addition of ten pages of type
specimens. Discussion of a tenth edition ap-
peared in Press documents as early as 1 935. A
Professor David Gustafson of the Carnegie
Institute of Technology Department of Print-
ing hoped to adopt an updated Manual for his
classes, By April of that year, however, Laing
wrote regretfully, that "financial conditions
prevent our revising the book at present." The
next year, Professor Gregory Paine of the
English departmentof the University of North
Carolina wrote to the Press on the letterhead of
the Modern Language Association, offering a
number of suggestions for the next edition.
Hisletterwas addressed to Mary D. Alexander,
since 1925 head of the proofroom and the
principal force behind both the tenth and the
eleventh editions.
Paine recommended (1) an expanded
chapter on footnotes; (2) a separate chapter on
bibliographies; (3) a revised list of foreign
words recognizing the "change from italics to
roman and the omission of accents"; and (4) a
less "confusing" general index, eliminating
"the double references to page and paragraph
numbers." Finally, he added, "I wish that you
could publish a book that could sell for about
two dollars so that I could use in [it] freely as
a textbook. Why not omit Specimens of Type,
pages 221-361? These pages are of use only
to printers. . . . The Manual will not be pur-
chased by students or writers at three-fifty a
copy."
The Tenth and Eleventh Editions
Alexander, whose forceful style and strong
personality contributed significantly to the
corporate culture of the Press for 50 years,
chose not to incorporate all of Paine 's sugges-
tions. Thetenthedition(1937) included greatly
expanded "Rules for Preparation of Copy," a
new chapter on bibliography, and a list of
proper forms for addressing prominent per-
sons. By the eleventh edition (1949), a largely
revised "Hints" section reflected Alexander's
touch and, according to Seybold, "the no-
nonsense tone has become a bit sharper,"
Authors were told:
No amount of careful preparation of a dull
manuscript will disguise its basic shortcom-
ings. But even a brilliant piece of writing will
have difficulty finding a publisher if the au-
thor has neglected to dress his manuscript
decently. On the assumption that the author
has produced something worth printing, the
suggestions offered here might well be en-
titled "How to Win a Publisher." 22
Authors are also admonished to keep their
footnotes to a minimum because "footnotes
add nothing to the appearance of the printed
page." Furthermore, they were told to avoid
changes in their proofs "as such changes are
expensive. Remember, to make a change in
manuscript requires only a few strokes of the
pen; to make a change in proofs, a skilled
operator must be employed." 23
In her summary remarks on the eighth
through the eleventh editions, Seybold ob-
serves and regrets a growing tendency to
regard the rules for composition promulgated
by the University of Chicago Press as irrevo-
cable, as the only sensible way, and, contrary
to the disclaimer still in the preface, as now
indeed "endowed with the fixity of unchang-
ing law." To be sure, this attitude was un-
doubtedly encouraged by users of tho Manual
who followed its every dictate and over the
years turned to the Press for answers to ques-
tions not covered in its pages. Its sometimes
schoolmarmish tone aside, however, this elev-
enth Manual was a most useful reference tool,
and it served the Press and its wider audience
for a longer period than had any of its prede-
cessors.
"24
The Modern Manual
The next major revision of the Manual
was undertaken after important changes in the
organization and structure of the Press had
been made in the 1950s, a period of rapid
expansion under then director Roger Shugg.
At the outset of this period, the Printing De-
THE CHICAGO MANUAL OF STYLE 37
partment of the University, which was no
longer a part of the Press, was still copy
editing, designing, and producing most of the
books and journals published by the Press.
Shugg created a new manuscript editing de-
partment within the Press in 1956 and added a
design and production department two years
later.
The new organizational scheme was not
implemented without resistance or difficulty.
Seybold witnessed the transition, having been
hired in 1956 as the first "chief manuscript
editor" within the Press:
The new manuscript editors, in Shugg's plan,
were to go beyond the traditional "mechani-
cal" kind of editing — such as regularizing
spelling, punctuation, capitalization, and the
like — to perform "substantive editing where
desirable and to work with authors to improve
the quality and clarity of the Press books."
They also were not to be rigidly bound by the
strictures of the printing department's widely
used Manual of Style ... To the proofreaders
on the fourth floor such a lax approach would
be nothing short of blasphemous." 25
Understandably, "a new edition of the
Manual more suitable to the current state of
affairs was a subject frequently discussed by
the staff ,26 during this period. Finally, in 1968,
the new director of the Press, Morris Philipson,
suggested that Seybold, then senior manu-
script editor, and Bruce Young, the managing
editor, take time off to produce a new edition
of the Manual, three months being thought
sufficient for the task. "Some eight grueling
months later," notes Seybold, "we produced a
manuscript." 27
John Grossman, another Press manuscript
editor, revised the chapter on punctuation;
another staff editor wrote a new chapter on
citing public documents. Young and Seybold
divided the rest of the work between them,
aiming to make the twelfth edition "more
relevant to the needs of authors and editors
than to those of typographers and printers." 28
The new edition was designed by Cameron
Poulter, head of the design and production
department.
The heart of the old Manual, what had
been called Rules for Composition in the first
ten editions and Rules for Preparation of Copy
in the eleventh, was now simply called "Style,"
by which was meant "the accepted and accept-
able ways of coping with these [editorial]
matters in good writing and good bookmak-
ing, together with the University of Chicago
Press preference where there was an alterna-
tive^ 29
Other parts were completely revised or
omitted altogether, including, at last, the type
specimens, which had occupied nearly half
the pages of the preceding edition. With some
regret Young and Seybold abolished the
"Hints" section and incorporated these tips
into an expanded section called "Bookmak-
ing." It explained what went into the various
parts of a book and how to assemble them, the
preparation of copy for the printer, and au-
thors' and publishers' responsibilities regard-
ing copyright.
Now truly a success both critically and
commercially, the first printing of 20,000 cop-
ies of the twelfth edition sold out before pub-
lication. From its appearance in January 1969
through August 1982, thisedition sold 153,501
copies, a sum nearly equal to the combined
sales of the first eleven editions. 30
Work on the thirteenth edition began in
1975 when Young and Seybold sent a ques-
tionnaire to some 75 professional colleagues,
inviting their suggestions for the new work.
To their surprise, 129 questionnaires were
returned, a number of recipients having cop-
ied the documentto permit eager colleagues to
contribute to the effort.
Challenges for the Editors
A variety of important developments, le-
gal, cultural, and technological, came to bear
on this edition. First, changes in the federal
copyright regulations had been adopted in
1 978 and needed to be interpreted in language
understandable to authors and editors.
^SB2i-£rJi J "T
38 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Second, the women's movement had called
attention to the deleterious effects of sexist
language. Young and Seybold were inclined
to be cautious in responding to the emerging
trend, and, more than a year before the new
edition appeared, they stated in a published
article that they would be "only giving a nod
to the continuing controversy over sexist lan-
guage: A footnote will explain that the pro-
noun 'he' will be used in the generic sense
throughout the guide." 31 Once word of their
decision spread, the outcry convinced Seybold
to make a more radical change: "The tradi-
tional single generic pronoun in the English
language could no longer safely be used to
refer to an author or an editor of either sex.
And the twelfth edition of the Manual suddently
was perceived to be filled with this pronoun. I
persuaded my male colleague that we must
' desex' our new text altogether or risk the dire
consequences of offending more than half our
readers. How? Well, we used a lot of plu-
rals." 32
Finally, typesetting and printing methods
were once again changing rapidly, and the
new Manual had to take these developments
into account. The old "hot lead" typesetters
were being replaced by phototypesetting and
computer-driven alternatives. Authors were
beginning to use stand-alone word processors
or campus computers to produce machine-
readable manuscripts on magnetic tape or
floppy disks. While fhepersonal computer did
not yet play an important role in the revolu-
tion, its impact soon was to explode upon the
scene. These still emerging trends held pro-
found implications for writers, editors, and
publishers.
It was, perhaps, impossible in the late
1970s and early 1980s to anticipate the needs
of the microcomputer age. Still, at least one
otherwise admiring reviewer of the thirteenth
edition, Laurence Urdang, criticized the new
editior for its lean coverage of the new tech-
nology:
There is a great deal more to be said about
automatic typesetting than is even suggested
in the Chicago Manual .... It is not my
intention to write that segment of the Style
Manual here, only to point out that the cover-
age given is niggardly, especially when one
considers that many of those functions for-
merly the provine of the compositor are now
becoming the responsibility of the editor and
often of the author." 33
The thirteenth edition, greatly expanded
and completely revised in nearly every area,
now included a new chapter by Bruce Young
on the history and current methods of compo-
sition, printing, and binding. Seybold's efforts
focused on revising and amplifying the mate-
rial on documentation of scholarly works. The
new edition was published in August 1982 in
a volume of 748 pages, 102 more than its
predecessor. It has broken all previous sales
records, having sold 203,000 copies to date,
and it continues to sell more copies each year.
Not long thereafter, work began on an
altogether new guide to set standards for au-
thors who employed microcomputers and other
electronic systems in preparing manuscripts
for publication. The Chicago Guide to Pre-
paring Electronic Manuscripts was prepared
under the direction of Jennie Lightner, senior
manuscript editor, andPamely Pokorney, then
senior production controller. The Guide was
published in 1987, addressing the need Urdang
had cited in his review of the thirteenth edition
of the Manual In their preface, Lightner and
Pokorney proclaim: "Our focus is on manu-
script preparation — how it should be done
when computers are used — and on the proce-
dures that should be followed by author and
publisher so that the author's electronic me-
dium can be used for typesetting." 34 Like the
Manual, the new Guide evolved from "guide-
lines for authors of electronic manuscripts that
were distributed to Press authors," which were
subsequently expanded for publication. 15
Present and Future
Later, the Manual was selected to be one
of the reference books published on CD-ROM
as an element in Microsoft's revolutionary
Bookshelf product. Used in conjunction witha
THE CHICAGO MANUAL OF STYLE 39
word processing program, Bookshelf 'permits
its users to conduct onscreen look-ups in the
text of the Manual as they write. It does not
automatically proofread, edit, or stylize a
manuscript, but hints of such capabilities are
on the horizon, and some programs now on the
market exhibit extraordinary powers.
For instance, Oberson Resources' "Note-
book II Plus" textual data and bibliographic
reference system can, among other things,
"generate bibliographies and reference lists,
automatically, in any of over 650 publishing
styles." The Modern Language Association
now offers Editor which it calls a program for
"checking usage, mechanics, vocabulary, and
structure." As such powerful writing tools
emerge to serve scholarly writers, the author-
editor relationship is sure to continue evolv-
ing.
Still, suitable organizations need to re-
view, revise, and devise appropriate standards
for the preparation of manuscripts, electronic
or otherwise, if research results and other
scholarly work are to be communicated clearly
and effectively. The Chicago Manual of Style
will likely retain its place as "indespensable
guide" to such standards for the forseeable
future.
As this essay is written, work has begun
on a fourteenth edition of the Manual. It will
be prepared by John Grossman, now manag-
ing editor of the Press. He has compressed the
three chapters on documentation to two, The
chapter on rights and permissions will be
updated to cover new rulings of the past de-
cade. The chapter on indexing will make more
reference to computer tools. More detailed
coverage of electronic manuscripts will be
offered in the next edition of the Chicago
Guide to Preparing Electronic Manuscripts.
A publication date for the fourteenth edition of
The Chicago Manual of Style has not yet been
announced, but its appearance is sure to be
greeted with gratitude by thousands of loyal
users.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Manual of Style. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1906. 20 lp.
Manual of Style. 2nd ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1910. 115p.
Manual of Style. 3rd ed, Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1911. 11 8p.
Manual of Style. 4th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1914. 141p.
Manual of Style. 5th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1917. 300p.
Manual of Style. 6th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1919. 292p.
Manual of Style. 7th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1920. 300p.
Manual of Style. 8th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1925. 39 lp.
Manual of Style. 9th ed. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1927. 400p.
A Manual of Style. 1 Oth ed. Chicago: The University
of Chicago Press, 1937. 394p.
A Manual of Style. 1 1 th ed. Chicago: The University
of Chicago Press, 1949. 498p.
A Manual of Style. 12th ed., rev. Chicago: The
University of Chicago Press, 1969. 546p.
The Chicago Manual of Style. 13th ed., rev. and
expanded. Chicago: The University of Chicago
Press, 1982. 738p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Aside from reviews, the secondary litera-
ture on the Manual is not extensive. Catharine
Seybold, coauthor of the twelfth and thir-
teenth editions, has published one invaluable
article, cited below. She subsequently up-
dated and revised that work for an unpub-
lished speech, a copy of which she provided to
this chapter's author. Additional valuable in-
formation on the history of the Manual can be
found in her unpublished history of the Uni-
versity of Chicago Press to 1956, a copy of
which is available in the Special Collections
Department of Regenstein Library. Stacy
Michelle's "The Book of Style," published in
40 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
a Chicago weekly newspaper, the Reader, is
well worth reading, however back issues of
that paper are not readily available outside
Chicago.
Pascal, Naomi B. "Chicago's Thirteenth." Scholarly
Publishing 13 (October, 1982): 87-95.
Seybold, Catharine. "A Brief History of TheChicago
Manual of Style" Scholarly Publishing 14
(February, 1983): 163-77.
•. "History of the Manual of Style through its
13th Edition," Unpublished speech (1984).
Courtesy of the author.
-. "The University of Chicago Press: A Brief
History, 1891-1965." Unpublished manuscript
available in Special Collections, Regenstein
Library, University of Chicago, 1983.
Stacy, Michelle. "The Book of Style." Reader 12
(November 12, 1982): 1-10.
Trett, GaraLd. "Two Stylebooks: An Editor's View;
or, The Outlook in the Trenches." Review 6
(1984): 202-34.
NOTES
I Larry Green, " 'Bible' of Editorial Style—Now 77
Years Old — Is Last Word on Words," Los Angeles
Times, 18 February 1983.
3 Henry Kisor, "Look-It-Up Heaven for the Writer,"
Chicago Sun Times Book Week, 3 April 1988.
3 Naomi B. Pascal, "Chicago's Thirteenth," Scholarly
Publishing 14 (October 1982): 87.
4 Laurence Urdang, review of The Chicago Manual of
Style, 13th ed., Verbatim 9 (Autumn 1982).
s Mark Carroll, Letter of the Society for Scholarly Pub-
lishing 5 (1983).
* John Bruce Howell, Style Manuals of the English-
Speaking World: A Guide (Phoenix: Oryx Press,
1983), xi.
7 Catharine Seybold, "A Brief History of The Chicago
Manual of Style, " Scholarly Publishing 14 (Febru-
ary 1983): 172.
8 Catharine Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style
through its 13th Edition," unpublished speech,
1984, courtesy of the author, 1 1,
9 Catharine Seybold, "The University of Chicago Press:
A Brief History, 1891-1965," unpublished paper,
Special Collections, Regenstein Library, Univer-
sity of Chicago,
10 Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style through its
13th Edition," 1.
II Ibid., 3.
12 Ibid., 4-5.
13 The Chicago Manual of Style, 13th ed. rev. and
expanded (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1982}, viii.
14 Manual of Style, 2nd ed, (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1910).
15 Manual of Style, 3rd ed. (Chicago; University of
Chicago Press, 1911).
16 Seybold, "The University of Chicago Press: A Brief
History, 1891-1965," 57.
17 Seybold, "A Brief History of The Chicago Manual of
Style," 166.
18 Memoranda and correspondence cited from this period
of the Press are available in the Special Collections
of Regenstein Library at the University of Chicago.
" Seybold, "The University of Chicago Press: A Brief
History, 1891-1965," 80.
20 Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style through its
13th Edition," 7.
21 Ibid., 7.
22 Ibid., 8.
23 A Manual of Style, 10th ed. (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1937).
24 Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style through its
13th Edition," 9.
25 Seybold, "The University of Chicago Press: A Brief
History, 1891-1965," 146-47,
" Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style through its
13th Edition," 10.
71 Ibid.
28 Ibid,, 10-11.
29 Ibid., 1 1
3(5 Ibid., 13.
31 Rosalynne Harty, "Setting the Style for Publishers,"
Chicago Tribune Book World, 4 May 1980.
32 Seybold, "History of the Manual of Style through the
13th Edition," 14.
33 Urdang.
34 Chicago Guide to Preparing Electronic Manuscripts
(Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987), x.
35 Ibid., x.
E3S39!
The "Instinctive Grammatical
Moralizer": H. W. Fowler and His
Dictionary of Modern English Usage
William A. McHugh
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
H.W. Fowler's Dictionary of Modern English
Usage has long been regarded as the final
authority for writers seeking guidance on the
questions they inevitably face in their work,
from the proper use of a particular word to the
way out of an awkward construction. Often
cited as MEU, or simply as Fowler, the book
has had its legion of admirers. Harold Ross,
founder and long-time editor of the New Yorker,
held it in high regard. ' Evelyn Waugh admon-
ished young writers to keep the book at their
elbow. 2 Winston Churchill, irritated at the
misuse of a particular word by his director of
military operations, asked him "Why must
you write 'intensive' here? 'Intense' is the
right word. You should read Fowler's Modern
English Usage on the use of the two words." 1
And T.S. Eliot, reviewing the book in 1927,
mirrored the sentiments of many later devo-
tees when he wrote: "As for Mr. Fowler's
Dictionary of Modern English Usage, every
person who wishes to write ought to read in it
(for it is inexhaustible) for a quarter of an hour
every night before going to bed." 4
Few reference books so much reflect the
character of their creator as does the Dictio-
nary of Modern English Usage. Fowler has
been described as "one of those eccentrics
who seem to be a special product of En-
gland — not the wild surrealist eccentrics, but
the logical eccentrics, who decide exactly
what to do in a large number of situations,
[and] do it with relentless consistency." 5
Fowler had a strong sense of duty, and much
of the authority of the book derives from his
sense of morality and propriety , which quickly
becomes evident to the reader. Critic Marie
Borroff has noted that
to read Fowler is to be made vividly, indeed
uncomfortably, aware of the morality of us-
age. . . . For Fowler, the writing of clear,
expressive English is a battle, and the inner
strength and courage of the good soldier are
signified by the ungrudging acceptance of
discipline in matters of external appearance.
Fowler zeros in on the 'slipshod,' the 'slov-
enly,' the 'untidy' in language; he takes us to
task for being lazy, childishly vain, or weak. 6
Fowler's Early Life
On the surface, though, there is little in
Fowler's early life to suggest that he would
become, as he has been called, the "arbiter of
the entire English language," 7 Henry W.
Fowler 8 was born in 1 858, the son of a school-
master and the eldest of eight children. He was
educated at Rugby and at Balliol College,
Oxford, though his record at Balliol showed
no great distinction. The first part of his adult
life was spent as a schoolmaster in British
public schools, for 17 years at Sedbergh in
Yorkshire. At Sedbergh Fowler was known as
42 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
"Joey Stinker" because he always smelled of
tobacco. Fowler was a reserved man, a quality
thatdoesnotalwaysmakeforapopular teacher.
One of his students wrote of him:
I don't think I or any one else in the form ever
got through his shell to know him as a human
being. I for one respected him immensely, but
in those days I should have said he lacked
humanity, ... On the whole, I think his defects
as a schoolmaster all arose from shyness,
coupled with his great fastidiousness (moral
andinteLlectual)andsomethingintheSedbergh
atmosphere that kept a barrier between boys
and masters. I used to think thatFowler lacked
humanity, and it was only ... in later years that
I learned that this was not so, 9
Fowler's moral fastidiousness led him to
leave Sedbergh in 1899. He had been in line
for a position as house master, but the position
included, preparing boys for confirmation in
the Church of England. Fowler was an agnos-
tic and did not feel he could fulfill this duty in
good conscience; the headmaster, H.G. Hart,
did not feel he could remove this duty from the
position. Though the two remained friends,
neither would modify his position. Fowler left
behind "a name for Spartan discipline and
omniscience." 10
Fowler then moved to London to begin a
literary career, relying on the modest income
of 1 20 pounds a year from an inheritance. "I'm
not going to do anything useful again," he
wrote to a friend. 11 He published a few ar-
ticles, as well as three books of essays at his
own expense, but these won him little success.
After a few years he moved to the island of
Guernsey, to a small cottage near that of his
brother Frank G, Fowler, who raised tomatoes
there. The two then began their productive
literary partnership with a translation of the
Greek poet Lucian. This translation in turn
began the authors' long association with the
Oxford University Press, publisher of the vol-
ume.
The King's English
The brothers next began work on a manual
for writers which would emphasize the com-
mon blunders and infelicities found in writing,
particularly journalistic writing; the book was
to be copiously illustrated with examples of
bad writing. The King's English (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1906) is often seen merely as
a precursor to the Dictionary of Modern En-
glish Usage, but it is an important book in its
own right, and has continued in print to this
day. Its arrangement as a handbook, with
chapters on various aspects of writing, often
makes it the easier book in which to find an
extended discussion of a topic. The book's
appeal was very much beyond the "sixth form
boys and journalists" its authors supposed it
would appeal to; "mature writers found parts
of it difficult, and parts perverse, but for
anybody who had ever tried to putpen to paper
it was either an indispensable guide or a threat
to mental health. . . . The only reassuring
aspect of the book was the abundant evidence
it provided that everybody made mistakes." 12
And as the Times noted in its obituary of H.W.
Fowler, it "took the world by storm." 13
Lexicographic Projects
The brothers' next project was the Con-
cise Oxford Dictionary of Current English
(Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1911), a one vol-
ume dictionary drawn insofar as possible from
the Oxford English Dictionary, since only the
A-S volumes were then published. The last
part of the COD was based on other sources,
for the brothers were working in seclusion in
Guernsey, and had no contact with the OED
staff in Oxford. This was the first of their
lexicographical projects, and the writing of
dictionaries was a very congenial and suc-
cessful enterprise for the brothers. The writing
of brief and precise definitions is not a com-
mon skill, and is one that the COD reveals in
abundance. This dictionary was published in
1 9 1 1 ; the brothers then began working on an
even briefer dictionary, which was to become
the Pocket Oxford Dictionary}*
In 1908, at the age of 50, Henry married
a nurse a few years his junior. The marriage
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OF MODEEN ENGLISH USAGE 43
was an unusually happy one, though his wife
was as outgoing and unscholarly as he was
scholarly and reclusive. Fowler characteristi-
cally chose to abandon this increasingly suc-
cessful and contented life when he felt duty
obliged him to do so. Henry had been some-
thing of a pacifist, and the outbreak of World
War I took him by surprise. Nonetheless,
shocked by the invasion of Belgium, he began
first to preach recruitment, and then to feel that
it was not fair for him to urge others to a
sacrifice he was not willing to make himself.
He was 57 at the time, but physically the equal
of a much younger man. Since his days at
Sedbergh he had begun his day with a run of
several miles, followed by a swim in any kind
of weather, breaking the ice if necessary.
Once, in London on Christmas Day, a friend
encountered him with his chest bleeding from
this effort. Giving his age as 44, he enlisted as
a private, then persuaded his brother to follow
him. Neither was allowed on the front lines
once their true ages were discovered, and they
spent the war washing dishes and hauling coal,
Henry was eventually discharged due to gout.
Frank contracted tuberculosis during his ser-
vice and died shortly after the war.
Advent of the Dictionary
Henry continued work on the Pocket Ox-
ford Dictionary of Current English (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1 924); it was the last book to
list both brothers as authors. He also continued
work on a project the brothers had planned
earlier, originally described as a "Dictionary
of Idioms." Henry had proposed the book to
R.W. Chapman of the Oxford University Press
in 1909. The book would treat the more diffi-
cult or problematic words from the Concise
Oxford Dictionary, and "give in detail the
information about constructions, synonyms,
&c, that in The King's English can only be
hinted at with a scanty selection of examples.
We should assume a cheerful attitude of infal-
libility." Chapman had written back that "a
Utopian Dictionary would sell very well — in
Utopia," a reply that discouraged the brothers.
However, Chapman had not intended the re-
mark to be taken so seriously, for two years
later he asked what had become of the project,
much to the brothers' surprise. 15
By the mid- 1920s the wotk was nearing
completion, and a new title needed to be
found, because the scope of the work had
expanded beyond idioms to cover a variety of
points of composition and grammar. Fowler,
stung by a newspaper reference to "the pedan-
tic brothers Fowler," at one point suggested
Oxford Pedantics, but the title Dictionary of
English Usage was finally chosen. Fowler
added the word "modem" at the last moment,
lest the book seem to promise coverage of
historical usage. 16 Though the book bore only
the name of H. W. Fowler as author, its preface
contained a dedication to the younger brother
that noted "The present book accordingly
contains none of his actual writing; but, hav-
ing been designed in consultation with him, it
is the last fruit of a partnership that began in
1903 with our translation of Lucian." 17
Critical Reception
The book was an immediate success,
though critics often were puzzled by its idio-
syncrasies. "It is difficult to describe this
book" began one reviewer, 18 a sentiment many
have surely shared. Its originality was not so
much in doing an entirely new thing, but in
doing it with much greater thoroughness and
exactitude than had earlier usage dictionaries
and style manuals. "Most treatises written to
correct the evil [of poor writing] have been
either dusty little compilations of errors, or
rather florid school-boy discourses based on
Latin grammar, "noted another reviewer. "Mr.
Fowler's book, thank heaven, is neither of
these." 19 The expertise gained in writing dic-
tionaries certainly helped the author; Joseph
Epstein has noted that this is "clearly the book
that all Fowler's previous experience led him
to write." 20 Fowler also had the entire OED,
then newly completed, to draw upon for ety-
44 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS QF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
mologies and for evidence in the use of par-
ticular words. The impression of thorough-
ness is enhanced by Fowler's copious use of
examples of the proper or (more often) im-
proper use of a word, or of certain problematic
constructions; as many as 10 or 20 examples
may be used in a single article.
More puzzling was the arrangement of
material. George Krapp was perhaps the first
to note that "though it is called a dictionary, it
is so mainly in the respect that the materials in
it are arranged in alphabetic dictionary or-
der." 21 Many entries do simply treat a single
word or a group of related words. These
entries range from several pages for such
troublesome words as "only"(onepage, double
column) or "that" (nine pages), to a line or two
to note the pronunciation or spelling of a
particular word, or distinguish among various
words liable to confusion. We can, for ex-
ample, go to Fowler to find out that a toy-shop
is a store where toys are sold, while a toy shop
is a "child's mock shop"; or to find
"unsubstantial" recommended over "insub-
stantial" 22
Intermingled with these are a series of
topical entries. At the front of the book is a list
of 455 "General Articles," which includes
both the topical entries and the longer entries
for troublesome words . The 1 ist is presumably
to aid the reader in finding a particular discus-
sion, and there are indeed some entries a
reader would readily recognize, such as "Par-
allel-Sentence Dangers," "Hyphens," or "Se-
quence of Tenses." Many entries are much
less clear, however, with names like "Swap-
ping Horses," "Out of the Fry ing-Pan," "Pairs
& Snares," and "Cannibalism." "Swapping
Horses" covers such problems as changing the
sense in which a word is used in mid-sentence,
and "Cannibalism" discusses instances where
a common word such as "that" is needed twice
in a sentence, but used only once. "Out of the
Frying-Pan" treats instances where a writer,
attempting to avoid some questionable con-
struction, winds up with something worse; this
is one of Fowler's favorite themes. A long
article called "French Words" gives the pro-
nunciation for many French words andphrases
that have found their way into English, and an
article called "Technical Terms" gives defini-
tions for many rhetorical and literary terms.
Liberal cross references are given to these
general articles, though this does not always
make it easy to find the discussion of a particu-
lar problem or construction.
The Author's imprint
The true originality of the book comes not
from its arrangement, however, but from the
author's personality, which forcefully im-
presses itself upon the reader in article after
article. The dictionary article form finally
gave Fowler his voice, 23 and what an unmis-
takable voice it is, as the passages below
demonstrate:
From the article "Salad Days ": Whether the
point [of this phrase] is that youth, like salad,
is raw, or that salad is highly flavoured &
youth loves high flavours, or that innocent
herbs are youth's food as milk is babes' &
meat is men's, few of those who use the phrase
could perhaps tell us; if so, it is fitter for
parrots' than for human speech. 24
From "Love of the Long Word": "A few lines
of the long-word style we know so well are
added: Vigorous condemnation is passed on
theforeignpolicyofthePrimeMinister, 'whose
temperamental inaptitude for diplomacy &
preoccupation with domestic issues have ren-
dered his participation in external negotia-
tions gravely detrimental to the public wel-
fare '. Vigorous indeed; a charging hippopota-
mus hardly more so. 25
From "Italics": The practiced writer is aware
that his business is to secure prominence for
what he regards as the essence of his commu-
nication by so marshalling his sentences that
they shall lead up to a climax, or group them-
selves round a centre, or be worded with
different degrees of impressiveness as the
need of emphasis varies; he knows too that it
is an insult to the reader's intelligence to
admonish him periodically by a change of
type, like a bad teacher imploring his boys to
attend for a moment, that he cannot safely go
w*
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OF MODERN ENGLISH USAGE 45
to sleep just now. ... To italicize whole
sentences or large parts of them as a guarantee
that some portion of what one has written is
really worth attending to is a miserable con-
fession that the rest is negligible, 26
Small wonder many reacted as did Henry
Fuller, the reviewer for the New York Times:
"After a few hours' browsing through these
many hundreds of pages, one reaches the state
where he hardly dares attempt to write En-
glish." 27 Fowler's liberal use of negative
examples certainly reinforced the impression
of him as an astringent critic. Eric Partridge,
who would later write his own book on En-
glish usage, was a junior lecturer at the Uni-
versity of Manchester when Fowler's book
appeared, and has noted the "stir made by this
austere work. Students and other irreverent
persons delighted in Fowler's pillorying, both
of the Times and other important periodicals
and of celebrated writers." 28 Partridge added,
however, that Fowler was motivated not "to
puncture this reputation or that, nor yet to
show how clever he was, ... but simply in
order to perform a public service," 29 Fowler in
reality remained the schoolmaster, carefully
and thoroughly explaining to the reader how a
particular word is to be used, or why a particu-
lar construction should be preferred to an-
other. 30 He could be sensitive to criticism at
times, but tried to view it with equanimity, as
he demonstrated when he republished one of
his early volumes of essays after he had be-
come a famous man. Fowler introduced the
book with excerpts from both the positive and
negative reviews of the earlier edition, includ-
ing such notices as "This group of self-con-
scious, verbose essays." 31
A Prescriptivist Grammarian?
Fowler has been criticized as a narrow
prescriptivis*: grammarian, attempting to leg-
islate language usage, and also praised as a
great liberal, freeing English usage from the
petty and arbitrary rules of Victorian school-
masters and grammarians. The truth is some-
where in between. One perhaps looks in vain
for absolutely consistentprinciples in Fowler' s
work; as one critic noted "he often took away
with one hand the principle he had offered
with the other . " 3 2 He certainly enj oyed demol-
ishing the many traditional rules that did more
harm than good. The fear of ending a sentence
with a preposition is a "superstition .... The
fact is that the remarkable freedom enjoyed by
English inputting its prepositions late & omit-
ting its relatives is an important element in the
flexibility of the language." 33 Split infinitives
also are permissible; those who split infini-
tives unawares "are a happy folk ... 'to really
understand' comes readier to their lips & pens
than 'really to understand* , they see no reason
why they should not say it (small blame to
them, seeing that reasons are not their critics'
strong point.)" What Fowler really wanted,
however, was for his reader to be able to
discriminate when to splitthem: "We will split
infinitives sooner than be ambiguous or artifi-
cial; more than that, we will freely admit that
sufficient recasting will get rid of any s. i.
without involving either of those faults, & yet
reserve to ourselves the right of deciding in
each case whether recasting is worth while." 34
Fowler even defended the placement of the
word "only" in such sentences as "He only
died yesterday," rather than the more strictly
logical "He died only yesterday," because
there is no danger of confusion and it is more
natural English. 35 Certainly in these and in
many other opinions he defied the strict con-
ventions of most Victorian style manuals, and
for that matter of many editors and English
teachers to this day. Sir Ernest Gowers re-
called that when the book appeared it was
hailed "as a gust of common sense that swept
away the cobwebs of grammarians' fetishes." 36
A Deference to Latin
Yet Fowler certainly was a prescriptivist
who felt that there were correct and incorrect
ways of using English, and there were times
when he defended causes it would perhaps
have been wiser to abandon. He particularly
46 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
could be led astray when English usage began
to offend against Latin grammaticalprinciples
and etymologies. 37 An oft-cited example is
Fowler's treatment of the word "meticulous,"
Fowler objected to the use of the word "me-
ticulous" unless accompanied by the meaning
of "timid" or "fearful." He objected partly
because the word was otherwise simply an
unnecessary replacement for "scrupulous" and
"punctilious," but also because the word de-
rived from the Latin root "metus," meaning
fearful. 38 On the first ground Fowler was at
least generally consistent: he often objected to
words he considered superfluous, particularly
when longer or more pretentious words had
taken the places of simpler ones, as "faience"
for "porcelain," or "habitude" for "habit." 39
He also tended to argue for preserving fine
distinctions between words; he carefully ex-
plained the distinctions between "accessary"
and "accessory," or advised when "individual"
may properly be used as a noun, and even
attempted to differentiate "slush" and "slosh,"
or "slaver" and "slobber." 40 But on the second
ground he was less consistent. He often con-
demned as pedantic the too strict construction
of a word's meaning when it flies in the face
of common usage; for example, of the use of
"America" to mean the United States, we
read, "It will continue to be protested against
by purists & patriots, & will doubtless survive
the protests," 41
Fowler's deference to Latin is perhaps
even more striking in his treatment of gram-
mar, which many have found the weakest
aspect of his work. One of the first to take
Fowler to task in this regard was the noted
Danish grammarian and scholar of English
Otto Jespersen, who attacked Fowler's treat-
ment of the fused participle. The King's En-
glish gave this name to such constructions as
"without the man telling us" (rather than "with-
out the man's telling us," which the Fowlers
regarded as correct). 42 H.W. Fowler pub-
lished these views in an expanded form as a
tract of the Society for Pure English in 1925,
discussion reappeared in the Dictio-
nary of Modern English Usage," Fowler had
two basic objections to the construction: that
it tended to produce ambiguous and cumber-
some sentences, and that it was ungram-
matical — by which he essentially meant that it
could not be analyzed by the rules of tradi-
tional Latin grammar. Jespersen argued that
the construction had been long (and idiomati-
cally) used in English, and could be explained
grammatically, if not by traditional Latin-
based grammar. 44 The significance of this
somewhat esoteric debate is that Jespersen,
whose case is certainly the more convincing,
identified one of Fowler's most significant
weaknesses: "If [certain constructions in En-
glish] cannot be analyzed according to Latin
grammar, the reply is obviously that there are
many things in English as well as in other
languages that cannot be understood from the
Latin grammar we were taught in our youth." 45
Jespersen called Fowler an "instinctive gram-
matical moralizer," 46 and this title has stayed
with Fowler. Fowler seems to have been en-
tirely unaware of and unsympathetic toward
the work of scholars such as Jespersen, who
were attempting to replace traditional Latin-
based English grammar with a more purely
descriptive grammar. In his reply to Jespersen,
he defended the application of Latin grammar
to English; "our [English] grammatical con-
science has by this time a Latin element inex-
tricably compounded in it." 47 Jespersen was
not the only writer of the time to fault Fowler
on this point. The Dutch scholar Kruisinga
authored a devastating review on this part of
Fowler's work, using the occasion to attack
the neglect of linguistic studies in English
academic circles. "To expect Mr. Fowler to
consult a book of a real grammarian ... is
misunderstanding his state of mind com-
pletely." 48 Another review from the Conti-
nent, in a morebalanced appraisal, complained
that the "grammar part is altogether unsatis-
factory, because Mr. Fowler has not the slight-
est notion of what English and continental
scholars have written on the subjects treated
by him." 49 More recently, linguist Randolph
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OFMODFJiN FNOLTMN mAGK 47
Quirk has noted that in his "fused particle"
argument, Fowler defended views that had
been discredited as many as 50 years earlier. 50
Other Issues
Fowler certainly canbe criticized for other
excesses. His article "Genteelisms" sensibly
condemned the use of "domestic" for "ser-
vant," or "save" for "except," but also en-
dorsed "belly" for "stomach," and "corn-cut-
ter" for "chiropodist." 51 And Fowler some-
times seems too much a man of his time.
Kenneth Stiles was perhaps the first to note
that "from these pages emerges an admirable
portrait of an English gentleman. Conserva-
tive; respectful of tradition, yet an individual-
ist .. . polite to inferiors, while perfectly
conscious of their inferiority; distrustful of
display; insular."" This may help explain
Fowler' s frequent distrust of new usages until
they were established, as well as his condem-
nation of the "pedantry" of sticking too much
to outworn rules. He distrusted displays of
learning, as with the scholar who prefers the
form "Mohammed" to the good English
"Mahomet," but he also seemed to distrust
those ignorant of the Latin derivation of such
words as "meticulous." More modern sensi-
bilities may not be comfortable with his fre-
quent condemnation of a given word or usage
as "illiterate," or his characterization of the
use of the word "aggravate" to mean "annoy"
as "a feminine or childish colloquialism." 53
Fowler himself was not entirely unaware of
his insularity; the discussion of "shall" and
"will" in The King's English begins "It is
unfortunate that the idiomatic use, while it
comesby nature to southern Englishman (who
will find most of this section superfluous), is
so complicated that those who are not to the
manner born can hardly acquire it; and for
them the section is in danger of being use-
less." 54
One can also criticize Fowler's own style.
W. Somerset Maugham greatly admired the
book, but complained that "Fowler had no ear.
He did not see that simplicity may sometimes
make concessions to euphony." 55 AndFowler
was not always the master of simplicity ; some-
times his desire to drive home a point, and to
express a complexnotion withprecision, makes
for very difficultprose. C.T. Onions, who read
the proofs of the book for the Oxford Univer-
sity Press, complained that "Fowler's ingenu-
ity has surpassed itself, with the not infrequent
result of mere obscurity." 56 And one can
complain that the book, even, when it came
out, was slightly out of date, or that it reflected
written rather than oral speech.
Yet Fowler cannot be so easily dismissed.
Kemp Malone's review is often quoted by the
linguistic critics of Fowler: "At bottom his
book is unsound. It gives us the conclusions of
a learned and charming dilettante rather than
those of a man of science. It is a collection of
linguistic prejudices persuasively presented
by a clever advocate; it is not an objective,
scientific presentation of the facts of English
usage." ButMalone'sreview concluded: "Mr.
Fowler's volume belongs rather with books
like Mr. Mencken's American Language than
with works of exact scholarship. But when I
say this, 1 am not condemning the book. One
the contrary, I am praising it. Grammarian and
layman alike ought to have it on their shelves,
and if they fail to find it highly enjoyable and
highly stimulating, there is something wrong
with them." 57
Fowler's Contribution and Influence
So where does Fowler's contribution lie?
Much of it certainly lies in his consistent
unmasking of pretentious, empty, and thought-
less writing for what it is. He is at his best in
articles such as "Love of the Long Word" or
"Polysyllabic Humor," or in revealing preten-
sions and humbugs of all kinds. The use of
antiquated words such as "anent" or "well-
nigh" is treated in the article " Wardour Street,"
named after a street in London occupied prin-
cipally by antique dealers. Literary critics are
castigated for the use of words such as "actu-
48 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
&
ality" and "inevitable," shorn of their meaning
by thoughtless over-use; "vogue-words," such
as "feasible," "mentality" or "acid test " are
condemned for the same reason. 58 Fowler
drives home his point with ruthless analysis
and numerous examples; three columns of
type are used to condemn the vogue-word
"unthinkable," a word loved by "all who like
to combine the most forcible sound with the
haziest meaning." 59 To these contributions
must also be added his remarkably sure sense
of English idiom, and his relentless analysis of
the many pitfalls the writer faces. Who else
could advise us so well (and so thoroughly) on
the proper use of the problematic word "as," or
distinguish whether to use "bloom" or "blos-
som?" Even Jespersen found that there was
more in the book to admire than to condemn, 50
and W. Somerset Maugham wrote "I do not
think anyone writes so well that he cannot
learn much from [Fowler]." 61
And, of course, there is the force of the
author's personality. Fowler takes the task of
writing seriously, and invites the reader to do
so too, Jespersen was certainly correct in
calling him a "moralizer," but he is more than
simply that. Marshall McLuhan has noted that
"Fowler approached language in the spirit of
gamesmanship (and even of one-upmanship)
and his instruments varied from the precision
rifle to the butterfly net and the X-ray. . .
Fowler never fails in his most censorious
moments to direct a very perceptible wink at
his readers." 62 It is not a book that yields its
wealth to the hurried reader who needs to find
a quick answer to some question of language
or style, but rather to the reader willing to learn
what the author has to offer, and to share his
passion for the English language.
What influence has Fowler had? The
claim, originating in the Times Literary Supple-
ment, that "probably Henry Fowler has more
powerfully affected the development of En-
glish prose style since 1926 than Bridges,
Kipling, Shaw or any of his contemporary
masters" 63 is of course impossible to prove or
disprove. His advocacy of a plain, direct, and
unadorned style had obvious appeal to many
writers of the twentieth century. Randolph
Quirk has distinguished between Fowler's
influence over details, which has perhaps been
slight — words such as "meticulous" flourish,
and no one today says "corn-cutter" for "chi-
ropodist" — and his influence in principle,
which "is perhaps quite extensive. We are
probably more self-critical in the use of hack-
neyed phrases, hyphens, gallicisms, and even
Unequal Yokefellows and Cannibalisms than
the first readers of The King's English and
Modem English Usage. The Fowler brothers
. . . heightened the sense of style and personal
responsibility for expression among writers in
the English-speaking world." 64
Revision
"To tamper with Fowler has taken both
humility and courage — or perhaps foolhardi-
ness." 65 These words were writtenby Fowler's
firstreviser, MargaretNicholson, and pointup
the difficulty of revising a work so much the
product of one man's personality. Nicholson
was an editor for the American branch of the
Oxford University Press, and her book, pub-
lished in 1957, is actually an adaptation for the
American reader, called A Dictionary of
American-English Usage. The work was also
intended as a simplification of Fowler; indeed,
the publisherpromoted it as a "Faster Fowler."
It was shorter by about a third. Nicholson did
try to "retain as much of the original as space
allowed," but cut many of Fowler's numerous
examples and lengthy explanations,
A basic problem with this revision was
that it tried to make the book into something it
was never intended to be. Fowler certainly
was fundamentally British; as one critic noted,
"you cannot hope to retain 'as much of the
original as space allowed' and expect to pro-
duce a meaningful description of something
else." 66 Mixed in with Nicholson's advice on
American usage are portions retained from
Fowler's original, with their British examples
and tone. Nor is it easy to make a book like
1 ^»*—
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OF MODERN ENGLISH USAGE 49
Fowler's into a model of quick reference; "it
is Fowler for people whom H.W. Fowler did
not choose to take into account — the hasty, the
arbitrary and the half-educated who wantrules
rather than reason." 67 And many reviewers
found that Nicholson did not command a
sufficiently good sense of American idiom,
and had not identified many of the places
where usage had changed since Fowler' s day.
She retained, for example, his strictures that "a
Chinaman" is common and preferred usage,
and that "on the carpet" means "under discus-
sion." 68 Some found her more arbitrary and
prescriptive than Fowler had ever been. 69
Gowers' Revision
The very mixed success of Nicholson's
work did not dampen the desire of the Oxford
University Press to publish an entirely new
edition of the work. This revision, the second
edition of Modem English Usage, fell to Sir
Ernest Gowers and was published in 1965.
Gowers was a career civil servant who pro-
duced a guide to good English for use by
British civil servants. This guide was pub-
lished as Plain Words (London: H.M, Statio-
nery Officer, 1948), and attained a far wider
audience than its original purpose suggested.
Gowers seemed the perfect candidate to re-
vise Fowler. Like Fowler, he approached
Modern English Usage late in life, revising it
during his retirement at his Hampshire estate.
He added much new material, making space
by eliminating many short entries that merely
established spelling or pronunciation of a word,
since this information could be found in ordi-
nary dictionaries. The long articles on "Tech-
nical Terms" and "French Words" were omit-
ted, though some of the material was retained
in short entries under the various terms.
Many of Fowler's judgments were, of
course, modified; Gowers gave up the battle
against using "aggravate" to mean "annoy,"
and noted that it is useless to force "meticu-
lous" into "an etymological strait-jacket." 70
We are no longer enjoined to avoid "stomach"
and "chiropodist" as genteelisms, nor are lo-
cutions condemned as "illiterate" or "femi-
nine," Gowers rewrote a few of Fowler's
more convoluted explanations, and eliminated
some of the excessive examples, though not to
the drastic degree Nicholson had. A classified
guide to the general articles was provided to
aid the user in finding the discussion of a
particular point. However, the book is still not
always easy to use for reference, a fact made
evident by the publication four years later of a
thorough index called Find It in Fowler
(Princeton, NJ: Wolfhart Book Co., 1969).
Gowers, however, took care to insure that
the revision would retain the stamp of the
original. As much of Fowler* s text as possible
was kept; "rewrite him and he ceases to be
Fowler," Gowers noted. 7 ' Gowers' s revision
is remarkable for catching the tone of the
original while bringing it up to date. It is
difficult at times to tell where the original
leaves off and the revision begins, and many
ofthenewarticleshaveanalmostFowleresque
tone, if not quite with the bite or the playful-
ness of Fowler's style.
This revision was quite well received,
though some reviewers worried about the
wisdom of trying to patch Fowler in this way,
skillfully as it had been done. The Times noted
that Fowler's old-fashioned language was "not
a language in which it seems aesthetically
fitting to discuss the modern English usage of
1965." 72 Another critic complained that
"Fowler's attitude is not a possible one for a
good mind in the 1960's, and the attempt at
modernization leads Gowers into irreconcil-
able conflicts." 73 Gowers reprinted in full
Fowler's article on the fused participle, for
example, but added comments of his own to
modify Fowler's strictures and to summarize
the famous dispute with Jespersen. Some crit-
ics still found the work lacking in its aware-
ness of current work in grammar and linguis-
tics. 74
Fowler's Relevance Today
What relevance does Fowler' s book have
today? R.W. Burchfield, who is now at work
50 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
on a third edition, observed a few years ago
that — despite criticism of the work by gram-
marians — scholars and writers of all kinds
continue to rely on Fowler for guidance. 75
Demand for the book justified a paperback
edition in 1983. The need for a thorough
revision, however, certainly becomes appar-
ent as the language changes. Marie Borroff
recently observed that "Fowler remains a clas-
sic, indispensable, yet of little practical help in
the day-to-day scuffle." 76 Burchfield, though
appreciative of Gowers's revision" realizes
that a new edition cannot be approached in the
same way. The "verdicts and evidence of
[Fowler] now needed to be replaced, not just
modified here and there." He promises that
the book, to be published in 1992, will be
"mildly prescriptive, dogmatic in my own
manner, and thoroughly up to date." As with
Gowers's revision, American usage will be
given some prominence, but, as with the ear-
lier editions (omitting of course Nicholson's
adaptation), British usage will remain the chief
focus. 78 There will be some who question
whether such a thoroughly rewritten Fowler
should bear the name of this idiosyncratic
author, perhaps making his name an eponym
on the order of Webster's or Roget's. But
certainly there is a need to replicate in the late
twentieth century Fowler's achievement three-
quarters of a century earlier. Burchfield, as
editor of the four-volume supplement to the
Oxford English Dictionary, revives the con-
nection between pure lexicography and the
MEU that Fowler himself began, and one can
only wish him the same success.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Fowler, H.W. A Dictionary of Modern English Us-
age. Oxford: Clarendon Press; London: H.
Milford, 1926. 742p.
Nicholson, Margaret. A Dictionary of American-
English Usage, Based on Fowler's Modern
English Usage. New York: Oxford University
Press, 1957. 67 lp.
Fowler, H.W. A Dictionary of Modern English Us-
age. 2nd ed., rev. by Sir Ernest Gowers. New
York: Oxford University Press, 1965. 725p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The standard treatment of Fowler's life
was written by his close friend, G.G. Coulton.
Accounts of the publication of the Dictionary
of Modern English Usage can be found in
Peter Sutcliffe's history of the Oxford Univer-
sity Press and in the article "Fowler and His
'Modern English Usage'" from the Times
Literary Supplement. The articles by Otto
Jespersen and E. Kruisinga represent the two
most famous contemporary attacks on
Fowler's weaknesses. A great many laudatory
articles appeared in decades following the
publication of the first edition; notable are
those by Eric Partridge, Gilbert Highet, and
Jacques Barzun, and the article "Auspice
Aucupe" from the TLS. The article by Barzun,
however, is primarily an attack upon
Nicholson's revision. Randolph Quirk offers
an appreciative but critical evaluation from
the point of view of a modern linguist and
grammarian.
The two primary revisers of Fowler's
work — Gowers and Burchfield — each served
as president of the English Association and
devoted their presidential addresses to evalu-
ations of Fowler's work. An interview with
Gowers concerning his revision can be found
under the title "Our Man in Trotton" in the
New Yorker. The publication of Gowers's
revision prompted reviews by a number of
prominent writers; those of Marshall McLuhan,
David Daiches, and Anthony Burgess are of
particular interest The review from the TLS^
"How Modern is Your English Usage," pre-
sents an interesting and rather negative view
of the revision. More recent articles by Marie
Borroff and Joseph Epstein assess the con-
tinuing value of various dictionaries of En-
glish usage, with particular attention to
Fowler's.
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OF MODERN ENGLISH USAGE 51
"Auspice Aucupe." Times Literary Supplement no.
2892 (August 2, 1957): 471.
Barzun, Jacques. "Fowler's Generation." American
Scholar 26 (Summer, 1957): 315-23.
Borroff, Marie. "'Fowler and the Rest."' Yale Re-
view 1 A (Spring, 1985): 353-67.
Burchfield, Robert W. The Fowlers: Their Achieve-
ments in Lexicography and Grammar. English
Association Presidential Address. London: En-
glish Association, 1979.
Burgess, Anthony. "Switched-OnFowler." Observer
no. 9071 (May 9, 1965): 27.
Coulton, G.G. H. W. Fowler. S. P. E. Tract no.43.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1934.
Daiches, David. "Speaking of Books: H.W. Fowler."
New York Times Book Review 70 (August 15,
1965): 2.
Dangerfield, George. "The Brothers Fowler."
Bookman 75 (June/July, 1932): 209-17.
Epstein, Joseph. "What's the Usage?" New Crite-
rion 6 (June, 1988): 9-20.
"Fowler and His 'Modern English Usage.'" Times
Literary Supplement no. 2935 (May 30, 1958):
302.
Gowers, Sir Ernest. H. W, Fowler: The Man and His
Teaching. English Association Presidential
Address. London: English Association, 1957.
Greenwood, J. Arthur. Find It in Fowler: An Alpha-
betical Index to the Second Edition (1965) ofB.
W. Fowler's Modern English Usage. Princeton,
NJ: WolfhartBookCo., 1969.
Highet, Gilbert. "Henry Fowler: Modern English
Usage." In People Places and Books, 3-12.
New York: Oxford University Press, 1953.
"How Modern is Your English Usage." Times Liter-
ary Supplement no. 3299 (May 20, 1965): 395.
Jespersen, Otto. "On Some Disputed Points in En-
glish Grammar." S. P. E. Tract no. 25. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1926.
John, V.V. "Fowler: Forty Years After." Literary
Criterion! (1966): 11-20.
Kronenberger, Louis. "How Not to Write, What Not
to Say." Atlantic Monthly 216 (September,
1965): 97-100.
Kruisinga, E. "English Grammar as She is Taught at
Oxford." English Studies 8 (December, 1926):
181-85.
McLuhan, Marshall. "Wordfowling inBlunderland."
Saturday Night 80 (August, 1965): 23-27.
Nicholson, Harold. "Two Acute Linguists." Listener
59 (April 10, 1958): 619, 622.
"Our Man in Trotton." New Yorker 41 (August 14,
1965): 20-23.
Partridge, Eric. "Henry Watson Fowler." In A Charm
of Words: Essays and Papers on Language, 63-
67. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1960. Origi-
nally published in slightly shorter form as "To
the English-Using World He Counseled Perfec-
tion," New York Times Book Review 63 (March
9, 1958): 5.
Pyles, Thomas. "The New Fowler." SewaneeReview
74 (Spring, 1966): 540-44.
Quirk, Randolph. "The Toils of Fowler and Moral
Gowers." Chapter 9 in The English Language
and Images of Matter. London: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1972. Portions originally published
as "Fowler's Toils," Listener 59 (March 13,
1958): 449-51, and as "Fowler's Net," New
Statesman 69 (May 21, 1965): 812-13.
Stiles, Kenneth. "H. W. Fowler'sEnglishman." Spec-
tator 159 (July2, 1937):12-13.
Sutcliffe, Peter. The Oxford University Press: An
Informal History. Oxford: Clarendon Press,
1978.
NOTES
1 Gilbert Highet, "Henry Fowler: Modern English Us-
age," in People Places and Books (New York:
Oxford University Press, 1953), 4.
1 Quoted in "Fowler's English," Commonweal 67 (21
March 1958): 630.
3 George Frazier, "Fowler's Love Affair with the Lan-
guage," Life 59 (20 August 1965): 8.
4 T. S. Eliot, "Books of the Quarter," New Criterion 5
(January 1927): 124. Italics in original.
J Highet, 4.
6 Marie Borroff, '"Fowler and the Rest,'" Yale Review 74
(Spring 1985): 361.
7 Joseph Epstein, "What's the Usage?" New Criterion 6
(June 1988): 12.
"Except where otherwise indicated, details about Fowler's
life are taken from G. G. Coulton, H. W. Fowler, S.
P. E. Tract no. 43 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1934).
9 Sir Alexander Lawrence, quoted in Coulton, 104-05,
10 "Henry Watson Fowler," Sedberghian (March 1934):
4.
11 Coulton, 117. Italics in original.
12 Peter Sutcliffe, The Oxford University Press: An Infor-
mal History (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1978), 152.
13 "Mr. H. W. Fowler: A Lexicographical Genius," Times,
28 December 1933, 12.
14 Robert W. Burchfield, The Fowlers: Their Achieve-
ments in Lexicography and Grammar, English As-
sociation Presidential Address (London: English
Association: 1979), 11-14.
15 "Fowler and his 'Modern English Usage,'" Times
Literary Supplement no. 2935 (30 May 1958): 302.
16 Ibid.
17 H.W. Fowler, A Dictionary of Modern English Usage
(Oxford: Clarendon Press; London: Humphrey
Milford, 1926), Hi.
52 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
18 F. Sidgwick, review of Dictionary of Modern English
Usage, by H. W. Fowler, Review of English Studies
2 (October 1926): 490.
19 George N. Shuster, review of Dictionary of Modern
English Usage, by H. W. Fowler, Commonweal 5
(23 February 1927): 443.
20 Epstein, 14.
21 George Philip Krapp, "P's and Q V Saturday Review
of Literature 2 (17 July 1926): 933,
22 H. W. Fowler, A Dictionary of Modern English Usage,
see "Toy" and "Insubstantial."
23 Epstein, 14.
24 Fowler, Modern English Usage, see "Salad Days."
"Ibid., see "Love of the Long Word." Italics in original,
26 Ibid., see "Italics."
n "Henry B. Fuller, "Even Syntax Provides Comic Re-
lief," New York Times Book Review 76 (2 January
1927): 2.
28 Eric Partridge, "Henry Watson Fowler," in^ Charm of
Words: Essays and Papers on Language (London:
Hamish Hamilton, 1960), 65-66.
29 Ibid., 66.
30 David Daiches, "Speaking of Books: H. W. Fowler,"
New YorkTimes BookReview 70 (15 August 1965):
2;Sutcliffe, 153.
31 Review of "Si Mini—!" by H. W. Fowler, Yorkshire
Observer, quoted in H. W. Fowler, If Wishes Were
Horses (London: George Allen &Unwin, 1929), 4.
32 F.G. Cassidy, review of Dictionary of American-
English Usage, by Margaret Nicholson, Archivum
Linguisticum 10(1958): 144.
33 }l.Vf.Vavt\<:r,Modern English Usage,se& "Preposition
at End."
34 Ibid., see "Split Infinitive."
35 Ibid,, see "Only."
36 Sir Ernest Gowers, H. W. Fowler: The Man and His
Teaching, English Association, Presidential Ad-
dress (London: English Association, 1957), 10.
"Kenneth Stiles, "H. W. Fowler's Englishman," Specta-
tor 159 (2 July 1937): 12; Randolph Quirk, "The
Toils of Fowler and Moral Gowers," in The English
Language and Images of Matter (London.; Oxford
University Press, 1972), 91.
38 Fowler, Modern English Usage, see "Meticulous,"
3 ' Ibid., see "Superfluous Words."
'"'Ibid,, see "Accessary, Accessory," "Individual," "S lush,
Sludge, Slosh," and "Slaver, Slobber, Slubber."
41 Ibid,, see "America(n),"
42 H.W. Fowlerand F.G, Fowler, The King's English, 2nd
ed. (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1919), 116-25.
43 H. W. Fowler, "Fused Participle," 5. P, E. Tract no. 22
(1925): 43-47; Fowler, Modern English Usage, see
"Fused Participle,"
44 Otto Jespersen, On Some Disputed Points in English
Grammar,S. P. E. Tract no. 25 (Oxford: Clarendon
Press, 1926).
4i Ibid., 170.
46 Ibid., 148.
47 H.W. Fowler, "On -ing: Professor Jespersen and 'The
Instinctive Grammatical Moralizer, '" S. P. E. Tract
no. 26 (1927): 195.
48 E. Kruisinga, "English Grammar as She is Taught at
Oxford," English Studies 8 (December 1 926): 181-
85.
49 P. Fijn van Draat, review of Dictionary of Modern
English [/sage, by H. W. Fowler, EnglischeStudien
63 (September 1 928): 85 . Also of interest is G. van
Langenhove, review at Dictionary of Modern En-
glish Usage, by H. W. Fowler, Revue beige de
philologie et d'histoire 6 (1927), 841-44.
50 Quirk, 93.
51 Fowler, Modern English Usage, see "Genteelism."
"Stiles, 12.
SJ Fowler, Modern English Usage, see "Aggravate."
54 Fowler and Fowler, King's English, 133.
ss W. Somerset Maugham, The Summing Up (London:
William Heinemann, 1938), 42.
ss "Fowler and his 'Modern English Usage,'" 302.
57 Kemp Malone, review of Dictionary of Modern En-
glish Usage, by H. W. Fowler, Modern Language
Notes 42 (March 1927): 201-02.
ss Fowler, Modern English Usage, see "Literary Critics*
words" and "Vogue-words "
59 Ibid., see "Unthinkable."
60 Jespersen, 142.
61 Maugham, 41.
62 Marshall McLuhan, "Wordfowling in Blunderland,"
Saturday Night 80 (August 1965): 23.
63 "Auspice Aucupe," Times Literary Supplement no.
2892 (2 August 1957): 471.
64 Quirk, 94-95.
65 Margaret Nicholson, A Dictionary of American-En-
glish Usage, Based on Fowler 's "Modern English
Usage "(New York: Oxford University Press, 1957),
v,
66 C, K. Thomas, review of Dictionary of American-
English Usage, by Margaret Nicholson, Quarterly
Journal of Speech 44 (April 1958): 200.
67 Robertson Davies, "The Stream and the Creek," Satur-
day Night 72 (26 October 1957): 26.
68 Nicholson, see "Chinaman" and "Carpet." For criti-
cisms of this aspect ofNicholson ' s work, see Jacques
Barzun, "Fowler's Generation," /4mmc<JH Scholar
26 (Summer 1957): 315-23; Dwight MacDonald,
"Sweet Are the Uses of Usage," New Yorker 34 (17
May 1958): 136-54; Cassidy, review, 143-47.
69 Cassidy, 145. Also critical of prescriptive tendencies
in Nicholson is R.W. Zandvoort, review of Dictio-
nary of American-English Usage, by Margaret
Nicholson, English Studies 41 (June 1960): 213-
15. For a more positive view of Nicholson's work,
see Harold Whitehall, "The Elusive Word" Kenyon
Review 19 (Autumn 1957): 641-43.
70 H.W. Fowler, A Dictionary of Modern English Usage,
2nd ed., rev. by Sir Ernest Gowers (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1965), see "Meticulous."
71 Sir Ernest Gowers, "Preface" to H. W. Fowler, Modern
English Usage, 2nd ed., ix.
72 "How Modern is Your English Usage?" Times Literary
Supplement no. 3299 (20 May 1965): 395,
73 Barbara M. H. Strang, review of Dictionary of Modern
English Usage,by H.W. ¥owler,ModernLanguage
Review 61 (April 1966): 264.
74 Ewald Standop, "Sprachwissenschaft und Sprachpflege:
zur Neubearbeitung von Fowlers Modern English
Usage," Anglia 83 (1965): 390-410; L. F.
Brosnahan, review of Dictionary of Modern En-
FOWLER'S DICTIONARY OF MODERN ENGLISH USAGE 53
glish Usage, by H.W. Fowler, AUMLA no. 26 7 « Borroff, 367.
(November 1966): 343-45; YvanLebrun,, "Fowler 77 R. W. Burchfield, review of Dictionary of Modern
revu par Gowers," Revue des langues vivantes 32 English Usage, by H. W. Fowler, Listener 73 (6
(1966): 324-27. May 1965): 675.
" Burchfield, The Fowlers, 19-20. 78 R..W. Burchfield, letter to the author, 24 April 1990.
m
"The Most Amusing Book in the
Language": The Dictionary of National
Biography
Johannah Sherrer
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
In 1893 Leslie Stephen called the Dictionary
of National Biography "the most amusing
book in the language." 1 One might argue that
as its first editor Stephen was too close to the
DNB to make an objective judgment. The
passage of time, however, has tested his words
and proven them true. No other national biog-
raphy possesses the color, quality > charm,
clever turns of phrases, eccentricity, or out-
right pizazz that characterize the Dictionary
of National Biography. Begun in 1885 and
current to date, the DNB is remarkable on
many levels, not the least of which are its
conception, origin, aims, and intent.
Precursors
The genre of biography and specifically
that of collective biography can be traced
back many hundreds of years. British at-
tempts at producing biographical dictionaries
included the Biographia Briiannica pub-
lished in seven folios between 1747 and 1766.
The first important English work came out in
eleven volumes in 1761 and was titled The
New and General Biographical Dictionary*
Several editions followed, but the edition
published between 1812— 1817with Alexander
Chalmers as editor, marked that title's pin-
nacle of achievement. 3 Between 1839 and
1847 Rose's New General Biographical Dic-
tionary appeared in twelve volumes. More
than half of the twelve volumes were con-
sumed by the letters A, B, and C and the articles
were mainly abridgements from other dictio-
naries.' 4 None of the above efforts were consid-
ered an appropriate reflection of British schol-
arship nor were they deemed effective univer-
sal biographies. 5 While these universal or gen-
eral biographies were being published, smaller
thematic collections were also appearing.
Biographical dictionaries, both thematic
and universal, were published in some abun-
dance both in England and throughout the
Continent. The first successful national biog-
raphy appeared in Sweden between 1835 and
1857 and accumulated to 23 volumes. The
Dutch introduced a 24-volume set between
1852 and 1 878, Austria completed 3 5 volumes
between 1856 and 1891, and Germany 45
volumes between 1875 and 1900. 6 In France,
the Biographie universelle comprised 40 vol-
umes completed between 1843 and 1863. A
British national biographical dictionary was
not even contemplated until the early 1850s.
John Murray ' sprestigious publishing firm con-
sidered such a publication, but investigation
into the feasibility of the project soon indicated
that such a venture could not recover costs let
alone provide a profit. The successful attempts
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGRAPHY 55
on the Continent were either heavily or com-
pletely funded through government subsidy,
and Murray's firm abandoned the project. In
an 1 884 article, the Quarterly Review bemoan-
ed Great Britain's failure to produce a suc-
cessful, reliable, collective biography and
questioned the ultimate feasibility of such an
attempt. 7 It was into this scenario that circum-
stances placed three singularly talented indi-
viduals.
George Smith
George Smith, Leslie Stephen, and Sidney
Lee are the men responsible for what has been
called "the most important reference work for
English biography." 8 The series of circum-
stances that made such a venture possible, as
well as the ability of all three individuals to
share a common vision and work toward it in
harmony are indeed remarkable. All three
men would have secured places in the literary
annals of Victorian Britain without the DNB>
but the monumental DNS might not have
come into being without the unique collabora-
tion of this triumvirate.
George M. Smith (1824-1901) had been
head of Smith, Elder and Company since
1845, when, in his early twenties, he suc-
ceeded his father as head of the firm. The
company was a diversified one that dealt
primarily in the India trade; publishing was
only a small facet of the company. Hard work
and solid business acumen escalated Smith's
establishment into the ranks of prosperous
firms. Under his leadership, Smith, Elder pub-
lished the works ofWilliam Thackeray, Harriett
Martineau, Matthew Arnold, John Ruskin,
Charlotte Bronte, and Bronte's biographer,
Mrs. Gaskell. The firm is credited with dis-
covering Charlotte Bronte who, up to that
point, had been rejected by several other
houses. 9
In 1857, with his company on secure
financial footing, Smith to focused his per-
sonal efforts on the publishing division. He
founded the Cornhill Magazine in 1860 and
appointed William Thackeray editor. In 1865
he founded the Pall Mali Gazette, 10 through
which he first met Leslie Stephen.
Leslie Stephen
Leslie Stephen (1834-1904), one of the
eminent Victorians and a man of letters, was
regarded by his contemporaries as both bril-
liant and versatile. He was well known to the
Victorian intelligentsia for his scholarly pur-
suits in eighteenth-century literature and phi-
losophy. Outside of literary circles, his feats as
a mountain climber and as an ardent (some
might say fanatical) walker made him a well
known figure in his day both in England and on
the Continent. Twentieth-century students of
the Victorian era know him as the father of
Virginia Woolf and Vanessa Bell.
Leslie Stephen had been a tutor and fel-
low at Cambridge. His gradual disinclination
to accept Christianity made his Cambridge
appointmenttenuous and in 1 862 he was asked
to resign. ' ' He decided to pursue a living as a
journalist and arrived in London in 1865.
Stephen soon became a regular contributor to
the Pall Mall Gazette, and it was in this capac-
ity that he and Smith met and soon formed a
relationship that would continue for the rest of
their lives. In March 1871 Stephen was of-
fered the editorship of Fraser 's Magazine, He
sought the advice of George Smith, who coun-
tered with an offer to edit Cornhill Magazine.
Smith, while keeping his hand in other
business ventures, relished his position and
friendships in the literary world. His concern
and respect for men and women of letters
became a source of personal reward and sat-
isfaction, and accounted for his desire to see
good literature published even at minimal
monetary returns for the firm. His success in
other ventures allowed him the freedom, for
instance, to operate the Cornhill Magazine at
a loss under Stephen's editorship. The reader-
ship of the Cornhill Magazine had been de-
clining for some time. Stephen believed that
the quality of the magazine was still constant
v
56 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
but that public taste was changing. Since he
was not inclined to compromise his standards
or alter his current editorial practices to ac-
commodate a changing public, both he and
Smith agreed that a new editor was needed. It
was at this time that Smith proposed his idea
concerning a universal biography and the role
he wanted Stephen to take in the project. 12
From the very beginning Smith intended
the dictionary to be his legacy to the British
people. 13 He understood the monetary com-
mitment and was well aware of previous at-
tempts and failures.
Why did I undertake a scheme discredited by
so many failures? For one thing these very
failures tempted me. They challenged my
pride. Then, too, I liked the idea of a private
individual undertaking a work which was re-
ally national, and which outside England is
only possible by virtue of the resources of the
State. There are national biographies in conti-
nental literature, but they are never the result
of private enterprise. The State undertakes
them and pays for them. Or they are made
possible by the aid of ancient and richly en-
dowed, libraries. It was something that a pri-
vate Englishman should undertake a work
which, elsewhere, needed the authority and
resources of the nation for its accomplish-
ment.' "
George Smith's fortune was the result of
his keen overall business sense, which he
displayed in 1 872 when he secured for his firm
the British concession from a bottled water
firm in Germany. The water, sold under the
name of Appollinaris, became very popular
and eventually earned a return in excess of one
million pounds. 15 This financial security per-
mitted Smith to consider the dictionary idea
and to commit to its completion. Although his
original idea was to produce a compendium of
universal biography, he was persuaded by
Stephen to limit the scope to a national biog-
raphy.
Smith's choice of Stephen as editor was
not based as much on friendship as on Smith's
unwavering belief that Stephen could define
the parameters and produce an unequalled
literary achievement. He believed that Stephen
was "a master of clear and exact English" and
he knew from the Cornhill experience that his
standards would never waiver. 16 Stephen ac-
cepted responsibility for the project in the fall
of 1882. In March 1883 Sidney Lee was
selected assistant editor. The choice of Lee
proved to be pivotal to the project's success.
Sidney Lee
Sidney Lee (1859-1926), was born
Solomon Lazarus Lee, the son of a London
merchant. He studied at the City of London
School under Dr. Edwin Abbot who nurtured
his interest in Elizabethan literature. He en-
tered Oxford in 1878 and graduated from
Balliol College in 1 882. While an undergradu-
ate, he published two articles on Shakespearean
topics, both well received in scholarly circles.
His Shakespearean scholarship brought him
to the attention of Frederick James Fumivall
who commissioned him to work on an assign-
ment for the Early English Text Society. Lee
was considering a lectureship in a German
university when the DNB position became
available, and gave him the opportunity to
remain in England. Brought to Stephen's at-
tention by Dr. Furnivall, Lee's selection as
assistant editor was certainly one of Stephen's
most astute and valuable contributions to the
effort.
The importance of the collaboration of
these three men cannot be overstated. The
Dictionary owes not only its existence but its
very essence to these individuals. George
Smith's willingness to fund the project at an
estimated loss of 50,000-60,000 pounds was
critical to the project's success. 17 Leslie
Stephen's ability to define the parameters of
the endeavor and to rigorously enforce high
editorial standards set the tone for the entire
run, while Lee, responsible for the day-to-day
operations , the proofreading, and the manage-
ment of the editorial staff, ultimately carried
the project through to its successful comple-
tion.
Both Lee and Stephen had extraordinary
scholarly expectations for the final entries.
They stressed attention to detail, accuracy,
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGRAPHY 57
good writing, and strict adherence to sched-
ules. Each man, while shouldering his edito-
rial responsibilities, also contributed entries to
thework. Stephen valuedLee, a Shakespearean
scholar, for his expertise in the sixteenth and
seventeenth centuries while his own recogni-
tion and acclaim rested in the eighteenth and
nineteenth centuries. Stephen contributed a
total of 378 articles, 1 8 placing at least one in all
but 3 of the 63 volumes. 19 Most noted among
his entries are those on George Eliot, Joseph
Addison, Charles Dickens, Thomas
Babbington McCaulay, Thomas Carlyle,
Alexander Pope, and William Wordsworth.
Lee's knowledge of Elizabethan sources and
bibliography were unequalled. He contrib-
uted 820 articles, including his entries on
William Shakespeare, Edward VII, and Queen
Victoria.
Stephen and Lee took two years to orga-
nize and to set into motion the process that
would accommodate the innumerable details
needed to produce a successful effort. All
three men were well aware of previous British
and Continental efforts and all were driven by
the desire to complete the Dictionary in a
timely yet scholarly manner. The first volume
appeared in January 1885. It had been delayed
several months by Smith's concern over a
myriad ofmisprints resulting frompoorproof-
reading and the late detection of a plagiarized
article. 20 The article in question was Alexander
Balloch Grosart's biography of Richard
Alleine, for which Grosart used material he
had previously submitted to Encyclopaedia
Britannica for an article on Alleine. The unde-
tected error sent chills through George Smith.
His Victorian ethical standards dictated de-
laying the project until an honorable solution
could be worked out with the publishing firm
of the Encyclopaedia and until he was confi-
dent that editorial procedures were in place to
detect similar problems much earlier in the
publishing process. Thereafter, the staff of the
DNB punctually delivered a new volume for
quarterly publication for the next 1 6 years! It
became a hallmark of unparalleled dedica-
tion, pride, and shared responsibility between
publisher, editors, and contributors.
The Dictionary's Purpose
The aim of the Dictionary was to com-
memorate the nation's past through biogra-
phy. Both Lee and Stephen wrote and lectured
widely on the significance of biography and
on its relationship to history. 21 Neither wanted
to continue in the tradition of the antiquaries or
the "Dryasdusts" who had previously at-
tempted to record British lives. The Dictio-
nary was to serve as a compendium of lives
that would reflect the nation's growth, devel-
opment, and character. Stephen and Lee de-
liberately set out to redefine biography in
terms of methodology and to present a collec-
tive national biography in a manner both uni-
form and consistent with known facts . Stephen
was concerned that the growth and documen-
tation of raw historical sources were accumu-
lating at a rate that was exceeding the schol-
ars' ability to make them accessible. He viewed
the Dictionary as a tool that would alleviate
the problem for biographical research.
The process for selecting entrants for the
compendium was initiated by Stephen in an
article published in the Anthenaeum in De-
cember 1882. 22 The process continued to
evolve as time went on, but the initial limits
were set at this time. From the beginning
Stephen excluded the names of livingpersons.
He also excluded names that were only names,
meaning those individuals whose main claim
to fame was simply having appeared in a list or
bibliography. It was also his intention to limit
the entrants to real people rather than mythical
personalities. The definition was designed,
however, to leave the door open to individuals
of lesser fame . Both Lee and Stephen believed
that it was the chronicling of lesser individuals
that would give their work the lasting depth
and importance they intended it to achieve.
According to Stephen: "It is the second-rate
people; the people whose lives have to be
reconstructed from obituary notices, or from
&4
58 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
1
references in memoirs and collections of let-
ters; or sought in prefaces to posthumous
works; or sometimes painfully dug out of
collections of manuscripts, and who really
become generally accessible through the dic-
tionary alone; that provide real ly useful read-
ing." 23 The process of identifying these names
progressed alphabetically. The first list of
proposed candidates came from JohnMurray's
publishing firm. Although he had declined to
proceed with the venture for financial reasons,
he graciously turned over the notes that had
been started on the project, including a list of
about 200 names. It was with this list that
Stephen began his project,
The Dictionary was to include English,
Scotch, and Irish names from the earliest
times. It was intended that Americans and
natives of India who were British subjects
would also be included, but eventually the
editors decided that eighteenth-century Ameri-
can colonists would have to wait for their own
national biography.
The Anthenaeum agreed to publish a list
of proposed names twice a year and the public
was invited to add to this list. Each list con-
tained about 1 ,000 names that had been culled
from some 200 reference works, all of the
volumes of the Gentlemen's Quarterly, and,
of course, the The Times obituary list, After
each list appeared in the Anthenaeum it was
published as a pamphlet by the Smith, Elder
Company, This pamphlet was sent to con-
tributors who then submitted forms for the
contributions they wished to write. They were
also invited to identify additional names that
may have been omitted from the original
screening. 24
Writing assignments were handed out two
years before actual publication. The contribu-
tors, however, had up to six months to com-
plete their work. The editorial work that fol-
lowed the submitted articles was often exten-
sive. The articles were checked for accuracy,
especially for dates, and often factual material
was supplied only at the editorial level. It was
believed that as much time was spent editing
the articles as was spent in writing them. 25
Editorial Standards
Both Lee and Stephen had developed the
writing of biography into an art. They strove to
attain both accuracy and abundance in the
delivery of facts; stressed the importance of
primary sources, including personal knowl-
edge of the subject; and sought to discover the
character of an individual without elaborate or
critical analysis while valuing succinctness
and readability. Stephen believed that "The
epitaph should give in the smallest possible
number of words the very essence of a man's
character and of his claims upon the memory
of posterity." 26
The writers were instructed to be in sym-
pathy with their subject but to keep eulogy
within bounds. In the 1882 Anthenaeum ar-
ticle Stephen concluded his remarks with the
words : "The editor of such a work must, by the
necessity of the case, be autocratic. He will do
his best to be a considerate autocrat." 27
Both Lee and Stephen kept in close con-
tact with their contributors. The general un-
derstanding at that time was that an editor
could omit segments from a signed article
without an author's consent but he could not
add to the work. The editorial policy at the
DNB was quite different. The editors felt free
to add details, especially factual information,
and to supplement biographical detail and
physical descriptions of the entrants. Over the
years the editorial staff became noted for their
proficiency in tracking genealogical informa-
tion and for their files of personal contacts for
county and church record information. 28
Adherence to schedules and timetables
was taken quite seriously. If a contributor
failed to meet a deadline or to correct per-
ceived inadequacies in writing and research,
the article was produced inhouse and submit-
ted unsigned. The average article length con-
tinued to grow as years went on. Several
factors probably contributed to the develop-
ment. Leslie Stephen, always striving for suc-
cinctness, rarely hesitated to cut the length of
submissions dramatically. Lee, however, ap-
peared to enforce length restrictions with less
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGIUPHY 59
rigor. Another factor affecting article length
was the growing availability of primary
sources. The historical profession was at last
coming into its own and increasing numbers of
indexed and calendared materials were ap-
pearing.
Scholars trained in historical research were
a rarity when the project began. In England,
universities were just beginning the study and
teaching of historical research. The English
Historical Review, begun in 1 886, was not yet
a force in scholastic circles. TheZWi? served
as the first training ground for historical re-
search and in this capacity Lee and Stephen
developed the methodological training of those
who were to become Great Britain's elite
historical scholars. These included C.L.
Kingsford, C.H. Firth, A.F. Pollard, J.E.
Creighton, Mary Bateson, and T.F. Tout to
mention a few. Thomas Frederick Tout admit-
ted:
Like many Oxford men of my generation I
approached historical investigation without
the least training or guidance in historical
method, and felt very much at a loss how to set
to work. The careful and stringent regulations
which [Stephen] drew up, and the brusque but
kindly way in which he enforced obedience to
them, constituted for many of us our first
training in anything like original investiga-
tion. 29
Working with hundreds of contributors,
many of them unfamiliar with biographical
writing or possessing limited experience in
historical research, the editorial staff of DNB
successfully produced volume after volume,
each one regarded as better than the one
before it. 30 The accomplishment of punctually
producing the quarterly volumes seems all the
more remarkable when one considers the
Dictionary's steadily increasing quality.
Stephen's Burden
The task took its toll on Leslie Stephen.
The drudgery and strain of the vigilance he
deemed necessary to meet deadlines eventu-
ally proved too much for him. In addition to
contributing many entries himself, he reviewed
every submission and edited the contributions
sternly, corresponding with the authors, and
tactfully dealing with the myriad requests for
inclusion of departed loved ones. He also
continued with his own writing and studying
and with his roles as a husband and the father
of four. A selection of his letters appears in
Frederic William Maitland's biography of
Stephen. In these letters he refers to the Dic-
tionary as the "infernal dictionary," "that
damned dictionary," and the "accursed drudg-
ery." 31 He refers to himself as a "dictionary-
ridden animal," and laments that the damned
thing goes on like a diabolical piece of ma-
chinery, always gaping for more copy, and I
fancy at times that I shall be dragged into it,
and crushed out into slips."' 32
Maitland elaborates that Stephen's corn-
plaining was typical of the way he expressed
his frustrations and that he intended people
laugh when he used such hyperbole. 53 The
frustrations, however, were very real and his
health continued to deteriorate under the de-
manding schedule. At one point he seriously
considered delaying a quarterly issue. 34 Real-
izing that he was placing more and more of the
burden on Lee, he insisted that Lee's name
begin appearing on the title page. So in March
1 890, Lee and Stephen were listed as coedi-
tors, a practice continued for the next four
issues. The reduction in Stephen's work load
failed to restore his health. In April 1891 he
asked his wife to write to George Smith and
inform him that his health precluded his con-
tinuation as editor of the Dictionary. So, be-
ginning with the June 1891 issue, only Lee's
name appeared as editor. Lee's enormous
capacity for work and his ability to pay atten-
tion to detail guaranteed George Smith that the
project would continue without interruptions.
Stephen's resignation did not prohibit him
from continuing to write articles for the DNB.
Otherthan Lee himself, Stephen was theDNB's
most prolific contributor; his writing com-
prised approximately 1,000 pages and ac-
counted for one-seventeenth of the entire
60 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
work. 35 Upon its completion in 1901, the
entire work stretched to nearly 30,000 pages
commemorating nearly as many lives. 36 In
1901 three supplementary volumes were pub-
lished, covering an additional 1,000 lives.
These supplementary volumes were issued as
the final three volumes of the original set. Two
hundred of these names were omissions from
the original set and the remaining 800 were
individuals who had died after their letter of
the alphabet had been published. Because
George Smith wished the death of Queen
Victoria to mark the official end of the work, 37
the DNB was extended to include lives of
people who had died prior to January 22,1901,
That the death of Victoria should mark the end
of this set seems only fitting, for even in its
own time the DNB was considered a monu-
ment to British history. 38
The size and scope of the DNB was such
that errors, misprints, and other errata were
bound to occur under even the most careful
scrutiny. During the quarterly printings of the
DNB, the corrections, compiled by the Rever-
end W.C. Boulter, were printed in Notes and
Queries. In 1904 Lee issued a volume of
corrections that was distributed free to sub-
scribers. These corrections were incorporated
into the re-issue of 1 908-1 909. i9 In 1923, A.F.
Pollard founded the Institute of Historical
Research of the University of London to emu-
late the training he had had received at the
hands of Sidney Lee and to use the Institute's
Bulletin as a vehicle for reporting addenda
and correcting errors in the DNB. Today the
Institute's publication, re-titled Historical
Research, no longer serves that function. All
corrections are referred to the DNB editorial
offices at the Oxford University Press.
Critical Reception
From the appearance of its inaugural vol-
ume theZWi? received praise. Its contributors,
editors, and publisher were widely recog-
nized, with both Lee and Stephen receiving
knighthoods for their involvement in the
project. Even continental scholars admitted
that the DNB surpassed their own national
biographies both in terms of scope and schol-
arship/ Most secondary sources refer to the
original set as a "monument to Victorian schol-
arship, enterprise and philanthropy." 41 Re-
views of the set as it came out repeatedly drew
attention to the exceptional quality of both
Stephen's and Lee's writing. 42 It was also
noted, as Lee and Stephen had intended, that
the shorter articles on those of lesser fame not
only embodied the essence of the DNB, but
would give it lasting value. 43
There were negative comments. For ex-
ample, historians of the time objected to the
lengthy articles on kings and statesmen that
could be better presented in book-length treat-
ments. The emphasis of the editors that the set
be geared to the general reader as well as to the
scholar raised the eyebrows of more than one
historian. 44 There were also comments re-
garding the length of entries in comparison to
an individual's overall historical importance. 45
Current critiques of the DNB demonstrate that
the set not only maintains its credibility but has
taken on a persona of its own. Clearly the
steady output of biographical entries has in
itself become a significant value of the set and
its supplements. Its serialization provides a
continuous acknowledgment of British
achievement and notoriety since the earliest
times, with readers taking pride in the cumu-
lative body of entrants that encompasses emi-
nent statesmen as well as misers.
The reviews of the twentieth-century
supplements and, indeed, later retrospective
reviews of the original set bring other criti-
cisms into focus. Contemporary awareness of
cultural and social issues have raised the con-
sciousness of many reviewers. Comments re-
garding the exclusion of women, labor lead-
ers, sportsmen, and people of commerce are
now noted. Some object that Stephen and
Lee's intent to include all segments of the
nation fell far short of the mark. 46 Stephen's
biographer, Noel Annan, notes that twentieth-
century critics call attention to moral judg-
ments that appear throughout the original set
and in Stephen's contributions particularly. 47
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGRAPHY 61
Annan replies that Stephen "would have had
to step outside of his age to omit moral judge-
ments." 48 Stephen's view on the status of
women was reflective of the Victorian era.
Even when friends were advocating female
emancipation, Stephen resisted with vehe-
mence. 49 Lee, the author of the "Statistical
Account" was not unaware of the low number
of women appearing in the DNB. He noted that
in London in 1896 about 600 people would
qualify for an entry in the work and that only
about 20 of these would be women. He stated:
In this last calculation I perhaps have made
inadequate allowance for the recently devel-
oped energy among women which seems likely
to generate unlooked-for exploits of more or
less distinction. But no statistics are needed to
prove that the woman's opportunities of dis-
tinction were infinitesimal in the past, and are
very small compared with men's something
like one to thirty at that present moment,
Women will not therefore, I regret to reflect,
have much claim on the attention of the na-
tional biographer for a very long time to
come." 50
As early as 1890, a review in the English
Historical Review notes that some women of
distinction appear only in their husbands' bi-
ographies. 51 And, as late as 1986, a reviewer
of the recently published 1971-1980 supple-
ment noted that only 1 5 percent of the entries
were women and that nearly one third of them
were writers."
Another omission that has been steadily
tracked from the original setthroughthe supple-
ments is the lack of individuals from trade and
commerce. 53 The Victorian distaste for revel-
ling in commercial successes seems to have
extended well into the twentieth-century
supplements. Other omissions that have been
noted include the scarcity of trade unionists
and a lack of entries recording the violence in
Northern Ireland, either in terms of victims or
terrorists. 54 Stephen's anticlericalism is well
documented. His refusal to list either St. Alban
or St. Asaph in the original set was eventually
amended by Lee in the supplements. 55 On yet
another level, Pollard believed that Lee's in-
terest in literary history accounts for what
could be interpreted as an undue inclusion of
very minor literary figures. 56
The first supplement to deal explicitly
with the sexual preference of individuals was
the 1961-1970 supplement. Although even
here, as one reviewer notes, most contributors
were less than direct and perhaps inadvert-
ently revealed a moral judgment themselves.
For example, Somerset Maugham's homo-
sexuality is referred to with subtlety when the
biographer states that Maugham "stepped off
his pedestal with a young American." 57 A
reviewer of the 1971-1980 supplement notes
that an entrant' s "propensity for solitary sex in
parks and swimming pools could perhaps be
stated more directly." 58 Another reviewer of
that decennial supplement notes an absence of
attributing drugs or alcohol as a direct influ-
ence on the lives or careers of many of the
entrants. 59
Evaluations of the DNB concerning its
biases or even its editorial practices must be
considered in historical perspective. The de-
gree to which these omissions reflect editorial
bias or are seen as reflections of current cul-
tural perspective, while debatable, are also
what gives the set its historical value. The
DNB has existed for over 100 years. The
mores and even the research strategies used to
produce it have changed over that time period
and will continue to do so. One of its strengths
rests in its lasting value as a source both
reflective and indicative of its time.
The original set included many lives from
previous centuries and the writers of those
biographies had the advantage of secondary
sources andhistoricalperspective. As thcDNB
moved into decennial volumes the biogra-
phies wereoverwhelminglyratherrecentones.
The change, although subtle, marks a signifi-
cant difference between the original set and
the supplements. Another significant differ-
ence rests in the fact that more than half of the
original set was written by only 34 regular
contributors, while in the supplements the
one-time contributor is virtually the norm. 60
During the 1 6-year production schedule of the
original set, the editors were also contributors
62 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
and their writing style clearly influenced the
character of the original set. The supplements
have been produced for almost 90 years with
contributors and editors changing throughout
that time. While the original set serves as an
embodiment of Victorian scholarship and car-
ries with it the character and expressions of
that era, the supplements are distinguished by
the continuity provided by their Oxford base.
According to one reviewer "One of the joys of
the DNB, imparted by its Oxford base, is its
tendency to delicate spite, dry periphrasis or
oblique understatement,"* 1
The DNB still serves as model of literary
art and historical writing. Its succinct, and
sometimes pithy writing is peppered with an-
ecdotal accounts, fact, and individual per-
spective. 62 Leslie Stephen believed that "No
man is a real reader until he is sensible of the
pleasure of turning over some miscellaneous
collection, and lying like a trout in a stream
snapping up, with the added charm of
unsuspectedness, any of the queer little mor-
sels of oddity or pathos that may drift past
him." 63 The Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy still holds that charm forthe the twentieth-
century reader. Even though newly available
manuscripts may obviate nineteenth-century
scholarship, the joy of the writing and the
subtle inferences from a time past will be lost
to only the most unimaginative of readers.
Reviews of the supplements indicate that the
twentieth-century endeavors have yielded suc-
cess in this area as well. 64
When George Smith died in 1901, he left
the DNB to his widow. Mrs. Smith served as
publisher of the supplement covering deaths
from 1901—1911, while Lee continued as edi-
tor, In 1917 Smith, Elder was acquired by the
Murray publishing house. This was the same
firm that had contemplated and then rejected
the idea of publishing a national biography in
the early 1850s. The DNB, not part of sale, was
given to Oxford University by the Smith fam-
ily with the stipulation that it was to continue
to be published. 65 Oxford has continued to
publish the DNB with decennial supplements
through 1980, although the supplemental vol-
umes have not appeared with the same punc-
tuality as the original Smith, Stephen, and Lee
venture. Oxford has broken the decennial
tradition with the publication of the latest
supplement. Beginning with the 1981-1985
supplement issued in 1990, the set will be
updated through quinquennial supplements. 66
Extension and Revision
Almost since its completion, speculation
both as to the feasibility and to the desirability
of revising the whole set has occurred. 67 In a
1 949 Times Literary Supplement article a re-
viewer of the 1931-1940 supplement also
tackled the subject of a complete revision of
the DNB. 6S The suggestion prompted a meet-
ing between scholars and publishers who
reached the mutual decision that the effort was
simply not feasible. 69 The current editor, C.S.
Nicholls, states that "books such as ours are
very expensive to produce." 70 Efforts are
underway to raise funds for a complete revi-
sion, but in the meantime the editorial staff has
decided to publish a volume of individuals
who have been omitted from DNB since its
beginning. 71 The current editor cautions that
it may not be possible to raise all the funds
needed for a complete revision. Whether or
not funds are found to completely revise the
DNB thoroughly, it will remain a cherished
and significant contribution to British history
and scholarship. Its significance as a land-
mark reference title rests not only in its lon-
gevity as a useful reference tool but also upon
the unique mix of anecdotal characterization
and detailed factual accounting of British lives.
The introductions for each supplement pro-
vide fascinating overviews of the cumulative
body of entries and readers soon lose them-
selves in the well-written biographies that
follow. Only the most insensitive of readers
can come away from an hour of browsing in
"the most amusing book in the language"
without having attained a deeper understand-
ing of British history, life, manners, and
achievement.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGRAPHY 63
Dictionary of National Biography, edited by Leslie
Stephen, volumes 1-2 1; editedby Leslie Stephen
and Sidney Lee, volumes 22-26; edited by
Sidney Lee, volumes 27-66. London: Smith,
Elder and Company, 1885-1901. 66 vols,
Dictionary of National Biography, From the Earliest
Times to 1900, edited by by Sir Leslie Stephen
and Sir Sidney Lee, [Reissue.] London: Smith,
Elder and Company, 1908-1909. 22 vols.
Dictionary ofNationalBiographyJndexandEpitome,
editedby Sir Sidney Lee. London: Smith, Elder,
and Company, 1903-1913. 2 vols.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1901-1911, ed-
ited by Sir Sidney Lee. Oxford: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1912. 739p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1912-1921, ed-
itedby H.W.C. Davis andJ.R.H, Weaver. Ox-
ford: Oxford University Press, 1927. 623p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1922-1930, ed-
ited by J.R.H. Weaver. Oxford: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1937. 962p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1931-1940, ed-
ited by L.G. Wickham Legg. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1949. 968p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1941-1950, ed-
ited by L.G. Wickham Legg and E.T.Williams.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1959. i,031p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1951-1960, ed-
ited by E.T. Williams and Helen M. Palmer.
Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1971. 1,l50p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1961-1970, ed-
ited by E.T. Williams and C.S. Nicholls. Ox-
ford: Oxford University Press, 1981. l,178p.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1971-1980, ed-
ited by Lord Blake and C.S. Nicholls. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1986. 1,01 Op.
Dictionary of National Biography, 1981-1985, ed-
ited by Lord Blake and C. S. Nicholls, Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1990. 518p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The papers, correspondence, ledgers, and
day books associated with the Dictionary of
National Biography were destroyed after the
third supplement was completed. Numerous
secondary sources exist and several major
biographies on key personnel are available.
For Leslie Stephen, see Noel Annan's Leslie
Stephen: The Godless Victorian, a revision of
his 1952 biography on Stephen titled Leslie
Stephen: His Thought and Character in Rela-
tion to His Time. Both volumes are valuable.
See also Maitland's£(/e and Letters of Leslie
Stephen. For George Smith, see Jennifer
Glynn's Prince of Publishers: A Biography of
George Smith and Leonard Huxley's The
House of Smith Elder. A full-length biogra-
phy on Sir Sidney Lee has yet to be written. For
a summary of the founding of the DNB, see
both J.L. Kirby and R.H. Fritze cited below.
Laurel Brake's article provides the clearest
explanation of the publishing history of the
DNB. Many reviews of the original set and the
supplements have appeared throughout the
past 1 00 years; only the more significant ones
are listed in the bibliography. Forexcerpts that
capsulize the essence of the DNB, see the
examples cited in the reviews and especially
the article by Pat Rogers. The best method for
understanding and enjoying the DNB is to read
the introductions to the original set and the
supplements and to peruse the volumes them-
selves,
Annan, Noel. Leslie Stephen: The Godless Victorian.
New York: Random House, 1984.
. Leslie Stephen: His Thought and Character
in Relation to his Time. Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1952.
Bell, Allan. "Leslie Stephen and the DNB." Times
Literary Supplement, no. 3951 (December 16,
1977): 1478.
. "A Portable Valhalla." Times Literary
Supplement, no. 4096 (October 2, 1981): 1115—
17.
"Biographies Universelle, Ancienne et Moderne;
Nouvelle Biographie Generale; Specimen of a
'Dictionary of National Biography,"' Quar-
terly Review 157 (July, 1884): 187-230.
Brake, Laurel. "Problems in Victorian Biography:
The DNB andths DNB 'Waiter Pater'." Modern
Language Review 70 (October, 1975): 731^*2.
Cannadine, David. "British Worthies." London Re-
view of Boot 3 (December, 1981): 3-4, 6.
Corrections and Additions to the Dictionary of Na-
tional Biography. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1966.
Davenport-Hines, Richard. "All Sorts and Condi-
tions," Times Literary Supplement, no. 4363
(November 14, 1986): 1263-64.
Fenwick, Gillian. The Contributor's Index to the
Dictionary of National Biography, 1885-1901.
64 DISTINGmSHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
m
Winchester, Hampshire: St. Paul's Bibliogra-
phies, 1989.
Firth, C.H. "Memoir of Sir Sidney Lee," Dictionary
of National Biography Supplement, 19 12-192 L
London: Oxford University Press, 1927.
Frank, Robert Worth, "The Most Amusing Book in
the Language." American Scholar 54 (Winter,
1984/85): 89-97.
Fritze, Ronald H. "The Dictionary of National Biog-
raphy and Its Early Editors and Publisher."
Reference Services Review 1 6 (1988): 21-29.
Glynn, Jennifer. Prince of Publishers; A Biography
of George Smith. New York: Allison & Busby,
1986.
Hull, Charles H. "Helps of Cataloguers in Finding
FullNames." Library Journal 14 (1889): 7-20.
Huxley, Leonard. The House of Smith Elder. Lon-
don: Printed for Private Circulation, 1923.
Kirby, J.L. "The Dictionary of National Biography."
The Library Association Record 60 (June 1958):
181-91.
Lee, Sidney. "The Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy: A Statistical Account." Dictionary of
National Biography, v. 1, pp. lxi-1 xxxxiv. Ox-
ford: Oxford University Press, 1921-1922.
. "Memoir of George Smith." Dictionary of
National Biography, v. 1, pp. xxi-lix. London:
Oxford University Press, 1921-1922. First pub-
lished in September 1 901 in the first volume of
the original edition of the Supplement.
. "National Biography." Cornhill Magazine
26 (March, 1896): 258-77.
"Sir Leslie Stephen." Dictionary of Na-
tional Biography. Supplement 1901-191 1. Lon-
don: Oxford University Press, 1920. Reprinted
1927.
Maitland, Frederic William. The Life and Letters of
Leslie Stephen. London: Duckworth &. Co.,
1906.
Pollard, A. F. "Sir Sidney Lee and the 'Dictionary of
National Biography.'" Bulletin of the Institute
of Historical Research 4 (1926/27): 1-13.
Rogers, Pat. "Diversions of the DNB." Essays and
Studies 37 (1984): 75-86.
Stephen, Leslie. "Biography." Living Age 199
(October/December, 1893): 451-59.
Stephen, Leslie. "National Biography." National
Review 27 (March/August, 1896): 51-65.
."ANewBiographiaBritannica.'M^enaeww,
no. 2878 (December 26, 1882): 850.
"Worthies of Empire." Times Literary Supplement,
no. 2498 (December 16, 1949): 819.
Wrong, George M. "Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy." American Historical Review 7 (April,
1902): 588-90.
NOTES
1 Leslie Stephen, "Biography," Living Age 199 (October/
December 1893): 451 . This is a reprint ofan article
that originally appeared in the National Review in
1893.
2 The Universal Cyclopedia.
3 Ibid.
4 "Biographies Universale, Ancienne et Moderne; Mo-
velle Biographic Generale; specimen of a Dictio-
nary of National Biography," Quarterly Review
157 (July 1884): 204,
5 Gillian Fenwick, "Introduction," The Contributor's
Index to the 'Dictionary of National Biography \
1885-1900 (Winchester, Hampshire: St. Paul's
Bibliographies, 1989),x.
6 Encyclopedia Britanntca, 1 1th Edition.
''Quarterly Review, "Biographies Univcrselle," 188.
8 Eugene P. Sheehy, Guide to Reference Books, 10th ed.
(Chicago: American Library Association, 1986),
299.
' Ronald H. Fritze, "The Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy and Its Early Editors and Publisher," Reference
Services Review 16 (1988): 22.
10 J,L. Kirby, "The Dictionary of National Biography"
The Library Association Record 60 (June 1958):
181.
"Ibid., 182.
12 Leslie Stephen, The Mausoleum Book (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1 9 77), 85 .
13 Leonard Huxley, The House of Smith Elder (London:
Printed for Private Circulation, 1923), 181.
14 Ibid., 181-82.
15 Fritze, 23.
16 Huxley, House of Smith Elder. 182.
J7 Ibid.
18 Noel Annan, Leslie Stephen; His Thought and Charac-
ter in Relation to His Time (Cambridge, MA: Harvard
University Press, 1952), 79.
19 Phyllis Gosskurth, Leslie Stephen (Essex, England:
Longmans, Green & Co. L, 1968), 13.
20 Noel Annan, Leslie Stephen: The Godless Victorian
(New York: Random House, 1984): 85.
21 Sidney Lee, "National Biography," Cornhill Magazine
26 (March 1896): 258-77; Stephen, "Biography,"
451-59. Leslie Stephen, "National Biography,"
National Review 27 (March/ August 1896): 51-65.
22 Leslie Stephen, "A New Biographia Britannica," .^A-
enaeum no. 2878 (26 December 1882); 850.
* 3 Stephen, "National Biography," 59-60.
24 A. F. Pollard, "Sir Sidney Lee and the 'Dictionary of
National Biography,"' Bulletin of the Institute of
Historical Research 4 (1926/27): 12.
25 Ibid., 2.
26 Stephen, "National Biography," 62,
27 Ibid.
28 Pollard, 7.
2 ' Annan, Leslie Stephen: Godless Victorian, 86.
DICTIONARY OF NATIONAL BIOGRAPHY 65
™ Pollard, 6.
31 Frederic William Maitland, The Life and Letters of of
Leslie Stephen (London: Duckworth & Co., 1906),
378-404.
32 Ibid., 394.
33 Ibid., 395.
34 Ibid., 400.
JS Fritze, 27.
i6 Robert Worth Frank, "The Most Amusing Book in the
Language," American Scholar 54 (Winter 1984/
85): 89.
37 George M. Wrong, "The Dictionary of National Biog-
raphy," American Historical Review! (April 1902):
588.
JS Ibid.
i9 Laurel Brake, "Problems in Victorian Biography: The
DNB and the DNB 'Walter Pater,'" Modern Lan-
guage Review 70 (October 1975): 732.
4( ' Annan, Thought and Character, 78,
41 Gillian Fenwick, "Introduction," ix, to The Contributor '$
Index to the 'Dictionary of National Biography',
1885-1900 (Winchester, Hampshire: (St. Paul's
Bibliographies), ix.
42 "The Dictionary of National Biography" English
Historical Review 6 (January 1893): 181-82; "The
Dictionary of National Biography" English His-
torical Review 9 (July 1894): 591-92.
43 "The Dictionary of National Biography' 1 English
Historical Review 5 (October 1890): 785.
44 Ibid., 784-785; Wrong, 589.
45 English Historical Review, 1890, 786; Wrong, 589;
Annan, Thought and Character, 78; Alan Bell, "A
Portable Valhalla," Times Literary Supplement no.
4096 (2 October 1981): 1116.
46 Pat Rogers, "Diversions of the DNB," Essays and
Studies 37 (1984): 78; Annan, Godless Victorian,
88.
47 Rogers, 82.
48 Annan, Godless Victorian, 88-89; Rogers, 76.
49 Annan, Godless Victorian, 110.
i0 Lee, "National Biography," 273
51 English Historical Review, 1890, 786.
52 RichardDavenport-Hines, "All Sorts and Conditions,"
Times Literary Supplement no. 43 63 (1 4 November
1986): 1264.
33 Ibid., 1264; David Cannadine, "British Worthies,"
London Review of Books 3 (December 1981): 4;
Annan, Godless Victorian, 88.
54 Bell, 1115;Davenport-Hines, 1264.
si Pollard, 10.
s6 Ibid., 11.
51 Bell, 1 1 16; Christopher Booker, "Remembering Like
Anything," Spectator 247 (3 October 1981): 21.
iB Davenport-Hines, 1263.
* 9 Ibid,
<° Cannadine, 3.
* l Davenport-Hines, 1263.
"Rogers, 82; Brake, 741.
° Stephen, "National Biography," 63.
154 Bell, 1116.
"Huxley, 190.
66 C, S. Nicholls, letter to the author, 25 January 1990.
61 "Worthies of the Empire," Times Literary Supplement
no. 2498 (16 December 1949): 819.
68 Ibid.
69 Brake, 732.
70 Nicholls, letter to author, 25 January 1990.
71 Ibid.
Controlling the Beasties: Dissertation
Abstracts International
Mary W. George
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Dissertations are strange beasties, combining
the length of a book, the breadth of a grant
application, and the depth, supposedly, of a
scholarly treatise. An ordinary mortal will
encounter just one such creature in a lifetime,
taming it only after long and weary labor,
despite the wiles of procrastination and the
vagaries of a doctoral committee.
As evidence of a person's ability to ask
significant new questions about a highly spe-
cific area of knowledge, and then to design,
conduct, and interpret research appropriate to
answer those questions, the dissertation can
claim only mixed results. The Germans are
very right to qualify the word with the adjec-
tive inaugural, because the dissertation is at
best a good start with no promises. In fact, as
a predictor of intellectual energy and poten-
tial, it fails miserably; witness the dearth or
deficiency of subsequent scholarship by many
who "earn" the Ph.D. Then, too, in our culture,
those outside academe rank writing a disserta-
tion somewhere near surgery and passing a
driving test in terms of pain and challenge,
respectively. Yet possessing a doctorate still
commands great respect.
Debate will always surround the content
and process of graduate education, which is
only right. The unexamined pursuit, in aca-
deme as anywhere else, too easily becomes
routine, drawn out, and ineffectual. Further-
more, the tangible product of the process, the
dissertation, is itself a knotty problem: What
exactly should it "prove," and to whom? Are
traditional expectations regarding its scope,
format, readability, time and effort involved —
not to mention its value — justified, especially
given the low correlation between dissertation
quality and any individual's later contribu-
tions to the field? These are all ponderable if
not solvable questions, ones which Theodore
Ziolkowski has placed in historical perspec-
tive and named the Ph.D. squid, an image
which all who have been in the grip of gradu-
ate school will understand too well. 1
Availability of Dissertations
There is one aspect of the dissertation,
however, which Ziolkowski does not address,
its availability. To add irony to adversity (view-
ing the case from a student's perspective), this
masterpiece, proof in the medieval sense that
a person is worthy to enter a discipline's guild
and participate in its rituals, is figuratively a
closed book to everyone outside the candidate' s
immediate circle — closed because it is unpub-
lished and unpublicized.
Here the story begins to twist and tangle.
Every degree-granting institution in the world
has its own rules about dissertations: how
many bound copies the author must provide
and whether these may be typed or must be
printed; who is responsible for copyrighting
the work; where dissertations are kept and
under what physical conditions; how— and,
DISSERTA HON ABSTRACTS INTERNA TIONAL 67
-aajl
for that matter, whether — they will be cata-
loged, and if so, whether entries for them will
appear in any published list or database; who
will preserve brittle ones; what legalities must
be observed by anyone wishing to read, copy,
or quote from them; if they will be sold to,
loaned to, or exchanged with other institu-
tions, 2 To add to this crazy quilt, schools
which also generate master's, senior, or hon-
ors theses usually have a whole different set of
rules for those writings, 3 and, of course, each
university's idiosyncrasies have shifted over
time. 4
It is not as if people have not tried to solve
these problems. There is, for example, an
indispensable bibliography of dissertation bib-
liographies which is arranged by both country
and discipline, 5 Several guides to institutions'
loan and photocopy policies now exist which
indicate exactly what dissertations are avail-
able, and how, from the originating school. 6
Special lending agreements within national or
regional library consortia make matters some-
what smoother, although no one imagines
there will ever be total reciprocity among
institutions. A few scholarly journals even
review selected dissertations. 7
On the whole, researchers are faced with
a paradox: the possible importance of disser-
tations to their work is offset by the probable
nuisance of identifying and obtaining them.
Or, as many have said at a library reference
desk, "If it's a dissertation, forget it." That
dismissal is typically accompanied by the
spoken or unspoken thought,"If it's any good,
it should come out, sooner or later, as a real
book." This is not the place, however, to
digress on the economics or academic politics
of that belief, let alone the overhaul necessary
to transform a dissertation into a "real" book. 8
Eugene B. Power
The twists and tangles get still more bi-
zarre owing to a second strange beastie, mi-
crofilm, and its impresario, Eugene B. (for
Barnum, no less) Power, who first recognized
this format as an ideal way to preserve fragile,
fugitive, rare, bulky, and low-demand print
sources. Realizing that dissertations qualified
on all those counts, Power made filming and
selling them the cornerstone of University
Microfilms, the business he founded in Ann
Arbor, Michigan, in June 1938. 9 In February
1 962 he sold the company to the Xerox Corpo-
ration, which in turn sold it to Bell & Howell
in December 1985. 10 Now called University
Microfilms International (UMI), the firm has
operations in Ann Arbor devoted to disserta-
tions, serials, andout-of-print materials (Books
on Demand). 11
The idea of miniaturizing documents goes
back to the mid-nineteenth century when it
was first posited in England by James Glaisher
and J.F.W. Herschel who independently sug-
gested the possibility based on technological
advances in photography and microscopy. 12
To those who rely on microformat sources to
conduct their research, the stuff is both a
blessing and a curse. It is a blessing because it
allows access to essential works without spend-
ing large amounts of money and time to con-
tact and travel to distant repositories. And it is
a curse owing to the physical discomfort of
reading and transcribing microforms as well
as the generally poor quality of paper copies
made by reader-printers. It took Eugene
Power's insight and entrepreneurial instincts
to transform this ugly duckling technology
into a corporate swan and in the process to
create amarketing tool, DissertationAbstracts
International {DAT), that has become a legend
in academe. 13
As legends go, this one is easy to relate:
DAI is quite simply the Sears catalog of aca-
deme, describing the intellectual goods avail-
able for purchase from UMI. Or, put another
way, it is a field guide to the strange beasties,
standard equipment for anyone who needs to
spot, track down, andbag dissertations. All the
user who identifies a pertinent product (i.e., a
dissertation) needs to do is phone a toll-free
number and use a credit card to order the
complete version. 14 By 1990UMI'sdisserta-
jj&MjELa**- -
68 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
tion database was growing by about 35,000
titles per year. Starting in 1 991 , another 3 ,700
Canadian dissertations will be added annually
as well.
DAI has come a long way since 1938
when Eugene Power left his job as vice presi-
dent for sales at Edwards Brothers, the large
Ann Arbor printing firm best known to librar-
ians for publishing various Library of Con-
gress author and subject catalogs as well as
sets of the National Union Catalog between
1942 and 1970. Edwards Brothers was also
involved in microform publishing. In the mid-
1930s the company launched a major project
to film pre-1550 English books. Power had
coordinated this program and then acquired it
from Edwards Brothers shortly after he set up
his own company. 15 In a seven-page pam-
phlet, A Plan for Publication of Scholarly
Material on Microfilm, Power explained the
purpose of his new company:
The invention of printing provided the means
for the tremendous expansion of scholarly
research through the duplication of man's
ideas, ... For centuries printing methods
fulfilled the requirements of scholars as a
means of reproducing the results of research.
With the turn of the' century it has been in-
creasingly apparent that the greater special-
ization of scholarship has resulted in a de-
crease in the potential market for books and
monographs in any one field. This same print-
ing process which at one time provided the
release from the restricting influence of book
production by scribes is now exerting a simi-
larly restricting influence through a reverse
process.
Ourprinting facilities today are all geared
to the production of a large number of copies
on an extremely economical basis. However,
they are not able to produce a small number of
copies economically, and with this decrease in
the size of the market, publication of scholarly
material becomes an increasingly difficult
problem unless accompanied by subsidy, . , .
What scholarly publishing needs is a
method of distribution which gives sufficient
and adequate publicity to a title or list of titles
so that the information regarding what is
offered is readily available to prospective
users, combined with a means of production
which can produce as demand materializes at
an economical and uniform rate. , . .
Briefly, this is a plan to provide a means
of production and distribution for the products
of scholarly research which, because of their
nature, command too small a market to war-
rant publication through the ordinary and es-
tablished channels. 1 *
Power went on to describe his concept of
having dissertation authors submit to UMI "a
carefully typed manuscript accompanied by
an abstract of 300 or 400 words with the
deposit of the usual fee for this service." 17 His
proposal continued: "The abstracts thus col-
lected from several sources or authors, will be
published in a booklet of abstracts issued at
periodic intervals, each abstract occupying
one page. At the bottom of each abstract will
appear a statement to the effect that a film
copy of the complete manuscript can be had at
1 l A cent per page, and a total figure [i.e., price]
for the entire book." 18
Microfilm Abstracts
This, then, was the origin of what is known
today as Dissertation Abstracts International
The first 1 1 volumes appeared at very irregu-
lar intervals starting in 1938 under the title
Microfilm Abstracts, with the subtitle origi-
nally, A Collection of Abstracts of Doctoral
Dissertations which are Available in Com-
plete Form on Microfilm. Volume 1, number
1, was only 32 pages long and contained
abstracts of 17 dissertations from just five
universities (Michigan, Nebraska, Princeton,
Stanford, and Toronto). In that first issue's
unsigned introduction, Power explained his
project by contrasting the characteristics of
what he called "ordinary publication" — large
print runs, promotion, and distribution to cus-
tomers — with the "different publishing phi-
losophy" afforded by microfilm which, he
said, "offers an effective, satisfactory, and
economical method of distributing copies of
scholarly manuscripts to a limited market.
Because microfilm is a straight-line cost pro-
cess one copy can be produced as reasonably
as a dozen — " Therefore, he continued, "the
only investment necessary is the cost of noti-
fication and the small cost of making the
DISSERTATION ABSTRACTS INTERNATIONAL 69
negative, . . . from which positive copies may-
be prepared from time to time as individual
orders come in." 19
Power's notion of advertising his wares is
also stated in that first introduction: "The
abstract is printed in a booklet of abstracts,
such as this, and distributed to leading librar-
ies, journals and the current bibliographies,
without cost to those receiving it. Printed
library catalog cards for each abstract accom-
pany the booklet. This completes the process
of notification." 20 Since it was free, small,
infrequent, and sent out as a promotion, Mi-
crofilm Abstracts was essentially apublisher's
blurb. Happily, libraries did not all treat it like
one, so that complete or nearly complete runs
exist at most large universities. The part about
supplying cards sounds like a gimmick today,
but 50 years ago it was probably considered a
nice touch by librarians who were used to
receiving cards from the Library of Congress
for their depository catalogs. Unfortunately,
there is no way to know how many libraries
actually included these author and subject
cards in their catalogs or if the existence of
cards increased sales. In 1943 Microfilm Ab-
stracts stopped coming with cards and instead
gave a Library of Congress card number for
each item, with cataloging performed in Ann
Arbor — from the dissertation typescript, not
just the abstract — and supplied to the Library
of Congress. 21
In the early years, Microfilm Abstracts
ran a "Cumulative Index of Titles," but be-
cause this was arranged by discipline, its only
advantage over browsing the individual tables
of contents, which were similarly organized,
was that it covered several numbers at a time.
Every so often the cumulation would stop,
then resume again with a new start date.
Beginning with volume 6, number 2, in
1945, the scope and subtitle of Microfilm
Abstracts changed to include monographs as
well as dissertations. Only a handful of mono-
graphs were ever listed, 22 however, and LTMI
eventually started a separate publication,
Monograph Abstracts (now called Research
Abstracts) to treat these titles, just as it spun off
Masters Abstracts (now Masters Abstracts
International) to handle theses. Neither of
these segments has ever approached the reputa-
tion, success, or indispensability of DAL
Microfilm Abstracts started appearing
quarterly in 1950, with an annual cumulated
title index, which was still arranged by disci-
pline, not by actual topic. Volume 1 1 (195 1),
the last before the title changed to the more
familiar Dissertation A bstracts (DA), included
two innovations which have been followed to
the present: the four issues were paged con-
tinuously, and a cumulated index to disserta-
tion authors was provided in addition to the
so-called title index. That particular volume
ran to 1,212 pages and carried abstracts for
816 dissertations, under 67 subject headings
(with titles most numerous in the field of
education) from about 30 institutions. 23 The
publication was still distributed free, although
the fee for filming and including a dissertation
had risen from $1 5 to $20 in 1 949. The cost to
purchase a film copy was constant at $,0125
per page, but the price for paper copies had
gone up from six cents to a dime per page.
One feature of Microfilm Abstracts and
its successors Dissertation Abstracts mdDis-
sertation Abstracts International 'deserves spe-
cial notice: arrangement of the abstracts has
always been by broad discipline categories.
Volume 1, number 1, for instance, included
abstracts under the headings Botany, Chemis-
try, Drama, Economics, Education, History,
Mathematics, Philosophy, Political Science,
Psychology, and Zoology, Fields and sub-
fields were added as necessary, so that by
1990 there were 10 large groups subdivided
into 249 smaller ones. Today there are 10
categories: Communication and the Arts; Edu-
cation; Language, Literature and Linguistics;
Philosophy, Religion and Theology; Social
Sciences; Biological Sciences; Earth Sciences;
Health and Environmental Sciences; Physical
Sciences; and Psychology. When dissertation
authors submit their abstracts, they must now
indicate which subject category best reflects
their area of research, although they may also
designate one or two additional categories. 24
70 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
When it debuted, Mcro/z/m Abstracts was
not reviewed in the usual sense. Instead, there'
were announcements of it, probably lifted
from press releases, in major trade and profes-
sional journals. 25
Scope Changes
One would think that after the title changed
to Dissertation Abstracts with volume 12 in
1952, the tool's history would be easier to
describe. Far from it. Virtually every year
through the 1960s there was some enhance-
ment or oddity introduced. For instance, DA
appeared six times in both 1952 and 1953 —
and for the first time had a cover price, $6 per
year 26 — then settled into its conventional
monthly frequency in January 1954 with vol-
ume 14, but without specifying which month
anywhere on the publication, a detail which
was not added until August 1957. Then, to
keep subscribers guessing, volume 1 8 ran for
only six issues, January through June 1958.
Starting with volume 19, DA's volumes ex-
tend from July to the following June "to facili-
tate the listing of authors by academic year for
the index.""
With volume 27, number 1 , July 1 966, the
cover took a turn for the worse : instead of drab
gray it was brightly colored, but some be-
nighted staffer decided to omit the volume,
number and date from the front cover, an
unconscionable decision that was notrectified
for a full 20 years! Libraries cannot count the
thousands of productive hours lost as check-in
clerks had to turn to the title page to discover
which issue had arrived. In a moremomentous
change with volume 27, meiosis occurred and
two monthly issues began appearing, section
A covering the humanities and social sci-
ences, and section B covering the sciences
(including psychology) and engineering. Al-
though this split is logical and benefits special
libraries which can choose to subscribe to just
one part or the other, it causes a practical
problem. Should volumes be shelved by sec-
tion, then by volume number, or vice versa?
Alternatively, volumes can be arranged by
calendar year first, which is how most users
expect to see monthly issues run, but then one
winds up with numbers 7 through 12 of one
volume coming before numbers 1 through 6 of
the next — correct but counterintuitive.
Three years later, in July 1969 with the
start of volume 30, the title changed again with
the addition of "International" to both sec-
tions, "to reflect the projected enlargement of
University Microfilms' dissertation publica-
tion program by the addition of dissertations
from European universities." 38 Some Cana-
dian dissertations had, however, been included
from the very beginning, although most of
them could be obtained only from the National
Library in Ottawa. As a result of an agreement
between UMI and the National Library of
Canada and Micromedia, Ltd., in early 1990,
UMI began in 1991 to distribute Canadian
dissertations and theses and to include cita-
tions and abstracts for them in the various
UMI reference tools. 29
It apparently took seven years for that
"projected enlargement" to come about, which
it did with another split in the fall of 1 976 when
section C, European Abstracts, first appeared
as a slender quarterly designated volume 37.
The subtitle of section C switched from Euro-
pean Abstracts to the one-word subtitle World-
wide in the spring 1989 issue, while remaining
a slender quarterly with both title-keyword
and author indexes in each issue and a cumu-
lative author index at the end of each volume.
The introduction to a recent issue of section C
(volume 51 , number 4, Winter 1990) makes
this puzzling statement: "Sections A and B of
DAI are published monthly and include dis-
sertations accepted by North American insti-
tutions and other institutions throughout the
world. Section C covers a portion of European
dissertations in all disciplines and is published
quarterly." 30 The explanation seems to be that
most of the dissertations with abstracts found
in section C are not in fact available from
UMI. Abstracts for those which are so avail-
able appear in section A or B, as appropriate,
and in section C. In any case, the 400-plus
foreign universities whose dissertations have
DISSERTATION ABSTRACTS INTERNATIONAL 7 1
ben included thus far in section C are not ones
researchers are generally interested in. Only
when DAI comprehensively identifies disser-
.tations from Cambridge, Oxford, the Sorbonne,
and other renowned European institutions will
its international pretensions be meaningful.
DAPs usefulness has also been chroni-
cally limited by the omission of several major
U.S. universities (notably Harvard, MIT, and
the University of Chicago) which maintain
close control over reproduction and sale of
their dissertations. Yet both Harvard and Chi-
cago are on the list of participating institu-
tions, something whichmisleads users. Itwould
be good if DAP s front matter would also state
not just the year of initial participation, but
also the percentage of each university's dis-
sertations which are actually submitted to
UMI.
Indexing
Annoying as the publication details are,
they are misdemeanors compared with DAPs
author, title, and subject indexing "practices" —
or rather, experiments — over half a century.
Anyone who doubts this should try to memo-
rize Carl Orgren's explanation and chart of the
story just up to 1964, which reads like a plot
rejected by Kafka. 31 Muchhas changed, which
is a large part of the problem, but not much has
improved in the intervening decades. (Note,
however, that several venerable discipline
indexes such as the MIA International Bibli-
ography [New York: Modern Language As-
sociation, 1921—] and Psychological Abstracts
[Washington: American Psychological Asso-
ciation, 1927-] have provided author and con-
trolled- vocabulary subject access to DAI for
decades, analyzing it like any other scholarly
journal. There is, in fact, no reason why one
should not cite a DAI entry as if it were an
ordinary, if exceedingly short, periodical ar-
ticle.)
The case with author indexing, which
began in 1951 in the last year of Microfilm
Abstracts? 7 is not one of method but of mad-
ness: the user never knows where to find it.
Like the Cheshire Cat, it materializes at will all
over the bibliographic forest, sometimes in the
final issue of the volume, sometimes as a
separate part II of the final issue, sometimes
listing authors from sections A and B but not
C, and at one point in the middle 1950s not
appearing at all for two years!
As noted above with regret, title indexing,
which started in the second issue of Microfilm
A bs tracts and continued through volume 29 of
DA in June 1969, was never more than cumu-
lated tables of contents for one or more vol-
umes, arranged by broad fields— in short, not
a true title index at all. The conundrum is that,
unlike book titles, dissertation titles are rarely
memorable. And even when they are, the fact
that they are not "normally" advertised means
that fewpeople know enough to refer to them,
typically only the writer's advisors, family,
and fellow students. The best use one can
make of these title indexes is for browsing to
see what was being done in an area at a certain
time, after which one could refer to the ab-
stracts of interesting items, recognizing that
one will miss any dissertation not submitted to
UMI. Far better, because complete, tools for
browsing are List of American Doctoral Dis-
sertations Printed in 1912-1938, Doctoral
Dissertations Accepted by American Univer-
sities (covering 1934-1955), Index to Ameri-
can Doctoral Dissertations (covering 1955/
56-1962/63), and American Doctoral Disser-
tations (covering 1 963/64 to the present). These
works are organized by either Library of Con-
gress classification, for printed dissertations,
or by field subdivided by university, the ar-
rangement of the last three series, and an
extremely useful approach because most
graduate students and scholars already know
which schools are at the forefront of research
in their specialty. 33
Subject indexing has been equally prob-
lematic. There was none at all for more than
two decades until volumes 22 through 29 (July
1961 -June 1969) appeared with an annual
subject index using genuine Library of Con-
72 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
&
gress headings and cross-references. But that
era was too good to last. Beginning with
volume 30 in July 1969, Di/moved one step
forward and two steps back. It dropped the
farce of a title index, but replaced the Library
of Congress subject index with a keyword-in-
title (KWTT) computer one. At the same time
UMI staff had entered all previous disserta-
tion titles in a database, from which in 1 970 the
company published an expensive nine-vol-
ume Retrospective Index covering volumes 1
through 29 and providing a KWIT approach
under the all-too-familiar broad discipline
categories. The result proved to be a disaster
and was roundly attacked by Ralph Scott who
said, in one of hiskinder comments, that it was
"ill conceived and poorly edited . . . [and]
promises to be the laughing stock of bibliog-
raphers for years to come." 34
Chastised but not deterred, UMI began its
monumental Comprehensive Dissertation In-
dex (CDI) series in 1973 with the delivery of
a 37-volume set covering the astonishing time
period 1861-1972 and an astounding 417,000
dissertations by UMI's count. The work was
compiled from information already in the UMI
database, supplemented by citations to earlier
dissertations supplied by U.S. and Canadian
doctorate-granting institutions. As with the
Retrospective Index, the primary organization
is by field, with dissertations then listed by
each keyword in their titles, inreverse chrono-
logical order. An author index occupies the
last five volumes. Thus, a dissertation in agri-
culture with 12 significant title words will
appear m the agriculture volume 12 separate
times, each time giving author, full title, de-
gree, institution, year, andlength. Ifthe disser-
tation is available from UMI, the order num-
ber and citation to DAI are provided. There are
still major difficulties, the most vexing being
the "invisibility" of dissertations with cute or
enigmatic titles and the user's need to look up
all conceivable keywords in all conceivable
disciplines. Nonetheless, much as many li-
brarians regret the demise of professionally
assigned uniform subject access to disserta-
tions, reaction to CDI was generally favor-
able, 35 although Israel Shenker, reviewing the
set in the New York Times, had a field day
spotting weird or ambiguous dissertation titles
and other oddities, including 13 dissertations
on cockroaches. 36 Even Ralph Scott, who had
rightfully denounced the Retrospective Index
just three years earlier, gave CJ9/his qualified
endorsement 37
UMI has continued to publish annual sets
of CDI (termed supplements), with five- and
then ten-year cumulations. These cause some
confusion because users are not always care-
ful about which category they open to. For
instance, in the 1988 set in volume 4, the
keyword sequence for philosophy begins on
page 541 and a new keyword sequence for
religion starts on page 559. It is all too easy to
lookup relevant keywords in the wrong disci-
pline.
Non print Forms of DAI
Today there are more efficient ways to
explore the rich CDI lode: by an online search
in the BRS DISS or the DIALOG 35 files, by
having UMI staff perform a DATRIX offline
search, or by using the Dissertation Abstracts
Ondisc CD-ROM product available in many
university libraries. With any of these meth-
ods it is possible either to ignore discipline
categories altogether or to specify particular
ones, using codes. One can also qualify a
search by year or institution to further refine
the results. 38 One bother accompanies the CD-
ROM version: the need to swap as many as
four discs in order to search the entire data-
base, but this disadvantage is offset by the fact
that there are no connect time or telecommu-
nications costs involved as there are with
online access.
Eugene Power's brainchild of 1938 is
now middle-aged, revered, and generally flour-
ishing, with offspring well established on their
own. Its growth at times took peculiar turns,
and its features are far from perfect, but DAI
will remain a notorious and necessary charac-
ter in academe as long as dissertations, those
strange beasties, exist.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
DISSERTATION ABSTRACTS INTERNA TIONAL 73
Microfilm Abstracts. Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms, vol. 1, no. 1, 1938; vol. 2, no. 1,
1939; vol. 2, no. 2, 1940;vol.3,nos. 1-2,1941;
vol. 4,no. 1,1942; vol. 4,no. 2, 1943; vol. 5,no.
1, 1943; vol. 5, no. 2, 1944; vol. 6, nos. 1-2,
1945;vol.7,no.I,1946;vol.7,no.2,l947;vol.
8, nos. 1-2, 1948; vol. 9, nos. 1-2, 1949; vol. 9,
no. 3, 1950; vol. 10,nos. 1-4, 1950; vol. 11, nos.
1-4, 1951. 11 vols.
Dissertation Abstracts, Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms, vol. 12(1952)-vol.26,no. 12 (June,
1966). 15 vols. Bimonthly, 1952-1 953; monthly,
January 1954-June 1966.
Dissertation Abstracts: A, Humanities and Social
Sciences. Ann Arbor, MI: University Micro-
films, vol. 27, no. 1 (July, 1966)-vol.29,no. 12
(June 1969). 3 vols. Monthly.
Dissertation Abstracts: B, Sciences and Engineer-
ing. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms,
vol. 27, no. 1 (July, 1966)-vol. 29, no. 12 (June,
1969). 3 vols. Monthly.
Dissertation Abstracts International: A, Humanities
and Social Sciences. Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms International, vol. 30, no. 1 (July,
1969)- . Monthly. [Also available on microfilm
or microfiche; orders can be placed for specific
disciplines.]
Dissertation Abstracts International: B, Sciences
and Engineering. Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms International, vol. 30, no. 1 (July,
1969)- . Monthly. [Also available on microfilm
or microfiche; orders can be placed for specific
disciplines.]
Dissertation Abstracts International: C, European
Abstracts. Ann Arbor, MI: University Micro-
films International, vol. 37, no. 1 (Autumn,
1976)-vol. 49, no. 4 (Winter, 1988). 13 vols.
Quarterly.
Dissertation Abstracts International: C, Worldwide.
Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms Interna-
tional, vol. 50, no. 1 (Spring, 1989)- . Quarterly.
Indexes
Dissertation Abstracts International, Retrospective
Index, Volumes I-XXIX. Ann Arbor, MI: Uni-
versity Microfilms, 1970. 9 vols.
Comprehensive Dissertation Index, 1 861-19 72 . Ann
Arbor, MI: Xerox University Microfilms, 1973.
37 vols. Comprehensive Dissertation Index:
Supplement, 1973-. Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms International, 1974-. 5 vols./year.
Annual. [Also available on microfiche.]
Comprehensive Dissertation Index: Five-Year Cu-
mulation, 1973-1977. Ann Arbor, MI: Univer-
sity Microfilms International, 1979. 19 vols.
Comprehensive Dissertation Index: Ten-Year Cu-
mulation, 1973-1982. Ann Arbor, MI: Univer-
sity Microfilms International, 1984. 38 vols.
Comprehensive Dissertation Index: Five-Year Cu-
mulation, 1983-1987. Ann Arbor, MI: Univer-
sity Microfilms International, 1989. 22 vols.
[Also available on microfiche and in separate
packages for either the sciences or the social
sciences and humanities.]
Library and Information Science: Selected Collec-
tion of Doctoral Dissertations and Masters
Theses, 1984-1988, Ann Arbor, MI: Disserta-
tion Abstracts International, 1989. 24p. Update
frequency varies. [This is one of about six dozen
free subject catalogs extracted from the Com-
prehensive Dissertation Index database.]
Machine-Readable Products
DATRLX. Offline flat-fee search service of the entire
dissertation and thesis database, available on
request from University Microfilms Interna-
tional. 1967- .
Dissertation Abstracts Online. Covers 1861- ; ab-
stracts included, July 1980- . Ann Arbor, MI:
University Microfilms International. Updated
monthly. [Available as DISS file from BRS
Information Technologies and as File 35 from
Dialog Information Services.]
Dissertation A bstracts Ondisc. Ann Arbor, MI: Uni-
versity Microfilms International, 1987- . Ar-
chival I, 1861-June 1980; Archival II, July
1980-December 1984; Archival III, 1985-1988;
Current disc, 1989- . Semiannual updates, [In
1991 two subsets became available as separate
subscriptions, each subset corresponding to the
discipline groupings in section A (humanities
and social sciences) or section B (sciences and
engineering) of the print tool. In either case,
there is both an archival disc (1861-1985) and
a current one (1986- ) with semiannual up-
dates.!
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The secondary literature on Dissertation
Abstracts is not large, surprisingly, given that
it is a major reference tool which has been
around for half a century. Among the items
cited below, Colling's article, almost 20 years
old, is the only overview of DAI before the
,i>^S^P
74 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
n
^1
present essay, and Meckler's book is the best
general history of microforms. Power's auto-
biography, Edition of One, although it is full of
interesting anecdotes about his career and
company, rambles and lacks precise dates. It
has, however, an appendix which reprints his
1938 manifesto on the subject of reproducing
dissertations on microfilm. Moore's two-part
study is essential for anyone trying to trace
dissertation bibliographies over time. Orgren's
brief article helps one appreciate the features
of DAI as it is today by discussing how imp os-
sibly confusing it used to be. Shenker's is by
far the most informative and delightful review
of the Comprehensive Dissertation Index,
Asleson, Robert F. "A One-Mi llion-Erltry 'Starting
Place' for Finding Dissertations." Wilson Li-
brary Bulletin 46 (September, 1971): 76-77.
Reply to Scott, below.
Colling, Patricia M. "Dissertation Abstracts Interna-
tional." In Encyclopedia of Library and Infor-
mation Science, editedby Allen Kentand Harold
Lancour, vol. 7, 238-40. New York: Marcel
Dekker, 1972.
Davinson, Donald. Theses and Dissertations As In-
formation Sources. London: Clive Bingley;
Hamden, CT: Linnet Books, 1977.
Dissertation Abstracts Ondisc: Quick Reference
Guide. Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms
International, 1987.
Meckler, Alan Marshall Micropublishing: A His-
tory of Scholarly Micropublishing in America,
1 938-1980. Contributions in Librarianship and
Information Science, no. 40. Westport, CT:
Greenwood Press, 1982,
Moore, Julie L. "Bibliographic Control of American
Doctoral Dissertations: A History." Special Li-
braries 63 (May/June, 1972): 227-30.
. "Bibliographic Control of American Doc-
toral Dissertations: An Analysis." Special Li-
braries 63 (July, 1972): 285-91.
Orgren, Carl F. "Index to Dissertations Abstracts."
College and Research Libraries 25 (July, 1964):
279-80.
Power, Eugene B., and Robert Anderson. Edition of
One. The Autobiography of Eugene B. Power,
Founder of University Microfilms. Ann Arbor,
MI: University Microfilms International, 1990.
— -. "Microfilm and the Publication of Doctoral
Dissertations." Journal of Documentary Repro-
duction 5 (March, 1942): 37-44.
— . A Plan for Publication of Scholarly Mate-
rial on Microfilm, Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms, 1938. Reprinted in Edition of One:
The Autobiography of EugeneB. Power, Founder
of University Microfilms, by Eugene B. Power
and Robert Anderson, 379-83. Ann Arbor, ML
University Microfilms International, 1990.
. "University Microfilms." Journal of Docu-
mentary Reproduction 2 (March, 1939): 21-28.
Review of Comprehensive Dissertation Index, 1861-
1972. Choice 11 (July/August, 1974): 734.
Scott, Ralph L. "A $1,000 Misunderstanding: UM's
Indexto Its Dissertation Abstracts International."
Wilson Library Bulletin 46 (September, 1971):
73-76. For a reply, see Asleson, above.
. "Comprehensive Dissertation Index, 1861—
1972." RQ 14 (Fall, 1974): 61-62.
Sheehy, Eugene P. Review of Comprehensive Dis-
sertation Index, 1861-1972. College & Re-
search Libraries 35 (July, 1974): 245-46.
Shenker, Israel. "A Xeroxian Synopsis of Ph.D.
Esoterica." New York Times, February 11,1974,
p. 37, col, 6; p. 71, col. 4.
Snelson, Pamela. "Online Access to Dissertations."
Database 5 (June, 1982): 22-33.
User's Guide, Dissertation Abstracts Online: How to
Use the Online Dissertation Database Step-by-
Step, Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms
International, 1988.
Wynar, Bohdan S. Review of Comprehensive Dis-
sertation Index, 1861-1972. American Refer-
ence Books Annual 6 (1975): 309-10.
NOTES
1 Theodore Ziolkowski, "The Ph.D. Squid," American
Scholar 59 (Spring 1990): 177-95.
2 Sec Table I, "Practices of Publication and Loan of
Doctoral Dissertations," appearing annually, with
slight title variations, in Doctoral Dissertations
Accepted by American Universities (New York: H.
W. Wilson, 1934-1955); Index to American Doc-
toral Dissertations (Ann Arbor, MI: University
Microfilms, 1955/1956-1962/1963); and Ameri-
can Doctoral Dissertations (Ann Arbor, Ml: Uni-
versity Microfilms International, 1963/1964-1982/
1983), This useful information was dropped from
more recent volumes of the last named title.
3 The word thesis is often used as a synonym for disser-
tation, but, in the U.S. at least, the former more
accurately refers to a report of research conducted
at the pre- or sub-doctoral stage, the latter to work
at the doctoral level. That distinction will be main-
tained throughout this essay.
DISSERTATION ABSTRACTS INTERNATIONAL 75
4 For an excellent overview of the complex situation in
the early 1 940s, together with an eloquent rationale
for filming dissertations, see Eugene B. Power,
"Microfilm and the Publication of Doctoral Disser-
tations," Journal of Documentary Reproduction 5
(March 1942): 37-44.
5 Michael M. Reynolds, Guide to Theses and Disserta-
tions: An International Bibliography of Bibliogra-
phies, rev. and enl. ed. (Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press,
1985). A similar tool for just master's theses is
Dorothy M. Black, Guide to Lists of Master's
Theses (Chicago: American Library Association,
1 965). The Eugene P, Sheehy, ed., Guide to Refer-
ence Books, 10th ed., (Chicago: American Library
Association, 1 986) also identifies numerous disser-
tation bibliographies via its index. To find disserta-
tion bibliographies in a library catalog, one can use
the Library of Congress subject heading
"Dissertations, Academic — [country] — Bibliogra-
phy." Bibliographic Index (New York: H. W.
Wilson, 1 93 8-) lists dissertation bibliographies on
all subjects together under "Dissertations, Aca-
demic."
6 Dietrich Hans Borchardt and John D, Thawley, Guide to
the Availability of Theses, IFLAPublicationsno. 17
(Munich: Saur, 1981); G. G. Allen and K. Deubert,
Guide to the A vailability of Theses: II, Non-Univer-
sity Institutions, IFLAPublicationsno. 29 (Munich:
Saur, 1984); Joseph Z.Nitecki,comp.,Z}j>ectory of
Library Reprographic Services, 8th ed. (Westport,
CT: Published for the Reproduction of Library
Materials Section, American Library Association,
by Meckler, 1982); Leslie R. Morris and Patsy
Brautigam, Interlibrary Loan Policies Directory,
3rd ed. (New York: Neal-Schuman, 1988).
7 See, for instance, issues of Library & Information
Science Research (Norwood, NJ: Ablex, 1979- ).
8 Eugene Power has always stressed that his business
exists to publish dissertations, a verb which the
universities involved treat loosely to mean "make-
available-to-save-us-the-trouble." The academic
establishment, however, would contend that
pseudo-, quasi-, or ersatz publishing would be
more accurate, since what Power acknowledges are
traditional prejudices against microfilm remain en-
trenched half a century later, as does the conviction
among experts that dissertations are mere novice
research reports and only deserve genuine (i.e.,
book) publication after major reworking and inde-
pendent peer review. A classic essay on the revi-
s ions involved is Frances G. Halpcnny , "The Thesis
and the Book," Scholarly Publishing 3 (January
1972): 111-16.
^The company was called simply University Microfilms
from its inception to the middle 1 960s, after which
it was known as Xerox University Microfilms. The
name became University Microfilms International
in June 1976, although it was still owned by Xerox.
{Dissertation Abstracts had, however, already added
"International" to its title in July 1969.) "UMI,"
really the corporate logo, appears on letterhead and
most publications now, but is not the official name.
In legal contexts University Microfilms, Inc., has
been used continuously since 1938.
10 "Microfilm Deal Slated by Xerox/Wov YorkTtmes,2\
February 1962, p. 75, col. 2; "Briefs," New York
Times, 18 December 1985, p. D5, col. 6.
1 ' For factual information about UMI, the author wishes
to thank Dorie Mickelson, Marna Clowney, and
Clare Long of UMI. The opinions and judgments
expressed are, however, entirely the author's.
n Alan Marshall Meckler, Micropublishing: A History of
Scholarly Micro-publishing in America, 1938-1980,
Contributions in Librarianship and Information
Science no. 40 (Westport, CT: Greenwood Press,
1982), 6-7.
15 Eugene Power was born in Traverse City, Michigan, in
1905. He received an A.B. from the University of
Michigan in 1927 and an M.B.A. there in 1930. His
memoirs, written with Robert Anderson, have ap-
peared as Edition of One: The Autobiography of
Eugene B. Power, Founder of University Micro-
films (Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms Inter-
national, 1990). Anderson, who died in early 1990,
was also coauthor with Ray Kroc of Grinding It
Out: The Making ofMcDonald's (Chicago: Regnery,
1977), and with Thomas S. Monaghan of Pizza
Tiger (New York: Random House, 1986), a history
of Domino's Pizza. The tone of all three books is
unabashedly egocentric . Power and Monaghan are,
incidentally, good friends.
14 From most of the United States the number is 800-52 1 -
3042. Customers in Alaska or Michigan are told to
makea collect call to 3 13-761 -4700, ext. 781. From
Canada the phone is 800-343-5299, ext. 781. There
is also a fax number, 313-665-5022.
15 The gigantic microfilm series continues to this day
under the title Marly English Books, using as its
bibliographic basis Alfred William Pollard and G.
R. Redgrave, Short-Title Catalogue of Books Printed
in England, Scotland and Ireland, and of English
Books Printed Abroad, 1475-1640 (London: Bib-
liographical Society, 1926; reprinted Oxford; Ox-
ford University Press, 1946).
16 Eugene B. Power, A Plan for Publication of Scholarly
Material on Microfilm (Ann Arbor, Ml: University
Microfilms, 1938); reprinted in Power and Ander-
son, Edition of One, 379-80.
17 Ibid., 380. The charge was originally $15 and has
increased to $25 in 1990, although it is explained
today as a fee for having UMI copyright the disser-
tation, not as a filming fee. Also, the maximum
length of an abstract has fluctuated in the past, with
700 words allowed at one time but only 350 in
recent years. This reduction coincided approxi-
mately with the inclusion of full-text abstracts in the
BRS and DIALOG databases and in UMI's own
CD-ROM product, effective with titles added in
July 1980.
18 Ibid., 380. Thus, at$.0125 per page, microfilm of a 486-
page dissertation came to $6.08. Paper "enlarge-
ments" were also offered at six cents per page, or
$29.16 for the same item. To compare, as of January
1991, prices for dissertations from UMI, regardless
of length, are as follows: when ordered by anyone
affiliated with an academic institution, $27.00 for
either 35 mm microfilm or 98-frame microfiche;
76 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
m
$32,50 fora paper copy withsoftcover;arid$39. 50
for a paper copy with hard cover. Prices for orders
from outside academe are, respectively, $11.00,
$21.00, and $25.00 higher. Shipping and handling
are extra and vary dependingon the delivery method
chosen. Orders arrive in three to four weeks.
"Eugene B. Power, "Introduction," to Microfilm Ab-
stracts 1, no. 1 (1938): v-vi.
w Ibid., vi. Emphasis added.
11 Eugene B. Power, "Introduction," to Microfilm Ab-
stracts %, no. 2 (1948): iv.
22 An example of a monograph abstract appended to the
end of occasional issues of Microfilm Abstracts is
a work in several parts by Joshua Whatmough,
entitled "The Dialects of Ancient Gaul," As each
section appeared, it was separately abstracted dur-
ing 1950 and 1951.
23 In early years, both Microfilm Abstracts and Disserta-
tion Abstracts included "title" and author indexing
for two other abstracting publications, one put out
at Pennsylvania State University and the other at
Colorado State University. Therefore, some of the
816 entries in volume 11 were to dissertations
available on film from those institutions only and
not from Ann Arbor,
^Publishing Your Dissertation: How to Prepare Your
Manuscript for Publication (Ann Arbor, MI: UMI
Dissertation Services, n.d.),
"Publishers Weekly 133 (1 9 February 1938), 938; ALA
Bulletin 33 (February 1939): 89; Journal of Docu-
mentary Reproduction 2 (March 1939): 44-45.
Publishers Weekly said Power' s plan "may be revo-
lutionary in the Field of scholarly publishing."
26 Compare a subscription at $6.00 per year with the
standing order price in late 1 990 of sections A and
B together at $495, including the author indexes,
and of section C, which has four rather than twelve
issues, at another $515. Despite these subscription
rates, "UMI actually produces £Wat a loss, expect-
ing dissertation copy sales to offset the production
costs of the reference tools." (Dorie Micfcelson,
Manager of Database and Bibliographic Opera-
tions, UMI Dissertation Information Services Unit,
letter to the author, 17 October 1990.) Volume 12
was also the first to list, in issue number 6, which
institutions were represented, although the starting
year for each university's involvement with UMI
was only indicated beginning with volume 26 in
July 1965, and then always with caveats to the
effect that some participating schools only supply
abstracts and do not have their dissertations filmed
or distributed by UMI. Lastly, in 19S2.04 increased
in size from its original squat 5.5" x 8.25" dimen-
sions to the 8.5" x 1 1" format it has today.
27 "Introduction," to Dissertation Abstracts 19 (July
1958):iii.
28 "Introduction," to Dissertation Abstracts Interna-
tional: A, The Humanities and Social Sciences 30
(July 1969): [iii].
29 "UMI to Distribute Canadian Dissertations," news
release (Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms
International, 1 March 1990).
30 "Introduction," to Dissertation Abstracts Interna-
tional: C, Worldwide 5\ (Spring 1990): v. There is
now a separate abstracting tool for British disserta-
tions, Index to Theses with Abstracts Accepted for
Higher Degrees by the Universities of Great Britain
and Ireland and the Council for National Academic
Awards, vol. 35- (London: Aslib, 1986-).
31 Carl F. Orgren, "Index to Dissertation Abstracts,"
College & Research Libraries 25 (July 1964): 279-
80.
32 For coverage of earlier years, see Microfilm Abstracts
Author Index, CoveringVolumesl-11, 1938-1951,
compiled by the Georgia Chapter of the Special
Libraries Association with the cooperation of Uni-
versity Microfilms (Atlanta: Georgia Chapter Spe-
cial Libraries Association, 1956).
33 U.S. Library of Congress Catalog Division, List of
American Doctoral Dissertations Printed in 1912-
1938 ("Washington: Government Printing Office,
1913-39) ; Doctoral Dissertations Accepted by
American Universities, compiled for the National
Research Council and the American Council of
Learned Societies by the Association of Research
Libraries (New York: H. W. Wilson, 1934-55);
Index to American Doctoral Dissertations (Ann
Arbor, MI: University Microfilms International,
1955/56-1 962/63); American Doctoral Disserta-
tions (Ann Arbor, MI: University Microfilms Inter-
national, 1 963/64- ). For a detailed discussion of
the inter-relationships and characteristics of these
tools, see the two-part article by Julie L. Moore,
"Bibliographic Control of American Doctoral Dis-
sertations," Special Libraries 63 (May/June 1 972):
227-30 and (July 1972): 285-91.
14 Ralph L. Scott, "A Si, 000 Misunderstanding; UM's
Index to Its Dissertation Abstracts International,"
Wilson Library Bulletin 46 (September 1971): 73.
A rejoinder by Robert Asleson, then president of
University Microfilms, follows.
33 See review of Comprehensive Dissertation Index,
1861-1972, Choice 1 1 (July/August 1974): 734;
Eugene P. Sheehy, review of Comprehensive Dis-
sertation Index. 1861-1 972,College & Research
Libraries 35 (July 1974); 245-46; Israel Shenker,
"A Xeroxian Synopsis of Ph.D. Esoterica," New
York Times, 11 February 1974, p. 37, col. 6, p. 71,
col, 4; Bohdan S. Wynar, review of Comprehensive
Dissertation Index, 1861-1972, American Refer-
ence Books Annual 6 (1975): 309-10.
'* Shenker, p. 37, col. 8.
37 Ralph L. Scott, review of Comprehensive Dissertation
Index, 1861-1 972, RQ 14 (Fall 1974): 62.
38 User's Guide: Dissertation Abstracts Online (Ann
Arbor, MI: University Microfilms International,
1988); Dissertation Abstracts Ondisc: Quick Ref-
erence Guide (Ann Arbor, MLUniversity Micro-
Films International, 1987).
The Circle of Learning:
Encyclopaedia Britannica
Sandy Whiteley
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Encyclopaedia Britannica, first published in
1768, is the second oldest continuously pub-
lished reference workin the English language.
As an encyclopedia it had several centuries of
precursors. Ephraim Chambers' Cyclopaedia
or Universal Dictionary of Arts and Sciences
(not to be confused with the modern
Chambers's Encyclopaedia), first published
in Great Britain in 1728, was the inspiration
for Diderot's famous Encyclopedic (1751—
1765), which, in turn, directly stimulated the
creation of EB.
EB's origins lie in Edinburgh, where it
was first published in individual parts which
subscribers had bound into volumes. Later it
was published in half-volumes, then volumes;
by the eleventh edition (1910-11) all the vol-
umes in the set except the index were pub-
lished at once, as we know it today. Early
editions were sold on subscription; the pub-
lishers used the proceeds from the sale of first
parts or volumes to pay for the production of
later ones, which sometimes resulted in a
drawn-out publication schedule of more than
a decade. Although encyclopedias are still
called subscription books, they aren't sold that
way any more. The term has come to mean
books sold in the home and in the contempo-
rary U.S., that is largely encyclopedias.
Encyclopedias can be organized in one of
two principal ways: systematically/topically
or alphabetically. Within an alphabetically ar-
ranged set, an encyclopedia's articles can
cover either broad or specific subjects. Each
combination of organizational options has its
virtues. The alphabetical sequence is easy to
use and is neutral (it doesn't favor one philo-
sophical arrangement of knowledge over an-
other), butit scatters various aspects of knowl-
edge. The first 14 editions of EB were ar-
ranged in one alphabet, but varied from edi-
tion to edition to the degree to which broad or
specific entries were used. With the fifteenth
edition, some elements of a systematic/topical
arrangement were introduced.
Andrew Belt and Colin Macfarquhar
The first edition of EB was conceived by
two Scots, Andrew Bell and Colin
Macfarquhar, an engraver and a printer. They
were responsible for getting subscribers and
hired William Smellie, a printer who had
apprenticed for the printer to the University of
Edinburgh, as editor. This first edition ap-
peared in 100 parts between 1768 and 1771
with a total of 2,689 pages. There were 160
copperplate engravings scattered through the
set, 1 The encyclopedia doesn't appear to have
been very well planned. The articles for A-B
took up the first volume, those for C-L the
next, and the whole second hal f of the alphabet
was squeezed into volume 3. The set con-
tained 75 lengthy articles (on broad topics
i
u
H
«£*-*"'
78 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
such as anatomy, chemistry, and law), some of
them over 100 pages long, with brief dictio-
nary-type articles, many of which were only
one sentence long, interspersed. This edition
of EB, like several that followed, contained
articles digested from other sources plus new
material written by the editor. It is not known
how much of this set Smellie actually wrote
himself, but it appears that his contribution
was substantial. There were no biographies
but many practical articles gave instructions
on surgery, counterfeiting emeralds, and bee-
keeping as well as other aspects of farming,
reflecting Smellie's view that "Utility ought to
be the principal intention of every publica-
tion." 2 The encyclopedia inevitably reflected
the level of knowledge of the day and much
superstition and prejudice appeared. Califor-
nia was described as "a large country of the
West Indies." But the article "Midwifery" was
illustrated with engravings that showed nor-
mal and abnormal deliveries in clinical detail,
creating a scandal among some subscribers.
More than 3,000 sets were sold and the ency-
clopedia was popular enough to be issued in a
pirated edition by London publishers. 3
Bell and Macfarquhar issued the second
edition between 1777 and 1784 in 181 parts
which were later bound in ten quarto volumes.
It was almost three times larger than the first
edition (8,595 pages) and contained maps and
340 copperplates. The new editor, James
Tytler, was an unsuccessful surgeon turned
writer. Many articles from the first edition
were retained and Tytler wrote new ones. This
edition included biographies of deceased per-
sons and geographical articles were expanded
to include history. Like the first edition, many
entries reflected a literal acceptance of the
Bible. For instance, in "Chronology," the date
of the world's creation was given as 4004 BC,
and floor plans of Noah's ark were provided.
Longer articles sometimes had indexes printed
at the end of them.
Bell and Macfarquhar also published the
third edition between 1788 and 1797, hiring a
series of editors. It was almost twice as large
as the second, with 14,579 pages in 18 vol-
umes and 542 engravings. Many articles con-
tinued to be reprinted from the earlier editions.
The third was popular all through the British
Isles (13,000 sets were printed), 4 and it was the
first of many editions to be issued in a pirated
edition in the U.S. American publishers re-
wrote some entries they thought too British
(such as the one on the United States). (The
U. S. copyright law at that time protected only
American authors. Britannica continues to be
pirated today, this time in Asia. 5 ) A two-
volume supplement was published in 1 80 1 . Its
article on chemistry was the first in EB to use
chemical symbols. This edition was the first to
be dedicated to thereigning sovereign, a prac-
tice continued in every subsequent edition.
The fourth edition was published in parts
between 1801 and 1809. Its 20 volumes con-
tained 16,033 pages. By this time Macfarquhar
was dead and Bell was the sole publisher. This
edition was edited by Dr. James Millar, clas-
sical scholar and physician. Most volumes
were little more than reprints of the third
edition. Some new articles were added, among
them a full description of Jenner's successful
use of vaccination against cowpox in 1796.
The fourth edition's additions reflect Millar's
interests in chemistry and natural history.
After Bell's death, the copyright for EB
was purchased from his heirs by Edinburgh
publisher Archibald Constable. HehiredMillar
to edit the fifth edition as well. Published in
1815, it was a corrected version of the fourth
edition with some new articles. In 20 volumes
with more than 16,000 pages, it was the first
edition of Britannica to be advertised in news-
papers, the principal advertising medium of
the day.
Refinements in Procedures and
Content
By the nineteenth century, several other
encyclopedias were being published in Great
Britain. To compete, Constable recruited au-
thorities to write about the subjects they knew
best for a six- volume supplement to Britannica.
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA 79
For the first time, most articles were signed
original contributions rather than, as in the
past, digests of previously publishedmaterial.
Britannica was the first encyclopedia to print
initials at the end of the articles; a key linked
these to the names of the authors, Some of the
well known contributors were Sir Walter Scott
on chivalry, William Hazlitt on fine arts, and
Thomas Malthus on population. There also
were foreign contributors. Edited by Macvey
Napier, librarian and scholar, and published
between 1815 and 1 824, these volumes served
as a supplement to the fourth and fifth editions
and to the sixth edition, which was issued
concurrently with the supplement. The six
volumes were issued in half-volume parts and
totaled 5,000 pages containing 125 plates.
One-quarter of the 669 articles were biogra-
phies, all treating deceased subjects.
The sixth edition, also published in parts
between 1 820 and 1 823 by Constable, was just
a corrected version of the fifth with a few new
articles. Cross-references were added, lead-
ing from the main volumes to the supplement.
After the death of Constable, the copyrights
were bought by Edinburgh bookshop owner
Adam Black, later of the publishing firm of A
& C Black. He issued the seventh edition, also
edited by Napier, between 1830 and 1842.
This set of 22 volumes and 17, 101 pages with
506 plates represented a greater increase in
size than the numbers might indicate because
the pages were now larger, It was a revision of
previous editions, incorporating some of the
best articles from the supplement. New ar-
ticles included Thomas de Quincey on
Shakespeare, Pope, and Schiller. The seventh
edition was heavily advertised and was the
first to have a separate index. "While the qual-
ity of the indexing was not good, this inclusion
of an index set a precedent that other encyclo-
pedias were to follow (but that Britannica
itself abandoned for a time more than a cen-
tury later).
The eighth edition was edited by Dr. Tho-
mas Stewart Traill, professor at the University
of Edinburgh, replacing Napier, who had died.
It was published between 1 852 and 1 860 in 22
volumes with 17,957 pages. Some classic
articles, including pieces by Scott, Ricardo,
and Malthus, were reprinted, New articles
included biographies by Macaulay of Samuel
Johnson, JohnBunyan, Oliver Goldsmith, and
William Pitt. An American contributor, the
president of Harvard, appeared for the first
time, writing on George Washington. New
topics included photography, Communism,
and the telegraph. In addition to separate pages
of engraved plates, many illustrations from
line blocks were inserted in the text.
The Celebrated Ninth Edition
The aging Black wasn't interested in a
new edition, but his sons prevailed upon him
and took over the firm. The resulting ninth
edition, often called the Scholar's Edition,
reflected the changes in intellectual thought
occasioned by Darwin' s Origin of the Species.
It is one of the most famous of all encyclope-
dias and can still be found in many libraries
today . For the first time, the set had an English
rather than a Scottish editor, Professor Tho-
mas Baynes, a Shakespearean scholar at St.
Andrews University. The 25 volumes pre-
sented the work of 1 , 1 00 contributors and took
1 4 years to produce, being completed in 1 8 89.
The articles are often described as leisurely
nineteenth-century essays — long and beauti-
fully written. T.H. Huxley wrote on evolution;
Lord Rayleigh, who later won the Nobel Prize,
on physics; and Lord Kelvin on chemistry.
Algernon Charles Swinburne wrote on John
Keats and Dante Gabriel Rossetti contributed
biographies of painters. The article on anar-
chism was written by the revolutionary Prince
Kropotkin. James G. Frazer, then an unknown
Cambridge don, wrote on anthropology. He
later said his research tot Britannica articles
marked the beginning of his systematic study
of the subject which led to the publication of
The Golden Bough. The ninth edition took a
progressive stand on religious and scientific
questions. W. Robertson Smith wrote many of
3^
80 nTSTTNfil JISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
the ninth edition's articles that presented a
historical interpretation of Christianity . As a
result, he lost his position as a clergyman and
became joint editor of the ninth edition. Some
innovations in this edition were the use of
colored plates and colored maps. Dates were
given for a person's birth and death, an inno-
vation despite the long presence of biogra-
phies in Britannica, and longer articles were
supplied with bibliographies. Because publi-
cation of a volume was dependent on revenues
from previous volumes, publication was a
protracted process, and the earlier volumes
were somewhat outdated by the time the later
ones appeared. The ninth edition contained
1 7,000 articles in 20,000 pages in 24 volumes.
Some out-of-date articles were retained from
the eighth edition but in the main this was a
new work. Though scholarly, it did have some
articles on practical topics, such as cookery,
croquet, and making snowshoes.
Five times as many sets were sold in the
U.S., where an authorized edition was distrib-
uted by Scribner's and Little, Brown, as in
Great Britain. But even after the International
Copyright Law was passed in the U.S. in 1 89 1 ,
piracy continued. Despite competition from
such U.S. encyclopedias as the Encyclopedia
Americana, 45,000 authorized sets 6 of the
ninth edition were sold in the U. S . a s well as an
unknown number of pirated sets.
The late nineteenth century saw a boom in
subscription book sales in the U. S . There were
door-to-door sales of all sorts of books —
cookbooks, Bibles, legal books, biographies —
especially in the rural U.S. where people had
no access to bookstores. While on vacation in
England, Horace Everett Hooper, who had
worked for subscription distributors, learned
of a new printing of the ninth edition of
Encyclopaedia Britannica. In 1 898 he entered
into a joint venture with the London Times to
sell an inexpensive reprint of the ninth edition
on credit. He was the first to apply installment
buying to books. He also applied the new
advertising techniques being used to sell soap
and cigarettes to selling EB. By this time A &
C Black had moved from Edinburgh to Lon-
don, and Hooper bought the rights to reprint
the ninth edition from them. The Times was in
a bad financial state and needed this new
source of revenue. They ran advertisements
and took orders, for which they received a
commission. The reprint was sold at a more
than 60 percent price reduction and was enor-
mously successful, so much so that the need
for a supplement was seen. A & C Black's
ownership of Britannica began to be liqui-
dated. By 1 90 1 EB was owned by Hooper and
another American, Walter Montgomery Jack-
son. An American editorial office was opened
for the first time and Hooper' s brother Franklin
was made American editor. Journalist Hugh
Chisholm was named editor in London, where
the main editorial office remained.
The Twentieth Century
The tenth edition (1902-03) reprinted the
25 volumes of the ninth edition (some of
which were now 25 years old) and added 1 1
more. The new volumes contained photo-
graphs, a first for Britannica. A single index
volume covered both the old volumes and the
new ones. Hooper designed a frenzied adver-
tising campaign for Britannica. There was
even a contest with one of the prizes a schol-
arship to Oxford or Cambridge. Sales agents
were sent throughout the Empire and even to
Japan. Some Britons scorned the "Yankee
invasion" and the use of American advertising
tactics. Hooper now took on the additional job
of advertising director of the Times. Ahead of
his time in many ways, Hooper got the Times
involved in selling discounted books which
led to conflict with other publishers and even-
tually to the sale of the newspaper. Britannica 's
contract with the Times was cancelled.
During this time work was proceeding on
a totally new eleventh edition. Jackson was
now more active in an American firm, the
Grolier Society, which was publishing The
Book of Knowledge, the precursor of today's
New Book of Knowledge. Conflict arose be-
tween Hooper and Jackson because Hooper
wanted a completely new eleventh edition and
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA 8 1
Jackson wanted to reuse some of the ninth and
tenth editions. Their discord led to a series of
lawsuits, and work was suspended on the new
edition while Jackson and Hooper tried to buy
each other out. Finally, Hooper worked out an
arrangement with Cambridge University Press
that enabled him to publish the eleventh edi-
tion. Though Cambridge did not put up any
money and was to get a royalty on each set
sold, its backing enabled Hooper to borrow
money to finish the set. The university had the
right to read all articles before publication and
to censor ads and as a result the ads were
considerably less florid than Hooper liked.
For instance, he had to change a hyperbolic ad
that read "The Source of all Knowledge" to
the tamer "The Key to All Knowledge." 7
The eleventh edition of Britannica has
been called the finest ever published. Issued in
1910-191 1, it had 1,507 contributors, among
them 168 fellows of the Royal Society. Fa-
mous contributors included Thomas Huxley,
Bertrand Russell, Nicholas Murray Butler,
Frederick Jackson Turner, Robert Louis
Stevenson, and Alfred North Whitehead. Brit-
ish contributors were still the largest number,
but Americans were next, outnumbering Eu-
ropeans. It was the first edition to acknowl-
edge the importance of the American market
by being dedicated to the president of the
United States as well as the king. It was also
the first edition to be typeset and printed in the
United States as well as in Great Britain. It was
printed on thin, opaque India paper, the kind
used for Bibles. Because the ninth edition had
been issued over so many years, it hadbecome
a collection of monographs which were not
very unified. The eleventh edition was not just
a revision of the ninth; editorial planning and
control were much improved and more edito-
rial work was done on contributions than in
any previous edition. This edition took more
of a specific-entry approach than the ninth,
splitting up topics from the ninth edition into
more short articles. Although the new set was
only slightly larger, the eleventh edition con-
tained 40,000 articles versus 17,000 in the
ninth edition. It was more of a practical refer-
ence work for lay people than just a source for
scholars. There was a drift toward populariza-
tion, with more biographies of contemporary
people. Most critics found it far more read-
able. The public agreed; morethan75 ,000 sets
were sold.*
Sale and Resale of BB
After one last legal battle, Hooper finally
bought Jackson out in 1914, Hooper decided
to issue a biennial book to update the eleventh
edition and published it in 1913 as the
Britannica Year Book. Nearly a quarter of the
pages were devoted to American topics. There
were plans for a children's encyclopedia but
the outbreak of World War I caused the can-
cellation of that project as sales of Britannica
dropped sharply and plans for future editions
of the Year Book were shelved as well. Hooper
returned to the U.S. His next project was a
photo-reduced set of the eleventh edition of
Britannica^ the "Handy Volume" edition, to
be sold through the Sears & Roebuck catalog
for $55. It was very successful, with 200,000
sets sold. 9 With U.S. entry into the war in
1917, President Wilson asked for a curtail-
ment of installment buying and sales of the
"Handy Volume" edition dropped dramati-
cally. As he had done previously when faced
with a financial crisis, Hooper tried to align EB
with a major university or scholarly society,
but was unsuccessful. Sears, led by philan-
thropist Julius Rosenwald, came to the rescue
and bought the set.
In 1920 Hooper undertook a supplement
to treat the war years. Contributors included
the president of the new republic of Czecho-
slovakia, Thomas Masaryk, and General
Danilov writing on the Russian Army. Many
articles were devoted to blow-by-blow ac-
counts of particular battles, but little attention
was paid to the humanities. For instance, 16
pages were devoted to artillery but only four to
music. The so-called twelfth edition was made
up of the eleventh edition and these three
82 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Vi
supplementary volumes published in 1921-
22. Upon Hooper' s death in 1 922, his brother-
in-law William Cox bought the company.
Seats had lost $1,800,000 on EB and was
happy to sell it to him.'
The thirteenth edition (1926) was edited
by James Garvin, an Irish journalist with pro-
American views. It was really just another
three- volume supplement to the eleventh edi-
tion. However, it continued the practice of
recruiting expert contributors. Leon Trotsky
wrote the biography of Vladimir Lenin and H.
L. Mencken, Carl Van Doren, Louis
Untermeyer, and W.E.B, DuBois wrote on
American literature. Andrew Mellon wrote on
finance, Amos Alonzo Stagg on football, and
Bernard Baruch on war debts. It was the first
edition to contain color photographs.
Cox finished a completely new fourteenth
edition in 1929 on the eve of the Depression.
He approached the University of Chicago to
take over the company and publish the new
edition in cooperation with Cambridge Uni-
versity, but the plan fell through, so once again
Julius Rosenwald of Sears put up over $1
million," Garvin continued as editor in the
U.K. and Franklin Hooper remained as the
American editor. The 24-volume set had 3 ,500
contributors, half of them Americans. Advi-
sors for subject areas included Julian Huxley,
JohnDewey, and Roscoe Pound, and 1 8 Nobel
Prizewinners contributed articles, among them
Albert Einstein writing on Space-Time. Even
celebrities contributed to the set: Gene Tunney
onboxing and Irene Castle on dancing, part of
an attempt to popularize Britannica. This edi-
tion furnished instructions on how to swim,
play golf, drive a car, and do handicrafts.
Famous articles from previous editions — Tho-
mas Babington Macauley on Dr. Johnson, for
instance— were reprinted with only slight re-
vision. The set still had a British orientation—
for instance, the article on checkers was under
Draughts, the one on pensions under Superan-
nuation. Cox ran out of money and had to
cancel articles and reuse some from previous
editions in shortened form. Sears bought the
set once more, this time from Cox. The new
edition was enthusiastically received in the
U.S. but was criticized in Great Britain for
being too American and too popular in tone . In
the U.S. most sets were sold through the mail.
The Depression cut into sales and they re-
mained low through the 1930s. When
Rosenwald died, Sears had a new president
who thought the acquisition of EB had been a
mistake. Cox retired and the new publisher
was a Sears executive who dropped mail-
order sales and built up the door-to-door sales
force, still the main sales method used today.
The Fourteenth Edition and
Continuous Revision
With the fourteenth edition, there was a
major change in the way Britannica was pub-
lished, with the implementation of a system of
continuous revision. This means that some
percentage of articles are updated every year
on a flexible schedule instead of entirely new
editions being published periodically. It is the
standard procedure for encyclopedia revision
today in the U.S. (though not in Europe). The
practice of continuous revision began because
Sears did not want to put up large sums for a
new edition after the fourteenth; yet the sales
staff said that the set must be kept current,
After extensive study, they found that with
continuous revision they could keep a regular
staff instead of hiring a large one for a new
edition and firing them when it was done. A
number of competitors {Encyclopedia Ameri-
cana, World Boole) had already started using
this system. From this point, the size of the set
remained fairly constant until the fifteenth
edition. The company offices were central-
ized in Chicago; Walter Yust became editor;
and, over time, the set was restyled, and the
index redone.
In 1 936 the Library Research Service was
established. Its purpose is to provide for pur-
chasers answers to questions that could not be
found in EB. Purchasers were allowed to ask
as many questions as they wanted for ten years
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA 83
after buying the set. Researchers scoured
Chicago libraries to respond to these requests.
The service became so popular that a limit had
to be placed on the number of questions that
could be asked. (Today the service answers
135,000 questions a year.) The idea of a
yearbook was revived and the Britannica Book
of the Year was published in 1938 and contin-
ues to be issued annually, though publication
was suspended during World War II. Through
1968 separate yearbooks were published for
the U. S . and the U.K., but since then there has
been one international edition.
The University of Chicago
Connection
As the nation pulled out of the Depres-
sion, sales and profits improved but Sears still
felt that EB was not an appropriate business
for the company and wanted to sell it. It was
felt that in order to maintain the set's reputa-
tion, it shouldnotbe sold to a commercial firm.
In 1942, Sears tried to interest the University
of Chicago in EB again. William Benton,
founder of the advertising agency of Benton
and Bowles and eventually senator from Con-
necticut, was vice-president for public rela-
tions at the university. After initial discussions
with Sears, he recommended to university
President Robert Maynard Hutchins that they
try to persuade Sears to donate EB to the
university. Sears agreed to do this, but the
university trustees turned the offer down be-
cause the university would have had to put up
some working capital. Benton was so enthusi-
astic about the gift that he agreed to put up the
money and assume management of the com-
pany. Under this plan Benton would own two-
thirds of the stock and the university one-third,
with an option to buy half of Benton's stock.
The university would get a royalty on each set
sold and three of the nine directors of the
company would be university trustees. The
trustees finally agreed to this arrangement.
Benton expanded the company, and
bought an educational film company which
became Encyclopaedia Britannica Films.
During World War II, sales rose rather than
fell, as they had in World War I. However,
after the war, when consumers were able to
buy cars and other consumer items again,
sales dropped. A financial crisis developed in
1947 and a new president was brought in, a
former executive with World Book, That year
the first Board of Editors was established,
chaired by Hutchins, with the charge to con-
sider questions of general editorial policy.
These questions may range from the decision
to create a new edition or some other major
publication to a debate over the proper treat-
ment of history. The board's members alert
editors to changes in the scholarly community
that may affect EB and help it maintain an
international perspective. In 1952, EB pub-
lished Great Books of the Western World,
edited by Mortimer Adler, who became chair-
man of EB's Editorial Board after the retire-
ment of Hutchins. After Walter Yust, who had
been editor from 1938 to 1960, retired, Harry
Ashmore, a journalist, was editor from 19 60 to
1963. Color pictures in the body of text, rather
than in separate inserts, were introduced in
1 963 . In 1 96 1 EB bought Compton 's Encyclo-
pedia. Today EB also owns dictionary pub-
lisher Merriam- Webster, Evelyn Wood Read-
ing Dynamics, Britannica Software, and
Britannica Learning Centers.
In 1964 the fourteenth edition was criti-
cized by Harvey Einbinder in his book The
Myth of the Britannica (New York: Grove
Press). He found over 600 articles in the 1963
set that had been taken from the eleventh and
ninth editions. Some of these articles were
almost 1 00 years old. Those written by famous
contributors were openly retained and still
carried their names, occasionally with a note
explaining why this classic article was re-
printed. But in other cases articles by un-
known contributors were reprinted without
their initials. Einbinder found obsolete statis-
tics — for instance, almost 20 years after World
War II the article on Warsaw said its popula-
tion was 30 percent Jewish. Articles on clas-
<£= _«_41IIUJJU^
84 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
id.
sical writers dated back to a time when a
classical education was the mark of an edu-
cated person and so contained lines in Latin or
Greek without translation. He found that inad-
equate updating had led to inconsistencies
among articles. Biographies often didn't re-
flect the relative importance of people in the
contemporary world. For instance, the article
on Theodore Roosevelt was more than twice
as long as the one on Franklin Delano
Roosevelt.
Britannica 3
The editors of EB were not unaware of
problems and planning was already underway
for a totally new edition. After more than 35
years of continuous revision, EB was losing its
focus. The editors felt that they couldn't con-
tinue to just cut and paste; they needed a clear
concept of what the encyclopedia should be.
As early as 1961 studies had begun on a new
plan; Mortimer Adler worked out the scheme
between 1965 and 1968. In 1968 work on a
revision began in great secrecy; the company
managed to keep the new edition under wraps
until just before publication in 1974.
The general editor of the fifteenth edition
was Warren Preece, former English professor
at the University of Chicago, and the execu-
tive editor was Philip Goetz, who became
editor-in-chief in 1 979. This edition had 3,000
pages in 30 volumes, 1 9, 000 photographs, and
an editorial price tag of $32,000,000. n It had
4,000 contributors, many of them quite distin-
guished, from 100 countries. While Ameri-
cans made up the largest number and British
next, almost every part of the world except
Africa was well represented. Its publication in
1974 was widely hailed as the publishing
event of the year with wide media coverage. It
was not just a new edition but a new encyclo-
pedia with a totally different orientation.
The editors looked anew at the whole
concept of the encyclopedia. A review of the
day observed that "They have tried imagina-
tively to solve the problems that all modern
encyclopedias face and to provide with au-
thority and accuracy for all of the varied uses
that people make of general reference books,
from the fast factual check to the extended
search. And they have gone beyond this to
attempt to create a tool for systematic self-
teaching." 13 The concept was developed by
Benton, Hutchins, and Adler, but the rear-
rangement reflected Adler' s interest in self-
education, and his love for classification and
bringing a unity to knowledge — the encyclo-
pedia as the "circle of learning." It was in a
three-part form that tried to combine the best
of both a topical and alphabetical arrangement
and hence was known as Britannica 3. The
one- volume Propaedia took a topical approach,
the ten- volume Micropaedia strictly an alpha-
betical one, and the nineteen-volume
Macropaedia combined aspects of both. The
Propaedia served to impose a topical arrange-
ment on the set by organizing knowledge in
outline form under ten broad headings. There
is no index to the Propaedia and it is difficult
for the unsophisticated reader to use. This
volume appears to be the least-used part of the
encyclopedia. The Macropaedia had about
4,200 long articles, averaging 5 pages, but
with some over 1 00 pages long. These lengthy
articles were intended to overcome the frag-
mentation of knowledge that often occurs in
encyclopedias and were to serve the self-
education function. All articles in the
Macropaedia were signed and were espe-
cially written for the fifteenth edition. For the
first time, maps were placed throughout the set
with the articles they were intended to illus-
trate, rather than being isolated in an atlas in
the last volume. As an interesting experiment,
Russian contributors were asked to write many
articles on the Soviet Union. These were not
well received; in that jnz-Glasnost era, they
were biased and they have largely been re-
placedin later revisions. Some reviewers criti-
cized the Macropaedia for retaining an alpha-
betical arrangement, rather than being ar-
ranged topically. Since the EB editors had
criticized the typical encyclopedia alphabet!-
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA 85
cal arrangement for the wayitfragments knowl-
edge, some thought it an indefensible incon-
sistency to create a hybrid that retained that
arrangement in part.
The Micropaedia served the ready refer-
ence function and had about 100,000 articles,
none of them more than 750 words long. These
articles were not signed. A list of 2,600 au-
thorities were given for the Micropaedia, but
many articles were written by freelance writ-
ers or staff. Some reviewers criticized the
Micropaedia because many of the entries were
just abstracts of articles in the fourteenth edi-
tion, but others, especially librarians, found it
to be the most useful part of the set. Most of the
illustrations intheset werehere. Every subject
in the Macropaedia also had a much shorter
entry in the Micropaedia with a reference to
the Macropaedia section. Most biographies
were in the Micropaedia but over 1,000 were
found in the Macropaedia. Reviewers com-
plained that it sometimes was not clear why
one person merited a long Macropaedia ar-
ticle and another got only brief coverage in the
Micropaedia. For example, Aleksander
Suvorov, an eighteenth-century Russian mili-
tary commander, received full coverage in the
Macropaedia while nineteenth-century Brit-
ish poet Algernon Charles Swinburne received
only brief treatment in the Micropaedia. There
were few bibliographies in the Micropaedia,
An addendum to the last volume of the
Micropaedia contained statistics and direc-
tory information that was likely to need fre-
quent updating. Reviewers complained that
this information was likely to be overlooked
and, in 1 985, it was moved to the yearbook, to
become the "Britannica World Data "section.
Britannica 3 originally had no separate index.
Instead, the Micropaedia had an elaborate
system of cross-references that was to serve in
place of an index. This was the most widely
criticized flaw of the fifteenth edition, both by
librarians and the public. To capitalize on
librarians' need for an index, a publisher ad-
vertised an index widely by direct mail and
offered substantial discounts for prepaid or-
ders. Many librarians took advantage of this
offer, but were taken advantage of by the
publisher; he had notproduced the advertised
index and eventually was convicted in federal
court for mail fraud. Later, because of com-
plaints from librarians that in a library setting
where several people might be using the set at
once it was sometimes impossible to use the
Micropaedia as an index, Britannica issued a
separate "Library Guide" volume. Because it
was not an index but merely listed all the index
citations from the Micropaedia, its value was
limited.
Revision of Britannica 3
In 1985, a major revision of the fifteenth
edition, addressed some of the criticisms of
Britannica 3. A well regarded two-volume
index was added. The Micropaedia was ex-
panded to 12 volumes and the Macropaedia
was reduced to 17. The 4,200 articles of the
Macropaedia were reduced to 681, some of
them more than 100 pages long. Many entries
resemble short books. Many smaller articles
were brought together into a broader entry;
e.g., all the states appear under "United States
of America." Many articles, including all
biographies (except 100 people who pro-
foundly affected world history) were moved
to the Micropaedia. The 750-word limit on
articles in this part of the set was lifted. Some
Micropaedia articles now included bibliogra-
phies (usually ones transferred over from the
Macropaedia). All the entries were arranged
in a word-by-word alphabetization, which is
easier to use than the former letter-by-letter
arrangement. For topics included in both parts
of the set, many Micropaedia articles were
rewritten to include more information, so they
were no longer just outlines of Macropaedia
articl es. Highly datable material was moved to
the Britannica Book of the Year/ Britannica
World Data Annual and cross-references were
provided to this volume. The Propaedia was
also restructured . The new index included the
Britannica WorldData Annual and was judged
4
86 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
an excellent finding device. This format and
arrangement is currently being used in 1991.
In 1991 Editor-in-Chief Philip Goetz stepped
down and was succeeded by Robert McHenry,
former managing editor.
Today Britannica is not only the oldest
but is also the largest and most expensive
general encyclopedia published in the U.S. A
scholarly encyclopedia, it is not for elemen-
tary and middle school children, though it is
sometimes marketed as being for that age
group. Unlike some encyclopedias, there is no
vocabulary control and no attempt to include
the topics that children are most likely to look
up. Many of the science and math articles are
too technical for the "curious, intelligent lay-
person" Britannica has always characterized
as its audience. Compared with its closest
competitors, Encyclopedia Americana and
Collier's Encyclopedia, it contains more eso-
teric information and does not provide practi-
cal, how-to-do-it type information nor much
coverage of popular culture. Its real strength is
its historical treatment of topics. While most
encyclopedias are tailored for a North Ameri-
can audience, Britannica also takes a broader
world view than competing American sets.
For instance, the biographies of the American
president and the British prime minister are
roughly the same length. The British spelling
that is still used is sometimes termed an affec-
tation and is not used consistently. For in-
stance, when a word begins with a different
letter in British English ("oestrogen"), the
American spelling is used. EB is unique in that
contributors are allowed to list foreign-lan-
guage materials in the bibliographies at the
end of their articles. For example, the bibliog-
raphy for the article on the U.S.S.R. lists books
in Russian as well as Italian and German.
While authors of articles have been instructed
not to list obscure materials that would be hard
to find, these bibliographies are more schol-
arly than those in any other encyclopedia.
Who owns EB today? Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc. is a privately held for-profit
company. All of the company's stock is held
by the William Benton Foundation, an Illinois
not-for-profit corporation established in 1 948
to support the University of Chicago. In 1957,
Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc. paid the Uni-
versity of Chicago $2 million for its shares of
stock in the company. The foundation is con-
trolled by a thirteen-member board of direc-
tors, consisting of five members from
Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc., four from the
University of Chicago, and four from the
public sector. They are responsible for elect-
ing the company's board of directors and for
working with the University of Chicago to
allocate the annual grants made by the founda-
tion. Currently, the foundation gives the uni-
versity about $2,000,000 a year; it has given
the university more than $ 100 million over its
lifetime. 14 This makes EB the university's
largest contributor, exceeding even the
Rockefellers, whose gifts founded the univer-
sity. The foundation ownership of the com-
pany safeguards it against a takeover by an-
other firm and from stockholders seeking to
dictate policies. In order to sell any of its stock,
a two-thirds majority vote is necessary. As
measured by revenue, Encyclopaedia Britan-
nica, Inc. is the seventh largest publisher in
America today. 15 Sales from all divisions now
amount to $650 mi Uion a year. ' 6 The company
does business in more than 100 countries and
has produced encyclopedias in many foreign
languages.
EB's Future
Britannica has traditionally been very cir-
cumspectaboutrevealingfuture plans. A com-
pany spokesperson stated that there are no
plans to change the structure of the set (plans
for revisions in Macropaedia articles are al-
ready scheduled through 1993) and no elec-
tronic version of EB is planned. (The com-
pany issued a CD-ROM version of Compton 's
Encyclopedia in 1990.) Since the arrange-
ment of a printed work becomes transparent
when it is converted to electronic form, per-
haps a CD-ROM version of EB would end the
debate over the set's plan. The 1990 EB was
the first to be printed on acid-free paper and
ENCYCLOPAEDIA BRITANNICA 87
the company is investigating the digital han-
dling of art in the future. Changes in printing
technology under development may also im-
prove the way that the encyclopedia is revised.
New technologies may cut production costs so
that encyclopedia publishers may be able to do
new layouts more frequently. EB, Inc. has
always been in the forefront in using new
technology; it installed a computer system to
do Britannica 3 and the entire set is in
machine-readable form. One can predict that
the company will remain in the technological
vanguard.
Today's New Encyclopaedia Britannica
bears little resemblance to the modest "Dictio-
nary of the Arts and Sciences" first published
in Edinburgh in 1768. While its editors' will-
ingness to experiment with the arrangement of
the set's contents has been cause for contro-
versy, its also shows their commitment to EB
as more than just a reference tool — as an
instrument of self-education as well. After
more than 220 years of publishing history, EB
"continues to provide both outstanding schol-
arship and balanced coverage of world learn-
ing" and retains its undeniable authority, 17
"Throughout the English-speaking world and,
for that matter, anywhere in the world, the
Encyclopaedia Britannica is by far the most
famous encyclopedia in the English lan-
guage." 18
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Encyclopaedia Britannica: or, a Dictionary of Arts
and Sciences ... By a society of gentlemen in
Scotland. Edinburgh, 1768-1771. 3 vols. Re-
printed in facsimile. Chicago: Encyclopaedia
Britannica, Inc., 1968.
Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, etc. . . . 2nd ed. Edinburgh, 1777-
1784. 10 vols.
Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature . . , 3rd
ed. Edinburgh, 1788-1797. 18 vols. Supple-
ment to the third edition. Edinburgh, 180L 2
vols.
Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature . . . 4th
ed. Edinburgh, 1801-1809. 20 vols.
Encyclopaedia Britannica; or a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature,. . . 5th
ed. Edinburgh, 1815. 20 vols.
Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and Miscellaneous Literature ... 6th
ed. Edinburgh, 1820-1823. 20 vols.
Supplement (to the 4th, 5th, and 6th eds.) Edinburgh,
1815-1824. 6 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, a Dictionary of
Arts, Sciences, and General Literature. 7th ed.
Edinburgh, 1827-1842. 21 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica; or, Dictionary of
Arts, Sciences, and General Literature, 8th ed.
Edinburgh, 1853-1861. 21 vols, plus index vol.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica; a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and General Literature. 9th ed.
Edinburgh, 1875-1889. 24 vols, plus index vol.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica; Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, and General Literature. 10th ed. Lon-
don, 1902-1903. 34 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica: a Dictionary of Arts,
Sciences, Literature and General Information.
1 lth ed. Cambridge andNew York, 1910-191 1.
29 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica. 1 2th ed. London and
New York, 1921-22. 32 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica. 13th ed. London and
New York, 1926. 32 vols.
The Encyclopaedia Britannica. 14th ed. Annually
revised. Chicago , 1929-1973. 24 vols.
The New Encyclopaedia Britannica. 15th ed. Chi-
cago and London, 1974- . 30 vols, through
1984; 32 vols. 1985 to date.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The best, most easily accessible historical
survey appears in Britannica itself, in the
Micropaedia. Kogan's The Great EB is the
official company history and stresses corpo-
rate matters more than the content of the set.
Collison has valuable historical information
up through the fourteenth edition, as does
Walsh. The fifteenth edition was widely re-
viewed; see the 1974 volume of Book Review
Digest for citations. Lengthy reviews of re-
cent printings can be found in Kister and
Sader. Reviews of many editions of Britannica
88 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OP REFERENCE PUBLISHING
* <■ i
m
can be found in various issues of Reference
Books Bulletin in Booklist. Know: A Maga-
zine for Britannica People Everywhere is the
corporate house organ and has many interest-
ing articles but is rarely available in libraries,
American Library Association. Reference Books
Bulletin Editorial Board. Purchasing an Ency-
clopedia: 12 Points to Consider* 3rd ed. Edited
by Sandy Whiteley. Chicago: Booklist, 1989,
Ashmore, Harry S. Unseasonable Truths: The Life of
Robert MaynardHutchins. Boston: LittleBrown,
1689.
Collison, Robert. Encyclopaedias: Their History
throughout the Ages.Naw York: Hafner, 1964.
Einbinder, Harvey. The Myth of the Britannica, New
York: Grove Press, 1964.
. "The New Britannica: Pro and Con." Li-
brary Journal 1 12 (April 15, 1987): 48-50.
"Encyclopaedia Britannica. " Hie New Encyclopaedia
Britannica. Chicago: EncyclopaediaBritannica,
1990. Vol. 4: 487-88.
Fine, Sheila. "This Day is Published: A Condensed
History of Encyclopaedia Britannica" Know:
A Magazine for Britannica People Everywhere.
22 (Spring, 1986): 10-13.
Hyman, Sydney. The Lives of William Benton. Chi-
cago: University of Chicago Press, 1969.
Kister, Kenneth. Kister's Concise Guide to Best
Encyclopedias. Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1988.
Kogan, Herman. The Great EB: The Story of the
Encyclopaedia Britannica. Chicago: Univer-
sity of Chicago Press, 19S8.
Koning, Hans. "Onward and Upward with the Arts:
the Eleventh Edition." Hew Yorker 51 (March
2, 1981): 67-83.
Kruse, Paul. The Story of the Encyclopedia Britannica,
1768-1943. Ph.D. dissertation, University of
Chicago, 1958.
McClintock, Robert, Enkyklios Paideia: The Fif-
teenth Edition of the Encyclopaedia Britannica.
National Academy of Education, 1976. Also
published in the Proceedings of the National
Academy of Education, vol, 2.
McCracken, Samuel. "The Scandal of 'Britannica
3'." Commentary 61 (February, 1976): 63-67.
"The New Encyclopaedia Britannica." Booklist/
Reference Books Bulletin 171 (June 1, 1975):
1021-28.
Sader, Marion. General Reference Books for Adults.
New York: R.R. Bowker, 1988. The article on
Britannica also appears in a slightly different
version in Reference Books for Young Readers,
Marion Sader, ed. New York: R.R. Bowker,
1988.
Walsh, S. Padraig. Anglo-American General Ency-
clopedias: A Historical Bibliography, 1703-
1967. New York: R.R. Bowker, 1968.
Wells, James M. The Circle of Knowledge:
Encyclopaedias Past and Present. Chicago:
Newberry Library, 1968,
Wolff, Geoffrey, "Britannica 3 , Failures of." Atlan-
tic 238 (November, 1976): 107-10.
"Britannica 3, History of." Atlantic 233
(June, 1974): 37-47.
NOTES
1 The statistics for this edition and subsequent editions
described here are from Robert Collison, Encyclo-
pedias: Their History Throughout the Ages (New
York: Hafner, 1964), 138-45.
J Herman Kogan, The Great EB (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1958), 10.
3 Ibid., 13.
4 Ibid,, 24.
s For a history of pirated editions in Ihe U.S., see Padraig
Walsh, Anglo-American General Encyclopedias
(New York: Bowker, 1968), 52-54.
6 Collison, 145.
7 Kogan, 162-163.
8 Walsh, 50
9 Ibid.
10 Kogan, 212.
"Ibid., 222.
12 Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc., press release, n.d,
13 "New Encyclopaedia Britannica," Reference and Sub-
scription Books Review (1 January 1975):
14 "Who Owns EB, Inc?, News from Encyclopaedia
Britannica, press release, n.d,
15 "The Biggest Publishers," Publishers Weekly (21
December 1990): 12.
16 "The 400 Largest Private Companies in the U.S.,"
Forbes 146 (10 December 1990): 246.
17 "Reference Books Bulletin," Booklist (15 October
1989): 488.
18 Walsh, 44.
The Book that Built Gale Research:
The Encyclopedia of Associations
Carol M. Tobin
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
The Encyclopedia ofAssociations arose out of
one man's desire to find the information he
needed to do his job. Because of the character
of the man and the need of others for the
information he sought, that one book became
the foundation of Gale Research, a publisher
that specializes in reference materials for li-
braries.
Frederick G. Ruffner
In 1954 Frederick G. Ruffner was a re-
search manager for General Detroit Corpora-
tion. He needed to find information about
some trade associations and assumed that there
would be a listing of such organizations. He
came across one, National Associations of the
United States, that the U.S. Commerce De-
partment had put out in 1 949, but it was out of
date. He concluded that there was a market for
a directory of organizations. "It seemed so
basic that I thought if I needed such a book,
others must need it too." He decided to publish
such a book himself, and with his wife Mary
worked on what would become the Encyclo-
pedia of American Associations. At first the
newlyweds worked in a corner of their bed-
room and later expanded to renting desk space
in the aptly named Book Building in down-
town Detroit. Ruffner eventually quit his job
to work on the project full-time. 1
He sought advice from C. J. Judkins, chief
of the Trade Association Division of the U.S.
Department of Commerce, the compiler of the
Commerce Department directory; Charles M.
Mortensen, manager of the Trade Association
Department of the U.S. Chamber of Com-
merce; and Walter E. Forster, chief librarian
of the Business and Commerce Division, De-
troit Public Library.
Method of Compilation
The method of compilation of the first
edition is still used today: identifying associa-
tions by scanning various listings and then
confirming the information by mail or phone
inquiries to the organizations themselves.
While compiling the directory, Ruffner moved
from a shared office to a private one, and in
1956 he hired his first part-time employee 2
and published the Encyclopedia of American
Associations (EAA). The EAA was described
in the Preface as "a directory of non-profit
organizations of national scope." Readers were
given the caveat that "the nature and magni-
tude of the directory make it impossible for the
publisher to guarantee complete accuracy.
Listing in this book does not confer status
upon any organization, nor should omission
imply lack of status." No editor was listed for
the first edition. The acknowledgements were
signed "Gale Research Company," with the
name "Gale" taken from Ruffner's middle
name.
From the beginning, Gale has seen librar-
ies as one of its prime markets. The preface to
the first edition of EAA stated "this book has
90 DISTrNGUlSHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
4
n
been designed as a reference tool for librar-
ians, businessmen, educators, government of-
ficials and research workers." Ruffner has
said "Right from the start we sold by mail,
mostly to libraries and go vernment agencies . ' ' 3
The first edition of the EAA started a
number of practices continued by the later
editions and by Gale to this day. The preface
asks that "errors of omission or commission"
and suggestions be sent to the publisher. The
postage paid reply cards for orders and sug-
gestions still found in the 1991 edition ap-
peared in the first edition. There was a reply
form to add, change, or delete information
about an organization. A footnote added "Upon
receipt of this card the publisher will send
questionnaire for detailed data on new organi-
zations."
The EAA started the Gale practice of
using a lengthy title reminiscent of older En-
glish works. The full title of the first edition is
Encyclopedia of American Associations: A
Guide to the Trade, Business, Professional,
Labor, Scientific, Education, Fraternal and
Social Organizations of the United States.
The EAA announced itself from the start as a
first edition and two supplements were prom-
ised for December 1956: Supplement I, Func-
tional and Topical Listings, and Supplement
II, Additions and Corrections, also to include
Labor Unions. Thus EAA began another Gale
tradition, supplementing works between edi-
tions.
A section entitled "How to Use this Direc-
tory" has been a standard feature from the
start. In the first edition it took two pages; in
the 1991 edition it took four. That first edition
was divided into six sections: Trade, Business,
Agricultural and Governmental Associations;
Scientificand Engineering Associations; Edu-
cation and Social Welfare Associations; Health
and Medical Associations; General Associa-
tions; and Chambers of Commerce. Section
seven was a "Finding Guide Index."
The entries were arranged within each
sectionalphabeticallyby keyword, exceptthat
the Chambers of Commerce were listed alpha-
betically by state and city. The Finding Guide
Index listed each association under its name
and by each keyword in the name.
The entries provided information on the
name of the organization, its address, the chief
paid official or secretary, the staff, the found-
ing date, and a description that included the
activities, purpose and membership, and num-
ber of local groups or chapters. Old names and
predecessor organizations' names were given
if a merger had occurred. In the Chambers of
Commerce section, population figures for cit-
ies and towns from the 1950 Census were
listed.
Critical Reception
The work was well received by the library
press. The Booklist and Subscription Books
Bulletin in October 1957 gave the most de-
tailed review. It took the book to task for
calling itself an encyclopedia rather than a
directory, when even the publisher "always
refers to the book as a ' directory' , never as an
'encyclopedia.'" The review criticized the
lack of running titles in the sections and men-
tioned some problems with the keyword group-
ing. Significantly, the review mentioned that
there was no truly comparable directory. The
reviewer's comparison of EAA with the Na-
tional Associations of the United States and its
1956 supplement revealed "a similarity of
content but totally different presentations."
The review noted that EAA had 30 percent
more entries under the letter G. Some discrep-
ancies in names of personnel for library orga-
nizations between the .£4/4 and the ALA Mem-
bership Directory were mentioned; however,
the review noted that a spot check of the New
York City addresses with the Manhattan phone
directory revealed no errors. The binding,
paper, and typeface were judged to be good.
The review concluded:
Until the publication of the Encyclopedia of
American Associations^ there has been no
current directory of this type available for use
as a reference tool by librarians, businessmen,
ENCYCLOPEDIA OP ASSOCIATIONS 91
educators, government officials, and research
workers. While there are some discrepancies
and inaccuracies in individual entries, they do
not appear to be numerous enough to detract
from the value of the volume as a current
listing of American associations. It is there-
fore recommended for purchase by libraries
having a definite established demand from
their clientele for directory material. 4
Paul Wasserman's review of EAA for
Library Journal in December 1956 also com-
pared it favorably with National Associations
of the United States, whose 1956 supplement
he judged "very slight and inadequate." He
said the EAA "should prove a highly useful
and frequently thumbed through volume."
Wasserman did mention the high price ($ 1 5),
but said that in spite of it, "this work will be
required in virtually every library where busi-
ness is being served in even a minor way." 5
The EAA was also cited in Frances Neel
Cheney *s "Current Reference Books" column
in the Wilson Library Bulletin in October
1956. 6
Perhaps the best indication that Ruffner
and Gale had created a classic was the inclu-
sion of EAA in a list of 1 1 titles for 1956 "that
gave promise of high reference potential."
The list was compiled by the independent
Reference Checklist Committee chaired by
Louis Shores. In that checklist, the EAA is
recommended for public, academic, and re-
search libraries; only school libraries were
excluded. 7
No other source of information about
associations published prior to the EAA, in-
cluding the Commerce Department's Na-
tional Associations of the United States* and
the Public Administration Clearing House's
Public Administration Organizations 9 could
boast the breadth of EAA, which encompassed
fraternal, women's, sports, educational, and
religious organizations among others.
The Second Edition and Beyond
With the critical and financial success of
the first edition, Gale was able to proceed with
a second edition, although the EAA did not
become the hoped-for annual until the ninth
edition, nearly 20 years later. The second
edition was published in 1959. The price had
gone up to $20 but for this one got half again
as many listings, a subject index, andanumber
of items added to the description. The work
now had 19 sections instead of 6 as well as a
section of items "received too late to classify."
The descriptions were expanded to include
acronyms; affiliated organizations; sections,
divisions or special committees; publications,
including frequency; and convention or an-
nual meeting. The how-to-use section showed
a sample listing to illustrate the different ele-
ments of the description, a feature retained to
this day. The introduction now specified a
Reader Service Bureau maintained by Gale
that could supply at no charge additional data
that might result as part of the continuing
program of editing the EAA. The Reader Ser-
vice Bureau is mentioned through the thir-
teenth edition in 1979, but the twelfth and
thirteenth editions cautioned: "The staff can-
not, however, answer inquires concerning the
general history of associations and does not
compile statistical surveys." The second edi-
tion was also financially successful andhelped
Gale become "a full-fledged publishing com-
pany." 10
The third edition came a little more
quickly. It was published in 1961 under the
now familiar name of the Encyclopedia of
Associations (EA). Once again the price rose,
this time to $25. However, for this buyers
received 30 percent more listings and a second
volume, the Geographic andExecutive Index.
The introduction mentioned other volumes in
preparation, Volume III, "State and Local
Associations of the U.S.-East"; Volume IV,
"State and Local Associations of the U.S.-
Wesf"; and Volume V, "National Organiza-
tions of Canada." These volumes never ap-
peared, but they show the idea behind titles
that did appear much later, i.e., Encyclopedia
of Associations: Regional, State, and Local
Organizations (1987- ) and Encyclopedia of
92 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
If
SI
Associations; International Organizations
(1983-).
The title change occasioned some more
reviews. Eric Moon cited some errors ofinfor-
mation but concluded ''Despite such errors
and omissions, which are probably unavoid-
able to some degree, this is a valuable refer-
ence work which should be in all but the
smallest libraries." 1 ' EA appeared on the "Out-
standing Reference Books of 196 1" list, as "a
useful compilation of information hard to find
elsewhere." 12
The fourth edition in 1964 was significant
both because Ruffner was listed for the first
time as editor along with three others and
because of the mention of the idea that the EA
can be used as a guide to information as well
as a directory of organizations. In the fifth and
subsequenteditions the information functions
of organizations have been likened to "switch-
boards" to connect "persons needing informa-
tion to highly-qualified sources of informa-
tion." The fifth edition billed this function as
EA's primary value. The acceptance of EA by
librarians was acknowledged in the introduc-
tion to the fourth edition: "Surveys of refer-
ence librarians repeatedly show that the Ency-
clopedia of Associations is among the three or
four most-used books in any reference depart-
ment." In December of 1 964 a supplementary
loose-leaf volume entitled New Associations
was launched. Originally appearing quarterly,
it listed newly formed associations.
In subsequent years the EA continued to
receive good reviews, along with some sug-
gestions for improvements, most of which
were eventually incorporated in EA. Running
titles were added and the early troubles with
keywords were corrected. Librarians were not
always happy with some of the "improve-
ments." Eugene Sheehy says that a new edi-
tion is always "cause for rejoicing in the
reference department," but the enthusiasm for
the seventeenth edition was dampened when it
was found that volume one came in two physi-
cal volumes, which Sheehy felt made EA less
convenient to use. 13 There was also consider-
able discussion in the reviews about the use-
fulness of volume three, New Associations,
because its price soon approached that of
volume one alone. 14
By 1959 EA was listed in A. J. Walford's
Guide to Reference Material, and appeared in
the eighth edition of Constance Winchell's
Guide to Reference Books in 1967 where it
was characterized as the "most comprehen-
sive list for the United States." It was recorded
in the fifth edition of the Enoch Pratt Free
Library's Reference Books: A Brief Guide in
1 962 and by 1 965 the appearance of the fourth
edition was noted without comment in Choice
as befitted a "new edition of standard refer-
ence works . . . recommended for purchase."
BohdanWynar in the second edition of Ameri-
can Reference Books Annual in 1971 de-
scribed it as the "standard directory well-
known to all librarians." 15 A 1982 feature
article on EA in Reference Services Review
noted that "because of its uniqueness, diver-
sity, and accuracy the Encyclopedia of Asso-
ciations merits recognition as a 'landmark of
reference.'" 16
Expanding Scope
With few exceptions, expanding scope
has characterized EA throughout its history.
The fifth edition added nonmembership groups
if they might seem to be voluntary member-
ship groups; some foreign groups if they were
deemed to be of interest to Americans (e.g.,
the Tennyson Society); and some regional and
local groups if their subjects or objectives hold
interest outside their immediate vicinity, (e.g.,
Anti-Coronary Club) . The state and local cham-
bers of commerce were dropped because of
space considerations and because they are
adequately covered by other directories. The
sixth edition added international groups hav-
ing a large American membership, (e.g., the
Campaign for Nuclear Disarmament); citizen
action groups (e.g., theNational Interreligious
Service Board for Conscientious Objectors);
and governmental advisory bodies (e.g., the
ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ASSOCIATIONS 93
President's Council on Youth Opportunity),
The sixteenth edition added "information en-
tries," which describe a group or project for
which no address was given. This category
included groups that moved around, ad hoc
committees, and underground groups like the
Students for a Democratic Society. With the
addition of volume four, International Orga-
nizations, in the eighteenth edition in 1983,
those groups formerly in volume one moved to
volume four except for listings for groups with
American sections or bi-national groups. In
1987, Encyclopedia of Associations: Regional,
State, and Local Organizations, a multi -vol-
ume set, started publication. Except for "a
hundred or so regional organizations" consid-
ered to be of national interest and thus also
listed in EA, the material in this work was all
new.
The 19 sections of the second edition
stayed more or less stable with only the sub-
traction of chambers of commerce in the fifth
edition, the dropping and reassigning of hor-
ticultural organizations and general organiza-
tions in the eighth, and the addition of cultural
organizations in the eighth and fan clubs in the
twenty-second. The items included in the de-
scription continued to grow with zip codes and
phone numbers (fifth edition); computerized
services and telecommunications service
(twentieth edition); budget of the organiza-
tion and presence of exhibits at conventions
(twenty-first edition); and additional informa-
tion about publications (i.e., circulation fig-
ures, prices, former and alternative names,
ISSN, online and microfiche availability)
(twenty-fourth edition).
The indexing of EA has become increas-
ingly sophisticated over the years. Additional
keywords were added over time, and, with the
twentieth edition, the separate name and key-
word indexes had grown to occupy a separate
volume. A catchword was added to the top of
the index pages in the twenty-third edition to
make use more efficient. One of the reasons
for the separate index volume with the twen-
tieth edition was the inclusion of all the entries
from the international organizations volume
and from eight other related Gale directories.
This was expanded in the twenty-first edition
to include more Gale directories and some
non-Gale publications such as the US Govern-
ment Manual and the Federal Yellow Book for
a total of 15. In the twenty-fourth edition, the
editors reverted to the practice of indexing
only Gale directories.
As the EA grew from several thousand
entries to nearly 22,000, its editorial staff also
grew. It has had ten editors (sometimes work-
ing in pairs or, as on the twenty-fourth edition,
in a group of three). The range of editorial
titles is perhaps best illustrated by the twenty-
first edition (1986). It had one editor, three
associate editors, a contributing editor, three
senior assistant editors, thirteen assistant edi-
tors, two editorial assistants, a contributing
editor, two contributing senior assistant edi-
tors, two contributing assistant editors, a con-
tributing research editor, an editorial director,
an associate editorial director, and, finally, a
senior editor of thz Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions Series. In reading the masthead of the
various editions, one can follow an editor's
movement up through the various editorial
ranks thus providing a historical perspective
and a consistency of vision foriL4 . The current
staff is smaller than that of the twenty-first
edition because of rearrangements in the
workflow. The EA National staff is ten people
but only 5.5 FTE; the International is four and
the Regional three, There is no longer a re-
search department devoted just to EA, Instead
Gale's research department works on a vari-
ety of directories and otherprojects as needed. 17
The work is still done basically the same
way as it was for the first edition, although
greatly expanded. The staff scans for new
associations and sends out questionnaires. Cur-
rent organizations are sent revis ion forms with
two follow-up mailings. The research depart-
ment also makes calls both to new groups and
to check up on previous listings. Through the
years the introductions have cited 90 percent
as the number of entries that receive some kind
94 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
of revision orupdating. Each year about 1,000
new organizations are added, while 500 to 600
groups drop out. The current practice is to list
as "missing" those groups which cannot be
located. Requests forupdated information from
these organizations have "remained unan-
swered for at least three editions or have been
returned by the Post Office" as undeliverable.
In the index these organizations* entries bear
theannotation"addressunknownsmce[date]."
Computerized Production
Computerization has helped the staff of
EA. Ruffner wrote in 1 97 6 that "In the late 60s
and early 70s, it took two years to produce a
600-page Encyclopedia of Associations. To-
day, it takes less than half that time to produce
a 3000-page, three-book set, a companion
international volume, and a printed 'update'
service." 18 The ninth edition (1975) is the first
to mention computerized photo composition
and it was from this date that EA became an
annual.
As with so many other sources, the exist-
ence of a computer tape led to new services. In
September 1979 Gale made the thirteenth
edition of EA available as File 114 on DIA-
LOG. This file now includes International
Organizations and Regional, State, and Local
Organizations. In the 1 9th edition ( 1 9 84) Gale
announced the availability of tapes and also
stated that it would do custom computerized
selection sorts, e.g,, on locations. Gale Global
Access: Associations a CD-ROM product that
used the Knowledge Access International soft-
ware became available from Gale in January
1989 at a price of $1495 a year. It included all
the EA volumes, supplements, and updates
and also the records from Association Peri-
odicals. It was reviewed favorably. 19 A press
release from SilverPlatter dated January 3,
1990, announced that SilverPlatter would co-
produce Gale's CD-ROM products. EA was
the first product chosen for production; the
SilverPlatter CD continued to use the name
Gale GlobalAccess: Associations. 10
EA not only kept pace with modern tech-
nology, using computer composition and pro-
viding fax numbers in the listings, but it also
kept up with the demand for more informa-
tion. But as quick as Gale and Ruffner were to
pick up on a good idea, they were also able to
drop ideas that did not work. In 1978 a Youth
Sewing Organizations Directory based on the
twelfth edition of EA appeared for one edition.
Along the way, EA had at various times a
Rankings Indexes volume (twenty-first edi-
tion), and a Research Activities and Funding
Programs (Volume V) published only for the
seventeenth edition. A related publication,
Association Periodicals (1987) was discon-
tinued after only a year. It provided more
information about association publications but
with the twenty-fourth edition of EA increas-
ing the amount of information given about
periodicals, it is not needed. The Updating
Service for volumes I and III begun in 1985
and the New Associations and Projectsbegun
in 1964 were combined in the twenty-fifth
edition (1990). 21
In the first edition Ruffner included a
quote from Alexis de Tocqueville's Democ-
racy in America that appeared in the next
twenty-three editions:
The Americans of all ages, all conditions and
all dispositions constantly form associations.
They have not only commercial and manufac-
turing companies in which all take part but
associations of a thousand other kinds, reli-
gious, moral, serious, futile, restricted, enor-
mous, or diminutive. The Americans make
associations to give entertainments, to found
establishments for education, to send mis-
sionaries to the antipodes Wherever at the
head of some new undertaking you see the
government of France or a man of rank in
England, in the United States you will be sure
to find an association."
This observation on the American pro-
pensity for associations helps explain why the
EA was such a success and found such a
welcome niche in reference departments. It
also explains why the national organizations'
entries take two volumes while the interna-
tional organizations' entries fill only one vol-
ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ASSOCIATIONS 95
ume. And perhaps it explains why this type of
reference work found its fullest flowering in
United States. The EA itself is a fascinating
ground for social history. Some of the reviews
in nonlibrary journals emphasize the more
humorous aspect of this. Richard Kern in
Sales and Marketing Management picked out
the American Association of Dental Victims,
the Texas Barbed Wire Collectors Associa-
tion, and the National Association of Insect
Electrocutor Manufacturers as worthy of men-
tion. 23 A New York Times article was entitled
"Banana Club Meets Electrical Women." 24
The EA is, however, worthy of deeper
study. Starting in the twenty-first edition,
(1986) the editor(s) wrote mini-essays on the
types of new associations listed and how they
"mirror the current interest and concerns of
the American public." In that edition hunger,
national economic issues, children's rights,
and Central America were particularly high-
lighted. In the twenty-fourth edition, Central
America was still mentioned and environ-
mental concerns (spurred by the Alaskan oil
spill), senior citizens rights, and surrogate
parenthood were among the areas that had
newly formed groups. Just a comparison of the
subjects listed under Social Welfare Organi-
zations in the table of contents in the sixth
edition (1970) and the twenty-fourth edition
(1989) reveals some of the changes in the
United States during that period. Anti-pov-
erty, nutrition, rehabilitation, sex information,
crime and delinquency, family life, alcohol-
ism, and narcotics were listed only in the sixth
edition and child welfare, community action,
criminal justice, disabled, family planning,
gay/lesbian, homeless, population, recreation,
selfhelp, service clubs, social work, substance
abuse, surrogate parenthood, and voluntarism
only in the twenty-fourth edition. In some
cases only the terminology had changed (e.g.,
"substance abuse" instead of "narcotics");
but in others (e.g., selfhelp and homeless) the
changes demonstrated newly articulated con-
cerns.
The EA has been used to trace trends in
American life. For example, the author of a
1985 article in the Annals of the American
Society of Political and Social Science con-
sulted it to study the growth of religious re-
form movements. 25 Other authors use it to
compile mailing lists for surveys, as did the
author of "Fee Sharing Between Lawyers and
Public Interest Groups." Lawyers seem to find
it a particular favorite because it has the facts
that can bolster their arguments, e.g. , the num-
ber of groups concerned with drinking and
driving, the founding dates of associations, the
number of people who have taken transcen-
dental meditation courses. 26 It seems that the
only limits on EA 's uses are its users' imagi-
nations.
Gale's Growth
As the EA grew and matured so did Gale.
However, in a 1984 profile of Ruffner, John
Baker was still able to say "Gale is still so
much the creation of one man . . . that it's
difficult to imagine where it would go without
Ruffner at the helm." 27 When Ruffner was
asked about how Gale would be without him
he said that he hoped it would survive as the
Bowker Company did without R. R. Bowker.
In 1985 Gale was sold to International
Thomson. 28
Ruffner left Gale and EA shortly after the
company was sold and he has since started
another publishing company, Omnigraphics,
with offices in the same building in downtown
Detroit as the Gale offices. However even
without its creator, EA continues to this day,
changing to meet new demands while main-
taining its established strengths to satisfy the
old needs it was created to fulfill.
96 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Encyclopedia of American Associations. Detroit:
Gale Research. 1st ed.,1956; 2nd ed., 1959.
Encyclopedia of Associations. 3rd ed.,1961; 4th
ed.,1964; 5th ed.,1968; 6th ed.,1970; 7th
ed„1972;8thed.,1973.
Encyclopedia of Associations. Annual, Detroit: Gale
Research Company, 1975-. Vol. 1, National
Organizations of the United States. Vol. 2,
Geographic and Executive Index, Vol. 3, New
Associations, Dec. 1964- , 1970 changed to
New Associations and Projects, 1990 changed
to Supplement, Vol. ^International Organiza-
tions, 18th ed., 1983-. Vol.5, Research Activi-
ties and Funding Programs, 17th ed., 1982
only. Updating Service for vols. 1 and 3, 1985-
1989. International Organizations Supplement
1985- . Rankings Indexes 21st ed., 1987 only.
Encyclopedia of Associations: Regional, State, and
Local Organizations. Detroit: Gale Research,
1987- . Biennial.
Encyclopedia of Associations: Association Periodi-
cals, edited by Denise Allard and Robert Tho-
mas. Detroit: Gale Research Company, 1987.
Encyclopedia of Associations. DIALOG File 114.
Palo Alto, CA: Dialog Information Services,
Sept. 1979- .
Gale GlobalAccess: Associations. CD-ROM. De-
troit: Gale Research, 1989-1990.
Gale GlobalAccess: Associations. CD-ROM.
Wellesley Hills, MA: SilverPlatter Informa-
tion, 1990- .
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Through its introductions the Encyclope-
dia of Associations provides a good explana-
tion of the publishing history and editorial
policy changes. Baker gives important back-
ground about Frederick G. Ruffher and Davis ' s
review article is a good summary of EA to
1982, Bradley is good on both Ruffher and
Gale. There are many reviews of different
editions of EA and its parts. Only reviews that
go beyond description are listed here,
Adams, John. Review of Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions, 14th ed. Reference Services Review 8
(July/September 1980): 78-79,
Angelo, Frank. "A Fact? A List? Answer Man Has
It." Detroit Free Press, July 17, 1974. Re-
printed in Biography News 1 (August, 1974):
944.
Baker, John F. " Portrait of a Publisher: Frederick G.
Ruffher." Publishers Weekly 226 (December 7,
1984): 25-27.
"Bibliophile Prevails with Written Words "Nation 's
Businesses (May, 1980): 94-95.
Bradley, Philip. "A Founding Father: Frederick
Ruffner and the Gale Research Co. "Indexer 16
(April 1, 1988): 22-31.
Byerly, Greg. Review of database Encyclopedia of
Associations. RQ 20 (Summer, 1981): 409.
Davis, Mary Ellen Kyger. "Encyclopedia of Asso-
ciations." Reference Services Review 10 (Sum-
mer 1982): 11-14.
Moon, Eric. Review of Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions, 3rd ed. Library Journal 87 (January 15,
1962): 209-10,
O'Leary, Mick. "Encyclopedia of Associations Ex-
pands Online Research." Database 12 (Octo-
ber, 1989): 59-61.
Quint, Barbara. "Connect Time." Wilson Library
Bulletin 63 (March, 1989): 78-79, 125.
Rettig, James. Review of Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions: Association Periodicals, 1 st ed. Wilson
Library Bulletin 62 (January, 1988): 99.
Review of Encyclopedia of American Associations:
A Guide to the Trade, Business, Professional,
Labor, Scientific, Educational, Fraternal, and
Social Organizations of the United States, 1st
ed. Booklist and Subscription Books Bulletin 54
(October 1,1957): 60-64.
Review of Encyclopedia of Associations, 7th ed.
Booklist 69 (April 1, 1973): 724-25.
Ruffner, Fred.,"The Buzz Industry and the Book
Industry." Reference Librarian no. 15 (Fall,
1986): 131-37.
"Ruffher, Frederick G." ALA Yearbook 10 (1985):
13.
"Ruffner, Frederick Gale." ALA Yearbook 13(1988):
76.
Shores, Louis. "Reference Checklist '56." Library
Journal 82 (January 15, 1957): 145-57.
Sturtevant, Anne F. "Reference Books of 1961."
Library Journal 87 (April 5, 1962): 1533-41.
Wasserman, Paul. Review of Encyclopedia oj Ameri-
can Associations: A Guide to the Trade, Busi-
ness, Professional, Labor, Scientific, Educa-
tional, Fraternal and Social Organizations of
the United States, 1st ed., Library Journal 81
(December 15, 1956): 2961.
NOTES
ENCYCLOPEDIA OF ASSOCIATIONS 97
1 John F. Baker, " Portrait of a Publisher: Frederick G.
Ruffner," Publishers Weekly 226 (7 December
1984): 25.
2 Ibid, 25.
3 Ibid.
4 Review of Encyclopedia of American Associations: A
Guide to the Trade, Business, Professional, Labor,
Scientific, Educational, Fraternal, and Social Or-
ganizations of the United States, Booklist and Sub-
scription Books Bulletin, 54 (I October 1957): 60-
64.
5 Paul Wasserman, review of Encyclopedia of American
Associations: A Guide to the Trade, Business, Pro-
fessional, Labor, Scientific, Educational, Frater-
nal and Social Organizations of the United States,
in Library Journal 81 (15 December 1956): 2961.
6 Francis Neel Cheney, "Current Reference Books," Wil-
son Library Bulletin 31 (October 1956): 196-98.
7 Louis Shores, "Reference Checklist ' '56 "Library Jour-
nal 82 (15 January 1957): 146, 149.
8 U.S. Department of Commerce, National Associations
of the United States (Washington: Government
Printing Office, 1949).
9 Public Administration Organization, 7th ed., (Chicago:
Public Administration Clearing House, 1954).
10 Mary Ellen Kyger Davis, "Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions" Reference Services Review 10 (Summer
1982): 12.
1 1 Eric Moon, review of Encyclopedia of Associations,
3rd ed., Library Journal 87 (15 January 1962):
209-10.
12 Anne F. Sturtevant, "Reference Books of 1961," Li-
brary Journal 82 (15 April 1962): 1533-41.
13 Eugene Sheehy, "Selected Reference Books of 198 1-
82," College and Research Libraries 44 (January
1983): 54.
14 Mary Allen, review of Encyclopedia of Associations,
11th ed., Serials Review 3 (April/June 1977): 22;
review of Encyclopedia of Associations, 9th ed,,
Booklist 72 (15 October 1975): 326; Edwin G.
Tyler, review of Encyclopedia of Associations, 7th
ed., .Kg 12 (Spring 1973): 314.
15 A. J. WalfordandL. M. Payne, eds., Guide toReference
Materials (London: Library Association, 1959),
51; Constance M. Winchell, Guide to Reference
Books, 8th ed. (Chicago: American Library Asso-
ciation, 1967), 77, 79; Mary Neill Barton and
Marion V. Bcll,Reference Books: A Brief Guide for
Students and Other Users of the Library, 5 th ed.
(Baltimore: Enoch Pratt Free Library, 1962), 98;
review of Encyclopedia of Associations, 4th ed.,
Choice 1 (February 1965): 545; Bohdan S. Wynar,
review of Encyclopedia of Associations, 6th ed.,
American Reference Books Annual 2 (1971): 55.
16 Davis, 11; Nancy Jean Melin, "Ending the Old Year
with Some New Beginnings," Reference Services
Review 8 (October/December 1980): 3.
17 Deborah Burek,. coeditor of Encyclopedia of Associa-
tions, 24th ed., telephone conversation with the
author, 30 March 1990.
l8 Fred Ruffner, "The Buzz Industry and the Book Indus-
try," Reference Librarian, no. 15 (Fall 1986), 132.
19 Jim Bloom and Vickey Bloom, "Gale Global Access
Associations in Review," CD-ROM Librarian 4
(November/December 1989): 57-59,
20 SilverPlatter Information, Inc.," SilverPlatter Add Gale
Databases on CD-ROM," Press release, 3 January
1990; "Gale Joins Forces with SilverPlatter," The
SilverPlatter Exchange 3 (June 1990): 2.
21 Burek, telephone conversation with author, 30 March
1990.
22 The ellipsis points have disappeared over time. The
quote does not appear in the twenty-fifth edition.
Deborah Burek, telephone conversation with au-
thor, 23 April 1990.
23 Richard Kem, "National Association of. . .," Sales and
MarketingManagement 136 (3 February 1986): 15.
24 Margaret Wills and Stewart Wills, "Banana Club Meets
Electrical Women," New York Times, 1 1 August
1986, A19.
25 Robert Wuthnow, "The Growth of Religious Reform
Movement," Annals of the American Society of
Political and Social Science 480 (July 1985): 112,
26 Roy D. Simon, Jr., "Fee Sharing Between Lawyers and
Public Interest Groups," Yale Law Journal '98 (March
1989): 1071-72; Douglas E.Lahammer, "The Fed-
eral Constitutional Right to Trial by Jury for the
Offense of Driving While Intoxicated," Minnesota
LawReview73 (October 1988): 123; Marina Angel,
"White-Collar and Professional Unionization,"
Labor Law Journal 33 (Februaryl982): 83; "Note:
Transcendental Meditation and the Meaning of
Religion Under the Establishment Clause," Minne-
sota Law Review 62 (June 1 978): 911.
27 John Baker, "Portrait of a Publisher," 27.
28 John Mutter, "International Thomson Buys Gale Re-
search for S66 Million," Publishers Weekly, 227
(24 May 1985): 19.
Code of Courtesy from the Roaring
Twenties: Emily Post's Etiquette
Richard W. Grefrath
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
The history of Emily Post's Etiquette and the
biography of Emily Post are virtually insepa-
rable. Edition after edition, her famous book
has embodied the values she lived by. Emily
Post was born Emily Price on October 3,1873,
in Baltimore to an aristocratic family which
could be traced back to the seventeenth cen-
tury. Bruce Price, her father, was a famous
architect who designed Chateau Frontenac in
Quebec and most of the buildings in Tuxedo
Park, New York, a high society country club
estate.
The Prices moved toNe w York City when
Emily was five. As a child she often accompa-
nied her father during work on his buildings,
and she enjoyed scampering around the scaf-
folding. She grew up in the conventional man-
ner of the wealthy, with summers in Europe or
Bar Harbor, Maine, and winters at her family's
four-story, red brick house at 12 West 10th
Street in Greenwich Village. Her mornings
were spent with lessons from her German
governess and afternoons featured a walk in
the park.
Tall and strikingly beautiful, she created
a sensation as a debutante in 1892. Four men
were often required to carry her cotillion fa-
vors to her carriage after a ball' When some
years later she wrote about the etiquette of
debutante balls, she did so from personal
experience, as was the case with the many
other high society topics on which she became
an authority.
Marriage and Divorce
Within a year of her debut she married
Edwin Main Post, a handsome young banker
from one of New York's Vanderbilt families.
Soon the Posts had two children, Edwin Main
Post, Jr., and Bruce Price Post, named after
Mrs. Post's father.
The first setback for the family came
when Edwin Post lost most of his money
following the panic of 1901. Then, being
somewhat of aplayboy, his philandering came
to the attention of a scandal sheet titled Town
Topics which published accounts of Post's
infidelities. The resulting scandal ended the
Posts' marriage in 1906.
Divorced and without means of support,
Emily Post and her young sons had to econo-
mize. Although hardly destitute, the enterpris-
ing Mrs. Post attempted to forge a career for
herself. At the time of her divorce, Mrs. Post
had published two novels, which had been
drawn from long entertaining letters written to
hermother while vacationing in Europe. Since
novel writing was not considered an accept-
able occupation for a woman in her social
realm, she reluctantly accepted payment of
$3,000 for one of them. For this same reason
she hesitated to turn to writing as a career after
her divorce.
Nevertheless, she continued to write nov-
els, and she published four additional books
by 1920. These successes made her a minor
celebrity and additional income from gossipy
fictional articles published in magazines had
EMILY POSTS ETIQUETTE 99
greatly improved her financial situation by
1 92 1 when Richard Duffy, an editor at Funk &
Wagnalls, sent a message to Mrs. Post asking
for an appointment to speak with her about an
"encyclopedia." She sent back word that she
already owned five encyclopedias and hardly
needed another. But Duffy persisted: '"We do
not want you to buy an encyclopedia, we want
you to write one.'" 1 Mrs. Post was enthused
with the prospect and wondered what type of
encyclopedia it might be. However, as she
herself relates, "All the lovely balloons of
vague fantasy collapsedatthe word 'etiquette. 1
... To me at that time the word meant a lot of
false and pretentious fuss over trifles." 2 Duffy
persuasively argued that all her published
writings abounded with people of fashionable
manners, with scenes set in the high society of
New York, Tuxedo Park, London, Paris, and
Rome. But Mrs. Post was adamant. She was
not interested in "thousands of silly and per-
fectly mechanical little rules or in trying to
exaltthe obvious." 3 Mrs. Post declinedDuffy's
subsequent appeals for further meetings.
But after a time, Duffy called again, bring-
ing with him a stack of the then popular books
on etiquette to demonstrate the need for a new
one. "I really thought him a little mad," Mrs.
Post recalled; but to get rid of him, she agreed
to peruse the volumes. 4
In her account of these events she was too
discreet to name the book she examined first,
but whatever it was, Mrs. Post was aghast over
the "shocking misinformation" contained in
the book she examined and was appalled at its
condescending tone. In disgust, she slammed
the book shut and at 3:00 a.m. telephoned Mr.
Duffy at his home. "I will write the hook for
you," she said, "and at once! It will only be a
little primer — -just a few of the essential prin-
ciples of taste. I'll begin it tomorrow morn-
ing." 5
The First Edition of Etiquette
With dogged persistence, she worked on
the book day after day for a year and a half.
The final manuscript ran 692 pages, hardly "a
little primer." Her richest source was her own
memory of incidents and personalities. To
organize her data she thumb-tacked various
headings, "weddings," "correspondence," and
so on around her workroom and under these
headings fastened notes on each subject. She
would disappear for days in her study, work-
ing at the typewriter, emerging only for tea by
the open fire and some welcome conversation
at the Tuxedo Park clubhouse.
The first edition of Emily Post's Etiquette
was published in July 1922, during the Prohi-
bition Era. Persistent publisher Richard Duffy
contributed "Manners and Morals," an intro-
ductory essay. Without really naming names,
Duffy deplored the "blunt, unpolished hero of
melodrama and romantic fiction" and offered
readers aj aunty, belletristic discussion of trends
in English and American manners from the
Ten Commandments, through Confucius,
English knighthood, and Samuel Coleridge,
among others. 6 He offered the public Mrs.
Post as this tradition's new standard bearer
and quoted her definition of its premises;
'"Best Society is not a fellowship of the
wealthy, nor does it seek to exclude those who
are not of exalted birth; but it is an association
of gentlefolk, of which good form in speech,
charm of manner, instinctive consideration
for the feelings of others, are credentials by
which society the world over recognizes its
chosen members,"' 7 Inher first chapter, "What
is Best Society?" Mrs. Postpursued this theme :
"Best Society is not at all like a court with an
especial queen or king, nor is it confined to
any one place or group, but might better be
described as an unlimited brotherhood which
spreads over the entire surface of the globe,
the members of which are invariably people of
cultivation and worldly knowledge, who have
not only perfect manners but a perfect manner.
Manners are made up of trivialities of deport-
ment which can be easily learned if one does
not happen to know them; manner is personal-
ity — the outward manifestation of one's inti-
mate character and attitude toward life." 8
Many people today, as many did during
the Roaring Twenties, consider Emily Post's
etiquette rules to be mere "trivialities." Mrs.
kl
100 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
S d "!
Post herself was ever mindful of the ease with
which etiquette can degenerate into mindless
following of rules. Her emphasis on the true
spirit of etiquette* a system designed to smooth
over the awkward moments of life by taking
into account the feelings of others and the
happiness of all involved, is a major theme in
her book and probably accounts in large part
for its endurance through so many editions
and through so many eras of varying manners
and mores. The appeal of an egalitarian broth-
erhood of the courteous has proved to be
timeless, expressed as it is by a true lady of not
only wealth and social standing but of human-
ity and sensitivity as well.
Throughout her subsequent career as the
preeminent arbiter of taste and decorum, Mrs.
Post was known to belittle the "trivialities" of
etiquette, perhaps most notably in her 1929
article in Collier's, "Any Fork WillDo." Since
publication of the first edition of Etiquette, the
question she was asked most frequently in
letters had been "How can I tell which is the
proper fork to use?" when confronted by sev-
eral at a table setting. "Those who ask me
about the most unimaginable trivialities of
table manners are most often the very same
people who unknowingly break the rules of
genuine importance." 9 What, then, is impor-
tant? The effect of conversation and behavior
on others is the primary and abiding concern
throughout Mrs. Post's writings. Among other
breaches of taste, she deplored "screaming
voices and loud, raucous laughter" and the use
ofpoor grammar both ofwhichshe considered
embarrassing to those one is with.
After laying a philosophical foundation in
the first chapter, thepractical advice followed.
The second chapter started, logically, with
"Introductions," such as "Mr. Distinguished,
may I present Mr. Young?" Here Mrs. Post
introduced the technique of using names in-
dicative ofa person's social standing, age, and
personality. In subsequent chapters the reader
comes to know Mr. and Mrs. Toplofty; Mr.
and Mrs. John Appleyard (who until now had
not left their home state of Iowa); Mr. andMrs.
Newlyrich; Mrs. Wellborn; Mr. and Mrs.
Oneroom; and Mr. Richard Vulgar, among
many others. This was not an innovative liter-
ary conceit; similar symbolic names had been
used at least as far back as the medieval
morality plays such as Everyman, and in more
recent history Charles Dickens had invented
characternames such as Mr. and Mrs. Hamilton
Veneering to indicate a polished superficial-
ity. Nonetheless, Mrs. Post was a master of the
technique, populating her text with an excep-
tionally large number of such symbolic names,
each one skillfully fitted to the situation, dis-
armingly witty, and drawn from her own ex-
periences in society. In fact, the book's dedi-
cation reads: "To you my friends, whose iden-
tity in these pages is veiled in fictional dis-
guise." 10 Readers could easily identify them-
selves in the proceedings, whether Newlyrich
or Toplofty, and the comical overtones helped
to make this whole world of etiquette rules less
stuffy and formidable for the uninitiated wish-
ing to learn the ropes. Reading Mrs. Post's
book could be downright entertaining.
"Introductions" progressed to "Greet-
ings," including from Younger to Older, in
church, informal greetings, and so on. She
gave particular attention to handshakes. A
gentleman on the street never shakes hands
with a lady without first removing his glove,
but the glove stays on if the handshake occurs
at the opera. Mrs. Post's witty banter reigned
supreme in a heartfelt discussion of the "per-
sonality of the handshake." She asked "Who
does not like a 'boneless' hand extended as
though it were a spray of sea-weed, or a
miniature boiled pudding?" Rather, the proper
handshake is made briefly, but there should be
a "feeling of strength and warmth in the clasp,
and — one should atthe same time look into the
countenance of a person whose hand one
takes." 11
Two subsequent chapters pursued saluta-
tions of courtesy (including the proper way for
a gentleman to tip his hat, informal bows, the
Bow of Ceremony, the Bow ofa Woman of
Charm) and how to conduct oneself in public
EMILY POSTS ETIQUETTE 101
(including how a gentleman offers his arm,
how to deal with the restaurant check, and
behavior in stores and shops). "Do not attract
attention to yourself in public," Mrs. Post
insisted, "is one of the fundamental rules of
good breeding." 12 In discussing conduct in
stores, the book emphasized its theme of kind-
ness towards others, saying that "lack of con-
sideration for those who in any capacity serve
you, is always an evidence of ill-breeding, as
well as of inexcusable selfishness."' 3
The chapter on "Conversation" carried
the credo "Think Before you Speak." It spoke
much common sense, such as advising to try
not to repeat oneself, either by telling a story
again and again or by going back over details
of a narrative that seemed especially to amuse
a listener. This is surely another reason for the
continuing popularity of Emily Post. Since the
rules prescribed follow common sense, they
do not appear arbitrary and artificial. Obvi-
ously people of high society spend a great deal
of time sitting around talking, so the art of
conversation is a serious matter. Bores and
"tactless blunderers" were censured. Rather
than let an amiable conversation turn into an
argument, the tactful person should keep his
opinion to himself, suggested Mrs. Post. And
readers were advised to switch to another
topic of conversation than argue with a speaker
whose opinion was opposed to their own.
An entire chapter on "Words, Phrases,
andPronunciation" included "Phrases Avoided
in Good Society" and a brief table of phrases
one could use: "Let me help you" (not "permit
me to assist you") "I will find out" (not "I will
ascertain"); and "had something to drink" (not
"partook of liquid refreshment"). 14 This
straightforwardapproachappealedtothemany
newly wealthy people who had attained a
higher social standing suddenly and who were
assured by its unpretentiousness that they did
not have to learn a whole new sophisticated
language to converse properly in the their
new-found society.
A quaint little parable about "the Bank of
Life" highlighted the chapter on "One' s Place
in the Community," Life is a bank in which
one deposits funds of "character, intellect,
and heart, or other funds of egotism, hard-
heartedness, and unconcern." 1 s One can only
withdraw from (the bank of) life what one has
deposited. This also applies to the community,
where one gets out what one puts in. In this
instance Mrs. Post invoked a somewhat moral
tone, that etiquette is a system of rules and
traditions based not only on good common
sense but also on ethics and morality. Formal
written invitations and the procedures of vis-
iting one's friends on formal and informal
occasions were discussed in subsequent chap-
ters. The book's title page reads, "Illustrated
with Private Photographs and facsimiles of
social forms," and, true to that promise, there
are innumerable examples of engraved cards
and invitations for all types of occasions.
Examples of acceptances and regrets were
also furnished.
An entire chapter was devoted to letter
writing, with examples of business and social
letters; and several chapters explored the many
procedures involved in maintaining a proper
household, including teas, afternoon parties
and formal dinners. Many household proce-
dures are described thoroughly, including
"How a Cook Submits a Menu" and the daily
duties of the butler. Also specified in detail are
the dress and decorum of other servants, such
as the house footman, the kitchen maid, the
parlor maid, the housemaid, the lady's maid,
the valet, the housekeeper, and the nurse.
The whole matter of servants has received
considerable attention throughout the various
editions of Emily Post's Etiquette. To those
readers of the first edition who had lately
earned a position in society, its extensive
instructions about servants were undoubtedly
most welcome. But each new edition of Eti-
quette reduced the emphasis on servants, re-
flecting the changing times as well as the
expansion of the book's audience to social
strata below the highest levels. As in all rela-
tions with others, courtesy to one's servants
was counseled consistently.
102 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Acknowledging that not all readers of
Etiquette were able to accumulate a large
servant staff, Mrs. Post suggested ways to
entertain graciously with few or no servants.
One of the key ingredients in her formula is
use of the buffet, allowing all guests to serve
themselves. Mrs. Post was so enamored of this
food service technique, she expanded on the
topic in her book How to Give Buffet Suppers
(Waterbury, CT: Chase Brass & Copper Co.,
193 3), which included eight pages of selected
menus and recipes.
The architect's daughter also paid special
attention to the way a distinguished house
reflects thegood taste and charm of its owners.
Furniture should be suitable for the architec-
ture of the house. Mrs, Post even proposed a
four-question test to determine an art object's
suitability for a particular house. She pursued
these concerns in her The Personality of a
House: The Blue Book of Home Design and
Decoration (New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1930).
One of the more controversial topics in
Etiquette through the years and one which
critics like to cite to demonstrate the hope-
lessly outdated conventions prescribed by
Emily Post is the matter of the chaperon. "A
young lady who is unprotected by a chap-
eron," she wrote, "is in the position precisely
of an unarmed traveler walking among
wolves." 16 The chaperon does a great deal
more than simply being present when young
people congregate; she coordinates the social
life of the young lady, sends out invitations on
her behalf, and even stays up until the young
lady returns home from a date to let her in the
door since no proper young lady lets herself in
with her own key ! Yet Mrs. Post did insist that
the best chaperon is "the young girl's own
sense of dignity and pride," 17 and were it not
for the conventions of propriety, this should be
more than adequate. Later editions of Eti-
quette progressively toned down the impor-
tance of the chaperon.
Arguably the most popular and widely
read section in Etiquette, from the first edition
to the present day, is the chapter on weddings.
For many this is one of the very few occasions
in life when formal dress is rented, profes-
sional caterers hired, and florists engaged, all
at once, at a time which seems the most
important celebration of a lifetime. Mrs. Post
covered all the details so graciously that the
whole ordeal seems almost enjoyable rather
than intimidating.
The other major rites of passage, christen-
ings and funerals, each warranted their own
chapters. According to son Edwin, Mrs. Post
was not a religious person, but she interpreted
the details of church ceremony with her char-
acteristic simplicity and thoughtfulness. 18
Chapters entitled "The Country House
and Its Hospitality," "The House Party in
Camp," and "Clubs and Club Etiquette" pro-
vide good advice for these activities. The
"Games and Sports" chapter covers mostly
how to play bridge courteously, as well as
golf. The most important considerations are
playing for the sake of playing rather than
winning, never losing your temper, being a
good loser, and giving your opponent the
benefit of the doubt.
The "Fundamentals of Good Behavior"
chapter is especially central to the philosophy
of Etiquette. A lengthy succession of do's and
don'ts attempted to advise those who would be
true ladies and gentlemen! A gentleman does
not borrow money from a woman; no gentle-
man goes to a lady's house when he is affected
by alcohol; a gentleman never takes advan-
tage of another's helplessness or ignorance.
These are manifestations of a fundamental
code of honor which demands the "inviolabil-
ity of his word, and the incorruptibility of his
principles." 19 She added that "the instincts of
a lady are much the same as those of a gentle-
man
"20
When Etiquette: In Society, in Business,
in Politics, and at Home was published in mid-
summer, 1 922, the timing did not appear ideal,
coming after the rush of June weddings, one of
the major social occasions with which Eti-
quette was designed to help. 21 Nonetheless,
EMILY POST'S ETIQUETTE 1 03
Etiquette was an immediate success, steadily
scaling the bestsellers lists. 22
As Funk & Wagnalls had expected, a
large number of Etiquette's purchasers were
people who had suddenly made a lot of money
on the stock market during the post-war boom.
These people were traveling abroad, buying
new large houses, hiring servants, joining
clubs, and putting on large-scale fashionable
weddings. For them, Etiquette was a practical
guidebook, a manual for the newly rich. 23
Another aspect of the book's appeal was
the glimpse it offered into the world of the
aristocracy. For a middle-class housewife who
bought Etiquette to plan a wedding, it was
fascinating to read about "double service din-
ner service" for 12 persons, where the food
starts at opposite ends of the table, progresses
clockwise, the butler stationed directly behind
the hostess at the end of the table. Other
chapters, such as the one on the debutante ball,
held similar interest for those who would
never attend such affairs.
Many fell under the spell of Emily Post
the storyteller. Critic Edmund Wilson said that
Etiquette's first edition had "the excitement of
a novel" and "snob appeal," both important
factors in its success. Wilson reported that F,
Scott Fitzgerald was so taken by the atmo-
sphere and drama in Emily Post's book that he
was "inspired with the idea of a play in which
all the motivations should consist of trying to
do the right thing." 24
Nowhere was Mrs. Post's skill with witty,
entertaining prose more apparent than in the
five-page tale, "How a Dinner Can be
Bungled," in the "Formal Dinners" chapter.
Mr. and Mrs. Newwed give a formal dinner
and everything goes wrong. The fire in the
drawing room fills the house with smoke so
everyone starts blinking and sneezing. The
clear soup is not clear, is barely tepid, and
tastes like dishwater. The fish with Hollandaise
sauce arrives in a huge mound too big for its
platter with a narrow gutter of water around
the edge and a curdled yellow mess dabbed
over the center. None of the guests eats any-
thing, except for Mrs. Kindheart who sips at
the cold soup. After the guests have gone, Mr.
Newwed tries to console his weeping wife.
"Remembering the trenches" of World War I,
he tries to convince her that dinner was not so
bad! 25
The authoritative tone of Mrs. Post's writ-
ing also accounts for the book's success. She
wrote effortlessly and with great wit and charm
about a social world she and her family had
been solidly a part of for several generations.
Not since Mrs. Sherwood, whose Manners
and Social Usages (New York: Harper &
Bros. , 1 884) was popular when Mrs. Post was
a girl, was an etiquette manual published by a
woman of such high social position. 26
Critical and Popular Reception
Contemporary book critics were enthusi-
astic and laudatory reviews from hundreds of
newspapersbeganpouringintothepublisher. 27
"Up-to-date, sensible, comprehensive,"
praised Booklist. 2 * In a lengthy treatise en-
titled "A School for Better Manners in
America," novelist Gertrude Atherton claimed
that "as a nation, we are the most ill-mannered
in the world," populated by the "awful" char-
acters portrayed in Sinclair Lewis's Babbitt,
another popular book of the day. But, she
implied, Mrs. Post's excellent text would lift
the country out of its rudeness. Atherton ech-
oed others in her observation that "Not only is
its style delightful, but it reads like a first-class
society novel " 29 Will Cuppy of the New York
Tribune also found it entertaining and said
"Mrs, Post is a delightful writer — humorous,
wise, witty, worldly, sympathetic, human." 30
The Literary Digest perceptively saw behind
the innumerable rules in Etiquette to its true
purpose; "Not to teach us to display our so-
phistication, but to enable us to live without
friction." 31
Soon after the publication of Etiquette,
hundreds of readers wrote to Mrs. Post asking
for rulings on specific situations not covered
in the book. This was an unexpected develop-
$*
N
104 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
ment since nowhere in Etiquette had Mrs. Post
invited inquiries. Dutifully she read, consid-
ered, and answered all the letters. Those in
haste sent telegrams, including one reading
"REPLYW1RECOLLECT.WEDDINGTO-
MORROW WHICH SIDE OF BRIDE DOES
GROOM LEAVE CHURCH ON?" 32 This
flood of letters served a crucial function in the
Following years, providing material to revise
and make additions to revisions of Etiquette.
This corpus of letters composed the kind of
market survey which in more recent years
publishers have paid considerable sums for.
, As the sales of Etiquette continued to
increase steadily (within ten years it had sold
more than 500,000 copies), Mrs. Post was able
to parlay her new found celebrity status into
other successful ventures. Soon she began a
monthly column on etiquette for McCall's
magazine; a full-time secretary was hired to
assist her with this. The column was a conve-
nient way to share with many the answers to
questions she received in her bulging daily
mailbag,
Mrs. Post was continually besieged by
manufacturers who wished her to endorse
their merchandise. She ordinarily declined to
endorse a particular brand, as in the case of a
ginger ale company, which paid $3,000 for a
pamphlet written by Mrs. Post saying that
"ginger ale is a refreshing drink to serve at
parties," without specifically mentioning the
brand of the company sponsoring this "en-
dorsement." She wrote pamphlets for linen,
silver, and glass manufacturers as well, never
endorsing a brand name, but describing the
correct use of these items in entertaining.
These manufacturers paid up to $5,000 apiece
for these advertisements, 33
By 1929, her fame was sufficiently estab-
lished for Collier's magazine to state, in the
caption to her photograph accompanying her
article "Any Fork Will Do," that Mrs. Post "is
perhaps the highest authority on just what you
should do at the right moment." 34
In the early 1930s Mrs. Post stopped writ-
ing her McCall 's column in favor of doing her
own radio program on NBC, a program that
aired for eight years until the outbreak of
World War II. 35 Shortly after leavingMcCo// 's,
she contracted with the Bell Syndicate for a
syndicated newspaper column on etiquette;
called "Social Problems."Thiscolumn'spopu-
larity increased continually and, at the time of
her death in 1 960, was still being syndicated to
more than 200 papers. 36
Early Revised Editions
None of these many activities deterred
Mrs. Post from paying attention to the book
that had brought her celebrity. In 1927, 193 1 ,
and 1934 revised editions of Etiquette were
published and, though the revisions were mi-
nor, each of these new editions enabled Mrs.
Post to incorporate into her famous book some
of the situations readers had frequently asked
about in letters. The deluge of letters that
followed publication of the first edition re-
mained steady; an average of 6,000 arrived
each week through the 1930s. 37 The 1927
edition of Etiquette carried a new subtitle,
"The Blue Book of Social Usage," which was
used in all further editions until Mrs. Post's
death in 1960.
The 1927 edition added a chapter on
"American Neighborhood Customs," includ-
ing bridal showers, singing groups, and sew-
ing circles, topics which readers had brought
to Mrs. Post's attention through letters. In this
edition the first edition's "The Chaperon and
Other Conventions" was changed to "The
Vanishing Chaperon," though much of the
content remained, including the infamous sen-
tence about a young girl without a chaperon
being like "an unarmed traveler walking among
wolves." 38
Servants still occupied a major section,
somewhat expanded by new members such as
the business or social secretary; yet there is
also a new, modern wife, Mrs. Three-in-One,
who manages to be cook, waitress, andhostess
when conducting servantless entertaining. The
chapter "When Mrs. Three-in-One Gives a
EMILY POST'S ETIQUETTE 105
Party" shows the multitude of Etiquette read-
ers who were of moderate means and without
servants how to throw a party. "Again the
Buffet!" counseled Mrs. Post— "One of the
nicest and most fashionable entertainments
that can be given," whether for lunch, supper
or dinner. 39 Following Mrs. Post's instruc-
tions, Mrs. Three-in Once could give a dinner
yet never leave the table. One trick that helped
make this possible was keeping a tea wagon at
the hostess's side. For many years the oft-
repeated query, "How can I serve a formal
dinner for eight without a maid?" met the
reply, "You can't." But eventually Mrs. Post
determined to find a solution to this dilemma.
To test her plan she invited six good friends to
dinner with her and her son Bruce, Mrs. Post
ladled soup from a tureen and all courses were
served from, and plates stacked on a tea wagon
at her side . Her success went a step beyond the
buffet! 40
Like its predecessors, the 1937 edition
was a "complete new edition: rewritten, re-
vised, reset," according to the note on its title
page, and completely "modernized," accord-
ing to the announcement of its publication in
the September 18, 1937, Publishers Weekly.
Funk & Wagnalls launched an energetic pro-
motion campaign with special emphasis on
New York and advertisements in The New
York Times Book Review, This Week, the New
Yorker, Bride 's Magazine, and others. Book
sellers received window and counter displays
and imprinted circulars. Publishers Weekly
said that "All of the editions, from 1922 to
1936, retained the rather unbending attitude
towards certain forms of behavior which has
been relaxed in the present rewriting." 41
"The Vanishing Chaperon" of the 1927
edition became "The Vanished Chaperon" in
1937. The old idea of "protection," Mrs. Post
then explained "is out of tune with the world
today." A girl, she believed, should chaperon
herself. Still, Mrs. Post gave up the point
grudgingly, suggesting that when girls are too
free, trouble results. "Continuous pursuit of
thrill and consequent craving for greater and
greater excitement gradually produces the
same result as that which a drug produces in an
addict," she warned, and likened the promis-
cuous girl to cheapened merchandise thrown
on the mark-down sale table in a clothing
store. 42
"Modern Man and Girl," a new chapter
reflecting the jazz age's effect on mores since
1922. "How Can a Man with Almost No
Money Take a Nice Girl Out"? asked one
section. Rather than direct a young man to a
particular type of date, it suggested that if
Sally Hiborn is really worth the trouble she
won't care if they dine in a neighborhood
cafeteria instead of the Fitz-Cherry Hotel.
This is typical Emily Post, the parrying of the
question and an answer based on common
sense and the feelings of all concerned.
New characters joined Etiquette's cast in
1937. One was Gloria Gorgeous who needed
to learn to stop applying makeup in public lest
men wonder: If she really is gorgeous, why
does her face need such constant attention? 43
The 1937 edition includes a few letters
from readers, including one asking what if she
is high society and "he is from over the car
tracks." "Go out on those car tracks and take
a good look at them," stormed Mrs. Post, and
"ask yourself if you are really such a snob that
you can't see true values except as some of
your friends happen to appraise them for you.
And if the car track boundaries still seem that
of a foreign country, break your engage-
ment!" 44 What a firebrand! It calls to mind the
Emily Post who campaigned for the repeal of
Prohibition although she herself was a
nondrinker. And how perfectly modern this
advice is, yet based on one of Emily Post's
basicprinciples — that the most important value
is the happiness of all. A similar letter from a
female reader who was from the wrong side of
town drew a similar response.
Some of the 1937 edition's additions ex-
hibited a timeless modernity, for example, the
new section on smoking. Characteristically,
Mrs. Post, a nonsmoker, saw both sides of the
argument. She advised smokers to be more
106 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
discreet and careful about smoking habits
(e.g., don't put out cigarettes on lamp bases,
etc.) and advised nonsmokers to be tolerant of
smokers.
New technology generates new questions
of courtesy. Of those who blasted radios at full
volume, Mrs. Post said, it "is something that
causes too much misery to need comment
further than to beg them to remember the
rudeness they are perpetrating in putting oth-
ers to the torture of blaring noise." 45 On the
other hand, she considered it acceptable to
turn down a dinner invitation to stay home to
hear a program on the radio. Mary Littlehouse
liked the opera, but, not being able to afford
tickets, listened on the radio. So she was not
being rude when she declined the dinner invi-
tation from Mrs. Onthehill
She also addressed other technologies.
She cautioned that those who did not own a
telephone should not make frequent calls on a
neighbor's phone, especially not toll calls.
And she added a new chapter on "Manners for
Motorists." Though she herself never learned
to drive, Mrs. Post loved traveling by car; one
of her early publishing successes was her
account By Motor to the Golden Gate (New
York: D. Appleton, 1916). Predictably, she
advised motorists to be courteous and to avoid
unnecessary horn honking because of impa-
tience. Motorists are to make the hand signal
for "stop" the moment they know they are
about to apply the brakes, and no drinking and
driving. 46
Other new chapters covered "Etiquette in
Washington and State Capitals" and "Restau-
rant Etiquette." Another new chapter on the
"Fraternity House Party and Commencement"
analyzed the concept of "popularity." Here
Mrs, Post warned college freshmen of both
sexes not to make an excessive effort to be
popular, but to be themselves. This, she as-
sured them, would cultivate fine andgenerous
friends. Who pays what and appropriate dress
and behavior at major college events were
also thoroughly described.
The 1937 edition (in numerical sequence
the fifth edition of Etiquette, although not so
designated) was very well received by the
book-buying public as well as the critics.
Euphemia Van Rensselaer Wyatt envisioned
"an exquisitely ordered universe in which
everyone from debutantes to motorists put
courtesy first," thanks to following Emily
Post's principles which she likened to a "mod-
ern code of chivalry" rather than a mere com-
pilation of social do's and don'ts. 47 Though the
price of Etiquette had remained $4 for 1 5
years from the first edition to the fifth, Mrs.
Wyatt thought the cost high, but nonetheless
well worth it. In Etiquette, The New York
Times perceived "a philosophy of behavior
which insists that no line of conduct can be
correct that is not kindly and wise." 48
After the outbreak of World War II, sales
of Etiquette continued to climb. One reason
was U.S .0. Clubs throughout the United States
and overseas made a special point of obtaining
the book and they reported that requests for it
ran second only to requests for the Rand
McNally atlas. Public libraries discovered that
more copies of Etiquette were borrowed and
not returned (or simply stolen) than any other
book except the Bible. The great war corre-
spondent Ernie Py le boosted sales of Etiquette
by writing in one of his published dispatches
that when he was in Ireland, the candidates for
officer training schools had to know their
Emily Post. Later he coined the term "Emily
Posters." The Chicago Daily News picked up
the idea and did a story reporting that while
Betty Grable was their Number One Pin-up
Girl, Emily Post was their Number One Look-
Up Girl. 49
The 1942 revised edition of Etiquette
came with a special separate 20-page War
Time Supplement addressing many of the
specific situations occurring in a nation at war.
One of her Bell Syndicate columns titled "Our
Wounded Come Home: How to Treat Them,"
was widely reprinted in 1943, appearing in
This Week Magazine and the Reader 's Digest.
"From now on more and more of our serious
wounded will appear in public " Mrs. Post
said. "What are we going to do and say when
they leave the hospitals and take theirplaces in
EMILY POST'S ETIQUETTE 1 07
the world for which they have given so much?"
She advised, "Don't stare, don't point, don't
make personal remarks.*' She added that it is
rude to ask a man how he lost an eye or leg or
what injuries caused the scars on his face and
that commiseration from strangers is obnox-
ious. Wives and mothers, she warned, must
school themselves to keep tears under con-
trol. 50
The 1945 edition of Etiquette carried the
expected addition, "Concerning Military and
Postwar Etiquette." It covered many situa-
tions involving returning veterans. In it she
noted that it is inconsiderate to tell a veteran
how difficult the hardships of war-time living
were at home and cautioned against imitating
the girl at a soda fountain who said, "I guess
you're glad to be home to get a real job." 51
There was a new, brief section on Reformed
and Orthodox Jewish weddings and "Simpli-
fied Wedding Details for a Bride in Everyday
Clothes," this being anot uncommon carryover
practice from the war years, An expanded
section on telephone etiquette suggested that
"Hello" remained the correct way to answer
the phone at home; furthermore, giving one's
name, as in "Mrs. Jones speaking," leaves one
without chance of retreat from salesmen and
strangers.
The 1955 edition of Etiquette appeared
with minor revisions. Mrs. Post was then 82
years old and more and more of the activity
concerned with the world of "Emily Post's
Etiquette" was being handled by the Emily
Post Institute, founded by son Edwin Post in
1946 and operated under his direction. The
institute handled the voluminous mail Mrs.
Post received, did research for her books, and
prepared a cookbook, published as the Emily
Post Cookbook in 1951 (New York: Funk &
Wagnalls). 52 Some of the 1955 edition's revi-
sions diluted the vigor and originality of Mrs.
Post's original text. The famous bungled din-
ner episode was abridged; the concluding line
from every previous edition had been "What-
ever you do, don't dine with the Newweds
unless you eat your dinner before you go, and
wear black glasses so no sight can offend
you." The 1955 edition shortened this to
"Whatever you do, don't dine with the
Newweds unless you eat your dinner before
you go," 53 without the cleverly extravagant,
amusingly snide remark about wearing dark
glasses. And the ill-rnannered fire, which up
through the 1945 edition had smoked every-
one out of the drawing room, was eliminated.
In a New Yorker article entitled "The Waning
Oomph of Mrs. Toplofty," Geoffrey Hellman
cleverly explored this watering-down. He cited
another example along the same lines: the first
edition's statement, "To be a slattern in a
vulgar household is scarcely an elevated
employment, but neither is working in a sweat-
shop," had by the 1955 edition been changed
to "To be a slattern in a vulgar household is
scarcely an elevated employment, but neither
is belonging to the lower ranks of any other
calling." 54 The sharp, poetic "sweatshop" im-
age is gone, perhaps revealing acute politic
instincts in not making smart comments which
might offend labor or management.
The Tenth Edition — Mrs. Post's
Last
The tenth edition of Etiquette was the last
edition "by Emily Post;" it appeared in the
spring of 1960, the year of her death. Mrs. Post
died inNew York City onSeptember 25, 1960,
at the age of 86. A front-page obituary in The
New York Times pointed out how Mrs. Post
had pioneered the simplification of good man-
ners whi ch at the time of the 1 922 edition were
unnecessarily elaborate. "Every edition of her
book emphasized the basic rule of etiquette:
make the other person comfortable." 55
A helpful improvement in format in the
1960 edition was expansion of the table of
contents by several pages, allowing listing of
all subheadings in each chapter, thus permit-
ting easier browsing. New topics reflecting
the times were discussed, including the "blind
date" (but only if the third party gets approval
from Gloria Gorgeous before giving her phone
108 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
number to John Handsome). The chapter on
"Military and Postwar Etiquette" from the
previous edition was boiled down to a small
chapter limited to the display, care, etc., of the
U.S. flag. Most revisions were minor. Tele-
phoning and smoking, for instance, previ-
ously covered in a single chapter, received
their own chapters. The classic chapter "Mrs.
Three-in-One Gives a Dinner Party," a staple
since the 1927 edition, was eliminated. In-
deed, little by little many of the famous char-
acters with the symbolicnames had departed —
too corny, perhaps was the thought; but with
them left much of the charm of the first edition.
The tenth edition added a brief four-page
concluding chapter titled "For and About
Young People." It emphasized "fair play,"
respect for others* property and rights, and
counseled children "to give credit to others
and not take too much credit to themselves," 56
In short, the philosophy of courtesy and con-
sideration towards others, the Emily Post phi-
losophy, applies to children as well as adults.
Funk & Wagnalls, publisher of every edi-
tion through the tenth (1 960), was acquired by
Reader's Digest in 1965; Reader's Digest
published the eleventh edition that same year.
In 1 97 1 Reader's Digest sold Funk & Wagnalls
to Standard Reference Library, Inc., then later
the same year ownership of Funk & Wagnalls
was transferred to the Donnelly Corporation.
Donnelly subsequently assigned trade pub-
lishing operations to Thomas Y.Cro well Com-
pany. Eventually Harper & Row acquired
Etiquette and published the fourteenth edi-
tion, the current edition, in 1984.
Reader's Digest published the eleventh
edition in 1965 although it still carried the
Funk & Wagnalls imprint. This, the first edi-
tion published after Emily Post's death, was
revised by Elizabeth L. Post, Emily Post's
granddaughter-in-law.
Elizabeth L Post
Elizabeth Post seemed true to the spirit of
the Emily Post philosophy. In her "Preface"
she described her first apprehensive meeting
with Mrs. Post. "I found that the supposedly
unapproachable authority on all our manners
and behavior was the sweetest most natural
warm-hearted unaffected person I had ever
met." Elizabeth Post understood that perfect
manners can only be achieved "by making
consideration and unselfishness an integral
part of your behavior." 57
Elizabeth Post made several bold addi-
tions. An entirely new chapter advised how to
make successful appearances on radio and
television. Emily Post, for eight years a suc-
cessful radio celebrity, could have written a
chapter such as this, but never did. The new
chapter on public speaking was an excellent
primer on the subject, advising how to pre-
pare, what kind of notes to bring, opening
words, use of humor and props, what to do
with one's hands, and even how to dress, as
well as how to introduce a speaker. A new
chapter on pets and people described how to
keep a dog or cat without allowing the animal
to become nuisance to others. Consideration
of others' feelings was extended to animals.
Emily Post's "Sports and Games" section
had consisted mostly of the card game of
bridge and some discussion of golf. The 1965
edition added a major discussion of skiing
along with advice on "conduct at a profes-
sional match," including football, baseball,
basketball, ice shows, and even rodeos! Ac-
knowledging the increasingly important role
of etiquette in the business world, Elizabeth
Post added a chapter on "Conducting Meet-
ings" that covered both business meetings and
meetings held in the home for planning charity
fund raisers and the like.
The 1965 Elizabeth Post edition made a
decided effort, as have subsequent editions, to
be trendy and au courant. In a sense, therein
lies a problem. In the 1922 first edition, Emily
Post truly captured the personality of the post-
World War I realm of high society and of its
breeding and manners which today, as they
did in 1965, seem old-fashioned and artificial.
Though the aristocracy she described appeared
EMILY POST'S ETIQUETTE 109
^ P ^S
exclusive, there was a genuine noblesse oblige
in her writing. Emily Post's etiquette code was
tied to Victorian tradition, which made hers a
conservative approach. Through the many
editions of Etiquette, one sees traditions up-
held for the sake of tradition, long after they
have ceased to be common practice.
Elizabeth Post has made a conscientious
effort to be relevant to the times but has been
burdened by the old baggage of much of the
Emily Post approach. Among other conven-
tions indicative of this dilemma, the chaperon
was still discussed, at unnecessary length, in
the 1965 edition. The Emily Post text retained
in Elizabeth Post editions has often been re-
vised, smoothing out its delightfully rough
edges.
Some of Emily Post's symbolic charac-
ters have been retained along with her text, but
few if any new ones have been created. Little
by little through the years they have faded into
the wings. In the 1965 edition, the "Blind
Date" section, for instance, retained the sec-
tion Emily Post wrote about Gloria Gorgeous
and John Handsome, but Elizabeth Post added
paragraphs describing Cindy, Charlie, and
Jane. This supplanting of colorful, witty, sym-
bolic names with dull, generic, android names
is characteristic of the increasing lack of ex-
citement in Etiquette, a gradual dehumanizing
process making it progressively more difficult
for the reader to sense the author's personal-
ity.
As if inviting comparison, in 1 969 Funk &
Wagnalls/Reader's Digest published two edi-
tions of Etiquette, one the twelfth edition by
Elizabeth Post and the other a reprint facsimile
of the original first edition of Etiquette by
Emily Post. (The latter sold for $10, $6 more
than in 1 922.) Reviewing the two in the Satur-
day Review, Jerome Beatty found the 1922
edition "a delight to read" and "more interest-
ing" than the newcomer. 58 Justin Kaplan
couldn't resist comparing the two in a fasci-
nating Harper's article, "A Rose for Emily."
He perceived that the book's concept had
shifted over the years "from a guide to forms
and etiquette to a general encyclopedia of
modern living which now gives practical and
for the most part sensible advice on how to
conduct yourself." He observed the effect of
retaining in the newer editions the sections
Emily Posthad written. That nowhere in those
sections is "sex" mentioned except in the term
"the opposite sex," that one should avoid
discussing religion and politics, and that one
should never write a letter that would be
embarrassing if printed in the newspaper sug-
gest that "things haven't changed all thatmuch
in Emily Post's world in nearly fifty years . . .
under twelve layers of writing and revision
there is still Emily Post's Troy, a rather crusty
place." 59
This captures the perpetual dilemma. The
truly captivating passages, those of genuine
literary merit, are holdovers written by the
cantankerous, lively Emily Post. Conscien-
tiously excising these would make the book
less old-fashioned and Victorian, but then
much of the appeal would be lost. The bright-
est literary gem, the bungled dinner episode,
which appeared in one form or another in all
of Emily Post's editions, was removed by
Elizabeth Post in the 1965 edition, never to
reappear. One can speculate about the rea-
sons; but whatever they were, Etiquette lost a
memorable story.
The twelfth edition added a section on the
Bar Mitzvah and expanded discussion of teen-
agers' social interactions. An analytical as-
pect crept into this edition, at one point caus-
ing Elizabeth Post to disagree with Emily Post
on introductions. "Best Society has only one
phrase in acknowledgement of an introduc-
tion: 'How do you do?' It literally accepts no
other," according to Emily Post in the first
edition. 60 She did allow, however, that "Hello"
suffices for greetings on informal occasions.
Challenging this supposedly absolute dictum,
Elizabeth Post declared, "If you think about it,
the phrase 'How do you do?' has little mean-
ing. Therefore, except on very formal occa-
sions when tradition is important and desir-
able, I prefer the less formal responses: 'Hello,'
or 'I'm very glad to meet you.'" 6 'Insisting that
expressions make literal sense was a new
*
%
1 10 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
concept; Emily Post's approach had been to
affirm the traditional greetings with which
people were familiar and comfortable.
The 1975 edition was called The New
Emily Post Etiquette. In it Elizabeth Post ad-
vised, "Don't panic if you find your child has
smoked marijuana," though she thought it
prudent to persuade him or her not to graduate
to harder drugs. 62 Other formerly forbidden
topics were now discussed, including sex, but
only in the context of "sexual relations during
engagement." Typical of the attempt in recent
editions tobe all things to all people, Elizabeth
Post concluded that "each couple must decide
this question for themselves." Although rel-
evant factors in that decision are discussed,
including the alleged nonapproval of society
in general, the reader is left without the opin-
ionated lectures Emily Post delivered when
she was at the helm, In other words, "permis-
siveness" had crept into the rules of etiquette;
allowing that may have been a serious tactical
error. As Charles Bunge observed, Elizabeth
Post "has tried to revise this edition to keep up
with today's informal, open way of life, thereby
diminishing the distinction between Post and
other guides." 53 Other new sections included
"You and Your Neighbor," geared to subur-
banites. In this section the advice is more a
collection of homilies than true insights, with
Elizabeth Post advising, "Apply the Golden
Rule, treat them as you would like them to treat
»64
you.
A sampling of quotes from the 1922 edi-
tion were scattered throughout the 1975 edi-
tion, perhaps to resurrect some of the charac-
ter which had been disappearing from recent
editions. But this is an awkward device since
the quotes are not integrated into the text but
just sit here and there as amusing but insular
epigraphs.
Elizabeth Post is also author of the current
edition, the fourteenth, Emily Post 's Etiquette,
published in 1 984 by Harper and Row. A huge
new section, "Your Professional Life," incor-
porates what is often called "business eti-
quette" and which in previous editions re-
ceived little attention. This section includes
chapters on getting ahead in business, busi-
ness clubs and associations, leaving your job,
and traveling on business. This in-depth treat-
ment of business issues is consistent with the
modernization of Etiquette, which the four-
teenth edition's dust jacket describes as "A
Guide to Modern Manners,"
Described by one critic as "blunt and
homely*' 65 compared to the Emily Post's origi-
nal work, the Elizabeth Post 1984 edition
continues the practice of reproducing quotes
from the 1922 edition, as if to recapture past
glories, but with no greater success than be-
fore.
The Elizabeth Post revisions are compe-
tent and comprehensive. They can be useful
guides in coping with the rapidly changing
social situations of recent decades. The one
thing they lack is the true genius of Emily Post,
whose skills as a literary stylist, combined
with a playful sense of humor which matured
to jaunty cantankerousness in her later writ-
ings, made her editions of Etiquette a true
delight. Emily Post was a celebrity whose
personality caught the American imagination
in the Roaring Twenties and maintained that
hold until her death.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Etiquette in Society, in Business, in Politics, and at
Home, by Emily Post. New York: Funk &
Wagnalls, 1922. 627p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. New and enlarged ed. New York: Funk &
Wagnalls, 1927. 692p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. New and enlarged ed. New York: Funk &
Wagnalls, 1931. 740p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Past. Complete new ed., rewritten, revised, and
reset. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1937. 877p.
Etiquette: War-Time Supplement, by Emily Post,
New York: Funk and Wagnalls, 1942. 20p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. Complete new ed., rewritten, revised, and
reset, including War-Time Supplement. New
York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1942. 913p.
EMILY POST'S ETIQUETTE 1 1 1
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. New York: Funk &Wagnalls, 1945. 654p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. 9th ed. New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1955. 671p.
Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage, by Emily
Post. 10th ed. New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1960. 67 lp.
Emily Post's Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social
Usage, revised by Elizabeth L. Post. 11th rev.
ed. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1965. 707p.
Emily Post's Etiquette, by Elizabeth L. Post. 1 2th
rev. ed. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969.
721p.
The New Emily Post 's Etiquette, by Elizabeth L.
Post. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1975.978p.
Emily Post's Etiquette, by Elizabeth L. Post. 14th ed.
New York: Harper & Row, 1984. l,018p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Truly Emily Post, the only book-length
biography of Post is her son Edwin's enter-
taining and loving tribute to a memorable
personality. Owing to Edwin Post's some-
times overly respectful approach to his sub-
ject, other sources, especially the articles in
the Dictionary of American Biography and
Notable American Women are valuable for
filling in some of the factual details of her life.
Among commentators on Etiquette, Atherton
and Wyatt evoke the book's initial impact.
The front-page New York Times obituary did
justice to one of New York' most celebrated
citizens, skillfully summarizing and evaluat-
ing her distinguished career. A long standing
institution is always ripe for iconoclastic at-
tack, but among modern critics, Kaplan's
thoughtful piece is the most balanced.
Ames, William E. "Post, Emily Price." {^Dictionary
of American Biography, Supplement 6: 1956-
1960, edited by John A. Garraty, 514-15. New
York: Charles Scribner's Sons, 1980.
Aresty, Esther B. The Best Behavior: The Course of
Good Manners from Antiquity to the Present as
Seen Through Courtesy and Etiquette Books.
New York: Simon and Schuster, 1970.
Atherton, Gertrude. "A School for Better Manners in
America." The Literary Digest International
Book Review 1 (March, 1923): 10-11+.
Burrell, Martin. "Manners and Etiquette." InBetwixt
Heaven and Charing Cross, 123-31. Toronto:
Macmillan Company of Canada, 1928.
Carson, Gerald. Polite Americans: A Wide-Angle
View of Our More or Less Good Manners over
300 Years, New York: William Morrow, 1966.
Cate, James L. "Keeping Posted." University of
Chicago Magazine 64 (May/June, 1972): 24-
34.
Dolson, Hildegarde. "Ask Mrs. Post." Independent
Woman 20 (April, 1941): 103-104+. A con-
densed version appeared in Reader's Digest 38
(April, 1941): 7-12.
Downs, Robert B. "Social Arbiter: Emily Post's
Etiquette: TheBlueBookof Social Usage, 1922."
InFamous American Books, 266-73. New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1971.
"Emily Post is Dead Here at 86; Writer Was Arbiter
of Etiquette." New York Times, September 27,
1960, sec. l.pp. 1,37.
Harriman, Margaret Case. "Dear Mrs. Post." In
More Post Biographies, edited by Joseph E.
Drewry, 255-73. Athens, GA: University of
Georgia Press,- 1947. This was originally pub-
lished in The Saturday Evening Post 209 (May
15, 1937): 18-19+.
Harris, Neil. "Post, Emily Price." In Notable Ameri-
can Women, The Modern Period: A Biographi-
cal Dictionary, edited by Barbara Sicherman
and Carol Hurd Green, 554-56. Cambridge,
MA: Belknap Press ofHarvard University Press,
1980.
Hellman, Geoffrey T. "Onward and Upward with the
Arts: The Waning Oomph of Mrs. Toplofty."
The New Yorker 31 (June 18, 1955): 80-86.
Kaplan, Justin. "A Rose for Emily." Harper's 238
(March, 1969): 106-09.
Mencken, H, L. Review of Etiquette, by Emily Post.
In The American Mercury 13 (February, 1928):
255.
O 'Rourke, P. J, "ComeBack, Mrs. Kindheart." House
and Garden 157 (August, 1985): 18+.
Perkins, Jeanne, "Emily Post: America's Authority
on Etiquette." Life 20 (May 6, 1946): 59-60+.
Post, Edwin. Truly Emily Post. New York: Funk and
Wagnalls, 1961.
Post, Emily. "AnyForkWiUDo."Co///er^83 (April
10, 1929): 21+.
. "How I Came to Write About Etiquette."
Pictorial Review 38 (October 1936): 4 +.
"Post, Emily." Current Biography (1941): 681-83.
Schlesinger, Arthur M. Learning How to Behave: A
Historical Study of American Etiquette Books.
New York: Macmillan, 1947.
Smith, Helena Huntington. "Profiles: Lady Chester-
field." The New Yorker 6 (August 16, 1930):
22-25.
r,
1 12 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Sypher,Wylie. "Mrs. Post, May I Present Mr. Eliot."
American Scholar 54 (Spring, 1985): 250-52.
Wilson, Edmund. "Books of Etiquette and Emily
Post." /« Classics and Commercials: A Literary
Chronicle of the Forties, 572-82. New York:
Farrar, Straus, 1 950. This is a revisionof "Books
of Etiquette and Emily Post." The New Yorker
23 (July 19, 1947): 51-58.
Wyatt, Euphemia Van Rensselaer. "Courtesy First."
The Commonweal 27 (November 26, 1937):
135-36.
NOTES
1 Emily Post, "How I Came to Write about Etiquette,"
Pictorial Review 38 (October 1936): 4.
2 Ibid.
3 Ibid,
4 Ibid.
3 Ibid, 56.
6 Richard Duffy, "Manners and Morals," introduction to
Etiquette by Emily Post (New York: Funk &
Wagnalls, 1922), ix.
7 Ibid, xvi,
8 Emily Post, Etiquettein Society, inBusiness, inPolitics,
and at Home (New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1 922),
3.
» Emily Post, "Any Fork Will Do," Collier 's 83 (20 April
1929): 21.
10 Emily Post, Etiquette in Society, 1922, iii.
" Ibid., 20
n Ibid., 28.
" Ibid., p. 33.
14 Ibid, 60-61.
15 Ibid., 65.
14 Ibid, 288.
17 Ibid., 289.
18 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post (New York: Funk &
Wagnalls, 1961), 66.
19 Emily ?0&l, Etiquette in Society, 1922, 506.
10 Ibid., 509.
31 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 211.
22 Gerald Carson, Volile Americans (New York: William
Morrow, 1966), 238.
23 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 213.
24 Edmund Wilson, "Books of Etiquette and Emily Post,"
in Classics and Commercials (New York: Farrar,
Straus, 1950), 374.
25 Emily Post, Etiquette in Society 1922, 179-84.
2 « "Post, Emily," Current Biography (194 1): 682.
27 Hildegarde Dolson, "Ask Mrs, Post," Independent
Woman 20 (April 1941); 104.
28 Review of Etiquette in Society, in Business, inPolitics,
and at Home, by Emily Post, Booklist 19 (April
1923): 206.
29 Gertrude Atherton, "A School for Better Manners in
America," The Literary Digest-International Book
Review 1 (March 1923): 10.
3l> Review of Etiquette in Society, in Business, inPolitics,
and at Home, by Emily Post, in New York Tribune,
2 September 1922, 7,
31 Review of Etiquette in Society, in Business, inPolitics,
and at Home,by Emily Post, TheLiteraryDigestlA
(19 August 1922): 33,
32 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 2 15.
" Margaret Case Harriman, "Dear Mrs. Post," in More
Post Biographies (Athens, GA: University oFGeor-
gia Press, 1947), 263.
34 Emily Post, "Any Fork Will Do," 21.
35 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 235-37.
36 "Emily Post is Dead Here at 86/Wew York Times, 27
September I960, sec. 1, p. 1.
37 Hildegarde Dolson, "Ask Mrs. Post," 103.
3 * Emily Post, Etiquette (New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1927), 287.
39 Emily Post, Etiquette: 1927, 646.
40 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 226.
41 Review of Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage,
by Emily Post (1937), Publishers Weekly 132 (18
September 1937): 1102.
42 Emily Post, Etiquette (New York: Funk & Wagnalls,
1937), 355.
43 Ibid, 370.
44 Ibid,, 375.
45 Ibid., 547.
46 Ibid., 69.
47 Euphemia van Rensselaer Wyatt, "Courtesy First," The
Commonweal 27 (26 November 1937): 135.
4 " Review of Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage,
by Emily Post (1937), The New York Times Book
Review, 10 October 1937, 23.
49 Edwin Post, Truly Emily Post, 246.
50 Emily Post, "Our Wounded Come Home: How to Treat
Them," Reader 's Digest 44 (February 1944): 72-
73.
51 Emily Post, Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage
(New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1 945), 637.
52 "Obituary Notes: Emily Vost,"Publishers Weekly 17S
(3 October 1960): 41.
" Emily Post, Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage
(New York: Funk &. Wagnalls, 1955), 176.
54 Geoffrey T. Hellman, "The Waning Oomph of Mrs.
Toplofty," The New Yorker 31 (18 June 1955): 87.
55 "Emily Post is Dead Here at 86," p. 37.
i6 Emily Post, Etiquette: The Blue Book of Social Usage
(New York; Funk & Wagnalls, I960), 641.
"Elizabeth L. Post, Emily Post's Etiquette, 1 1th rev. ed.
(New York; Funk & Wagnalls, 1965), iii.
58 Jerome Beatty, Jr., review of Emily Post 's Etiquette, by
Elizabeth L. Post, Saturday Review 52(15 February
1969): 22.
59 Justin Kaplan, "A Rose far Emily," Harper's 238
(March 1969): 106-09.
60 Emily Post, Etiquette, 1922, S.
61 Elizabeth L. Post, Emily Post's Etiquette, 12threv. ed.
(New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969), 10,
62 Elizabeth L. Post, TheNew Emily Post 's Etiquette (New
York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1975), 917.
63 Charles Bunge, review of The New Emily Post's
Etiquette, by Elizabeth L. Post, Wilson Library
Bulletin 49 (June 1975): 757.
44 Post, TheNew Emily Post's Etiquette, 1975, 937.
* s P. J. O'Rourke, "Come Back, Mrs. Kindheart," House
and Garden 157 (August 1985): 19.
"Of Permanent Use and Usefulness":
Granger's Index to Poetry
Milton H. Crouch
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Granger 's Index to Poetry has been a standard
reference work since its appearance in 1904
and the purpose of the index has remained
substantially unchanged: "to assist the reader
in identifying and locating poems or selec-
tions from poems which have appeared in the
most generally accessible anthologies." 1 Ev-
ery edition has been a long and heavy book.
The first edition indexed 369 volumes and
contained 30,000 titles; the second edition,
460 volumes and 50,000 titles; the third, 592
volumes and 75,000 titles. The most recent
edition, the ninth, indexes 781 volumes con-
taining 150,000 titles.
The index is the outgrowth of work by
employees in the poetry department of
McClurg's retail book store in Chicago who
needed information to help customers locate
poetry and short prose works. P.W. Coussents
prepared the manuscript that was subsequently
edited by Edith Granger, an employee as-
signed to McClurg's book publishing opera-
tion. 2 Little more about this famous index's
obscure namesake has been preserved for
posterity. By the time McClurg and Company
terminated publishing activities in the early
1940s, Granger 's, along with the Tarzan books
and the Hopalong Cassidy books, had become
one of the company's most important publica-
tions. 3 The Columbia University Press began
editing and publishing the index in the early
1940s, and the second supplement, published
in 1945, was the first of the series it has
published. Columbia University Press short-
ened the title to Granger 's Index to Poetry and
Recitations.
Indexes
After 1 945, some important changes were
introduced. Recitations and all prose works
were dropped from the listing, and the practice
of having separate indexes for title and first
lines ceased when the two indexes were com-
bined into a single alphabetical list. A most
important new feature was a subject index
produced by Elizabeth J. Sherwood, which
took the place of what had been termed an
"Appendix" in earlier editions. These changes
were made with the fourth edition, published
in 1 953 , and arguably the watershed edition of
the entire series. Combining the two major
indexes (title and first line) eliminated dupli-
cation of entries and served to cut "out the
paralysis over which index to begin on.' M
Prior to editor Sherwood's subject index
in the fourth edition, users needed to study
titles grouped under broad subject categories:
"Special Days," "Charades, Dialogues, Drills,
etc.," "Noted Personages," "Temperance Se-
lections." Poems concerning temperance were
dropped from the third edition and a substan-
tial new subject entry — "Choral Reading,"
listing 170 selections — was added. The index
was expanded for the fifth edition and by the
sixth poems were itemized under approxi-
mately 5,000 subject headings.
i'A
1 14 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Subject indexing of poetry is difficult and
the better the poem, the more difficult the
classification under an arbitrary subject head-
ing. William James Smith, editor of the sixth
edition, wrote: "We have tried to avoid the
more obvious pitfalls of subject arrangement,
but we have included a number of somewhat
doubtful subject classifications on the theory
that the individual can make his own judgment
as to the suitability of our suggestions." 5 One
reviewer of the sixth edition found the subject
index an anomaly and complained that the
editors had placed Robert Frost's "The Road
Not Taken, 1 ' under "Roads." 6
Expansion
Edith Granger intended for the index to
prosper. The first short preface promised that
future editions would index more anthologies
and invited librarians to take an interest in the
work. Both of Granger 's publishers have used
questionnaires to glean comments from refer-
ence librarians and both have responded to
these suggestions. 7 In addition to requesting
more complete subject indexing, librarians
expressed the need for the index to include
more contemporary poets and to expand cov-
erage to include poetry in translation.
The third edition began to address these
requests and indexed 3 5 titles by 14 of the best
known contemporary poets. The sixth edition
contained recent poetry written on such timely
subjects as ecology and women's liberation. It
also included a number of volumes devoted to
Afro- American poetry. The seventh edition
represented a major effort by the editors to
include more contemporary poets. The num-
ber of anthologies carried over from previous
editions was limited in order to include 128
new volumes of poetry.
With the eighth edition, a major effort was
made to include more poems by Asian Ameri-
cans, Chicanos, and Native Americans; an
anthology of poems written by American pris-
oners was also included. The ninth edition,
entitled Columbia Granger's 91 Index to Po-
etry ; is perhaps more international than previ-
ous editions, indexing more than 50 collec-
tions of translated poetry. Its subject index
leads users to English translations of hundreds
of poems, including translations from Urdu,
Hebrew, Gaelic, Yiddish, and Maori.
Major British and American poets have
always been well represented. All major or
minor poets included in Donald E. Stanford's
British Poets, 1 91 4-1945 (Detroit: Gale Re-
search, 1983) are found in the early editions of
Granger 's. Many winners of the Pulitzer Prize
for poetry between 1922 and 1976 have been
included in Granger 's prior to receiving the
prize and those few who were not included in
an earlier edition are to be found in the very
next supplement or new edition. The index
enables users to trace the disappearance of
minor poets from recently published antholo-
gies and to identify the ever popular minor
poets, such as John Greenleaf Whittier, Edwin
Arlington Robinson, and James Whitcomb
Riley.
Critical Reception
Granger's has received little critical at-
tention, but an enthusiastic reviewer of the
first edition helped establish its status as a
classic reference work: "This may fairly be
said to be an indispensable reference work,
and one assured of permanent use and useful-
ness in large and small libraries." 8 The work
reached its sixth edition before being reviewed
by the American Library Association ' s Refer-
ence and Subscription Books Reviews. 9 Com-
ments gleaned from brief reviews in library
publications center on production and format
concerns. For example, reviewers complain
of narrow inside margins, small print, lack of
thumb indexing guides (which disappeared
with the publication of the seventh edition),
and point out that heavier paper stock should
be used for "Keys to Symbols," a frequently
consulted section of the index.
The index has not had an exciting publica-
tion history. However, as one of the first
GRANGER'S INDEXTO POETRY 1 15
indexes to composite books, it has been a
major influence in the area of reference book
publishing. The name "Granger's" has be-
come synonymous with poetry indexing and is
now a registered trademark. Two early ex-
amples of indexes intended to supplement
Granger's are Herbert Bruncken's Subject
Index to Poetry; a Guide for Adult Readers
(Chicago: American Library Association,
1940) and John and Sara Brewton's Index to
Children 's Poetry (New York: H.W. Wilson,
1942). Herbert Hoffman compiled his index to
Latin American poetry to serve as a non-
English language complement to Granger J s. i0
A new monographic series entitled Poetry
Index Annual, published since 1 982 by Poetry
Index Press, Great Neck, New York, provides
access to anthologized poetry which is not
indexed elsewhere. It is in effect a supplement
to Granger 's since it functions as a kind of up-
dating service between Granger's installments.
The latest edition of Granger's has been
joined by a volume briefly reviewing each of
the anthologies it indexes. William and Linda
Katz's The Columbia Granger's® Guide to
Poetry Anthologies groups the anthologies by
type (e.g., Afro- American poetry, ballads and
songs, children's poetry, Finnish poetry, holi-
day poetry, love poetry, Scottish poetry, vam-
pire poetry) and describes the internal organi-
zation of each. The Katzes also comment on
the overall quality of each anthology's con-
tents and single out examples of quality and
representative poems. This book should help
librarians whose budgets cannot support a full
collection of the indexed anthologies decide
which to buy.
Since 1904, Granger's has had ten edi-
tors. The illnesses and deaths of these men and
women who have worked at the Columbia
University Press are reported in various edi-
tions of the index. However, no information is
given in any of the editions concerning Edith
Granger. None of the major library publica-
tions have featured her or reported her death.
Staff of the Chicago Public Library have been
unable to locate information in indexes to
local newspapers. We know from the prefaces
to the first two editions that she completed
university; we alsoknow she initiated an index
that has enabled thousands to locate needed
poems and to learn from poets what it is like to
be alive.
Although the history of its creator is un-
known, the future of the index she created is
assured. In 1991, the index will be released on
CD-ROM. An inherent limitation of Granger 's
has always been the need to search titles or
first lines by their first significant words but
not by other words. A CD-ROM Granger's
will allow new avenues of access to poems
that will make Granger's, always the most
useful of poetry indexes, even more useful and
versatile. One feature that will enhance its
usefulness is the inclusion of the full texts of
8,500 poems on the CD-ROM. 11 Whatever its
medium, Granger 's will continue to grow and
evolve.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
An Index to Poetry and Recitations; Being a Practi-
calReferenceManualfartheLibrarian.Teacher,
Bookseller, Elocutionist, etc., edited by Edith
Granger. Chicago: A. C. McClurg and Co.,
1904. 970p.
Granger's Index to Poetry and Recitations; Being a
Practical Reference Manual for the Librarian,
Teacher, Bookseller, Elocutionist, etc., edited
by Edith Granger. Revised and enlarged edition
[2nd ed.]. Chicago: A. C. McClurg and Co.,
1918. l,059p.
A Supplement to Granger's Index (1919-1928). Chi-
cago: A. C. McClurg and Co., 1929. 519p.
Granger 's Index to Poetry and Recitations, edited by
Helen Humphrey Bessey. 3rd ed., completely
revised and enlarged, Chicago: A. C. McClurg
and Co., 1940. l,525p.
Granger's Index to Poetry and Recitations: Supple-
ment, 1938-1944, edited by Elizabeth J.
Sherwood and Gertrude Henderson. New York:
Columbia University Press, 1945. 415p.
Granger's Index to Poetry, edited by Raymond J.
Dixon. 4th ed., completely revised and en-
larged, indexing anthologies published through
December 31, 1950. New York: Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1953. l,832p.
Granger 's Index to Poetry: Supplement to the Fourth
Edition, edited by Raymond J. Dixon. Indexing
anthologies published from January 1, 1951 to
December 31,1955. New York: Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1957. 458p.
• i:l
■tf I
116 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Granger's Index to Poetry, edited by William F.
Bernhardt, 5th ed., completely revised and en-
larged, indexing anthologies published through
June 30, 1 960. New York: Columbia University
Press, 1962. 2,123p,
Granger's Index to Poetry; Supplement to the Fifth
Edition, edited by William F. Bernhardt and
Kathryn W. Sewny. Indexing anthologies pub-
lished from July 1 , 1 960 to December 31,1965.
New York: Columbia University Press, 1967.
416p.
Granger's Indexto Poetry, edited by William James
Smith. 6th ed., completely revised and en-
larged, indexing anthologies published through
December 31,1 970. New York: Columbia Uni-
versity Press, 1973. 2,223p.
Granger's Index to Poetry, 1970-1977, edited by
William James Smith. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1978, 63 5p.
Granger 's Index to Poetry, edited by William James
Smith and William F. Bernhardt. 7th ed., index-
ing anthologies published from 1970 through
1981. New York: Columbia University Press,
1982. l,329p.
Granger's® Index to Poetry, edited by William F.
Bernhardt. 8th Edition, completely revised and
enlarged, indexing anthologies published
through June 30, 1985. New York: Columbia
University Press, 1986. 2,014p.
The Columbia Granger 's* Index to Poetry, edited by
Edith P. Hazen, and Deborah J. Fryer. 9th ed.,
completely revised indexing anthologies pub-
lished through June 30, 1989. New York: Co-
lumbia University Press, 1990. 2,082p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
As noted, Granger '$ has received little
critical or historical attention. The reviews
listed below are the most significant. Baier
offers historical information on A.C. McClurg
and Co. Only time can tell whether or not a
companion such as the Katzes ' book becomes
a standard for future editions of Granger 's.
Baier, Andrew, "Book Wholesaler to the Nation."
Illinois Libraries 47 (September, 1965): 665-
69.
Breit, Harvey. "In and Out of Books." New York
Times, April 26, 1953, sec. 7, p. 8.
Katz, William, and Linda Sternberg Katz. The Co-
lumbia Granger's* Guide to Poetry Antholo-
gies. New York: Columbia University Press,
1991.
Review ofAn Index to Poetry and Recitations; Being
a Practical Reference Manual for the Librar-
ian, Teacher, Bookseller, Elocutionist, etc.,
edited by Edith Granger (1904 ed.). Library
Journal 29 (September, 1904): 489.
Review of Granger 's Index to Poetry, 6th ed. Booklist
70 (April, 1974): 830.
Review of Granger 's Index to Poetry, 6th ed. Choice
10 (January, 1974): 1698.
Tangorra, Joanne. "Granger' s World of Poetry Comes
to CD-ROM." Publisher's Weekly (June 7,
1991): 41.
NOTES
1 William James Smith and William F. Bernhardt, "Pref-
ace," in Granger's Index to Poetry^ 6th ed. (New
York: Columbia University Press, 1973): v.
1 Edith Granger, "Preface," in An Index to Poetry and
Recitations; Being a Practical Reference Manual
for the Librarian, Teacher, Bookseller, Elocution-
ist, e/c, (Chicago: McClurg and Co., 1604): 5.
5 Andrew Baier, "Book Wholesaler to the Nation," Illi-
nois Libraries 47 (September 1965): 666-67.
4 Harvey Breit, "In and Out of Books," New York Times,
26 April 1953, sec. 7, p. 8.
5 Smith and Bernhardt, v.
"Review of Granger 's Index to Poetry, 6th ed., Choice 1
(January 1974): 1698.
'Helen Humphrey Bessey, "Preface," in Granger's In-
dex to Poetry and Recitations (Chicago, McClurg
and Co,, 1940): vii.
B Revicw of An Index to Poetry and Recitations; Being a
Practical Reference Manual for the Librarian,
Teacher, Bookseller, Elocutionist, etc., ed. by Edith
Granger 1904, Library Journal 29 (September
1904): 489.
' Review of Granger 's Index to Poetry, 6th ed., Booklist
70 (April 1974): 830.
'"Herbert H. Hoffman, "Preface," in Hoffman 's Index to
Poetry: European and Latin American Poetry in
Anthologies (Metuchen; NJ: Scarecrow Press,
1985): iv.
11 Joanne Tangorra, "Granger's World of Poetry Comes
to CD-ROM," Publisher's Weekly (7 June 1991):
41.
A Cornerstone of Musical
Scholarship: Grovels Dictionary of
Music and Musicians
William S. Brockman
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
George Grove did not underestimate the size
or the character of the audience for the first
edition of his Dictionary; in the preface, he
maintained that "this work is designed to
supply a great and long acknowledged want
.... It is designed for the use of Professional
musicians and Amateurs alike." 1 The music
industry had ballooned in the latter half of the
nineteenth century, musical journals and soci-
eties had proliferated, and despite the nine-
teenth century's interest in encyclopedias and
syntheses of knowledge, no one (in Great
Britain, at least) had published anything like
the Dictionary.
It has become commonplace to assert that
the quality of British music during the nine-
teenth century was far inferior to that of the
Continent. 2 Yet Great Britain's burgeoning
economic power during the Victorian era cre-
ated a mass market for music. 3 Higher in-
comes and an increase in leisure time offered
people the means to seek and to afford enter-
tainment. Theaters, music halls, and other
venues proliferated. The building of railroads
made travel rapid and painless, encouraging
the development of seaside resorts (with ac-
companying theaters to provide evening en-
tertainment), and providing work for an in-
creasing number of itinerant musicians. De-
cennial censuses in Great Britain identified
1 1 ,200 music teachers in England and Wales
in 1851; the number rose to 38,600 by 1901.
An even more telling statistic identifies musi-
cians per population of 10,000: 6.2 in 1851,
and 12.1 in 1901. 4 Moreover, music was a
status symbol for the middle class:
In a society which was profoundly conscious
of class yet offered chances of social mobility,
it was necessary for the ambitious to recog-
nize and exhibit appropriate symbols of aspi-
ration and achievement. Some of the most
potent badges were pinned to music, particu-
larly in respectable settings: ownership of a
piano; music lessons for daughters; atten-
dance at the oratorio, the quintessentially Vic-
torian socio-musical event; membership of a
concert society, preferably exclusive like all
good clubs; appearance at the theatre or ball,
suitably clad and preferably bejewelled. 5
George Grove
George Grove himself, even before he
began compiling the Dictionary, played no
small part in the creation of this world. Bom
August 13, 1820, in the London suburb of
Clapham, the son of a fishmonger and venison
dealer, Grove attended Clapham Grammar
School from 1834 to 1835 and was appren-
ticed to civil engineer Alexander Gordon in
Westminster in January 1836. He was admit-
ted a graduate of the Institution of Civil Engi-
neers on February 26, 1839, and traveled to
Jamaica in 1841 and to Bermuda in 1843 to
erect lighthouses. His engineering career de-
1 1 8 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
veloped steadily with his involvement in the
construction of a railroad station at Chester
from 1847 to 1 848 and in the Britannia Tubu-
lar Bridge across the Menai straights in Wales
from 1848 to 1 850. Grove had always been an
avid aficionado of music. Biographer Percy
Young relates that in 1837 he "invested" the
first guinea ever given to him in a piano score
of the Messiah? At about the same time, he
began compiling the first of many common-
place books he was to keep throughouthis life.
These transcriptions of music that interested
him served as his conservatory, the closest
Grove ever approached to a formal study of
music.
Grove's appointment as joint secretary of
the Society of Arts in February 1 850 could not
have brought him to London at a more advan-
tageous time. The Society was planning an
exhibition "which could serve as a shop-win-
dow for British industry." 7 The Great Exhibi-
tion opened on May 1, 1851, in a newly
constructed vast building of glass in Hyde
Park, soon nicknamed "the Crystal Palace." In
May 1852, Grove was appointed secretary to
the Crystal Palace Company, which disas-
sembled the entire structure and moved it to
the London suburb of Sydenham where it
remained until destroyed by fire in 1936.
From its opening on June 1 0, 1 854, at
which an orchestra of 1,700 vocalists and
instrumentalists performed for the queen and
prince consort, the Crystal Palace served as a
major force in the popularization of music in
London. On July 21, 1855, Grove offered the
job of conductor of the Crystal Palace Band to
German-born August Manns. Manns' s Satur-
day Crystal Palace concerts along with Grove' s
program notes became a most significant force
in the musical life of London in the ensuing
decades: "the combination of Manns and Grove
was to prove formidable, and, perhaps, the
true generator of modem British music." 8
Grove's Preparation for Editorship
In retrospect, one could see Grove's ca-
reer over the next 20 years as a training ground
for his work on the Dictionary, What Grove
lacked in formal training in music and editing,
he compensated for with hard work and judi-
cious use of the plentiful acquaintances he had
made in school and through his prominent
position at the Crystal Palace. He became a
central figure in London's musical life through
his friendships with Clara Schumann and
Johannes Brahms, and in his championing of
the music of Franz Schubert and Robert
Schumann at Crystal Palace concerts. He made
one of the significant musical discoveries of
the century when, on a trip with Arthur Sullivan
to Vienna in 1 867, he located the complete
manuscript of Schubert's Rosamunde in a
cupboard.
Grove was recommended through a mu-
tual friend to edit A.P. Stanley's study of
biblical geography, Sinai and Palestine (Lon-
don: J. Murray, 1856). He edited William
Smith's Dictionary of the Bible (London: J.
Murray, 1860-63) after a trip in 1858 to Pal-
estine and Egypt, and, also for Smith, An Atlas
of Ancient Geography, Biblical and Classical
(London: Murray, 1874). Grove's friendship
With Alexander Macmillan and, by 1866, his
established experience in editing earned him a
position as an assistant editor at Macmillan 's
Magazine, one of the leading periodicals of
the day. He became editor of Macmillan 's
Magazine in 1868.
The financial stability of the Macmillan 's
editorship allowed Grove to resign the Crystal
Palace appointment in 1 873 (although he con-
tinued for nearly the rest of his life to write its
program notes). He was already making plans
for the Dictionary of Music and Musicians. In
January 1 874, the Macmillan publishing firm
issued a prospectus for a work intended to
comprise two volumes: "Within [the last 25
years] music in England has made immense
progress and the number of persons who at-
tend concerts and practise music has very
largely increased, It is no longer regarded as
mere idle amusement, but has taken, or is
taking, its right place beside the other arts, as
an object of study and investigation." 9
GROVE'S DICTIONARY OF MUSIC AMD MUSICIANS 1 19
That music had become "an object of
study and investigation" during the previous
two or three decades is certainly no exaggera-
tion. The year 1874 marked the formation of
the Musical Association (now Royal Musical
Association) and of the first publication of its
annual Proceedings. More significant in dem-
onstrating interest in the study of music was
the spectacular proliferation of its treatment in
periodical literature, both in magazines de-
voted to music (such as the Musical Times and
Singing Class Circular, begun in 1 844 and still
published as Musical Times; its circulation in
1 873 was 1 5,000) and in magazines of general
interest, such as Macmillan 's and Fortnightly
Review.™ These periodicals could count on
not only a broad, but also a sophisticated,
audience: "Readers must have had an aware-
ness of past and present trends in music,
besides technical knowledge and a real musi-
cal curiosity; otherwise, the printed music
examples, considerations of formal symmetry
and emotional meaning, and constant refer-
ences to specific works, operas, opus num-
bers, and keys would have been meaning-
less." 11 Yet, while sophisticated, this was
largely an audience of amateurs: "The image
of the musical scholar in British life was not
that of the professional musician, but rather of
the gentleman amateur, best represented by
the country clergyman quietly pursuing his
own antiquarian interests, or by the semi-
retired engineer or business man returning to
an interest neglected since his youth." 12 Grove
himself mighthave fit such a description. Seen
from this perspective, he was the
quintessentially appropriate editor of a musi-
cal reference work.
The First Edition
A letter dated July 29, 1877, from Grove
to George Craik (a partner in the Macmillan
firm) setoutGrove's timetable for completing
editorial work on the Dictionary at semian-
nual intervals from 1 877 to December 1 880. ' J
The first separate unbound parts of the Dictio-
nary were published throughout 1878. The
first volume gathered parts I-IV, and was
published in April 1 879. Succeeding unbound
parts appeared through 1889. These were gath-
ered in volume 2 in 1880, volume 3 in 1883,
and volume 4 in 1889. The full set was then
reprinted with the index and an appendix in
1890.
What are some of the salient features of
this first edition? First, the chronological bar-
rier of the year 1450. It was not until years later
that interest in music of the Middle Ages
developed; so it was reasonable and not sur-
prising for a latter-day Victorian work to set
such a limit, just as it is not surprising to find
Grove maintaining in the preface that "all
investigations into the music of barbarous
nations have been avoided, unless they have
some direct bearing on European music." 14
Grove similarly made clear that an English
dictionary should pay special attention to En-
glish music and musicians. The scope of the
Dictionary in these and in other areas ex-
panded considerably in succeeding editions.
Articles in the Dictionary ranged in length
from several sentences to dozens of pages. A
majority of the articles were biographies of
composers, performers, publishers, and in-
strument makers. Those of major composers
included bibliographies and lists of composi-
tions. Other articles covered societies; instru-
ments; ethnic musics of Europe (such as
"Welsh Music"); musical works with distinc-
tive titles (such as "Messiah"); forms of com-
position ("Sonata"); theory ("Key"); schools,
academies, and conservatories; and terms
("Sharp"). Other articles were broad in scope
and not easily classified, such as "Schools of
Composition," "Musical Periodicals," or "Mu-
sical Libraries." Grove himself wrote three
major biographical articles, those on
Beethoven, Mendelssohn, and Schubert. Il-
lustrations, including diagrams, music, and
engraved portraits, were plentiful. The index
volume was a significant feature that succeed-
ing editions dropped; with it was a catalog of
articles contributed by each writer, a feature
also since dropped.
120 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
m
m
Grove was concerned that the writing
stylebe "anxiously divested of technicality." 15
Certainly, as in the article on "Form," writers
of technical articles had to presume a certain
shared vocabulary between themselves and
readers; outmost held to Grove's ideal. Infact,
though the style was divested of technicality it
was often clothed in pathos, as in Grove' s own
description of Schubert on his deathbed: "Poor
fellow! no wonder he was so depressed! ev-
erything was against him, his weakness, his
poverty, his dreary house, the long lonely
hours, the cheerless future . . ."
Critical tQactiontofhSi Dictionary was, on
the whole, enthusiastic, Long reviews ap-
peared in the leading periodicals. 16 Several
harped on the profusion of minor errors which
even Grove acknowledged in the preface to
the first volume. 17 To remedy these, and to
supplement some important material in the
first half of the alphabet on which the Dictio-
nary had skimped when it was still being
planned at two volumes, the fourth volume
included an appendix of some 300 pages giv-
ing corrections, supplemental material, and
additional articles. Grove was faulted for the
disproportionate length of some of the bio-
graphical articles. 18 The article on Mendels-
sohn stretched to over 60 pages, longer even
than the Beethoven article at 50 pages. A.
Maczewski' s article on Bach was only 5 pages
in length, andhis article onBrahms — although
Maczewski asserted he was "one of the great-
est living German composers" — only 2.
The Dictionary made good use both of
fledgling contributors and of established schol-
ars. There were 1 1 8 in all, including Grove, by
far the most prolific. Hubert Parry had studied
music at Oxford and piano with Edward
Dannreuther; he was to become one of the
major figures of late-Victorian and Edwardian
musical life, succeeding Grove as director of
the Royal College of Music, and becoming
professor at Oxford and president of the Mu-
sical Association. William Baiclay Squire's
article on "Music Libraries" presaged his ap-
pointment to a post in the Department of
Printed Books at the British Museum. J.A.
Fuller Maitland became music critic for The
Times, and edited the appendix to the first
edition of the Dictionary and the entire second
edition. Edward Hopkins ("Organ"); A.J.
Hipkins ("Pianoforte," "Harpsichord," "Mu-
sical Instruments, Collections of); and Carl
Ferdinand Pohl, librarian of the Gesellschaft
der Musikfreunde in Vienna ("Mozart,"
"Haydn"), all contributed articles in their ar-
eas of established expertise. W.H. Husk, li-
brarian of the Sacred Harmonic Society, was
second only to Grove himself in number of
articles contributed. William S. Rockstro, con-
tributor of major articles on "Mass," "Nota-
tion," "Opera," "Orchestra," and "Schools of
Composition," was a successful teacher and
arranger in London, but did not publish his
biographies of Handel, Mendelssohn, and
Jenny Lind and his works on music history and
theory until after his Grove contributions,
when he was well into his fifties. Women,
suchas Mrs. Walter Carr,Mrs.JulianMarshall,
Miss Middleton, and Mrs. Edmond
Wodehouse (compiler of the index) contrib-
uted significant portions of the Dictionary.
Grove's Dictionary was the first of the
modem generation of musical reference works.
Such encyclopedic compilations are conser-
vative in recognizing the maturity of a disci-
pline — a maturity that is able to sum itself up
and to present itself with confidence. They are
also forward-looking in providing a spring-
board from which the discipline can leap. As
the first parts of the Dictionary were appear-
ing, Hugo Riemann in Germany was publish-
ing the first edition of whathas become through
successive editions an equally venerable
work — his Musik-Lexikon (Leipzig: Verlag
des Bibliographischen Instituts, 1882). Rob-
ert Eitner's Biographisch-bibliographisches
Quellen-Lexikon der Musiker und Musik-
gelehrten (Leipzig; Breitkopf & H3rtel, 1900-
1904), whose short biographies and detailed
lists of published works and manuscripts es-
tablished primary bibliographical and source
material in Europe from the Middle Ages to
GROVE'S DICTIONARY OP MUSIC AND MUSICIANS 12 1
the mid-nineteenth century, became an in-
valuable complement to succeeding editions
of the Dictionary. In the United States,
Theodore Baker published his Dictionary of
Musical Terms in 1895 and his Biographical
Dictionary of Musicians in 1900 (both New
York: G. Schirmer). The former has been
reprinted numerous times, and the latter has
been revised and expanded by Nicolas
Slonimsky through an eighth edition due in
late 1991 or early 1992.
In 1883, Grove left Macmillan's to be-
come director of the newly formed Royal
College of Music, and remained in the posi-
tion until 1894. He continued to gather mate-
rial for a new edition of the Dictionary until
his death on May 28, 1900.
J.A. Fuller Maitland
J. A. Fuller Maitland assumed the
editorship of the second edition. Five volumes
were published from 1904 to 1910. Fuller
Maitland integrated the articles and correc-
tions from the appendix to the first edition,
added Grove's revisions to the three major
biographies, and inserted bracketed additions
into many of the original articles. Whereas the
first edition had often drawn without attribu-
tion on biographical material from other works ,
particularly F etis' Biographie universelle, the
second edition credited such borrowings at the
ends of articles. In accord with their subjects'
importance, the Bach and Brahms articles
were enlarged. Fuller Maitland's significant
changes included enlarging the scope to in-
clude music of the Middle Ages and of se-
lected American musicians and societies, add-
ing cross-references to the body of the text,
and eliminating the index. A review of the first
volume found it "not merely a revision of the
Grove Dictionary but the beginning of a new
dictionary." 19
Recognition of the significance of Ameri-
can music (including both the United States
and Canada) came with the publication in
1920 of $\q American Supplement. Its editor
was Waldo Selden Pratt, a theologian, organ-
ist, and music historian. The novelty of such a
focus on a land in which music was seen less
as a succession of the compositions of major
composers but more as an intrinsic part of
society led the editors to provide an unusual
structure for the work. A^Historical Introduc-
tion with Chronological Register of Names"
occupying the first quarter of the volume was
organized chronologically into sections giv-
ing biographical data on 1,700 composers,
performers, publishers, and other individuals
of musical importance, and was interspersed
with short narratives summarizing not only
musical, but also social, political, and eco-
nomical history. The main body of One Supple-
ment, arranged in alphabetical order, gave
fuller treatment of some 700 of the names,
served as an index to the others, and included
specialized articles, such as "Orchestras,"
which treated their subjects firom an American
point of view. The Supplement also served to
update the second edition of Grove through its
inclusion of some 100 updated articles. Pratt
went onto compile what was originally planned
as a one- volume abridgement of the second
edition and its supplement, but actually be-
came a separate work inits ownright, TheNew
Encyclopedia of Music and Musicians (New
York: Macmillan, 1924).
Henry Cope Colles
Henry Cope Colles succeeded Fuller
Maitland as music editor of The Times in 1 9 1 1 ,
and became editor of the third edition of
Grove, published from 1927 to 1928. Colles
continued to employ the Dictionary's original
text, but with some 50 years having intervened
since the publication of the first parts of the
first edition, he found it necessary to revise
substantially or to replacemany of the articles.
Grove's own articles on Beethoven,
Mendelssohn, and Schubert remained, albeit
with supplementary footnotes. 20 A number of
the new contributors, such as Eric Blom, Ed-
ward Dent, Alfred Einstein, E.H. Fellowes,
Anselm Hughes, and Oscar Sonneck, were to
become some of the century's major musico-
m
122 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Ha
logical figures. Illustrations included 96 plates,
some in color. The third edition included the
American Supplement, reprinted without revi-
sion from its 1 920 version, but with an appen-
dix which updated and added articles.
This third edition was reprinted numerous
times, sometimes with minor revisions, well
into the 1 940s. A fourth edition was published
in London in 1940, hut revisions consisted
primarily in the addition of dates of death and
of bibliographical references. With irony, the
editor acknowledged the beneficial proximity
in England of such scholars as Egon Wellesz,
Karl Geiringer, Hans Redlich, and Alfred
Loewenberg who had fled the Holocaust. 21
The most significant addition to Grove during
this time was the Supplementary Volume dated
1940, whose title page in the New York im-
print identified it as part of the third edition,
and in the London imprint as part of the fourth
edition. It added many articles and updated
biographies and lists of compositions. Articles
in the supplement on "Broadcasting" and
"Twelve Note Music" show Grove catching
up with the twentieth century. Its short article
on "Jazz" was regressive at best ("unrestrained
Corybantic frenzy alternating with passive
hopeless melancholy"), but undermined its
derision by listing the major composers whom
jazz had influenced — Igor Stravinsky, Paul
Hindemith, Darius Milhaud, Ernst Krenek,
Kurt Weill, and Constant Lambert.
The irregular publication of the Supple-
mentary Volume signalled an uncertainty (un-
doubtedly influenced by the war) as to the
direction of Grove. A. Hyatt King seized upon
this uncertainty in a 1946 article which at-
tacked the fourth edition and the Supplemen-
tary Volume for inaccuracies, outmost impor-
tantly for the disproportionate amount of space
allotted to Beethoven, Mozart, Haydn,
Schubert, Mendelssohn, Schumann, Weber,
and Wagner, "a legacy from Grove's own
predilection." 22 These sentiments undoubtedly
influenced Eric Blom's extensive revision and
expansion to nine volumes of Grove for its
fifth, edition in 1954, which Macmillan of
London, due to the severing of its relationship
with its American office, published in New
York through St. Martin's Press.
Eric Blom
Blom, a critic and editor, had published in
1946 Everyman 's Dictionary of Music (Lon-
don: Dent), which, through successive edi-
tions into the 1970s, continued to be a most
valuable, concise, andpopular reference work.
His elegant and detailed preface shows the
care he took in the selection of articles, the
treatment of geographical names, the translit-
eration of Russian words, the choice of termi-
nology, and the physical appearance of the
text. Negotiating between the amateurs and
the increasingly influential musicologists,
Blom addressed the fifth edition to "a user
who possesses a general musical knowledge,
or hopes to acquire one." 23 In all, half of the
fifth edition was completely new material.
The rest (including articles by original con-
tributors Sir Hubert Parry and William S.
Rockstro) was thoroughly revised. In striving
for balance, one of Blom's most dramatic
steps was to replace Grove's venerable ar-
ticles on Beethoven, Mendelssohn, and
Schubert with shorter, updated versions. 24 The
"Jazz" article, expanded to 6 pages, was con-
tributed by French jazz critic Hugues Panassie.
New was a massive (some 240 pages) article
by several contributors on "FolkMusic." Cross-
references wereplentiful. Bibliographies were
greatly expanded and typeset in a manner that
distinguished them easily from the text; yet,
citations were often scanty, and sometimes
inaccurate. For the first time Grove took a
serious interest in non-Western material in the
form of surveys (such as "Arabian music")
and in more specific articles on theoreticians,
composers, and instruments.
■ The fifth edition became notorious for
toutingits British origin; Blom' spreface main-
tained that "though Grove gives information
on an international scale, it is in the first place
an English work." 25 This national bias which
GROVE'S DICTIONARY OF MUSIC AND MUSICIANS 123
developed from Blom's aversion to German-
trained American musicologists was to work
against his favor, particularly with the publi-
cation by 1 954 of the first three volumes of the
West German Die Musik in Geschichte und
Gegen ww* (edited by FriedrichBlume [Kassel:
Barenreiter- Verlag, 1 949-86] ; abbreviated as
MGG), which rapidly became recognized as
the major scholarly reference work in music.
Any evaluation of Grove of necessity com-
pared it to MGG, usually to Grove's detri-
ment. In an editorial in The Musical Quarterly ;
Paul Henry Lang complained of Grove's
"somewhat belligerent British bias that is very
different from the engaging parochialism of
the old edition." 26 A review in Notes had
similar objections, and concluded that MGG
"is a far sounder publication on all counts." 27
In a direct tabular comparison of a selection of
articles from the two works, A. Hyatt King
found MGG to be more thorough in its cover-
age of historical topics, but Grove to be better
in coverage of the twentieth century. 28
The prominence of Grove and the appear-
anceof other comprehensive works with which
it could be compared made tempting the search
for errors and omissions in its text. Musical
Times published several hundred of these,
collected from contributors, not long after the
publication of the fifth edition. 29 To correct
these, and to update and add articles, Blom
compiled material for a Supplementary Vol-
ume which was assembled by Denis Stevens
in 1961 two years after Blom's death.
Stanley Sadie
Valid criticism of the fifth edition and the
comparatively esoteric nature of MGG (not to
mention its inaccessibility for those unable to
read German) left an open field for a new
Grove. Macmillan engaged scholar and critic
Stanley Sadie, Musical Times editor and au-
thor of, among other works, Mozart (London:
CalderandBoyars, 1 965), Handel (London: J.
Calder, 1966), andBeethoven (London: Faber
and Faber, 1967). Sadie set out in 1969 to
develop an entirely new work. He established
a panel of consulting editors, each of whom
was responsible for outlining a given topical
area and for recruiting contributors. Seven
national advisors were each responsible for a
given geographical part of the world. In an
article published in 1975 that whetted appe-
tites for a work that did not appear until five
years later, Sadie announced a rigorous at-
tempt "to set ourselves a series of objectives
and standards that will make the dictionary as
useful as possible within itself." Furthermore,
"it will not share the xenophobia of Grove
5." 30
The New Grove Dictionary of Music and
Musicians, published in 1 980 by Macmillan in
London and two subsidiaries, Grove's Dictio-
naries of Music in New York and Peninsula
Publishers in Hong Kong, reflected not only
new standards but also the availability of a
prodigious amount of additional information
made available through the intensive efforts
of scholars within the varied branches of mu-
sicology that have flourishedthrough the twen-
tieth century. The thousands of biographies in
Riemann's and Baker's works, the identifica-
tion of manuscript and printed original sources
in the volumes of the RISM (Repertoire inter-
national des sources musicales, or Interna-
tional Inventory of Musical Sources) series,
and the establishment of terminology in dic-
tionaries such as the Harvard Dictionary of
Music (edited by Willi Ape! [Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press, 1944]) indicated a
breadth of material that was unavailable in the
1 880s. Moreover, the growth of the field of
ethnomusicology and the academic
legitimatization of popular culture involved
disciplines thathad henceforth had no place in
musical studies.
The New Grove could not reasonably be
compared with earlier editions. In size alone,
its 22,500 articles in 20 volumes made it more
than twice as large as even the fifth edition.
The nearly 2,500 contributors included most
of the premier scholars throughout the world.
Thirty-six percent of these were American, 20
124 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
percent were British, and 12 percent were
German. 31 More than half the articles (over
1 1 ,000) were devoted to composers; those for
the Viennese masters are nearly as long as
George Grove's original essays. Other per-
sons to whom it devoted individual entries
include performers, musicologists, critics, li-
brettists, dancers, patrons, publishers and print-
ers, and instrument makers. Plentiful black
and white illustrations were adequate to the
task of showing persons, performance on in-
struments, and manuscripts. Of particular in-
terest to librarians and researchers were ex-
tended articles supplemented by extensive
lists on the materials andprocess of research —
"Dictionaries and Encyclopedias/' "Editions,"
"Libraries," "Periodicals," and "Sources-
Manuscript." 32 As a dictionary, The New Grove
gave definitions for musical terminology. As
a history, it covered genres and forms. As an
encyclopedia, it explored broad issues in a
range of survey articles,
One of The New Grove's most notable
features was the attention it gave to music on
an international scale. Hundreds of articles
surveyed the musics of countries and regions
of the world, defined terms, examined instru-
ments, and offered biographies from non-
Western cultures. The articles on individual
countries generally drew a distinction be-
tween "Art" music and "Folk" music. In the
last volume of The New Grove was an exten-
sive index of ethnomusicological topics.
Sadie and his staff paid extraordinary
attention to the physical format of The New
Grove. The introduction expanded on Blom' s
with an even more detailed presentation of
alphabetization, usage, and other items of
format. Virtually every biography included
references, and, in the case of composers,
work lists. Although (especially in the case of
major figures) these extended to hundreds of
listings, the rigorous standards for style and
the carefully planned typographical format
eased their use.
Critical Reception of The New
Grove
Reviewers of The New Grove tempered
near-unanimous praise with several recurring
complaints. The increased space devoted to
popular music and jazz was still inadequate. 33
Moreover, reviewers criticized the lack of
space devoted to American music; Michael
Tilson Thomas, for instance, regretted that "in
general, American music takes a back seat." 34
With electrical sound recording available in
one form or another since the 1920s, The New
Grove was faulted for its omission of thorough
discographies, particularly in areas such as
jazz or non- Western music in which standard
musical notation is of limited use. 35 A more
cutting criticism was that Grove had aban-
doned its traditional audience of learned ama-
teurs for a more select and literate coterie of
musicologists. 36 A review essay by Leon
Botstein brings to the fore this change in
audience: "The New Grove is a monument to
the fact that while the study of music has
become more professionalized, the audience
for music has suffered from waning passion
and sophistication." 37
Some of these criticisms undoubtedly
spurred the well-tuned corporate editorial ap-
paratus created for The New Grove to continue
work on offshoots which in their own special-
ized areas have dwarfed the parent work. The
New Grove Dictionary of Musical Instruments,
also under Sadie's direction, appeared in 1984.
Its articles included some 10,000 non-West-
ern instruments and delved into great detail
regarding topics treated more briefly in The
New Grove ("Violin," for example, extended
to over 3 5 pages with a bibliography of several
pages). The New Grove Dictionary of Ameri-
can Music (1986) traversed a region that the
Am erican Supplement had only peered at from
afar — "a different cultural model, of a more
pluralistic character than that of Europe, and
without the same foundation in ecclesiastical,
aristocratic, and state patronage." 38 Sadie drew
as co-editor for this work noted American
GROVE'S DICTIONARY OF MUSIC AND MUSICIANS 125
musicologist H. Wiley Hitchcock. Criticism
of scanty coverage of jazz in the American
volume presaged The New Grove Dictionary
of Jazz (1988), edited by Barry Kernfeld. 3 *
Jazz applied the critical vocabulary and rigor-
ous historical standards of The New Grove
itself to a music that previously had been
served primarily by an anecdotal literature,
and employed extensive discographies in the
same way that The New Grove supplemented
articles with bibliographies and lists of com-
positions.
Other Grove projects are presently under-
way. 40 Most notable is a four-volume New
Grove Dictionary of Opera edited by Sadie
and scheduled for publication in late 1991.
Most of its articles on maj or composers will be
newly written, and it will include nearly 2,000
entries on individual operas, as well as new
articles on singers, librettists, and librettos.
Copublished with W.W. Norton in New York
are more modest spinoffs of The New Grove.
The Grove Concise Dictionary of Music (Lon-
don: Macmillan Press, 1988; in the United
States as The Norton/Grove Concise Encyclo-
pedia of Music [New York: W.W. Norton,
1 988]) is a one-volume abridgement and con-
densation of its parent volume which, in def-
erence to an audience of students and listen-
ers, includes articles for individual works.
Some two dozen volumes in the Composer
Biography Series, such as The New Grove
Mozart (London: Macmillan, 1982; New York:
W.W. Norton, 1983), extract, revise, update,
and index articles from the parent volume.
Volumes in the Handbooks in Music Series
derive in varying degrees from TheNew Grove;
these include the History of Opera, edited by
Stanley Sadie, (Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1 989;
New York: Norton, 1990), and Music Printing
and Publishing, edited by Sadie and D.W.
Krummel (Basingstoke: Macmillan; New
York: Norton, 1990). In Japan, the Kodansha
publishing firm is translating The New Grove
into Japanese. 41 Anew edition of Grove itself
is presently "an active possibility ... but no
firm plans are made as yet." 42
Both George Grove and Stanley Sadie
saw their work as being all-inclusive. Grove 's
Dictionary covered "all the points ... on which
those interested in the Art, and alive to its
many and far-reaching associations, can de-
sire to be informed.' ,4J TheNew Grove "seeks
to discuss everything that can be reckoned to
bear on music in history and on present-day
musical life." 44 Rather than a progression of
more fully developed editions, the Grove dic-
tionaries should be seen as a series of indi-
vidual works sharing a common heritage. Each
was a product, not only of its editors and
contributors, but also of its time. The avail-
ability of the world's music through broad-
casting and recording, the presence of MGG
and other reference works, the increasing so-
phistication of musicology, the upheaval of
the Second World War, and the Victorian
confidence of a musical amateur were only
some of the social and intellectual factors that
determined the substance of the various
Groves. Taken together, the editions and their
derived works nevertheless have been a col-
lective cornerstone of musical scholarship —
not the whole building, certainly, but an inte-
gral part within which the edifice has been
summarized and upon which it has been built.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
A Dictionary of Music and Musicians (A.D.
1450-1889) by Eminent Writers, English
and Foreign, edited by Sir George Grove
with Appendix edited by J. A. Fuller Maitland
and Index by Mrs. Edmond Wodehouse.
London: Macmillan; New York: Macmillan,
1879-1889, 1890. 4 vols, and index. Re-
printed 1890-1898, 1900; Philadelphia: T.
Presser, 189-?.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians,
edited by J A. Fuller Maitland. [2nd edj
London: Macmillan;New York: Macmillan,
i!
fcfi]
1 26 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
1904-1910, 5 vols. Reprinted 1911; Phila-
delphia: T. Presser, 1916.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians:
American Supplement, edited by Waldo
Selden Pratt; associate editor, Charles N.
Boyd. New York: Macmillan, 1920. 412p.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians,
edited by H.C. Colles. 3rd ed. London:
Macmillan; New York: Macmillan, 1927-
1928. 5 vols. Reprinted 1929, 1932, 1948.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians:
American Supplement, edited by Waldo
Selden Pratt; associate editor, Charles N.
Boyd. New ed. New York: Macmillan,
1928. 438p. Reprinted 1935.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians,
edited by EC. Colles. 4th ed. London:
Macmillan, 1940, 5 vols.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians:
Supplementary Volume, edited by H.C.
Colles. London: Macmillan; New York:
Macmillan, 1940. 688p.
Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians,
edited by Eric Blom. 5th ed. London:
Macmillan; New York: St, Martin's Press,
1954. 9 vols. Reprinted 1961.
Grove 's Dictionary of Music and Musicians:
Supplementary Volume to the Fifth Edition,
editedbyEricBlom; associate editor.Denis
Stevens. London: Macmillan; New York:
St. Martin's Press, 1961. 493p.
The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musi-
cians, edited by Stanley Sadie. London:
Macmillan Publishers; Washington, DC:
Grove ' s Dictionaries of Music; Hong Kong:
Peninsula Publishers, 1980, 20 vols.
The New Grove Dictionary of Musical Instru-
ments, edited by Stanley Sadie. London:
Macmillan Press; New York: Grove's Dic-
tionaries of Music, 1984. 3 vols.
The New Grove Dictionary of American Music,
edited by H. Wiley Hitchcock and Stanley
Sadie. London; Macmillan Press; New
York: Grove'sDictionariesofMusic, 1986.
4 vols.
The New Grove Dictionary of Jazz, edited by
Barry Kernfeld. London: Macmillan Press;
New York: Grove's Dictionaries of Music,
1988. 2 vols.
The New Grove Dictionary of Opera, edited by
Stanley Sadie. Forthcoming.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The following is a selective list of works
that examine individual Grove dictionaries or
that offer background material on the devel-
opment of the first edition. Percy Young's
biography is invaluable in establishing the
facts of George Grove's life and the details of
publication of the Dictionary. Of special im-
portance are articles by editors Blom, Sadie,
and Hitchcock which set out their intentions.
Peggy Daub's article in Reference Services
Review is a history of the publication of the
successive editions which benefits from her
editorial involvement with the New Grove
staff. Encore is a newsletter distributed to
purchasers of The New Grove; it features
articles on performers and on publishing ac-
tivities of the Grove organization. Highly use-
ful in evaluating changes between editions
and in gauging overall response are reviews.
While these have not been included in the
bibliography, an attempt has been made to cite
in the endnotes those that are most significant,
Blom, Eric. "Grove V: A Task of Restoration."
Musical Times 95 (June, 1954): 300-03.
Daub, Peggy. "Grove 's Dictionary of Music and
Musicians'. From George Grove to the 'New
Grove'," Reference Services Review 10
(Fall, 1982): 15-22.
Duckies, Vincent. "Musicology." In The Ro-
mantic Age, 1800-1914, edited by Nicho-
las Temperley, 483-502. Athlone History
of Music in Great Britain, vol. 5. London:
Athlone Press, 1981.
Ehrlich, Cyril. The Music Profession in Britain
since the Eighteenth Century: A Social
History. Oxford; Clarendon Press, 1985.
Encore. The Grove Music Society, v. 1-, March
1986- New York: Grove's Dictionaries of
Music.
GROVE'S DICTIONARY OF MUSIC AND MUSICIANS 127
Giddens, Gary. "The Grove of Academe." Vil-
lage Voice 32 (January 13, 1987): 75-76.
Graves, Charles L. The Life and Letters of Sir
George Grove, C.B. London: Macmillan;
New York: Macmillan, 1903.
"Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians
(Fifth Edition)." Musical Times 96 (No-
vember, 1955): 591-96; (December, 1955):
643-51.
Hitchcock, H. Wiley. "On the Path to the U.S.
Grove." Notes 41 (March, 1985): 467-70.
Howes, Frank, and Dyneley Hussey. "Grove's
Dictionary." Music and Letters 9 (April,
1928): 98-110; (July, 1928): 195-210.
King, A. Hyatt. "Grove V and MGG." Monthly
Musical Record 85 (June 1955): 115-19;
(July-August, 1955): 152-57; (September,
1955): 183-85.
King, A. Hyatt. "Grove: Some Suggestions and
Reflections." Monthly Musical Record 76
(June, 1946): 99-1 02; (July-August, 1946):
132-34.
Langley, Leanne. "The Musical Press in Nine-
teenth-Century England." No tes 46 (March,
1990); 583-92.
"New SI 900 Grove Music Dictionary to be
Distributed by St. Martin's," Publishers
Weekly 218 (November 14, 1980): 40, 42.
O'Meara, Eva Judd. "Marginal Notes to Grove's
Dictionary." Music Library Association
Notes no. 1 (1934): 1-7.
Parry, Ann. "The Grove Years 1868-1883: A
'new look' for Macmillan 's Magazine^"
Victorian Periodicals Review 19 (Winter,
1986): 149-56.
Sadie, Stanley. "Ethnomusicology and the New
Grove." Ethnomusicology 23 (January,
1979): 95-102.
Sadie, Stanley. "The New Grove." Notes 32
(December, 1975): 259-68.
Stevenson, Robert. "The Americas in European
Music Encyclopedias." Inter-American
Music Review 3 (Spring-Summer, 1981):
159-207.
Thompson, Kenneth L. "Grove and Dates."
Musical Times 104 (July, 1963); 481-84.
Young, Percy M. George Grove, 1820-1 900: A
Biography. Washington, DC: Grove's Dic-
tionaries of Music, 1980.
NOTES
1 "Preface," in A Dictionary of Music and Musicians
(A.D. 1450-1889) by Eminent Writers, English and
Foreign, ed, by Sir George Grove with Appendix
ed. by J.A. Fuller Maitland and Index by Mrs.
Edmond Wodehouse (London: Macmillan; New
York: Macmillan, 1879-89, 1890), v.
2 See, for example, H.C. Colles, The Oxford History of
Music, Vol. VII: Symphony and Drama, 1 850-1 900
(London; Oxford University Press, 1934), p. 445:
"While the Continent was reaping its rich harvest of
music, and incidentally exporting it across the
channel, English music was represented only by
some rather thin sowings in a soil, rich enough
indeed, but very poorly tilled."
3 Cyril Ehrlich, The Music Profession in Britain since the
Eighteenth Century: A Social History (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1985), 54-59.
4 Ibid., 236.
5 Ibid„ 68.
'Percy M. Young, George Grove, 1820-1900: A Biogra-
phy (Washington, DC: Grove's Dictionaries of
Music, 1980), 28.
7 Ibid., 52.
8 Ibid., 64.
'Charles L. Graves, The Life and Letters of Sir George
Grove, C.B. (London: Macmillan; New York:
Macmillan, 1903), 205-06.
l0 Learme Langley, "The Musical Press in Nineteenth-
Century England," Notes 46 (March 1990): 585-
86.
"Ibid., 587,
n Vincent Duckies, "Musicology," in The Romantic Age,
1800-1914, ed. by Nicholas Temperley, Athlone
History ofMusic in Britain, vol. 5. (London: Athlone
Press, 1981), 483,
13 Young, 140-41. Also in the letter, Grove emphasizes
the time needed for the project — in terms with
which any editor can sympathize: "To drive a team
of contributors half of whom are amateurs, andhalf
can get 3 times the pay we can give them elsewhere,
takes a frightful amount of goading and coaxing
and correspondence: and the editing and correcting
and checking and completing — as I feel bound to do
it — is a matter of great labour and incessant thought
and occupation."
M "Preface," Dictionary, vi.
15 Ibid., v,
"These included Edinburgh Review 153 (January 1881):
212-40; Quarterly Review 148 (July 1879): 39-53;
and Temple Bar 64 (April 1882): 541-56.
17 "The body of the dictionary absolutely swarms with
mistakes," Athenaeum 3221 (20 July 1889): 106.
' s "What it has wanted has been a stronger guiding hand,
a general and comprehensive editing," review in
Edinburgh Review 153 (January 1881): 239.
:■*.
128 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
9'
w George P. Upton, review of the second edition of
Grove, Dial 38 (May 1905): 311,
M Frank Howes and Dy neley Hussey look askance at "the
Mendelssohn article, which stands a huge monu-
ment to Victorian musical taste, like a sortof Albert
Memorial in the very middle of the book," in Music
an<! letters 9 (My 1928): 195.
2 ' "Preface," ia Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musi-
cians, ed. by H.C. Colles, 4th ed. (London:
Macmillan, I WO), v. ■
23 A. Hyatt KJug, "'Grove': Some Suggestions and Re-
flections," Monthly Musical Record 76 (July-Au-
gust 1946): 132.
""preface," Grove's Dictionary of Mush and Musi-
cians, ed.byEricBlom, 5 th ed. (London; Macmillan;
New York: St. Martin's Press, 1954), v.
"The original essays were reprinted in a separate vol-
ume: George Grove, Beethoven, Schubert,
Mendelssohn (London: Macmillan, 195 1),
15 "Preface," Grove's Dictionary, 5th Ed., vi.
76 Paul Henry lAt&Mwoal Quarterly 41 (April 1955):
216.
"Richard S.HiU,tfote 12 (December 1954): 91.
3 A. Hyatt King, Monthly Musical Record 85 (July-
August 19S5): 183-84.
""Grove's Dictionary of Music and Musicians (Fifth
Edition)," Musical Times 96 (November 1955):
591-96; (December 1955): 643-51.
30 Stanley Sadie, "The New Grove," Notes 32 (December
1975): 260-63.
31 Peggy Daub, "Grove 's Dictionary of Music and Musi-
cians: From George Grove to the 'New Grove',"
Reference Services Review 10 (Pall 1982): 20,
31 See Ann Basart, ''An Index to the Manuscripts in the
New Grove Articles on 'Sources'," Cum Nods
Variorum nos. 117-34 (November 1987 — July-
August 1989).
33 See, for example, reviews by Billy Taylor regarding
jazz and by Paul Wittke regarding American musi-
cal theater in Musical Quarterly 68 (April 1982):
27 1—73 and 274—82; the entire issue is devoted to
individual reviews of The New Grove.
34 Michael Tilson Thomas, Notes 38 (September 1981):
55; Robert Stevenson examines in detail The New
Grove's coverage of North and South American
composers in "The Americas in European Music
Encyclopedias," Inter-American Music Review 3
(Spring-Summer 1981): 159-207.
3! Joshua Rifkin, review ofTheNew Grove, Journal of the
A merican Musicological Society 35 (Spring 1 982):
188.
36 Charles Rosen, review of The New Grove, New York
Review of Books 28 (28 May 1981): 26-38.
37 Leon Botstein, "Orpheus in Academe," Harper 's 262
(June 1981): 74.
38 "Preface," The New Grove Dictionary of American
Music, ed. by H. Wiley Hitchcock and Stanley
Sadie (New York: Grove's Dictionaries of Music;
London: Macmillan Press, 1986), vii.
39 Gary Giddens, "The Grove of Academe," Village Voice
32 (13 January 1987): 75-76.
40 Stanley Sadie summarized ongoing publication activi-
ties related to the The New Grove in a letter to the
author, 22 March 1990.
41 Hiroko Kishimoto, "Grove in Japanese," Encore 3
(March 1988): unpaged.
42 Sadie, letter to author, 22 March 1990.
43 "Preface," Dictionary, v.
44 "Preface," The New Grove, viii,
fefe
Eument 95 : Guide to
eference Books
Stuart W. Miller
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
The names Kroeger, Mudge, Winchell, and
Sheehy evoke nearly mythic and possibly
even reverential thoughts in the minds of
almost any librarian trained in the United
States since 1902. In that year, the American
Library Association (ALA) published what
would become the first edition of the premier
compendium of reference materials for North
American libraries, a work that has endured
down to the present day in the form of a tenth
edition, with a supplement planned for March
or April 1 992 and an eleventh edition sched-
uled to appear sometime in 1995.
In the nearly 90 years since the first edi-
tion in 1902, only four librarians have acted as
chief author/editor of the Guide to Reference
Books. For almost 75 years of that period,
three of those four librarians have all in turn
served as head of the Reference Department
of the Columbia University Libraries. Such
continuity has created an almost worshipful
atmosphere that continues to hover around the
Guide down to the present day and represents
both a strength and a weakness for those now
charged with the task of keeping the Guide in
the mainstream of library reference work.
The individual circumstances surround-
ing the inception and production of most of the
ten editions and their interim supplements can
probably never be known in their entirety.
Other than reviews and news announcements,
there appears to be virtually no secondary
literature discussing any aspect of the Guide.
Both Robert Balay (editor of the forthcoming
supplement to the tenth edition) and Eugene
Sheehy (compiler of the ninth and tenth edi-
tions) report that they received almost no
written materials or information when they
accepted their responsibilities. 1 Furthermore,
while Sheehy has some copies of his corre-
spondence with ALA Publishing, most of the
replies to his letters came via telephone, 2 When
one talks with Sheehy, Balay, and Robert
Michaelson (coordinator of the science sec-
tion for the next supplement and also a con-
tributorto the tenth edition), one receives the
impression of an almost informal undertaking
(from a business/operations point of view)
with past practices and traditions handed down
only orally, 3 This researcher may, therefore,
be forgiven for suspecting that even with
access to the repositories where remnants of
earlier editors ' efforts may survive, little would
be found, since little appears to have been
preserved.
Genesis and Characteristics
One can speculate that Alice Bertha
Kroeger, the originator of what would eventu-
ally become the Guide, simply had an idea for
a guide to reference works, convinced ALA to
publish it, and she and her successors took it
from there. Or, given the eventual size of the
work, one cannot help but speculate that it was
the Guide that really took hold of its compil-
ers. 4
M
130 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
&/<
Of course, some obvious facts can be
ascertained about the history of the Guide.
First, it has always been published by ALA.
While this may seem a trivial point, it does in
fact verify that the association has always
recognized the professional value of the Guide
and has undoubtedly also recognized its mon-
etary value as well. The Guide is one of ALA' s
best-selling titles of all time. ALA has sales
figures readily available only for the last four
editions: the total number of copies sold to
date for the seventh through tenth editions is
127,572, a very large number indeed when
most reference books rarely exceed printing
runs of 5,000 copies. 5 Since nearly every pub-
lic, college, university, and even some school
libraries can be expected to buy any new
edition sight unseen, ALA Publishing has a
virtually captive market to exploit.
Second, it has always been compiled by
working reference librarians and has consis-
tently aimed to be a practical guide for every-
day use.
Third, the longevity of the work indicates
a strong perception on the part of its intended
audience that the Guide has always served and
continues to serve a very useful purpose. While
some have taken issue with the Guide's selec-
tion criteria and unevenness of coverage, the
overwhelming critical response to the Guide
has been very positive, if not downright adu-
latory. The perceived usefulness of the work
is also reflected in the attempts to keep it up to
date.
Keeping Current
There have been many schemes to keep
the Guide current, an ongoing theme in its
history and a recurring request from the re-
viewing community. After the first edition
appeared in 1902, supplemental listings ap-
peared at least annually in issues of either
Library Journal or the A.L.A. Booklist until
1928. The second, third, and fourth editions
appeared at irregular intervals in 1908, 1917,
and 1923 with two supplements to the second
edition in 191 1 and 1914. After the fifth edi-
tion of 1929, ALA published three supple-
ments in 1 930, 193 1 , and 1 934. After the sixth
edition of 1 936, four supplements appeared in
1939, 1941, 1944, and 1947. The seventh
edition in 1951 was followed by four supple-
ments in 1954, 1956, 1960, and 1963. The
eighth edition came out in 1967 with supple-
ments in 1968, 1970, and 1972, and the ninth
edition was issued in 1976. A four-year hiatus
then occurred until the first supplement to the
ninth edition was published in 1 980, followed
by a second in 1982. In 1986, ALA issued the
tenth edition, keeping with the "pattern" es-
tablished since the seventh edition, of issuing
a new edition four years after the last supple-
ment to the previous edition. This pattern is
also discernible in the 40-year period 1936—
1976: three or four supplements to an edition
followed by a new edition. None of it really
suggests a carefully planned approach from
the publisher's point of view; on the other
hand, this could be interpreted as an unsuc-
cessful implementation of the intent to ob-
serve a regular schedule.
As any reference librarian will attest, sub-
stitutes for a regular pattern of updating for the
Guide have chiefly consisted of regular fea-
ture articles in Wilson Library Bulletin and
College & Research Libraries that have ap-
peared over the years, edited by various people
(among them, Charles Bunge, Frances Neel
Cheney, and Eugene P. Sheeny), reviewing
and/or annotating selected reference works
issued in a specific time frame. And the same
reference librarians will also attest that this
coverage, while helpful, is no substitute for
regular supplements or revised editions.
A number of reasons have been suggested
as to why the Guide has never successfully
achieved a regular schedule of supplements
and revisions. Certainly, the Great Depression
and World War II interrupted many publish-
ing operations for at least 15 years between
1930-1 945 . 6 It speaks well of ALA that it saw
fit to issue several supplements and a new
edition during that period. Since 1945, the
GUIDE TO REFERENCE BOOKS 13 i
ever-growing scope of the compilation task
occasioned by the enormous increase in the
number of reference titles suitable for inclu-
sion in the Guide> coupled with the absence of
a computerized database for editing purposes,
have made the preparation of each new edition
an enormous task. (Indeed, the compilers
working on the tenth edition received pages of
the ninth edition with pasted-on additions cut
out from the two supplements.) While reviews
of the various editions of the Guide have
generally complained about the lack of regu-
lar updating, 7 not until very recently has ALA
made a commitment to create a computerized
database to allow for vastly easier updating
and revising processes. As a matter of fact,
ALA Publishing itself did not begin to move
towards computerized processes until the late
1970s.
The Columbia Connection
Another interesting fact about the Guide
is that, despite the long association with refer-
ence librarians at Columbia University and
popular impressions to the contrary, no formal
agreement has ever existed between ALA and
Columbia University concerning compilation
of the work. Whatever formal contractual
agreements have existed have been between
individuals and ALA, However, since most
academic libraries recognize that work on a
project such as the Guide is a legitimate use of
staff time (presumably to an extent estab-
lished by policy or custom), it is clear that at
least some of the cost of compiling the Guide
over the years has been subsidized by Colum-
bia University. (How much can probably never
be determined.) This in no way minimizes the
extraordinary amounts of personal time de-
voted to the compilation by the editors and
their collaborators. 8 (Constance Winchell in
fact took a year's leave of absence to work on
the seventh edition. 9 )
Following completion of the tenth edi-
tion, ALA Publishing and Columbia Univer-
sity discussed the possibility of negotiating an
agreement to establish a formal, contractual
relationship for the production of a future
edition with possible remuneration to the uni-
versity; no agreement was reached. While
Columbia University librarians are still in-
volved with the planned supplement to the
tenth edition, future editions of the Guide will
probably no longer have the strong identifica-
tion with Columbia University that has been a
feature for almost 75 years. Under these new
arrangements, the hidden costs of compiling
the work will undoubtedly be spread among
more institutions.
Given the continuity of author/editorship
over the years, the stated purposes of the
Guide have remained consistent. The Guide
has always served as a selection tool for refer-
ence librarians and has also been meant to
serve as a "reference manual for the library
assistant, research worker, or other user of
library resources who needs a finger post to
point out the reference tools available for
some particular investigation." 10 As Sheehy
notes in the preface to the tenth edition, "the
criterion of usefulness which governed Miss
Kroeger's first edition remains salient," 11
The Guide has always been compiled and
edited by working reference librarians who
have taken a very practical approach to deci-
sions regarding inclusion or exclusion. Even
by the time Sheehy began working on the
Guide, no editor had articulated a policy on
inclusion/exclusion. Sheehy avers that the only
real guiding principle was whether or not a
title was useful for the compiler's clientele.
Robert Michaelson, one of the current section
coordinators, agrees that selection criteria have
always purposefully been left vague, leaving
it to individual reference librarians to identify
those works which have shown value in actual
reference situations. 12 This goes a long way
toward explaining phenomena such as the
otherwise perplexing presence of standard
topical texts in the Guide and, on the other
hand, the omission of many titles viewed as
vital in some libraries.
At no time in its history has the Guide had
an editorial advisory board in the sense of a
132 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
group empowered to determine policy issues
and develop guidelines on such matters as
inclusion/exclusion criteria. Various ad hoc
groups have met over the years, apparently
either at the suggestion of the editor or of ALA
Publishing; some were formed to advise on
specific issues, Winchell describes one group
in the "Preface" to the seventh edition. 13 None
appears to have perpetuated itself.
Critical Reception
Even a cursory glance through the re-
views of the various editions and supplements
will show that the inevitable result of such an
approach has been viewed as a weakness,
particularly when editions one through eight
were very much a reflection of reference work
as performed in one (albeit very large and
multi-disciplinary) reference department. 1 ' 1 Bill
Katz remarked in a review of the ninth edition:
"The Guide is beginning to suffer from lack of
criticism. Since 1 902 it has been handed down
from the American Library Association
mountaintop via the Columbia University
Reference Department. The superb work of
Mudge and Winchell is in danger of being
codified." 15 Katz was particularly concerned
about the reuse of annotations from prior
editions, the lack of timeliness, and the lack of
truly critical annotations. While acknowledg-
ing the overall worth of the Guide, Katz sug-
gested that division of the compilation among
more people and more libraries might be a
solution — a strategy that in fact began to evolve
with the seventh edition and continues today. l6
On the other hand, the very practical
nature of such an approach has been a strength
as well, and the Guide, more often than not,
has received extremely positive reviews. Some
border on the embarrassingly effusive. The
seventh edition in particular garnered almost
fulsome evaluations: "It is a book for
Everyman, for general reading, . . . this work
is a great one; it deserves the confidence and
the affection of librarians, scholars, and gen-
eral readers;" 17 and". . . an accomplishment of
the first magnitude , . . Miss Winchell has
made the present work so much her own that
it is fitting that her flag should fly from the
masthead; only a sense of dedication of her
profession, certainly not hope of pecuniary
reward of which there is not likely to be a
surfeit, could have inspired her to undergo the
vast amount of labor required, even with the
help of numerous collaborators whose assis-
tance she so graciously acknowledges " J *
Role as a Textbook
In addition to being a tool for practicing
reference librarians, the Guide was originally
designed to be a textbook for the student who
wished to pursue a systematic study of refer-
ence works. This explains why earlier editions
carry sections on the reference department in
a library and suggestions on how to read a
reference work. In the past several years, the
use of the Guide as a textbook has, for the most
part, been abandoned. However, a reviewer of
the seventh edition concluded that its "pleas-
ing format and readable style should recom-
mend it to reference librarians for daily read-
ing." 19 While one may wonder if any reference
librarian has ever really read the Guide as part
of a daily routine, such a statement suggests
the authority that the work commands, (Even
1 5 years ago in library school, it was suggested
in an enumerative bibliography class that stu-
dents forego purchasing the then current eighth
edition, but only on the grounds that a new
edition was expected shortly and, after all, the
students could expect to find a copy in virtu-
ally any library in which any would eventually
work. 20 )
Earlier editions also attempted to define
what good reference work really means. The
"Introduction: Reference Department" was
reprinted essentially unchanged in almost all
of the earlier editions. The feature was not
dropped until the tenth edition in 1986. An-
other feature eventually abandoned was the
"Suggestive List of 100 Reference Books"
that appeared in the first through sixth edi-
GUIDE TO REFERENCE BOOKS 1 33
tions. Meant for the small to medium-sized
public library, the concept obviously became
unworkable once the number of titles included
increased drastically. It also reflected the in-
evitable fact that a work compiled in a univer-
sity library will typically reflect the needs of
an academic audience, although the compilers
have always been fairly successful in incorpo-
rating more general-interest titles as well as
the more esoteric ones useful in an academic
setting. However, the Guide is "essentially a
working aid for larger libraries and serious
research." 21
Over the years other less comprehensive
guides to reference works for other types of
libraries and audiences have been issued, in-
cluding the American Library Association's
Reference Sources for Small and Medium-
sized Libraries (4th ed., Chicago: American
Library Association, 1984). The tenth edition
of the Guide identifies more than 30 guides to
reference material in the "Selection of Books"
section (pp. 43-47); these guides typically
focus on a particular kind of library or subject/
geographic area. Many of these works have
obviously been patterned after the Guide, an-
other indication of its far-reaching influence.
Most are of fairly recent origin; some are
review media. Their existence indicates a
need for more selective guides consistent with
the missions and budgets of smaller libraries,
ongoing tracking and evaluation of new titles,
and more in-depth coverage in certain topical
areas. All of these titles offer their own
strengths, but none can be said to supersede or
replace the Guide. Plans for the future of the
Guide (see below) suggest that the latter two
needs are well within the scope of the Guide's
purpose and its future capabilities; the first
need probably falls outside the Guide's pur-
pose, although perhaps there will someday be
a "Concise Guide."
Meanwhile, consistent growth has char-
acterized the Guide. The increase in numbers
of titles included in the Guide is certainly one
of the most noticeable differences among the
editions. The very modest 1 04 pages of the
first edition has expanded to 1 ,560 pages in the
tenth. The sixth edition in 1936 already listed
4,000 items; the seventh increased the total to
about 5,500; the eighth reached 7,500; the
ninth expanded to approximately 10,000; and
the tenth ended up with about 16,000 titles. It
is thought that the tenth edition supplement
will contain about 4500 titles. The numbers
explain why the acknowledgments, even in
the earlier editions, identify persons who pro-
vided assistance, the numbers of which have
increased significantly over the years. By the
seventh edition, Winchell began acknowledg-
ing assistance from librarians outside of Co-
lumbia; and for the ninth edition, Sheehy had
further expanded the coterie of assistant com-
pilers to the point where title-page acknowl-
edgment was made.
The Future
The current work on the suppl ement to the
tenth edition has coordinators for the various
sections from Syracuse University and North-
western University as well as at Columbia. In
addition, associate editors in charge of sub-
sections now represent a broad range of librar-
ies noted for various specializations, e.g., the
Family History Library of the Church of Jesus
Christ of Latter-Day Saints; the Yale Law
Library; the Yale Divinity Library; the Ap-
plied Life Sciences Library at the University
of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign; and the John
Crerar Library of the University of Chicago.
The ever expanding group of compilers from
a variety of library settings should continue to
broaden the scope of the Guide and perhaps
address the criticisms of uneven coverage that
inevitably resulted from a work compiled pri-
marily in one institutional setting. And those
concerned with tradition qua tradition, should
recognize that such an approach was really
begun long ago by Constance Winchell her-
self and continued by Eugene Sheehy.
After publication of the tenth edition,
ALA Publishing sent out questionnaires to a
variety of people asking for input about how
i
134 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
the Guide should be handled in the future —
Sheehy had already announced that the tenth
edition was his last — and also talked with
Columbia about a formal arrangement, as
noted above. Eventually, ALA decided to
assign responsibility for the Guide to the
Choice editorial office, certainly a logical
enough decision based on Choice's role as a
review medium for academic library collec-
tion development. 22 Robert Balay, former head
of the Reference Department at Yale Univer-
sity and now an editor at Choice, took on the
position of editor of the Guide. Balay cur-
rently spends approximately 50 percent of his
time each week working on the Guide. To
assist him he has recruited many of the tenth
edition's compilers as section and subsection
compilers/editors for a supplement to that
edition, scheduled to appear in 1 992. An elev-
enth edition is scheduled for 1995 but, for
now, efforts are focused on the supplement. 23
Another very important project for the
future is the creation of a machine-readable
database to make the compilation process far
easier than before. Even as late as the 1986
tenth edition, Sheehy still used the 4-x-6" card
file system that had been utilized by his prede-
cessors. 24 Attempts to combine the computer
tape used for production of the ninth edition
with its two supplements to create a working
tool for compilation of the tenth edition came
to naught when the company hired for the task
went bankrupt. For the tenth edition's supple-
ment, LC-MARC tapes are being used to
supply the bibliographic citations; this should
also greatlyaidthe compilation process. Plans
now call for the eventual availability of an
online database or a CD-ROM product, up-
dated at regular intervals, with a printed edi-
tion produced at regular intervals.
There is every reason to believe that the
Guide will continue to be a useful work. Two
of the most consistent and persistent criticisms
of the Guide — lack of timeliness due to the
irregular updating patterns and unevenness of
content due to its singular compilation meth-
ods — can be addressed by the creation of an
online database and a broadening of the num-
ber of compilers. Should the former become a
reality and the latter trend continue, the Guide
should remain a source to be reckoned with in
the reference department. A greater number
of compilers may also allow for more in-depth
assessment of related titles, resulting in a more
consistently critical rather than descriptive
approach to the Guide's annotations. The ex-
istence of a larger pool of compilers also
suggests that more formal editorial policies
will eventually have to be developed in order
to provide for a more rigorously consistent
approach regarding compilation criteria. Oth-
erwise, quality may suffer as increasingly
larger numbers of compilers incorporate their
own decisions and approaches into the Guide.
On the other hand, the commitment to using
practicing reference librarians as compilers is
surely the only way to insure the Guide's
continuing appeal to the profession as a useful
tool for everyday work.
As one reads through the prefaces and
introductions to the various editions of the
Guide, change is a constant theme, whether it
is the arrangement of the work itself, signifi-
cant additions of titles in particular topical
areas due to ever-shifting current events, or
just concerns about maintaining adequate cov-
erage, It is certain that none of the editors ever
thought that any one edition of the Guide was
a work for all time. The constant renewal
through supplements and new editions proves
the existence of a world in which demands for
information grow and change constantly and
the willingness of the Guide's compilers to
change with it. The latest steps in the evolution
of the Guide demonstrate, paradoxically, con-
tinuity amidst change and a realization that the
Guide can continue indefinitely if it continues
to meet the needs of its audience. May we all
be fortunate enough to see a centennial edition
in 2002.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
GUIDE TO REFERENCE BOOKS 135
Guide to the Study and Use of Reference Books: A
Manual for Librarians, Teachers and Students,
by Alice Bertha Kroeger. A.L.A. Annotated
Lists. Boston: American Library Association,
Publishing Board, 1902. 104p.
Guide to the Study and Use of Reference Books, by
Alice Bertha Rroeger. 2nd. ed., rev. and enl.
Boston: American Library Association, Pub-
lishing Board, 1908. 147p.
Guide to the Study and Use of Reference Books, by
Alice Bertha Kroeger. Supplement 1909-1910,
by Isadore Gilbert Mudge. Chicago: American
Library Association, Publishing Board, 1911.
24p.
Guide to the Study and Use of Reference Books, by
Alice Bertha Kroeger. Supplement 1911-191 3,
by Isadore Gilbert Mudge. Chicago: American
Library Association, Publishing Board, 1914.
48p.
Guide to the Study and Use of Reference Books, by
Alice Bertha Kroeger, Isadore Gilbert Mudge.
3rd. ed., rev. and enl. Chicago: American Li-
brary Association, Publishing Board, 1917.
235p.
New Guide to Reference Books, by Isadore Gilbert
Mudge. [4th ed.] Chicago: American Library
Association, 1923. 278p. "Based on the Third
Edition of Guide to the Study and Use of Refer-
ence Books by Alice Bertha Kroeger as Revised
by I. G. Mudge."
Guide to Reference Books, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge.
5th ed. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1929, 370p.
Reference Books of 1929, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge,
Doris M. Reed, Constance M. Winchell. Chi-
cago: AmericanLibrary Association, 1930. 47p.
"An informal supplement to Guide to Reference
Books, Fifth Edition."
Reference Books of 1930, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge,
Doris M. Reed, Constance M. Winchell. Chi-
cago: AmericanLibrary Association, 193 1 . 39p.
"An informal supplement to Guide to Reference
Books, Fifth Edition."
Reference Books of 1931-1933: Third Informal
Supplement to Guide to Reference Books, Fifth
Edition, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge assisted by
Constance M. Winchell. Chicago: American
Library Association, 1934. 87p.
Guide to Reference Books, by Isadore GilbertMudge.
6th ed. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1936. 504p.
Reference Books ofl 935-193 7: An Informal Supple-
ment to Guide to Reference Books, Sixth Edi-
tion, by Isadore GilbertMudge. Chicago: Ameri-
can Library Association, 1939. 69p,
Reference Books of 1938-1940, by Constance M.
Winchell. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1941. 106p. "Second Informal Supple-
ment to Guide to Reference Books, Sixth Edi-
tion, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge."
Reference Books of 1941-1943, by Constance M.
Winchell, Chicago: AmericanLibrary Associa-
tion, 1944. 1 15p. "Third Informal Supplement
to Guide to Reference Books, Sixth Edition, by
Isadore Gilbert Mudge."
Reference Books of 1944-1946, by Constance M.
Winchell. Chicago: AmericanLibrary Associa-
tion, 1947. 94p. "Fourth Informal Supplement
to Guide to Reference Books, Sixth Edition, by
Isadore Gilbert Mudge."
Guide to Reference Books, by Constance M. Winchell.
7th ed. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1951. 645p,
Guide to Reference Books: Supplement, 1950-1952,
by Constance M. Winchell and Olive A. John-
son. Chicago: American Library Association,
1954. 11 7p.
Guide to ReferenceBooks: Second Supplement, 1953-
1955, by Constance M. Winchell. Chicago:
American Library Association, 1956. 134p.
Guide to ReferenceBooks: Third Supplement, 1956-
1958, by Constance M. Winchell assisted by
John Neal Waddell and EleanorBuist. Chicago:
American Library Association, 1960. 145p.
Guide to Reference Books: Fourth Supplement, 1959-
June 1962, by Constance M. Winchell assisted
by John Neal Waddell, Eleanor Buist, Eugene P.
Sheehy. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1963. 15 lp.
Guide to ReferenceBooks, by Constance M. Winchell.
8th ed. Chicago: American Library Associa-
tion, 1967. 741p.
Guide to Reference Books: First Supplement 1965-
1966, by EugeneP. Sheehy. Chicago: American
Library Association, 1968. I22p.
Guide to Reference Books: Second Supplement 1967-
1968, compiled by Eugene P. Sheehy with the
assistance of Rita G. Keckeissen. Chicago:
American Library Association, 1970. 165p.
Guide to Reference Books: Third Supplement 1969-
1970, compiled by Eugene P. Sheehy with the
assistance of Rita G. Keckeissen and Eileen
Mcllvaine. Chicago: American Library Asso-
ciation, 1972. 190p.
Guide to Reference Books, compiled by Eugene P.
Sheehy with the assistance of Rita G. Keckeissen
and Eileen Mcllvaine. 9th ed. Chicago: Ameri-
can Library Association, 1976, l,015p.
Guide to Reference Books, Ninth Edition: Supple-
ment, edited by Eugene P. Sheehy with the
assistance of Rita G. Keckeissen, Eileen
Mcllvaine, Diane K. Goon; Pure and Applied
Sciences compiled by Richard J. Dionne, Eliza-
beth E. Ferguson, Robert C Michaelson; Major
Data Bases compiled by Martha E. Williams.
Chicago: American Library Association, 1980.
305p.
* I*"-
m
136 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Guide to Reference Books, Ninth Edition: Second
Supplement, edited by Eugene P. Sheehy with
the assistance of Rita G. Keckeissen, Eileen
Mcllvaine, Diane K. Goon; Pure and Applied
Sciences compiled by Richard J, Dionne, Eliza-
beth E. Ferguson, Robert C, Michaelson. Chi-
cago: American Library Association, 1982, 243p.
Guide to Reference Books, edited by Eugene P.
Sheehy withtheassistance ofRitaG. Keckeissen,
Eileen Mcllvaine, Diane K. Goon, Janet
Schneider; Science, Technology, and Medicine
compiled by Richard J. Dionne, Elizabeth E.
Ferguson, Robert C. Michaelson, 10th ed. Chi-
cago: American Library Association, 1986.
l,560p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Other than the reviews and a very few
news articles, the only secondary literature of
any substance on the Guide is Plotnik' s article
on the compilation of the ninth edition. Bio-
graphical information on Kroeger and Mudge
can be found in Grotzinger's and Waddell and
Grotzinger's respective articles in the Dictio-
nary of American Library Biography; on
Winchell in Richards' s article in the Supple-
ment to the Dictionary of American Library
Biography and in her New York Times obitu-
ary; and on Sheehy in The ALA Yearbook
1978. Significant reviews are listed below;
others can be found through standard book
review indexes. However, since most of the
reviews are basically descriptive and/or lau-
datory, they are not particularly illuminating.
Katz is probably correct in his assessment that
rigorous criticism of the Guide has been rare.
"Constance Mabel Winchell.'* New York Times, May
25, 1983, p. A24, Obituary.
Grotzinger, Laurel A. "Kroeger, Alice B ertha ( 1 864-
1909)." In Dictionary of American Library Bi-
ography, edited by Bohdan S. Wynar, 295-98.
Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1978.
Jensen, Joan W., et al. Review of Guide to Reference
Books, 10th ed., by Eugene P. Sheehy. Choice
24 (May, 1987): 1361-64.
Katz, Bill. Review of Guide to Reference Books, 9th
ed., by Eugene P. Sheehy. Journal of Academic
Librarianship 3 (March, 1977): 37-38.
Plotnik, Art. "From Winchell' s Sthto Sheehy' s 9th."
American Libraries % (March, 1977); 129-32.
Richards, Pamela Spence. "Winchell, Constance
Mabel (IB96~\9^)" In Supplement to theDic-
tionary of American Library Biography, edited
by Wayne E. Wiegand, 163-65. Englewood,
CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1990.
"Sheehy, Eugene."^L4 Yearbook! (1978): 66-67.
Tolley, C. W, Review of Guide to Reference Books,
7th ed., by Constance M. Winchell. New Zealand
Libraries 16 (April, 1953): 66-68
Waddell, JohnN., and Laurel A. Grotzinger. "Mudge,
Isadore Gilbert ( 1 875-1 957)." InDictionary of
American Library Biography, edited by Bohdan
S. Wynar, 377-79. Littleton, CO: Libraries
Unlimited, 1978.
"Winchell, Constance M[abel]." Current Biography
(1967): 465-68.
Wynar, Bohdan S. Review of Guide to Reference
Books, 9th ed., by Eugene P. Sheehy. American
Reference Books Annual % (1978): p. 3-7.
NOTES
! Robert Balay, Editor, Guide to Reference Books, Tenth
Edition: Supplement, and Eugene Sheehy, (retired)
Head, Reference Department, Columbia Univer-
sity Libraries, telephone interviews with the author,
April 1990.
2 Sheehy, interview with the author, April 1990.
3 Balay and Sheehy interviews with the author, April
1990; and Robert G. Michaelson, Head Librarian,
Seeley G. Mudd Library for Science and Engineer-
ing, Northwestern University, personal interview
with the author, April 1990.
4 Asked by the author if he would do it again, Mr. Sheehy
replied that he suspects he would, even given the
"agony" that occasionally went with it.
'Figures obtained from a telephone interview (March
1991) with Robert Herschman, Manager, Sales &
Operations, ALA Publishing.
*The author thanks Eugene Sheehy for suggesting this
fact, one that does not come naturally to a member
of the post- World War II generation.
7 Several reviews of the ninth edition make this point.
Charles Bunge, writing in his "Current Reference
Books" column (Wilson Library Bulletin 5 1 [Janu-
ary 1977]; 442), noted that "because of the neces-
sary time lag in publishing such a large work . . . this
fine guide will need to be supplemented in day-to-
day reference work by other specialized guides and
by the librarian's own strategies for staying cur-
rent." The review in Choice 14 (June 1977); 516
observed that "The work was nearly two years in
production, and the lists are already three years out
of date." See also Bohdan S. Wynar' s review of the
ninth edition, American Reference Books Annual 8
(1977): 3-7. The tenth edition received somewhat
GUIDE JO REFERENCE BOOKS 1 37
better marks for currency, See, for example, Joan
Jensen and others' review in Choice 24 (May
1987): 1361-64, and Bohdan S. Wynar's review in
American Reference Books Annual 18 (1987): 8-9.
8 In Eugene Sheehy's conversation wilh the author, Mr.
Sheehy spoke of the "all-consuming" nature of the
task of editing the Guide, mentioning how he some-
times felt almost guilty if he took an evening stroll
after dinner instead of resuming work.
* Constance M. Winchell, "Preface," Guide to Reference
Books, 7th ed. (Chicago: American Library Asso-
ciation, 1951), v-vi.
10 Isadore Gilbert Mudge, "Preface," Guide to Reference
Books, 6th ed. (Chicago: American Library Asso-
ciation, 1936), iii.
1 ' Eugene Sheehy, "Preface," Guide to Reference Books,
10th ed. (Chicago: American Library Association,
1986), ix.
12 Michaelson and Sheehy, interviews with the author,
April 1990.
13 Winchell, "Preface," v-vi. Sheehy states that he was
invited to attend several meetings about the Guide
organized by ALA Publishing at various ALA
conferences that considered a variety of topics. He
cannotclearly recall any particuiartopics discussed
but is certain that none of the groups continued on
a regular basis.
14 For examples, see C. W. Tolley, review of Guide to
Reference fioofa,7thed., by ConstanceM. Winchell,
New Zealand Libraries 16 (April 1953): 66-68 and
Bohdan S. Wynar, review of Guide to Reference
Books, 9th ed., by Eugene P, Sheehy, American
Reference Books Annual 8 (1978): p. 3-7.
" Bill Katz, review of Guide to Reference Books, 9th ed.,
by Eugene P. Sheehy, Journal of Academic
Librarianship 3 (March 1977): 37-38.
16 Ibid. The preface to the seventh edition indicates that
an advisory committce{withmernbers from. outside
of the Columbia University libraries) reviewed
parts of the work. The preface to the eighth edition
identifies members of an advisory committee and
special mention is made of the work on the science
sections by the staff at the University of Wisconsin
libraries. The number of other libraries involved
has increased in each of the two subsequent edi-
tions.
" W.B. Ready, review of Guide to Reference Books, 7th
ed., by Constance M. Winchell, Library Quarterly
23 (January 1953): 64,
18 Harold Russell, review of Guide to Reference Books,
Seventh Edition, by Constance M. Winchell, in
College and Research Libraries 13 (July 1952):
274.
19 Review of Guide to Reference Books, Seventh Edition,
by Constance M. Winchell, in Library Journal 77
(March 1, 1952): 419.
20 Robert Herschman of ALA Publishing reported total
number of copies sold for the last four editions as
follows: Seventh edition (1951) 40,149; Eighth
edition(1967)51,597>Ninthedition(1976) 24,030;
Tenth edition (1986) 1 1,796. He believes the drop
between the eighth and ninth editions is explained
by the abandonment of the Guide as a textbook in
reference classes. Herschman, interview with the
author,
21 Art Plotnik, "From Winchell's 8th to Sheehy's 9th,"
American Libraries 8 (March 1977): 132.
22 Robert Balay, "Guide to Reference Books," Choice 27
(November 1989): 433.
"Balay, interview with the author, April 1990.
24 Sheehy, interview with the author, April 1990.
r*r2Hrs-
h. IS
"Unbeatable": The Guinness Book
of Records
Christine C. Whittington
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
The idea for publishing the record book that
the New York Times once called "a wacky
collection of superlatives" 1 originated with an
argument among sportsmen hunting ducks
and geese in the autumn of 195 1 near Wexford,
in the southeast tip of the Irish Coast, After his
shot at a golden plover missed its mark, Sir
Hugh Beaver, managing director of the Anglo-
Irish brewery Arthur Guinness, Son and Com-
pany, Ltd., debated with his companions
whether the golden plover was the fastest
game bird in Europe. Sir Hugh consulted
various encyclopedias and other reference
sources, discovering that none provided infor-
mation about records and extremes that would
prove him correct He was surprised that such
a source did not exist and felt that a book like
this would be useful for settling bets and
arguments, especially those taking place in
pubs or bars where Guinness's famous lager
and stout were consumed. Several years later,
thinking that it might be a good business
undertaking for Guinness to publish a book
that would be popular in pubs, Sir Hugh asked
Guinness executive Christopher Chataway,
holder of the world 5000-meter track record,
if he knew of anyone who would be able to
compile a book of superlatives. Chataway
recommended his friends from Oxford, the
twins Norris and Ross McWhirter, "a pair of
track fanatics," and owners of a fact-finding
enterprise, 2
The McWhirter Brothers
The McWhirters were born in London, 20
minutes apart, on August 12, 1925. Their
father was the editor of three national newspa-
pers — the Sunday Pictorial, Daily Mail, and
Sunday Dispatch — and eventually became the
managing director of Associated Newspa-
pers. 3 The twins grew up in a home full of
reference books "devoted to the establishment
of facts." 4 According to J. A. Maxtone
Graham's article in Sports Illustrated, the
young McWhirter twins asked so many ques-
tions that their mother complained to their
father, who advised her to "tell them to look it
up for themselves." 5 They kept a file of news-
paper clippings containing unusual informa-
tion, including lists of the largest buildings,
and memorized every important date in Brit-
ish history, the names of every river, mountain
range, and nation's capital. 6 They insisted
upon checking everything they were told
against reference books, causing their teach-
ers to call them the "McWhitakers" 7 in refer-
ence to the famous British almanac.
The McWhirters were already supplying
information on extraordinary record-setters
and unusual topics when Sir Hugh Beaver
began to search for someone to write a book of
superlatives. After study at Oxford and war-
time service with the Royal Navy, the
McWhirters returned to London in 1 95 1 , where
they set up and registered McWhirter Twins,
Ltd., a "press and periodicals features ser-
GUINNESS BOOK OF RECORDS 1 39
vice" for supplying facts and figures to news-
papers, publishers, and advertisers. 8 The
McWhirters were also involved in
sports writing and sportscasting. Norris
McWhirter was commenting on an Iffley Road,
Oxford, track meet for the BBC and Ross was
reporting for the Star on May 6, 1954, when
their friend Roger Bannister broke the four-
minute mile. 9
On September 12, 1954, the McWhirters
attended a lunch with Sir Hugh Beaver and
other Guinness executives to discuss Beaver' s
plan to publish a book of superlatives. The
Guinness representatives quizzed the
McWhirters about records, including those
for the longest river that has ever frozen and
the longest time a human squatted on top of a
pole. 10 When Norris revealed that he knew
that the Turkish language had only one irregu-
lar verb, not because he knew Turkish but
because he had made an effort to discover
which language had the fewest, Sir Hugh
Beaver "seemed to decide that he had discov-
ered people with the right kind of quirkish
mind for producing the book."' l It was agreed
that the McWhirters would write it and that
Guinness Superlatives, Inc., a Guinness sub-
sidiary, would publish it. 12
From an office at 107 Fleet Street, the
McWhirters began the enormous task of com-
piling a collection of superlatives, "extracting
the 'ests' (highest, lowest, smallest, oldest,
fastest, heaviest, etc.) from the 'ists' (ichthy-
ologists, paleontologists, dendrochronologists,
etc.)" 13 They wrote thousands of letters to
governments officials, university professors,
various experts, museums, and libraries in 11
countries. 14 The twins compiled entries as
they received responses to their queries and
arranged for the printing and binding of the
book. The first printing of 5 0,000 copies of the
Guinness Book of Records was finished on
August 27, 1955. 15 The book contained 198
pages, cost $35,000 to publish, and sold for
about 75 cents. 16 Its green cover was em-
bossed with the Guinness trademark, a gold
Brian Boru harp. It contained a foreword by
Guinness chairman Rupert Guinness, the Earl
of Iveagh, introducing the book as a tool for
settling arguments. Among the 96 agencies,
businesses, and organizations listed in the
acknowledgments are the British Speleologi-
cal Association, the United States Coast Guard,
and the Embassy of Japan. The McWhirters
were not listed by name but identified only
anonymously as "the compilers."
The First Edition
The book contained sections on the hu-
man being, the animal kingdom, the natural
world, the universe, the scientific world, the
human world, the business world, the world's
structures, the mechanical world, accidents
and disasters, human achievements, and sport.
Each chapter was further divided. For ex-
ample, the chapter on the human being in-
cluded sections on dimensions, longevity,
reproductivity, and physiology. The longest
chapter was that on sports, including records
for more than 60 activities. Each section in-
cluded individual records. For example, the
section on dogs included entries for age, larg-
est litter, highestprice, mostpopular, andmost
dogs in a single team. Superlatives included
"earliest," "tallest," "shortest," "heaviest,"
"thinnest," "oldest," "largest," "smallest,"
"most," "lowest," "highest," "rarest," plus
other less common "-ests" such as "busiest"
(junction), "remotest" (island), "bloodiest"
(assize), and "brightest" (planet). The book
included black and white photographs and an
index. For many categories, world records
were listed first, followed by those for En-
gland, Wales, Scotland, and Ireland. For ex-
ample, the chapter on the world's structures
includes entries for the Great Britain's tallest
structure (the General Post Office radio masts
near Rugby) as well as the world's (the televi-
sion transmitting tower of station KWTV in
Oklahoma City). Many of the world records
included in the Guinness Book of Records
were American, including the largest mail
order house (Sears Roebuck), the fastest sell-
140 DISTINGUISHED CLASSfCS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
£*]
ingrecording ("The Ballad of Davy Crockett"),
the largest insurance company (Metropolitan
Life), the country with greatest number of
telephones (the United States, with 50 mil-
lion), and the most expensive hotel
(Fountainebleu, Miami Beach).
Within four months, the Guinness Bookof
Records was the bestselling book in England,
with approximately 187,000 copies sold. The
McWhirters each earned about $10,000 in
royalties from the sale of the book. 17
A second, enlarged edition of the Guinness
Book of Records was published in England in
1956. This edition contained more photo-
graphs, new material from the United States
and the Soviet Union, which the McWhirters
had visited, and new records. The tallest tree
in the British Isles, for example, had grown
eight feet, six inches since last measured, and
73 new records were added to track and field
athletics. 18 Other records changed as a result
of technological advances, such as new mea-
surements for the deepest Atlantic sounding,
the diameter of the Earth, and the speed of
light, 19
First American Edition
An American edition of 50,000 copies
was produced in 1956, entitled The Guinness
Book of Superlatives . Although the book in-
cluded the same categories as the British edi-
tion, the content was adjusted to appeal to the
American audience. The 1956 British edition
contained records for fox hunting, snooker,
polo, public houses, the largest and fastest
British motorcycles, a lengthy section on
cricket, and the London Stock Exchange. The
American edition of the same year contained
much longer sections on baseball, basketball,
and American football, and entries for harness
racing, rodeo, ranches, and grain elevators,
none of which were included in the British
edition.
At first, the Guinness Book of Superla-
tives did not sell rapidly and distribution was
not well organized. Then, a copy of this Ameri-
can edition on the shelves of the De Wolfe and
Fiske bookstore in Boston drew the attention
of David Boehm. Boehm had founded Ster-
ling Books in 1949 with six titles, mostly how-
to books. Intrigued by the book, Boehm of-
fered to take over the distribution of the 32,000
copies remaining to be sold in the United
States. Sterling re-titled the American edition
the Guinness Book of World Records, pack-
aged it with a new cover, and spent four years
selling the excess copies. In 1 960, Boehm and
Norris McWhirter agreed that Sterling would
produce a paperback version of the book i n the
United States with only world, not national,
records, using proofs of the British edition.
The success of the paperback version in Ameri-
can bookstores and the requests of bookstore
owners convinced Sterling to publish a hard-
cover edition in 1961. In that year, Sterling
sold paperback rights to Bantam Books. Until
1 973, the book was not published annually in
the United States as it was in Great Britain, but
only as supplies were exhausted. 20
Enduring Popularity
Thirty-five years after it was first pub-
lished, the Guinness Book of Records contin-
ues to be immensely popular. In December
1974, it became the fastest selling nonaction
book in history, excluding versions of the
Bible. It surpassed Dr. Benjamin Spock'sifa^y
and Child Care to reach total sales of 24
million and achieve its own record in the book.
Hardcover sales have averaged 100,000 cop-
ies per year and paperback sales two to three
million per year; an additional 250,000 to
400,000 are sold per year through premium
sales. 21 By October 1989, 61 million copies
had been sold in 262 editions in 35 languages,
including Icelandic, Tamil, Malayalam, and
Telugu. 22 Arrangements for compiling the first
Russian edition were completed in 1989. 23
Sales of the Finnish and Serbo-Croatian edi-
tions have been credited with boosting the
sales to the record. 24 In his introduction to the
1990 edition, Benjamin Guinness points out
GUINNESS BOOK OF RECORDS 141
that the book was "No. 1 on the best sellers list
. . . every year except 1957 and 1959, when it
was not published, and that the global sales to
date would equal 171 stacks, each as high as
Mount Everest." 25
There have been many attempts to ex-
plain the fascination Guinness holds for its
readers. McWhirter believes that "People are
fascinated by extremes. People crave delinea-
tion and points of reference. It's a matter of
orientation, but it's also part of the natural
competitiveness that most of us have." 26 The
United States provides the largest market for
Guinness. In an interview with Digby Diehl
for the Los Angeles Times, Ross McWhirter
stated that "This curious American dedication
to the fact, as well as your competitive spirit,
your betting sense, seems to account for our
book's popularity," but added that worldwide
commitment to literacy has aided expansion
of the market for paperback books, including
the paperback version of Guinness. 2 '' Promo-
tions and product licensing, including "Oddball
Olympics" in various cities, seven Guinness
World Records exhibition halls, a comic strip,
greeting cards, t-shirts, and television shows
have increased the book's exposure. 18 Fund-
raising events have attracted attention and
publicity through attempts to break records
listed in Guinness.
Guinness has also increased its exposure
through the numerous spinoffs that have been
published under its name. Many of these ex-
pand upon the numerous sports records found
in the parent book. These include The Guinness
Book of World Championship Boxing (Lon-
don: Guinness Superlatives, 1990); The
Guinness Book of Olympic Records: 1988
(New York: Bantam, 1988); and the annual
Guinness Sports Record Book (New York:
Sterling, 1972-1990; New York: Facts On
File, 199 1- ). Other spinoffs appeal to teenag-
ers, young adults, and trivia fans who also
enjoy the parent book. These include titles in
the Guinness Oddfax Series such as The
Guinness Book of Almost Everything You
Didn 7 Need to Know About Dogs (London:
Guinness Superlatives, 1987) and The
Guinness Book of Almost Everything You
Didn 't Need to Know About the Movies (Lon-
don: Guinness Superlatives, 1987).
Critical Reception
Reviewers have mentioned the book's
use of "deadpan humor," "arcane erudition,"
and "air of indisputable authority." 29 In a
single sentence, another reviewer noted both
the book's "useless information" and its abil-
ity to "captivate all ages." 30 Curiosity about
the grotesque no doubt plays a role. One
reviewer wrote that the book offered a "chance
to peep behind the curtain concealing life's
freak show" to find gruesome records for
obesity, gluttony, deformity, and inhuman-
ity. 31 Most reviewers, even one who surmised
that "the Guinness Book of World Records
includes more useless information than any
other book in the world," 12 cannot resist listing
the records they find most fascinating. The
Village Voice gave Guinness a one word re-
view: "Unbeatable." 33
Types of Records
Teachers have found that the Guinness
Book of World Records can be used to tempt
children and young adults to read. 34 School
classes and other children's groups have turned
breaking a "Guinness record" into a learning
experience. A fifth grade class researched and
measured the 201-foot Roe River in Montana
and submitted evidence that earned it a place
in the 1 989 Guinness as holding the record for
the world's shortest river. 35
While most records included in earlier
editions of the book were for naturally occur-
ring phenomena (the fastest snake); athletic
(most lawn bowling titles); or unintentional
(the youngest vice president); many of the
records in the more recent editions reflect an
activity J. Kirshenbaum has dubbed
"Guinnessport." 36 The book's popularity has
resulted in campaigns all over the world, ex-
142 DISTINGUISHED CLAS SICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
treme in themselves, to set new "Guinness
records" or "get into Guinness." Norris
McWhirterbelieves that because "Americans
have such a high level of achievement. The
underachievcrs are driven into zanier out-
lets." 37 Perusing newspaper and periodical
indexes turns up many accounts of record-
breaking activities such as eating a tree, 38
catching in one's mouth a grape dropped from
a 60-story building, 39 making the world's long-
est pasta nood le, 40 or stacking bowling balls. 41
Individuals have attempted not only to break
records in order to have them listed in the
book, buthave attempted to achieve the record
for holding the most "Guinness" records.
Ashrita Furman of New York City holds the
record for the most records in diverse catego-
ries/ 2 including squats done in one hour, skip
running, and pogo stick jumping in the Ama-
zon River. Peter Dowdeswell of London holds
many eating records, including those for raw
eggs (13 in one second), eels (1,300 in 13.7
seconds), and sushi (1.5 pounds in 1 minute,
13.5 seconds). South Korea is attempting to
achieve the mostrecords in the GuinnessBook
of Records, hoping by the mid-1990s to sur-
pass the30percentheldby Americans. Records
already held by South Korea include those for
shipbuilding, the largest drydock, and the most
sets of twins within a single community. 43
In response to the popularity of record-
setting, each edition of the book includes
guidelines for determining whether an activ-
ity will be considered a record, rules and
procedures, and documentation and verifica-
tion. The guidelines state that thebook is likely
to publish "only those records which improve
upon previously published records or which
are newly significant in having become the
subject of widespread and, preferably, world-
wide competition.'"' 4 Hence one wonders why
pogo stick jumping in the Amazon river, mak-
ing a jumpsuit out of pennies, or catching
grapes in the mouth from greatheights qualify.
The book no longer publishes any records in
the "gratuitously hazardous categories, such
as the lowest starting height for a handcuffed,
free-fall parachute jump" 45 or new records for
other "extremely inadvisable" activities, such
as those for sword swallowing 46 or "glut-
tony." 47
Guinness Book of World Records has a
reputation for excluding morally questionable
records. Robert Lacey in the London's Sun-
day Times Magazine noted that the Guinness
Book of Records included records for the
oldest and most prolific mothers, but not the
youngest mothers, unwed mothers, or abor-
tions, 48 while Peter Buckman in Punch found
Ripley's Believe It or Not (described by Norris
McWhirter as "cynical, successful, and thor-
oughly unreliable") 49 a better source of infor-
mation on sexual feats, 50 and a reviewer for the
Listener noted that "sex scarcely enters the
Guinness Book of Records " i{
Format and Organization
The purpose and format of the Guinness
Book of Records, if not the records them-
selves, remain similar to that of the early
editions. Like the first edition, the 1990 edi-
tion began with an introduction by the Earl of
Iveagh, President of Arthur Guinness & Sons.
In his foreword to the first American edition,
Rupert Guinness, the current Earl of Iveagh,
defined the purpose of the book, adapted for
the American audience:
Wherever people congregate to talk, they will
argue, and sometimes the joy lies in the argu-
ing and would be lost if there were any definite
answer. But more often the argument takes
place on a dispute of fact, and it can be very
exasperating if there is no immediate means of
settling the discussion. Who was the tallest
President? Who is the richest man and the
most married woman? Where is the highest
point in our state? How many died in the
world's worst earthquake? Who hit the long-
est measured home run? Who holds the corn-
husking record? And sd on. How much heat
these innocent questions can raise! The House
of Guinness in producing this book hopes that
it may assist in resolving many such disputes
and may, we hope, turn heat into light. 52
In their preface, the McWhirters defined
the scope of the book as "... a collection of
GUINNESS BOOK OF RECORDS 143
facts — finite facts expressed in quantitative
terms predominantly those which by mea-
surement are superlative or are records in their
respective fields. The world's greatest man is,
for this book, the man with the greatest girth
rather than the man with the greatest intel-
lect." 53 The book continues to be divided into
sections similar to those of the early editions,
with sections on the arts and entertainment,
newly verified records, and sports games and
endurance marathons (e.g., playing Monopoly
for 600 hours) the only added categories. The
index of the American edition includes entries
for the superlatives themselves, e.g., "fast-
est," "longest," "earliest," followed by the
subject. About one quarter of the book's
records change each year. Obviously, many
records have changed because of technologi-
cal advances, such as the record for the fastest
aircraft. Also many athletic records, such as
those for speed skating or bicycle racing, were
set in recent years.
Ways to Use Guinness
In the library reference environment, the
Guinness Book of World Records can supply
information not easily available in any other
source. Sir Hugh Beaver was correct in his
assumption that there was no comprehensive
book of superlatives when he conceived his
idea for a record book, and no competitor has
been published since. It is easy to locate infor-
mation about museums in directories, for ex-
ample, but no other single source lists the
oldest museum (Ashmolean, Oxford), largest
single museum (American Museum of Natu-
ral History), or the most popular museum (the
Smithsonian's National Air and Space Mu-
seum). The charts included in recent editions
are especially useful for those who want infor-
mation in one place; for example, a chart in the
1 990 American edition entitled "Worst Acci-
dents and Disasters in the World" ranks by
number of deaths disasters resulting from
causes as diverse as the Black Death (75
million deaths); panic in an air raid shelter
(4,000 deaths); and the mass suicide at the
People's Temple in Jonestown, Guyana (913
deaths). Guinness is often used as a first step,
providing enough information about a ques-
tion to enable a librarian or library patron to
identify appropriate sources for further infor-
mation. For example, a person investigating
the popularity of motion pictures could use
Guinness to identify the films with the highest
box office gross, highest film rentals, the most
expensive film, the highest earnings by actors,
and the largest number of Academy Awards
before looking for information on the indi-
vidual films in sources devoted to film.
A New American Publisher, A New
American Title
Sterling Books' involvement with the
Guinness Book of World Records ended with
publication of the 1 990 edition. Beginning
with the 1 99 1 edition, the American edition of
Guinness has been published by Facts On File .
Facts On File is best known as the publisher of
the weekly news digest entitled Facts On File,
Facts On File has brought the American edi-
tion closer to the currentBritish edition in size,
format, and appearance. The book is larger (9"
x 12"), the photographs are larger and in color,
and the book contains color charts and other
graphics. Like the British edition, the new
American edition lists both world andnational
records for many categories, To reflect this
change, the title has officially been changed to
Guinness Book of Records* the same title used
for the British edition. Facts On File plans to
maintain strong editorial involvement and com-
munication with Guinness, Ltd., the publisher
of the British edition. Two editors are working
full time on the American edition — one for
Facts On File in New York and the other for
Guinness Ltd. in London. The Facts On File
editor, Mark Young, is responsible for "Ameri-
canizing" Guinness. He tracks down records
in much the same way the McWhirters did for
the first edition. He screens numerous letters
(including one containing a cockroach that
m
if
144 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
fell short of the record length) and telephone
calls (Facts On File has installed a separate
telephone line and answering machine for this
purpose); consults other reference sources;
and has tapped into networks of experts. Un-
like the McWhirters as they compiled the first
edition, Young uses computer files to keep
track of Tecords and update information.
Donald McFarlan is the present editor of the
British Guinness Book of Records, Norris
McWhirter maintains his involvement with
the book he created by serving as editorial
adviser. Ross McWhirter, who participated
actively in conservative politics and litigation,
was shot to death at his home onNovember 27,
1975. Fifteen months later, Irish Republican
Army members were convicted for his mur-
der. 54
Facts On File has enhanced the reference
quality of the Guinness Book of Records by
increasing the number of substantive records
and weeding out those of less interest while
maintaining many of those that appeal to ca-
sual readers, especially children and adoles-
cents. To correspond to this more authorita-
tive approach, copies of the book are not to be
offered at discount prices. The Facts On File
editions will retain the introductory material
regarding rules and verification for record-
setting; acceptance of records will be deter-
mined by the editors. A mass market paper-
back edition will continue to be produced by
Bantam, using material purchased from Facts
on File, but with black and white photographs ."
A CD-ROM, the Guinness Disc of
Records, has been produced by Pergamon
Compact Solution of London. It contains ani-
mation and music as well as photographs and
text. Each word is searchable, so a user can
retrieve all the records set by a particular
person or find out why the Mississippi Queen
is famous.
The Guinness Book of Records is not only
one of the best selling books in the world, but
a reference source that is indeed "unbeatable"
for finding superlatives throughout the years.
It is up to Facts On File to set the future
direction for the American edition. If the com-
pany continues to increase the book's visual
appeal and to enrich its authority while still
retaining enough trivia records to attract ca-
sual readers, the recently retitled Guinness
Book of Records should become an even more
effective reference tool.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Guinness Book of World Records, 1956-1990. An-
nual. Published irregularly in the United States
until 1973 (1st ed., 1956, 2nd ed., 1961, etc.)
First edition entitled The Guinness Book of
Superlatives. Issued as Guinness Book of
Records, 199 1-. Annual. Also issued in a Brit-
ish edition, Guinness Book of Records 1955—
Annual.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
There has been no comprehensive, schol-
arly investigation into the origin, develop-
ment, influence, or social impact of the
Guinness Book of World Records. The most
detailed information about its genesis appears
inNorris McWhirter >s biography of his brother,
Ross: The Story of a Shared Life. This book
also addresses the twins' personal and profes-
sional lives apart from their involvement with
Guinness. Guinness: The Stories Behind the
Records devotes more space than the Guinness
Book of Records can to some of the more
interesting record-setters, including a female
powerlifting champion and the 1980 eruption
of Mt. St. Helens (largest volcanic eruption in
U.S. history). It also contains brief chapters
entitled "How Guinness Came to America,"
the latter written by Sterling editor David
Boehm, The book also includes a section of
some of the stranger letters sent to Guinness
("Dear Guinness: I believe I have the longest
eyelash in the world . . ."). Reference librar-
ians may find it most useful for its section on
"Answers to Some Commonly Asked Ques-
GUINNESS BOOK OF RECORDS 145
tions " ("What are the rules for rest breaks?"),
Each edition of the Guinness contains the most
recent information on categories, rules and
procedures, documentation and verification,
and revision, and should be consulted by po-
tential record-breakers. Readers seeking brief,
entertaining introductions to the origin and
development of Guinness will enjoy the two
articles \n Sports Illustrated, The biographical
sources provide summaries of theMcWhirters'
lives. Maria Simson's article in Publishers
Weekly covers the current editorial and publi-
cation status of The Guinness Book of World
Records.
Graham, J. A. Maxtone. "Here is the Odd Paradise of
the Record Maniac." Sports Illustrated 22 (Feb-
ruarys, 1965): 54-62.
Kirshenbaum, Jerry. "There's Music in the Where?"
Sports Illustrated 51 (My 30, 1979); 56-70.
Lacey, Robert. "Superlatives, Ltd." Sunday Times
Magazine (London), January 16, 1972, pp. 22-
27.
McWhirter, Norris [Dewar] . "Facts and How to Find
Them" [text of an address given to the Society
of Indexers]. Inducer 12 (April 1981): 125-27.
. Ross: The Story of a Shared Life, London:
Churchill Press, Ltd., 1976.
McWhirter, Norris [Dewar] et al. Guinness: The
Stories Behind the Records. New York: Ster-
ling, 1981.
"McWhirter, Norris [Dewar]," Current Biography
Yearbook (1979), 247^50.
"McWhirter, Norris [Dewar]," Contemporary Au-
thors 13 (1965), s.v.
"McWhirter, Ross," Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy, 1971-80 supplement, s.v.
Simson, Maria. "Guinness Goes to Facts on File
After 30 Years at Sterling." Publishers Weekly
237 (February 16, 1990): 49-50.
NOTES
1 Robert Lasson, review of Guinness Book of World
Records, 11th ed,, 1973, New York Times Book
Review, 29 April 1973, p. 22.
2 J.A. Maxtone Graham, "Here is the Odd Paradise of the
Record Maniac," Sports Illustrated 22 (8 February
1965): 56. The story of the idea for the Guinness
Book of Records originating with Sir Hugh Beaver's
hunting party has appeared, with some variation, in
Norris [Dewar] McWhirter, Ross: The Story of a
Shared Life (London: Churchill Press, 1976), 141-
44;Norris [Dewar] McWhirterand others, Guinness:
The Stories Behind the Records (New York: Ster-
ling, 1981), 113; Jerry Kirshenbaum, "There's
Music in the Where?" Sports illustrated 5 1 (30 July
1 979): 66; Robert Lacey, "Superlatives, Ltd.," Sun-
day Times Magazine (London), 16 January 1972,
27; Christopher Booker, "The Speed of a Golden
Plover," Spectator 250 (1 9 February 1983): 1 9.
3 Lacey, 27.
A Norris [Dewar] McWhirter, "Facts and How to Find
Them," [text of the address given to the Society of
Indexers, 11 July 1980], Indexer 12 (April 1981):
127.
5 Graham, 56.
* McWhirter and others, 1 12.
7 Lacey, 27; McWhirter, 21.
8 McWhirter, 101.
9 Kenny Moore, "4 Minutes and 20 Years," Sports
Illustrated Al (15 July 1974): 64; McWhirter, 128—
44.
10 McWhirter, 143; McWhirter and others, 1 13.
" Ibid.
12 Graham, 57; McWhirter, 149.
13 McWhirter and others, 114.
14 Graham, 57.
15 McWhirter and others, 1 14.
16 Graham, 57; McWhirter and others, 1 14.
17 Graham, 57-58.
18 Guinness Book of World Records, 2nd ed. (London:
Guinness Superlatives, Ltd., 1956), 4.
19 Ibid.
20 See David Boehm's chapter entitled "Guinness Comes
to America," in Norris McWhirter and others,
Guinness: The Stories Behind the Records, 1 14—17.
The American Guinness edition was published in
October 1956. Sterling editions were published in
October I960, April 1962, September 1963, Octo-
ber 1 965 , June 1 966, March 1968, September 1 969,
May 1970, April 1971, November 1972, and annu-
ally since October 1 973. Bantam paperback edi-
tions were published in October 1963, April 1964,
June 1966,March 1968, May 1970, April 1971, and
annually since March 1973,
21 Maria Simson, "Guinness Goes to Facts on File after 30
Years at Sterling," Publishers Weekly 237 (16
February 1990): 43.
22 Benj amin Guinness, Earl of Iveagh, "The Story Behind
the Guinness Book" in Guinness Book of World
Records (New York: Bantam Books, 1990), vii.
23 Ibid.
2 * Digby Diehl, "McWhirters: Matter-of-Fact Twins,"
Los AngehsTimes, 9 December 1974, sec. 4, 1.
25 Guinness, vii.
26 Kirshenbaum, 59.
27 Diehl, sec 4, 1.
28 N. R. Kleinfield, "Guinness Pace: A Record?" New
York Times, 14 June 1980, 29; Kirshenbaum, 60.
39 Peter Buckman, "The Biggest, the Fastest, the Most
Fatuous," Punch 271 (17 November 1976): 942-
43.
146 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
30 Elizabeth Minot Graves, "Children's Books: A Se-
lected List," Commonweal 93 (November 1970):
207.
51 Laurence Ulster, "The Bore's Bible" Listener 118 (17
December 1987): 51.
32 Guernsey Le Pelley, "Chandelier Munching," Chris-
tian Science Monitor, 8 November 1988, 13,
3J Review of Guinness Book of World Records, 13th ed.
1975, Village Voice 20 (15 September 1975): 52.
The Koiceagain called Guinness "unbeatable" three
months later. Village Voice 20 (22 December 1975):
59.
34 Karin Agosta, "For Reinforcing Basic Skills, There's
No Place Like Home," Instructor 9 1 (November
1981): 80; Review of Review of Guinness Book of
World Records, 9th ed. 1970 Grade Teacher 89
(September 1971) 15 7; review aiReviewof Guinness
Book of World Records, 10th ed., 1971, Library
Journal^ (1 5 May 1 97 1): 1 834; review of Review
of Guinness Book of World Records, I2thed., 1974,
Library Journal 98 (15 December 1973): 3730.
35 "5th Graders Zap Town's Claim to World's Shortest
River," Chicago Tribune, 1 3 August 1988, sec. I, p.
4.
1S Kirshenbaum, 68.
31 Ibid.
31 Le Pelley, 13,
3> '*Arlington Man Raisin' Record for Catching Grapes in
His Mouth," Boston Globe, 4 September 1988, p.
23.
40 "Pasta Heights," Chicago Tribune, 5 October 1989,
sec, 7, p. 5.
4 ' "For David Kremer, Stacked Bowling Balls Are Right
Up His Alley," People Weekly 30 (18 July 1988):
91,
«"Not Explainable," New Yorker65 (27 February 1989):
25,
■^"Just fortheRecord: South Korea'sMakingltsMove,"
Boston Globe, 7 July 1989, p, 2.
44 Guinness Book of World Records (New York: Ban-
tam, 1990), viii.
« 5 Ibid.
46 Ibid., 30.
" ? Ibid., 463.
48 Lacey, 27.
49 McWhirter, "Facts and How to Find Them," 127.
so Buckman, 942.
5 ' E. S. Turner, "Cod and Blod," Listener 84 (26 Novem-
ber 1970): 747. Kirshenbaum, 64, notes that the
editors rule out gore, sexual feats, and stunts deemed
unseemly.
" Rupert Guinness, Earl of Iveagh, foreword to Guinness
Book of World Records (New York: Superlatives,
Inc., 1956), iii.
53 "Preface" to Guinness Book of World Records (New
York: Superlatives, Inc., 1956), v.
M rCirshenbaurn, 67,
55 Simson, 49-50; Rachel Ginsberg and Gerard Helferich.
of Facts On File, conversation with the author, 9
May 1990.
A Household Word for Four
Generations: Moody's
Elizabeth J. Wood
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Now comprised of eight separate manuals
providing annual in-depth coverage of com-
panies and other entities whose stock and/or
bonds are available for public investment, the
Moody's manuals started nearly a century ago
in 1900 with a single volume entitled The
Manual of Industrial and Miscellaneous Cor-
poration Securities. After each day's work as
a statistician in the banking firm of Spenser
Trask, John Moody produced his manual at
home with the help of a single assistant editor/
compiler and John's wife, Anna, as typist.
Financing for the venture was a crazy quilt of
advertising revenues, money borrowed from
two friends, and promises of deferred billing
from the printer. Although eager for a better
income and more influence on Wall Street,
Moody was not motivated solely by self-
interest. His autobiography portrays a family
at the mercy of the father's flyers on the stock
market, moving annually to a drab, cramped
rented house during bad times or to rather
grand (albeit temporary) premises when for-
tune smiled — ample motivation for a life's
work of providing timely, uniform, reliable
information for investors. A bright, venture-
some lad, John had to leave school at the age
of 15 to begin contributing to the family's
income. Eventually achieving popularity as a
writer of financial and autobiographical books
as well as prominence in publishing annual
financial manuals, he educated himself by dint
of voracious reading on self-selected topics
and a loosely structured home-study course in
accordance with Chautauqua guidelines. Yarn-
ing about his first job, Moody remembered the
irony of his boss's comment at discovering
that John was lending money on company
premises at exorbitant rates: "You belong in
Wall Street, you do." 1
Henry Varnum Poor
There could hardly have been a greater
contrast to Moody 's background than the situ-
ation of Henry Varnum Poor, founder of
Moody's chief competitor in financial and
investment publishing. A lawyer, Poor was
editor of theAmerican Railroa d Jo urnal when
he started the first of a projected three-volume
set that became the progenitor of Poor's
Manual. In an era when big business was king
in this country, Henry Poor was the lone
advocate of disclosure of company financial
and operating information by railroads offer-
ing their stock and bonds for public sale. To
compile this manual, Poor wrung information
from reluctant companies by virtue of his
influence as editor of the leading trade jour-
nal — goodwill and tact by themselves having
failed with a number of firms. By 1 860 he had
gleaned enough information to publish/! His-
tory of the Railroads and Canals of the United
States (New York: J.H. Schultz, 1860), a 200-
page book providing operating and financial
statistics about more than 120 railroad and
148 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
canal companies. Although the other two vol-
umes never were written, the first is now
regarded as the "grandfather of all investment
publications." 2
In 1 868 (the year John Moody was born),
Poor andhis son Henry WilliamPoorresumed
publishing after a hiatus caused by the Civil
War, this time calling the work The Manual of
the Railroads of the United States (New York:
H.V. andH.W. Poor, 1868), Lacking either an
industry tradition or a legal requirement for
uniform reporting of railway statistics, data
was not comparable across companies. Be-
fore the Interstate Commerce Act of 1887,
railway regulation was the province of state
governments, and the only common operating
principle was "practically unrestricted com-
petition," 3 Undeniably the Manual of the Rail-
roads of the United States reflected this flaw.
But like Poor's earlier work, in all other re-
spects it was a godsend to the hapless indi-
vidual investor.
Poor's early manuals were a curious ad-
mixture of facts and advertising. For example,
the 1891 manual devoted 219 initial and con-
cluding pages as well as all four sides of the
front and back covers to advertising; sand-
wiched in between were directory informa-
tion and financial statistics. The scope was
eclectic, ranging from extensive coverage of
larger systems such as the Southern Pacific to
basic information aboutlinescovering asingle
town and environs or even a section of a town.
Besides the general index of companies, there
were separate listings for advertisers and vari-
ous railroad company officials, ranging from
president to such lower echelon positions as
assistant engineer or master mechanic. Stan-
dard elements of entries for prominent compa-
nies included a physical description of the
railroad (weight and gauge of track, miles of
track owned, etc.); a one-paragraph company
history; a description of equipment owned
("rolling stock"); a summary of activities both
in volume (tons of freight and number of
passengers) and in dollars; and the latest avail-
able statements of income, expense, financial
backing, and debts. Entries for smaller lines
included a bare-bones paragraph giving char-
ter date, officers, weight and gauge of rails,
carfare, date of annual meeting, and brief
description of outstanding debt.
Although Poor 's Manual continued to be
published through 1917, H.V. Poor's associa-
tion with it declined after his retirement in
1886 and ceased altogether with his death in
1905. Poor's son continued to publish an an-
nual directory of American railroad officials
and a handbook of investment securities until
1906 and 1893, respectively. However such
efforts presented no real obstacle to Moody's
entry into financial publishing. In his autobi-
ography and in A Fifty Year Review of Moody's
Investors Service (New York: Moody's In-
vestors Service, [1949]), a personal reminis-
cence about his early entrepreneurial activi-
ties, Moody credited a Wall Street Journal
editor with encouraging him to pursue the
venture that ultimately made the manuals a
household word. Clearly a large part of his
inspiration must also have come from the
founding father of financial publishing, Henry
V. Poor.
Moody's First Manual
Moody's first Manual of Industrial and
Miscellaneous Corporation Securities was a
modest volume of 1,086 pages listing only
1 ,800 companies (the majority of them newly
incorporated) along with some 200 domestic
and foreign bond issues. Described in a news-
paper article as "largely a directory/'Wooc/y 's
Manual in most respects represents an evolu-
tionary stage in financial publishing rather
than aradical departure fmmPoor 's; although
Moody's inclusion of industrial companies
together with the railroads and utilities cov-
ered by Poor was a real breakthrough. More-
over this first effort had the same sort of broad
coverage that is the hallmark of today's
Moody's manuals — including not only indus-
trial companies but also banks and financial
entities, and even U.S. and foreign govern-
MOODY'S MANUALS 149
ment securities, in addition to utilities and
railroads. The most complete company de-
scriptions included type of business, financial
condition of the firm, and a list of management
personnel. Less important companies were
accorded a cursory description. Coverage
spanned "practically all" securities traded on
the New York Stock Market; important com-
panies from Boston, Philadelphia, and Chi-
cago markets; and the larger companies from
St. Louis, Louisville, and Cincinnati. 5 The
collective capitalization (i.e., funds invested
in firms listed) amounted to over $9,325,000,
quite a sum for that time. Another harbinger of
things to come was a section devoted to laws
of incorporation in three eastern states and
West Virginia, material typically included in
either introductions or special features sec-
tions of later manuals. Despite subsequent
fulminations about advertisements jeopardiz-
ingthe objectivity of financial reports, in 1900
John Moody placed ads on the cover and on
the 16 pages preceding the manual's title
page. (In what Moody's Investor's Service
calls the "modern manuals" published from
1909 onward, a stronger financial position
allowed the company to drop this practice.) As
H. V . Poor had before him, Moody found data-
gathering difficult. The magnitude of the task
can be inferred from a statement in the preface
that except for the 5 percent returning mailed
questionnaires (some 100 companies), most
firms required a "house to house canvass" and
some took 12 to 15 visits before they re-
sponded, 6
The soul of honesty, Moody acknowl-
edged that the first manual "of necessity con-
tains both errors and omissions" while assert-
ing that in no other single publication was
"more than ten percent of the information
embraced in this volume" available. 7 How-
ever his early frankness was gradually diluted
by the increasingly litigious nature of Ameri-
can society. In 1915 the disciaimer-cum- de-
fense of the publication's value read: "we do
not guarantee the correctness of every figure,"
yet steadfastly maintained that it had "a much
smaller percentage of errors than any other
financial publication in existence." 8 In 1927
Moody wrote that, while the magnitude and
complexity of the compilation task precluded
guarantees of the "absolute accuracy of the
statements ... it is not likely that any serious
inaccuracies will be found" and promised in
subsequent editions to correct "any errors
brought to his attention." 9 In I960 evidently it
was dangerous to concede more than that
Moody's sources were reputable but not infal-
lible and that opinions expressed were inde-
pendent and unbiased. And by the 1970s the
standard disclaimer had become a note that
Moody's could not assume liability for cor-
rectness of reports, ratings, or data in the
manuals.
In the virtually total blackout of public
information regarding securities, investors ap-
parently greeted both Poor's and Moody's
early efforts with nearly unanimous approval.
The first editions of both titles were sold out
just months after being released. A
prepublication announcement for Moody's
first manual is purely descriptive, 10 but four
years later political science scholars would
express approbation of another Moody book,
The Truth About the Trusts (New York: Moody
Publishing, 1904). These scholars' reviews
are important because they bolstered the repu-
tation of his yearly manual considerably and
because one mentioned the manual as well as
the monograph. The first reviewer praised the
Truth About the Trusts for its "succinct analy-
ses of . . , elements of strength or weakness" of
the corporations, corroboratedMoody's claim
of providing "the most thorough and accurate
list of industrial trusts ever published in this
country," and proclaimed the data to be "of
the greatest interest and importance to every
student of the trust problem "' ' A second gentle-
man (albeit not totally uncritical of The Truth
About the Trusts) echoed students' gratitude
for the monograph and commented on the
Manual of Industrial and Miscellaneous Cor-
poration Securities saying that it had "within
the short space of four years come to fill a
useful place in the current literature regarding
corporations." 12
150 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Riding a tide of critical and financial
success with his publishing ventures and en-
joying huge success with his own extensive
investments, Moody suffered the loss of his
personal and professional fortunes with the
stock market downturn of 1907. After a short
while in receivership, the company reorga-
nized; and in 1908 the new Moody Manual
Company (forerunner of Standard <& Poor's
Corporation) published a manual with Louis
Holschuh (former treasurer of the old com-
pany and future president of Moody's Inves-
tors Service) as editor and with Roger W.
Babson (John Moody's competitor, founder
of a stock andbond statistical service dissemi-
nated on index cards) as owner. A third former
Moody's employee, George Hoskins, became
an editor with the new firm in 1909. From this
time until 1924 (when he bought back the
copyright) Moody was obliged to suffer his
name being onPoor' s publication. Roy Porter,
who bought the Moody Manual Company in
1914 and changed its name to Poor's Publish-
ing Company in 191 9 after buying the Poor's
Railroad Manual Company, cheerfully admit-
ted using both names on the manual cover
from 1915-1924 because of the "nuisance
value," 13 the chance to annoy John Moody.
(The cover title for the 1922 edition, for ex-
ample, was Poor 's and Moody 's Manual Con-
solidated.) Another practice that was prob-
ably salt in Moody's wounds was incorpora-
tion of one-inch ads — not in the front and end
matter- — but on the very page where a
company's securities were described and
evaluated, pulling in additional revenue to the
tune of $20,000 a year.
Because John Moody began publishing
his own manuals again in 1909, confusion
about which was the "real" Moody's manual
reigned for years. A 1911 New York Times
article announced the twelfth annual Moody 's
Manual which was, in fact, not John Moody's
manual, but the publication of his namesake
competitor. 14 In appearance and content, the
competing publication resembled early Poor' s
manuals much more than Moody's manuals.
In 1921, on the occasion of a Moody speech,
the same newspaper erroneously identified
him as the editor of the Moody's Manuals,
Moody requested and received a retraction of
the statement. 15 The stalemate was not to be
resolved until a lawsuit in 1924 resulted in an
out-of-court settlement wherein Moody re-
purchased copyright to the name "Moody's"
from Poor's Publishing Company. 16
Moody's Modern Manuals
The modernmanuals began withMoody's
1909 reentry into publishing financial manu-
als. Allegedly barred from engaging in such
activity by the terms of the 1907-1908 bank-
ruptcy and company reorganization,' 7 Moody
nevertheless came out with a new railroad
manual. As he later admitted, it covered "only
a portion of the American steam railroad field"
and lacked the "ordinary statistical facts found
in the old-style railroad manuals" 18 He nar-
rowly escaped being prevented from even this
modest venture. In 1937, Roy Porter remi-
nisced about the split vote of Moody Manual
Company officials in the early 1900s which
narrowly defeated a motion to convert a tem-
porary injunction against John Moody's re-
newed publishing activity into a permanent
one, 19
Moody's passion to excel in this field and
his bitterness at having lost his old company
are evident in introductory comments berat-
ing "the average imitator" who "like any other
robber of an idea, never permanently gets the
confidence of the public" despite, as Moody
saw it, having appropriated his ideas to "foist
them on the public as the genuine article." 20
On the same page he referred to "some publi-
cation which, because of its name or method
of promotion, conveys the false impression
that Mr. Moody is identified with it;" 21 and
having persuaded himself, he attempted to
convince thereaderthat*'Nootherpublication
of any financial character has any authority or
right to the use of Mr. John Moody's name,
MOODY'S MANUALS 1 5 1
either directly or indirectly." 22 Having been
sued for libel in a brief youthful fling at
newspaper publishing, he scrupulously
avoided naming names.
Careful not to use the term "manual* 1 in
the work's title, Moody further differentiated
Moody 's Analysis of Railroad Investments
from the old manuals by introducing a totally
new feature — a stock and bond rating system
similar to company credit ratings issued by
Dun & Bradstreet. (Like the founder of IBM,
throughout his career John Moody was more
the master of extending and refining a concept
with popular appeal than a brilliant innova-
tor.) Presenting his scale of ratings levels
(from Aaa to E) to assess investment risk in
terms of safety and resaleability of securities,
Moody cautioned, "It must not be forgotten
that arbitrary judgement is used to a large
degree;" and he counseled the reader to use the
ratings as indications of the security issue's
investment quality but not as "specific opin-
ion" or a "recommendation to buy." 23 Not
surprisingly, some of the companies rated —
none of which had even been obliged to pro-
vide the public with information a decade or
two earlier — balked at the assignment of rat-
ings. They were displeased. with the whole
idea and especially with the practice of rating
pessimistically in the absence of complete and
current information and giving the benefit of
the doubt to the investor. The reluctant compa-
nies raised "a storm of opposition, not to
mention ridicule," 24 according to Moody. In
contrast, a political scientist summed up what
probably was the predominant reaction out-
side the railroad industry: "The volume is
indeed of high merit. ... It will doubtless be
appreciated by both individual investors and
. . , others . . . interested in railroad values." 25
In 1914 Moody expanded the work's
scope by adding a second volume to cover
public utilities and industrials. Like previous
editions, Part I: Steam Railroads covered
Mexican and Canadian steam railroads as well
as U.S. lines; in 1915 Cuban companies were
added. Dissatisfied with just analyzing com-
panies' investment offerings, Moody used
this two-part 1914 edition to re-stake his claim
to providing accurate and complete statistics
instead of merely predigested "deductions
and conclusions." 26 Both parts included di-
gests of company annual reports adjusted to be
more comparable than heretofore — no mean
feat, since neither utilities nor railroads (un-
less engaged in interstate business) were as yet
required to report information in a uniform
manner. Railro ad entrie s inc luded no t only ten
years of annual income statements and bal-
ance sheet data expressed in the common
standard of dollars per mile, but also com-
ments on strong and weak points in company
operations. Physical characteristics of each
"road" were given together with comments on
the significance of various figures. Finally, a
complete description of the public stock and
bond offerings was shown along with their
respective ratings and each rating's rationale.
The preface pointed out that an expanded
version of the railroad manual's introduction
(published in 1912 by Analyses Publishing
Company as a book entitled How to Analyze
Railroad Reports) had been adopted as a text
by many universities and colleges. A reviewer
of that work commented that the textbook
"deserves its well-earned success" and added
that Moody's "well known manual . . . has
been of service to investors as well as stu-
dents." 27
Six years after stock and bond ratings had
been introduced, the 1915 edition ofthepublic
utilities/industrials manual also assigned rat-
ings to companies other than railroads. In
addition to the ratings, the following salient
facts regarding utilities were disclosed in the
manual: physical condition; earning power (a
combination of geographic location, popula-
tion and its growth, quality of management,
availability of "franchise" — meaning mo-
nopoly, — and rates charged); strength of fi-
nancial resources; and general credit-worthi-
ness. Two additional factors especially ger-
mane to industrial corporations — the regula-
tory climate and the degree of their depen-
152 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
dence on the country's general prosperity —
were included in industrial manual entries.
Never content to rest on his laurels for long,
Moody upgraded the manuals within the next
three years as follows: adding to the railroad
manual complete five-year financial figures
for smaller companies and issuing a monthly
updating publication; augmenting the securi-
ties rating system by three more categories at
the low end of the scale; and increasing indus-
trial/public utility coverage by more than 1 ,000
additional companies.
The next quantum leap in scope came
with the issuance in 1 9 1 8 of a separate govern-
ment securities manual. Covering more than
30,000 bond issues, 25,000 of them issued by
the U.S. government and its political subdivi-
sions, themanual carried the subtitle "Founded
to endure and Investors make secure." The
fourrespective main sections were the federal
government and U.S. dependencies (includ-
ing Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the
Philippine Islands); American states and mu-
nicipalities; the Dominion of Canada together
with its provinces and municipalities; and
some 127 pages of data for foreign govern-
ments and cities. By now the rating scale had
been simplified to five grades ranging from
Aaa to Ba plus a sixth category consolidating
all lower ratings.
Moody attributed the expanded scope to
World War I activity in government securi-
ties — not only U.S. liberty bonds but also
European bonds payable in dollars, particu-
larly those issued by Great Britain, France,
and Belgium — and noted that both then and
for years afterwards his was the only manual
with extensive international coverage. Many
U.S. allies supplied enough information to
receive a rating; but to no one's surprise,
Germany, Austria, and Russia did not. In
1922, to gain depth of background and expe-
rience in the international field, Moody's hired
Max Winkler, Ph.D. "a walking statistical
table of European affairs ," 28 After the war
Moody announced his intention of consider-
ably broadening the scope of the government
and municipal volume since he felt "a large
amount of American capital must necessarily
be provided for government purposes in all
parts of the world." 29
In 1920 when industrials and public utili-
ties were split into two volumes, the Moody's
manuals became four in number. The "ampli-
fied and enlarged" Public Utility Investments
included a larger number of companies than
ever before, particularly small companies. An
18- page introductory essay about the industry
included such details as a prediction that the
"jitney bus" (a sort of unlicensed taxi) would
be a short-lived phenomenon because its op-
erators were "a comparatively irresponsible
class of people." 30 There were 1,426 pages of
company coverage plus a section giving ten-
year price ranges for public utility stocks and
bonds.
Shortly after the war Major Maurice N.
Blakemore was hired to get compilation of the
manuals back on schedule. Unlike two prede-
cessors, one who ended up in a "lunatic asy-
lum" and a second who quit to take up chicken
farming, Blakemore succeeded and served as
managing editor from 1922 to 1924. 31 Soon
put in charge of sales as well, he proved
unsatisfactory at the dual responsibilities. At
this juncture (1925) John Sherman Porter, an
employee since 1916 and an experienced edi-
torial board member, was promoted to editor-
in-chief.
John Sherman Porter's Tenure
It is difficult to determine how much any
one individual influenced development of the
Moody's manuals, because from the begin-
ning editing has been the joint responsibility
of the editor-in-chief, the editorial board, and
the administrator titled "sales manager" in
Moody's day and "publisher" since 1954.
Although he yielded to others the title of
"editor" (and from Blakemore 's tenure on,
permitted their respective names to be embla-
zoned on the title page), for years Moody
retained ultimate control and stated in the
m
MOODY'S MANUALS 153
front matter that the manuals were prepared
under his general supervision. Nevertheless,
Porter, who served as editor-in-chief for 38
years, seems to have guided the Moody's
manuals more than any other single person
except John Moody himself. When Porter
started, steam-powered engines held sway on
land and sea with scant competition from any
other form of transportation; in 1 962, when
Dun & Bradstreet bought out the original
stockholders and Porter resigned, advances in
aerospace technology seemed about to prom-
ise humankind mastery of the whole universe.
Porter's first major project was adding a
separate banking and finance manual in 1 928.
The introduction gave an overview of such
topics as banking in the U.S. and Canada, the
Federal Reserve Banking System, and the
potential importance of insurance stocks and
real estate mortgage bonds to the investor.
Coverage included American and foreign com-
panies in the following categories, most previ-
ously covered although less extensively in the
industrial manual: banks and trusts; mortgage
and finance; and insurance (fire, casualty, and
miscellaneous). In addition, 11 pages dealt
with federal reserve banks and some 57 pages
presented information about various entities
within the federal farm loan system. Unlike
other manuals, this one carried no ratings.
Porter instituted use of the subtitle "American
and Foreign" on all manuals to emphasize
Moody's foreign coverage, a significant
change that remained in effect through 1 970.
In the speculative boom of the late 1920s
the company went public in a modest way,
floating an issue of non- voting preferred stock
with Moody and company old-timers
Holschuh, McCruden, Shea, Leavitt, and Por-
ter as company directors and majority stock-
holders. For Moody's Investors Service, as for
all U.S. businesses, the 1930s were difficult.
As Moody remembered it, the firm survived
only by cutting some staff and slashing sala-
ries for the rest (including company directors)
20 percent or more. 32 Apparently Poor's Pub-
lishing Company fared even worse. Accord-
ing to Moody, "Poor's was forced to give up
the ghost in 1940;" and when Moody's took
over the Poor 's Manual subscription list, total
circulation had dropped to fewer than 7,000
copies. 33
During the pre-war years and World War
II, financial publishing did not change a great
deal except that, like other sectors of the
economy, it occasionally was hampered by
rationing of such essential commodities as
paper. In 1935, under Porter's leadership, the
company discontinued rating stocks (securi-
ties reflecting equity or a share of ownership
in a company) to concentrate on debt securi-
ties (bonds). Critical reception remained fa-
vorable. One reviewer praised the Moody's
manuals handsomely for documenting not only
business and economic conditions in Latin
America atthe beginning of the Second World
War, but also circumstances leading up to the
war. 34
During the 1 950s Porter continued to re-
fine the manuals, In 1950 an explanation of
bank examination procedures and federal in-
vestment regulations became a regular feature
of each manual's front matter, a practice con-
tinued until 1975 (when, first, investors were
assumed to be conversant with basic facts and,
second, this short feature had become insuffi-
cient for explaining the intricacies of the body
of securities regulations by then in force). In
1952, the railroad manual (still covering more
than 1,000 railroad companies) expanded to
include all commercial forms of transporta-
tion and was retitled Moody's Manual of In-
vestments. American and Foreign. Transpor-
tation. Railroads-Airlines-Shipping Traction,
Bus and Truck Lines. In 1954 and 1955 the
subtitle "American and Foreign" was relegated
to very small type on the title page and all titles
were changed so that the industry classifica-
tion would be the second word in the title (e.g.,
instead of Moody's Manual of Investments.
American and Foreign. Bank, Insurance, and
Finance, the 1 955 manual was c&VLQ&Moody 's
Bank & Finance Manual). The next year an
interview of John Moody featured glowing
1 54 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
comments about the manuals. Prefacing a
sketch of Moody's life as an entrepreneur and
publisher, the author stated, "next to the Bible,
Wall Streeters put their faith in Moody's In-
vestors Manuals" and opined, "it can safely be
said that nearly anything of a financial statis-
tical nature available anywhere on a publicly
owned corporation will be found in Moody's
manuals." 35 While such comments are not the
result of a rigorous analysis or critique, they do
reflect popular opinion of the manuals at the
time.
Purchase by Dun & Bradstreet
The next two decades were a period of
rapidchange for Moody's, In 1962, four years
after Moody's death, the company was sold to
Dun & Bradstreet (another company with a
long-standing tradition of excellence in finan-
cial publishing) in part so that Porter and
others could convert their equity in the com-
pany into cash, Moody's then became a wholly
owned subsidiary (a virtually independent unit
of the parent company).
After Porter came a fairly quick succes-
sion of editors-in-chief, all of them former
editorial assistants, The first, Frank St. Clair
(1963-1969), madeno major changes. During
the one-year tenure of the second, George H.
Parson, the title page format was altered — the
typeface less ornate, the page uncluttered, and
forthefirsttimethenamesofthepublisherand
his assistant positioned on the page above the
editor-in-chief. More significant, in 1970 the
ratings division of Moody's Investors Ser-
vice, by then a separate part of the company,
instituted fees for the considerable effort and
expense of studying and rating companies'
securities. This change, now standardpractice
throughout the financial industry, was first
disclosed to manual users in the 197 1 Public
Utility Manual Although it did not affect
Parson's department directly, the increased
company resources with which to pay salaries
and other mounting expenses doubtless indi-
rectly facilitated maintaining the quality of the
manuals. The most notable development dur-
ing this period was the publication of the new
Moody's OTC Industrial Manual, splitting
over-the counter companies (meaning those
traded on smaller and regional stock ex-
changes) off from the industrial manual and
also expanding the number of such companies
covered.
Parson'ssuccessor,RoyA.Krause(1971-
1 973), oversaw expansion of the industrials to
a two- volume set in 1972 and division of the
municipals into volume one (Alabama-New
Hampshire and U.S.A.-its dependencies) and
volume two (New Jersey- Wyoming) in 1973.
In October of the last year of his editorship,
after nearly four decades of rating only debt
issues (bonds), the company resumed rating
preferred stocks (on a scale with seven grada-
tions of quality/riskiness). Their rationale for
reinstating the ratings was both increased in-
vestor interest and "dilution of some of the
protection afforded them." 36 While Krause
had no influence over this decision, it surely
increased the utility and value of the manuals
to the investor.
Robert Hanson accepted the post of edi-
tor-in-chief in 1973, and has devoted 18 years
to the position. With a bachelor's degree in
finance from City College of New York,
Hanson started out in 1 962 in the news reports
department at Moody's and came up through
the ranks to the editorial board in 1971. As
editor he has worked with a distinguished list
of publishers (Robert H. Messner 1973-1975,
William 0. Dwy er 1975-1981, Sheila S. Lam-
bert 1981-1989, and Howard Kiedaisch, as-
sociate publisher since 1982, and responsible
for the manuals since 1989). In 1989, to make
the editor-in-chief job more manageable,
Moody's top officials gave half of the editor's
mantle to a seasoned editorial board member,
Earl Stephens, who took on the Bank &. Fi-
nance Manual, the OTC Industrial Manual,
the Public Utility Manual, and the Transpor-
tation Manual. Hanson retains responsibility
for the Municipal & Government Manual, the
Industrial Manual, the International Manual,
and the OTC Unlisted Manual.
MOODY'S MANUALS 155
Further Expansion
The current pre-eminence of Moody's
among financial publishers is the result of
constant re-examination of what the market
wants and needs and appropriate product de-
velopment to meetsuch needs. Publisher Sheila
Lambert played midwife at the introduction of
two new manuals. In 1981 the burgeoning
number of international and multinational en-
terprises resulted in a separate International
Manual. Duplicate entries were phased out
gradually (companies paying for high visibil-
ity still retaining the privilege of being listed in
more than one manual if they so choose).
Within a year or two, however, all foreign
companies were shifted from the other manu-
als into the International Manual; foreign
countries and their political subdivisions were
moved from the Municipal & Government
Manual into the new manual. Then in 1986
Moody's issued a new OTC Unlisted Manual
giving investors access to information on com-
panies not listed on any exchanges but traded
exclusively via "pink sheets" or daily price
quotes distributed only to stockbrokers. This
manual was declared by Money, "your best bet
for pinpointing smaller pink-sheet stocks." 37
Beginning in 1976 half a dozen manuals
expanded from one or two volumes to mul-
tiple-volume sets: in 1976 the Bank & Finance
Manual went to two volumes (banks, trust
companies, savings and loan associations, and
federal credit agencies in the first and insur-
ance, finance, real estate, and investment com-
panies in the second); in 1980 the Public
Utility Manual split into two volumes; in 1 984
the almost new International Manual came
out as two units (Algeria-Ivory Coast and
Jamaica-Zimbabwe); in 1986 the Bank & Fi-
nance Manual was issued in three volumes,
the third adding coverage of unit investment
trusts, a relatively new form of investment
product; in 1988 the Municipal & Government
Manual, was published in three parts (Ala-
bama-Kentucky, Louisiana-Pennsylvania, and
Rhode Island- Wyoming); and in 1988 the
Bank & Finance Manual's Unit Investment
Trust volume divided into one part covering
sponsors A-M and a second covering N-Z, for
a total of four volumes.
Technological Advances
Spurred by competition from Standard
and Poor's, the other giant of financial pub-
lishing, and from smaller, newer firms,
Moody's made two important, albeit some-
what delayed, technological changes. Stan-
dard & Poor's Corporation, formed by a 1941
merger of Poor's Publishing and Standard
Statistics, introduced the Compustat service in
1962. Compustat, comprised of 20 years of
annual data and theretofore distributed exclu-
sively on tape compatible with mainframe
computers, was offered in compact disc for
microcomputer users around 1988. Moody's,
however, loath to dilute a fine reputation by
precipitous entry into nonprint technologies,
did not follow suit. Apart from one brief
attempt to construct a structured, computer-
readable financial database (aborted because
there seemed to be no demand for such a
product), Moody's kept on doing what they
had always done best — producing printed
manuals and updating services.
The first technological change involved
overhauling the printing process in 1975. For
years a cumbersome discontinuous arrange-
ment of companies in the manuals was neces-
sitated by the off-site linotype printing pro-
cess. The logistics of maintaining a steady
stream of work to the printer so that each
annual volume could be completed and issued
on time meant that similar companies were not
integrated into their respective industry sec-
tions. For example, in the same edition an
initial section of American banks was fol-
lowed first by foreign banks, then by another
section of American banks, and again by a
section of foreign banks. This process was
terribly expensiveand inflexible. Both manual
users and Moody's stockholders were better
served by the new method of computerized
typesetting, which reduced costs at the same
156 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
&&
time it "smoothed out" the production flow
and permitted better organization of the manu-
als. (Happily the separate index, covering all
manuals except the Municipal & Government
one, is still availableto help neophytes chart a
course among the eight different manuals.)
In 1986 when Moody's brought the com-
puterized typesetting process inhouse and no
longer depended on an outside printer, the
second, even more significant technological
advance was accomplished. Stored in com-
puterized form, the data was no longer con-
fined to the printed page. Moody's began to
augment printed products with electronic dis-
tribution of the data through cooperation with
vendors such as DIALOG to offer interactive
retrieval and manipulation of company finan-
cial data supplied by Moody's.
In 1988, the inhouse, computerized type-
setting process also contributed to the devel-
opment of the first of a series of compact disc
products searchable offline via CD-ROM
reader and microcomputer. This development
permitted direct access to the manuals' vast
compendia of facts without the significant
expense of long distance phone charges in-
curred in online searching. The first product,
Moody's 5000 Plus, covering all companies
traded on the New York and American Stock
Exchanges as well as NASDAQ National
Market companies was quickly followed by
Moody 's International Plus covering the 1 ead-
ing non-U.S. companies. At this writing a third
CD product, Moody 's OTC Plus, designed to
provide information about companies traded
over-the-counter, has also been released.
The final significant change in the manu-
als during the past two decades was financial
in origin. In 1975, when pressure on publish-
ing firms to show a profit was mounting,
Moody's instituted the option of purchasing
more detailed coverage of company informa-
tion. That is, for $1 ,000 dollars (in addition to
the fee levied by the ratings department), a
firmcould get increased visibility in the manual
in the form of "full measure coverage." This
option ensured that company narrative would
be expanded, that financial data would be
displayed across an entire page, and that in
addition to a description of the firm, entries
would provide up to seven years of financial
and operating information together with ratio
analysis putting the figures into perspective.
Since its introduction, this service has under-
gone several modifications. Today, four lev-
els of expanded coverage (or Visibility) are
offered. They included Corporate Visibility
(CV), CV-Select, CV-Plus, and CV-Ultra.
Presentation of company data is expanded
with each level of coverage. Corporate Vis-
ibility includes up to five years of financial
statements with a medium-length description
of the company's history, business, and other
narrative. Corporate Visibility-Select includes
up to a seven-year financial presentation and
a more detailed narrative section. Corporate
Visibility-Plus expands the narrative consid-
erably, even including such details as the chief
executive officer's letter to shareholders and
the complete set of notes from financial state-
ments. The highest level of coverage, Corpo-
rate Visibility-Ultra, offers the listed com-
pany an opportunity to include a full-page
advertisement on the second page of its listing,
(It should be noted that Moody's exercises
considerable editorial judgment as to the con-
tents of the ads.)
Critical Reception
Critical reception for the modern manuals
has been almost as sparse as reaction to the
very first ones. In the business community, the
ratings and the ratings process are of para-
mount importance; — the manuals, merely a
transmittal mechanism, usually have not been
deemed worthy of comment. Occasionally an
article will favor a Standard & Poor's product
or feature or state that Moody's "long domi-
nant position in the municipal-rating field is
being chipped away by an increasingly ag-
gressive Standard & Poor's corporation, 1 ' 38
However, most issuers of securities, with mil-
lions of dollars in financing costs riding on
ratings outcomes, practice the belt-and-sus-
penders approach of using both services.
MOODY'S MANUALS 157
Most large investors do too. A business pro-
fessor noted that "splits [meaning materially
higher or lower ratings for the same security]
do occur and both issuers and purchasers
normally seek ratings from both agencies," 3 '
and concluded, "the value of the second rat-
ing, or opinion, arises primarily from the fact
that it is independent from the first." 40
Among librarians, Moody's is always
mentioned in the same breath as Standard &
Poor' s, and most are reluctant to pick a favor-
ite. Some prefer the tidiness of Moody's an-
nual bound volume for its suitability in build-
ing a collection of retrospect! ve print holdings
and the savings in staff time from having one
less loose-leaf service to file. Others place a
high priority on the regular updating of the
Standard & Poor 's Corporation Records. If a
handbook or bibliography mentions only one
of the two, however, it is virtually always the
old reliable Moody's manuals.
Only three reviewers have been both
knowledgeable enough and brave enough to
make a detailed comparison of the Standard &
Poor 's Corporation Records and the Moody ' s
manuals. The first, Judith Truelson, pro-
nounced Moody's "the most comprehensive
source of this kind of information [summary
and analysis of information in company an-
nual reports], available to private investor and
financial analyst alike" 4 'The second, Bernard
Schlessinger, asserted that whether "Moody's
or S&P should be the primary source of busi-
ness materials, given a limited budget, ... is a
matter of personal preference." 42 In another
passage, however, he evaluated the Moody's
manuals as "One of the most comprehensive
sources for information of this kind, this ser-
vice is recommended for all business, aca-
demic, and public libraries medium-sized and
larger." 43 Jean Kellough, the third reviewer,
dealt with the compact disc products of the
respective publishers, Moody's 500 Plus and
DIALOG Ondisc Standard & Poor's Corpora-
tion Records. Having noted that S&P covers
more companies (9,000 versus Moody's
slightly over 5,000), she concluded that
"Moody's 5000+ [sic], which seems best suited
for a financial analyst or researcher who would
use it often, offers sophisticated features that
the average undergraduate student would not
use
>M4
Reorganized for the Electronic Age
In early 1989, the company was reorga-
nized and renamed to emphasize electronic
services — with print products (the manuals
and updating services) and two electronic
products, Datastream and Interactive Data,
forming a group called "Dun & Bradstreet
Financial Services of North America" and
only the ratings service still going by the name
Moody's Investors Service. Early the follow-
ing year, however, Dun & Bradstreet manage-
ment decided, to divest the two electronic
database units, restore the print publishing
section to Moody's Investors Service, and
revert to emphasizing what Moody's has al-
ways done better than anyone else — publish
the most complete and most reliable financial
information available.
Always striving for improvement,
Moody's has a five-year strategic plan for
operations. Both current and potential new
products are subjected to a rigorous set of
criteria and testing for compatibility with com-
pany mission, a close fit with what customers
want and need, and other key considerations.
Broad editorial plans have a dual focus. While
manuals and updating services will continue
to be available in "hardcopy" form, the same
wealth of information will become available
in nonprint formats as Moody's expands its
activity in the arena of electronic products
currently offered. The market will dictate
what, if anything, is done to expand existing
printed manuals or introduce new ones. A
more focused product, addressing a narrower
niche of investor interest than the well known
encyclopedic manuals, is one option under
discussion. Whatever direction is taken, the
Moody's manuals will remain a household
word in this country and abroad for genera-
tions to come.
158 DISTINGUISHED CIAS SICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
PUBLICATION HISTORY
TheManual of Industrial and Miscellaneous Corpo-
ration Securities. Annual. New York: 0. C.
Lewis Co., 1900-07.
Moody's Manuals. Annual. New York: Moody
Manual Co., 1908-24,
Moody 's Analyses of Railroad Investments, Annual.
New York: Analyses Publishing Co., 1909-13,
Moody's Analyses of Investments. Part I; Steam
Railroads. Part H: Public Utilities and Industri-
als. Annual, New York: Analyses Publishing
Co., 1914-20.
Moody's Analyses of Investments. Part III: Govern-
ment and Municipal Securities. Annual. New
York: Moody's Investors Service, 1918-1920.
Moody's Analyses of Investments. Part I: Railroad
Investments. Part II: Industrial Investments.
Part III: Public Utility Investments. Part IV:
Government and Municipal Securities. Annual.
New York: Moody's Investors Service, 1920-
1921.
Moody 's Man ual oflnvestments and Security Rating
Service, Government and Municipal Securities.
Annual. New York: Moody'slnvestors Service,
1921-1927.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments and Security Hating
Service. Public Utility Securities, Annual, New
York: Moody's Investors Service, 1921-1927.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments and Security Rating
Service. RailroadSecurities. Annual.New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1921-1927.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments and Security Rating
Service. Industrial Securities. Annual. New
York; Moody's Investors Service, 1921-1927.
Moody 's Manual of Investments. American and For-
eign. Government and Municipal Securities.
Annual. New York: Moody ' s Investors Service,
1928-1954.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments. American and For-
eign. Banks-Insurance Companies-Investment
Trusts-Real Estate-Finance and Credit Compa-
nies . Annual. New York: Moody's Investors
Service, 1928-1954.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments. American and For-
eign. Public Utility Securities. Annual. New
York: Moody's Investors Service, 1928-1953,
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments. American and For-
eign. Railroad Securities. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1928-1951.
Moody 's Manual oflnvestments. American and For-
eign. Industrial Securities. Annual. New York:
Moody'slnvestors Service, 1928-1953.
Moody J s Manual oflnvestments. A merican and For-
eign, Transportation. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1952-1953.
Moody's Industrial Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1954- .
Moody 's Public Utility Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1954- .
Moody's Transportation Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1954- .
Moody's Bank & Finance Manual. Annual. New
York: Moody's Investors Service, 1955- .
Moody's Municipal & Government Manual. Annual.
New York: Moody's Investors Service, 1955- .
Moody's OTC Industrial Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1970- .
Moody 's International Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1981- .
Moody 's OTC Unlisted Manual. Annual. New York:
Moody's Investors Service, 1986- .
BIBLIOGRAPHY
There must be somewhere (perhaps in the
apocrypha) a biblical prohibition against in-
depth comparisons of the Moody's manuals
and their competitors. The prevailing senti-
ment seems to be: "Let him who is a certified
financial genius cast the first stone." There are
scores of articles — -both popular and theoreti-
cal — on the ratings process and bushel baskets
foil of news notes on specific ratings being
changed as well as discussions of esoteric
changes in the rating scales or the types of
securities that get rated. But few writers seem
to have enjoyed the happy combination of
sufficient skill, time, and interest to write a
thorough critique of the Moody ' s manuals and
the Standard & Poor *s Corporation Records.
Slavens gives succinct, serviceable de-
scriptions of the Moody's manuals but barely
mentions the Standard & Poor 's Corporation
Records. Ganly gives complete, accurate, and
readable descriptions of the Bank & Finance^
Industrial, OTC Industrial, and Public Utility
manuals, but he too passes over the Standard
& Poor's Corporation Records. Walford de-
scribes only the Industrial Manual and its
News Reports. Sheehy concentrates on direc-
tories and encyclopedias, covering neither
Moody's nor S&P's manuals. Ulrich 's covers
both briefly and Woy gives directory-type
information on both (although the Industrial
Manual is the only Moody's manual he lists
under the heading "International Business")-
MOODY'S MANUALS 1 59
Daniells's descriptive annotations compare
favorably with Ganly in all respects and sur-
pass him in covering all eight manuals and the
Standard & Poor's Corporation Records.
The three reviewers who go beyond simple
description are Truelson, Schlessinger, and
Kellough (covering compact disc versions).
All compare and contrastMoody's and S&P's
respective manuals more thoroughly and
insightfully than any other writers on this
topic. Since Moody* s and other financial pub-
lishers always seem to have something new up
their sleeves, it is devoutly hoped that some-
one will provide timely updates for the library
student and the practicing librarian.
"A Century of Standard & Poor's." The Spectator.
Employee Magazine of Standard & Poor's Cor-
poration 7 (April, 1960): 1-16.
Chandler, Alfred D., Jr. Henry Varnum Poor Busi-
ness Editor, Analyst, and Performer. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard University Press, 1956.
Daniells, Lorna M. Business Information Sources.
Rev. ed. Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1985.
Ganly, John V. Serials for Libraries. New York:
Neal-Schuman, 1985.
Inventing Our Future. Centennial Report. New York:
McGraw-Hill, [1988].
Jensen, Dennis J. "The Research Library of Standard
& Poor's Corporation." In Banking and Fi-
nance Collections, edited by Jean Deus. New
York: Haworth Press, 1984.
Kellough, Jean. "Moody's 5000+ and DIALOG
Ondisc Standard & Poor's Corporations: A
Comparison of Two Full-Text Business Data-
bases," Laserdisk Professional 2 (November,
1989): 78-89.
Moody, John. A Fifty Year Review of Moody's
Investors Service. New York: Moody's Inves-
tors Service, [1949].
. Long Road Home: An Autobiography. New
York: Macmillan, 1933.
National Cyclopedia of American Biography. New
York: James T. White, 1918.
Schlessinger, Bernard S. The Basic Business Li-
brary: Core Resources. 2nd ed. Phoenix: Oryx
Press, 1989.
Sheeny, Eugene P. Guide to Reference Books. 10th
ed. Chicago: American Library Association,
1986.
Slavens, Thomas P. "Major Business Reference
VTovks." ReferenceLibrarianno. 15 (Fall, 1986):
185-94.
Standard & Poor's 120 Years of Preserving the
"RighttoKnow. "New York: Standard & Poor's
Corporation, [1980].
Truelson, Judith A. "Hotonthe Corporate Trail." RQ
15 (Spring, 1976): 223-28.
Walford, Albert John. Watford's Guide to Reference
Material, Volume 2: Social & Historical Sci-
ences, Philosophy & Religion. London: Library
Association, 1980.
Woy, James. Encyclopedia of Business Information
Sources. Detroit: Gale Research, 1988.
NOTES
1 John Moody, Long Road Home: An Autobiography
(New York: Macmillan Co., 1933), 5 1 .
2 Richard Rutter, "Statistics House Thrives on Facts,"
New York Times, 24 April I960, sec. 3, p. 1,
3 G.B. Baker, "The Crisis at the Stock Exchange," Con-
temporary Review 58 (November 1890): 680.
4 Robert E. BedingfieJd, "Personality: Boswell of U.S.
Corporations," New York Times, 6 May 1956, 3.
s John Moody, Manual of Industrial and Miscellaneous
Corporation Securities (New York: O. C. Lewis
Co., 1900): 47.
* Ibid., 50-51.
7 Ibid., 47.
8 John Moody, Moody 's Analyses oflnvestments. Part II:
Public Utilities and Industrials (New York: Analy-
ses Publishing Co., 1915): 4.
9 John Moody, Moody 's Manual of Investments and
Security Rating Service, Industrial Securities (New
York: Moody's Investors Service, 1927); iii.
10 "A Financial Reference Book," New York Times, 17
November 1890, 10.
" Alvin S. Johnson, "The Truth About the Trusts,"
Political Science Quarterly 19 (June 1904): 307.
ia Emory R. Johnson, "The Truth About the Trusts,"
American Academy of Political and Social Science
24 (1904): 387.
13 Roy Porter, dictated by Mr. Porter in 1937, transcript,
Standard and Poor's Corporation Library, New
York City, 8.
" "4,000 Pages About Railways" New York Times, 15
December 1911, 619.
15 "Not Editor of Moody's Manual," New York Times, 23
October 1921, 18.
16 Porter, dictated by Mr. Porter, 8.
17 Ibid., 5.
18 John Moody, Moody 's Analyses oflnvestments. Parti:
Steam Railroads (New York: Analyses Publishing
Co., 1916): 17.
'* Porter, "Dictated by Mr. Porter," p, 5.
29 Moody, Moody's Analyses oflnvestment. Part I, p, 17.
21 Ibid.
12 Ibid.
13 John Moody, Moody's Analyses of Railroad Invest'
ments (New York: Analyses Publishing Co., 1 909):
193. Italics in original.
2,, iahnM.QOdy,A Fifty Year Review of Moody 's Investors
Service (New York: Moody's Investors Service,
[1949]): 11.
160 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
" Emory R, Johnson, "Moody's Analyses of Railroad
Investments" American Academy of Political and
Social Science. Annals 34 (1 909): 211.
s6 John Moody, Analyses of Investments, Part I: Steam
Railroads (19 14): 17.
""How to Analyze Railroad Reports," Political Science
Quarterly 29 (March 1914): 180.
31 Moody, Fifty Year Review, 1 7.
w Moody's Analyses of Investments. Part II: Public
Utilities and Industrials (New York: Analyses
Publishing Co,, 1919): 2.
30 John Moody, Moody's Analyses of Investments. Part
III; Public Utility Investments (New York: Moody's
Investor's Service, 1920): 5.
31 Moody, Fifty Year Review, 18.
32 Ibid., 32.
33 Ibid., 22.
34 J, Fred Rippy, "Moody's Manual of Investments,
American and Foreign," Hispanic American His-
torical Review 23 {November 1943): 702.
3i "Boswell of U.S. Corporations," 3.
36 Moody's Industrial Manual (New York: Moody's
Investors Service, 1974): viii.
" Andrea Rock, "Got a Stock Hunch?" Money 17 (Au-
gust 1988); 117.
38 Victor F. Zonana and Daniel Hertzberg, "The Rating
Game," Wall Street Journal, 2 November 1981, p.
1.
19 Louis H. Ederington, "Why Split Ratings Occur,"
Financial Management 15 (Spring 1986): 38.
40 Ibid., 46.
41 Judith A. Truelson, "Hot on the Corporate Trail," RQ
15 (Spring 1976): 224.
41 Bernard S. Schlessinger, The Basic Business Library:
Core Resources (Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1989): 239.
° Ibid., 39.
44 JeanKellough, "Moody's 5000+ and DIALOG Ondisc
Standard & Poor's Corporations: A Comparison of
Two Full-Text Business Databases," Laserdisk
Professional 2 (November 1989): 89.
"The Bibliographical Wonder of the
World": The National Union Catalog
John R.M, Lawrence
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
On Monday, January 12,1981, Pan American
flight 106 to London left Washington, D.C.,
carrying a shipment of cards for the last vol-
ume of the massive, 754-volume National
Union Catalog, Pre- J 956 Imprints} The ship-
ment constituted the final leg of a journey that
had commenced more than 80 years before.
The final printed product of that monumental
effort, whose aim had been the compilation
and publication of a record of the holdings of
American research libraries, had been hailed
as "the bibliographical wonder of the world" 2
and the "greatest single instrument of biblio-
graphic control in existence." 3 The final edit-
ing and publishing of this catalog had cost
more than 34 million dollars and taken over 1 4
years to complete, but the total effort involved
from the beginning is immeasurable. 4
Antecedents
As early as 1850 the idea of a union
catalog of books in American libraries had
been proposed by Charles Coffm Jewett, li-
brarian of the Smithsonian Institution from
1847 to 1854. In his 1850 annual report he
proposed the printing of a general catalog that
would allow a scholar "the means of knowing
the full extent of his resources for investiga-
tion." Jewett proposed that the Smithsonian,
by using stereotyped plates, would distribute
records of its holdings to participating librar-
ies, which in turn would submit plates for titles
notheld in the Smithsonian. The latter in effect
would act as a national bibliographic center.
Jewett was well aware that this exchange of
records would require that the participating
libraries adhere to some sort of uniform cata-
loging rules, and he included that idea in his
ambitious plans. 5
Unfortunately, a quarter of a century
passed before Charles A. Cutter provided the
impetus for standardizing cataloging with the
publication of his Rules for a Printed Dictio-
nary Catalogue (Washington: Government
Printing Office, 1 875). 6 About the same time,
various institutions began to consider the pos-
sibility of reducing expenses by the use of
centralized production and distribution of
printed catalog cards. During the late 1890s,
the American Library Association experi-
mented with various card printing schemes for
both books and journal articles. The first of
these efforts was to provide short title-list
cards for books cataloged by the publishing
section; another project which began in 1 898
provided cards for articles for scholarly jour-
nals, such as those indexed by Poole 's Index
to Periodical Literature (Boston: Houghton,
1882) or the International Catalog of Scien-
tific Literature (London: Royal Society of
London, 1 902-2 1 ). 7 While these projects met
with varying success, all of these efforts con-
tributed to the gradual standardization of
printed catalog cards, an innovation that would
finally make practical not only the exchange
162 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
of information about library holdings, butalso
the easy integration of reports from various
libraries into a single information source. 8
In June 1898, the Library of Congress
began to print catalog cards for books re-
ceived for copyright. After January 1901, the
Library began printing cards for all acces-
sions, and plans for distributing the cards to
other libraries were announced in July of that
year. 9 In his 1901 annual report, Herbert
Putnam, the Librarian of Congress, unveiled
the ambitious scheme that woul d in fact create
a national union catalog:
Finally, it is fully recognized by the Library
that next in importance to an adequate exhibit
of its own resources, comes the ability to
supply information as to the resources of other
libraries.
As steps in this direction may be men-
tioned:
First. The acquisition of printed cata-
logues of libraries, both American and for-
eign.
Second, An alphabetic author catalogue
on cards of books in department and bureau
libraries in Washington.
Third. A similar catalogue of books in
some of the more important libraries outside
Washington.
The Library of Congress expects to place
in each great center of research in the United
States a copy of every card that it prints for its
own catalogues; these will form there a state-
ment ofvhat theNational Library contains. It
hopes to receive a copy of every card printed
by the New York Public Library, the Boston
Public Library, the Harvard University Li-
brary, the John Crerar Library, and several
others. These it will arrange and preserve in a
card catalogue of the great collections outside
of Washington. 10
A Union Catalog on Cards
The ideas of depository card collections
and distributing catalog cards on demand
proved immensely popular, and did much to
accelerate the further standardization of cata-
log cards, although not soon enough for the
new union catalog. " Cards from Harvard were
smallerthanthe standard and had to be mounted
on larger cards, while those from Boston Pub-
lic required trimming and retyping of head-
ings lost by trimming. 12 Initially, the files from
each library were maintained separately, but
by 1909 were so extensive that it was deemed
necessary to arrange them into a single author
alphabet. 13 At that time the new merged file
included entries contributed by nine libraries:
New York Public, Harvard, Boston Public,
John Crerar, Washington Public, the Bureau
of Education, the Department of Agriculture,
the Geological Survey, and the War Depart-
ment, Despite the fact that there was a surpris-
ingly small amount of duplication in the file
(only 20 percent of the titles were held in the
Library of Congress, and only 7 percent by
any 2 other libraries), Putnam enthusiastically
predicted that when completed the union cata-
log would contain about 600,000 entries, and
in combination with an equal number of en-
tries from the the LC public catalogs, would
constitute the "closest approximation now
available to a complete record of books in
American libraries." 14
Nonetheless, for the first 25 years of its
existence, the union catalog remained a tool
used chiefly by the Library of Congress cata-
loging staff as a source for cataloging copy
and supplying card orders. Without a special
staff for maintenance, the union catalog was
maintained by the library's Card Division as a
supplement to the public catalogs. As other
libraries, including the University of Illinois,
the University of Chicago, and the Newberry
Library, joined the list of contributors, the
catalog continued to expand. By 1926, the
union catalog held some 1,960,000 cards,
representing far more titles than the modest
predictions made in 1909.
Expansion of the Catalog
However, by this time it was also apparent
to scholars that this gigantic figure repre-
sented less than a fourth of scholarly titles to
be found in American libraries. In addition,
the rapid expansion of graduate study follow-
ing World War I made the inadequacy of this
bibliographic record painfully obvious. 15 In
THE NATIONAL UNION CATALOG 163
1926, scholarship received assistance from
John D. Rockefeller, Jr. The businessman
provided a $250,000 gift to be administered
over a five-year period, for the specific pur-
pose of extending the "bibliographic appara-
tus." Project "B," as the effort came to be
called in order to distinguish it from other
specially funded projects administered by the
Library of Congress, was headed by Ernest
Cushing Richardson, former director of the
Princeton University Library and at that time
the consultant in bibliography and research at
the Library of Congress. To assist him, Ernest
Kletsch, a former member of the Library of
Congress staff who had entered private busi-
ness, was named curator of the union cata-
log. 16 Their chief objective was expressed as
locating "at least one copy of every useful
book now in the possession of one or more
American libraries." 17 In the five-year history
of the project some 8,344,256 copies of
6,775,936 works were located and more than
6.3 million cards were added to the union
catalog. 18
A task of such massive proportions re-
quired the adoption of some special rules, and
the way certain problems were handled per-
manently shaped the union catalog. For the
first time, a complete set of all Library of
Congress printed cards was added to the cata-
log. 19 A decision was made to weed out dupli-
cate entries, and in cases of conflict the LC
cards were considered the masterentry While
their presence also helped to standardize filing
procedures, various deviations had to be de-
veloped for such a massive catalog, for ex-
ample, the use of chronological order for
numerous editions of the same work and the
arrangement of some special groups by lan-
guage before subdividing by date. Cards for
Slavic and Semitic titles and other titles repre-
sented in non-Roman characters were trans-
ferred to other divisions of the Library of
Congress, which established union catalogs
for materials in those languages.
Another very basic problem that had to be
solved was the selection of a method of assign-
ing symbols to libraries reporting to the cata-
log. The method chosen employed a mne-
monic based on three groups of letters repre-
senting state, city, and library. This same
method, proposed by Frank Peterson, a volun-
teer worker at the University of Nebraska
Library, has since been employed in many
important reference works, includingthe Union
List of Serials and Newspapers in Micro-
form. 20
Several methods of expanding reports
were employed, In addition to adding LC
printed cards, project staff typed cards for the
handwritten entries in the old official cata-
logs. 21 At least 118 printed book catalogs,
including those of both general and special-
ized collections from state, academic, and
large public libraries, were clipped and
mounted on cards, creating more than a mil-
lion new entries. 22 Libraries were encouraged
to make routine contributions of all cards
duplicated by mechanical means. Those li-
braries financially unable to submitlarge num-
bers of reports were encouraged to supply
copies of shelflists of "treasure room" items.
Occasionally libraries loaned shelflists of spe-
cial collections for project staff to transcribe,
and, in a few cases, particularly in Washington
and at Harvard, project staff visited libraries
and copied or made photostats of catalog
entries, In the case of Harvard, more than
700,000 cards were copied over a period of 3
years. One final method of expanding the
catalog was the solicitation of gifts of groups
of cards discarded by institutions in the pro-
cess of recataloging their collections. The
wide variance in cataloging practices among
these institutions, plus the large number of
cryptic, one-line entries received in this man-
ner would cause future editors many head-
aches. 23
When the Rockefeller grant expired on
August 31 , 1932, the Union Catalog Division
was established as a unit of the Library of
Congress. The appropriation of $20,000 was
less than half of that available during each of
the previous five years, and staff was trimmed
from 31 to 11 employees. Most projects for
expanding the catalog were frozen as staff
164 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
time was consumed in the routines of filing
cards, revising entries, and providing libraries
with information on locations. 24 Nevertheless
growth of the file continued. Hard financial
times for libraries during the 1930s did not
mean fewer reports. While the number of
libraries reporting declined, the number of
reports remained at a steady level as many
contributing libraries were forced to adopt
mechanical means of reproducing cards in
order to save on expenses. 25
Regional Union Cataiogs
During the late 1930s, various projects of
the Works Projects Administration had sig-
nificant impact upon the union catalog. Per-
haps the most far-reaching was the establish-
ment in 1935 of regional union catalogs around
the country, including those at Chicago, Phila-
delphia, Denver, North Carolina, Texas, and
Cleveland. From the outset, these projects
were viewed as possible important contribu-
tors to the national union catalog, 2 * and early
surveys of the Cleveland and Philadelphia
catalogs indicated that as much 24 to 34 per-
cent of the titles represented in the regional
catalogs were not included in the union cata-
log. 27 However despite great enthusiasm over
their creation and the perennial recommenda-
tions from the Library of Congress staff, an-
other decade would pass before these valua ble
resources could be added to the union cata-
log. 28
Of more immediate impactupon the union
catalog were a number of projects sponsored
through the Historical Records Survey of the
Works Projects Administration. One was the
filming on 16mm film of some 19 District of
Columbia library catalogs. Being mostly the
collections of federal agencies, these institu-
tions had been excluded from the efforts of
"Project B" because the emphasis of that
project had been upon collections outside of
Washington. Eventually some 600,000 author
entries were filmed and later transcribed for
the union catalog by the New Jersey Historical
Records Survey. 29
Another great enhancement to the biblio-
graphic apparatus was provided in 1937 by the
absorption of the American Imprints Inven-
tory by the Historical Records Survey. Under
the editorship of Douglas C. McMurtie, this
undertaking was intended to provide a nation-
wide inventory of books and pamphlets pub-
lished in the United States before 1 876 and in
some western states before 1 890. Field work-
ers across the nation canvassed library collec-
tions identifying relevant materials, transcrib-
ing the appropriate information, and forward-
ing entries to a central office in Chicago.
Before publication in various state checklists,
all entries were checked in the union catalog
in Washington. This afforded Library of Con-
gress staff the opportunity to add all locations
and entries not previously included in the
union catalog. 30
In 1936 the Division expanded its grow-
ing location service in order to assist libraries
urgently needing materials not reported in the
union catalog. In cooperation with the Asso-
ciation of Research Libraries, weekly check-
lists of unlocated titles were circulated to 50
research libraries. The participating libraries
checked their holdings for the needed titles
and returned the lists to the Library of Con-
gress which then notified the requesting li-
brary of the available locations. The titles that
were not located were cumulated in annual
lists of desiderata. In return for acting as a
clearinghouse for interlibrary loans, the Union
Catalog Division was able to add hundreds of
entries and holdings for important scholarly
resources. 31
In its earliest years, most use of the cata-
log was made by Library of Congress staff or
researchers who could physically use the cata-
log themselves. However "Project B" had
served to advertise the value of the catalog and
to make many more libraries aware of its
potential. From 1 927 onward the catalog staff
received an ever increasing amount of corre-
spondence; so much in fact that the burden of
correspondence began to tax staff resources
heavily. By 1940, George Schwegmann, the
director of the Union Catalog Division esti-
mm
u-msw?
THE NATIONAL UNION CATALOG 1 65
mated that 25 percent of staff time was spent
answering such inquiries. 32 In addition the
Library's independent Interlibrary Loan Ser-
vice made regular use of the union catalog and
in 1 935 alone made some 5,000 referrals based
on information in the catalog. 33
After 40 years in development, the union
catalog had truly become a major national
bibliographic resource. In fact it was deemed
so important that at the start of World War II
the catalog was removed from the capital as a
precautionary measure. War and its accompa-
nying research efforts further demonstrated
the utility of the catalog. Requests for infor-
mation on locations doubled during the first
year of the war, and there was a conspicuous
jump in requests for foreign technical and
scientific materials. The fact that only two-
thirds of the titles requested were located in
the catalog highlighted the need to expand its
coverage, 34 and Congress nearly doubled ap-
propriations for the division during the 1942—
43 fiscal year. 35
Plans for a Book Catalog
However, the most significant event af-
fecting the union catalog during the war years
was the agreement reached between the Asso-
ciation of Research Libraries and the Library
of Congress to publish in book form a deposi-
tory collection of Library of Congress printed
catalog cards. Over the years American librar-
ies had found depository card sets increas-
ingly expensive to maintain. In addition to
space problems created by the huge files, it
was estimated that each depository library
spent over $1,200 each year simply for filing
and new catalog furniture. In 1941, an Asso-
ciation of Research Libraries committee
chaired by William Warner Bishop proposed
the publication of the card set in book form.
The book catalog allowed costs to be evenly
divided between the subscribing libraries and
the Library of Congress, 36 In addition, the
book format made it possible to extend the
bibliographic resources of the Library of Con-
gress to over 300 libraries, far more than had
ever subscribed to the printed cards. 37 The
resulting A Catalog of Booh Represented by
Library of Congress Printed Cards Issued to
July 31, 1942 ran 167 volumes and repro-
duced approximately 1,900,000 cards.
Edwards Brothers, Inc. of Ann Arbor, Michi-
gan, produced the catalog over a span of 4
years by photographing the cards, reducing
the size of the image, and printing them 18 to
a page. 38
The immediate impact upon the union
catalog of the new printed catalog and its 42-
volume supplement which appeared in 1948,
was a reverse of the decline in reports from
contributing libraries that had been brought on
by personnel shortages during the war. At the
prompting of the Joint Committee on the Na-
tional Union Catalog of the Association of
Research Libraries and the American Library
Association, 36 libraries agreed to check their
holding against the printed catalog and report
titles not represented in the Library of Con-
gress collections. Another 24 research institu-
tions agreed to search at least part of their
collections. 39 In the first year alone, the union
catalog received nearly 80,000 reports from
these institutions. 40
Increased appropriations during the pe-
riod from 1 943-47 enabled the Union Catalog
Division to finally add holdings from the Cleve-
land and Philadelphia regional union catalogs.
In 1948, in recognition of its growing use and
importance, the union catalog was officially
designated the National Union Catalog and
efforts to expand its coverage increased anew.
Complete holdings of Harvard University, the
University of California at Berkeley, and the
North Carolina union catalog were added.
Libraries that had been reporting selectively
were encouraged to report all new acquisi-
tions, and the result was the rapid expansion of
the catalog. 41
This period also saw renewed calls for the
publication of the entire catalog. As early as
1928, Henry Putnam had discussed the need to
publish the file. 42 The feasibility of publishing
1
166 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
die catalog was considered again in 1941, but
a decision was delayed until the end of the
war/ 3 However, the obvious incompleteness
of the catalog, the tremendous burden of keep-
ing up with the ever-rising number of current
cards, plus huge filing backlogs of earlier
reports always made the task of editing appear
impossible. 44 In 1952, as an experimental step
in planning the printing of the catalog, the
Union Catalog Division began to set aside
current reports for imprints for 1 952 and later.
The intention of the separate file was to estab-
lish a means of estimating the eventual size
and cost ofpublishingthe entire catalog. 43 The
following year the American Library Asso-
ciation Board on Resources was presented
with a proposal for reproducing the entire
National Union Catalog, but the estimated
cost of some 4 to 5 million dollars to complete
the project daunted even the m ost enthusiastic
supporters. 46
Meanwhile, following the proposals laid
out in 1946 by Halsey William Wilson in his
pamphlet, A Proposed Plan for Printing Li-
brary of Congress Cards in Cumulative Book
Form (New York: H.W. Wilson), the Library
of Congress had discontinued the distribution
of depository card sets and had begun in 1 947
to publish the Cumulative Catalog of Library
of Congress Printed Cards. In 1 950, a separate
subject catalog was initiated and the Cumula-
tive Catalog was renamed the Library of Con-
gress Author Catalog. Three years later, with
the appearance of separate catalogs for maps,
motion pictures and filmstrips, and music and
phonograph records, the series became the
Library of Congress Catalog— Booh: Au-
thors. Recognition by both the Library and the
profession that this catalog failed to represent
the annual increase in scholarly titles held in
American libraries resulted in the suggestion
that the Library of Congress Catalog be ex-
panded into a current National Union Cata-
log. 47
The proposal was first made formally by
C. Sumner Spauiding at the summer 1953
ALA annual meeting, and actively advocated
the following year by Frederick H. Wagman.
Wagman saw the publication of a current
catalog of American library acquisitions as a
possible solution to the problem of publishing
the entire catalog. The staff of the National
Union Catalog might be relieved of the con-
siderable tasks of arranging, filing, and main-
taining current entries as well as responding to
reference queries about them. Staff time saved
might be spent in editing the retrospective file
for eventual publication. 48
It was recognized at the time that not only
would this change greatly enhance the proven
utility of the current printed catalog, but would
also offer the hope of "lifting a great burden
of frustration from the shoulders of the exist-
ing union catalog staff and of preparing the
way for the ultimate publication of that great
bibliographical instrument." By providing a
terminus point for the older file, a current
catalog would allow for the stabilization of
that file in terms of growth. In addition, with
the passage of time the current publication
would assume retrospective importance. 49
The ALA Board on Resources established
a subcommittee chaired by Wagman to exam-
ine the proposal and to make recommenda-
tions regarding its implementation. Using re-
sponses from surveys of subscribers to the
Catalog and statistics provided by the Library
of Congress, the subcommittee found the pro-
posal economically feasible 50 and selected
1 956 imprints as the best starting point for the
National Union Catalog: A Cumulative Au-
thor List. The publication plan was formonthly
updates with quarterly and annual cumula-
tions. 51 Following the pattern of its predeces-
sor, the annual cumulations were eventually
succeeded by five-year cumulations, although
the entries, for 1956 and 1 957 were eventually
published in both the 1953- 1957 and the 1958-
1962 cumulations. 52
A major breakthrough in terms of nation-
wide bibliographic control of library materi-
als, the new printed catalog sparked an expo-
nential growth in the number of reports of
library holdings. The total number of titles
reported to the catalog in 1956 numbered
103,000; in 1957, 326,00; and by 1962,
THE NA TIONAL UNION CATALOG 1 61
823,000." The size of five-year cumulations
also reflected this same dramatic growth. The
first numbered 28 volumes; while the last, for
1973-1977, totaled 150 volumes. 54
Plans for a Retrospective Union
Catalog
The success of the printed catalog of
current titles made the need for publication of
the retrospective file more apparent. The ex-
istence of the self-contained and relatively
compact file of 1952-1955 imprints allowed
for the possibility of a small step in that direc-
tion. In 1959 the ALA subcommittee on the
National Union Catalog decided to sponsor its
publication. Johannes L. Dewton was chosen
as supervisor and editor of the project, and the
30-volume National Union Catalog, 1952-
1955 Imprints was distributed to subscribers
inl961. 55
Further encouraged by the sales of this
publication and the execution of the project,
the subcommittee decided to undertake publi-
cation of the entire pre- 195 6 file. In 1962, the
subcommittee began lengthy discussions of
possible formats, including microfilm,
microprint and even a "mechanized, central
storage bank." Late that same year, the Com-
mittee on Resources received a report from
Johannes Dewton that estimated the editorial
costs of the project to be $2,700,00. 56
In October 1963, the Subcommittee on
the NUC decided to invite bids for the publi-
cation of the pre- 1 956 catalog. The successful
bidder would be required to finance the edito-
rial costs and allowed to recoup these from the
sale of the catalog. If no satisfactory bid was
accepted, the plan was to seek grant support
for the editorial costs, or failing that, ask
subscribing libraries to support these costs up
front.
A preliminary agreement between the
Library of Congress and the American Li-
brary Association was signed in June 1964.
The agreement made publication possible,
and, according to the terms, ALA agreed to
obtain the funds necessary for the Library to
edit the catalog. In March 1965, after consid-
ering existing technologies and the likelihood
of subscription support for each, the subcom-
mittee decided on a bookformat for theplanned
publication. After two mailings of invitations
for bids, three bids with sample pages were
received by the August 1966 deadline. The
subcommittee selected the bid from Mansell
Information/Publishing, Ltd., of London on
the basis of the lowest sale price to libraries
and the most satisfactory format. Contract
negotiations between ALA and the company
were concluded in January 1967. In February,
the Library of Congress established the Na-
tional Union Catalog Publication Project
(NUCPP) to edit the catalog. Under guidance
from John Cronin, work began with Johannes
Dewton being selected as head of the project
and Nathan N. Mendelldoffas assistant head.
By March the first 27,000 edited cards to
comprise the first volume were on their way to
London."
Mansell Publishing, although a British
firm formed specifically for the purpose of
publishing the National Union Catalog, had
important advantages that enabled it to win the
bidding process. The first of these was the
experience its managing editor, John Com-
mander, gained in publishing the British
Museum's General Catalogue of Printed
Books from 1961 to 1966. The second was the
optical innovations of its parent company,
Balding and Mansell, a subsidiary of Bemrose
Publishing Company. 58 Essentially the firm
had developed a system of sense-marking
cards that made it possible to direct camera
equipment to film only portions of cards in-
stead of entire cards. The process not only
made the filming of cards faster, but the effi-
cient use of space in the final product resulted
in lowered printing costs. 59
The original contract called fora schedule
of 60 volumes per year. The set was expected
to take 1 years to complete and run some 610
volumes. Each of the 14-inch volumes would
contain about 700 pages and be priced at $15.
1 68 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
An inflationary factor of 10 percent over the
ten year length of the project was included in
the contract, but proved grossly insufficient.*
A supplement was also planned to accommo-
date those reports received after publication
began. 65
Editorial Processes
Once the contracts were in place, the
Library of Congress was able to jump quickly
into the editorialprocess. In eager anticipation
of the event, John Cronin had years before
spelled out the basic guidelines to be fol-
lowed." The Library also had the previous
experience of compilingthree 5-year cumula-
tions of the current National Union Catalog,
and many of the procedures and arrangements
established for the publication of the pre- 1956
imprints had precedents in these projects/ 3
The task facing the project staff was sift-
ing through some 20 million cards from vari-
ous files, and to weed and edit them to an
acceptable, consistent standard for publica-
tion. The lack of standardization in a file built
over a 67-year period that had seen three
major revisions in cataloging codes plus innu-
merable changes in filing rules posed tremen-
dous problems. In addition, the individual
entries varied greatly in terms of accuracy and
completeness. For example, a large number of
entries contributed by Princeton during the
1920s were no more than one line long, while
other records included incredible detail. De-
spite the long-standing rule of Library of Con-
gress cards taking precedence, a substantial
amount of weeding needed to be done.*" In
some cases, the duplicate entries numbered
into the hundreds.
Preparing the file forpublication required
a number of processes. The first of these was
interfiling seven different supplements with
the main file. Pre-editors, or searchers, then
reviewed the trays card-by-card, removing
duplicate entries and transferring holdings
information to thebestavailablerecord. Cross
references were verified* filing adjusted, and
all trays were compared to the Library of
Congress Official Catalog to be sure that all
LC printed cards were included in the Na-
tional Union Catalog. 65
The 25 to 30 project editors each re-
viewed one 1,400-card tray each week, 65
checking for correctness of entry and form,
resolving conflicts, adding entries and cross
references, arranging the filing order, and
identifying entries that needed retyping. The
cards were then examined by copy editors
who, in preparing the cards for the filming
pro cess, reviewed location symbols and elimi-
nated extraneous information. If necessary,
the cards were then retyped before review by
a senior editor. 67
The five senior editors who performed the
final checking of entries ensured the biblio-
graphic standards of the catalog. Checking
some five trays each every week, they re-
viewed the quality of the editors' work and
resolved previously unsolved problems. 58
After the final review, the cards were
stamped sequentially, to insure the arrange-
ment, and microfilmed. The film served as
protection against loss of the shipment, and
also provided an inhouse copy of the file for
use until the printed volumes arrived. 69 The
cards were then packed up and sent via air
freight to London on Friday, and the whole
process began again the following Monday.
Amazingly, the staff never missed a dead-
line, and the pace of five volumes per month
was maintained unfailingly until the end of the
685- volume main sequence in June 1979. 70 In
order to meet the publication schedule, some
voluminous authors and corporate bodies had
to be assigned to senior editors as special
projects, weeks ahead of the normal time-
table. 71 Some sections required more elabo-
rate treatment, Johannes Dewton continued
working on the United States section even
after his retirement in 1975. 72 By plan, only
volumes 53-56 covering the Bible were pub-
lished out of sequence after completion of the
rest of the main set. 73
The worst problems were encountered
during the first 2 years, when the enormous
scale of the difficulties involved, previously
THE NA TIONAL UNION CATALOG 169
only imagined, was finally experienced in
practice. It became apparent very early in the
project that too much optimism and miscalcu-
lation had resulted in insufficient staffto handle
the editorial work. Perhaps the direst moment
was at the end of the first year when the
contract with Mansell was under renegotia-
tion and the Librarian of Congress threatened
to terminate the Library's involvement.
Mansell agreed to finance a larger editorial
staff, 74 and the work continued with as many
as 57 employees. 75
Editorial Flexibility
Another key to the success of the project
was the willingness of the editors to adapt their
procedures. The project had begun with a few
basic guidelines:
1. Library of Congress printed cards took
precedence for all items and multiple
reports were to be transferred to these
master cards.
2. When alternative headings existed, Li-
brary of Congress headings were cho-
sen.
3 . The American Library Association cata-
loging code of 1949 was the standard
for form and choice of entries.
4. Liberal use would be made of cross
references from alternative headings.
5. A unique form for author entries would
be employed, and all holdings for an
item would be listed in one place. 7 *
In practice, strict adherence to even these
few guidelines proved difficult. The publica-
tion schedule required that weekly shipments
be made in alphabetic sequence without de-
lay. The unyielding deadline forced staff to
become increasingly flexible and simplify
procedures as the project progressed.
The result was a shift in the nature of the
printed catalog from one part to the next. Later
volumes contained far fewer entries revised to
meet the 1949 ALA rules, and even included
entries following the 1967 Anglo- American
Cataloging Rules. Staff had no time to make
the new generation of reports received in the
course of the project consistent with the old
rules. Fewer added entries and cross-refer-
ences were made as time went by. Filing rules
for voluminous authors were simplified, and
even the precedence of Library of Congress
cataloging was not always acknowledged,
particularly when more complete information
was supplied by other libraries. 77
When Johannes Dewton retired in 1975,
leadership of the project was turned over to
David A. Smith, who had already served sev-
eral years as a senior editor. 78 By the time that
the main sequence editing was completed in
1979, over three million cards had been re-
ceived for the supplement Before the main
sequence was finished, the project's assistant
head, Maria Laqueur, had designed and begun
editing the supplement. Although a new pub-
licationscheduleallowedslightlyrnorebreath-
ing room, the supplement involved the addi-
tional tasks of checking in the main sequence
and publishing a register of additional loca-
tions. 79 When the last editorial work was fi-
nally completed in January 1981, some 14
years after the project's start, the staff had
reviewed over 23 million cards and prepared
over 1 1 million for publication. 80
In addition to the Library of Congress, the
American Library Association, and Mansell
Publishing, some 1 ,350 libraries in 5 1 nations
had supported the project at a cost of over
$35,000 each. 81 After 14 years, the result was
a resource of unparalleled magnitude, of value
to libraries in acquisitions, bibliography, cata-
loging, interlibrary loan, reference, and re-
search. The new printed catalog represented
not only the largest print record of American
library holdings, but also the most extensive
record of the history of printing, particularly
of the Western world. 82
New Technology
Yet by the time of completion of the pre-
1956 catalog, the National Union Catalogwas
already something of a dinosaur, With the
advent of OCLC in the early 1970s and the
4
170 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
application of large-scale time-share comput-
ing to bibliographic systems, there was talk as
early as 1976 of the National Union Catalog
being displaced. 83 In fact, in 1 978, the Library
of Congress itself had recognized that its in-
ability to commit the necessary machine and
human resources meant that OCLC would
preempt the Library's own efforts to develop
anational online bibliographic service. 84 Even-
tually, in terms of both number of records and
contributing libraries, OCLC would dwarf the
National Union Catalog.
The 1 980s saw the introduction of auto-
mation and a new microfiche format for the
current catalog. The new format included a
register with cumulative annual name, title,
series and subject indexes and resulted in
substantial savings in time and cost. 85 How-
ever, these innovations plus the expansion of
coverage to include Oriental and Near Eastern
languages, could not make up for the conve-
nience of the online systems, which have
gradually usurped most of the NUC ' s catalog-
ing, interlibrary loan, and even reference func-
tions.
Unfortunately, the development of com-
peting bibliographic utilities has meant the
impossibility of a true national union catalog.
With many of the major research institutions
that once constituted the bulk of contributors
to the union catalog not contributing to OCLC,
the latter does not reflect a complete picture of
American library holdings, and particularly of
many esoteric research materials. The result is
that librarians and researchers must search
multiple sources and systems to identify many
hard-to-locate items. The situation will not be
helped by the current plan of the Library of
Congress for the National Union Catalog.
Books. As of the 1 990 edition, the catalog will
include only those reports from sources other
than the three major bibliographic utilities,
OCLC, RLIN, and WLN. In addition, staff in
the division will be reduced significantly. 86
These developments will leave
unaddressed several important problems. As
of 1 986, the year before the implementation of
regular reports to the catalog in magnetic tape
form, the collection of reports of pre-1956
imprints not included in the National Union
Catalog, Pre- J 95 6 Imprints main sequence or
its supplement already stood at over 2 million
cards. 87 In addition, although a Near East
National Union List began to appear in 1 988, 8S
six union catalogs containing another 2 mil-
lion records for materials in Chinese, Hebraic,
Japanese, Korean, South Asian, and Southeast
Asian languages remain unpublished. 89 While
these problems may eventually be solved by
various retrospective conversion projects, in
the meantime a wealth of bibliographic infor-
mation gathered for such projects will go
largely untapped.
Unlike some other important reference
works, the National Union Catalog was not
the product of a single person's ideas or ef-
forts. Being based at a large institution, such as
the Library of Congress, allowed the catalog
to evolve slowly in terms of both purpose and
design. Over the decades, several individuals
made important contributions to shaping the
reference tool. While Henry Putnam provided
the official support necessary to establish the
catalog, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., gave the
financial support needed to build the file into
something significant. Ernest Richardson,
Ernest Kletsch, and George Schwegmann, Jr.,
presided for nearly three decades over the
massive work of building the catalog. John
Cronin and Frederick Wagman were perhaps
the most effective of many advocates of bring-
ing the catalog to print form. Johannes Dewton,
David Smith, and John Commander ably
oversaw the tremendous task of editing the
catalog and producing National Union Cata-
log, Pre-1956 Imprints. However, this pio-
neering effort in resource sharing was truly
the result of thousands of hands. From the
legion of filers and editors at the Library of
Congress to the army of catalogers from hun-
dreds of libraries throughout North America,
all played a significant role in building a
tremendous bibliographic resource.
. L
_*j?jfe
PUBLICATION HISTORY
THE NA TIONAL UNION CATALOG 171
The National Union Catalog; a cumulative author
list representing Library of Congress printed
cards and titles reported by other American
libraries. Washington: Library of Congress,
1956-1982 (Monthly, with Quarterly and An-
nual Updates).
The National Union Catalog, Music and
Phonorecords (title varies). Washington: Li-
brary of Congress, 1956- .
Tfie National Union Catalog, Motion Pictures and
Filmstrips (title varies). Washington: Library
of Congress, 1956-1982.
The National Union Catalog, a Cumulative Author
List, 1955-1957. Ann Arbor: J.W. Edwards,
Inc., 1958. 28 vols. (v. 1-20, Authors; v.27,
Music and phonograph records; v. 28, Motion
pictures and filmstrips).
The National Union Catalog, J 952-1 955 Imprints.
Ann Arbor: J.W. Edwards, Inc., 1961. 30 vols.
The National Union Catalog, a Cumulative Author
List, 1958-1962. New York: Rowman and
Littlefield, Inc., 1963. 54 vols. (v. 1-50, Au-
thors; v.5 1 -52, Music and Phonorecords; v. 53-
54 Motion Pictures and Film Strips).
National Union Catalog, Register of Additional Lo-
cations. Washington: Library of Congress, June
1965- . (Published inbook form, 1965-1980; in
microfiche format, 1 980- . Cumulative micro-
fiche edition covers 1968-).
The National Union Catalog, a Cumulative Author
List, 1963-1967. Ann Arbor: J.W. Edwards,
Inc., 1 968. 72 vols. (v. 1-59, Authors; v. 60-66,
Register of Additional Locations; v. 67-70,
Music and Phonorecords; v. 71-72, Motion
Pictures and Film Strips).
Library of Congress and National Union Catalog
Author Lists, 1942-1962: A Master Cumula-
tion. Detroit: Gale Research Company, 1969.
152 vols.
The National Union Catalog, 1956-1967. Totowa,
NJ: Rowman and Littlefield, Inc., 1970-1972.
125 vols.
The National Union Catalog, a Cumulative Author
List, 1968-1972. Ann Arbor: J.W. Edwards,
Inc., 1973. 128 vols. (v. 1-104, Authors; v. 105-
1 19, Register of Additional Locations; v. 120—
1 24, Music; v. 1 25-128, Films and Other Mate-
rials for Projection).
The National Union Catalog, a Cumulative Author
List, 1973-1977. Totowa, NJ: Rowman and
Littlefield, Inc., 1978. 150 vols. (v. 1-135,
Authors; v. 136-143, Music; 144-150 Films
and Other Materials for Projection).
The National Union Catalog, Pre- 1956 Imprints.
London: Mansell, 1968-1981. 754 vols.
National Union Catalog. Books. (Microfiche) Wash-
ington: Libraiy of Congress, 1983-. (Monthly,
with Annual Cumulation. Register Format with
Name, Title, Series and Subject indexes).
National Union Catalog. Audiovisual Materials ^(mi-
crofiche). Washington: Library of Congress,
1983- .
National Union Catalog. Cartographic Materials
(microfiche). Washington; Library of Congress,
1983- .
BIBLIOGRAPHY
While researchers are lucky in having a
number of written accounts by individuals
closely involved in the National Union Cata-
log, there is considerable redundancy in what
has been written about it, even in the brief list
of sources provided here. The introductory
section to the National Union Catalog, Pre-
1956 Imprints, its printed prospectus, and the
volume In Celebration (done to commemo-
rate the completion of the project) conve-
niently assemble a large amount of informa-
tion on the catalog, but overlap considerably.
The last is perhaps the most most comprehen-
sive in coverage and includes articles by Wil-
liam J. Welsh, Gordon R. Williams, David A.
Smith, and John Commander. Somewhat al-
tered versions of the articles by Smith and
Welsh are also listed. For the most detailed
discussion on the early development of the
catalog, see the article by Schwegmann. For a
discussion of developments during the 1950s,
see the articles by Cronin (the first of which
also appeared in the prospectus) and the col-
lection of papers by Charles David and others.
For lively descriptions of the editorial process,
see either of the articles by David Smith.
Finally, required reading for using and under-
standing the scope and limitations of the Na-
tional Union Catalog, Pre-1956 Imprints is
Johannes Dewton's introductory essay.
Cronin, John W. "History of the National Union
Catalog, Pre- 1956 Imprints." In Book Catalogs,
compiled by Maurice F. Tauber and Hilda
Feinberg, 118-32. Meruchen, NJ: Scarecrow
Press, 1971.
172 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
, 'The National Union and Library of Con-
gress Catalogs: Problems and Prospects." li-
brary Quarterly 34 (January, 1964): 77-96.
David, Charles W., etal. "Proposed Expansion of the
Library of Congress Catalog — Books: Authors
into a Current National Union Catalog, 1956."
College and Research Libraries 17 (Janu-
ary, 1956): 24-40.
Dewton, Johannes L. "Introduction to the National
Union Catalog, Pre- 1956 Imprints." In National
Union Catalog, Pre-1 956 Imprints, vol. 1, xi-
xix. London: Manse]!, 1968.
In Celebration: The National Union Catalog, Pre-
1956 Imprints, edited by John Y, Cole. Wash-
ington: Library of Congress, 1981.
"National Union Catalog; Celebrates 30 Years."
Library of Congress Information Bulletin 46
(June;, 1987): 228-33.
Prospectus for the National Union Catalog, Pre-
1956 Imprints. London: Mansell, 1967.
Schwegmann, George A., Jr. "The National Union
Catalog in the Library of Congress." In Union
Catalogs in the United States, edited by Robert
B. Downs, 229-63. Chicago: American Library
Association, 1942.
Smith, David A. "The National Union Catalog Pre-
1956 Imprints." The Book Collector 31 (Win-
ter, 1982): 445-62.
Welsh, William J. "The Last of the Monumental
Book Catalogs." American Libraries 12 (Sep-
tember, 1981): 464-68.
Williams, Gordon R. "History of the National Union
Catalog, Pre- 1 956 Imprints." In National Union
Catalog, Pre- 1956 Imprints, vol. l,vii-x. Lon-
don: Mansell, 1968.
NOTES
1 William Welsh, "The Last of the Monumental Book
Catalogs," American Libraries 12 (September
1981): 468.
2 Richard Shoemaker, review of National Union Catalog,
Pre- 1956 Imprints,Library Resources &Technical
Services 13 (Summer 1969): 431.
3 Annual Report of the Librarian ofCongress(\91\): 29.
* Welsh, "The Last of the Monumental Book Catalogs,"
466-67.
i John Y. Cole, "Introduction," in In Celebration: the
National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Imprints, ed. by
John Y. Cole. (Washington: Library of Congress,
1981), 3-4.
•Gordon R. Williams, "History of the National Union
Catalog Pre- 1 956 Imprints," in The National Union
Catalog, Pre-1956 Imprints, vol. 1 (London:
Mansell, 1968), vii.
7 F. P. Jordan, "The History of Printed Catalog Cards,"
Public Libraries 9 (July 1904): 3 18-20.
8 Williams, vii,
9 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1902):
101.
10 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1901):
241.
1 ' A nnual Report of the Librarian of Congress ( 1 9 1 0): 7 1 .
12 Annual Report of the Librarian o/Cowgrass (1908): 58.
13 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1928):
238.
u Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1909):
57-59.
ls George A. Schwegmann, Jr., "The National Union
Catalog in the Library of Congress," in Union
Catalogs in the United States, ed, by Robert B.
Downs (Washington: American Library Associa-
tion, 1942), 231,
16 Ibid., 232.
" Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1927):
240.
18 Schwegmann, "The National Union Catalog in the
Library of Congress," 232.
19 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1927):
240.
20 Schwegmann, "The National Union Catalog in the
Library of Congress," 233-35.
21 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (2927):
240,
22 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1932): 78,
25 Schwegmann, "The National Union Catalog in the
Library of Congress," 235-37.
24 Ibid., 247.
"Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1935):
48-49.
26 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1936): 52.
27 Schwegmann, "The National Union Catalog in the
Library of Congress," 252.
u Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1944); 82.
29 Schwegmann, "The National Union Catalog in the
Library of Congress," 250-51.
30 Ibid., 252-53.
31 Ibid., 257,
32 Ibid., 256.
23 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress ( 1 93 5): 47,
^Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1942):
46^17.
35 Annual Report of 'the Librarian of Congress (1 943): 49.
36 John W. Cronin, "The National Union and Library of
Congress Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," Li-
brary Quarterly 34 (January 1964): 80.
Z1 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1 943): 48.
3S Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," 80.
Jg Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1943): 48,
w Annual Report of the Librarian of 'Congress (1944): 82.
41 Williams, viii.
42 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1928);
243.
" George A. Schwegmann, Jr. "The National Union
Catalog in the Next Decade — Some Unsolved Prob-
lems," Library Resources & Technical Services 1
(Summer 1957): 159,
THE NATIONAL UNION CATALOG 173
44 Charles W.David, "Proposed Expansion oFthe Library
of Congress Catalog-Books-. Authors into a Current
National Union Catalog, 1 956," College and Re-
search Libraries 17 (January 1956): 25.
45 Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," 82.
"David, 24,
11 Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," 80-81.
"George A. Schwegmann, Jr. and Robert D. Stevens,
"The Proposal for a Current Author Catalog of
American Library Resources," College and Re-
search Libraries 17 (January 1956): 29.
4 ' David, 25.
"Schwegmann and Stevens, 28-29.
51 Ibid., 31.
53 Johannes Dewton, "Introduction to the National Union
Catalog Pre-1 956 Imprints," in The National Union
Catalog, Pre-1956 Imprints, vol. 1 (London:
Mansell, 1968), xii.
"Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," 81-82.
* "1973-1977 National Union Catalog Goes to Press in
Record Time," Library of Congress Information
Bulletin 38 (March 9, 1979): 81.
"Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects," 82.
16 Ibid., 84-85.
" John W. Cronin, "History of the National Union Cata-
log, Pre-1956 Imprints," in Book Catalogs, com-
piled by Maurice F. Tauber and Hilda Feinberg
(Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1971), 129-32.
is John Commander, "Publishing the NUC," in In Cel-
ebration: The National Union Catalog, Pre-1956
Imprints, ed. by John Y. Cole (Washington: Library
of Congress, 1981), 28-30.
w William Welsh, "The Library of Congress," in In
Celebration: The National Union Catalog, Pre-
1956 Imprints, ed. by John Y. Cole (Washington:
Library of Congress, 1981), 10.
60 Welsh, "The Last of the Monumental Book Catalogs,"
467.
61 John Commander, "Production and Publication of the
National Union Catalog Pre- 1 956 Imprints/'inTVie
National Union Catalog, Pre-1956 Imprints, vol. 1
(London: Mansell, 1968), xx.
62 Cronin, "The National Union and Library of Congress
Catalogs, Problems and Prospects,*' 83.
63 "The 1968-1972 Quinquennnial Edition of the Na-
tional Union Catalog," Library of Congress Infor-
mation Bulletin 33 (October II, 1974): A213-
A214.
44 David A. Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-
1956 Imprints," The Book Collector 3 1 (Winter
1982): 448^19.
65 Margaret PorterSmith, "The National Union Catalog
Pre-1956 Imprints; A Progress Report," Library
Resources <& Technical Sen>ices20 (Winter 1 976):
49-50.
66 Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 453.
67 PorterSmith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956
Imprints: A Progress Report," 50-51.
68 Smith, u Tha National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 454.
69 PorterSmith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956
Imprints: A Progress Report," 51.
70 Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 450.
7J PorterSmith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956
Imprints: A Progress Report," 50,
72 David Smith, "Editing the NUC," in In Celebration:
The National Union Catalog, Pre-1956 Imprints,
ed. by John Y. Cole (Washington: Library of Con-
gress, 1981), 27.
"PorterSmith, 50.
74 Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 449.
75 PorterSmith, 49.
76 Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 449.
"Ibid., 451-53.
78 Welsh, "The Last of the Monumental Book Catalogs,"
467.
79 Smith, "The National Union Catalog Pre-1956 Im-
prints," 458.
80 Ibid., 449-50.
81 Welsh, "The Last of the Monumental Book Catalogs,"
468.
82 A,Plotnik,"NewsThatStaysNews,'Mmerictt«iiirar-
ies 12 (September 1981): 453.
83 Joe A. Hewitt, "The Impact of OCLC," American
Libraries 7 (May 1976): 271.
u Role of the Library of Congress in the Evolving Na-
tional Network (Washington: Library of Congress,
1978), 7.
w "The National Union Catalog: Celebrates 30 Years,"
Library of Congress Information Bulletin 46 (June
I, 1987): 230-32.
86 "Library of Congress Announces Changes in National
Union Catalog," Library of Congress News Press
Release, PR 90-77 (June 1, 1990): np.
87 Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1986): A-
12.
88 "Library Launches Near East Union List," Library of
Congress Information Bulletin 47 (June 20, 1 988):
243.
M Annual Report of the Librarian of Congress (1986): A-
12.
a
The Record of Record:
The New York Times Index
Jo A. Cotes
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
On the ninth floor of the New York Times
building on grubby West 43rd Street, in a
room now shared with the newspaper's Rights
and Royalties Department, about 20 editors,
abstracters, indexers, and clerks produce one
of the most influential and remarkable docu-
ments of ourtime. If the New York Times is the
newspaper of record, then certainly the New
York Times Index is the record of record.
Under the leadership of Adolph S. Ochs,
the Times slogan became "All the News That's
Fit to Print." "Ochs created the traditions that
made the Times great — its full coverage, com-
pleteness, and accuracy— and that are sus-
tained by his descendents." 1 Even with a daily
circulation ofmorethan onemillion, the Times
still sells fewer papers than the Wall Street
Journal or the New York Daily News, but it
also has won more Pulitzer Prizes than any
other newspaper.
Back in 195 1 , Meyer Berger, one of those
Pulitzer Prize-winning Tim es reporters, wrote:
Because the Times has won universal recogni-
tion as a newspaper of record, it is in demand
in many forms — full size in bound newsprint,
in rag paper for better preservation, on tiny
microfilm where a full page is reduced to a
little more than one inch. Libraries, parlia-
ments, gteatbusiness houses all over the world
subscribe for it in these forms. The semi-
monthly New York Times Index for quick
reference to the newspaper's contents, and an
annual index that runs to some 1,500 pages,
are also available. 2
Early Days of Benign Neglect
The Index, as highly regarded as it is
today, has a peculiar history of almost benign
neglect. All indexes since the newspaper's
birth in 1851 are now widely available, but
that was not always so. For decades, the Index
was used simply as an in-house resource.
From September 18, 1851, to September 1858
the Index was compiled in longhand. "In the
beginning, it was a brief and sketchy affair,
entered painstakingly in longhand into a
leather-covered ledger volume, and it was
intended for staff use only. An index of this
kind, with minor changes in format, was main-
tained for more than sixty years except for two
periods of suspension (September 1 858through
1 862 and July 1905 through 1912), J "the rea-
sons for which cannot now be determined." 4
Indexes for the period covering September 18,
1858, through December 31, 1862, were fi-
nally compiled in the 1960s and published in
1967. "The project to bridge this gap in the
series of indexes to the Times was conceived
and begun by Joseph C. Gephart, editor of the
Index until his retirement in 1964, who also
did most of the original indexing for this
volume and others in the series." 5
In 1 863, the indexes were compiled semi-
annually and, for the first time, set in type.
"Though still intended for the staff only, this
was a far more sophisticated Index than its
predecessor — It was arranged by year, and
each year was divided into three- or four-
month periods." 6 Butonce again the Index was
ms
NEW YORK TIMES INDEX 175
suspended from mid- 1905 through 1912. More
than 50 years later, indexes for those lost years
were compiled and published beginning in
1 968 . The earlier indexes, especially the hand-
written ones, present some expected research
glitches. For example, the longhand entries
are not divided by year — they are strictly
alphabetical. And the number directly to the
right of those entries are not dates, but refer the
user to an issue number. In addition, complete
names are not always listed.
Stability and Growth
It was not until 1913 that a semblance of
the Index that we know today was published.
Indexes were compiled quarterly from 1 9 1 3 to
1929, then monthly from 1930to 1947. It was
during this latter time period that cumulative
annual volumes were introduced. From 1948
to the present, indexes have been published
semimonthly. Since 1978, there have been
quarterly cumulations. A subscription to the
semimonthly issues plus the cumulative an-
nual cost $50 in 1952. By 1990 the price had
climbed to $645.
The current New York Times Index is a
unique subject, geographic, organization, and
personal name indexing/abstracting tool to the
final late edition of the New York Times.
Almost every article, with the exception of
some letters and advertisements, is indexed.
Arranged in dictionary form, it refers the user
to the date, page, and column where the article
is located in the newspaper. It offers cross-
references, and such detailed abstracts of ar-
ticles that the user may not need to locate the
entire article.
In addition to serving as an almanac of
sorts, the Index has also been used as a scien-
tific tool, often playing a major role in social
science research. For example, an article in
the Journal of Consumer Affairs reported that
the Index had been used to "test the vi ability of
the resource mobilization perspective on the
farm workers' movement" and was analyzed
for indications of "macro-level changes in
activities of the groups involved," 7
Harvey L. Holmes, Jr., assistant director
and editor, joined the Index staff in 1967, and
became editor in 1975. He notes that "This is
the best selling index on the market, and in
many ways the most respected. Before we
take our bows we must acknowledge that
other papers are doing indexes and putting
them out earlier." 8 The index to the Washing-
ton Posi> for example, is issued monthly with
an annual accumulation, but is available only
from 1 972 on, (The Post index was published
by Bell & Howell from 1972-1981 as part of
its Newspaper Index project. Most of Bell &
Howell's indexed newspapers are available
from the mid- 1 970s on, but it has also indexed
the New York Tribune, 1841-1924, available
on microfilm.) The Wall Street Journal also
offers a monthly index with annual cumula-
tions, available from 1955 to the present. No
other newspaper index today, however, offers
the detailed abstracts and documentation avail-
able in the Times Index.
The New York Times Index has had seri-
ous weight problems at times. The 196% Index
boasted 1,713 pages, which led John Rothman,
one of the great Index editors, to write in his
foreword that year, "This volume lends sub-
stance to our new slogan: 'If it's not in the
Times Index, maybe it didn't happen.'" 9 "As
the Times continued to grow in size and the
news became even more complex, the number
and length of the abstracts increased in pro-
portion, and the Index got bigger . . . and
bigger," wrote Rothman.
Some of the annual Index volumes of the mid-
30s were virtually cubic in shape. The paper
shortage of the war years forcibly curtailed
this, but with the end of World War II the
newspaper returned to Us Former dimensions,
and so did the Index. This led to the use of
cross-references as a substitute for duplica-
tion . . . and also led in 1948 to a change in the
physical format of the Index: largerpages.and
an arrangement of three columns, instead of
two, per page. 10
The 1940s almost saw the death of the
Index, according to Holmes. "There had been
very serious talk about ending the Index. John
Rothman saved it by emphasizing quality and
productivity."
176 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
The 1965 Index offered the first signed
foreword by Rothman along with an important
new development. More than 200maps, graphs,
charts, and photographs were included.
Ia the mid- 1970s, after Rothman had left
the Index to work on the computerized Infor-
mation Bank, and other editors had come and
gone, the newly appointed Holmes decided it
was time to exercise some control over the
Index's once again expanding girth. In 1971,
the page size had increased. In 1973, it had
split into two volumes. By 197 '4 ,the New York
Times Index weighed in at nearly 3 ,000 pages.
"We reined that in in 1975 and decided to do
a lot more editing," Holmes said. "Now the
Index is 1,200-1,500 pages, but we index
more today than ever before." For example, in
the 1988 Index, the subject heading "Plagia-
rism" offers see also references to articles
indexed under "Gallbladder," "Harvard Uni-
versity," "Medicine and Health," "Music,"
and the "Presidential Election of 1988 " One
of the entries under "Music" indicates that
"Federal Jury in White Plains, NY, finds that
Mick Jagger did not steal song, Just Another
Night, from Jamaican reggae singer Patrick
Alley (M), Ap 27, III, 22:1." This entry also
indicates to the user that this is a story of
medium length, and that it appeared in the first
column on page 22 of section three on April
27, 1 988. According to the Index, "Whenever
possible, entries are made under 'subject'
headings (e.g. Airlines, Mental Health, Steel).
. . . Names of persons and organizations are
usually covered by cross references to the
subjects of their activities."" As such, this
article also is cross-referenced under Jagger's
name.
Reform and Renaissance
In the 1980s there was criticism of the
Index once again. "We experienced a renais-
sance in the 1980s with indexing," Holmes
said. "Beginning around 1982, users felt the
Index was too complicated. Like Ulysses, it
was much admired but never read. And
granted, there was a European bias; some
headings were seen as labels. For example,
under 'China, 1 it would say 'China, Commu-
nist.' 'Homosexuality' was indexed under
crime or medical headings. For the subject
heading 'Women,' there would be a see also
reference to 'Domestic Service.' We were
behind the times." (For the record, the see also
references for 'Women' now include the 'Equal
Rights Amendment' and the 'Feminist Move-
ment,' along with 'Housewives' and 'Femi-
nine Hygiene Products.') Dr. Roy Peter Clark,
of The Poynter Institute for Media Studies, has
delighted in the cross references since exam-
ining the 1976 edition of the Index. In that
year, Dr. Clark wrote an article about religion
and education. The cross reference under his
name was "See also Jesus Christ." The Index
does tell the user that "Cross references do not
indicate the specific content of the entries to
which they refer, and should not be so con-
strued. Thus a cross reference from a person's
name to a crime heading cannot and does not
indicate whether that person is a defendant, a
witness, a prosecutor, or a person merely
commenting on the subject but not a party to
it." 12
"In the course of 125 years not all Index
editors thought alike," Rothman wrote, "and
so the Index users will find some years in
which there was no 'BookReview' listing and
no 'Deaths' listing. These aberrations of our
forebears have been remedied in the separate
cumulations of the New York Times Book
Review Index and the New York Times ObitU-
aries Index, respectively." 13 In the 1858-1968
volume of the New York Times Obituaries
Index, it was reported that
in some years, accidental deaths and suicides
were included under 'Deaths, * in other years
they were not; in some years titles were given
and in others omitted; in some years last name
and initials only were given; in some years
entries were limited to the news story of the
death itself, in others they included stories on
the preceding illness and on the aftermath.
Our aim in producing this volume was to
provide a convenient recompilation." 14
m
NEW YORK TIMES INDEX 177
It is precisely that, a recompilation; unfor-
tunately the material was not re-edited. Vol-
ume 2 of the New York Tim es Obituaries Index
covers 1969-1978. This volume includes many
individuals whose deaths are covered in the
"murders" and "suicides" sections of the In-
dex. It also contains a section of addenda and
errata for the first volume.
The lengthy, detailed abstracts available
in the modern Index are a far cry from the
early abstracts. According to Rothman:
In the years before World War I, entries
consisted generally of only one or a few words,
often in 'telegram' style. Since the newspaper
itself was small and there was no need or intent
to use thtlndexhy itself, without reference to
the original newspaper articles, these brief
entries served quite adequately to identify the
articles. But as the newspaper grew in size and
complexity, it became necessary to character-
ize the source articles more fully, and so,
during the 1920s and 30s the abstracts gradu-
ally became longer and more informative.
This development was spurred further during
the Second World War, when more detailed
abstracts were needed to distinguish one battle-
front report from another. 15
The New York Times On Microfilm is
available from the paper's beginnings in 1 8 5 1 .
The Times purchased the Microfilming Cor-
poration of America in the late 1960s and
began to produce the microfilm and micro-
fiche inhouse. The Index is now distributed by
University Microfilms International, which
purchased the Index licensing rights in 1983.
Training Indexers
Training for indexers and abstracters em-
phasizes writing. "We stress old fashioned
journalism," Holmes said. "Reading skills are
important too. The indexers need to know
when to stop reading and start writing. Index-
ers mustproduce 70-1 00 abstracts a day while
working on deadline. In addition, they have to
be aware that users will be doing onl ine search-
ing as well as reference searching." More than
25 years ago Rothman said:
Indexing is a giant guessing game. Indexers
must assess in advance what information a
user is likely to seek, where he is likely to look
for it, and how much detail the abstract (or
'entry') should include to possibly spare him
a trip to the original item in the newspaper.
They must devise ways of guiding the user to
additional information that he may not be
seeking but that would also be relevant to his
quest. They must keep in mind that they are
serving not only the users of today but also
those of future generations (who, to compli-
cate things still further, are bound to have a
different perspective and only too likely to
have a different vocabulary.) 16
Some sections of the Times are more
difficult and time-consuming to index than
others, the frontpage and international stories
among those. As early as 1924, Index editor
Jennie Well and wrote, "An indexer needs
psychological insight as much as an advertiser
does. Certainly a good imagination is a vital
element in his mental equipment." Welland
went on to say that "The staff of the Index has
turned specialist. Each person is held respon-
sible for all articles on certain assigned sub-
jects. For instance, one person takes care of
prohibition in all its complications." 17 In 1 93 1,
Charles N. Lurie, then editor of the Index,
wrote, "In the writing of the entries, certain
fields of work are assigned to each indexer;
when possible, the subjects include fields in
which she is personally interested." 18 At one
time, indexers did indeed specialize in sub-
jects, but, according to Holmes, "developed
their own fiefdoms. We prefer indexers to be
generalists."
Computerized Production
The current computer indexing system, a
far cry from the typewriter and carbon slips or
even the paper tape system of years past,
provides instant editing. The 1968 Index fore-
word indicates that the Index had just "com-
pleted a two-year program of transition to a
computer-assisted production process that
enables us to abstract and index more material
more accurately, more thoroughly and more
1 78 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
efficiently." 19 The first edition of The New
YorkTimes Thesaurus was published in 1968.
A new Thesaurus was introduced in 1982.
"We have high academic standards but
we are not an academic enterprise," Holmes
said. "We are a business and not part of the
New York Times newsroom in any way." And
according to Breckinridge Jones, Jr., deputy
editor, "We do have more contact now with
the newsroom and the library because of the
online system." In 1983, Mead Data Central
licensed the New York Times online data-
bases. This includes the Information Bank
Abstracls,vthich contains the Times abstracts
as well as abstracts from dozens of other
newspapers and magazines, A separate file
called Advertising and Marketing Intelligence
contains abstracts of articles from trade and
professional journals. In addition, the New
York Times is a full-text file on NEXIS, up-
dated daily, which contains every article pub-
lished in the paper since June 1980. Index
entries are sent through a computer program
at Mead, and the indexing terms are attached
automatically to the corresponding full-text
item. In January 1972 the Index was first
processed through the New York Times Infor-
mation Bank system.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Seymour Topping of the New York Times
wrote, "Readers have been attracted to elec-
tronic media, in some cases to the exclusion of
newspapers. In general, however, the two me-
dia are supplementary and complementary."
He went on to say that "There is a sense that we
must be thinking about shaping the newspaper
of the future so it can be more meaningful,
more serviceable, more indispensable to the
community." 20 Regardless, "for many people
today's newspaper will not be dead tomorrow
but will be then and perhaps forever a vital
source of information," Rothman wrote. "It
must have been this same conviction that
prompted Henry Jarvis Raymond to start an
index for the infant New York Times back in
1851, and that has prompted his successors to
maintain this service, to improve it and expand
it, and to offer it to the public," 21 Their efforts
have enhanced the value of the New York
Times as a historical document. Thanks to
them, this index, this road map to the New York
Times, this record of record for nearly 150
years, exists in convenient book format, readily
available in many libraries, providing access
to the newspaper of record.
The New York Times Index. New York: Bowker,
1966-1976. 15 Vols. (v. I, Sept. 185 1-1862; v.
II, 1863-1874; v. Ill, 1875-1879; v. IV, 1880-
1885; v, V, 1886-1889; v. VI, 1&9Q-1893; v.
VII, 1894-1898; v. VIII, 1899-June 1905; v.
IX, July 1905-Dec. 1906; v. X-XV, 1907-
1912.)
The New York Times Index. Semimonthly, with
annual cumulations. New York: The Times,
1913-,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Though much has been written about the
New York Times, its Index has largely been
overlooked. John Rothman, editor of the New
York Times Index through the mid-1970s,
provides the richest historical overviews in
"Preserving the News That' s Fit To Print" and
"About the Times Index." Harvey L. Holmes,
Jr., currently the Index editor, and Breck-
inridge Jones, Jr., deputy editor, contributed a
large amount of material for this essay in a
personal interview at the New York Times
Index office on 9 February 1990.
Doebler, Paul. "New York Times Opens Its Informa-
tion Bank to Commercial Clients." Publishers
Weekly 203 (June 18, 1973): 60-61.
Dolan, Donna R. "Subject Searching of the New York
Times Information Bank." Online 2 (April,
1978): 26-30.
Greengrass, Alan R. "The Information Bank Thesau-
rus." In The Information Age in Perspective,
Proceedings of the American Society for Infor-
NEW YORK TIMES INDEX 179
mation Science, comp. EverettH. Brenner, 137-
140. White Plains, NY: Knowledge Industry
Publications, 1978.
Lurie, CharlesN. "TheNew York Times Index, 1930."
Wilson Library Bulletin 5 (April, 1931): 501-
03.
Morse, Grant W. Guide to the Incomparable New
York Times Index. New York: Fleet, 1980.
"New York Times Sues Over Index." Publishers
Weekly 21 1 (20 June 1977): 28.
Paneth, Donald. "The New York Times:' In The
Encyclopedia of American Journalism, 345-49 .
New York: Facts on File, 1983.
Rothman, John. "About The Times Index" Paper
presented at a workshop on "The Uses, Misuses,
and Abuses of The New York Times Index"
jointly sponsored by Metro and Microfilming
Corporation of America, New York, April 28,
1977.
. "Automated Information Processing at the
New York Times" In Information Transfer,
American Society for Information Science Pro-
ceedings, 85-87. New York: Greenwood, 1968.
-."Preserving the News That's Fit to Print."
Saturday Review 48 (November 13, 1965): 89,
102-03.
Schwarzlose, Richard A. Newspapers, A Reference
Guide. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press, 1987.
Shepard, Douglas. "A Corrective Supplement to
Morse's Guide to the Incomparable New York
Times Index" Reference Services Review 9
(October/December, 1981): 33-35.
Slade, Rod, and Alex M. Kelly. "Sources of Popular
Literature Online: New York Times Information
Bank and the Magazine Index." Database 2
(March, 1979): 70-83.
Welland, Jennie. "Published Newspaper Index." Li-
brary Journal 49 (February 15, 1924): 177-78.
The following are indexes to the New
York Times Index, not the newspaper. Each is
an "independent work not published or ap-
proved by the New York Times*' See "New
York Times Sues Over Index" in Publishers
Weekly, June 20, 1977.
Persona! Name Index to The New York Times Index,
J 85 1-1974, edited by Byron A. Falk and Valerie
R. Falk. Verdi, NV:Roxbury Data, 1976-1983.
22 vols.
Personal Name Index to The New York Times Index,
7975-7PW,editedbyByronA.FalkandValerie
R. Falk. Verdi, NV: Roxbury Data, 1986-1988.
4 vols.
NOTES
' Donald Paneth, Encyclopedia of American Journalism
(New York: Facts on File, 1983), 345.
2 MeyerBerger, The Story of The New York Times, 1851-
1951 (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1951), 563.
3 John Rothman, "Preserving the News That's Fit to
Print," Saturday Review 48 (13 November 1965):
102.
4 John Rothman, Foreword to the New York Times Index,
1899-June 1905, iii.
5 Foreword to the New York Times Index, July 1902-
December 1906, v.
^Foreword to the Mew York Times Index, 1863-1864, v.
'Darlene Brannigan Smith and Paul N. Bloom, "Using
Content Analysis to Understand the Consumer
Movement," Journal of Consumer Affairs 23 (Win-
ter 1989): 305.
8 Harvey L. Holmes Jr., assistant director and editor, New
York Times Index, interview with the author, 9
February 1990. Many of the direct quotes in this
essay derive from that interview with Holmes and
his colleagues.
"John Rothman, "Foreword" in the New York Times
Index, 1968, unpaged.
10 John Rothman, "About the Times Index," A paper
delivered at a workshop on "The Uses, Misuses, and
Abuses of the New York Times Index jointly spon-
sored by Metro and Microfilming Corporation of
America, 28 April 1977:2.
11 "How to Use the New York Times Index," in the New
York Times Index, 1988, unpaged.
12 Ibid.
13 John Rothman, "About The Times Index," 6.
H John Rothman and Byron A. Falk, Jr., "Introduction"
in The New York Times Obituaries Index, 1858-
1968, (Sanford, NC: Microfilming Corporation,
1970), unpaged.
15 John Rothman, "About the Times Index" 2.
!d John Rothman, "Preserving the News That's Fit to
Print," 89, 102.
17 Jennie Welland, "The Published Newspaper Index,"
Library Journal, 49 (15 February 1924): 177.
18 CharlesN. Lurie, "TheNew York Times Index, 1930,"
Wilson Library Bulletin 5 (April 193 1): 502.
19 John Rothman, "Foreword" to the New York Times
Index, 1968, unpaged.
""Seymour Topping," in Steven Friedlander, comp.,
"Stop the Presses," Avenue 12 (October 1988): 79.
21 John Rothman, "Preserving the News That's Fit to
Print," 103.
m
Si
h
"The Jewel in the Crown": The
Oxford English Dictionary
James Rettig
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
In 1984, Robert Burchfield, editor of the four
supplementary volumes of the Oxford English
Dictionary, called that dictionary the "'jewel
in the crown'" of the Oxford University Press .'
It has not always been so. The Oxford Univer-
sity Press formally emerged from its anteced-
ents in 1690 to produce Bibles. 2 Its twofold
mission was to publish learned books as well
as the Book of Common Prayer and the Bible.
The latter category proved more lucrative.
Bibles, still a perennial item on OUP's list,
remained its stock in trade through the nine-
teenth century. The shift from being known
primarily as a publisher of The Word to being
the publisher about words began in the middle
of the nineteenth century and was complete
early in the twentieth.
The history of English language dictio-
naries antedates the history of the Oxford
University Press by nearly a century and that
of its great dictionary by yet another and more .
Robert Cawdrey's A Table Alphabetical!
(1604), generally acknowledged to be the first
English dictionary, was simply a list of diffi-
cult words. It explained their meanings and
labeled those words having aFrench or Greek
origin, but other apparatus familiar to today's
dictionary users — etymology, identification
of a word's part of speech, and illustrative
quotations—were lacking. These features
developed in later dictionaries, butuntil Nathan
Bailey published his An Universal Etymologi-
cal English Dictionary in 1721, English-lan-
guage dictionaries largely followed that early
model of listing only hard words. Although
Bailey listed only about 40,000 words, he
included many common, even some vulgar,
words as well as difficult ones. 3
Johnson's and Richardson's
Dictionaries
Later in the eighteenth century, Samuel
Johnson broke new ground in two ways. First,
in his Plan for a Dictionary of the English
Language (1747), he examined various prin-
ciples by which he could exclude categories of
words from the dictionary and found all of
them lacking. His Plan implies a theretofore
unknown catholicity in lexicography. How-
ever, the incredible demands of the task he
imposed upon himself forced him to modify
his plan in practice and the dictionary was not
as inclusive as expected. Nevertheless, his
intent was noble and it anticipated later lexico-
graphical efforts managed by teams. Second,
he illustrated the meanings of words and their
various senses through quotations. This prac-
tice dates back to at least 1598 when John
Florio used it in his A Worlde of Wordes, an
Italian-English dictionary that included quo-
tations from Italian authors. But it was John-
son who made the practice the foundation of
serious English lexicography. In his famous
preface to his dictionary, he advised his read-
ers that "The solution of all difficulties, and
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 181
the supply of all defects, must be sought in the
examples, subjoined to the various senses of
each word, and ranged according to the time of
their authors." 4 With the first edition of his
Dictionary (1755), Johnson set a powerful
precedent, drawing many of his quotes from
noted writers such as Shakespeare, Dryden,
and Bacon whose works he "regardfed] as the
wells of English undefikd" 5 Because neither
he nor anyone else at the time understood the
proper pronunciation of Middle English, he
had little appreciation of Chaucer and other
early authors; therefore in his dictionary John-
son drew illustrative quotes principally from
writers of the Elizabethan age and later.
Johnson's dictionary went through four edi-
tions in his lifetime, the last appearing in 1773;
was reprinted numerous times thereafter; and
was used as a foundation for later dictionaries,
including Noah Webster's.
The next significant advance in English
lexicography was Webster's An American
Dictionary of the English Language (New
York: S. Converse, 1828). Webster did not
think quotations were necessary and relied
instead solely on precision in definitions to
convey words' meanings. Webster advanced
English lexicography, theretofore an art prac-
ticed to advantage only in Great Britain, by
treating terms of American origin or use with
the same seriousness as those drawn from the
canons of Shakespeare and Spenser.
Charles Richardson also contributed to
the principles of English lexicography. In his
A New Dictionary of the English Language
(London: W. Pickering, 1836-37), he col-
lected illustrative quotations back to the four-
teenth century; Johnson used quotes only as
far back as Sir Philip Sidney (1554-1586).
However, because Richardson's purpose in
compiling his dictionary and selecting his
quotes was to demonstrate that each word
"had a single immutable meaning," 6 his dic-
tionary was flawed in conception and thus in
execution. It did, nonetheless, offer some-
thing more up-to-date than Johnson's dictio-
nary, by then 80 years old.
The Philological Society
Thoughtful men recognized thatalthough
Richardson's recorded a greater percentage
of the English vocabulary than any other dic-
tionary, it was incomplete. Hence on June 18,
1857, the Philological Society of London ap-
pointed a committee consisting of Herbert
Coleridge, F.J. Furnivall, and Richard
Chenevix Trench "to collect unregistered
words in English.*' 7 The intent was to compile
a supplement to Richardson's dictionary and
thereby bring the lexicographic record of En-
glish up to date. But then, on November 5 and
19 of that year, Trench, then Dean of
Westminster and later Anglican Archbishop
of Dublin, presented to the Society a two-part
paper entitled "On some Deficiencies in our
English Dictionaries." Trench faulted exist-
ing dictionaries on seven points:
I. Obsolete words are incompletely regis-
tered; some inserted, some not; with no rea-
sonableruleadducedfortheomissionofthese,
the insertion of those other.
II. Families or groups of words are often
imperfect, some members of a family in-
serted, while others are omitted.
III. Oftentimes much earlier examples of the
employment of words exist than any which
our Dictionaries have cited; indicating that
they were earlier introduced into the language
than these examples would imply; and in case
of words now obsolete, much later, frequently
marking their currency at a period long after
that when we are left to suppose that they
passed out of use.
IV. Important meanings and uses of words are
passed over; sometimes the later alone given,
while the earlier, without which the history of
words will be often maimed and incomplete,
or even unintelligible, are unnoticed.
V. Comparatively little attention is paid to the
distinguishing of synonymous words.
VI. Many passages in our literature are passed
by, which might be usefully adduced in illus-
tration of the first introduction, etymology,
and meaning of words.
VII. And lastly, our Dictionaries err in redun-
dancy as well as in defect, in the too much as
182 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
If
well as the toolittle; all of them inserting some
things, and some of them many things, which
have properly no claim to find room in their
pages. 8
Trench's trenchant criticism of the state of
English lexicography, supported by copious
examples, convinced the Society to abandon
its inadequate plan to issue a supplementary
dictionary in favor of a plan to create an
entirely new dictionary. The faults Trench
found in existing dictionaries implied the
desiderata for the new dictionary. These
formed the foundation for what was to become
the Oxford English Dictionary.
As the OED's. legendary editor, James
A.H. Murray noted, "the English Dictionary,
like the English Constitution, is the creation of
no one man, and of no one age; it is a growth
that has slowly developed itself adown the
ages." 9 Murray was speaking not of the dictio-
nary he was editing, but of English dictionar-
ies collectively, of which the OED is but the
exemplar. As those that came before it and the
many that have with heavy indebtedness to the
OED followed, the plan that developed for the
OED had antecedents in earlier dictionaries.
The nineteenth century was the golden
age of philology. In. Germany Jacob and
Wilhelm Grimm pioneered the study of lan-
guage on historical principles. They estab-
lished the practices of basing definitions of
words on historical principles, that is, of dis-
cerning their meanings through use and of
charting changes in meaning through changes
in use over the life of a word. At the time
Trench had influenced the Philological Soci-
ety to embark upon a new English dictionary,
the Grimms had already been at work on a
historical dictionary of German for several
years. The first part of their Deutsches
Worterbuch (Leipzig: S. Hirzel, 1852-1960)
appeared in 1 852, The project suffered andyet
survived setbacks, including two world wars,
and concluded in 1960.
The Grimms' Deutsches Worterbuch was
not the only model for the Philological Society
to imitate. Hans Aarsleff has shown that
Herbert Coleridge, the dictionary's first edi-
tor, credited George Liddell and Robert Scott's
Greek-English Lexicon Based on the German
Work of Francis Passow (Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1 843) as an exemplar for its
reliance on quotations for clues as to usage,
meaning, etc. In a letter to Trench, Coleridge
said that "the theory of lexicography we pro-
fess is that which Passow was the first to
enunciate clearly and put into practice suc-
cessfully — viz., 'that every word should be
made to tell its own story'— the story of its
birth and life, and in many cases of its death,
and even occasionally of its resuscitation." 10
Passow, a German philologist, firstpropounded
these principles in 1812. u
From the examples provided by the
Deutsches Worterbuch and Passow as embod-
ied in Liddell and Scott' s Lexicon and from the
inspiration of Trench's critique of English
dictionaries, the Society on January 7, 1858,
resolved "That instead of the Supplement to
the Standard English Dictionaries now in
course of preparation by the order of the
Society, a New Dictionary of the English
Language be prepared under the Authority of
the Philological Society." 12 Just two weeks
later F.J. Furnivall read to the Society "a
circular which the New Dictionary Commit-
tee proposed to issue, stating the plan of the
Dictionary and asking for help in carrying it
out," 13 The help sought was readers to record
occurrences of words in the works of noted
English writers. When the intention had been
to issue a supplementary rather than a com-
pletely new dictionary, members of the Soci-
ety voluntarily read books and prepared re-
ports of "unregistered words." Thus was es-
tablished the manner in which the editors
would obtain the basic building bricks they
would fashion into the monumental dictio-
nary.
Coleridge's and Fumivall's
Editorships
The next year Herbert Coleridge, grand
nephew of the famous poet, accepted the
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 1 83
dictionary's editorship. That same year saw
publication of the Proposal for the Publica-
tion of a New English Dictionary by the Philo-
logical Society (London: Trtibner, 1859). The
founding principles enunciated in this docu-
ment attest to the influence of Trench' s ideas.
The proposal calls for the inclusion of "every
word occurring in the literature of the lan-
guage it professes to illustrate," the gathering
of quotations back to "the end of the reign of
Henry III [i.e., 1272]," the uniform adoption
of the historical principle in the treatment of
individual words, and the inclusion in every
etymology of "that language which seems to
present the radical element contained in the
word in its oldest form." 14 The list of principles
put forth in the proposal echo Trench again
and again.
This proposal and other appeals by the
Society generated interest in the dictionary on
both sides of the Atlantic. Lists of authors and
works to be read for the dictionary were com-
piled, volunteers enlisted, and assignments
made. Three lists of authors and books were
drawn up, one for the period of 1250-1526,
one for 1526-1674, and the last for 1674-
1858. A proposal by Coleridge that "Ameri-
cans should make themselves responsible for
the whole of eighteenth century literature,
which probably would have a less chance of
finding as many readers in England" came to
naught. 15 Nevertheless, American readers con-
tributed to the dictionary, scouring many books
both British and American from various peri-
ods and reporting on their reading. In his
presidential address to the Philological Soci-
ety for 1880, Murray singled out Americans
for special commendation. 16 In 1 860 Coleridge
estimated that the first installment of the dic-
tionary would appear in two year's time. The
estimate was much too optimistic; indeed,
Coleridge died in April 1861 at age 3 1 .
With Coleridge's death, the editorship
fell to Fumivall; this proved to be a mixed
blessing for the dictionary project. Fnrnivall,
by profession a solicitor and by nature a man
of great energy with many interests, devoted
his life to literature and education. Fumivall 's
tenure as editor proved very beneficial to the
dictionary project, for this indefatigable
founder of organizations did much to create
the environment the dictionary needed to meet
its ambitious goals of all inclusiveness, of
using quotations from as far back as the thir-
teenth century, rigorous application of histori-
cal principles, and of supplying full etymolo-
gies, Fumivall created or was instrumental in
the foundings of numerous literary societies,
most significantly for the dictionary, the Early
English Text Society (1864). It had become
obvious that to carry out the plan of the dictio-
nary, something would have to be done to
improve the availability of texts of literature
from the Old English and Middle English
periods. As it was, the Philological Society
was taking rare books from the sixteenth cen-
tury and cutting them up for distribution to
readers and for the editors' use! Fortunately,
early manuscripts were safely out of its reach
in various repositories. But they were also
outside the grasp of readers and thus these
texts' wordhoards could not disgorge their
treasures to the readers . Hence the importance
of the Early English Text Society. Without its
successful efforts to provide printed editions
of these early documents, the OED 's founda-
tion would have been built on the sand of
conjecture rather than the rock of research.
But whilst Fumivall busied himself with
important ancillary matters, work on the dic-
tionary itself just inched along, and haphaz-
ardly at that. With regard to the dictionary
proper, Fumivall developed a system of as-
signing responsibility for words beginning
with various letters to subeditors. Readers sent
the subeditors "slips," the 4" x 6" cards on
which they noted words, provided the words'
illustrative quotes, and noted the quotes'
sources and dates. The subeditors were re-
sponsible for organizing these materials, a
responsibility they carried out with varying
degrees of quality. With modification and
refinement this system later proved to be an
important element in the actual creation of the
dictionary.
184 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
James AH Murray
Happily several events in 1 876 converged
to revitalize the dictionary project. An Anglo-
Americanpublishing partnership of Macmillan
and Harper and Brothers approached James
A.H, Murray, a master at Mill Hill School
south of London and a philological scholar of
note, about the possibility of editing a dictio-
nary to rival Webster's. Murray, a largely self-
educated man of eclectic interests, received
his doctorate from Edinburgh University in
recognition of his achievements, He was a
man who steadfastly believed that any task
worth doing was worth doing well, a trait that
assured the dictionary's quality but also its
slow progress. At the same time they ap-
proached Murray, the publishers inquired
about the availability of the Philological
Society'smaterialsforthe enterprise. Someof
these materials were made available to Murray.
Basing his work on these, he prepared sample
entries and, at the publishers' request, scaled
these down, but not enough to satisfy them.
Since Murray was not willing to cut them
further and since the publisher was not willing
to support an enterprise on the scale Murray's
standards demanded, the proposal came to
naught. However the epiphany of Murray's
sample entries renewed the Philological
Society's interest in the new dictionary.
Initial arrangements with publishers for a
dictionary that was to have been published
more than ten years earlier had long since
lapsed. However in 1878 the Society began
negotiations with the Oxford University Press.
These concluded successfully March 1 , 1879,
when the two parties signed a contract for a
dictionary
to occupy not less than 6,000 nor mote than
7,000 pages, . . . and the said Dictionary shall
be edited and prepared on the same principles
and on the same lines ofhistorical and linguis-
tic evidence as to the forms and meanings of
its words, as are shown on the Specimen page
. . . , and shall contain on its title page
'Founded mainly on the materials collectedby
the Philological Society. 17
The contract not-so-modestly underestimated
the dictionary's ultimate length by half.
Earlier in 1 878 the Society had persuaded
Murray to accept the editorship. And thus was
the project rejuvenated and set on its sure-but-
lengthy course, Murray began preparing for
the task ahead. On the lawn of his home at Mill
Hill he erected a small building, made of iron
to minimize the threat of fire, and dubbed it the
Scriptorium. He also lined the walls of the
Scriptorium with pigeon holes, "1 ,029 in num-
ber, for the reception of the alphabetically
arranged slips" 1 * to accommodate each word's
slips, to be arranged in alphabetical order, as
the dictionary progressed from A to Z. Over
the years Furnivall had received many of the
materials from subeditors when they gave up
on the project; Murray reported that on Lady
Day (March 25) he "received from Mr.
Furnivall some ton and three-quarters of ma-
terials which had accumulated under his roof
as sub-editor after sub-editor fell off in his
labors." 19
The value of the materials Murray re-
ceived varied considerably. They came from
diverse sources. The letter H's slips arrived
from Florence; the slips for "Pa" had been
stored in a bam in Ireland and its stock con-
tinuously depleted as slips were used to light
fires; one bag of slips arrived inhabited by
mice and another held the corpse of a rat! 20
Some were damp and many scrawled illeg-
ibly. But nearly two tons of slips, sans mice,
were not enough. To adhere to his rigorous
standards and produce the dictionary envi-
sioned by the Society, Murray needed more
slips, byproducts of a still more ambitious
reading project. In 1879 Murray appealed for
"a thousand readers ... to complete the work
as far as possible within the next three years." 21
Readers were directed to
Make a quotation for every word that strikes
you as rare, obsolete, old-fashioned, new,
peculiar, or used in a peculiar way. . . .
Take special note ofpassages which show
or imply that a word is either new and tenta-
tive, or needing explanation as obsolete or
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 185
archaic, and which thus help fix the date of its
introduction or disuse.
Make as many quotations as convenient
to you for ordinary words, when these are used
significantly, and help by the context to ex-
plain their own meaning, or show their use,- 22
Not enough readers took the last instruction
sufficiently to heart. As a result, when Murray
and his assistants came to write the articles on
common words, they often had to do addi-
tional reading to obtain a sufficient number of
quotations of enough value from enough peri-
ods to demonstrate properly such a word's
history. Murray also began a practice, also
followed by later editors, of issuing lists of
books to be read and of words for which
examples, both early and recent, were lacking.
Murray had other editorial issues to settle
before the dictionary could progress beyond
the sample entries that had rekindled the
Society's interest and persuaded the Oxford
University Press to publish it. The most sig-
nificant was devising a manner of showing
pronunciation. Murray consulted with various
experts on the subject and created a system
thatreceived the Society's approval on March
17, 1882. 23 A typographical style also had to
be established and followed consistently. The
typography had to help identify and maintain
distinctions among the parts of each entry —
headword, etymology, definitions, quotations,
etc. More than a century later Murray was to
win the gratitude of computer programmers
and systems engineers for the precision with
which he designed his dictionary's typogra-
phy.
In May 1 882, nearly a quarter of a century
after the idea of the dictionary was first pro-
posed, its first batch of copy went to the
printer. 24 A-Ant, the first 352-page installment
of the New English Dictionary, appeared on
February 1, 1884, two weeks after Murray
proudly laid three advance copies on the table
before his colleagues in the Philological Soci-
ety. 25 (Eventually each fascicle numbered 64
pages.) That spring Murray estimated that the
dictionary, provided he received enough as-
sistants, would be completed in less than 12
years. 26 This was but one of many instances in
which Murray's optimistic estimates proved
to be wishful thinking.
Needed Help
Help was needed and it came from an
unexpected source. Henry Bradley, a largely
self-educated philologist then supporting his
family by freelance literary work and review-
ing, wrote a two-part review of the first fas-
cicle for the Academy in its February 16 and
March 1 issues of 1884. Bradley praised the
dictionary for its willingness to accommodate
all words, its historical sweep, the clarity of its
typography, the value of its illustrative quota-
tions, and its concern for etymology. He also
noted that "there are few indeed of the ety-
mologies given in this first part of the Dictio-
nary which we are inclined to dispute." 27 Yet
in disputing several, he demonstrated his au-
thority.
The Delegates of the Oxford University
Press, its governing board, expressed concern
throughout the protracted publication of the
dictionary about the slowness of its pace and
continually urged its editor to move faster. In
order to further the dictionary's progress,
Murray resigned his teaching duties to devote
full time to his editorial duties and moved to
Oxford in 1885. At the urging of the Del-
egates, the staff was enlarged. In May 1886,
due largely to his insightful review of A-Ant,
Henry Bradley joined Murray's staff. Late in
1 887 he was put at the head of a team charged
with responsibility for the letter E and worked
thereafter independently of Murray.
Both Murray's team and Bradley's team
followed Fumivall's model whereby sub-
editors did preliminary work. Their assistants
prepared a draft of each word's article and
then the editor reviewed and corrected it
Among assistants a division of labor devel-
oped based on each one's expertise. However
some questions could not be answered within
the Scriptorium, The lack of adequate space
and library resources often forced the staff to
*
1 86 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
> i
make time-consuming trips to the Bodleian or
college libraries, And to answer some ques-
tions, such as the intended meaning of a par-
ticularword as used by a contemporary writer,
Murray corresponded with the likes of Lord
Tennyson, Robert Meredith, Thomas Hardy,
Robert Browning, James Russell Lowell, and
a wide range of experts, including "the Direc-
torofthe Royal Botanic Gardens atKew about
the first record of the name of an exotic plant;
... to a Jesuit father on a point of Roman
Catholic Divinity; [and] to the Secretary of the
Astronomical Society about the primum-mo-
hile or the solar constant," 28
The dictionary progressed under Murray
and Bradley's guidance. The Deceit to Deject
fascicle published January 1, 1895, bore the
title The Oxford English Dictionary, the title
that in time came to supplant New English
Dictionary. To speed its progress even more,
William Alexander Craigie of the University
of St. Andrews joined Bradley in 1 897 and
assisted with the letter G and assisted Murray
with the letters I and K. In 1901 Craigie
assumed independent editorial responsibility
for the letter Q. 29 Charles Talbut Onions be-
came the dictionary's fourth editor in 1914,
having joined Murray's staff in 1895. "Be-
tween 1906 and 1913 [he had] prepared spe-
cial portions of M, N, R, and S" and in 1914
"began with a separate staff to edit the later
portion of that letter (Su-Sz)." 30 Even with
four editorial teams working on the dictionary
simultaneously, Murray's hope to see its
completion by his eightieth birthday was frus-
trated. He died at age 78 on July 26, 1 9 15, after
a brief illness; the dictionary was well into the
letter S and Murray had begun planning for the
letter U. In recognition of his achievement,
Murray had been knighted in 1 908; at that time
the dictionary had been published through the
letter P. Murray's death slowed progress, as
did the loss of staff members to military ser-
vice during the Great War and Bradley's death
on May 23, 1923. Fortunately the system of
several editors working independently assured
continuity and the work moved forward.
Critical Reception
Seventy-one years after Dean Trench had
criticized existing dictionaries, the dictionary
he had envisioned finally appeared. In April
1928 the first copies were presented to King
George and President Coolidge, "the highest
representatives of the two great English-speak-
ing nations." 31 It was received with universal
acclaim. The Nation, anticipating its comple-
tion a bit prematurely in 1927, said that "No
similar work . , , is comparable in magnitude,
accuracy, or completeness." 32 The unsigned
review in the Times Literary Supplement called
' it a "monumental and inalienable public pos-
session. " 33 The Saturday Review hailed it as "a
monument which will last when a thousand
best-sellers are forgotten" and called it "the
topmost peak of a long range of gloss-collec-
tors and lexicographers." 34 Ernest Weekley,
writing in the Quarterly Review called it a
"noble monument of the English language." 35
And Floyd Knight said that "one might look
for flaws in the 'New English Dictionary', or
lament that it does not include proper names;
but its scholarship is so monumental as to
make fault-finding seem petty." 36
Yet it had been 44 years since A-Ant
appeared. During those four decades mankind
had learned how to fly, how to talk across the
miles over radio, how to make moving pic-
tures, and how to record sound and play back
recordings. Inescapably a product of its times,
much of the OED was behind the times. Well
before the dictionary was complete, some had
recognized that it would be incomplete. In
1919, Craigie himself outlined the work that
needed to be done to supplement the dic-
tionary's historical coverage. In a paper pre-
sented to the Philological Society in 1919 he
called for work to commence on historical
dictionaries for the Old English; the Middle
English (1175-1500); the Tudor and Stuart
(1500-1675); the 1675-1800; and the older
Scottishperiods. 37 More than 70years later the
tasks Craigie outlined are not yet complete.
The OED Supplement, edited by Craigie and
Onions, appeared in 1933. A plan for a new
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 187
Dictionary of Old English was announced in
the late 1960s butthus far hasyielded fascicles
for only several letters, but progress contin-
ues. 38 The Middle English Dictionary, (Ann
Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1952- )
begun in 1925 and whose first fascicle did not
appear until 1952, has reached "So," Some
quotations have been collected for a diction-
ary of the Tudor and Stuart period for the Early
Modem English Dictionary, but that project
has been suspended, perhaps permanently. No
effort has been made towards a dictionary of
the 1675-1 SOOperiod, one that Craigie thought
might not differ enough from the nineteenth
century, a period we) 1 represented in the OED,
to require its own dictionary. A Dictionary of
the Older Scottish Tongue, (Chicago: Univer-
sity of Chicago Press, 193 1- ) begun under
Craigie's editorship, had reached "Re" at the
end of the 1980s. Several years after calling
for these dictionaries, Craigie concluded
American English also needed its own histori-
cal dictionary and, even while helping bring
the OED to its conclusion, departed for the
University of Chicago to assume the editorship
of A Dictionary of American English on His-
torical Principles (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1938-44).
Flaws in the Dictionary
Despite the praise it received in 1928,
many of the dictionary's users did "look for
flaws in the 'New English Dictionary'" and
found them. Even though readers in North
America had contributed thousands of slips
for the dictionary, the sorts of sources they
read differed little in nature from the sources
being read in England. As a result, peculiarly
American senses of words common to the two
national vocabularies and distinctly Ameri-
can words were badly underrepresented in the
dictionary, as were distinctly Australian, South
African, etc., English words. In this signifi-
cant way the dictionary fell short of Murray's
stated goal of "containing] all English words
ordinary and extraordinary," 39 A much more
common form of criticism was antedatings of
the earliestrecordeduse of particular words or
notations of later uses of words labeled as rare
or obsolete. Murray himself anticipated just
this form of criticism, inevitable given the
sometimes haphazard way in which early vol-
unteer readers did their work. In 1884 he
estimated that "Earlier instances will . . . yet be
found of three-fourths of all the words re-
corded, above all, of the words introduced
fromLatinsince the Renascence." 40 Andnearly
five decades after the dictionary's comple-
tion, one prominent scholar declared that "in-
stead of providing an unquestioned basis for
further research, the O.E.D. has to become its
object." 41 Rather than contribute to the endless
line of articles relating hit-and-miss antedat-
ing and postdating of single words that, as
Murray himself predicted, hadbecome a staple
in the pages of Notes & Queries and other
learned journals, Jiirgen Schafer did a system-
atic study of the works of Shakespeare and
Nashe to derive an overall estimate of how
many of the 260,000 headwords in the OED
(includingthe 1933 supplement) are subject to
antedating. He concluded that more than
96,000 can be antedated, some by more than a
century, One imagines that Murray would
have been pleased that his own estimate had
been so far above that established scientifi-
cally, or at least as scientifically as possible,
for Murray considered himself not a literary
man but a scientist whose object of study was
the English language.
Antedating and postdating of OED words
can become a game and, like any game, canbe
corrupted. Marghanita Laski, credited with
submitting more than 250,000 slips for the
four- volume supplement begun in 1957, has
been a very adept player at the game. In 1 968,
noting that the editors like to have five ex-
amples of a word to establish its meaning,
Laski
"admitted] to certain plantings, though not
furtive ones, For instance, when the editor
asked me if I could produce evidence to show
that OED was wrong in supposing that berate,
v. was obsolete in England, 1 couldn't imme-
188 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
diatety iaymy hands onan example, so slipped
it into my next review and carded it — but
several implanted ones turned up in the next
few weeks. And when it occurred to me that
ironmonger (the shop) now has two meanings,
corresponding respectively toFr. quincailkrie
and Fr. droguerie, it seemed to me unlikely I
would find quotations illustrating this. So I
wrote an article on changes in shop functions
. . . offered it to the Guardian '$ women's page,
explaining why I'd written it, and then, when
it was published, carded it."**
The Supplement and the second edition of the
OED quote Laski's 1952 use of "berate" as a
verb! Although it is not clear that this is the
planting she submitted* it seems likely.
No dating in the OED of the earliest
occurrence of any word can be taken as a
certainty of its earliest appearance in written
English; rather that dating denotes the earliest
reference available to the editors. The method
by which the slips for the original were com-
piled was imperfect. Most readers, Craigie
noted, "as a rule did their duty pretty effec-
tively by taking out at the most two or three
thousand quotations from a single work." 43
However some fell below the editors' stan-
dards and too few fully heeded Murray's
entreaty to give sufficient attention to ordi-
nary words. Several years into the project he
told the Philological Society "I have often
thought that if I could find time to direct it, or
if the Society could find someone else to direct
it, the reading of all books over again, with the
instructions, Take out quotations for all words
that do not strike you as rare, peculiar, or
peculiarly used, 1 would be of enormous ser-
vice." 4 " Furthermore, the readers often worked
from incomplete or less-than-authoritative
texts of early works. Only if every text of
every literary creation of the previous seven
centuries had been available to the editors and
only if every word in every one of those
documents had been concordanced and linked
to its contextual phrase — only if this
unimaginably unmanageable task had been
performed and only if Murray and others had
had time to examine every use of every word
thus recorded, could one say with certainty
that the editors had recorded the earliest use of
each word in each of its senses.
The First Supplement
Upon completion of the dictionary, work
began immediately on its first supplement, a
contingency provided for in the 1879 agree-
ment between the Philological Society and the
Oxford University Press. Craigie and Onions
were engaged to produce the supplement.
Already a considerable body of additional
slips, many providing antedatings of words,
had accumulated. However, a supplement in-
corporating all of this information as well as
new words and new senses of old words
"could not be contemplated" at thattime "and
it was therefore resolved to produce a supple-
mentary volume the scope of which would be
in the main restricted to the treatment of those
accessions of words and senses which had
taken place during the preceding 50 years." 45
Onions and Craigie allowed two categories of
exceptions: "items of modern origin and
present currency that had been either inten-
tionally or accidentally omitted would be in-
cluded, and account would be taken of earlier
evidence for American uses, which Sir Wil-
liam Craigie was in a position to supply." 46
And so "appendicitis,""burg"meaningatown,
"chop-suey," "intelligentsia," "movie,"
"mushiness " "peachy" meaning agreeable,
"radio," "Rayon," "speedway," "tyrannosau-
rus," and "wave-length" entered the OED.
Scientific and technical terms, treated inad-
equately in the original OED even as such
terms proliferated rapidly, figure prominently
in the supplement. The tale of how Murray
decided against including "radium" because
he doubted the word would take hold is leg-
endary. Given the gift of hindsight, the
supplement's editors corrected this notorious
omission and others less celebrated.
Upon completion of the supplement, the
staff was disbanded and the OED became a
document frozen in time. However the Ian-
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 189
guage continued to grow through the coinage
ofnew words; some words took on new senses;
some words fell out of favor and others gained
respectability. Yet there was no one to record
these changes systematically and to keep the
dictionary up to date. Its users, meanwhile,
continued to report antedatings and postdatings
and journal editors continued to publish these
reports. Other dictionaries, of course, carried
on,butnone ofthese chart the life of each word
through every period as minutely as does the
OED. The decision to dismantle the lexico-
graphic machine that had been operating con-
tinuously for more than fifty years was most
unfortunate. The only effort by the Oxford
University Press to update the OED was ob-
lique in that it was done through the revised
third edition of The Shorter Oxford English
Dictionary. This dictionary, derived from its
namesake, was first published in February
1933, and reprinted with corrections the next
month, in a second edition in 1936, in a third
edition in 1944, and with revised addenda in
1955. Entries in the 40-page 1955 addenda
and corrigenda section are stripped down ver-
sions of OED entries all but bereft of illustra-
tive quotations.
As a product of its times, the OED inevi-
tably shared some of the prejudices of the
period. Victorian prudishness led to its falling
short of Murray 's goal to make it all-inclusive.
For example, two well known four-letter words,
one referring to the act of sexual intercourse,
the other to female genitalia, were excluded. It
has been taken to task for failing "not only the
smut-hound but also the student of literature
by omitting any blush-making sub-meanings
of familiar words, whatever the eminence of
the authors who have used them." 47 Not until
1968 did the Delegates of the Oxford Univer-
sity Press approve their inclusion. 48 Also ex-
cluded were many dialect and slang terms,
with those included always labeled as such.
The OED gave preference to the Received
Standard dialect of England, thereby implic-
itly endorsing it as "proper" English. Just what
is "proper" English and what is not, indeed
whether or not such a thing exists or can exist,
has been and continues to be a matter of
considerable debate, brought to white-heat
intensity in 1961 with publication of Webster's
Third New International Dictionary (Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam, 1961), a dictio-
nary that departed from the practice of making
such distinctions. Suffice it to say that the
OED's practices have figured in the debate.
Uponits initial completion in 1928,thatanony-
mous reviewer for the Times Literary Supple-
ment praised it for capturing the language
before it had been degraded when "the newly
literate received their charter to treat the lan-
guage as they pleased in hourly print." 49 This
reviewer counted himself as one of "those
who respect the purity of the language, who
try to honour and understand its traditions and
its idioms, who feel doubtful whether even so
supple an instrument as English can bear with-
out grave deterioration the incessant strain put
upon it by modern democracy, [and who] . . .
rejoice[s] that the Dictionary has come into
being when it has and as it has." 50 The very
historical principles upon which the OED is
founded and from which its well-deserved
reputation rests mock such praise! One could
just as well say that it would have been better
had the OED come to completion in 1612 or
1756 or 1857 so as to have captured the
language before its corruption by some other
forces. Entry after entry after entry in the OED
demonstrates unequivocally the inevitability
of change in language. And that is why, if one
can commit a crime against the English lan-
guage, dispersal of the dictionary staff upon
completion of the 1933 supplement was surely
such a crime.
Robert Burchfield
The Oxford University Press began to
atone for this grave mistake in 1957 when it
appointed Robert Burchfield, aNewZealander
who had studied Old English and related lan-
guages while a Rhodes scholar at Oxford, to
edit a new supplement to the OED to replace
the 1933 supplement. Burchfield has related
that, '"The very hard-headed publishers at the
190 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
M
%
time looked at me more or less sternly . . . and
they said, "Look, 1275 pages, one volume,
seven years: there is the format,"'" 51 The
lessons of 1879-1928 had been forgotten.
When the first volume of the supplement
appeared in 1 972, eight years after the proj ect
had been scheduled for completion, it alone
contained 1,331 pages covering "a" through
"gyver." Burchfield estimated at the time that
the supplement would be complete in two
more volumes and within six years. Fourteen
years later the fourth and final volume of the
supplement appeared. He adhered to the same
high standards Murray established and went
to the same painstaking steps to establish just
what a word meant, consulting Buckminster
Fuller about"dymaxion"J.R.R,Tolkeinabout
"hobbit," and Murray Gell-Mann about
"quark."
The 1972-86 four- volume supplement
lists antedatings of words, new senses, and
new words. It is the most catholic part of the
OED, for in it Burchfield' s "aim, doubtless not
fully achieved, was to give parity of treatment
to the English of the United States and that of
the United Kingdom. The same broad demo-
cratic line was taken for other varieties of
English, in Canada, Australia, New Zealand,
South Africa, and so on." 52 But, great as its
contribution is in bringing the OED up to date
and in including words from vigorous En-
glish-speaking traditions outside the United
Kingdom, the OJEDplus its supplements is still
incomplete.
An Incomplete Record of the
English Language
From its inception, the OED has been a
print-based dictionary. In its original Pro-
posal, the Philological Society said the new
dictionary "should contain every word occur-
ring in the literature of the language it pro-
fesses to illustrate?™ The examples readers
collected in the 1 860s and for many years
thereafter necessarily came from printed
sources. And although the OED 's ten original
volumes cited popular usages from newspa-
pers and the like, it looked, much as had
Johnson, upon the established canon of great
writers as the source of the core vocabulary of
English. Jiirgen Schafer determined that
Shakespeare, whose every word was put on a
slip for the editors' consideration, is much
overrepresented in the OED, especially as a
source of first use. This tradition continued in
the 1972-86 supplement for, as Burchfield
said, "Every single word andmeaning of great
ancient writers like Geoffrey Chaucer were
recorded in the OED. And I could see no case
that could be made to leave out of the supple-
ment the words of the corresponding 20th-
century writers, Stephen Spender, W.H.
Auden, T.S. Eliot, Graham Greene, Evelyn
Waugh, Iris Murdoch, and so forth." 54 Leav-
ing aside the question of the merits of
Burchfield' s comparative literary assessments,
the point is that the OED is a dictionary of
written English emphasizing the written En-
glish of its well educated and most literary
users. At the same time that his editorial poli-
cies upheld this tradition, Burchfield also de-
mocratized the OEDby including popular and
ephemeral sources in greater numbers than
before.
It has come under some fire for this.
Insofar as spoken English differs from written
English, the OED presents an incomplete
record . Works such as the Dictionary of Ameri-
can Regional English (Cambridge: Harvard
University Press, 1985- ) and the English
Dialect Dictionary (London; H. Frowde, 1 898-
1905), of course, compensate for this. The
OED's editors have always had to make
choices and impose limits; if they had not,
their work would still be in the preparatory
stages. But, the criticism that the OED prac-
tices "black-and-white lexicography" 55 is valid
to the extent that it reminds one that the OED
falls short of Murray's goal of all-inclusive-
ness. That goal will always be a chimera if for
no reason other than the print medium of the
OED. Even while Burchfield and his team
labored away at their supplement, a monu-
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 191
mental achievement in itself, some of the
OED's most ardent advocates questioned its
future viability.
Marghanita Laski, a true friend of the
OED and indefatigable contributor of quota-
tion slips for the four-volume supplement,
shared those concerns about "black-and-white
lexicography." In describing her practices
while reading for the dictionary, she said "I do
not hesitate to send in words I have only heard,
whether in speech or on the radio, since the
date I give ... is evidence that the word or
phrase was in use at the time." 56 Other limita-
tions in the aging OED were also evident by
the time its supplement began to appear. Laski
presented the case forcefully just one day after
publication of the first volume of the supple-
ment. In a letter to the Times Literary Supple-
ment she asked whether or not the OED was in
serious danger of becoming "an object of
veneration rather than a tool for modern use." 57
The Second Edition
Work continued on the supplement, of
course, but another decade passed before the
Oxford University Press began planning for
the long-range viability of the dictionary. Study
of the problem began in early 1982. In a press
conference held May 15, 1984, at the Royal
Society in London, the Press announced its
plan to issue a new edition combining the ten-
volume 1928 dictionary (re-issued in twelve
volumes in 1933 with the supplement as vol-
ume 13 and reprinted in 1961 and 1970) and
Burchfield's four supplements. To do this,
however, required new ways of operating.
Even in the 1980s Burchfield and his staff
continued to produce the dictionary's supple-
ment much as Murray had in his Scriptorium.
Just as with editing the supplement the time
had come to include more scientific and tech-
nical terms, so with preparation of the second
edition the time had come to rely on state-of-
the-art technology.
The project required the combined efforts
of several organizations, IBM United King-
dom, Ltd., donated equipment and assigned
personnel to work with OUP on planning and
executing the project; Great Britain's Depart-
ment of Trade and Industry supported it; and
the University of Waterloo in Canada pro-
vided programming expertise to supplement
that of OUP staff. OUP directed and managed
the project. Initial hopes to use optical scan-
ners to convert the dictionary's text into ma-
chine-readable form were dashed. The com-
plexities of the typography made that tech-
nique impractical. The entire dictionary had to
be keystroked onto computer tape! Interna-
tional Computaprint Corporation (ICC) in the
United States was awarded the contract for
this herculean task. The contract specified a
maximum of 7 errors per 10,000 keystrokes;
its 1 20 typists performed the entire job with a
remarkably good error rate of between 4 and
4.5 per 10,000. 58 Murray's typographic de-
sign, faithfully followed save for minor ex-
ceptions for more than a century, proved a
great boon to the electronic conversion pro-
cess. The typographical conventions cued the
typists to different parts of each article and
thereby cued them to insert various codes to
identify the start of each part. Computer pro-
grams had to be devised to merge the 1 928 text
and the text of the supplements. This was a
complex task since many entries in the supple-
ments had to be inserted into existing entries in
the base set. It was further complicated by the
fact that in some cases different parts of an
article in the supplements had to be inserted
into various locations in the original article.
Some human intervention was required, but
most of this difficult work was accomplished
by machine.
The result, published in 20 volumes in the
spring of 1989, was The Oxford English Dic-
tionary, second edition. Its introduction forth-
rightly states that "Whereas the Supplement
can be regarded for practical purposes as up to
date, it is a matter of common knowledge that
many elements of the original OED require
revision. That is the very purpose for which
the New OED Project, of which the present
work is the first printed product, was initiated.
Several of these requirements have been ad-
192 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
dressed in this edition." 59 One of those re-
quirements was to convert Murray's pronun-
ciation system to a more modern system. The
editors prudently chose to employ the Interna-
tional Phonetic Alphabet, developed at the
end of the nineteenth century. OED2 includes
"an additional 5,000 words, combinations,
and senses , . . located chiefly in the first third
of the alphabet, where work done for the
£wppZeme«iisnowtwentyyearsoTmoreold," 60
Desiderata for the Future
OED2 is but a first step toward a New
OED, for indeed a new OED is needed. Take,
for example, a representative definition. Its
article on "gasoline," published in 1898, de-
fines it as "a volatile inflammable liquid, one
of the first products in the distillation of crude
petroleum, employed for purposes of heating
and illumination," The first part of the defini-
tion remains valid, but the latter part is at best
misleading. At that time the dictionary pro-
vided one 1895 illustration hinting at this
fuel's use in motor vehicles; the other four
illustrations relate to illumination and cook-
ing. Both the 1933 and 1972 supplements add
illustrations related to automobiles, two also
dating from 1 895. This is not an isolated case.
Many of the definitions need to be brought up
to date; additional reported antedatings and
postdatings need to be recorded; and the En-
gltshof Great Britain's former colonies needs
to be more fully represented.
These examples are indicative of broader
problems, problems most clearly enunciated
in 1972 by MarghanitaLaski in the same letter
to the Times Literary Supplementm which she
expressed the fear that the OED might soon be
little more than "a magnificent fossil." 61 Like
Trench in his criticism of the dictionaries of
the mid-nineteenth century, Laski outlined
seven areas requiring attention:
1. Antedatings. ... An enormous number of
"first examples" in OED can now be ante-
dated, of important as of trivial words and
usages, and often by centuries.
2. Postdatings. Most "latest examples" in
OED, even in the later volumes, are nine-
teenth-century, often early nineteenth-
century. From OED one can have no indica-
tion whether the bulk of words and usages
cited continue to be current. . .
3. Reading. . . . two people can read the same
book and record almost non-identical lists of
words to be found in it. . . . In addition,
. . . many of OED's original readers were
inept. . . .
... it is clear that extended reading in
the trivia of past centuries could be as valuable
to a revision of OED as the reading of contem-
porary trivia has been to the new Supplement.
In addition, the past century has seen the
publication of much useful material, espe-
cially in the field of diaries and letters. . . .
4. Subjects, . . . One need only consider the
kind of people who read for OED to guess,
usually rightly, what kinds of subjects will be
inadequately covered.
5. Corrections. A few examples: Words and
usages categorized by OED as "obsolete"
have often proved to be in later use than
recorded; as "rare" have proved to be com-
paratively common; as "nonce" have proved
to be more than that. Whole categories of
usage have been capriciously treated or virtu-
ally ignored. . , . Words missed by 0£Z>and
obsolete before the new Supplement ' s period
could be recorded.
6. Spellings. In several cases words are en-
tered only under spellings now unfamiliar and
without cross-reference.
7. Place of entry. In several cases, compound
words and phrases are entered onlyunder their
most unlikely component and without cross-
reference. 62
The first step towards a new OED, converting
the existing OED to machine-readable form,
has been completed,
Already the complicated process of con-
verting the OED to machine readable form has
provided benefits that one could only dream
about just a few years ago. In early 1988 the
text of the original ten-volume New English
Dictionary was made available on CD-ROM
for searching and manipulation through a mi-
crocomputer. The entire text can be searched
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 193
through a number of approaches, including
quotation author, quoted work, quotation text,
sense/definition, etymology, headwords and
usage, and other sorts of labels. This empow-
ers linguists and others to use this rich re-
source on the history of the language in new
ways. One way is to search a word in the
quotations then to check the word's date of
first appearance in its own article and compare
dates of quotations. In this way reports of
antedatings andpostdatings can, one assumes,
be generated in quantities that the late Jiirgen
Schafer could only imagine. Furthermore, they
can be generated from within the OED itself!
Determining more accurate dates for the
first or last recorded appearances of words is
but one use of the electronic OED. Since the
database is in machine-readable form, editors
are finally free of Murray's slips-and-cubby-
holes process and its later analogs. They can
work on the OED without regard for its alpha-
betical sequence and, conceivably, from any
location on the globe where there is a phone
line. The New OED has the potential of being
a truly international record of world
English. Editors working via computer and
telecommunications lines from offices in each
nation in which English is the predominant or
a significant language could make contribu-
tions. If users have access to the database in its
daily updated state, the OED will, thanks to the
electronic medium, be more up-to-date and be
kept more up-to-date than it has been in the
print medium.
These are possibilities, not yet fully real-
ized in late 1989. The staff today is largely
centralized in Oxford. Editorial work contin-
ues to rely on 4" by 6" paper slips and "the
drafting of new entries goes on all the time." 63
Keyboarding of completed entries is carried
out as a separate operation. Ten of the 14 full-
time staff entrusted with keeping the OED
healthy "are concerned solely with the prepa-
ration of entries for new vocabulary items." 64
Three of these ten specialize in scientific and
technical terminology. The others tend to "da-
tabase improvement andplans forrevision, as
well as senior editorial work." 6S These four-
teen are assisted by a number of freelancers
who "carry out support activities such as file
searching and library research." 66 As for em-
bracing all varieties of English, the editors are
aware of the challenge of doing this from
Oxford. In at least a partial response to this
challenge, they began in 1989 to organize a
North American reading program through the
Press's New York office to parallel the pro-
gram conducted from the Oxford headquar-
ters. Lexicographer Dr. Jeffery Triggs directs
the program's American component from an
office in New Jersey. 67 This international pro-
gram, explains a staff member, is principally
"a directed reading exercise, i.e., a number of
freelancers 'read* sources selected by us, and
submit illustrative quotations, at the moment
about 12,000 per month" from readers in the
United Kingdom, plus those from readers
elsewhere. 68 Their efforts are supplemented
by voluntary contributors throughout the world,
the very means by which the original two tons
of quotation slips delivered to Murray in 1 879
had been collected.
The agenda before that staff, much of it
echoing Laski ' s seven-point critique of 1 972,
is best summarized in the concluding pages of
the second edition's history of its production:
There is much in the style of the Dictionary,
the punctuation, the capitalization, the defini-
tional terminology, and the spelling (within
entries and even of some headwords) that calls
for modernization. In the cross-reference sys-
tem, many improvements are desirable, nota-
bly in the citation of variant spellings as
headwords and in the more precise specifica-
tion of parts of speech, homonym numbers,
and sense numbers. In the etymologies, the
varying systems of transcription should be
harmonized, the linguistic nomenclature
shouldbe brought up to date, and the results of
recent research should be added. The organi-
zation of senses within many entries needs to
be rethought. Numerous scientific and techni-
cal definitions need to be brought into line
with present-day knowledge (though the
Supplement amended the treatment of many
of the most important terms). Many of the
definitions of general vocabulary need to be
IB!
194 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
reworked lo take account of recent techno-
logical and social changes. There are a num-
ber of references to countries, currency val-
ues, institutions, and persons, which are now
anachronistic; and there are still a few defini-
tions which enshrine social altitudes that are
now alien. The usage and subject labels should
be made fully consistent and modernized.
Many current words are illustrated by a
latest quotation from the first half of the
nineteenth century, or even earlier, and it is
difficult to distinguish them from words or
senses that are now, in fact, disused. Recent
examples ought to be supplied for every sense
that is still current. The citation style of many
quotations from the original OED could well
be brought up to the standard of consistency of
the Supplement (although improving it would
require the rechecking of many thousands of
quotations). Earlier examples exist (in various
places) forthousands of wordsand senses, and
these should be added. The coverage of En-
glish before 1 7O0, and at least as far back as
1500, could be markedly improved. Last, but
certainly not least, the coverage of English
outside the UnitedKingdom needs to be greatly
expanded, especially the English of North
America, which is the greatest source of lin-
guistic change, but not neglecting the English
of many other parts of the world where it is a
first or important language. 69
It is an ambitious agenda, reminiscent of the
challenge Trench put before the Philological
Society in 1857.
A timetable for publication (in whatever
form) of the New OED has not been an-
nounced although the target is about 1 5 years
hence. 10 A CD-ROM version of the second
edition is planned for release in the early
1990s. Whatever the editorial team's hopes
for the eventual New OED, those hopes will
probably not be realized as punctually as they
would like any more than Murray's or
Burchfield's hopes were. But there are plans
and dreams for a new and better OED and
related products. And there is a vigorous model
for these plans. The OED began spawning
other dictionaries even before it was com-
plete. Among these are the Concise Oxford
Dictionary of Current English in 1911, the
Pocket Oxford English Dictionary of Cur rent
English in 1924, the Little Oxford Dictionary
of Current English in 1930, the two-volume
Shorter Oxford English Dictionary in 1933,
the Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology
in 1 966, the compact edition of the Oxford
English Dictionary in 1971, the Oxford
Children's Dictionary in 1976, the Oxford
American Dictionary in 1980, the Oxford
Minidictionary in 1981, and the Oxford Uni-
versal Dictionary in 1981. The family now
consists of more than 25 dictionaries. Future
enhancements of the OED or spin-offs from it
include a "talking dictionary," which would
provide the pronunciation or various dialectic
or national pronunciations for words; dictio-
naries of national or regional English; special-
ized dictionaries tapping all ofOED's terms
from a particular field such as religion or
medicine; a database consisting just of the
quotations file, much of it not yet published,
for use by lexicographers and others; athesau-
rus including synonyms and antonyms; a dic-
tionary in which illustrations, some of them in
video, supplement verbal definitions of things
and processes; and a polyglot dictionary. 71
Already in 1989 Webster's Ninth New Colle-
giate Dictionary (Springfield, MA: Merriam-
Webster, 1983) was released on CD-ROMfor
use with the Apple Macintosh microcom-
puter. It features digitally recorded pronun-
ciations of entry words.
Thanks to the work of Murray and his
assistants; thanks to the workMurray's fellow
editors and Robert Burchfield and his assis-
tants continued; thanks to the work of the team
of programmers, editors, and typists in the late
1 980s, the OED promises to remain the glitter-
ing jewel in the OUP crown. Although the
labor involved in bringing the New OED into
being will be nearly as monumental as the
labor that has made it a possibility, it will be
well worth the effort. The New OED ought to
sparkle even more brilliantly and merit more
praise than any of the books or databases that
have preceded it,
^
PUBLICATION HISTORY
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 195
A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles,
Founded Mainly on the Materials Collected by
the Philological Society, edited by James A.H.
Murray, Henry Bradley, W.A. Craigie, andC.T.
Onions. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1888-1928.
10 vols.
A New English Dictionary on Historical Principles,
Founded Mainly on the Materials Collected by
the Philological Society, edited by James A.H.
Murray, Henry Bradley, W.A. Craigie, and C.T.
Onions. Introduction, Supplement, and Bibli-
ography, by W.A. Craigie and C.T. Onions.
Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1933. 542, 330, 91p.
The Oxford English Dictionary, Being a Corrected
Re-issue with an Introduction, Supplement and
Bibliography of a New English Dictionary on
Historical Principles, edited by James A.H.
Murray, Henry Bradley, W, A. Craigie, andC.T.
Onions. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1933. 13
vols. Reprinted 1961, 1970.
A Supplement to the Oxford English Dictionary,
edited by RobertBurchfield. Oxford: Clarendon
Press, 1972-86, 4 vols,
The Oxford English Dictionary, prepared by J. A.
Simpson and E.S.C. Weiner. 2nd ed. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1989. 20 vols.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
To the extent that the history of the OED
and the life of James A.H. Murray are one and
the same, Elisabeth K.M. Murray's thoroughly
researched biography of her grandfather of-
fers a fine history, Aarsleff s article is a care-
ful exposition of the intellectual antecedents
of the dictionary. Ronald Fritze's brief history
leans heavily on several sources and empha-
sizes the financial aspects of the enterprise.
Shenker's history offers a good picture of the
evolution of the OED2. Fletcher, Gray, and
Murphy describe the dictionary's transition
from the relatively static state as a printed
book to its fluid state as a machine-readable
database. Algeo's review of the second edi-
tion is the most thorough, critical, and insight-
ful available . In additi on to numerous substan-
tive articles this brief bibliography cannot
accommodate, hundreds of brief notes on
antedatings and the like as well as reviews of
the OED in its various media and degrees of
completion have appeared over the past cen-
tury.
Aarsleff, Hans. "The Early History of the Oxford
English Dictionary, " Bulletin of the New York
Public Library 66 (September, 1962): 417-39.
Algeo, John. "The Emperor's New Clothes: The
Second Edition of the Society's Dictionary,"
Transactions of the Philological Society 88
(1990): 131-50.
Benzie, William. Dr. F. J. Furnivall, Victorian
Scholar Adventurer. Norman, OK: Pilgrim
Books, Inc., 1983.
Burchfield, Robert. "Four-letter Words and the OED."
Times Literary Supplement no. 3684 (October
13,1972): 1233.
— — . "O.E.D.; A New Supplement." Essays and
Studies 14 (1961): 35-51.
"Some Thoughts on the Revision of the
O.E.D." In An English Miscellany, Presented to
W. S. Mackie, edited by Brian S. Lee, 208-18.
London: Oxford University Press, 1977.
Burchfield, Robert, and Hans Aarsleff. The Oxford
English Dictionary and the State of the Lan-
guage. Washington: Library of Congress, 1988.
Craigie, W.A. "The Making of a Dictionary." Satur-
day Review of Literature 4 (April 21, 1928):
792.
Fletcher, Ewen. "Computerising the Oxford English
Dictionary," Bookseller (January 18, 1986):
219-23.
Fritze, RonaldH. "The Oxford English Dictionary: A
Brief History." Reference Services Review 17
(1989): 61-70.
Gray, J. C. "Creating the Electronic New Oxford
English Dictionary." Computers and the Hu-
manities 20 (1986): 45-49.
Hanham, Alison. "The Cely Papers and the Oxford
English Dictionary." English Studies, 42 (June,
1961): 129-52.
Harpley, Mary, "The Oxford English Dictionary on
Compact Disc." British Book News (February,
1988): 90-91.
Harris, Roy. "The History Men." Times Literary
Supplements. 4 144 (September 3, 1982): 935-
36.
Laski, Marghanita. "Reading for OED." Times Ziter-
aiy Supplement no. 3437 (January 11, 1968):
37-39.
Murphy, Cullen. "Caught in the Web of Bytes: The
Electronic Oxford English Dictionary." Atlan-
tic 263 (February, 1989): 68-70.
*l1
196 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Murray, James A.H. The Evolution of English Lexi-
cography. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900.
Murray,K.M. Elisabeth. Caught in the Web of Words:
James Murray and the Oxford English Dictio-
nary. New Haven: Yale University Press, 1977,
"The OED and How it Grows." Bay State Librarian
67 (February, 1978): 17-18.
Schafer, Jiirgen. Documentation in the O.E.D.:
Shakespeare and Nashe as Test Cases. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1980.
Shenker, Israel. "Annals of Lexicography: The Dic-
tionary Factory ."New Yorker 65 (April 3, 1989):
86-100.
Sider, John W. "Reading for the OED : A Case
History." English Language Notes 1 8 (Decem-
ber, 1980): 131-38.
Trench, Richard Chenevix. On Some Deficiencies in
Our English Dictionaries, London: Jolin W.
Parker and Son, 1857.
Wardale, E. E. "The 'New English Dictionary.'"
Nineteenth Century and After 103 (January,
1928): 97-110.
Weiner, Edmund. "Computerizing the Oxford En-
glish Dictionary." Scholarly Publishing 16
(1985): 239-253.
. "New Uses for the New OED." Bookseller
(January 25, 1986): 332-36.
NOTES
1 Rosemary Herbert, " Oxford University Press ' s ' j ewel in
the crown," 1 Christian Science Monitor, 4 May
1987, p. B4.
2 Various printers served the Oxford University as far
back as 1478, a date often cited as the beginning of
the Oxford University Press. However, on October
2, 1 690, a legally binding agreement transferring
rights and property from an entrepreneur to Oxford
University marked "the beginning of the true Uni-
versity Press." Harry Carter, A History of the
Oxford University Press, vol. 1, To the Year 17B0
(Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1975), 109.
5 Sidney I, Landau, Dictionaries: The Art and Craft of
Lexicography (New York: Scribner's, 1984), 44~-
48.
4 Samuel Johnson, "Preface," in A Dictionary of the
English Language (London: W. Strahan, 1755).
s Ibid. Italics in original.
6 Landau, 66.
7 "Notices of Meetings," Transactions of the Philologi-
cal Society (1857): 141.
I Richard Chenevix Trench, On Some Deficiencies in our
English Dictionaries (London: John W. Parker,
1857), 3.
s James A..H, Murray, The Evolution of English Lexicog-
raphy (Oxford: The Clarendon Press, 1900), 6-7.
10 "A Letter to the Very Rev. The Dean of Westminster
from Herbert Coleridge" in Trench, (1860), 72.
Professor Hans Aarsleff of Princeton University
was the first to point out the significance of this
passage.
II Hans Aarsleff, "The Original Plan for the O^D.and Its
Background," in The Oxford English Dictionary
and the State of the Language, by Robert W.
Burchfield and Hans Aarsleff (Washington: Li-
brary of Congress, 1988), 42-43.
12 "Notices of the Meetings of the Philological Society in
1858," Transactions of the Philological Society
(1858): 198.
u Ibid., 199.
u Proposal for the Publication of A New English Dictio-
nary (London: Triibner, 1859), 2-4.
13 "A Letter to the Very Rev. The Dean of Westminster
from Herbert Coleridge " 72.
u James A.H. Murray, "The President's Annual Address
for 1 880," Transactions of the Philological Society
(1880-81): 122
1 ' "Dictionary-Contract with the Clarendon Press," Trans-
actions of the Philological Society (1 877-79): li.
11 James A.H. Murray, "The Work of the Philological
Society, from May, 1878, to May, 1879," Transac-
tions of the Philological Society (1877-79): 568.
19 Ibid.
20 K.M. Elisabeth Murray, Caught in the Web of Words
(New Haven: Yale University Press, 1977), 176-
77.
21 An Appeal to the English-speaking and English-read-
ing Public to Read Books and Make Extracts for the
Philological Society's "New English Dictionary"
(n.p., 1879), 4. Italics in original.
22 "Directions to Readers for the Dictionary," in Murray,
Caught in the Web of Words, 347. Italics in original.
23 "Historical Introduction," Oxford English Dictionary
(Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1933), xiv.
24 James A.H. Murray, "Thirteenth Address of the Presi-
dent of the Philological Society, Delivered at the
Anniversary Meeting, Friday, 16th May, 1884,"
Transactions of the Philological Society (1882-
84): 508.
" Ibid.
"Ibid., 531.
21 Henry Bradley, review of A New English Dictionary on
Historical Principles, Part 1, A-Ant, The Academy,
no. 617,new ser. (1 March 1884): 141 . The first part
of Bradley's review appeared in The Academy, no,
615, new ser. (16Feberuary 1884): 105-06.
28 Quoted from James A.H. Murray's personal papers in
Murray, Caught in the Web of Words, 201.
39 "Historical Introduction," xviii.
30 Ibid,
31 Ibid., xx.
32 "The 'N.E.D.'" Nation 124 (15 June 1927): 660.
33 "Our Dictionary," Times Literary Supplement no. 1 368
(19 April 1928): 277.
34 "The Greatest of Dictionaries," Saturday Review 4 (2 1
April 1928): 487.
31 Ernest Weekley, "The Oxford Dictionary," Quarterly
Review 250 (April 1928): 242.
OXFORD ENGLISH DICTIONARY 1 97
16 Floyd Knight, "The Greatest of TiicX\oass\<is" Bookman
67 (April 1928): 141.
" W.A. Cragie, "New Dictionary Schemes Presented to
the Philological Society, 4th April, 1919," Trans-
actions of the Philological Society, (1925-30): 6-
13.
JS Joan Holland, Drafting Editor, Dictionary of Old
English, letter to the author, 24 October 1990.
i? "Directions to Readers for the Dictionary," reprinted in
Murray, Caught in the Web of Words, 348.
40 James A.H. Murray, "Thirteenth Address of the Presi-
dent of the Philological Society," 516.
41 Jurgen SchSfer, Documentation in the O.E.D.:
Shakespeare and Nashe as Test Cases, (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1980), 3,
42 Marghanita Laski, "Reading for OED," Times Literary
Supplement no. 3437 (11 January 1968): 38.
43 W.A, Craigie, "The Making of a Dictionary," Saturday
Review of Literature 4 (21 April 1928): 792.
44 James A.H. Murray, "Thirteenth Address of the Presi-
dent of the Philological Society," 516. Italics in
original.
43 "Preface to the Supplement," in James A.H. Murray,
Henry Bradley, W.A. Craigie, and C.T. Onions,
eds., A New English Dictionary on Historical Prin-
ciples, Founded Mainly on the Materials Collected
by the Philological Society, W.A. Criagie and C.T.
Onions., eds., Introduction, Supplement, and Bibli-
ography (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1933), [v],
4( Ibid.
47 Alan Brien, "Down with All Bowdlers!" New States-
man, 72 (5 August 1966): 199.
48 R. W. Burchfield, "Four-letter Words and the OED,"
Times Literary Supplement no. 3684 (13 October
1972): 1233.
49 "Our Dictionary," 278.
50 Ibid.
5i Rosemary Herbert, "The Building of a Dictionary,"
232 Publishers Weekly (2 October 1987): 38.
52 Robert W. Burchfield, "The Oxford English Dictionary
and the State of the Language," in The Oxford
English Dictionary and the State of the Language,
Robert W.BurchfieldandHansAarsleff (Washing-
ton: Library of Congress, 1988), 20.
i3 Proposal for the Publication of A New English Dictio-
nary by the Philological Society (London: Tr bner,
1859), 2-3. Italics in original.
54 "'AH other dictionaries are temporary works,"' U.S.
Newsand WorldReports 101 (1 1 August 1986): 59.
" Roy Harris, "The History Men," Times Literary Supple-
ment no, 4144 (3 September 1982): 935.
56 Laski, "Reading for OED," 38.
57 Marghanita Laski, "Revising OED," rimes Literary
Supplement no. 3684 (13 October 1972): 1226.
38 J.C. Gray, "Creating the Electronic New Oxford En-
glish Dictionary," Computers and the Humanities
20 (January/March 1986): 45.
59 "Introduction," in J. A. Simpson and E.S.C. Werner,
The Oxford English Dictionary, 2nd ed. (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1989), [xi].
60 Ibid.
41 Laski, "Revising OED," 1226.
"Ibid.
63 Y.L. Warburton, OED Editorial Co-ordinator, letter to
the author, 27 July 1989.
* Ibid.
65 Ibid.
66 Ibid.
* 7 Marjorie Keyishian, "Oxford English Dictionary Sets
Up Shop in Morristown," New York Times, 11
February 1990, New Jersey ed., sec. 12, p. 1, 4-5.
68 Y.L. Warburton, letter to the author, 27 July 1989.
69 "The New Oxford English Dictionary Project," in The
Oxford English Dictionary, 2nd ed., lv-Ivi.
70 Y.L. Warburton, letter to the author, 27 July 1989.
71 Edmund Weiner, "New Uses for the New OED,"
Bookseller (25 January 1986): 332-36.
"Mom in the Library": The Readers'
Guide to Periodical Literature
Mary Biggs
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
In 1967, reference expert Bill Katz declared:
Turning to the Readers' Guide to Periodical
Literature is like nuzzling in the massive
monobosomofAmericanmotherhood. Some-
how, it is the closest thing to mora in the
library — soft, all embracing, ready to educate
us for anything. , . . Like pumpkin pie, LSD,
and television, the index is merely an amor-
phous collection of American mores and atti-
tudes Jtcanbe analyzed, pummeled, orpraised,
No matter how approached, it finally adds up
to mother draped in the red, white, and blue, a
full shopping bag dangling fromher arm, wire
curlers adorning her head. 1
Katz went on to criticize some of "mom's"
policies, darkly detecting her "cool, calcu-
lated hand" in the index. He over-extended his
metaphor, but his essential point was well
taken: the Readers' Guide had long before
become a familiar, dependable, reassuring
fixture in libraries of all types and sizes. Not
surprisingly, academic librarians complain of
the difficulty of "weaning" students from "the
green books" (as Readers' Guide is often
called) and onto the subject-specialized in-
dexes more suitable for most college research.
Even when mom can no longer solve all prob-
lems, she remains comforting — a beacon to
the insecure. And so with the Readers ' Guide.
Indeed, if the H,W. Wilson Company did
not also issue a wide range of indexes to
scholarly and professional literature, many
students might resist even more strenuously.
That it does, that the old friendly format can be
found behind covers of other colors, bearing
other names, is an invaluable aid to librarians'
instruction efforts, enabling them to counsel
the timid that "If you can use the Readers '
Guide, you can use this. The only difference is
that it will lead you to the authoritative articles
your professor wants you to use." The air
vibrates with relief.
How did the index achieve maternal sta-
tus? First, of course, it meets an important
information need and until recently had no
real competition. Second, it is reasonably easy
to use and its format has remained the same
over its 90-year lifetime. And third, it is ex-
traordinarily good at what it does.
Halsey William Wilson
To appreciate the remarkable accomplish-
ment of Readers ' Guide requires some knowl-
edge of the publisher that initiated and still
produces it: the H.W. Wilson Company. The
story has many times been told of Halsey
William Wilson and the unique business that
he founded and nursed patiently to success
against great odds. 2
Bom on May 12, 1868, in Wilmington,
Vermont, Wilson was orphaned when still a
toddler and spent his childhood in Massachu-
setts with his grandparents, his adolescence
with an aunt and uncle in Iowa and Minnesota.
While working his way through the University
of Minnesota, he joined with his roommate to
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITERATURE 199
establish what became essentially the univer-
sity bookstore. Wilson acquired his half of the
$400 start-up capital by taking loans from
other students. They flourished, of course, as
the American Dream requires, and Wilson
eventually bought out his partner and gained
the means to marry a coed with whom he
thereafter lived for 59 years, until his death in
1954. Work overtook studies and Wilson never
received his baccalaureate, but didn't suffer
for lack of it. 3
Beginnings of Wilson's Publishing
Career
His first publishing venture — the Cumu-
lative Book Index (CBI), which has been con-
tinuously published ever since — grew out of
his need as a bookseller for a cumulative new-
book catalog. Publishers' Weekly, the
industry's trade journal, had provided semi-
annual cumulations, but stopped in 1895, giv-
ing Wilson an idea and practical impetus.
Three years later, he began issuing CBI from
his apartment with a staff consisting of himself
as production and business manager and his
wife as editor. 4 Its first issue consisted of a 1 6-
page pamphlet. 5 CBI is important here be-
cause it was Wilson's first title and set the
pattern for his second, the Readers ' Guide to
Periodical Literature (RG).
The presence of "cumulative" in CBPs
title suggests that this was a noteworthy fea-
ture for the time, and indeed Wilson is some-
times credited incorrectly with having invented
the practice of cumulation. 6 In fact, others had
gone before him, including Frederick Leypoldt
of Publishers ' Weekly and, more notably,
William Howard Brett of the Cleveland Public
Library, whose Cumulative Index to Periodi-
cals (Cleveland: Cleveland Public Library,
1869-1897; Cleveland: Helman-Taylor Co.,
1898-1903) was an important precursor of
Readers' Guide? But earlier attempts had
soon foundered on economic problems. In
those pre-computer days, cumulation seemed
to demand a complete resetting of type, an
effort much too expensive to be recouped
through the prices that could successfully be
charged. Drawing on printing experience he
had gained while self-financing his education,
Wilson decided that the lines of type could be
retained after their first use and speedily
interfiled with other lines to produce cumula-
tions. This entailed difficulties but proved
feasible; a practiced Wilson "combiner" could
mergeup to 1 00 galleys of type, orabout 6,000
index entries, in an eight-hour shift 8
Through his work with CBI, Wilson also
discovered the optimal index arrangement.
The first five issues were divided into two
parts: an author-title index followed by a clas-
sified index, It was soon clear that subscribers
were confused, and the combined author-title-
subject "dictionary" format, which would be
applied to subsequent Wilson indexes as well,
was adopted. 9
Finally, the development of CBI set en-
during financial and editorial precedents. By
the time she finished assembling its second
number, Justina Wilson had decided that full-
time housekeeping combined with full-time
editing added up to too much work. Marion E.
Potter, a 29 -year-old graduate student, be-
came Wilson's first employee and stayed with
him for 55 years, until her death one year
before his, ' ° Accounts of the company invari-
ably highlight her contribution, and her long
experience and legendary industriousness
must, along with Wilson's own direct daily
involvement, have formed a backbone that
supported the enterprise through its years of
development.
Strong supports were needed, for nothing
came easy. Bibliographic publishing was and
long remained time-consuming, unglamorous,
and commercially unpromising, Forty years
after the company's founding, Creighton Peet
observed in a New Yorker "profile:" "[Wil-
son] has had his field pretty much to himself,
and been more or less welcome to it. " ] ! By that
time, of course, the H.W. Wilson Company's
profitability was well-established though
modest. But each index, beginning with CBI,
200 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
lost money for awhile. In 1898, figuring that
this first endeavor would cost him $500 for
typesetting and printing, he had set his annual
subscription fee at $1 and set out optimisti-
cally to enlist a minimum 500 subscribers.
But, in a pattern that would repeat, that first
year yielded only 300 subscribers and Wilson,
undeterred, made up the difference from his
bookselling proceeds, ' 2 He would continue to
do this as each new reference serial sought its
audience, subsidizing them first through hts
store and later, after he had given up retail
sales and moved to New York, through the
profits from more lucrative publications. This
practice has continued down to the present in
the H.W. Wilson Company, which, 37 years
after the founder's death, still functions ac-
cording to his principles. In 1990, Readers'
Guide Abstracts on microfiche was six years
old, its paper edition two years old, and it was
still regarded as an expensive undertaking
though it had recovered its costs through sale
as a computerized database. George Lewicky,
who at the time had headed Wilson's index
division for 25 years, explained philosophi-
cally that building a sufficient subscriber list
would take time, as it had for other indexes,
and the company, confident of its produces
value, could wait, 13
It was, then, on this base of knowledge
and practice that the three-year-old business
built the index that would become its most
famous.
Existing Periodical Indexes
Although Wilson did not establish CBI
with libraries' needs in mind, he soon acquired
librarians as subscribers and began attending
to their concerns. At meetings, he heard them
say that identifying useful periodical articles
was so difficult that keeping back runs some-
times seemed pointless. Though indexes ex-
isted, they were sadly inadequate. The first to
be created had been the famous Poole 's Index
to Periodical Literature, which is still used
today. First issued in 1848 as An Alphabetical
Index to Subjects Treated in the Reviews and
Other Periodicals to Which No Indexes Have
Been Published (New York: George P.
Putnam), it was revised by its author, William
Frederick Poole, in 1853 and then lay dor-
mant, becoming increasingly out of date, until
the first meeting of the American Library
Association (ALA) in 1 876, There Poole pro-
posed, and the Association endorsed, a coop-
erative project, with indexing to be performed
by librarian-volunteers around the country
and submitted to Poole as editor-in-chief. The
result appeared in 1882, with quinquennial
updates through 1907 (Boston: Houghton,
1882-1 908). u Ambitious, progressive, and
important as it undoubtedly was, Poole 's none-
theless suffered from poor subject indexing;
no author indexing; omission of periodical
dates; inclusion of some less-useful, and ex-
clusion of some more-useful, periodicals; and,
of course, infrequency. Two other efforts —
Brett's aforementioned Cumulative Index to
Periodicals and W.L Fletcher's Cooperative
Index to Periodicals, offered as a Library
Journal supplement from 1883 to 1892 —
began as monthlies but soon slid back to
quarterly, then annual, schedules. ' s An oppor-
tunity, and dangers, were apparent to Wilson.
First Issue of Readers ' Guide
The February 1901 CBI carried, for the
first time, a supplement curiously entitled "A
Monthly Cumulative Index to Ten Important
Periodicals" — curious because it actually in-
dexed only seven: Atlantic Monthly, Harper 's
Monthly, North American Review, Century,
Forum, Review ofReviews^ and Scribner's. l6
Of these, only the first three survive, and only
the first two are still indexed by Readers'
Guide,
Three months later, CBI printed the first
advertisement for a separately published
monthly Wilson periodical index, now named
the Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
and including, in addition to the seven maga-
zines listed above: Bookman, Cosmopolitan,
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITEM TURE 20 1
Critic, International Monthly, McClure's
Magazine, Outlook, Popular Science Monthly,
and World's Work, 17 (Again, the company's
math seemed defective, as the ad promised
indexing for "fourteen leading periodicals,"
but clearly listed 15.) Then as now an author-
subject index, RG was said to be "useful in the
library, in the club and in the home." It could
be had for $ 1 per year, or, "for a limited time,"
free with a subscription to any of the indexed
magazines save Cosmopolitan andMcClure 's.
A sample copy would be sent for the price of
a two-cent stamp.
At the end of 1901 , a paper-covered vol-
ume was published that cumulated the entries
in the CBI supplement with those from the new
Readers ' Guide. Each subsequent year saw
similar cumulations. When the second was
issued, in December 1902, the list of indexed
periodicals had lengthened to 21. I8 In 1903,
Readers ' Guide absorbed Brett's tottering in-
dex, and the first quinquennial cumulation
was subtitled: "A Consolidation of the Cumu-
lative Index to a Selected List of Periodicals
and the Readers ' Guide to Periodical Litera-
ture""
The early multi-year cumulations are no-
table for sudden steep increases in the number
of periodicals indexed, followed by a general
leveling off at just over 1 00 titles. The number
would rise slowly after that, reflecting the
increase in popular magazines. Those early
issues were also unusual — given the index's
name and what we have come to expect from
it — in handling some books and report litera-
ture as well as periodicals. For the first 23
years of i?G's existence, it provided statistics
in its subtitles. Thus the 1905-9 cumulation
proclaimed itself "An Index to Ninety-Nine
Periodicals, and Also in the Same Alphabet an
Index to 430 Books, Reports, etc., Constitut-
ing a Supplement to the Second Edition of the
A. L. A. Index to General Literature" 20 The
1910-14 edition provided "An Author and
Subject Index to 1 1 1 Periodicals and Reports
and 1 67 Composite Books "but also explained
that because the forthcoming Standard Cata-
log would include analytics for books, they
would no longer be indexed mReaders ' Guide,
excepting "government and association re-
ports" (e.g., conference proceedings). 21
Twenty years later, book indexing was en-
hanced by the new Essay and General Litera-
ture Index, which thoroughly analyzed collec-
tions of essays in book format. In 1915-18,
RG users were told to expect an "Author and
Subject Index to 104 Periodicals and Re-
ports"; in 1919-21 and in 1922-24, "An Au-
thor and Subject Index to 108 Periodicals and
Reports"; and finally, in 1925-28, the more
noncommittal subtitle of "An Author and
Subject Index" was adopted. 22
Change and Continuity
Today, the scope of Readers' Guide re-
mains determinedly unchanged. It is, as it was
in 1901, "an author subject index to selected
general interest periodicals of reference value
in libraries." 23 The number of publications
indexed has grown to 188. As has ever been
true, they are all English-language, almost all
published in the United States, and cover all
subjects of any conceivable popular interest.
One of the few changes mReaders ' Guide
over the years has been frequency of cumula-
tion. The question of the optimal schedule
appears to have perplexed the company. Al-
though annual cumulations were always com-
piled, the span of final cumulations varied. As
indicated in the publication history below,
three five-year cumulations covering 1900—
14 were followed by one four-year (1915-
1918). Then, in her preface to the fifth multi-
year cumulation, which included only 1919-
21, editor Elizabeth J. Sherwood announced
that "the three-year cumulative plan [is] now
permanently adopted." 24 She could not have
anticipated the coming proliferation of maga-
zines or the resistance librarians would even-
tually develop to the cost of replacing cumu-
lations with broader cumulations. The "per-
manent" decision held only through the next
cumulation (1922-24). Following that were
202 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
three more four-year volumes and then, be-
ginning in July 1935, 30 years of biennial
compilations, For March 1965-February 1966,
only a hardbound annual cumulation was of-
fered, a practice persisting down to the present.
It necessitates more laborious searching by
the user interested in several years' worth of
information (a problem circumvented by the
newer online and CD-ROM versions of the
index), but has resulted in volumes much more
manageable physically.
Small changes notwithstanding, what is
perhaps most remarkable about the source is
the durability of its original design. Despite its
status as very nearly a pioneering effort; de-
spite the great changes that have occurred in
the publishing industry, education, and Ameri-
can demographics; and despite the recent emer-
gence of several competitors, Readers ' Guide
has never significantly changed its look, its
arrangement, or its purpose. A 1905 library
user would be entirely comfortable with a
1990 issue, though subject headings and ar-
ticle titles would be startling. And here, for
publisher, user, and, by the way, intellectual
historian, is the most challenging and interest-
ing aspect of indexing: selecting and system-
atizing subject headings.
Indexing Practices
Poole had created what was essentially a
keyword subject index, using authors' title
terms as descriptors rather than developing a
controlled subject-indexing vocabulary. Ironi-
cally, the ease of keyword indexing automati-
cally by computer has revived the popularity
of this method, but its deficiencies are serious,
and Wilson recognized them. His astuteness
and that of his early editors is easy to overlook
in a period that bristles with indexes of all
types, with well developed subject heading
lists for all topics, that has seen many analyses
of their relative strengths and has at its com-
mand a vast array of high technology to facili-
tate all indexing and printing tasks. But that
Wilson, with almost no useful precedents to
learn from and every reason to minimize costs
and labor, still recognized the great advan-
tages of controlled-vocabulary indexing and
pursued them, seems positively prescient.
The principal advantage, of course, is that
all citations to articles on a given subject are
brought together under a uniform descriptor,
regardless of the terminology selected by (he
articles' authors. Furthermore, when a title
offers few or no clues to content, as is often the
case in all periodicals and especially in popu-
lar magazines, the indexer's exercise of judg-
ment assures that it will nonetheless be placed
under the appropriate heading(s). But all of
this requires the strenuous, enormously time-
consuming intellectual laborof carefully read-
ing every article to be indexed; deciding upon
the most appropriate terms to represent thou-
sands of concepts and the cross-references
needed to guide the user to them; and continu-
ally scrutinizing and revising headings and, of
course, their associated cross-references, to
reflect changes in usage.
Following the practice of CBI and bor-
rowing its headings wher^uitable, Readers '
Guide commenced with tlpj^sram of subject
indexing and elaborate cross-referencing that
continue? to distinguisjfal Wilson indexes. In
1990, George Lewic^y isolated JJG's cross-
reference structure, along with the accuracy
and currency of its subject headings, as the
characteristic that set it apart from and raised
it above all competing guides to general -inter-
est magazines. 25
The Library of Congress Subject Head-
ings (LCSH) derived in 1898 were used when
possible, though being designed for books,
LCSH terminology often lacked the specific-
ity needed to describe narrowly focused maga-
zine articles. Encyclopedias were also con-
sulted, as were any other indexes the editor
could find. 26 Indexing is never straightfor-
ward, however, and different editors embraced
different ideal theories of subject delineation,
which led to some conflict. Years later, Marion
Potter, the first RG editor, would remember
her successor, Anna Lorraine Guthrie, de-
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITERATURE 203
manding: "Use the encyclopedia subject head-
ings. Every reader can find things in an ency-
clopedia and does not need to have the proper
page pointed out to him." 27 This is debatable,
but does agree with the preference implied by
Guthrie herself in her preface to the 1905-09
volume. 28
Accordingto John Lawler, the two women
argued at length about headings, with Guthrie
initially favoring the simply-formatted head-
ings of the Peabody catalog (e.g., "Child la-
bor"), Potter preferring the Athenaeum
catalog's system of subdivision ("Children-
Employment"): "The discussion continued
until in time the two editors had converted
each other. Then it was resumed with Miss
Guthrie defending Miss Potter's former posi-
tion and Miss Potter advocating Miss Guthrie's
discarded theories." Potter also sought advice
from the University of Minnesota faculty.
"What about 'contagious diseases'?" Lawler
has her asking the "startled head of the medi-
cal school" . . . "should it be 'infectious
diseases,' or perhaps 'communicable dis-
eases'?" 29 Experience helped, but the task
never became easy. Potter recalled hearing
Al ice Dougan, who served longer than anyone
else as RG's editor, declare after many years:
"Subject heading work is a hard job," 30
In 1954, R.G editor Sarita Robinson ex-
plained the index's current policy on subject
heading "selection and use.*' It had not changed
much, with other Wilson indexes and LCSH
still the main guides. She pointed out, how-
ever, that because it dealt with more timely
literature, RG often had to treat an idea before
LCSH did, resulting, eventually, in differ-
ences between them . Other problems i ncluded
the difficulty of determining how narrow the
indexing should be, how many cross-refer-
ences were really needed, and which ideas or
events were of purely ephemeral interest,
which of sufficiently enduring importance to
merit their own subject headings. 31
Tracing the evolution of new terms down
through the years of the index is fascinating in
itself and illuminates some of Robinson's
points, not to mention Dougan' s frustration.
For example, the 1900-04 index offered only
two subject sections dealing with aviation:
"Aerial navigation" and"Air-ships."By 1 905-
09, there were many relevant headings and
many dozens of entries. What would come to
be "Pilots" were "Aeronauts," and cross-ref-
erencing for the still used "Aerial navigation"
instructed the user to "see also": "Aeronau-
tics," "Aeroplanes," "Balloons and Air-ships,"
and "Flying machines." Throughout subse-
quent volumes, the numbers of entries contin-
ued to multiply, and in 1915-18, the primary
terms at last became "Aeronautics" (with a
reference from "Aerial navigation") and "Air-
planes."
Similarly, one can imagine Wilson index-
ers scrambling to keep up with automotive
developments. In 1900-04, the form of fuel
that would emerge as standard was not yet
certain; although "Automobiles, Gasoline"
took the largest share of citations, with 29;
"Automobiles, Electric" had only one less;
"Automobiles, Steam" had 10; and "Automo-
biles, Alcohol" had 5. In 1905-09, there were
suddenly dozens of headings relating to auto-
mobiles. By 1915-18, "Automobiles" were
apparently assumed to be gasoline-fed ve-
hicles, forno qualifier was deemednecessary.
Two new headings, however, turned out to
reflect only a short-lived fantasy and immedi-
ately fell into disuse: "Autoplanes," with a
citation to Scientific American's article on "A
Limousine for Land and Air Travel," and
"Automobiles, Aerial," leading the user to a
single article entitled "Aero- Auto-Craft — The
Car of the Future."
"Wireless telegraphy" was used through
1919-21, though there was by then some
confusion about it, and "Radio" also appeared,
with one citation. In 1922-24, the latter head-
ing subsumed the former. "Atomic power"
appeared for the first time in 1939-41, with
entries for 18 articles, all of them speculative.
Headings and citations proliferated after that,
but with a dramatic leap in number, and the
first use of "Atomic bomb," in the 1943-45
204 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
cumulation. "Calculating machines" did not
give way to "Computers" until 1965-66,
though long before that, many cross-refer-
ences had to be provided. (Before 1932, "Cal-
culators" were "Mathematical prodigies"!)
Recent economic and political events also
raise questions for the indexer, who cannot
know at the time they are first reported how
future users will search for them. Thus the
stock market's "Black Friday" lies buried
under "Stock exchange," subheading "Crisis,
October, 1929," in the 1929-32 cumulation,
confounding some current users seeking con-
temporary accounts of that day. And "World
War I" remained "European War, 1914-1918"
until 1977-78. In 1951-53, a cross-reference
was provided from "World War, 1914-191 8,"
but several subsequent cumulations omitted it,
presumably by accident When asked how she
decided when to revise outdated headings,
Marion Potter is said to have replied: "When
I shudder at them and can't stand them any
longer, I finally change them." 32
Computerization facilitates subject work,
but it remains RG's most problematic task.
The company has long been criticized for not
following the lead of other services (e.g.,
Psychological Abstracts and ERIC) by pub-
lishing its indexes' subject heading lists, To-
day, online subject files for each index are
available to both the Wilson staff and the
public — though paper lists continue to be re-
quested. On average, three headings per ar-
ticle are assigned. When asked in 1 990 about
changes occurring atRG, its editor, JeanMarra,
mentioned only two: an attempt to establish
more uniformity of headings among the vari-
ous indexes, and increasing care to avoid
terminology with a potential to offend certain
groups. As an example, she cited "sexist head-
ings." But she added, with typical Wilson
caution, "We reflect the literature. We don't
feel we're out to change the world." Still, said
Marra, "We're trying to become more sensi-
tive.""
Establishing the most authentic form of a
name is perhaps easier than setting subject
headings, but still a challenge. The Wilson
Company has always been notable for its
carefully developed and maintained personal
and corporate names files. 34 Once created
separately for each index, these have been
collapsed into a single online name authority
control file which governs the entire com-
pany, guaranteeing consistency among in-
dexes. 35
Selecting the Sources Indexed
But regardless of its indexing and produc-
tion quality, a periodical guide is only as
useful as its sources are well selected. Read-
ers ' Guide has been attacked on this score by
both interested and disinterested parties, which
is perhaps unavoidable for an index that is
ubiquitous yet necessarily limited in number
of magazines treated. 36 Its defense has always
been its unusually responsive means of selec-
tion. Early in the history of Readers ' Guide, all
subscribers were polled periodically to deter-
mine which titles should be added. As the
subscriber list grew unmanageably long, only
a representative sample was questioned. In
1951, through a Wilson Library Bulletin ar-
ticle, editor Sarita Robinson took her concerns
about i?G coverage directly to librarians. "Are
we indexing the right magazines?" she asked,
and went on to note irregularities in topical
coverage (e.g., no gardening magazine, but
nine on education) ; overlap with the company's
subject-specialized indexes; and possible
changes in magazine quality over a long run,
She concluded by suggesting that a broad-
based survey be carried out by ALA as "unbi-
ased and qualified representatives of the pro-
fession." 37 One year later, the Committee on
Wilson Indexes was established under the
auspices of the American Library Associa-
tion. 38
In 1984, former member Charles R.
Andrews described the committee's function-
ing in detail. 39 Composed of librarians prima-
rily from the eastern seaboard, to assure their
attendance at Bronx meetings (though this is
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITERATURE 205
changing and today some come from as far
away as California 40 ), the committee evalu-
ates Wilson indexes, surveys subscribers, re-
views suggestions for change, and communi-
cates its final decisions to the company, which,
within its staff and financial limits, complies,
In one celebrated instance, Wilson was even
persuaded to restore nine previously deleted
titles that librarians thought important to li-
brary users, though their reference value was
questionedby the Wilson Company. 41 Whereas
committee members once read all letters and
requests from the public, since the 1970s these
have poured in so copiously that George
Lewicky and Jean Marra screen them and
present recommendations for the committee's
consideration. 42 Thus the link between the
committee and the library profession has be-
come less direct, mediated by the company
itself. Though there have been no significant
published criticisms of this change, it has the
potential to undermine objectivity of assess-
ment. Nonetheless, all letters are available to
any committee members who wish to read
them, and the company's relationship with its
customers remains close and personal, per-
haps uniquely so.
In the 90 years since Readers ' Guide was
founded, it has spun off important auxiliary
projects. The first was the Periodicals Clear-
ing House, established in 1910 because old
articles, whose existence was now signaled by
indexing, often could not be found. At its most
expansive, the Clearing House had for sale
approximately three million single issues,
100,000 bound volumes, and 1,000 complete
runs, and searches for still other numbers
could be commissioned. Kraus Periodicals
purchased the Clearing House in 1955. 43
Related Wilson Indexes
A more enduring development began
unpretentiously as theReaders ' Guide Supple-
ment — much as RG itself had started life as an
appendage to Cumulative Book Index. Index-
ing periodicals that were too specialized and
academic to be needed by public libraries, the
Supplement appeared five times each year,
then cumulated in a bound volume. The first
multi-year cumulation covered 1907-15, the
second 1916-19/ 4 The third (1920-23) at last
gave it an independent identity and announced
its new name: International Index to Periodi-
cals t with the rather broad explanatory sub-
title, "Devoted Chiefly to the Humanities and
Science." 45 In 1965, it was re-titled Social
Sciences and Humanities Index and in 1974
split into two separate indexes.
By this time, the company had long since
left Minneapolis, its first home (and "birth-
place" of Readers ' Guide). By the early teens,
Wilson had felt the need for proximity to the
center of American publishing. He moved the
company first to White Plains, New York, in
1913, and four years later to more adequate
and conveni ent quarters in the Bronx, where it
still resides. Located just to the east of the
bustling Major Deegan Expressway, it is eas-
ily identified by the famous sculpture of a
huge lighthouse atop an open book that soars
upward from its rooftop — which refers, of
course, to the famous Wilson lighthouse logo
that is imprinted upon each publication.
Other Readers' Guide Products
In 1935, Abridged Readers' Guide was
started for smaller institutions. Identical in
format to its unabridged namesake, itincluded
the indexing for only about one-quarter of the
periodicals. It continues to this day, fulfilling
the needs of small public and school libraries.
As the years wore on, researchers had felt
the lack of Wilson-quality periodical indexing
for the nineteenth century. The company re-
solved, therefore, to create such an index
retrospectively, covering 1890-99. When the
project was first announced, 20 periodicals
were to be included, but by the time it was
published in 1944, the number had increased
to 51,and The nineteenth Century Readers'
Guide spanned two thick volumes. 46
That no additional RG product or format
was offered until almost 40 years later is, from
one perspective, a testament to the company's
206 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
^
caution and stability, and from another, its
reluctance to change with the times, Well after
other reference works had gone online,
Wilson's publications remained stubbornly
paper-bound. Finally, in 1983, Readers' Guide
and several other indexes were computerized
and marketed by Wilson acting as its own
vendor under the name Wihonline. In 1987,
the same indexing span was published on CD-
ROM as Wilsondisc — with, of course, con-
tinuing updates, In both formats,i? G was well-
received by reviewers and users.
But the company's first foray in decades
into an indexing format essentially outside its
experience came with the introduction of Read-
ers' Guide Abstracts — initially on microfiche
in 1 984, and four years later in a paper version
designed primarily for public and school li-
braries, incorporating only 40 percent of the
abstracts available in the microfiche product.
In the same year, Popular Magazine Review
(Topsfield, MA: Data Base Communications
Corp., 1984-87) began. It was eventually ac-
quired by Ebsco and underwent a title change
to Magazine Article Summaries (Palo Alto,
CA, 1987- ). Offering indexing and compara-
tively short abstracts for popular magazine
articles in both paper and CD-ROM, Maga-
zine Article Summaries has perhaps been
Readers 1 Guide Abstracts' most comparable
competitor, though it has won much less atten-
tion and acceptance.
Readers ' Guide Abstracts represented an
extremely bold step — intellectually, because
popular magazine articles had never seemed
as suited to abstracting as scholarly papers,
and practically, because it was uncommonly
labor-intensive. Located in Cambridge, Mas-
sachusetts, to take advantage of that area's
deep pool of well educated workers, the Ab-
stracts in 1990 employed 32 full-time profes-
sional abstracters, most of them English or
journalism majors hoping to launch writing
careers. Explaining why the Abstracts were
undertaken, Lewicky noted an accelerating
trend throughout the information industry to-
ward database enhancements, "value-added"
features. 41
At the age of 90, with 26,1 19 mail sub-
scriptions to its unabridged paper version and
21,590 to the abridged, 48 the Readers' Guide
to Periodical Literature is comfortably indis-
pensable, "the closest thing to mom in the
library." The index, and more impressively
the entire company that produces it, stands as
a striking example of success in bibliographic
publishing. What, then, were the elements of
this success?
The Reasons for RG's Success
Posing the same question in her 1951
article, "Whodunit?," Marion E. Potter settled
on a single answer: H.W. Wilson himself*'
And she was probably correct. The most du-
rable building block of his success was the
importance and uniqueness of his products-
most notably CBI and Readers ' Guide, which
together served as foundation and pilotproject
for what was to come. But he was not the first
to recognize the need, nor were his indexes
truly pioneering. He was, however, the firstto
succeed and endure as an index publisher, and
he set high standards of quality that even today
Readers' Guide's major competitor, Maga-
zine Index (Menlo Park, CA: Information
Access Corp, 1 977- ), does not seem to aspire
to and certainly has not reached. 50 Added to
this are several impressively far-sighted, hard-
headed, business decisions.
First, and least often commented upon,
was his willingness to hire women. At a time
when they had few opportunities in the private
sector, Wilson welcomed them and often placed
them in key positions, thus availing himself of
the best talents of a largely underrated or
ignored, but educated and willing, prospec-
tive labor force.
Second, he asserted the futility of compe-
tition in costly publishing projects with lim-
ited markets, and, equally important, won the
agreement of the competitor in question. In
191 1, Wilson and R.R. Bowker, producer of
Publishers ' Weekly, agreed to divide up the
bibliographic universe. As a result, Bowker
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITERATURE 207
would terminate his new monthly periodical
index and the cumulated book lists which had
begun reappearing in Publishers' Weekly,
while Wilson would turn over to Bowker some
directories and a digest of library literature
that he had been publishing. 51 However one
may feel about voluntary restraints on compe-
tition, the deal apparently benefitted both com-
panies financially.
Third, Wilson knew and stayed close to
his customers, a tradition continued by his
company after his death. Even before the ALA
Committee on Wilson Indexes was formed, he
consulted librarians regularly, attended their
meetings, and seriously considered their writ-
ten suggestions. He never grew away from his
users, never lost sight of their needs, and so he
understood what they would purchase. Coupled
with this was his willingness to take losses on
new products that held his confidence, allow-
ing them ample time to build adequate sub-
scriber lists. That he already owned and main-
tained a profitable second business during his
early years as publisher helped immeasur-
ably.
Fourth was his development of cumula-
tions, which had been considered economi-
cally infeasible.
Fifth, and most famous, was his initiation
of "service basis" pricing, an imaginative con-
cept that overcame the other greatest financial
obstacle to unsubsidized index publishing. An
intellectually demanding and labor-intensive
task, index creation is very expensive, yet the
potential market is comparatively small and
consists mostly of libraries in the not-for-
profit sector. Especially in the early days of
Readers ' Guide, neither high-volume sales at
low prices nor modest sales at high prices
couldbe counted upon to cover costs, let alone
generate a profit. Wilson hit upon the novel
idea of pricing the index as a service rather
than ^product. He first experimented with and
rejected the possibility of issuing indexing on
cards, with libraries buying those that covered
the periodicals they owned. Reasoning that
even if the entire index were received, librar-
ies would find primarily useful only those
parts pertinent to their holdings, he then de-
cided to charge differentially, based on the
number of titles owned by the subscribing
library. In effect, the smallest libraries with
the fewest resources were charged least and
the largest libraries were charged most, even
though they all received the same product.
S ervice basis pricing withstood indignant chal-
lenges from large libraries which, regardless
of their indignation, found Readers ' Guide
essential and bought it. Over time, the unor-
thodox pricing method became accepted and
was applied to new Wilson indexes as they
developed. It is still used for the specialized
sources, though by 1 961 , the audience for both
Readers ' Guide andAbridged Readers' 'Guide
had grown so large that flat pricing became
possible. 52 Today, they cost every subscriber
$150 and $75 per year, respectively.
So, through its founder's persistence, self-
confidence, imagination, good judgment, and
conservative financial expectations, the H.W.
Wilson Company prospered, and its flagship
index became as familiar and indispensable as
mom. What Readers' Guide has meant to
generations of researchers is possible to ap-
preciate only if one can imagine being without
it and without all of the indexes whose ways it
paved. Obviously, itprovides access to moun-
tains of information that would otherwise re-
main virtually inaccessible. But, beyond this,
it must have encouraged the founding of peri-
odicals, serious writing for periodicals, li-
brary subscriptions to periodicals, and orga-
nized collecting of their entire runs by librar-
ies. Taken for granted like any mom, Readers '
Guide is rarely appreciated as an instigator of
revolution in information access and periodi-
cal and reference publishing. It differed from
most revolutions in that it exceeded its own
early expectations, its effects were overwhelm-
ingly positive, and they endured.
208 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
PUBLICATION HISTORY
"A Monthly Cumulative Index to Ten Important
Periodicals." Supplement to Cumulative Book
Index, 1901. Minneapolis: H.W, Wilson Co.
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature. 1901- .
Publisher: H,W. Wilson Co. Place of Publica-
tion: Minneapolis, 1901-1913; White Plains,
N.Y„ 191 3-17; Bronx, NY, 1917- Current fre-
quency: Semi-monthly, March, April, Septem-
ber, October, December; Monthly, January,
February, May through August, November.
Quarterly cumulative issues; annual cumula-
tive bound volumes. Cumulations: 1900-1904;
1905-1909; 1910-1914; 1915-1918; 1919-
1921; 1922-1924; 1925-1928; 1929-June 1932;
July 1932-June 1935; July 1935-June 1937;
July 1937- June 1939; July 1939-June 1941;
July 1941-Jutie 1943; July 1943-April 1945;
May 1945-April 1947; May 1947-April 1949;
May 1949-March 1951; April 1951 -March
1953;AprUl953-February 1955; March 1955-
February 1957; March 1 957-Febmary 1959;
March 1959-February 1961; Match 1961-Feb-
ruary 1963; March 1963-February 1965; an-
nual thereafter. Editors: Marion E. Potter, 1901—
1902; Anna Lorraine Guthrie, 1903-1914;
Marion A. Knight, 1914-1918; Elizabeth J.
Sherwood, 1918-1924; Alice M.Dougan, 1924-
1945; Sarita M. Robinson, 1945-1963; Zada
Limerick, 1963-1979; JeanM. Marra, 1979- .
Abridged Readers' Guide. 1935- Bronx, NY: H.W.
Wilson Co. Frequency: Nine per year. Cumula-
tions: Three per year and annual.
Nineteenth Century Readers' Guide 1890-1S99, ed-
ited by Helen Grant Cushing. Bronx, NY: H.W.
Wilson Co, 1944.
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature on
Wilsonline. Online: January 1983- .
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature on
misondtsc. CD-ROM: January 1983- .
Readers' Guide Abstracts. Microfiche: 1984- .
Readers' Guide Abstracts, Print Edition. Hard copy:
September 1988- . Frequency: Ten per year.
Cumulations: Semi-annual.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The most useful source of information on
the development of Readers' Guide to Peri-
odical Literature, is RG itself, especially the
editors* prefaces published in early cumula-
tions and several articles published by long-
ago Wilson employees, most in the journal
now entitled Wilson Library Bulletin. Among
these articles are those by Beatrice B.
Rakestraw, Sarita Robinson, and Marion E.
Potter. Two other sources are also crucial:
John Lawless company history and Arthur
Plotnik's encyclopedia article. The latter dis-
cusses both Wilson the company and Wilson
the man. Plotnik apparently had access to a
company archive not available to this author.
It is not clear that access to such an archive
would be especially revealing since few criti-
cal decisions seem to have been made over the
years; until recently, when electronic access
was provided and Readers ' Guide Abstracts
was introduced, format, scope, and purpose
had hardly changed since the index's earliest
days.
Andrews, Charles R. "Cooperation at its Best: The
Committee on Wilson Indexes at Work." ^£24
(Winter, 1984): 155-61.
Cheney, Frances Neel. "Wilson Publications as Ref-
erence Tools." Wilson Library Bulletin 22 (June,
1948): 801-05.
Cushing, Helen Grant. "Preface." Nineteenth Cen-
tury Readers' Guide 1890-1899. New York:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1944.
Davis, Mary Ellen Kyger, and John F. Riddick,
"Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature and
Magazine Index: A Comparison." Reference
Services Review 1 1 (Winter, 1983): 43-50.
G[uthrie], A[nna] L[orraine]. "Preface." Readers'
Guide to Periodical Literature 1905-1909. Min-
neapolis: H.W. Wilson Company, 1910.
"Halsey W. Wilson, Publisher, Dead" [obituary].
New York Times (March 2, 1954) p. 25.
Katz,Bill. "Magazines." Library Journal 93 (Febru-
ary 1,1968): 527.
. "Motherly Index." Library Journal 92 (Feb-
ruary 1,1967): 555.
Kesselman, Martin. "Online Update." Wilson Li-
brary Bulletin (December, 1983): 286-87.
Lawler, John. The H. W. Wilson Company: Half a
Century of Bibliographic Publishing. Minne-
apolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1950,
"Nineteenth Century Readers' Guide." Wilson Bul-
letin for Libraries 13 (October, 1938): 143.
READERS' GUIDE TO PERIODICAL LITERATURE 209
Pearson, Lois R. "In the News: Publisher Restores
Nine Periodical Titles to Readers' Guide on
RASDCommittee'sAdYice."/4wertawiZ/Zjrar-
ies 9 (February, 1978): 69.
Peet, Creighton. "Profiles: AMousetrapintheBronx."
New Yorker 13 (October 29, 1938): 25-28.
Plotnik, Arthur. "H.W. Wilson." Encyclopedia of
Library and Information Science, edited by
Allen Kent, Harold Lancour, and Jay E. Daily.
New York: Marcel Dekker, vol. 10, 1973, pp.
250-78.
Poland, Myra, Henry J. Carr, and O. R. Howard
Thomson. "Report on Periodical Indexing."
Library Journal^ (December, 1914): 903-04.
Potter, Marion E. "Whodunit?" Wilson Library Bul-
letin 25 (April, 1951): 593-96, 605.
"Preface." Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
1900-1904. Minneapolis: H.W. Wilson Co.,
1905, pp. [vii]-ix.
Rakestraw, Beatrice B. "Making a Wilson Index.."
Wilson Library Bulletin 22 (June, 1948): 796-
800.
"The Readers' Guide: 1901-1951; The First Fifty
Years." Wilson Library Bulletin 25 (April , 1 95 1 ):
591-92,605.
Rettig, James. Review of Readers' Guide Abstracts,
Print Edition. Wilson Library Bulletin 63 (Janu-
ary, 1989): 128.
Robinson, Sarita. "Are We Indexing the Right Maga-
zines?" WilsonLibraryBulletin 25 (April, 1 95 1):
597-98.
. Subject Headings: Their Selection and Use
in 'Readers' Guide,"' Special LibrariesAS (May-
June, 1954): 203-05.
S[herwood], Elizabeth] J, "Preface. "Readers ' Guide
to Periodical Literature 1915-1918. New York:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1919.
Whiteley, Sandy, ed. "Reference Books Bulletin:
Featured Reviews: Wilsondisc: Readers' Guide
to Periodical Literature (CD-ROM)." Booklist
84 (December 1, 1987): 609-12.
W ilson, H.W. "Preface ." Readers ' Guide to Periodi-
cal Literature 1910-1914. White Plains, NY:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1915.
Wilson, H[alsey] W[illiam]." Current Biography
(1948): 679-82.
NOTES
1 Bill Katz, "Motherly Index," Library Journal, 92 (1
February 1967): 555.
2 John Lawler, The H, W. Wilson Company: Haifa Cen-
tury of Bibliographic Publishing (Minneapolis:
University of Minnesota Press, 1950); Creighton
Peet, "Profiles: A Mousetrap in the Bronx," New
Yorker 13 (29 October 1938): 25-28; ArthurPlotnik,
"H.W. Wilson," in Encyclopedia of Library and
Information Science, vol. 10 (New York: Marcel
Dekker, 1973), 250-78; "Wilson, H(alsey)
W(illiam)," in Current Biography 1948 (Bronx,
NY: H.W. Wilson Co., 1949), 679-82.
2 Lawler, 9-19; "Halsey W. Wilson, Publisher, Dead,"
New York Times (2 March 1954), 25.
4 Lawler, 25-28; "Wilson, H(alsey) W(illiam)," 680.
5 The title page of the first CBI, dated February 1, 1898,
is reproduced in Plotnik, 252.
6 For example; Peet, 25.
7 John Lawler, 25; "Preface," in Readers' Guide to
Periodical Literature 1900-1904 (Minneapolis:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1905), [vii]; Carl Vitz, "Brett,
William Howard," in Encyclopedia of Library and
Information Science, vol. 3 (New York: Marcel
Dekker, 1970), 264.
8 Plotnik, 254; Beatrice B. Rakestraw, "Making a Wilson
Index," Wilson Library Bulletin, 22 (June 1948):
796. Rakestraw's article includes a photograph of
a combiner intent upon her rows of linotype slugs.
'Lawler, 26-27.
10 Ibid., 28-29; ArthurPlotnik, 255.
"Peet, 25.
"John Lawler, 27-28, 31-32,
13 George I. Lewicky, Vice-President and Director of
Indexing Services, H.W. Wilson Co., interview
with the author, 19 April 1990.
M Lawler, 37; Plotnik, 256,
15 Lawler, 38; Plotnik, 256; "Preface," 1905, [vii].
l6 "The Readers' Guide: 1901-1951: The First Fifty
Years," Wilson Library Bulletin, 25 (April 1951):
591.
17 Ibid.
18 Ibid.
1 »"Preface,"1905, [vii]; [Title page], Readers ' Guide to
Periodical Literature 1900-1904 (Minneapolis:
H.W. Wilson Company, 1905).
20 [Title page], Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
iP05-yP0P(Minneapolis:H.W.WilsonCo.,19IO).
21 [Title page], Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
1910-1914 (Bronx, NY: H.W. Wilson Co., 1915);
H.W. Wilson, "Preface," Readers' Guide to Peri-
odical Literature 1910-1914 (White Plains, NY:
H.W. Wilson Company, 1915), [v].
n [Title page], Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
1914-1918 (Bronx, NY: H.W. Wilson Co., 1919);
[Title page], Readers ' Guide to Periodical Litera-
ture 1919-1921 (Bronx, NY: H.W. Wilson
Co., 1 922); [Title page], Readers ' Guide toPeriodi-
cal Literature 1922-1924 (Bronx, NY: H.W. Wil-
son Co., 1925); [Title page], Readers' Guide to
Periodical Literature ;P25-7P.2S (Bronx, NY: H.W.
Wilson Co., 1929).
23 [Cover], Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature^ 90
(10 March 1990).
2 " Elizabeth] J. S[herwood], "Preface," Readers ' Guide
to Periodical Literature 1915-1918 (Bronx, NY:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1919): unpaged.
210 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
3J Lewicky, interview with the author, 19 April 1990.
26 A[nna] L[orraine] G [uthrie] , "Preface," Readers ' Guide
io Periodical Literature 1905-1909 (Minneapolis:
H.W. Wilson Co., 1910): unpaged.
2 'Marion E. Potter, "Whodunit?," Wilson Library Bulle-
»n,25(Aprill951):593.
2, G[uthrie], "Preface," unpaged.
a 'Lawler, 101.
30 Potter, 595-96.
ai Sarita Robinson, "Subject Headings: Their Selection
and Use in 'Readers' Guide,'" Special Libraries,45
(May-June 1954): 203-05.
32 Lawler, 106.
33 Jean M. Marra, Editor, Readers ' Guide to Periodical
Literature, interview with the author, 19 April
1990.
a *Lawler, 90-93; Rakestraw, 799-800; Mary EllenKyger
Davis and John F. Riddick, "Readers' Guide to
Periodical Literature and Magazine Index: A Com-
parison," Reference Services Review, 1 1 (Winter
1983): 45.
11 Davis and Riddick, 46; Marra, interview with author,
19 April 1990.
J *See, for example: Myra Poland, Henry J. Carr, and O.
R. Howard Thomson, "Report on Periodical Index-
ing," Library Journal, 39 (December 1914): 903-
04; ICatz, "Motherly Index," 555; Lois R. Pearson,
"In the News; Publisher Restores Nine Periodical
Titles to Readers' Guide on RASD Committee's
Advice," American Libraries, 9 (February 1978):
57 Sarita Robinson, "Are We Indexing the Right Maga-
zines?," Wilson Library Bulletin, 25 (April 1951):
597-98.
38 Charles R. Andrews, "Cooperation at its Best: The
Committee on Wilson Indexes at Work, 1 ' RQ, 24
(Winter 1984): 155.
w Ibid., 155-61; Davis and Riddick, 44.
40 Lewicky, interview with author, 19 April 1990.
41 Pearson, 69.
42 Lewicky and Marra, interviews with the author, 19
April 1990.
43 Lawler, 79-79; Plotnik, 262.
« «p re f ace) » i n International Index to Periodicals 1907-
/P7.5 (White Plains, NY: H.W. Wilson Co., 1916):
unpaged (originally published underthe title: R ead-
ers ' Guide to Periodical Literature Supplement)',
Elizabeth] J. Sfherwood], "Preface," in Interna-
tional Index to Periodicals 1916-1919 (Bronx,
NY: H.W. Wilson Co., 1920): unpaged (originally
published under the title: Readers ' Guide to Peri-
odical Literature Supplement).
45 E[sther] A[nne] Sfmith], "Preface," in International
Index to Periodicals 1920-1923 (Bronx, NY: H.W.
Wilson Co., 1924): unpaged.
^"Nineteenth Century Readers' Guide," in Wilson Bul-
letin/or Librarians, 13 (October 1938): 143;Helen
Grant Gushing, "Preface," Nineteenth Century Read-
ers' Guide 1890-1899 (Bronx, NY: H.W. Wilson
Co., 1944): [v]-vii.
'"Lewicky, interview with author, 19 April 1990.
48 According to postal statements in 1990 issues.
49 Potter, 593.
50 Davis and Riddick, 48-50.
51 Lawier, 59-60.
52 Ibid., 115-35; Plotnik, 257, 267-68.
_£*:
m
Demystifying Parliamentary
Procedure: Robert's Rules of Order
Sarah B. Watstein
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Today, while specific editions and revisions
may vary from institution to institution, there
is virtually no library in the United States
without both a reference copy and multiple
circulating copies of Robert 's Rules of Order,
Without question, Robert's Rules of Order
(hereinafter referred to as Robert's), one of
the most phenomenally successful reference
books of all time, is the standard primary
source of information on parliamentary pro-
cedure. From its original publication in 1876
to the 1 990s, Robert 's continues to be not only
an obvious purchase for academic, public,
school, and special libraries, but also the obvi-
ous source for answering certain kinds of
reference questions on a regular basis.
Over the years, Robert's has served an
extraordinarily varied audience. It functions
as a guide to the parliamentarily perplexed
who serve on committees as part of their jobs
or as members of organizations or associa-
tions and those who attend or chair business
meetings of such groups. To the social scien-
tist, Robert's, by its own declaration printed
on inside jacket cover of the 1970 edition,
serves as the book to "help get things done in
accord with the American spirit," and thereby
functions as a teaching manual of democratic
theory. Students of public policy and of legis-
lative behavior also find Robert's useful, as
does the mathematically oriented political
scientist for whom Robert 's "offers for study
a remarkable and fascinating system of queue-
ing rules," 1 It is interesting to note that Henry
Robert did not aim his book at beginners.
Defects in early editions, including coverage
of many topics twice, imperfect consistency,
incompleteness, inclusion of obscure motions
and/or points, awkward syntax, the lack of
sample material, and the inclusion of -unim-
portant introductory material no doubt dis-
couraged many a beginner over the years!
Reputation and Influence
Praise and respect for Robert 's have in-
creased with each new edition or major revi-
sion since. In her 1970 profile of General
Henry M. Robert, Barbara A. Bannon noted
that "'Robert's Rules of Order' has now sold
well over 2,600,000 copies in seven earlier
editions, and is doing just fine in its new first
major revision in fifty-five years, with a first
printing of 100,000 copies." 2 In his review of
the 1970 edition, Bernard N. Grofman noted
that to "virtually all Americans Robert 's Rules
IS parliamentary procedure and using any
other manual would be sacrilege. ... it has
been seriously suggested that only the Bible
has had a greater influence on the organiza-
tional behavior of Americans." 3
The influence of Robert's is evidenced
not only by its commercial success but also by
its inclusion in nearly any historical sketch of,
orcore bibliography on, parliamentary proce-
dure. Hundreds of manuals of parliamentary
procedure have been published over the years.
A historical sketch of parliamentary proce-
2 1 2 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
dure begins, properly, with the basic prin-
ciples of parliamentary procedure as defined
and practiced as early as the fifth century b.c.
in Athens. The English tradition evolved
through precedent from as early as the thir-
teenth century, and was fairly well developed
by the eighteenth century. A compilation of
these rulings was published by John Hatsell,
clerk of the House of Commons, in two vol-
umes (one in 1776 and the second in 1781),
and later reissued in four volumes. These
volumes were the principal source of Thomas
Jefferson's Manual of Parliamentary Prac-
tice, published in 1801, The three principal
writers on the subject ofparliamentary proce-
dure in the United States prior to the twentieth
century were Jefferson, Cushing, and Robert.
Other Guides to Parliamentary
Procedure
Thomas Jefferson's Manual of Parlia-
mentary Practice continues to be the principal
parliamentary guide of the United States Sen-
ate and the House of Representatives, adopted
by the Senate in 1801 and by the House in
1837. Luther Steams Cushing's A Manual of
Parliamentary Practice R ules ofProceedings
and Debate in Assemblies was published in
1845. Generally known as "Cushing's
Manual/' it was considered more appropriate
to the needs of nonlegislative groups than
Jefferson's Manual. The most widely used
book on parliamentary procedure today, how-
ever, is that of Henry M, Robert.
Hundreds of rule-and-guidebooks for
making meetings work are currently in print,
offering quick answers and shortcuts, up-to-
date methods, frameworks for deciphering
meetings and making choices, tricks and tech-
niques, ploys and stratagems with which indi-
viduals can maneuver meetings to their ad-
vantage. These rule-and-guidebooks are, in
essence, spin-offs of Robert's and other "ob-
solete" nineteenth-century parliamentary pro-
cedure guides. These spin-offs exist because
the layperson views parliamentary procedure
as a jungle and a jumble; and passage through
the maze of parliamentary rules and proce-
dures is often confused at best, requiring the
use of quick guides which are short and clear,
in easy-to-understand language, with frequent
checklists and charts. Not all spin-offs are
useful to the layperson; many serve to confuse
rather than simplify procedures. Sticking to
the standard Robert 's and leaving spin-offs on
the shelf often proves to be the most efficient
and effective way of learning the fine points of
conducting a meeting.
Consideration of competing works must
include mention, in addition to spin-offs, of
restatements of Robert 's. These are as numer-
ous as spin-offs, and include Auer's Essen-
tials of Parliamentary Procedure (3rd ed.,
New York; Prentice Hall, 1 959) and Demeter 's
Manual of Parliamentary Law and Procedure
(Boston: Little, Brown, 1969). Other titles
such as Sturgis' Sturgis Standard Code of
Parliamentary Procedure (3rd ed., New York:
McGraw-Hill, 1988)seekto simplify Robert's
Mules. Still other titles offer down-to-earth,
common-sense approaches, pleading for no
more formal use of Robert's than necessary,
such as FarwelPs The Majority Rules: A
Manual of Procedure for Most Groups
(Pueblo, CO: High Publishers, 1980). "Mod-
ern" guides include Jones's Parliamentary
Procedure at a Glance (New York: Dutton,
1971); Keesey's Barnes & Noble Book of
Modern Parliamentary Procedure (New 'York:
Harper & Row, 1984); Riddick and Butcher's
Riddick's Rules of Procedures (New York:
Scribner, 1988); and Suthers' TheNew Primer
in Parliamentary Procedure (Chicago:
Dartnell, 1 965). Despite the existence of alter-
natives, in his survey entitled "A Historical
Sketch of Parliamentary Procedure," Ray E.
Keesey notes that "None of the guides to
parliamentary procedure since Robert 'sRules
of Order has had as wide an acceptance as
his." 4
The Value of Procedure
Parliamentary law is a complex subject,
the comprehensive knowledge of which re-
quires considerable study as well as practical
experience and an understanding of its prin-
ROBERTS RULES OF ORDER 213
ciples.Athoroughunderstandingofthisrefer-
ence landmark is inseparable from an appre-
ciation of parliamentary law and procedure,
for it is through such an appreciation that
respect for Robert 's is both kindled and fuel-
ed.
In medieval England, the sovereign sum-
moned his parliament, a general or great coun-
cil of state. The parliament consisted of an
assemblage of persons (members of the nobil-
ity, clergy, and commons) who sat for a period
of time until it was dissolved. Today the word
"parliament" has come to mean an assembly
representing a group or the members of an
organization and usually convened for the
expression of opinion, enactment of policy,
and the transaction of other business. "Delib-
erative assembly," on the other hand, refers to
a nonlegislative organization that conducts
meetings according to parliamentary law.
The introduction to Robert 's Rules of Or-
der Newly Revised distinguished parliamen-
tary law from parliamentary procedure. The
former is defined as "the name given to the
rules and customs for carrying on business in
the English Parliament which were developed
through a continuing process of decisions and
precedents somewhat like the growth of com-
mon law." 5 Today parliamentary law is under-
stood as the body of rules and precedents used
to govern the proceedings of deliberative as-
semblies and other organizations.
Although frequently used synonymously
with parliamentary law, the term "parliamen-
tary procedure" "refers ... to parliamentary
law as it is followed in any given assembly or
organization, together with whatever rules of
order the body may have adopted." 6 Mere
mention of parliamentary procedure brings to
mind the mysterious jargon of the professional
parliamentarian: "I rise to a point of order;*' "I
move to amend the motion;" "I doubt the
quorum;" "The Chair requests order." Presid-
ing and leadership practices blur: calling the
meeting to order, accepting the minutes, trans-
acting business, adjournment. Duties of mem-
bers seem equally confusing to the uninitiated:
role in debate, role in voting, personal privi-
lege, not to mention honorary, in good stand-
ing, ex officio, or absent members! Despite
being arcane, it is generally believed that
parliamentary procedure as codified by
Robert 's has been important in shaping and
refining basic American notions of due pro-
cess and majority and minority rights as ap-
plied to group activities. In his preface to the
1970 edition, Grofman noted that "Robert's
may be regarded as an implicit theory of
democracy. For many Americans, its proce-
dures are synonymous with practical democ-
"7
racy.
Henry Martyn Robert
Outside the ranks of professional parlia-
mentarians, few who can recite which divided
motions can't be amended often do not know
who Robert was, let alone if there wasaRobert
at all! Henry Martyn Robert (1837-1923), a
scholarly looking nineteenth-century military
man, is best known today for taking on the task
of codifying and simplifying the rules and
procedures of the United States House of
Representatives. Born on May 2, 1 837, Henry
M, Robert came originally from Robertville,
South Carolina. When Robert was 13, his
father, who had come to the conclusion that
slavery was morally wrong, freed his slaves
and moved the family to Ohio. At 16, Henry
received an appointment to West Point. After
graduating from the military academy in 1857,
Robert went on to pursue a military career,
being commissioned in the Corps of Engi-
neers and serving with distinction in the Union
anny and becoming Chief of Engineers in the
U.S. Army. During the Civil War (1861—65)
he constructed defenses for Washington, D.C.,
Philadelphia, and the port of New Bedford,
Massachusetts. In '863, at the age of 26, while
stationed at New Bedford to help in the de-
fense of the local whaling fleet against Con-
federate raiders, he was asked to preside over
his first meeting, a turbulent meeting of his
Baptist church. This experience changed his
life and affected the lives of his descendents.
Henry plunged in, confident that the assembly
would behave itself. However it did not, and
he resolved to learn something about parlia-
214 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
mentary law and procedure. Over the years he
became aware of how many different inter-
pretations of parliamentary procedure there
were. As a Major serving in the turbulent
frontier atmosphere of San Francisco in 1 867,
he observed that California immigrants from
every state in the union had a different idea of
what was correct. He began to read all the
manuals on parliamentary procedure he could
find. Gradually, he became convinced of the
need for a new book, based on the rules and
practices of Congress, but adapted for the use
by societies of ordinary American laypeople.
The First Edition
It was not until 1874 that Robert had the
time to write his manual. By this time he had
been transferred to Milwaukee. Barbara A.
Bannon has provided a detailed history of the
publishing of Robert's Rules of Order, based
in part on her interview with the third Henry
M. Robert. She notes that the General initially
took the work to a job printer, Burdick and
Armitage, at his own expense and had it printed
andproofread 1 6 pages at a time, with the type
from those pages then being redistributed and
used again for the next sixteen. The manu-
script was submitted to D. Appleton & Com-
pany of New York and rejected. A second
publisher, S.C. Griggs of Chicago, also re-
turned the manuscript with, as Bannon de-
scribes, "a letter of polite, vague interest but
with the pages uncut." 8 Persistent, the General
offered S.C. Griggs the 4,000 copies he had
"ready-printed," to be bound by Griggs at his
own expense, with the proviso that 1 ,000 of
them could be given away free to educators,
legislators, church leaders, and other promi-
nent persons in the United States. Thepublish-
ing house decided to take the chance.
Originally entitledPockei Manual of Rules
of 'Order for Deliberative Assemblies^ the book
carried the simpler Robert 's Rules of Order as
the publisher's second, descriptive title on the
jacket. The established Cushing manual, pub-
lished in 1845, was its primary competition.
The Pocket Manual was immediately suc-
cessful. Within four months of publication in
1876, Griggs had sold out the entire lot; the
General had estimated that it would take two
years to dispose of 4,000 copies. The book was
out of print for one month. It came back into
print by the end of July 1876, with some 16
additional pages. In 1893 a third edition, num-
bering 218 pages, was published. In 1896
Scott, Foresman and Company of Chicago
acquired the rights to the book and has been its
publisher ever since.
In 1 9 1 5 , Robert's Rules of Order Revised
was published. This first complete revision
was the product of three years of work by the
General, then retired from military service.
Bannon notes that by that time the book had
already sold half a million copies. 9 The book
went through numerous editions during the
General's lifetime.
Editions under Other Editors
Subsequent editions were handled by the
Genera] ' s second wife and the wife of his son,
the second Henry, after the deaths of the two
men. Bannon notes that "Conscientiously, each
generation of the Robert family since the
General has tried to keep up with a volumi-
nous correspondence developing out of the
book." 10
The General died in Hornell, New York,
on May 11, 1923. His spirit lives on through
the numerous subsequent editions, revisions,
and spin-offs of his work. His Parliamentary
Practice, originally published in 1921 and
Parliamentary Law, originally published in
1922, were still in print in the 1 980s as, respec-
tively, Parliamentary Practice; An Introduc-
tion to Parliamentary Law and Parliamentary
Law (both New York: Irvington, 1975).
Among the many editions and printings of
Robert 's Rules of Order, several stand out —
the original edition of 1876; the editions is-
sued in Robert's lifetime (2nd in 1 876, 3rd in
1893); revisions (1915 which superseded the
last of the three earliest editions, and 1 970, the
first complete revision since 1915); and the
current, "Modern Edition,"published in 1989.
ROBERT'S RULES OF ORDER 215
An understanding of the style, spirit and intent
of the original edition is important, because
successive editions and revisions have been
written to be in complete harmony with the
preceding editions so that they can replace
those editions "with no disturbance of estab-
lished practice in organizations that have used
the preceding edition." 11 The preface to the
1970 edition of Robert 's Rules of Order Newly
Revised explained:
"Since this book superseded all previous edi-
tions, such replacement is automatic in cases
where the organization's bylaws prescribe as
its parliamentary authority 'Robert's Rules of
Order Revised,' or 'the current edition of
Robert's Rules of Order,' or the like, without
specifying a particular edition. If the bylaws
specify a particular edition, however, such as
the '1951 Edition,' or the 'Seventy-Fifth An-
niversary Edition,' amendment of the bylaws
is necessary." 12
Darwin Patnode's preface to "Modern
Edition" of 1 989 indicates that it too continues
the very process that led to the succession of
previous editions, insofar as reorganization,
expansion, and clarification are concerned.
The original edition contained not only an
explanation of the methods of organizing and
conducting meetings, the duties of officers,
and the documents of an organization, but also
the rules governing motions, including their
forms, objects, characteristics, and other de-
tails. A "Table of Rules Relating to Motions"
supplemented the text, enabling the presiding
officer of a meeting to decide many parlia-
mentary questions by a quick reference with-
out turning a page or using an index. Numer-
ous footnotes concerning legislative proce-
dures were included. A lengthy introduction
dealing with legislative procedure began the
book. The goal of the text proper — to provide
firm and uniform rules of order for delibera-
tive assemblies throughout the land, was met,
and, as its popularity attests, met very success-
fully.
Robert said the object of his book was
to assist an assembly to accomplish the work
for which it was designed, in the best possible
manner. To do this it is necessary to restrain
the individual somewhat, as the right of an
individual in any community, to do what he
pleases, is incompatible with the interests of
the whole. Where there is no law, but every
man does what is right in his own eyes, there
is the least of real liberty. Experience has
shown the importance of the definiteness in
the iaw; and in this country, where customs are
so slightly established and the published manu-
als of parliamentary practice so conflicting,
no society should attempt to conduct business
without having adopted some work upon the
subject, as the authority in all cases not cov-
ered by their own special rules."
Robert continued to make countless modi-
fications from one printing to the next, insert-
ing new rules, sometimes even reversing ear-
lier rules, from a time shortly after the first
printing to the end of his life. In 1 9 1 5, General
Robert wrote, "The constant inquiries from all
sections of the country for information . . . that
is not contained in Rules of Order seems to
demand a revision and an enlargement of the
manual. To meet this want, the work has been
thoroughly revised and enlarged, and to avoid
confusion with the old Rules, is published
under the title of 'Robert's Rules of Order
Revised. ,mA Twenty years after the author's
death, Robert's Rules of Order Revised was
reissued, incorporating the changes he made
after the 1915 edition was published.
The seventy-fifth anniversary edition of
Robert 's Rules of Order Revised, published in
195 1 , was prepared, as noted on the verso of
its title page, "as an important part of the
program of constant attention and frequent
revision given this standard work since its
original publication." The edition contained
two parts: "Rules of Order, A Compendium of
Parliamentary Law, Based Upon the Rules of
Practice of Congress," and "Organization and
Conduct of Business: A Simple Explanation
of the Methods of Organizing and Conducting
the Business of Societies, Conventions, and
Other Deliberative Assemblies." "The Order
of Precedence of Motions" is given inside the
front cover, and practical points about matters
such as by-laws, the nominating committee,
the parliamentarian, and special meetings were
provided inside the back cover. In their pref-
216 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
ace, Isabel H. Robert and Sarah Corbin Robert
noted that Robert's Rules of Order is among
the few books privileged to enjoy their great-
est influence after 75 years because it is based
upon the "same enduring principles on which
our nation itself is founded — the right of the
majority to decide, the right of the minority to
be heard, the right of absentees to be pro-
tected," 15 and because it "has responded to
changing needs and conditions." 16
Significant additions to the 1951 edition
included an enlarged index and a new section
on Practical Points (annual meeting, by-laws,
the nominating committee, the parliamentar-
ian, rotation in office, and special meeting) on
the inside back cover. In addition, references
to the Congress of the United States were
updated to conform to then-current practice,
making the book still more useful to organiza-
tions that have adopted the rules as their par-
liamentary authority. Excerpts from the writ-
ing of General Robert are contained in the
preface; these suggest his basic philosophy
and indicate the enduring quality of his work.
The 1970 Edition
Robert's Rules of Order Newly Revised,
published in 1970, represented the seventh
edition of this standard guide to parliamentary
rules, with charts, tables, and lists. This edition
was the work of General Robert's daughter-
in-law, Sarah Corbin Robert. She was assisted
by her son, Henry M. Robert III; William J.
Evans, a Baltimore lawyer; and James W.
Geary, president of the California State Uni-
versity, Northridge. The 594-page 1970 edi-
tion represented the first complete revision
since 1915, and only the second complete
revision of the manual since it was first pub-
lished. The 1 970 edition was also the first new
edition in nearly 20 years. A replacement for
the seventy-fifth anniversary edition, the 1970
edition was published in February on the ninety-
fourth anniversary of the first publication of
the book. Ten years in preparation, the book
was 75 percent rewritten for clarification and
easier use, and almost twice the length of the
seventy-fifth anniversary edition.
Although the 1 970 edition revision super-
seded the preceding edition of Robert 's Rules
of Order Revised, it was "written to be in
complete harmony with" that edition. The
verso of the title page also included the follow-
ing notice: "This book automatically replaces
Robert 's Rules of Order Revised as the parlia-
mentary authority in organizations whose
bylaws prescribe 'Robert's Rules of Order
Revised,' or 'the current edition of Robert's
Rules of Order,' or the like; without specify-
ing a particular edition."
As did earlier editions, the 1970 edition
maintained the virtues of its predecessors,
continuing to be relevant to those who under-
stood the admonition with which the book
opened: "Where there is no law, but every man
does what is right in his own eyes, there is the
least of liberty." 17 As were its predecessor
the 1970 edition was characterized as neces-
sary to the conduct of American bodies deal-
ing with legislation or regulations of any sort.
Overall, the 1 970 edition was more mod-
ern, complete, comprehensive, better orga-
nized, more clearly presented, more efficient,
and far easier to use than previous editions.
Notable additions or elaborations in the 1970
edition included a compendium of charts,
tables and lists placed conveniently and con-
spicuously in the center of the book; the inclu-
sion of a section on "Disciplinary Procedures"
as a final chapter; an enlarged and improved
index; and an introduction offering brief-but-
sound accounts of the origins of parliamentary
law in Great Britain, of the transfer of British
procedures to America, and of the genesis of
Robert's work. Additional enhancements in-
cluded a larger size and a change in type face,
both of which contributed to greater clarity
and a contemporary feeling as well as en-
hanced legibility. Most significant, however,
are the facts that the 1970 edition was almost
completely rewritten in simpler, clearer terms
and that the material was reorganized so as to
be in accord with the natural flow of business
and meetings. Careful review indicates that
the entire text of earlier editions was re-exam-
ined, reworded, and supplemented where nec-
essary to, as the 1970 "Preface" says, "make
ROBERT'S RULES OF ORDER 217
the work more useful in its basic function as a
reference manual suitable for adoption by
organizations as parliamentary authority." 18
The 1970 edition was designed so that one
could read it through and acquire a good
picture of parliamentary procedure with mini-
mum reference to concepts not previously
explained.
Critical Reception of the 1970
Edition
Reviewers praised the edition for taking
the mystery out of parliamentary procedure
for a significantly larger sector of the popula-
tion. Many reviewers noted that people could
even teach themselves certain parts of it, and
that the revision enabled users to feel at home
with the subject and not to be afraid of or
intimidated by it. Three examples of revision
illustrating improvements which led to im-
proved user satisfaction include: (l) charts
and tables which are simple to use, and pro-
vide quick reference to form, precedence, and
applicability of motions (as contrasted to charts
which were nearly impossible to use, with
stars, asterisks, footnotes and fine print, in-
cluded in previous editions); (2) the logical
arrangement of material in the order one would
usually encounter (as contrasted to the para-
graph format in earlier editions); and (3) the
clear explanation of the basic classification
scheme, providing for each motion a section in
outline form clearly and succinctly setting
forth the motion's basic operational charac-
teristics and its uses (as contrasted to the
ambiguous classification and presentation of
motions in earlier editions).
Negative criticism of the 1970 edition
was scant; nonetheless, certain points deserve
mention. The stated intentions of the editors
were to combine in the 1970 edition a defini-
tive reference work and teaching edition. Many
reviewers felt that although the 1 970 edition
succeeded as a definitive reference work, it
did not succeed as a teaching manual. The
continuing presence of some archaic termi-
nology, some unnecessarily complex and con-
fusing rules, and some rules which could best
be disposed of served to minimize this edition's
potential as a teaching manual. Reading from
coverto coverto learn the basics ofparliamen-
tary procedure was not recommended. Fur-
thermore, some reviewers felt that the 1970
edition was not a genuine revision and mod-
ernization of American parliamentary prac-
tice. These reviewers noted that fealty to the
dead General and a desire to maintain termi-
nological accord with the U.S. House of Rep-
resentatives limited the editors in the scope of
their revision and in the extent of their mod-
ernization.
The 1989 Edition
Robert 's Rules of Order Modem Edition,
published in 1989 and edited by Darwin
Patnode 4 aprofessionalparliamentarian, "tries
to retain the best of the original style and
content of Robert's ideas and supplement them
with modern language and rules, seeking a
golden mean." 19 The Preface continues to
advise that "In most sections, the opening
material is that of Robert, and gradually addi-
tional material merges with it." 20 Specific
points of departure from earlier editions in-
clude: (1) the elimination of obsolete foot-
notes; (2) the incorporation of relevant foot-
notes into the text; (3) the elimination of
"innumerable and maddening" cross-refer-
ences; (4) the provision of additional defini-
tions to facilitate a clear understanding of
terms Robert assumed the reader knew; (5) the
insertion of sample bylaws; (6) the addition of
longer sample minutes; and (7) the omission
of superfluous introductory material. In addi-
tion, Patnode claims to have reworked Robert 's
awkward syntax; to have modernized spell-
ing, punctuation, and typography; and to have
improved the table of motions. Furthermore,
material in the text was "altered slightly to
have a more logical sequence." 21 Patnode ac-
knowledges changing the rules in some cases,
always, however, being guided by the spirit of
the original rules.
Any review of the publishing history of
Robert J s needs to consider the question, which
edition is the definitive printing for reference?
2 18 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
In his preface to the 1989 edition, Patnode
addresses this quandary: "when an
organization's bylaws designate as parliamen-
tary authority Robert 's Rules of Order without
specifying an edition, there can easily be dis-
agreement astowhataparticularrulesays,not
only because several different printings con-
tain somewhat different rules, but also be-
cause Robert was not always perfectly clear or
consistent within a given printing. 22 Patnode
goes on to advise "An organization wishing to
follow the spirit of the original rules of Henry
M. Robert would do well to adopt as its parlia-
mentary authority the Modern Edition of
Robert 's Rules of Order." 2 * Patnode 's counsel
can be viewed as self-serving, especially since
Scott, Foresman issued aninth edition in 1990,
Its title page credits this edition to the same
team responsible for the 1970 edition, al-
though the dustjacketnotesthaf'SarahCorbin
Robert was the daughter-in-law of the original
author." Just released at this writing, the 1990
edition has yet to be reviewed, let alone tested
through application. Meanwhile, others will
imitate it, but no other manual is likely to
demystify parliamentary procedures as thor-
oughly or as clearly.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
The list below excludes reissues and re-
prints and confines itself to new editions.
Readers may also wish to refer to the chart of
editions and reprints in Margaret A. Banks'
article '"Robert's Rules of Order;' Editions,
Reprints* and Competitors," cited below in the
bibliography.
Pocket Manual of Rules of Order for Deliberative
Assemblies Robert 's Rules of Order, by Henry
Martyn Robert. Chicago: S.C. Griggs & Com-
pany, 1876. 176p.
Pocket Manual of Rules of Order for Deliberative
Assemblies, by Henry M. Robert. 2nd ed. Chi-
cago: S.C. Griggs, 1876. 192p.
Pocket Manual of Rules of Order for Deliberative
Assemblies, by Henry M. Robert, 3rd ed. Chi-
cago: S.C. Griggs, 1893. 21 8p.
Robert's Rules of Order Revised, by Henry M. Rob-
ert. Chicago: Scotl, Foresman, 1915. 323 p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Robert 's Rules of Order Revised for Deliberative
Assemblies, by Henry M.Robert. Chicago: Scott,
Foresman, 1943. 326p.
Robert 's Rules of Order Revised. Seventy-Fifth An-
niversary Edition, by Henry M. Robert. Chi-
cago: Scott, Foresman, 1951. 326p.
Robert 's Rules of Order Newly Revised. A New and
Enlarged Edition by Sarah Corbin Robert with
the Assistance of Henry M. Robert III, James
W. Cleary and William Evans. Glenview, IL:
Scott, Foresman, 1970. 594p.
The Scott, Foresman Robert 's Rules of Order Newly
Revised. 8th ed., by Sarah Corbin Robert.
Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman, 1981. 594p.
Robert's Rules of Order Modern Edition, edited by
Darwin Patnode. Nashville, TN: ThomasNelson,
1989. 155p.
The Scott Foresman Robert 's Rules of Order Newly
Revised. 9th ed., by Sarah Corbin Robert and
others. Scott, Foresman, 1990. 706 p.
The secondary literature onRobert 's Rules
of Order is not as vast as one might expect for
a book of its age and influence. This is due, in
part, to its longtime bestseller status; its popu-
larity has discouraged ongoing critical exami-
nation, despite the appearance of new edi-
tions. Furthermore, a limited number of per-
sons have an abiding interest in parliamentary
procedure and the literature of that field is
itself limited. The best of the secondary litera-
ture on Robert's is found in two sorts of
sources — material which assists readers in
distinguishing editions and reprints of Robert 's
from one another, and materials which de-
scribe the principal competitors of Robert's.
Description and analysis in these items is
generally thorough and strong, in contrast to
reviews of Robert's in law, library, or public
administration literature. Such reviews tend to
be superficial and, at best, only marginally
critical. The most significant items available
are the works by Banks, O'Connell, and
Sikkink. Biographical information on Robert
can be found in the introductions to the various
ROBERT'S RULES OF ORDER 219
editions noted above and in introductions to
reprints listed in Banks' '"Robert's Rules of
Order:' Editions, Reprints, and Competitors."
Aly, Bower. Review of Robert 's Rules of Order
Newly Revised '(1970 ed.). Quarterly Journal of
Speech 56 (December 1970): 454-55,
Bannon, Barbara A. "Authors &. Editors: General
Henry M. Robert." Publishers Weekly 197
(March 16, 1970): 15-16.
Banks, Margaret A. '"Robert's Rules of Order: 1
Editions, Reprints, and Competitors." Law Li-
brary Journal 80 (Spring, 1988): 177-92.
. "Robert's Rules of Order: A Multiplicity of
Editions and Reprints." Canadian Library Jour-
nal 39 (1982): 367-71.
. "Robert's Rules of Order: A Survey of
Paperback Reprints." National Parliamentar-
ian 40 (1979): 22-23.
Cinquemani, Frank L. "Robert's Revised: Parlia-
mentary Practice in Perspective." RQ 16 (Fall,
1976): 55-58.
Geary , James W. "A Commentary on Robert's Rules
of Order Newly Revised." Parliamentary Jour-
nal 9 (April, 1968): 3-9.
Glixon, D,M. Review of Robert 's Rules of Order
(New Revised) (1970 ed.). Saturday Review 53
(May 16, 1970): 44.
Grofman, Bernard N. Review of Robert's Rules of
Order (New Revised) (1970 ed.). American
Political Science Review 64 (December, 1970):
1288-90.
Holle, Susan, and Bohdan S. Wynar, eds. Best Refer-
ence Books 1970-1980: Titles of Lasting Value
Selected From American Reference Books An-
nual Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1981.
Keesey, Ray E. "A Historical Stretch of Parliamen-
tary Procedure." In his Modern Parliamentary
Procedure, Boston: Houghton, Mifflin, 1974,
pp. 21-25.
Knowles, Malcolm S. "Move Over Mr. Robert."
Adult leadership 1 (June, 1952): 2-4.
O'Brien, Joseph F. "Henry M. Robert as Presiding
Officer," Quarterly Journal of Speech A2 (April,
1956): 157-62.
O'Connell, Brian, "Robert's Rules of Order
Demystified." In The Board Member's Book:
Making a Difference in Voluntary Organiza-
tions, 105-15. New York: Foundation Center,
1985.
Revelle, Keith, "A Collection for La Raza." Library
Journal 96 (November 15, 1971): 3719-26.
Review of Robert 's Rules of Order. Publishers Weekly
192 (July 21, 1967): 58.
Review of Robert's Rules of Order Newly Revised
(1970 ed,). American Reference Books Annual
(1971): 145.
Review of Robert's Rules of Order Newly Revised
(1970 ed.). Booklist 6 (May 15, 1970): 1141.
Sikkink, Don. "Fundamental Change in Parliamen-
tary Procedure." Paper presented at the Annual
Meeting of the Speech Communication Asso-
ciation, 58th, Chicago, December 27-30, 1972.
ED 072474.
Wasylenko, Lydia W. Review of Robert's Rules of
Order (Bantam Books edition, c 1982, 1986). In
American Reference Books Annual 19 (1988),
278.
Wyllie, Stanley Clark, Jr. Review of Robert 's Rules
of Order Newly Revised (1970 ed.). Library
Journal 95 (June 1, 1970): 2123.
NOTES
1 Bernard N. Grofman, review of Robert 's Rules of Order,
New Revised, 1 970 ed., American Political Scince
Review 64 (December 1970): 1289.
Barbara A. Bannon," Authors & Editors: General Henry
M. Robert," Publishers Weekly 197 (L6 March
1970): 15.
'Grofman, 1288-89.
* Ray E. Keesey, "A Historical Sketch of Parliamentary
Procedure," in Modern Parliamentary Procedure
by Ra'y E. Keesey (Boston: Houghton Mifflin,
1974), 25.
5 Henry M. Robert, Robert 's Rules of Order Newly Re-
vised (Glenview, IL: Scott Foresman, 1 970), xxvii,
6 Ibid,,xxviii.
7 Grofman, 1289.
* Bannon, 16.
'Ibid.
10 Ibid.
' ' Robert, Robert 's Rules of Order Newly Revised, xxiii.
12 Ibid.
13 Henry M. Robert, Pocket Manual of Rules of Order for
Deliberative Assemblies: Robert 's Rules of Order
(1 876), cited by Isabel H. Robert and Sarah Corbin
Robert, Robert 's Rules of Order Revised (Chicago:
Scott Foresman, 1951), 14.
N Ibid.
15 Isabel H. Robert and Sarah Corbin Robert, "Preface,"
[aRobert 's Rules of Order Revised (Chicago: Scott,
Foresman, 1951): 13.
t6 Ibid.
17 Ibid., 14,
" Robert, Robert 's Rules of Order Newly Revised, xxii.
"Darwin Patnode, ed., Robert 's Rules of Order Modern
Edition (Nashvil le, TN: Thomas Nelson, 1 989), 15.
23 Ibid.
21 Ibid,, 16.
32 Ibid., 16-17.
"Ibid, 17.
"Wings of Flight": Roget's Thesaurus
of English Words and Phrases
Marta Lange
The man is not wholly evil— he has a
Thesaurus in his cabin.
— Sir James Barrie, describing
Captain Hook
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Peter Mark Roget published his Thesaurus of
English Words and Phrases in 1852, calling it
a "desideratum hitherto unsupplied in any
language; namely, a collection of the words it
contains and of the idiomatic combinations
peculiar to it, arranged, not in alphabetical
order as they are in a Dictionary, but according
to the ideas which they express." 1 It was a tool
Roget hoped would not merely assist in com-
munication but would actually give thought
"wings for flight." 2
A medical doctor and Renaissance man
whose intellectual interests spanned the sci-
ences, Roget labored almost fours years to
produce this work and saw 25 editions or
printings published before his death at the age
of 91. Tens of millions of copies have been
sold since that time, making this work one of
the most ubiquitous in the English-speaking
world. The word thesaurus, derived from the
Greek 0Tqcaupog (thesauros) meaning a "trea-
sure," "store," or "collection,' 1 is now a com-
mon noun in the English language. Few refer-
ence titles are as closely identified with a
single individual as the Thesaurus is with
Roget. This landmark work closely reflects
both the nature of Roget and the time in which
he lived. It is through understanding both that
an appreciation of the Thesaurus can be gained.
Peter Mark Roget
Roget was born in London in 1779, the
only son of Catherine Romilly and the Rever-
end Jean Roget, a native of Geneva, Switzer-
land, and pastor of a French Protestant church.
Jean died when his son was only four, and
Peter was brought up by his mother "who was
admirably qualified for the task, not only by
her mental accomplishments, but by a system-
atic habit of mind, which was inherited by her
son in a marked degree." 3
By the time Peter was 14, Catherine was
concerned about the direction of his educa-
tion. His interests and talents lay consistently
in the areas of science and mathematics, yet
there was no such occupation as scientist in
1793. Catherine therefore chose medicine as
the profession Peter would pursue. It was a
subject that she found fascinating and a field
which proved "profitable to the practitioner,
even if not to the patient." 4 She moved the
family to Edinburgh whose university had the
best medical and scientific programs in the
English-speaking world. Peter enrolled at age
fourteen and received his M.D. degree at 19.
For the next three years Peter experienced
what was perhaps the most adventurous part
of his life. He traveled to the Pneumatic Insti-
tution in Clifton, where Dr. Thomas Beddoes
andHumphrey Davy were experimenting with
early forms of anesthesia by treating various
ailments through respiration of nitrous oxide,
or "laughing gas." Roget's own experience
with the gas left him bewildered and fright-
ened. He felt his equilibrium had been de-
ROGET'S THESAURUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 221
stroyed and that, under the influence of the
gas, his senses were in a state of confusion. For
one so properly trained to be a model profes-
sional man, such an experience was plainly
destructive. In his years at Edinburgh, "Peter
had been convinced that his future lay in
regularity and order, not in disequilibrium and
confusion." 5
In the fall of 1800 Peter experimented
with creating a "Frigidarium," an idea con-
ceived by Jeremy Bentham for cold storage of
foods. He lived in Bentham' s house, but desir-
ing more privacy, disenchanted with living in
such an unconventional household, and con-
vinced that Bentham was a man who would
never finish what he started to do, Roget
moved out to his own apartment. 6
After his return from an 1803 trip to
France that almost ended in his imprisonment
when war broke out between France and En-
gland, Roget moved to Manchester to set up a
medical practice where the ratio of physicians
to populace was not as high as that in London.
He was appointed one of the physicians to the
Infirmary and assisted in creating a medical
school there. In 1806 he delivered a series of
1 8 lectures on physiology to medical students.
The syllabus of his course showed that his
"chief interest in the new science of physiol-
ogy lay in the organization and order of the
several aspects of that subject and in the
relationship of the subject to such kindred
fields as anatomy." 7 This interest in relation-
ships and classification characterized his work
and led eventually to the classification of ideas
and words in the Thesaurus.
Roget resigned his post at the Infirmary in
1808 and moved to London. He immersed
himself in work, and for the next 60 years he
practiced as a physician, participated actively
in the burgeoning scientific societies, wrote
scientific papers, and lectured on physiology
and related topics . Roget established a consid-
erable medical practice in London, where he
also helped open aneighborhood charity medi-
cal clinic, and served as physician to the
Spanish embassy. Appointed by King George
IV in 1 827 to a commission studying London' s
water quality, Roget recommended that water
be filtered through sand, a method still in use
today. 8 The crowning point of his medical
career came in 1831 with his election to the
Royal College of Physicians. 9
Roget took a more than usually active part
in a number of organizations, including the
Royal Institution, Medical and Chirurgical
Society, and many others. 10 As a founding
member of the Medical and Chirurgical Soci-
ety, he tended to bookkeeping and oversaw
the publishing of several volumes of the
Society' s transactions. As elected secretary of
the Royal Society, he edited the Proceedings
of the Society and prepared for publication the
abstracts of papers communicated to the Soci-
ety. 11
Throughout his career Roget contributed
papers to the advancement of scientific knowl-
edge. His total bibliography numbers over 100
items, including many treatises written in
simple English explaining science at the
layperson's level. Fourteen of Roget's ar-
ticles, ranging in subject matter from "Ant,"
"Cranioscopy," "Deaf and Dumb" to "Kalei-
doscope," were published in the supplement
to the fourth, fifth and sixth editions of the
Encyclopaedia Britannica. These articles were
"important in increasing his stature as an au-
thority in physiology and as an all-around
savant." 12 He demonstrated his bent for find-
ing relationships and shaping facts into or-
ganic laws in a major article on physiology
published in the seventh edition of the
Britannica. He produced several treatises on
electricity, galvanism, magnetism, and electro-
magnetism, evidence of his continuing fasci-
nation with science and mathematics. 13
Roget's Animal and Vegetable Physiol-
ogy Considered with Reference to Natural
Theology, a two-volume work appearing in
1834, marked the peak of his professional
career. This work was the fifth in the series of
the Bridgewater Treatises, commissioned by
the Earl of Bridgewater to propound "the
power, wisdom, and goodness of God, as
222 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
manifested in the creation." 14 The treatise
offered no original discoveries but brought a
sense of unity to physiology and comparative
anatomy, In an age of growing scientific dis-
covery and change, however, its view that
evolution could not work separately from an
all-knowing God was already in question by
the time it was published.
Roget served as secretary of the Royal
Society for 20 years, a tenure not without its
stormy clashes. As early as 1830, Charles
Babbage and others charged the Society with
dilettantism, private interest, nepotism, and
snobbery. 15 For over ten years a series of
complicated disputesand arguments advanced
until they emerged as a large-scale revolt of
young scientists against the old guard. The
pressure for reform mounted, and Roget re-
signed as secretary on November 30, 1 847. 1(S
A Fascination for Order
Finding himself possessed of more lei-
sure after his retirement, Roget turned his
attention to a project which he had begun in
1805, that of classifying and organizing the
English language. The Thesaurus began as a
noteb ook Roget carried around with him since
his earliest days of lecturing. He arranged
words within it to help him express himself as
effectively as possible. Now in his seventies,
he would draw upon a lifetime of experience
in lecturing, writing, and editing to make this
list into a coherent system others could use. 17
Ironically it is this list, not any of his scientific
achievements, that made Roget a household
word.
At first glance it is not apparentthat Roget
had any particular talent equipping him to
tackle such an ambitious project. He demon-
strated no literary interest, no linguistic train-
ing, no fascination with language for
language's sake. What he did demonstrate
over his entire lifetime, however, was a con-
cern with order; it was "the organization of
knowledge (rather than the making of pro-
found discoveries, for which he lacked the
imagination), that was Roget's forte, and which
he was able to put to good use in compiling the
Thesaurus"™
Roget's fascination for order was charac-
teristic of the age in which he lived. The
successful emergence of modern science de-
pended upon the development of a workable
classification of its elements, andsystematists
worked out schemes for classifying the plant
and animal kingdoms and chemical elements.
In the same vein, Roget would labor for four
years (1848-1852) to organize and classify
human ideas into an outline of commonly
understood terms.
Although he believed that his work filled
a unique niche in the history of word tools,
Roget was certainly aware of other related
publications. By the time the Thesaurus was
published, three types of language literature
existed: philosophical treatises on the rela-
tionship between thought and language, and
on the possibilities of creating a universal
language; prescriptive grammars, including
style manuals and synonym books; and writ-
ings in the emerging field of linguistics. Roget
probably drew from all three areas when con-
structing his Thesaurus. 19
While he stressed the utility of the The-
saurus for writers, Roget also saw his book as
a tool for philosophers:
Metaphysicians engaged in the more pro-
found investigation of the Philosophy of Lan-
guage will be materially assisted by having
the ground thus prepared for them, in a previ-
ous analysis and classification of our ideas;
for such classification of ideas is the true basis
on which words, which are their symbols,
should be classified. It is by such analysis
alone that we can arrive at a clear perception
of the relation which these symbols bear to
their corresponding ideas, or can obtain a
correct knowledge of the elements which en-
ter in to the formation of compound ideas, and
of the exclusions by which we arrive at the
abstractions so perpetually resorted to in the
process of reasoning, and in the communica-
tions of our thoughts. 20
He also expressed his philosophy that
"the use of language is not confined to its
ROGET'S THESAURUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 223
being the medium through which we commu-
nicate our ideas to one another; it fulfills a no
less important function as an instrument of
thought; not being merely its vehicle, but
giving it wings for flight." 21 Roget also felt it
of utmost importance that strict accuracy should
regulate use of language. He further worried
that
false logic, disguised under specious phrase-
ology, too often gains the assent of the un-
thinking multitude, disseminating far and wide
the seeds of prejudice and error. ... A misap-
plied or misapprehended term is sufficient to
give rise to fierce and interminable disputes; a
misnomer has turned the tide of popular opin-
ion; a verbal sophism has decided a party
question; an artful watchword, thrown among
combustible materials, has kindled the flame
of deadly warfare, and changed the destiny of
an empire. 22
Roget shared the dream of a number of
earlier writers for a set of symbols upon which
to base a universal language. To Roget, none
of these earlier schemes seemed practical, yet
he considered their ultimate goal highly desir-
able. Science was developing and expanding
during his lifetime, and scientists were seek-
ing a new international language for commu-
nication. Rather than basing this language on
a set of symbols or characters, Roget believed
that such a language should be developed
through the organization of ideas based on a
consensus of current speaking and writing
practice. He felt that his own analysis of the
language could assist in determining the prin-
ciples on which aphilosophical language might
be constructed, and once constructed, adopted
by every civilized nation. Nothing, thought
Roget, could do more "to bring about a golden
age of union and harmony among the several
nations and races of mankind.
"23
A Multi-Purpose Tool
What Roget conceived as aphilosophical
arrangement of ideas expressed by language
was also meant as a practical tool for the
precise use of language. At the time of its
publication, practical language works in En-
glish fell into three categories: prescriptive
grammars, dictionaries, and collections of
synonyms. Their collective purpose was to
establish an acceptable level of good taste in
conversation and in writing. The popularity of
these works corresponded with the rise in
England of a middle class concerned with
bettering its own fortunes, and with binding
town and country populations togetherthrough
education and study of the English language. 24
The Thesaurus is not aprescripti ve gram-
mar, but there is some relationship between
Roget's goals and those of the various gram-
mars published. Those works sought to de-
velop grammatical standards as well as to
purify the English language which some felt
had been adulterated by French words and
phrases . Roget also sought to create a standard
for regulating language, but his concern was
more toward regulating the appearance of
new words, not grammatical structure. 25
The Thesaurus is not a dictionary, for an
ordinary dictionary simply explains the mean-
ing of words or the i deas words are intended to
convey. The Thesaurus is exactly the oppo-
site: the idea being given, it identifies the word
or words by which that idea may be best
expressed. Believing that "we cannot but be
often conscious that the phraseology we have
at our command is inadequate to do them
justice," 26 Roget said his work would offer the
writer a helping hand, for
it is in words that he clothes his thoughts; it is
by means of words that he depicts his feelings.
It is therefore essential to his success that he be
provided with a copious vocabulary, and that
he possess an entire command of all the re-
sources and appliances of his language. To the
acquisition of this power no procedure ap-
pears more directly conducive than the study
of a methodized system such as that now
offered to his use. 27
Roget expressly stated that the Thesaurus
was not a collection of synonyms, and indeed
it made no attempt to differentiate among
apparently synonymous words, 28 Roget' s con-
cern was solely with classifying and arranging
M
224 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
words according the their current sense and
usage, knowledge of which he presumed the
reader to possess. In assuming this knowledge
Roget may have been operating with breath-
taking optimism, for he was misunderstood
even by early reviewers who equated his work
with previous synonymies.
The Thesaurus' s Antecedents
English synonymies before 1852 tended
to be one of two types: word-finding lists and
those that tried to explain the distinctions
among words. 29 Twenty different titles on
English synonymy were published prior to the
appearance of the Thesaurus, the first in 1766.
In 1805, William Perry's Synonymous,
Etymological, and Pronouncing English Dic-
tionary greatly extended the traditional defi-
nition of synonym (as one of two or more
words of identical meaning, or of apparently
identical meaning) and broadened it to include
a group of words which have resemblances in
meaning. 30
English Synonymes Discriminated, by
William Taylor (1813), used etymologies to
explain the original meanings of words and
thereby establish synonymous relationships.
English Synonymes Explained, in Alphabeti-
cal Order; with Copious Illustrations and
Explanations Drawn from the Best Writers, by
George Crabb (1816), was the most ambitious
precursor to the Thesaurus. Crabb's chief
contributions were the addition of an etymol-
ogy, the addition of a statement as to how far
words are equivalent in meaning, and the
arrangement of words from the most compre-
hensive to the least comprehensive. 3 ' Although
Crabb's work was far from perfect — his syn-
onymies were often confused and inconsistent
and his etymologies often faulty — his work
enjoyed greatpublic favor for many decades. 32
A Selection of English Synonyms, by Miss
Elizabeth Jane Whately (1851) proposed that
words must often be regarded as signs not of
real things but of notions of things, and must
have a fixed and generally accepted content.
While Whately was not the first to discrimi-
nate meanings of synonyms, she was the first
in England to make that the avowed aim of a
book of synonyms and to distinguish clearly
between the meaning of a word and the thing
or idea for which it stood. 33
One year after Whately' s work was pub-
lished, the first edition of the Thesaurus of
English Words and Phrases, Classified and
Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression of
Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition ap-
peared. Despite the plethora of word books
already in existence, it enjoyed immediate
acceptance and provoked new interest in op-
posite and contrasted terms. Roget adapted
from previous synonymies the technique of
grouping large collections of synonymous
words together, but he offered no definitions,
no etymologies, no discriminating explana-
tions between words, no citations to reputable
authors.
Roget's Classification Scheme
Roget devised his detailed classification
of words from Georges Cuvier's zoological
classification then used in natural history. He
divided his work into six main categories
(classes), each of which is divided further into
sections (orders), subsections (genera), and
heads of signification (species). 34 The sec-
tional divisions he formed corresponded to the
natural families in botany and zoology, with
the filiation of words being analogous to the
filiation of plants and animals within these
families. 35 All of these divisions, 1,000 in all,
were laid out in outline and tabular form and
numbered. Each number designated aparticu-
lar paragraph of the book, a particular idea
under which the reader could find all words
expressing that idea. The major portion of the
book was arranged in numerical order, pre-
senting an initially confusing format. For the
convenience of the reader, Roget provided a
tabular synopsis of categories at the beginning
of the work. He also appended a short alpha-
betical index to the text, though it was not his
ROGET'S THESAURUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 225
intent that the index ever become the predomi-
nant portion of the work.
Roget's chief goal in constructing his
classification of ideas was to obtain the great-
est amount of practical utility. The diagram
below offers a useful picture for understand-
ing his overall scheme.
Just as Cuvier ' s classification scheme was
fixed in form, so was Roget's. The intent
behind this fixed design for language may be
analogous to the fixed design of nature in the
minds of natural theologists. Once the rela-
tionships among the various parts of the natu-
ral world had been set down in stable classifi-
cation schemes, human understanding of that
world, and God's purpose in it, was consider-
ably increased. A permanent design outlining
the organization of the totality of ideas , the
components of the internal world, would in-
crease human understanding both of human-
ity and of God's purpose for humanity. 36
Roget felt that the terminology compos-
ing the framework of his classification was a
series of natural signs easily comprehensible
from language usage of the time. Although he
never explained why he chose the six particu-
lar primary classes utilized in the Thesaurus,
it is possible to trace someportion of his intent
to previous writings. Three of the primary
classes — matter, intellect, and volition — may
be derived from his perception of the laws of
physiology described in the introductory chap-
ter of his Bridgewater Treatise. "The second
class of laws comprise those which are founded
on the relation of means to an end; and which
are usually denominated final causes. They
involve the operations of mind, in conjunction
with those of matter. They presuppose inten-
tion or design; a supposition which implies
intelligence, thought, motives, volition . . " 3?
All six classes, including abstract relations,
space, and affection, are also implied in Tho-
ROGET'S CLASSIFICATION SCHEME
(Excerpts)
PRIMARY CLASSES
Abstract
Relations
n
Spa;e
SECTIONS
m
Matter
IV
Intellect
T I
v
Volition
VI
Affection
Space in
General
250
Convexity
Dimensions Form
SUBSECTIONS
Motion
General
Special
Superficial
HEADS OF SIGNIFICATION
251
Flatness
252
Concavity
253
Sharpness
254
Bluntness
Figure 1
A Sample from Roget's Classification Scheme.
226 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
mas Reid's An Inquiry into the Human Mind
on thePrinciples of Common Sense (1 764), an
essay discussing the principle ofnaturaf signs
of language. 38
In selecting words for his text, Roget felt
his purpose was to offer as many terms as
might be wanted, leaving the proper selection
entirely to the discretion and taste of the reader.
He therefore included not only single words,
but also phrases; vulgar terms, if used in
general conversation; words and phrases bor-
rowed from other languages; and neologies
coined in the arts andsciencesif made familiar
through common use. He omitted purely sci-
entific and technical terms along with com-
mon proverbs.
Roget addressed and resolved the many
problems confronting an organizer of words.
Recognizing that many words could fall in
more than one categoiy, he used numerous
cross-references and also listed some words
under more than one head. In order to prevent
needless length, he generally omitted conju-
gate words, or different parts of speech from
the same root
Roget was the first to focus on antonymic
as well as synonymic relationships among
words. Hedidnot, however, call similar words
"synonyms," since he insisted that there are n o
real synonyms in the sense of two words
having identical meanings. Instead he called
them "analogous" words. He referred to con-
trasting words as "correlative." The term "ant-
onym" would not be used until 1867. 39
Roget arranged the Thesaurus in two par-
allel columns so that correlative ideas could be
easily contrasted. (This layout was maintained
in the copyright edition until 1962.) The cor-
relative expressions were either intermediate
terms whose meaning falls between two oppo-
site ideas (beginning — middle — end), the
negative to each of two opposite positions
(convexity — flatness- — concavity), orthe stan-
dard with which each extreme is compared
(insufficiency — sufficiency— redundance),
While these forms of correlative expressions
would suggest use of triple rather than double
columns within the text, Roget found this
format impractical and remained with two, 40 It
is in addressing the correlative nature of words
that Roget advanced the linguistic theory that
"the study of correlative terms existing in a
particular language may often throw valuable
light on the manners and customs of the na-
tions using it." 41
The First Edition
The first edition of the Thesaurus was
published by Longman, Brown, Green, and
Longmans in May 1 852, when Roget was 73.
"It was a handsome volume, a generous oc-
tavo, printed on good quality paper, with the
text well spaced-out." 42 Roget' s work in a
multitude of scientific and literary societies
had made him a fairly well known figure, and
his Thesaurus sold out of the 1,000 copies
printed,
Several British journals reviewed the The-
saurus within its first year. Most were favor-
able if not particularly analytical. Many were
not quite sure what to make of this new work.
"Whatever may be thought, however, of the
general aim of Dr. Roget's work, there can be
no doubt as to the ability of its execution," said
The Athenaeum. , 43 This unsigned review also
suggested that some terms included were al-
ready obsolete, and that more care and dis-
crimination could have been taken in the over-
all selection process. Regarding the book's
classification system, the reviewer seemed to
feel that if such a scheme proved useful for the
writing of a former secretary of the Royal
Society, it would certainly be quite useful to
others.
The Critic observed that "this is at least a
curious book, novel in its design, most labori-
ously wrought, but, we fear, not likely to be so
practically useful as the care, and toil, and
thought bestowed upon it might have de-
served." 44 The Eclectic Review regarded the
book very highly, saying that "the utility of
such a work is much greater than appears on
the surface." 45 It continued,
ROGET'S THESA URUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 227
We can assure our readers that it would be
unjust to the author to represent his book as a
merely dry catalogue of words. It is full of
suggestions. It exhibits the extraordinary rich-
ness, fulness, and flexibility of the English
language .... We recommend it specifically
to writers who ... are so indolent, conceited,
so ignorant, or so negligent, as to damage the
purity of their mother-tongue by a habit of
arbitrarily fabricating new words and a new
fangled phraseology We should rejoice if
our warm commendation promoted the circu-
lation of so thoroughly useful a book. 46
The Westminster Review, founded by Jer-
emy Bentham, published its review in April
1853 after the Thesaurus had been in print for
nearly a year. Stating that no literary man
should be without such a help, it added that
"the labour must have been immense, but the
author's reward is sure. Roget will rank with
Samuel Johnson as a literary instrument-maker
of the first-class." 47
Within a few years of its appearance the
Thesaurus was being defended as a staple
without which no serious scholar could live.
One of the few reviews critical of its purpose
appeared in the North American Review in
1854. The writer, identified as E.P. Whipple
by Samuel Austin Allibone, 48 ridiculed the
Thesaurus as a tool engendering mediocrity in
writing:
Seriously, we consider this book as one of the
best of a numerous class, whose aim is to
secure the results without imposing the tasks
of labor, to arrive at ends by a dexterous
dodging of means, to accelerate the tongue
without accelerating the faculties. It is an
outside remedy for an inward defect. In our
opinion, the work mistakes the whole process
by which living thought makes its way into
living words, and it might be thoroughly mas-
tered without conveying any real power or
facility of expression. 49
While Whipple asserted that the Thesaurus in
the hands of a novice writer may result in
anguished prose, it has also been shown to
hone the writing of professionals. As one
example, Dylan Thomas, a proven master of
expression, used the Thesaurus as a source of
words during his composition of "Poem on his
Birthday;' in 1951. 50
Later Editions Edited by Roget and
His Descendants
Longman published a second edition of
1,500 copies in March 1853. The third, de-
scribed as a cheaper edition, enlarged and
improved, appeared in February 1855. For
this edition Roget revised parts of the text,
added thousands of new expressions, and in-
troduced 20 subsidiary heads marked as "(a)"
to fill gaps he had found in his scheme. This
edition was then stereotyped and used for
subsequent printings until the plates were worn
outRogetpersonally saw 25 new editions and
printings through the press, and he collected
additions and changes up to his death in Sep-
tember 1869.
His son John Lewis Roget, a lawyer who
was active as an art critic and watercolorist,
then took over as editor. He compiled his
father's multitudinous handwrittennotes from
the margins and spaces of the Thesaurus for
his new edition published in 1879. Without
changing Roget' s system of classification in
any way, he nevertheless made his own dis-
tinctive contribution to the evolution of the
Thesaurus, To keep the book within reason-
able limits while adding large numbers of
words, he confined use of words to a single
primary heading and extended the use of cross-
references, a practice continued by subse-
quent editors. John Roget' s other major addi-
tion to the Thesaurus was the significant ex-
pansion of the alphabetical index. Roget him-
self felt that readers would consult the system
of classification first and give little impor-
tance to the index. John Roget believed, how-
ever, that almost everyone who used the book
found it more convenient to consult the index
first. His new index contained not only all the
words in the text but also all the phrases which
had previously been excluded. 31 The index
took up almost half of the new edition.
John Roget supervised frequent reprints
of the Thesaurus, New words reflecting topics
of the day, such as "veldt," "Afrikander," and
"Gatling gun," were added to the text and
listed in a supplementary index. Upon John
228 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
I
8
Roget's death in 1 908, his son Samuel Romilly
Roget took over as editor. Samuel Roget, an
engineer, made no changes in layout but greatly
expanded the vocabulary of the book and
extended the system of cross-references. He
promoted the Thesaurus energetically, ce-
menting its place as a landmark work. The
crossword puzzle craze of the 1920s gave its
sales an enormous boost. Between 1911 and
1929, a least one printing was made per year,
with five in 1925 when Samuel Roget brought
out his own new enlarged edition. According
to a reviewer in Dial, "Mr. Samuel Romilly
Roget, his father and grandfather, seem in this
volume, to have perfected perfection." 52 For
the 1936 edition the index was checked line by
line. New plates were made and used for
frequent reprints even in the war years. 53
Editions by Others
Samuel Romilly Roget carried on the
family's work until 1952 when he sold the
family rights to Longmans, Green and Co.
With his death in 1953, the family connection
with the Thesaurus came to an end. Exactly
100 years from the date of the first edition,
Longmans commissioned Robert A. Dutch,
OBE, to bring the Thesaurus up to date. Dutch
entirely rewrote the text and recompiled the
index while remaining true to the organic
structure of the original. In his introduction,
Dutch stated:
it is Roget's great merit that he devised a
system of categories, logically ordered, that is
both workable and comprehensive. As edition
followed edition, more and more words were
drawn in without destroying the framework.
In the course of a century of testing, modifica-
tions have been made only in matters of detail.
The present editor's experience confirms that
of his predecessors. 54
While Roget's framework still proved useful
for organization, Dutch felt that the system of
classification itself was of little interest to
most modem readers who wanted a purely
practical, not philosophical, communication
tool. Dutch, therefore, made many changes to
the format so that the classification system
became more transparent for the reader.
In previous editions contrasting heads
had been arranged in opposite, parallel col-
umns. Heads that had no opposite were printed
the whole width of the page. Dutch kept the
parallel columns but printed the heads con-
secutively. He completely recast the ordering
of words in each head so that close synonyms
could be grouped more consistently together
to lead the mind "by easy transitions from one
nuance to another without distraction." 55 He
introduced some new heads and renamed or
eliminated others, resulting in a reduced total
of 990 rather than the original 1,000. Dutch
added some 50,000 new words and a large
number of cross-references, swelling the total
size of the volume to almost double that of the
1936 edition of Samuel Roget.
Dutch's most significant contribution to
the evolution of the Thesaurus was the use of
keywords printed in italics at the beginning of
each paragraph. The keyword showed readers
where to begin their search within a head. The
keyword was used in all cross-references and
in the index references, enabling readers to
pick out the most suitable of several locations
for the meaning they sought. 56 This new edi-
tion was judged to present a fuller and more
up-to-date vocabulary in a more convenient
and readily accessible form. 57
The Thesaurus was revised again in 1982
by Susan M. Lloyd, a modern language teacher
and former library worker. She viewed her
new edition as an overhaul of an efficient and
valuable machine rather than an attempt to
completely rebuild it. She refined parts, re-
placed parts, and took advantage of computer
technology to ensure the reliability of the
cross-references and index, Her main task
was to incorporate the huge number of new
expressions that had been generated over a
rapidly changing 20 years. She added over
20,000 new terms of the sciences and technol-
ogy (data processing, space travel, sources of
energy), commerce and industry (ergonom-
ics, market research, cost-benefit analysis,
hardsell), and medicine (transplant, test-tube
ROGETS THESAURUS OF ENGLISH WOWS AND PHRASES 229
baby). She also listed terms describing society
and societal changes. She paid special atten-
tion to subject areas reflecting her own inter-
ests: ecology and conservation (recycling,
greenhouse effect), sociology and politics (su-
perpowers, sexism, cover-up, streaking, drug-
taking), and civil rights (feminism, blackpower,
gay lib). 5 *
Lloyd's work proved briefly controver-
sial as journalists charged the Thesaurus of
being "feminized." 59 In her preface Lloyd
states that "in listing nouns denoting people,
we have borne in mind the fact that according
to recent research the particle 'man,' in such
words as 'mankind,' is not always taken, as
formerly, to include men and women. Care
has therefore been taken to include female
terms as well, or general terms such as 'chair-
person,' where they exist." 60 Other reviews of
Lloyd's work questioned her omission of vul-
gar words andracial epithets, a decision made,
according to Lloyd, since those terms are
already familiar and since "inclusion gives
them an aura of respectability."* 1
While many reviews challenged Lloyd's
inclusion or exclusion of words, Thelndexer
challenged what it considered a major flaw in
the format: the nonalphabetical arrangement
of subheadings. This arrangement could cause
the reader to peruse as many as 241 possible
points of entry to locate a word/meaningbeing
sought, and was in direct violation of British
indexing standards. 62
Some thirty million copies of the Thesau-
rus had been sold by the time Betty Kirkpatrick
began work on the most recent revision of the
Thesaurus in January 1 985." Within her new
edition published in 1987, Kirkpatrick added
1 1,000 entries, placing greater emphasis than
in the past on technology, international cui-
sine, and health. A former editor of the Cham-
bers 20th Century Dictionary and a native of
Scotland, she included Scottish words that are
universally used and recognized. She was also
the first reviser to include four-letter words.
Few other changes from Lloyd's edition were
made. The Indexer again lamented the non-
alphabetization of subheadings and found this
edition's typeface and page make-up more
difficult than in Lloyd's work. 64
American Editions
The publishing rights to the Thesaurus
have always remained with Longman, yet
even from the beginning other editions sprang
forth from publishers in the United States as
well as in England. The Reverend Barnas
Sears edited the first American Thesaurus in
1 854, omitting all "vulgar" words and phrases,
even phrases as innocent as "to feather one's
nest," "to run a muck," or "cool as a cucum-
ber." Putnam 's severely criticized Sears for
meddling with Roget's work on the basis that
what he had left out was not vulgar but merely
idiomatic and thus useful to writers. When
Sears reinsertedthe "vulgar" words and phrases
in his second edition of 1 8 55, he placed them
in a separate category as an appendix. Putnam 's
subsequently judged this practice to be "more
likely to catch the eye of students andyounger
readers' as they are now placed, than they are
as they stand in Roget's original arrange-
ment*' 65 Gould and Lincoln, Boston, contin-
ued to issue printings of Sears' work until
1867.
In 1886 Thomas Y. Crowell & Company,
the major American publisher of the Thesau-
rus, issued, with authorization from Longman,
its first American edition, based on John
Roget's 1879 work. 66 Crowell released sev-
eral other printings revised and amended to fit
American needs until 1911, when American
lexicographer CO. Sylvester Mawson, revis-
ing editor of Webster's New International
Dictionary , issued a practically new book that
deviated considerably from the original
Longman edition. Mawson's work, completely
revised and reset in 1922, was then called the
"International edition" because of the number
of non-English words included. The Interna-
tional edition was further enlarged in 1930,
1932, 1936, 1938, and 1939. Crowell then
produced Roget's International Thesaurus:
New Edition in 1946, and, after more than ten
years of continuous revision, it published
230 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Roget's International Thesaurus, Third Edi-
tion, in 1962.* 7 The latest of Crowell's stan-
dard American editions is Roget's Interna-
tional Thesaurus, fourth edition, revised by
Robert L. Chapman and published in 1977.
Some publishers have issued more recent
editions under license from Longman. In 1 965
St. Martin's Press printed an Americanized
edition of the 1962 Longman work. In 1984
Penguin published an abridged paperback ver-
sion of the 1982 Lloyd edition and in 1988
Penguin released an abridgement of the 1987
Kirkpatrick edition.* 8
While all these editions retained Roget's
basic classification system, many others
dropped that system yet still used Roget's
name. Among these were the Roget 's Pocket
Thesaurus (New York; Pocket Books, 1946);
Roget's Treasury of Words (New York:
Crowell, 1924); New American Roget 's Col-
lege Thesaurus in Dictionary Form (New
York: New American Library, 1958); and
Roget's II: The New Thesaurus (Boston:
Houghton Mifflin, 1980). Roget's II is the
electronic version of the Thesaurus currently
available on CD-ROM as part of Microsoft
Bookshelf. Longman highly disapproves of
the use of "Roget" as a generic term and has
recently registered the name as a trademark in
several countries including the United King-
dom.* 9
Given the number of publishers and edi-
tors who have connections with the Thesau-
rus, along with national and international copy-
right agreements and arguments, it is not sur-
prising that there is no known bibliography
capturing all the editions and printings of the
Thesaurus. According to D. L. Emblen, Roget's
biographer, it is doubtful that a clear and
complete publication history will ever
emerge. 70
Future of the Thesaurus
The future of the Thesaurusrmy be clearer,
however; Longman will regularly revise the
Thesaurus to ensure that the Longman edition
remains up-to-date and authoritative. Longman
lexicographers work closely with each editor
to determine what should be included and/or
removed. In between full revisions, Longman
incorporates minor corrections into each new
reprint. The next full Longman revision is
planned for the mid-1990s. 71
Computer capabilities make possible an
expanded, continually updated database of
words. Longman is looking forward to ex-
ploiting the capabilities of technology by pro-
ducing electronic versions of the Thesaurus. 12
Through use of the computer, Robert Chapman
has envisioned an entirely new tool, a
"thessictionary," which would incorporate
both thesaurus listings and dictionary defini-
tions. 73 Susan Lloyd has seen opportunities to
build a multilingual database in which any
language in the world could be analyzed ac-
cording to Roget' s classification. Such a data-
base could be an imperfect forerunner to fi-
nally achieving Roget's dream of a universal
language, a language which would help bring
about the golden age of union and harmony
among the several nations and races of the
world. 74
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. London: Longman, Brown,
Green, and Longmans, 1852. 41 8p.
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. 2nd ed., revised and en-
larged. London: Longman, Brown, Green, and
Longmans, 1853. 434p.
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. 3rd ed., enlarged and im-
proved. London: Longman, Brown, Green, and
Longmans, 1855. 507p.
ROGETS THESA URUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 23 1
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. New Edition, Enlarged and
Improved, partly from the Author's Notes, and
with a full Index, by John Lewis Roget. London:
Longmans, Green & Co., 1879. 667p.
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. Enlarged by John Lewis
Roget, newly revised and enlarged by Samuel
Romilly Roget. London: Longmans Green &
Co., 1925. 691p.
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, Classified
and Arranged so as to Facilitate the Expression
of Ideas and Assist in Literary Composition, by
Peter Mark Roget. Enlarged by John Lewis
Roget. New ed., revised andenlargedby Samuel
Romilly Roget London: Longmans, Green &
Co.,1936.705p.
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases, by Peter
Mark Roget. New Edition completely Revised
and Modernized by Robert A. Dutch. London:
Longmans, 1962. l,309p.
Roget 's Thesaurus of English Words andPhrases, by
Peter Mark Roget. New edition prepared by
Susan M. Lloyd. London: Longman, 1982.
l,247p.
Roget 's Thesaurus of English Words andPhrases, by
Peter Mark Roget. New edition prepared by
Betty Kirkpatrick. London: Longman, 1987.
l,254p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Significant secondary literature concern-
ing Peter Mark Roget's Thesaurus remains
relatively small despite the work's length of
tenure and mass distribution. The bulk of the
writing consists of short, descriptive reviews
of the original and subsequent editions issued
by Longman and other publishers. Only re-
views of the original edition are included in
this bibliography. Noteworthy reviews of sub-
sequent Longman editions have been noted
within the text. Two works of some depth
stand out: Margaret Anderson's dissertation
which delves into the intellectual history and
organization of the Thesaurus, and D.L.
Emblen's biography which places its writing
and history within the context of Roget's life
and the times in which he lived. Robert Dutch' s
preface to his 1962 edition gives the best
explanation of significant format changes made
to the original and retained in subsequent
editions. Susan Lloyd's piece, "Dr. Peter Mark
Roget and his Thesaurus," within the 1982
edition outlines a concise publishing history
of Longman editions, a history brought up to
date inMcArthur' s "The RedoubtableRoget."
Anderson, Margaret Edna. "Roget's Thesaurus: An
Explanation of Its Purpose and a Study of Some
Applications of Its Principles." Ph.D. disserta-
tion, Case Western Reserve University, 1978.
Chapman, Robert L, "Roget's Thesaurus and Se-
mantic Structure: A Proposal for Work." Lan-
guage Sciences 3 1 (August, 1974): 27-3 1.
Douglas, George H. "What's Happened to the The-
saurus?" RQ 16 (Winter, 1976): 149-55.
Dutch, Robert A. "Preface to the Revised Edition
1962." In Roget's Thesaurus of English Words
and Phrases, edited by Robert A. Dutch. Lon-
don: Longmans, 1962.
Egan, Rose F. "Survey of the History of English
Synonymy." In Webster's Dictionary of Syn-
onyms Springfield, MA: G, & C, Merriam Co.,
1942.
Emblen, D. L. "Dr. Roget: His Book." The Book-
seller no. 3399 (February 13, 1971): 412-16.
. "Peter Mark Roget: A Centenary Bibliogra-
phy." Bibliographical Society of America Pa-
pers 62 (July, 1968): 43 6-47.
. Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man.
New York: Thomas Y. Crowell, 1970.
Lloyd, Susan M. "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his
Thesaurus." In Roget's Thesaurus of English
Words andPhrases, edited by Susan M. Lloyd.
London: Longman, 1982.
McArthur, Tom. "The Redoubtable Roget." English
Today, no. 12 (October, 1987): 36-39.
— — -. Worlds of Reference. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1986.
Ober, William B. "Peter Mark Roget: Utilitarian and
Lexicographer." New York State Journal of
Medicine 65 (July, 1965): 1804-07.
Proceedings of the Royal Society of London. 78 (June
17, 1969-June 16, 1870): xxviii-xl.
Review of Thesaurus of English Words andPhrases,
by Peter Mark Roget. The Athenaeum no. 1297
(September 4, 1852): 939.
Review of Thesaurus of English Words andPhrases,
by Peter Mark Roget. The Critic 1 1 (June 15,
1852): 320.
Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget. TTie Eclectic Review n.s.
4 (July-December, 1852): 623.
232 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget. The Westminster Review
59 (April, 1853): 311
[Whipple, EdwinP.]"TheUseandMisuseofWords."
North American Review 79 (July 1854): 137—
157.
NOTES
1 Peter Mark Roget, "Introduction," in Thesaurus of
English Words and Phrases, New Edition, En-
larged and Improved, partly from the Author's
Notes, and with a full Index, ed. John Lewis Roget
(Boston: De Wolfe, Fiske, &Co., 1879), xiii. Italics
in original. Roget's introduction to the first edition
is reprinted in many subsequent editions and print-
ings.
2 Ibid, xv.
3 Proceedings of the Royal Society oj London 18 (June 17,
1869-June 16, 1870): xxix.
4 D. L. Emb\zn,Peter MarkRoget: The Word and the Man
(New York: Thomas Y. Crowell. 1970), 17.
5 Ibid., 43.
6 Ibid., 53-54.
7 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man, 96.
Italics in original.
8 Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, xxxviii-
XXXV.
9 Susan M. Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesau-
rus," in Roget 's Thesaurus of English Words and
P/irasey,New edition prepared by Susan M. Lloyd
(London & Harlow: Longman, 1982), xiv.
10 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man,
138.
" Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, xxxviii.
12 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and Man, 1 19.
13 Emblen, "Peter Mark Roget: A Centenary Bibliogra-
phy," Bibliographical Society of America Papers
62 (July 1968): 441-43.
H Peter Mark Roget, Animal and Vegetable Physiology
Considered with Reference to Natural Theology
(Philadelphia: Carey, Lea & Blanchard, 1836), 1:
xiii. Further mention of this title in the text will be
to its popular name, Bridgewater Treatise.
Is Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man,
200.
16 Ibid., 244-52.
17 Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesaurus," xv.
18 Ibid.
19 Margaret Edna Anderson, "Roget's Thesaurus: An
Explanation of Its Purpose and a Study of Some
Applications of Its Principles" Ph.D. dissertation,
Case Western Reserve University, 1978, 70-7 1.
20 Roget, "Introduction," xxxvii-xxix.
21 Ibid., xv. Italics in original.
22 Ibid., xvi.
23 Ibid., xxix.
24 Anderson, "Roget's Thesaurus," 89-90.
"Ibid., 91.
26 Roget, "Introduction," xiii— xiv.
27 Ibid., xv.
28 Ibid., xxii.
29 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man,
264.
30 Rose F. Egan, "Survey of the History of English
Synonymy," in Webster's Dictionary of Synonyms
(Springfield, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1942), ix.
31 Ibid,, xiii.
32 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man,
265.
33 Egan, "Survey of the History of English Synonymy,"
in Webster's Dictionary of Synonyms (Springfield,
MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1942), xiv.
34 Anderson, 114, 117.
35 Roget, "Introduction," xxviii.
36 Anderson, 127.
37 Roget, Animal and Vegetable Physiology, 1:31.
38 Anderson, 130-31.
M Egan, xvii.
40 Roget, "Introduction," xx.
41 Ibid., xix.
42 Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesaurus," xvi.
43 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, The Athenaeum, no. 1297 (4
September 1852): 939.
44 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, The Critic 11(15 June 1 852);
320.
45 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, The Eclectic Review n.s., 4
(July-December 1852): 623.
4IS Ibid. Italics in the original.
47 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, 77ie Westminster Review 59
(April 1853): 311.
48 Samuel Austin Allibone, A Critical Dictionary of
English Literature and British and American Au-
thors (Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott Company,
1900), 2: 1857.
49 [ E. P. Whipple], "The Use and Misuse of Words,"
North American Review 79 (July 1854): 138
50 Mary Dee Harris Fosberg, "Dylan Thomas's Use of
Roget's Thesaurus during Composition of Poem on
his Birthday" Bibliographical Society of America
Papers 72 (October 1978): 505.
5 1 Roget, John Lewis, "Editor' s Preface," in Thesaurus of
English Words and Phrases, New Edition, En-
larged and Improved, partly from the Author's
Notes, and with a full Index, ed. John Lewis Roget
(Boston: De Wolfe, Fiske, & Co., 1879), vii-xi,
52 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, enlarged by John Lewis
Roget, newly revised and enlarged by Samuel
Romilly Roget, Dial 80 (May 1926): 431.
53 Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesaurus," xvii.
54 Robert A. Dutch, "Preface to the Revised Edition
1962," in The Original Roget's Thesaurus of En-
glish Words and Phrases, New Edition completely
Revised and Modernized by Robert A. Dutch (New
York: St. Martin's Press, 1965): ix.
ROGET'S THESA URUS OF ENGLISH WORDS AND PHRASES 233
iS Ibid., xiii.
" Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesaurus,"
xviii.
" Bunt, G.H.V., review of Roget 's Thesaurus of English
Words and Phrases, New Edition completely Re-
vised and Modernized by Robert A. Dutch, English
Studies 44 (1963): 155.
" Susan M. Lloyd, "Preface to the 1982 Edition," in
Roget 's Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases
New edition prepared by Susan M. Lloyd (London
& Harlow: Longman, 1982), x-xi.
59 Anthony Quinton, "Articles of Association," Times
Literary Supplement no. 4131 (4 June 1982): 605;
John Weightman, "Canute-like Gestures," Times
Educational Supplement no. 3438 (21 May 1982):
41; "Zonked by a Ms.: A Woman Updates Roget,"
Time 119 (10 May 1982): 101;
60 Lloyd, "Preface," xi.
* Weightman, 41; "Zonked by a Ms," 101.
** Review of Roget 's Thesaurus of English Words and
Phrases, New edition prepared by Susan M. Lloyd
The Indexer 13 (October 1982): 132.
" 3 Tom McArthur, "The Redoubtable Roget," English
Today, no. 12 (October 1987): 39.
M J.A. Gordon, review of Roget 's Thesaurus of English
Words and Phrases, New editionprepared by Betty
Kirkpatrick The Indexer 16 (April 1988): 63.
65 Review of Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases,
by Peter Mark Roget, Putnam 's Monthly Magazine
of American Literature, Science & Art 6 (September
1855): 318.
66 Andrew Delahunty, Longman Dictionaries Publisher,
letter to the author, I June 1990.
67 "Publisher's Preface," Roget 's International Thesau-
rus, 3rd ed. (New York: Thomas Y. Crowell Com-
pany, 1962): x-xi.
S8 Andrew Delahunty, letter to the author, 1 June 1990.
69 Ibid.
70 Emblen, Peter Mark Roget: The Word and the Man,
278-
71 Andrew Delahunty, letter to the author, 1 June 1990.
72 Ibid.
73 Robert L. Chapman, "Roget's Thesaurus and Semantic
Structure: A Proposal for Work," Language Sci-
ences 31 (August 1974): 28.
74 Lloyd, "Dr. Peter Mark Roget and his Thesaurus,"
xviii.
Eugene Garfield's Contribution to
Bibliography: Science Citation Index
David A. Tyckoson
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Of the hundreds of new reference works pub-
lished each year, very few provide unique
access points to information already covered
by other sources. Even fewer reference tools
are able to influence the evaluation of the
information that they contain. And it is ex-
tremely rare that a reference work is respon-
sible for creating an entirely new discipline of
scientific research. The Science Citation In-
dex is one of the rare reference works that has
hadjustsuchan impact. By allowing research-
ers to identify materials that are not retrievable
through other indexes, by enabling the evalu-
ation of scientific research through the mea-
surement of the citation rates of individual
papers and journals, and by providing the
primary instrument for the study of citation
analysis, the Science Citation Index is respon-
sible for each of the above effects. The impact
of the Science Citation Index has been so
widespread that it truly deserves a place as one
of the landmarks of references work.
The Science Citation Index (along with its
more recent cousins the Social Sciences Cita-
tion Index and the Arts and Humanities Cita-
tion Index) owes its existence to the genius,
entrepreneurial nature, and vision of its cre-
ator, Eugene Garfield. In the early 1950s,
Garfield was a graduate student in chemistry
and participated in a medical indexing project
at Johns Hopkins University. By working on
this project, he realized that the references at
the end of each published scientific article
could be interpreted as indexing statements
about the contents of that article. However, he
did not yet know how to translate these refer-
ences into a useful information tool. It was
only through a chance encounter with a pub-
lisher in the field of law that he gained the
insight that resulted in the concept of the SCL
An Example from Law
After organizing a conference on the topic
of machine methods in scientific documenta-
tion in 1953, he was contacted by one of the
publishers of Shepard's Citations (Colorado
Springs: Shepherd's McGraw-Hill, 1873- ),
who suggested that a scientific index could be
established along the same principles as this
80-year-old legal reference tool. Upon exam-
ining Shepard's Citations, the existence of
which Garfield had been entirely unaware, he
immediately realized that a similar publica-
tion was needed for the sciences. According to
Garfield, "It was a eureka experience that was
a supreme moment in my career." 1 In very
short order, he obtained his library degree
from Columbia University, published a paper
on "Citation Indexes for Science" in the jour-
nal Science, 2 organized the Institute for Scien-
tific Information, and began a revolution m
scientific information retrieval by publishing
the first volume of the Science Citation Index
in 1961. Over the past 30 years, the Institute
has grown into a multimillion dollar enter-
SCIENCE CITATION INDEX 235
prise, Garfield has become a millionaire in his
own right, and the Science Citation Index has
become one of the most valuable and re-
spected reference tools in all of the sciences,
The Science Citation Index succeeded
because it took an entirely different approach
to organizing, indexing, and retrieving infor-
mation than that used in any previous index of
scientific information. Several features set it
apart from any other scientific indexing or
abstracting services. First of all, it is an inter-
disciplinary index of scientific literature.
Whereas most other indexes in the sciences
attempt to cover a single scientific discipline,
such as chemistry, biology, or computer sci-
ence, the SCI includes information from all
fields of the sciences. Other than the General
Science Index (New York; H.W. Wilson,
1978- ), which is aimed at an undergraduate
rather than a research audience, all other sci-
entific journal indexes are limited to a single
scientific discipline. The interdisciplinary as-
pect of the SCI enables researchers to identify
material that they could not find by searching
only the indexes related to any one specific
subject field and also facilitates the exchange
of information from one field to another. One
of the objectives for creating the SCI was to
increase scientific communication across ex-
isting disciplines, and the nature of its design
has enabled it to perform admirably in this
area.
Selective Coverage
Secondly, the Science Citation Index is a
highly selective index. Rather than attempt to
index all of the literature in any given disci-
pline, the SCI covers only a few source jour-
nals from each field. With more than 50,000
scientific journals currently being published
worldwide, it is impossible for any indexing
service to cover all of the sciences compre-
hensively without being overwhelmed by
source material. In order to avoid this prob-
lem, the SCI only indexes a relatively few key
scientific journals. However, thejournals that
are selected for indexing in the SCI are care-
fully chosen to represent only themost signifi-
cant and most important titles from each area
of the sciences. In order to accurately judge a
journal's significance to the field, the editors
of the SCI choose source journals based upon
their impact factor, a statistically derived value
related in part to the number of articles that
they publish, the number of articles that are
cited by other researchers, and the number of
times that the journal cites itself.
From the 50,000-plus scientific journals
available worldwide, the SCI selects only
slightly more than 3,000 as source titles. Al-
though representing only between 5 and 10
percent of the world's scientific output, these
3,000 journals contain representatives from
all scientific disciplines and originate from
more than 40 nations. The only common fea-
ture of the journals selected is the fact that they
represent the most significant sources for their
respective subject areas. Although there has
been some debate about the validity of ranking
scientific journals, the statistical procedures
used to calculate the impact factor of each
journal ensures that only the most significant
sources are included in this reference tool.
The statistical selection procedure for jour-
nal selection has another effect on the Science
Citation Index. Although most indexing ser-
vices maintain a stable or slowly growing list
of source titles, the list of titles covered by the
SCI changes every year even though the num-
ber of titles indexed remains constant. Indi-
vidual journal titles move onto or off of the
source list as their impact factors change. As
a journal becomes a more significant source in
its field and rises in importance, it may be-
come one of the source j ournals for the SCI. If
a journal loses its status in the field, it may be
dropped from coverage. The statistical basis
for the selection of source journals for the SCI
not only allows the index to identify the most
important journals, it also serves as an evalu-
ation tool for researchers in deciding which
sources are the most important and most rel-
evant to a specific discipline. The mere fact
that a journal is indexed by the SCI is an
indication that it is one of the most valuable
236 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
titles in its field. The Science Citation Index is
frequently used not only to identify relevant
research, but to rank that research on the basis
of the source in which it was published, 3
Another difference between SCI and
other scientific indexing services is that once
a journal is selected for inclusion in the SCI, it
is indexed from cover to cover. Once selected
for indexing, the editors of the SCI do not
attempt to place any judgments on the value of
the information published in a source journal.
Whereas other subject indexes tend to only
index feature articles, the SCI covers every-
thing, including research reports, notes, re-
view articles, letters to the editor, and even
bookreviews from some of its source journals.
Only the news notes and advertising are not
indexed by the SCI. The theory behind cover-
to-cover indexing is relatively simple. Be-
cause the SCI indexes only the most signifi-
cant journals in the Field, any information
contained in thosej ournalshasbeen preselected
as belonging to the set of the most important
and valuable published scientific information.
If information is published in any of the jour-
nals selected by the SCI, then that information
must by definition be of value to the scientific
community and should not be lost solely due
to a quirk in the indexing process. Because of
thispolicy, information may often be retrieved
through the SCI that cannot be found by using
other reference works that index the same
titles on a selective basis.
Subject Access
Subject indexing in the SCIis also orga-
nized differently than in any other journal
index. The SCIusqs what it calls a "Permuterrn
Subject Index," which can best be described
as a pre-coordinate keyword title index. With
the exception of a few stop words, each of the
terms used in the titles of the source articles is
placed into a single index file. Those terms are
then matched with every other keyword used
in each source title. The resulting output is a
subject index that allows the researcher to
conduct a two-term Boolean search. Within
the limits of keyword indexing, a researcher is
able to search the SCI under any one term and
conceptually combine that term with any oth-
ers. Although differences in the usage of sub-
ject terms must be taken into account, no other
scientific subject index allows this type of
combination of subject terms.
Citation Access
The final and most noteworthy feature of
the Science Citation Index is that it indexes not
only the articles contained in each of the
source journals, but also the bibliographies at
the end of each of those articles. Any citation
that is contained within one of the source
journals is included, regardless of its date of
publication, its geographic origin, or the for-
mat of the material. Whether a paper cites a
recent journal article, a book published during
the previous decade, a technical report from
World War II, a manuscript from the Middle
Ages, or all of the above, each reference is
entered independently into the SCI database.
A computer program is used to reverse the
order of the citation information, creating an
index in which researchers may identify any
new source material that has cited a specific
publication from the past. By indexing the
references at the end of each article, research-
ers using the SCI are able to identify all new
works that have a logical connection with a
work from the past. This ability to search
citations forwards in time has revolutionized
the method in which many scientists find
information.
A Multi-Faceted Toot
Through the concept of citation indexing
for the sciences, the SCInot only created a new
reference work for retrieving scientific infor-
mation, but also provided the primary re-
search tool for the field of citation analysis.
Without the existence of the SCI, citation
analysis would most likely have remained a
theoretical rather than practical science. Al-
though it would have been possible to track
SCIENCE CITATION INDEX 237
citations forwards in time without the SCI, the
time and labor involved in conducting even a
single search would have outweighed the use-
fulness of the results. However, by using the
SCI, researchers have been able to study cita-
tion frequencies of individual researchers,
specific journals, scientific disciplines, and
even entire nations. 4 None of these studies
would have been possible without this tool. In
the field of citation analysis, ths Science Cita-
tion Index is not only a compendium of re-
search results, but it is also the laboratory in
which that research is conducted.
The SCI has also created an entirely new
method for evaluating scientific research.
Based upon the simple principle that impor-
tant and useful research results are cited and
that unimportant or irrelevant research results
are not cited, the quality of research of an
individual scientist may be measured by ex-
amining the number of times that his or her
work is cited. In theory, an individual whose
papers have been cited ten times has had a
greater impact in the field than an individual
whose papers have been cited only once. In
addition, since the SCI selects only the most
important journals for its source information,
this evaluation process is refined even further
by eliminating citations by those journals that
are not considered to be the core materials in
their field. The SCI thus gives an indication
not only of how frequently an individual's
work is being used, but also how frequently it
is being used by the best researchers in the
field.
The use of the Science Citation Index to
evaluate scientific information has been one
of its mo st controversial applications. Although
this method of evaluation was at first advo-
cated by Eugene Garfield as a natural exten-
sion of citation analysis, the problems associ-
ated with relying strictly upon the number of
times an article is cited to determine its scien-
tific value have led him to issue several warn-
ings about the value of this procedure. 5 None-
theless, citation counts are frequently used as
justifications for appointments, promotions,
or research funding. 6 To many librarians, it
may seem that one of the most frequent uses of
the SCI on university campuses is by faculty
members searching for citations to their own
research so thatthey can providethat informa-
tion to promotion and tenure committees.
Whether such a use of this reference tool is
appropriate or inappropriate, it is a testament
to the degree to which the Science Citation
Index has become an accepted authority within
the scientific community.
To fully understand the dramatic impact
that the SCI has had on scientific information
retrieval, it is necessary to have an under-
standing of the culture of scientific publish-
ing. Scientific tradition dictates that all new
research results acknowledge the use of any
previously known information, theory, and/or
methodology that was used in the derivation of
the new material. By including a bibliography
of references to previous works, each scien-
tific author is able to give credit to the work of
the past researchers who provided background
material for the latest results. This tradition is
strictly followed in the sciences; it has become
extremely rare to see a report of new findings
that does not include any references to previ-
ous research papers. Citations formally ac-
knowledge that science is a growing body of
knowledge and that each piece of new re-
search builds upon past research.
Backward and Forward in Time
In addition to serving as an acknowledge-
ment of earlier work, the scientific citation
relationship is one that has been used by
researchers for decades as a tool for the iden-
tification of other relevant publications on a
specific topic. Researchers frequently rely
upon the bibliographies at the end of an article
to link them with other relevant materials
dealing with the same subject matter. The
citation relationship provides a unique associ-
ation between the cited and citing articles that
may not be identified by traditional subject or
author indexes. When one author makes a
£££■
r*^
238 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
reference to another author's work, there is a
clear indication that the work of both individ-
uals revolves around some common theme.
They may be discussing the same subject
material, using the same experimental meth-
ods, applying the same theory, disputing the
same concepts, or using the same applications
of the work of a third party. In any case, the
fact that one paper cites another clearly iden-
tifies a common thread between the two. When
a researcher is able to identify a paper on a
topic of interest, the references at the end of
that paper will almost always lead to other
useful and related sources.
The tracing of bibliographic citations at
the end of a research paper has become a
standard research method, but it has one maj or
disadvantage — it only works backward in time.
An article published in 1990 may cite other
sources from a wide range of dates, but it
cannot cite materials published in 1991 or
1 992 or any other date later than that of its own
publication. Researchers who trace citations
are able to track down useful sources from the
past, but cannot find more recent information.
If a search begins with an article that is five
years old, there is no possibility of retrieving
any newer materials by tracing its references.
Although a wide range of sources from the
past may be identified, the researcher will
never be able to find anything published dur-
ing the last five years.
The most valuable and most revolution-
ary aspect of the Science Citation Index is its
ability to reverse this process. Because SCI
indexes all of the references at the end of each
source article, it allows researchers to trace
citations in reverse. By using the "Citation
Index" portion of the SCI researchers are able
to look up an old article and find all of the new
articles that have included the original in their
bibliographies. Beginning with a single rel-
evant article, a researcher may search back-
wards in time by studying the bibliography at
the end of the source article and may also
search forwards in time by searching the cita-
tion index to determine if the original article
has been cited recently by any of the papers
included in the source journals. Starting with
a single relevant research paper, a scientist
can use the SCI to identify all other important
materials dealing with the same concept, re-
gardless of the format in which they are pub-
lished, their country of origin, or date of pub-
lication. No other scientific journal index is
able to provide such broad subject, geographic,
and temporal coverage.
If the statistical basis for the selection of
the source journals is accepted, the Science
Citation Index becomes more than just a pow-
erful research tool. Based upon the general
principle that important scientific research is
cited and that unimportant scientific research
is ignored, the SCI for any given time period
becomes a complete record of all scientific
research that was considered to be important
during that period. Any valuable new infor-
mation will be indexed if it appears in one of
the source journals used by the SCI. In addi-
tion, any significant research from the past
will be included if it was cited by the authors
of the articles included in the source journals.
If a paper is not included in either one of the
source journals or one of its citations, that
paper cannot be considered a part of the core
of scientific information for that time period.
What the SCI achieves that no other journal
index achieves is the identification, evalua-
tion, and indexing of all relevant information
published anywhere in the world from through-
out all of history. This may be the greatest
achievement of the Science Citation Index.
Problematic Issues
Despite its overwhelming success, the
Science Citation Index is not without its prob-
lems. By relying solely upon the bibliogra-
phies of thousands of different authors to
identify relevant citation information, the SCI
is completely lacking in consistency in its
citation format. Although Eugene Garfield
initially proposed a uniform system of citation
for scientific journals, 7 that system has never
SCIENCE CITATION INDEX 239
been adopted and the SCI cites each source
exactly as indicated by each individual author.
This results in several variant entries for many
papers due to variations in the forms of the
names and/or source titles. Inaddition to spell-
ing differences, the work of many authors is
lost because the SCI cites only the first author
listed for any scientific paper. This policy has
become a tremendous problem over the last
two decades as the average number of authors
for a scientific paper has risen dramatically.
Subject indexing is also a problem because the
SC/relies upon the keywords in the titles of the
articles to create its subject index. Differences
in terminology and variations in the usage of
that terminology may combine to frustrate
researchers who are using SCI strictly as a
subject index. Despite these inconveniences,
such inconsistencies have been accepted as a
compromise against the tremendous costs in
time and labor that would be required to create
an authority file for all of the author names,
source titles, and subject terms used by the
SCI.
Other problems with the .SC/are related to
the sheer volume of information contained in
the index. In the 1988 annual edition, the SCI
indexed more than 600,000 source articles
and 10,000,000 citations. Due to the tremen-
dous size of the database, the printed edition is
published using extremely small and difficult-
to-read type. This is particularly true in the
"Citation Index" portion of the work, where
many users rely on magnification to retrieve
the information from the printed page. Once
again, this publishing decision is made as a
conscious effort on the part of the publishers
to reduce the costs associated with printing
and distributing such an index. Despite these
efforts to save space, a single annual edition
now occupies almost four feet of shelf space.
More recently, electronic versions of the
database have been introduced through online
vendors and on CD-ROM. While these ver-
sions may reduce the problems of readability,
they magnify the problems associated with the
lack of authority control by reducing the capa-
bility of the reader to browse the index files
and thereby spot variant forms of a person's
name. Regardless of its format, the SCI re-
quires a significant investment of time by the
user to take full advantage of its unique capa-
bilities. However, this investment is well worth
the return in the retrieval of additional infor-
mation sources that do not appear in other
reference tools.
As may be expected with a work of this
magnitude, one of the most notable features of
the SCI is its pri ce. The Science Citation Index
has always been one of the most expensive
reference tools on the market. With an annual
cost of $8,850 in 1990, a subscription to the
SCI is one of the largest investments that most
institutions will make in any single informa-
tion source, However, the high cost of the
work is offset by the value of the information
it contains. In these difficult economic times
when libraries are considering the cancella-
tion of expensive scientific journals and in-
dexes, the SCI rarely comes up for consider-
ation. This in itself is a testament to the useful-
ness and value of this unique reference tool.
As it enters its fourth decade of publica-
tion, the Science Citation Index has become
one of the standard reference tools in its field.
However, its impact on science has clearly
been much greater than if it had been just
another index. While most reference works
help users to think about the subjects that they
cover, the Science Citation Index gives its
users new ways to think about its subject
matter. For this achievement, the Science Ci-
tation Index has been one of the most signifi-
cant advancements in the history of bibliogra-
phy.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Science Citation Index. Philadelphia: Institute for
Scientific Information, 1961- Bimonthly.
The Science Citation Index (SCI) began publication
in 1961 as a quarterly index with annual cumu-
i >££■£.
240 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
latiorts. Beginning with the 1979 edition, fre-
quency increased to bimonthly. Quinquennial
cumulations are available for the periods of
1965-1969, 1970-1974, 1975-1979,and 1980-
1 984 . Retrospective decennial cumulations cov-
ering theyears 1955—1964- and 1945-1 954 were
published in 1984 and 1988 respectively. The
publisher intends to continue producing annual
editions while at the same time extending retro-
spective coverage back to the beginning of the
twentieth century. Each volume of the SCI
consists of 4 distinct parts. The "Source Index"
contains references to journal articles arranged
bypersonal orcorporate author. The "Permuterm
Subject Index" provides a keyword subject in-
dex to all articles in the "Source Index." All of
the keywords used in the subject index are
derived directly from the titles of the articles
included in the "Source Index." The "Citation
Index" consists of an index to all of the biblio-
graphic references contained in these same
source materials. These three sections comprise
the main body of the Science Citation Index.
The final portion of the work is the "Journal
Citation Reports," which provides statistical
information on the citation rates and impact
factors of each source journal included by the
index. The 1988 complete annual edition con-
sists of 20 bound volumes plus a separate index
guide.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
As one of the few reference works that has
spawned an entirely new field of study, the
Science Citation Index has been thoroughly
discussed in the professional literature. From
works on the theory of the citationrelationship
to studies of the literature of individual subject
fields, the Science Citation Index has played a
role in hundreds of articles over the past 35
years. Many of these articles have been col-
lected in an eight-volume set by Eugene
Garfield, Essays of an Information Scientist.
This set includes all of Garfield's writings as
well as important other materials related to
citation analysis and is the first source to
consult for material on this work. The editors
of the Science Citation Index are also highly
cognizant of the impact of the SCI on the
literature and maintain a bibliography of rel-
evant materials in the introductory section of
each annual cumulation. This bibliography is
useful for anyone interested in finding other
published sources about citation anaylsis, the
SCI, or its related products.
Aaronson, Steve. "The Footnotes of Science." Mo-
saic 6 (March/April, 1975): 22-27.
Adair, W.C. "Citation Indexes for Scientific Litera-
ture." American Documentation 6 (1955): 3 1-
32.
Brahmi, Frances A. "Reference Use of Science Cita-
tion Index." Medical Reference Services Quar-
terly 4 (Spring, 1985): 31-38.
Cawkell, Anthony E. "Science Perceived Through
the Science Citation Index," Endeavour 1 (1 977):
57-62.
—. "Search Strategies Using the Science Cita-
tion Index." In Computer Based Information
Retrieval Systems , edited by Bernard Houghton.
London: Clive BingleyLtd., 1968.
Garfield, Eugene. "Citation Analysis As a Tool for
Journal Evaluation." Science 1 78 (November 2,
1972); 471-79.
. "Citation Indexes for Science." Science 122
(July 15, 1955): 108-11.
■. "Citation Indexing for Studying Science."
Nature 221 (1970): 669-71.
. Citation Indexing: Its Theory and Applica-
tion in Science, Technology, and Humanities.
New York: Wiley, 1979.
-. Essays of an Information Scientist. 8 Vols.
Philadelphia: ISI Press, 1977-1986.
. "How to Use the Science Citation Index."
Current Contents 9 (February 28, 1983): 5-14.
Reprinted annually in the Index Guide to the
Science Citation Index.
. "Is Citation Analysis a Legitimate Evalua-
tion Tool?" Scientometrtcs 1 (1979): 167-80.
"Permuterm Subject Index: An Autobio-
graphical Review." Journal of the American
Society for Information Science 27 (Septem-
ber, 1976): 288-91.
. "Science Citation Index: A New Dimension
in Indexing." Science 144 (May 8, 1964): 649-
54.
Herther, Nancy K. "Bringing Citation Indexes to
CD-ROM: An Interview withEugene Garfield."
Laserdisk Professional 2 (July, 1989): 25-32.
Huang, Theodore S. "Efficacy of Citation Indexing
in Reference Retrieval." Library Resources and
Technical Services 12 (1968): 415-34.
Lazerow, Samuel. "Institute for Scientific Informa-
tion." In Encyclopedia of Library and Informa-
tion Science, edited by Allen Kent. New York:
Marcell Dekker, 1974. Vol. 12: 89-97.
SCIENCE CITATION INDEX 241
"Librarian Turned Entrepreneur Makes Millions Off
Mere Footnotes." Science 202 (November 24,
1978): 853-57.
Malin, Morton V. "Science Citation Index: A New
Concept in Indexing." Library Trends 1 6 (Janu-
ary, 1968): 374-87.
Margolis, J. "Citation Indexing and Evaluation of
Scientific Papers." Science 155 (March 10,
1967): 1213-19.
Miller, Elizabeth, and Eugenia Truesdell. "Citation
Indexing: History and Applications." Drexe!
Library Quarterly 8 (April, 1972): 159-72.
Narin, Francis, and Mark P. Carpenter. "National
Publication and Citation Comparisons." Jour-
nal of the American Society for Information
Science 26 (1975): 80-93.
Poyer, Robert K.. "Journal Article Overlap Among
Index Medicus, Science Citation Index, Bio-
logical Abstracts, and Chemical Abstracts"
Bulletin of the Medical Library Association 72
(1984): 353-57.
Wade, Nicholas. "Citation Analysis: A New Tool for
Science Administrators." Science 188 (May 2,
1975): 429-32.
Weinstock, Melvin. "Citation Indexes.'* In Encyclo-
pedia of Library and Infvohrmatian Science,
edited by Allen Kent. New York: Marcel Dekker,
1974. Vol. 5: 16-40.
NOTES
1 "Librarian Turned Entrepreneur Makes Millions Off
Mere Footnotes," Science 202 (24 November 1 978):
853-57.
2 Eugene Garfield, "Citation Indexes for Science," Sci-
ence 122 (15 July 1955): 108-11.
'Eugene Garfield, "Significant Journals of Science,"
NaturelM (16 December 1976): 609-15.
4 Henry Small and Eugene Garfield, "The Geography and
Mapping of Science: Disciplinary and National
Mappings," Journal of Information Science 1 1
(1985): 147-59.
5 Eugene Garfield, "Is Citation Analysis a Legitimate
Evaluation Tool?" Scientometrics 1 (1979): 167—
80.
6 Nicholas Wade, "Citation Analysis: A New Tool for
Science Administrators," Science 188 (2 May 1975):
429-32.
7 Garfield, "Citation Indexes for Science," 109.
SI
w
m
"The Baby Figure of the Giant Mass":
Pollard & Redgrave's and Wing's
Short-Title Catalogues
Robert W. Melton
And in such Indexes (although small pricks
To their subsequent volumes) there is seen
The baby figure of the giant mass
Of things to come at large.
— Shakespeare, Troilus and
Cressida I, iii, 343-46
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Although the first bibliography examined in
this survey was not published until 1926, 1 its
roots go back at least to 1 884 and thus it might
be thought of, along with the Dictionary of
National Biography and the Oxford English
Dictionary, as one of the three great reference
works of Victorian Britain, together repre-
senting our attempts to record the history of
our individual achievements, our language,
and our printed legacy. Efforts to record the
bibliographic output of aparticular culture are
as old as libraries insofar as individual librar-
ies have attempted to acquire exhaustively all
culturally important publications and provide
public records of their holdings. However,
because of the scarcity of many publications —
whether due to short print runs, political or
religious suppression, natural or manmade
disasters — as well as the financial restrictions
on most libraries and the inevitable belief that
some types of publications are not worth ac-
quiring, no single repository, even those which
benefit from copyright deposit laws, can serve
as the basis for such a record.
The Justification for Short-Title
Catalogues
If it is necessary to first ask why an
enumerative or systematic bibliography of the
printed products of a culture is worth compil-
ing in the first place, perhaps the best and
simplest answer has been given by Roy B.
Stokes, who reminds us that "before books can
be studied, they must be known to exist." 2 This
principle is important not only for proving the
existence of a work which, as in the majority
of cases, appeared in only one edition. It is also
vitally important for textual scholars and com-
pilers of critical editions, whose goal is the
determination or reconstruction of the text of
a frequently published work to a state as close
to its author's original (or final) intentions as
possible. (Such work, of course, involves the
study of all extant manuscripts as well as
printed editions.)
A bibliography may be devoted to the
works of aparticular writer, group of writers,
or organization; to imprints of a particular
press or printer or to those from a particular
geographical entity; to works in a particular
genre; to works intended or appropriate for a
particular reader group; or to works on a
particular subject. Although Stokes believes a
bibliography must always strive for complete-
ness within its chosen parameters, in the last
three cases completeness becomes problem-
atical as issues of definition are involved.
Therefore, any of these may be, and often are,
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 243
further limited by chronology or language in
an effort to increase the chances of complete-
ness within the chosen parameters, increase
its effectiveness for the desired users, or sim-
ply make its compilation realistically manage-
able. Chronological limits may be arbitrary or
may be determined by historical events within
either the publishing trade orthe greaterpoliti-
cal or cultural environment. The bibliogra-
phies discussed in this survey are based prima-
rily on language and date of publication but
otherwise are intended to be comprehensive in
coverage.
Efforts to record the printed output of
England and its political or linguistic colonies
regardless of subject, author, printer, or city of
publication began in earnest with the publica-
tion in 1884 — the same year as the first fas-
cicle of the Oxford English Dictionary — of a
three-volume Catalogue of Books in the Li-
brary of the British Museum Printed in En-
gland, Scotland and Ireland and of English
Books Printed Abroad, to the Year 1640 (Lon-
don: The Museum), principally compiled by
George Bullen, the Library'skeeper of printed
books, and containing some 13,600 entries. 3 A
more detailed description of the Library's
incunabula — most of which are not British
imprints — was planned and begun toward the
endof the century by R.G.C. Proctor and A.W.
Pollard and, after the former's untimely death
in the Alps in 1903, was Pollard's main re-
sponsibility in the Library's Department of
Printed Books, which he had joined in 1883,
for the next ten years. Entitled A Catalogue of
Books Printed in theXVlh Century Now in the
British Museum (London: The Museum), the
first volume was published in 1908.'' Four
hundred and thirty-one specifically English
incunabula located in a variety of British and
American collections were cataloged by E.
Gordon Duff in Fifteenth Century Books: A
Bibliography of Books and Documents Printed
in England and of Books for the English Mar-
fe?Pn>tte^&roa<i(London:TheBibliographi-
cal Society, 1917), for which Pollard wrote the
preface. Pollard, Duff, Proctor, W,W, Greg,
and other members of the Bibliographical
Society had also published, between 1895 and
1913, Hand-lists of English Printers, 1501-
1556.'
Origins of the STC
These various efforts led Pollard to write
a paper in early 1918 for the Bibliographical
Society, of which he had been honorary secre-
tary since a year after its founding in 1892, in
which he suggested that it was now possible to
attempt to compile a "short-title handlist" of
all extant English books from the close of the
fifteenth century through the year 1 640, 6 The
Society's vice-president, G.R. Redgrave,
agreed to collaborate with Pollard in such an
undertaking and to personally assist in its
financing. At its meeting on April 22, 1918,
the Society's Council passed a resolution ac-
cepting Redgrave's offer and agreed to pub-
lish such a catalog as soon as possible after its
completion. 7 Pollard presented another paper
outlining his proposal in more detail at the
January 1919 annual meeting, and by this time
he proposed to extend the date of coverage
back to the year 1475, thereby adding Duffs
coverage and using the same chronological
parameters as the 1 884 BM catalog, the Cam-
bridge catalog of 1475-1 640 books compiled
by Charles Sayle, and Edward Arber's tran-
script of the Stationers' Company registers.
(The terminus ad quern in all of these catalogs
was chosen not so much for the historical fact
of the Civil War itself as for the known exist-
ence of some 26,000 political and religious
tracts printed during the 1640s and 1650s.
Collected by the London publisher/bookseller
George Thomason, the inclusion of these tracts,
as it turned out, would have doubled the size
of the project. 8 ) The announcement of this
enterprise was met with various offers of
assistance, perhaps most importantly from the
Bodleian Library at Oxford but also from
other university libraries and private collec-
tors in Great Britain, from such private re-
search libraries as the Huntington, 9 and from
the eminent antiquarian book firm of Bernard
Quaritch. From the start, what would ulti-
244 mSTTNfiUlSHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
mately be published as A Short-Title Cata-
logue of Booh Printed in England, Scotland,
& Ireland and of English Books Printed
Abroad, 1475-164Q 10 was, like the DNB and
the OED, very much a group effort.
A. W. Pollard and G. Ft. Redgrave
The backgrounds and qualifications Pol-
lard and Redgrave brought to the project dif-
fered considerably. In addition to his work in
the Department of Printed Books, Alfred Wil-
liam Pollard (1859-1944) 11 published an edi-
tion of Chaucer in 1898 that was the most
scholarly to date. Furthermore, he had been
publishing articles on various bibliographical
subjects for at least ten years before that and
on fifteenth-century history andliterature since
1876. But it was his pioneering work on the
problems of Shakespeare's texts, particularly
his Shakespeare Folios and Quartos of 1909
(London: Methuen), which secured his repu-
tation as a literary and textual scholar. In the
words of the eminent bibliographer W.W.
Greg, this book was "by far the most system-
atic and critical work that had yet appeared on
the subject and one that marked the opening of
a new era in Shakespeare studies." 12 His in-
vestigations were continued in the 1915
Sandars Lectures in Bibliography at Cam-
bridge, published two years later as
Shakespeare's Fight with the Pirates and the
Problem of the Transmission of his Text (Lon-
don: A Moring), which fellow Shakespearean
J. Dover Wilson called "at once sober and
brilliant." 13 It was also Wilson who referred to
the Bibliographical Society as Pollard ' s "brain-
child." 14 Pollard also cared for his brain-child,
serving as editor of its Transactions (later The
Library) from 1900 until 1934.
Gilbert Richard Redgrave (1844-1941),
on the other hand, although likewise a found-
ing member of the Bibliographical Society,
was an amateur in things bibliographical. His
principal activities and interests were in the
fields of engineering, architecture, and art
history; he was a minor watercolorist whose
works exhibit a pre-Raphaelite influence. 15
Son of the more famous genre and landscape
artist and art historian Richard Redgrave, his
first publication was a compilation of his
father's writings and addresses, published in
1876 as Manual of Design (London: Chapman
& Hall). This was followed 15 years later by
a monograph on the artists David Cox and
Peter De Wint (London: Sampson Low; New
York: Scribner's, 1891) and the following
year by the still useful A History of Water-
ColourPaintinginEngland '(London: Sampson
Low; New York: Scribner's, 1892). The first
of several editions of Calcareous Cements:
Their Nature and Uses (London: C. Griffin)
was published in 1895, and his coeditedbook-
let Deterioration of Structures of Timber,
Metal, and Concrete Exposed to the Action of
Sea- Water (London: H.M. S .O .) was published
for the Institution of Civil Engineers in 1926,
the year STC was in press. As a young teen,
Redgrave assisted in the design and construc-
tion of Royal Albert Hall and wrote its opening
celebration's program. In 1878, he was archi-
tect to the Royal Commissioners of the Paris
Exhibition and was awarded Officer of the
Legion of Honour. In 1 88 1 , he began a career
in educational supervision, first as secretary
of the Royal Commission on Technical Insti-
tutes; from 1884 until 1897 as an inspector of
schools, including the National Art Training
School, under the Department of Sciences and
Art; as chief senior inspector of technical
schools under the Board of Education from
1897; and as assistant secretary to the Board
from 1900. He presented several papers to the
Bibliographical Society, of which he was presi-
dent in 1908; at least four of these were
published. The first, read in 1 893, treated a
fifteenth-century printer and was published as
ErhardRatdoltandHis Work at Venice (Lon-
don: The Bibliographical Society, 1 894). Oth-
ers, presented in 1895, 1896, and 1910, were
subsequently published in the Society's Trans-
actions. He was also a frequent contributor to
the Times Engineering Supplement. He died in
June 1941 at the age of 97.
Although STC is often referred to as "Pol-
lard & Redgrave" and Redgrave's name is
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 245
given equal prominence on the title page, the
work was Pollard's brain-child from the start.
According to Wilson, "it was generally recog-
nized at the time, and should be made clear to
posterity, that he was in more than formal
sense editor-in-chief from the outset, and dur-
ing the final stages himself shouldered the
bulk of the work involved." 16 As the anony-
mous reviewer for the Times Literary Supple-
ment more subtly put it, "it is not the least part
of Mr. Pollard's achievement that, performing
nobly, he has been the cause of noble perfor-
mance in others." 17 Redgrave's noble perfor-
mance was mostly his financial support for the
project. In a letter to Pollard dated February
14,1918, Redgrave offered 600 pounds for the
project along with half his time for editorial
work or general supervision and the use of his
suburban London home as project headquar-
ters. The exact nature or extent of Redgrave's
editorial work is difficult to determine.
Redgrave's involvement with STC is barely
mentioned in his Times obituary, 18 and his
name occurs only once in the preface to the
second edition. No entry for Redgrave ap-
peared in DNB.
Creating the STC
Once his project received the official bless-
ing of the Society, Pollard set out in the highly
methodical way of a trained bibliographer.
Having for almost 20 years compiled slips for
1475-1640 English books in the Museum's
Department of Printed Books, he proposed a
system using cards of different colors for the
holdings in the Bodleian, Cambridge, Rylands,
and other libraries. (The pre-computer neces-
sity of creating handwritten cards is one very
practical reason why bibliographies of this
scope have used "short-titles.") Progress was
further slowed by other factors, including
Pollard's promotion in 1919 to the keepership
of printed books at a time of "great adminis-
trative difficulty" in the Library 19 and the
deterioration of Redgrave's vision. The addi-
tion to the effort in 1922 of G.F. Barwick, who
had been Pollard's immediate predecessor in
the keepership, wasamajor factor inits comple-
tion by 1924, as no doubt also were Pollard's
"forthright style" and "alacrity in tackling
new duties." 20 It was another two years in
press and final revision. 21
STC — the acronym received immediate
currency — is, like the 1884 BM catalog andas
its own not-so-short title makes clear, an at-
tempt to list all works printed from the begin-
ning of printing in England in 1475 through
the year 1640 in the English language regard-
less of the place of printing, as well as all
works printed in England, Scotland, Wales,
and Ireland in any language, which had been
seen by one of the compilers. The final caveat
is important: works believed to have been
printed, or merely found in previous catalogs,
were excluded unless they had actually been
examined in one of 148 libraries or collections
in the U.K. or the U.S. A system of letter-
number abbreviations, or sigla, is used to
identify libraries which own each item, but
usually no more than three British and two
American locations are listed and usually no
more than one in the same city, although for
particularly rare items either of those rules
could be broken. (Reflecting the principally
literary interests of the Society 's members, the
rule was also frequently bent for plays and, as
the Times Literary SupplementTeviewztpvt it,
"other exciting literature," 22 regardless of rar-
ity.) In this sense, STC is neither a true union
catalog nor a census of copies; it may best be
thought of as a finding-list as well as an
enumerative bibliography. It should also be
stressed that although sufficient information
is (theoretically) presented to differentiate
variant editions and issues, STC is not a de-
scriptive bibliography such as Duffs catalog
of incunabula. In the words of Benjamin
Nangle, a compiler of a work of such scope as
STC "could not aspire to become an expert on
the bibliographical niceties of each individual
volume." 23 This would be particularly true of
a work as dependent as was STC on volunteers
of varying degrees of bibliographical training.
The "mixed character of its sources" in regard
to the degree of bibliographic detail given is
246 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
the basis of Pollard's admirably candid warn-
ing in the preface (p. vii) that the book remains
"a dangerous work for any one to handle
lazily, that is, without verification." After all,
the catalog was intended as a "preliminary
record of research, in preparation for a fall-
dress catalogue."
The word "books" has been avoided in the
discussion of STC for the reason that from the
beginning its compilers intended to record all
printed items within their scope. As a result,
STC contains references to extant broadsides,
ballads, proclamations, and other works of a
similar nature printed ononesheet. Books and
sheets of music are included. Although serials
as we think of them today, including newspa-
pers, did not develop until after the Restora-
tion in 1660, some publications of a serial
nature, such as almanacs, calendars and prog-
nostications, are included and listed together
chronologically, as are official publications of
the governments and ecclesiastical bodies of
England, Scotland, and Ireland. (Unofficial
works by a monarch or ecclesiastical official
are entered under the individual's name).
The rules governing entry were taken
from the 1 884 British Museum catalog, which
itself was derived from Anthony Panizzi's 9 1
rules, developed in the late 1 830s. Most works
are entered by author, including anonymous
and pseudonymous works if there is "any
general agreement as to the authorship" (p.
xi); otherwise, unattributed works are entered
by the first proper name in the title if there is
one or, if not, by the first substantive — a
practice widely criticizedand dropped in most
short-title catalogs compiled since. The sub-
jectivity inherent in deciding what constitutes
a "substantive" and the inconsistency in ap-
plying the rales, when multiplied by a dozen or
more contributors, resulted in some titles be-
ing "hidden" under entries by which few would
think to search. For example, "A solemne
contestation of diuerse Popes out of their own
canon law" (No. 20114) is entered under
"Popes," even though it is not really a proper
name and isn't the first substantive; "The
returne of the knight of the post from Hell,
with the Diuels aunswere" (No. 20905) is
entered under "return" even though Hell is a
proper name; and "The passion of our lord"
(No, 14557) is entered under the phrase "Jesus
Christ," even though he wasn't the author and
those words are not in the title as presented —
and there are no cross-references from either
"passion" or "lord." In numerous cases the
application of the rules results in anonymous
titles being entered under the last word: "A
wonderfull and most lamentable declaration
of the great hurt done inErfford," for example,
isenteredunder"Erfurt" (No. 10434), Variant
editions or issues of the same work, of which
there were many more than the editors had
anticipated, are listed chronologically. In all,
about 26,500 items are listed — almost double
the number in the 1 884 BM catalog — includ-
ing just one not published in Europe: No.
2738, the so-called Bay Psalm-Book, printed
by Stephen Day in Cambridge, Massachu-
setts, in 1640.
Impact of the STC
The publication of STC had immediate
impact, not only among scholars of Renais-
sance British history and literature but in li-
braries and, perhaps most of all, in the book
trade, where reference to an STC number in
dealers' catalogs better enabled prospective
buyers to know precisely what was being
offered for sale. It rapidly gained a reputation
as being "among bibliographical works ... in
a class by itself for its combination of authority
and range of use" 24 and has been called "with-
out apology ... the best national imprint
bibliography for any extended period of cov-
erage." 25 Many research libraries annotated
their copies of STC to indicate their own
holdings and used the results to attempt to
acquire desiderata, and several of those with
major holdings, including the Newberry and
the Huntington, published separate lists. A
union checklist of STC titles in some 110
American libraries, compiled by William W.
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 247
Bishop, was published in 1944 (revised and
updated in 1950) and other union checklists
were published for the college libraries at
Oxford and Cambridge. 26 Other bibliogra-
phers have compiled lists of particular exclu-
sions fromjSTC — for exampleM. A. Shaaber's
Checklist of Works of British Authors Printed
Abroad, in Languages Other Tlmn English, To
1641 (New York: Bibliographical Society of
America, 1975), which includes items such as
European editions of the Latin poems of John
Donne. Pollard himself hinted in the preface,
and further elaborated in a 1927 paper to the
Society, of his plans to rearrange the entries in
STC chronologically for, ashe said, "to get all
the books of a nation into as accurate chrono-
logical order as possible is one of the biggest
things that bibliography can do."" But this
projected Annals of English Printing was
crowded out by Pollard's many other endeav-
ors and was made problematical by the fact
that so many STC entries are either undated or
misdated. The frequently expressed need for
chronological arrangement of the titles in STC
was met in 1 99 1 when the final volume of the
second edition, including Philip R. Rider's
chronological index, was published.
Pollard and Redgrave hoped that within
ten years no more than 1 percent more works
or 20 percent more variant editions and issues
would be discovered. Bishop's checklist turned
up roughly 450 additional titles in American
libraries (many from the Folger) and this fact,
along with the scarcity of copies of STC by
1 945 , led to an attempt to produce an unautho-
rized American reissue of STC incorporating
these additions. News of this effort led the
Society to issue a swiftly organized reprint of
its own (Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1946), although it did not incorporate any
additions or corrections, and plans for the
American issue were dropped. An anony-
mous apologist for the Society, writing in the
Times Literary Supplement, confirmed that
revision of STC had been going on almost
since its appearance, "but it cannot be hurried:
and to incorporate any of it in unfinished state
was clearly out of the question." 28 The new
edition did not begin to appear for 30 more
years.
Pollard and Redgrave also stated in their
preface that they hoped that "at not too distant
a date a supplementary volume may be issued
which will make the information collected
more easily useful to students of the develop-
ment of English culture and of the history of
printing." In addition to the chronological
rearrangement already discussed, what they
had in mind was an index to the printers,
publishers, and booksellers of all works and
variants listed in the catalog, Such an index,
compiled by Paul G. Morrison, did not appear
until after the deaths of both the chief compil-
ers. 29 It has been superseded by the work of
Katharine Pantzer for the second edition of
STC.
Donald G. Wing
Although Pollard never intended to go
past the year 1640, the main negative com-
ments of STC's reviewers can be epitomized
by the TLS reviewer' s remark that "those of us
whose effective interest in English books,
whether as collector or as student, begins
rather later than 1640, are tempted to hope that
the enthusiasm of librarians and societies will
persevere, to lavish upon later ages a like
assiduity of record and discrimination." 30 Such
a society and a librarian did indeed heed this
call, this time on the North American side of
the Atlantic. During the late 1930s, several
American scholars had discussed the need to
form an organization devoted to the publica-
tion of "certain types of labor-saving books
. . . which so markedly facilitate the work of
research," 31 and in the summer of 1939 the
Index Society was founded in New York
City. 32 Despite the impending European war,
the Society was particularly impressed by the
submission to it of a manuscript by one of its
youngest members entitled "A Short-Title
Catalogue of Books, 1641-1700," which
Donald G. Wing, a member of the Yale Uni-
versity Library staff since 1928, had been
compiling since 1933. The Society made pub-
248 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Iication of atleast a part of his catalog by 1 941
its first priority. However, partly due to the
intrusion of war, partly for normal delays, the
first volume of Wing's continuation of STC
did not appear until 1945.
In later life, Wing would recall that when
his Yale class of 1926 were asked about their
aspirations, he could only respond that he
wanted to read second-handbook catalogs. 35
The fact that STC appeared within months of
his graduation was, of course, entirely coinci-
dental, but it may have given him the idea for
an obvious project for his catalog-reading,
library-delving, and bookshop-browsing,
which he undoubtedly continued as an affili-
ate student at Trinity College, Cambridge, in
1926-27 and while working toward amaster' s
degree from Harvard (1 928) and a Ph.D. from
Yale (1932), both in English literature. Two
events in the Yale Library, however — both
recounted in the preface to the first volume of
his catalog and again in a 1951 talk to the
Bibliographical Society of America 34 — were
primarily responsible for his undertaking. One
was Yale ' s purchase of the partially cataloged
collection of books about the city and colleges
of Oxford formed by a former Bodleian librar-
ian, Falconer Madan. 35 The 1641-1700 Ox-
ford imprints, Wing realized, could certainly
form the core of an STC extension. The second
was the Yale Library's own attempt to find
roughly 1,600 items then missing which were
listed in its first catalog of 1 742. Finding these
books was now difficult, since items hadrarely
been listed by author and often were under
such partial bibliographic descriptions as
"Smith's Sermons in Folio" or such totally
nonbibliographic descriptions as "a dirty Old
Testament." The need to do further inventory
of Yale's pre-1743 holdings and to create
bibliographic records for the Oxford books
not listed in Madan's catalog allowed Wing to
receive permission to create slips for a 1 641-
1700 extension of STC "on library time"—
i.e., while doing his stints at the reference
desk — but only if he could think of two other
good reasons for the efficacy of such a proj ect. 36
Unlike STC, Wing's extension— hereaf-
ter cited eponymously as "Wing" — was from
the start essentially a one-person undertaking.
He certainly received some help from other
libraries and private collectors, butthe straight-
ened economic conditions of the 1930s left
libraries with staffs too small to participate in
such ventures, and some private collectors
simply didn't want their ownership of scarce
books widely publicized. Wing himself ad-
mitted that "only a fool would undertake such
a project" 37 and some of the reviewers of the
finished catalog agreed, pointing out certain
"grave defects" and suggesting that "he would
have come nearer to perfection if he had
employed collaborators or had included at
least one British bibliographer." 38 In his de-
fense, others mentioned that, other than the
catalog of the Thomason tracts, check-lists of
early Scottish andDublin imprints, andEvans's
rather error-prone American Bibliography? 9
there were almost no previous guides to his
period, and that its books had been much less
studied than had those of the pre-Civil War
period. 40 Wing did, in fact, receive a
Guggenheim grant to work during the 1936-
37 year in British libraries — 40 in London
alone — and if this "heaviest year ' s work which
can be imagined" 41 was perhaps not enough to
offset the advantages of collaboration, there is
a greater, albeit still imperfect, consistency of
entry achieved by having a single compiler. In
fact, overall the reviews were positive, with
one reviewer calling it "a masterpiece of enu-
merative bibliography . . . destined to be one
of the most significant books ever published
for the study of English literature" 42 and the
Folger librarian, in a review of the first vol-
ume, concluding that despite its shortcomings
it is "a truly monumental work." 43
Wing's principles of inclusion, arrange-
ment, and description are much the same as in
STC, with the exception that due to their
proliferation and the challenges they pose to
bibliographic description, periodical publica-
tions were omitted. As Wing himself accu-
rately predicted, they would "need a separate
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 249
volume" — a task that furthermore "appeals to
me not at all." 4 ' 1 Although covering only 60
years, as opposed to the 1 66 of STC, Wing lists
almost 90,000 works or variants, over three
times the number in the earlier catalog; yet he
probably missed a greater percentage of ex-
tant titles for his period than Pollard and
Redgrave had for theirs. 45 (Among American
libraries whose significant holdings were not
checked were the Universities of California,
Michigan, and Minnesota.) The geographical
and language parameters are the same. In-
stead of an entirely numerical sequence, Wing
devised a letter-number system for identify-
ing each item (which generally met with posi-
tive comments), and a different set of all-letter
sigla for locations (which British reviewers
typically disliked). More radical departures
were his decisions that, in abbreviating, "the
opening words of every title have been re-
garded as sacred" with omissions always indi-
cated by ellipsis and that, in entering anony-
mous works, the first word not an article is
always used (Preface, p. viii). On the other
hand, his decision to "assume no responsibil-
ity for authority of attribution" led to his listing
some works under authors for whom there was
less than universal agreement. Wing also de-
clined, understandably, to try to identify the
printers of unsigned books or, more regretta-
bly, to differentiate between issues of a work
when their title-pages were identical. Nor did
he choose to identify the translators of trans-
lations into English, thus failing to identify the
North and Dry den translations of Plutarch's
Lives, for example. 46 Perhaps the greatest criti-
cism of Wing was the relative dearth of cross-
references. For example, works by Sir John
Borough are listed in two places, some under
"Borough" and others under "Burroughs."
Wing was not unaware that these were indeed
the same man, but he felt it to be unnecessary
to interfile or even cross-reference alternative
spellings of the same person's surname. 47 De-
liberately quoting the preface of STC in his
general introduction to Wing (p. v), Benjamin
Nangle, perhaps anticipating such criticisms,
emphasized that it is no less a "preliminary
step toward a 'full-dress catalogue"' than was
its predecessor and that "'those who use this
book as anything more than a finding-list must
be on their guard.*"
Wing's Influence
As with STC, Wing is not a census of
copies— it lists up to five British and five
American copies for the more common
works — and ultimately the most important
effect of Wing on librarians was the immedi-
ate skyrocketing in prices of the books which
it listed — or failed to list. This inflation was
caused not only by the stampede of libraries
and private collectors using Wing as a check-
listto identify desired works or editions absent
from their collections and, with more money
now in hand, to seek them out aggressively, 48
but even more from the fact that, working
alone, Wing failed to locate as many copies of
books as a collaborative team would have
done and thus made them appear to be scarcer
than they in fact were. Stanley Pargellis of the
Newberry estimated that almost half of the
22,000 items in the third volume alone are
listed in three libraries only. 49 Despite Wing' s
explicit warning to users and "to booksellers
in particular" (Preface, p. ix), the latter have
since its publication delighted in mentioning
"only two copies found by Wing," etc., and, as
Edwin E. Willoughby of the Folger has pointed
out, there are "many guileless and trusting
librarians who will actually believe them!" 50
Pargellis has humorously suggested that a
study of Wing's impact could be the basis for
an article entitled "The Contribution of Ameri-
can Librarians to English Booksellers," and
the longtime editor of AB Bookman 's Weekly
commented perhaps ironically in his obituary
of Wing that "antiquarian book dealers ... are
everlastingly in his debt." 51 Nevertheless, as a
vade mecum to both booksellers and collec-
tion development librarians, Wing remains
unsurpassed.
As with STC, publication of Wing led
several libraries to publish checklists of their
own holdings, among them Christ Church
250 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
College at Oxford (1956), compiled by W.G.
Hiscock, and the Library Company of Phila-
delphia (1959), compiled by Edwin Wolf,
2nd; 52 and once again Paul G. Morrison com-
piled an index of the printers, publishers, and
booksellers (Charlottesville: University of
Virginia Press, 1 955). Neither STC nor Wing
provides subject access or arrangement, but
several projects have been undertaken which
use one or both of them as the basis of more
specialized checklists; among the more inter-
esting and recent of these is Hilda L. Smith and
Susan Cardinale's Women and the Literature
of the Seventeenth Century: An Annotated
Bibliography Based on Wing's "Short-title
Catalogue" (New York: Greenwood Press,
1990), which lists both the works in Wing by
women and those either for or about women.
It also appends a list of the women printers,
publishers, and booksellers.
Revision of the Catalogues
Revisions of both STC and Wing were
begun as soon as, if not before, their first
editions appeared, and the reader is referred to
the respective prefaces of "New STC*' (here-
after referred to as STC2) and "New Wing" for
a more detailed history of those efforts than
can be related here. Pollard' s 1 927 address to
the Bibliographical Society, already cited,
noted some omissions already discovered and
called for librarians and booksellers alike to
notify him of both corrections and additions.
In 1934, however, Pollard resigned the secre-
taryship of the Society and a year later suf-
fered an accident which left him unable to
perform much mental work. Meanwhile, a
young American student, William A. Jackson,
21 at the time STC appeared, had acquired a
copy upon its publication and immediately set
out to annotate and interleave it with correc-
tions and additions. Long before Pollard's
death in 1944 it was apparent that in Jackson
the primary instigator of a revised STC had
been identified. Jackson was well suited for
the job, having been a cataloger since his
undergraduate days, first at Williams College's
recently founded Chapin Library (1924-30)
and from 1930 until 1938 at the Carl H.
Pforzheimer Library. At the latter he was co-
compiler of the Library's three-volume cata-
log of books and manuscripts of English litera-
ture, 1475-1700 (New York: Morrill Press,
1940). In 1938 he joined the staff of the
Harvard College Library, becoming the first
Librarian of Houghton Library in 1956.
Unlike Wing, Jackson saw the need for a
British collaborator; an obvious choice was
F.S. Ferguson, the Quaritch employee (from
1928-1943, general manager) who had ar-
ranged for that firm' s assistance in the compi-
lation and publication of the 1926 edition and
who, according to Pollard's preface (p. vii),
was "largely responsible for any bibliographi-
cal polish which the catalogue possesses."
Soon after the war ended, their efforts came
under official sponsorship of the Bibliographi-
cal Society, and in 1948, the year Jackson's
two-year term as president of the Bibliographi-
cal Society of America ended, their project
was further cemented when Harvard provided
an open-ended grant for Jackson' s research. It
received the official blessing of Pollard's suc-
cessor (both as keeper of printed books at the
British Library and, eventually, honorary sec-
retary of the Bibliographical Society), F.C.
Francis, who gave Jackson Pollard's own an-
notated copy of STC. Jackson's grant allowed
for help from a succession of research assis-
tants. Upon his sudden death in October 1 964,
and Ferguson's in 1967, the work fell to
Katharine F. Pantzer, who had taken Jackson' s
bibliography course at Harvard in 1962 and
who had been hired later that year to begin
work on the second half of the alphabet. 53 As
time drew on, it became clear to Pantzer that
much of the work on the early alphabet begun
by Jackson, Ferguson, and Jackson's earliest
assistants was already in need of further revi-
sion, and a decision was made to publish STC2
in two volumes, with the volume covering I
through Z to appear first. It was published in
1976, with a brief preface; A through H, with
a more extensive introduction, appeared in
1986. Jackson and, later, Pantzer were im-
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 251
measurably helped by Lars Hanson and his
successor Paul Morgan of the Bodleian Li-
brary of Oxford, which served as the British
center for the revision.
Pollard' s hope that the original STC would
omit no more than 10 percent of all titles and
20 percent of variant editions and issues turned
out to have been overly optimistic. Roughly
10,000 new entries have been added to the
more than 26,000 in the 1926 edition. This is
partly, but not primarily, due to STC2 , s inclu-
sion of all items bearing printed matter, such
as bookplates, blank forms, and engraved
items; otherwise the scope remains the same,
While the number of newly discovered books
was not very large (although no fewer than 46
new editions of Lily's Grammar are listed),
the number of ballads, broadsides, and other
ephemera not turned up by Pollard and his
assistants is significant. (Pollard himself, in
his 1927 address, predicted that it would be
"later editions and the pamphlets of news
which will receive most additions from fur-
ther research." 54 ) Much of the increase is due
to the expansion of the number of contributing
libraries from 150 to almost 500, but an addi-
tional factor is the STC2 editors' decision to
examine and record longer portions of titles,
thus catching variants which escaped the ad-
mittedly "drastic abridgement" of titles after
the opening words employed by Pollard 8c
Redgrave. (Extending the title also helps ex-
plain anomalies of entry. "The passion of our
lord" being entered under Jesus Christ is per-
fectly understandable in STC2, where a fuller
title — "The passion of owr lord iesu christe
wythe the contemplatios" — has been tran-
scribed.) The editors also decided to retain
listings for some no longer extant works, in-
eluding several unique titles tragically de-
stroyed by the Nazi air raids on London.
Because so many bibliographies, book deal-
ers, and libraries had already adopted STC
numbers when referring to books within its
scope, the same numbering system was used,
with decimal numbers added for new titles or
variants and cross-references provided from
the old number to the new if an item has been
re-attributed or differently entered. A particu-
lar strength of the new edition is the greatly
expanded number of entries under corporate
headings, such as "Bible," "Liturgy," "Indul-
gences" (an entirely new heading), "England,"
and"London."Despitethethree-foldincrease
in the number of contributing libraries, sym-
bols are usually provided for no more than five
known locations on each side of the Atlantic.
Of equal benefit and importance to the
number of new entries is the greater precision
of bibliographical description in virtually ev-
ery citation, not only from closer observation
of information in the items themselves but also
from taking advantage of the considerable
amount of bibliographical research whichhad
appeared between 1926 and 1976 in such
areas as type design and size, paper, ornamen-
tation, printing techniques, and the locations
and longevity of individual printers. For ex-
ample, the same "Passion of our lord" was
thought, in the 1926 edition, to have been
printed by the London printer Richard Pynson
in 1 508 . Further research and the examination
of more copies leads STC2 to identify it as a
translation from French, probably printed in
Paris by A. Verard, Four additional copies,
some fragmentary, are located, the date has
been called into question, the collation made
more precise, and a note has been added to
consult Edward Hodnett's English Woodcuts
1 4 '80-1 535 (rpt. Oxford: Oxford University
Press, 1973) as a source for its probable Con-
tinental printing. It is this level of research
which makes STC2, in one reviewer's words,
a "thoroughly trustworthy bibliography ... a
much greater tool for the investigation of the
early booktrade in England . . . [and] a catalyst
for new research in a wide range of literary
and historical studies." 55 Perhaps thebeststate-
ment ofSTC2 ' s merits was made by the anony-
mous reviewer in a lead article in the Winter
1986 issue of The Book Collector, who con-
cluded that
no body of information on the printed produce
of any country, or the works in its language
produced outside its geographicalboundaries,
has ever been examined in such detail, re-
252 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
corded with such punctual care, organized in
such an exhaustively comprehensive system,
or (finally and most important) presented with
such patent love and enthusiasm, as that now
bestowed on British books and books in En-
glish, in that seminal first 165 years of their
existence in print." 56
And in Pantzer, he continued, we have "the
most learned and indefatigable andincontest-
ably the best scholar of the field it has ever
known." 57
Both Pantzer's indefatigability and the
immense debt of all scholars of early English
printing were further demonstrated by the
appearance in 1991 of long-awaited printer,
publisher, chronological, and other useful in-
dexes as well as further addenda and corrigenda
in the third and final volume of STC2. Printers
and publishers are arranged alphabetically in
the first index, and geographically in the sec-
ond (non-London) and third (London); the
latter is supplemented by a map and other
useful material on the organization of the
London booktrade. Pantzer's material is fur-
ther supplemented by Philip R. Rider's chro-
nological index of all STC2 titles, With the
completion of STC2, it is safe to conclude that
Great Britain and Ireland have a more accu-
rate and comprehensive account of their early
printed literature than does any other country.
Wing, only 41 when the first volume of his
catalog appeared in 1945, had already begun
to collect additions and corrections toward a
second edition. Most of the work had to be
done while carrying out his duties in the Yale
Library (where he was ultimately promoted to
Associate Librarian for Collections), although
in 1967 he received a sabbatical — the first
given by Yale to a librarian — to help complete
the research. An intermediary step toward the
second edition was the publication in 1967 of
A Gallery of Ghosts (New York: The Index
Committee of the Modern Language Associa-
tion of America), in which Wing listed the
titles of about 5,000 works which he had some
reason to believe might exist but which had
failed to materialize during his research to that
time. Hoping that at least 10 percent of these
could be definitively identified either as errors
or as legitimate new entries for inclusion in the
second edition, Wing was surprised to be able
to confirm 700 as extant, legitimate variants
and another 675 as ghosts before the first
volume of the second edition appeared in
1 972. As late as January 1 968, he believed that
the second edition would consist mostly of
quantities of new locations, corrected or fuller
imprints for some entries, and "nearly a thou-
sand new entries." 58 Yet by 1972, as James M.
Osborn's "General Introduction" to "New
Wing" pointed out, a thousand entries had
been added in the letter A alone. (The system
of re-numbering with each letter of the alpha-
bet and the fact that many numbered entries
are either cross-references or have been can-
celed make it difficult to determine the exact
number of imprints finally included. Osburn
refers to 120,000 publications, roughly 40
percent more than were in the first edition, but
more may have turned up before the final
volume appeared in 1988.)
Although Wing graciously thanked sev-
eral of his chief collaborators in the 1968 BS A
address, and although at the end of the "Pref-
ace to the Revised Edition" he acknowledged
more than 300 persons who sent him additions
and corrections, the "New Wing" — particu-
larly the first volume, which appeared less
than three weeks before his death — remains
very much the work of one man. Many, pub-
licly or privately, have questioned whether,
given the criticisms of the first edition and
Wing's deteriorating health for several years
before his death, it was altogether wise not to
have formed an advisory board of expert users
of the first edition to assist in both the biblio-
graphical description and the editorial deci-
sions of the second. Instead, Wing's some-
what proprietary attitude 59 toward his catalog
resulted in a second edition that differs from
the first primarily in the quantity of citations
and copies located and not in much editorial
re-thinking; thus, although more cross-refer-
ences are provided, many of the criticisms of
the first edition remain valid of the second. In
particular, the second edition has been criti-
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 253
cized for not including enough of each work's
title either to help differentiate it from variants
of essentially the same work or to provide
readers with a reasonable idea of the work's
subject. 60 To be fair, however, to have done so
would have essentially abrogated the benefits
of ashort-tftte catalog. Furthermore, although
he attempted to retain the numbering system
of the first edition, inserting new entries by use
of letters after the number of the preceding
entry, about 8 percent of titles were assigned
numbers which had belonged to quite differ-
ent works in the first edition, creating a great
outcry since many previous catalogs, bibliog-
raphies, scholarly monographs, and the mi-
crofilm edition of books in Wing make refer-
ence to first edition numbers. At least one
bibliographical scholar has called this deci-
sion "disastrous," 61 and another commented
that it "shattered a bibliographical reference
system." 62 N. Carol Evans, who had access to
Wing's manuscript files for her own research,
reports that Wing "never had any use for" the
numbers, made very little reference to the first
edition in his work on the second, and would
have preferred to have completely renumbered
it 6J Professor Osborn, the chair of MLA's
Index Committee, which published the sec-
ond edition, promised that this practice would
be re-examined, and in the second and third
volumes, which appeared in 1982 and 1988,
the only re-assigned numbers from the first
edition are those which were for canceled
entries, and a complete list of these number
changes was printed in volume two . Work was
begun on a third edition of volume one even
before volume three was published. Although
the editors of volumes two and three, Timothy
J. Crist and John J. Morrison, respectively, did
admirable work in revising, much of the ma-
terial from Wing's notes regarding variant
editions and states was very rudimentary. The
ensuing degree of bibliographical precision,
although improved over the first edition, has
also received considerable criticism. Volume
two was particularly difficult to improve, since
it had to be re-edited from galleys left by Wing
at his death. (As D.F. McKenzie wrote, many
of the problems inherent in "New Wing" stem
from the fact that it was "trapped in an obsolete
technology. " 64 )In order to broaden the base of
expertise from which to make editorial deci-
sions, an Advisory Committee for the Wing
Revision Project, under the aegis of MLA's
Committee on Research Activities, was formed
in 1979.
Future Short-Title Catalogues
And what of future editions? The comple-
tion ofSTC2 in 1991 and "New Wing" in 1988
may well represent the last catalogs of their
kind to take the form of the traditional book.
Certainly, the planning and appearance of
their successor, the Eighteenth-Century Short-
Title Catalogue (ESTC), could not have been
realized without the development of computer
programs for the creation, manipulation, and
retrieval of machine-readable bibliographic
records and of the bibliographic utilities which
transmit them among virtually all Anglo-
American research libraries, A detailed ac-
count of the ESTC cannot be provided here,* 5
and in fact — despite its title — it is not a short-
title catalog. (Since electronically stored cata-
loging makes the issue of physical bulk moot,
complete title page transcription is an ideal
usually achieved in ESTC) Nevertheless, the
advent of ESTC has perhaps inevitably be-
come connected to the fate of future STC and
Wing revisions. Henry L. Snyder, the North
American coordinator of ESTC, headquar-
tered at the University of California, River-
side, has proposed that the ESTC database of
almost 200,000 records be used as the basis for
an "English Short-Title Catalogue." 66 The
entries in volume three of "New Wing" are
already in machine-readable form, asare those
in the ongoing revision of volume one, and
work is underway to convert records in vol-
ume two. Some 38,000 records generated by
the North American Imprints Proj ect based at
the American Antiquarian Society 67 are also
being convertedfromUSMARCtoUKMARC
format in order to make them compatible with
the^57C database. The major remaining ob-
254 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
$
stacle to a combined database of all English
books of the handprinted era 68 is the conver-
sion of STC2 records (which would be only
about 10 percent of the total). Snyder suggests
that the microfilm collection based on STC
could be used to examine title pages and bring
abbreviated STC2 entries up to the standards
oftheisSTC database. Agreater but not insur-
mountable hurdle would be creation of au-
thoritative headings, of which he estimates
there are 10,000 in STC2 and "New Wing"
combined which have not yet been provided
by other databases. Incorporation of subject
headings to many of the almost 400,000 com-
bined entries is a further possibility in the not-
too-distant future.
Perhaps the greatest advantage of a
computerized catalog from the compilers ' per-
spective is the fact that future additions and
corrections can be made, location symbols
added, and re-sequencing accomplished with
relative ease and at low cost. From the user's
point of view, the ability, already available in
ESTC, to retrieve in minutes lists of, for ex-
ample, all titles printed in Philadelphia in
1776, all seventeenth-century titles relating to
both women and music, or all eighteenth-
century editions of Shakespeare printed in
Dublin is a bibliographical capability never
dreamed of by Pollard, Wing, Jackson; or
even Pantzer when she first hired on in 1962.
Their indexes were truly "the baby figure of
the giantmass of things to come at large" — but
were, and will remain, giants in the field of
enumerative bibliography in their own right.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Pollard, A.W. and G.R. Redgrave, eds. Short-title
Catalogue of Books Printed in England, Scot-
land, & Ireland and of English Books Printed
Abroad. London: Printed by Arrangement with
the Bibliographical Society forBernard Quaritch,
Ltd., 1926. Reprinted. Oxford: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1 946.
. 2nd edition, revised and enlarged, begun by
William A. Jackson and F.S. Ferguson, com-
pleted by Katharine Pantzer, with a chronologi-
cal index by Philip R. Rider, 3 vols. London:
The Bibliographical Society, 1976-91.
Wing, Donald G. Short-Title Catalogue of Books
Printed in England, Scotland, Ireland, Wales,
and British AmericaandofEnglishBooks Printed
in Other Countries, 1641-1700. 3 vols. New
York: Printed for the Index Society by Colum-
bia University Press, 1945-51.
. 2nd ed., revised and enlarged, begun by
Donald G. Wing, continued by Timothy J. Crist,
John J. Morrison, and Carolyn W. Nelson. 3
vols. New York: Modern Language Association
of America, 1972-88.
. 3rd ed. of vol. 1. In progress.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Any study of STC and Wing must begin
with the prefaces, introductions, and other
front matter to each volume of each edition,
where much of the history of their conception
and evolution is told in more or less detail than
in this article. The majority of the items listed
below fall into one of three categories. The
first consists of reviews of the first or second
editions of STC and Wing (in some cases of
only one volume), which will provide the
interested reader with more detailed discus-
sion of both their strengths and faults than can
be given here. A variety of reviewers, includ-
ing scholars, librarians, and booksellers, is
represented. Additional reviews may be iden-
tified in the standard book review indexes and
in Index to Reviews of Bibliographical Publi-
cations: An International Annual. The re-
searcher should remember that some reviews
were published after the appearance of each
new volume of these catalogs. The second
category consists of biographical information
on the compilers, of which Wilson's portrait
of Pollard is by far the lengthiest. It, along with
the more concise entry hy Greg in DNB, the
obituary in the Times, andthetributeby Francis,
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 255
give some indication of the breadth of Pollard' s
activities. Cveljo's entry, on Wing is probably
the best summary of his career; the New York
Times obituary is short, andLiebert's article is
taken from his tribute at a memorial service for
Wing at Yale, Redgrave's obituary in the
Times is the only account of his life the author
has identified; there was no memoir of him in
the Bibliographical Society's organ, The Li-
brary, after his death, nor was there a DNB
entry. Some biographical data on Pantzer can
be found in Chernofsky . One item, rvrunby and
Evans, spans two categories and is really two
items under one title: Munby's contribution is
a memoir of Wing; Evans' a review of the first
volume of "New Wing." The third category
includes short articles of news about the cata-
logs which stop short of being reviews. Nei-
ther the catalogs which preceded STC and
Wing nor the separately published indexes,
addenda and corrigenda, or supplements to
them are cited below, but are cited in either the
text or the notes. Most of them are briefly
described in Eugene P. Sheeny' s Guide to
Reference Books, 10th ed, (Chicago: Ameri-
can Library Association, 1986) in the section
on British and American national and trade
bibliography.
[Barker, Nicolas?]. "STC." The Book Collector 35
(1986): 417-30.
Chernofsky, Jacob L. "New STCClimaxes a Century
of Scholarship "AB Bookman 's WeeklylS (No-
vember 10, 1986): 1872-77.
Clement, Richard W. Review of Vol. I of STC2. The
Sixteenth Century Journal 19 (1988): 520-21.
Cveljo, Katherine. "Wing, Donald Goddard (1904-
1972)." Dictionary of American Library Biog-
raphy, 564-66. Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlim-
ited, 1978.
*T)onaldWing,68,YaleLibrarian. , 'Afewyo>*Rm«s J
October 11, 1972, p. 46, col. 3.
"Dr. A.W. Pollard: An Eminent Bibliographer." The
Times, March 9, 1944, p. 7, col. 5.
"English Books to 1640." Times Literary Supple-
ment, no. 1314 (April 7, 1927): 247.
Francis, F.C. "A.W. Pollard, 1859-1944." The Li-
brary, 4th ser,, 25 (1945): 82-86.
Freeman, Arthur. Review of Vol. I of STC2, The
Library, 6th ser., 9 (1987): 289-92.
Greg, W. W. "Pollard, Alfred William." Dictionary
of National Biography, 1941-1950. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1959: 681-82.
Hofmann, Theodore. Review of Vol. Ill of "New
Wing." The Library, 6th ser., 11 (1989): 383-
88.
Holzknecht, Karl J. Review of Wing. Papers of the
Bibliographical Society of America 46 (1952):
400-06.
Liebert, Herman W, "InMemoriamDonaldG. Wing."
The Yale University Library Gazette 47 (1972/
73): 134-36.
Malkin, Sol M. Untitled obituary of Donald Wing.
AB Bookman's Weekly 50 (October 16, 1972):
1204.
Mason, Alexandra, Reviewof vol. II of "New Wing."
Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America
80 (1986): 255-62.
McKenzie, D.F. "Type-bound Topography." Times
Literary Supplement no. 4159 (December 17,
1982): 1403.
McKitterick, David. "Changes for the Better?" The
Book Collector XI (1988): 461-78.
"Mr. G.R. Redgrave: Engineering, Art, and Educa-
tion." The Times, June 17, 1941, 9.
Munby, A. N. L., and N. Carol Evans. "Wing's
STC." The Book Collector 23 (1974) 388-93.
Pargellis, Stanley. Review of Wing. College & Re-
search Libraries 14 (1953): 98-99.
Pollard, A.W. "Future Work on the Short-Title Cata-
logue of English Books, 1475-1640." The Li-
brary, 4th sen, 8 (1927/28): 377-94.
"The Printing of Reference Books." Times Literary
Supplement no. 23097 (May 4, 1946): 216.
"The 'Short-Title' Catalogue." Times Literary
Supplement no. 2327 (September7, 1946):432.
"The Short-Title Catalogue, 1641-1700." Times Lit-
erary Supplement no. 2650 (November 14,
1952): 752.
Willoughby, Edwin Eliott. Review of Vol. I of Wing.
Library Quarterly 16 (1946): 247-50.
Wilson, J. Dover, "Alfred William Pollard, 1859-
1944." Proceedings of the British Academy 3 1
(1945): 257-305. Rpt. in Alfred William Pol-
lard: A Selection of His Essays, comp. Fred W.
Roper. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1976:
1-57.
Wing, Donald G, "The Making of the Short-Title
Catalogue, 1641-1700." Papers of the Biblio-
graphical Society of "America 45 (195 1): 59-69.
Wing, Donald G. "Wing on Wing." Yale University
Library Gazette 44 (1969/70): 1-7.
NOTES
1 Pollard and Redgrave's Short-Title Catalogue was. not
published until January 1927, but the imprint date
of 1926 will be used.
2 Roy B. Stokes, "Bibliography," in Encyclopedia of
LjbmryandInformationScienceQievjYQiik:}AaTc&l
Dekker, 1969), vol, 2: 407.
256 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
3 Edward Arber's A Transcript of the Registers of the
Company of Stationers of London, 1554-1640 (5
vols., London, etc.: Privately Printed, 1875-94; rpt.
6 vols., New York: P. Smith, 1950) had begun to
appear nine years earlier but is, as Sbeehy puts it,
"difficult to use and sometimes innacurate." It also
lists many titles which were never published, were
published differently, or of whichno known copies
are extant; and some of the manuscript registers,
particularly the Decrees and Ordinances, were de-
nied to Arber by the officers of the Company.
4 It was primarily this catalog which W. W. Greg credited
with transforming bibliography "from a study the
main interest of which was artistic to one governed
by methods of scientific enquiry." In "Bibliogra-
phy — A Retrospect," The Bibliographic Society,
1892-1942: Studies in Retrospect (London: The
Bibliographical Society, 1945): 27. Pollard himself
credits his work on this catalog for the "strenuous
mental discipline" which was so necessary for his
later project. Pollard and Proctor were also chiefly
responsible forthe descriptions of the printed books
in the three-volume Catalogue of the Manuscripts
and Early Printed Books . . . of the Library of J.
Pierpont Morgan (London: Chiswick Press, 1907).
'These appeared in four parts but were also published in
one volume under the title Hand-lists of Booh
Printed by London Printers, 1501-1556 (London:
Bibliographical Society, 1913).
6 The paper, which was entitled "Plans for B ibliographi-
cal Work on the Sixteenth Century," is summarized
in "Journal of the Twenty-Sixth Session: October,
1917, to March, 1918," Transactions of the Biblio-
graphical Society 15 (1920): 5-7. Due to the rather
serious stammer from which Pollard had suffered
since the age of three, the paper, like most he wrote,
was read for him by another member of the Society,
in this case, G.F. Barwick.
7 The resolution was passedat the April 1918 meeting but
was published, along with a summary of Pollard's
second paper of January 1919, some specimen
entries, and a call for volunteers, in the November
issue of the Society's News-Sheet, p. 3-4, and
reprinted in its "Journal of the Twenty-Seventh
Session, October, 1918, to March, 19 19," Transac-
tions of the Bibliographical Society IS (1920):
142^18.
8 The collection was bought from Thomason's heirs in
1761 by King George III, who presented it to the
newly formedBritish Museum, A two-volume cata-
log of the collection was published by the Museum
in 1908 and reprinted in four volumes in 1977 by
University Microfilms International to accompany
its publication of the collection on 256 reels of
microfilm.
9 Henry E. Huntington'sprivate collectionwasbequeathed
to the people of California and its building con-
structed soon after the STC project began.
"London: Printed by Arrangement with the Biblio-
graphical Society for Bernard Quaritch Ltd., 1926.
Eleven of the other contributors are listed on the
title page and their contributions explained in the
preface.
11 The best biographical sketch of Pollard remains the
lengthy obituary by J. Dover Wilson which ap-
peared in Proceedings of the British Academy 3 1
(1945): 257-306. Because of Wilson's own emi-
nence as a Shakespeare editor, it is to be expected
that the memoir shed more light on Pollard' s impor-
tance as a textual critic of Shakespeare and Chaucer
than it does on the compilation of STC. Wilson's
assertion that Pollard's Shakespeare Folios and
Quartos (1909) was the landmark beginning of
modern English textual criticism (p. 288) was sec-
onded by W. W. Greg, who has written that it also
"marked the opening of a new era in Shakespearean
studies" and that Pollard was the founder of the
science of critical bibliography ("The 'Hamlet'
Texts and Recent Work in Shakespeare Bibliogra-
phy," Modern Language Review 14 [1919]: 383).
Pollard's own autobiographical sketch of his first
50 years and a brief summary of his life "From Fifty
to Seventy-Five" by SirHenry Thomas were printed
inA Select Bibliography of the Writings of Alfred W.
Pollard (Oxford: Privately Printed, 1938), which
was presented to him by friends upon his seventy-
fifth birthday. See also Alfred William Pollard: A
Selection of His Essays, compiled by Fred W.
Roper, (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1976),
which also reprints Wilson's tribute (pp. 1-57) and
includes "Alfred William Pollard: His Influence on
Contemporary Bibliography" by Roger Leachman
(pp. 58-77).
12 Greg, "The 'Hamlet' Texts," 383,
"Wilson, "Pollard," 291.
14 Ibid., 284.
15 H.L. Mallalieu, Dictionary of British Watercolour
Artists Up to 1920 (Woodbridge, England: Antique
Collectors Club, 1976), vol. 1; 216.
16 Wilson, "Pollard," 299,
17 "English Books to 1640," Times Literary Supplement
no. 1314 (7 April 1927); 247.
18 "Mr. G.R. Redgrave: Engineering, Art, and Educa-
tion," The Times, 17 June 1941, 9e.
19 "Pollard, Alfred William," in Dictionary of National
Biography, 1941-1950 (Oxford: Oxford Univer-
sity Press, 1959): 682.
M These two qualities were noted by F.C. Francis in his
obituary of Pollard in The Library^ 4th ser., 25
(1945): 82.
21 As with most reference works of such magnitude,
editors invariably underestimate the time needed
for completion, The 1924 annual report of the
Society (in The Library, 4th ser., 5 [1 925]: 323-25)
notes that "Mr. Pollard is finding the final prepara-
tion of the copy and correction of the proofs .... a
much heavier task than he anticipated." Since at the
time he was editor of The Library, those words are
undoubtedly his own.
21 "English Books to 1640," 247.
23 Benjamin Nangle, "General Introduction," A Short-
Title Catalogue of Books Printed in England, Scot-
land, Ireland, Wales, and British America and of
English Books Printed in Other Countries, 1641-
1 700 (New York: Printed for the Index Society by
Columbia University Press, 1945-51), vol, 1: v.
POLLARD & REDGRAVE'S AND WING'S SHORT-TITLE CATALOGUES 257
""The 'Short-Title' Catalogue," Times Literary Supple-
ment no. 2327 (7 September, 1946): 432.
25 Arthur Freeman, review of volume 1 ofSTC2, in The
Library, 6th sen, 9 (September 1987): 289.
25 William Warner Bishop, A Checklist of American
Copies of "Short-Title Catalogue" Books, 2nd ed,
(Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1950).
Bishop's checklist was a byproduct of a project to
microfilm the title page, contents page, and colo-
phon of STC books for reference purposes and to
help make up for its lack of descriptive detail.
Details of the project are in his preface. The 1944
edition stimulated corrections and additions by
other American libraries, leading to the 1950 revi-
sion. The Oxford and Cambridge checklists were
compiled by Strickland and Gibson and Herbert M.
Adams, respectively.
27 A.W. Pollard, "Future Work on the Short-Title Cata-
logue of English Books, 1475-1640," TheLibrary,
4th ser., 8 (1927/28): 385. In addition to the future
plans for STC, this post-partum account gives more
detail about its organizational strategy and the
cooperative efforts involved in its development
than does the preface, including the statement (p.
378) that he owed the idea of a "united catalogue"
to Mr. H.R. Tedder, long-time librarian of the
Athenaeum Club.
28 "The Printing of Reference Books," Times Literary
Supplement no. 2309 (4 May 1946): 216.
29 Paul G. Morrison, Index of Printers, Publishers, and
Booksellers in A. W. Pollard and G.R. Redgrave, A
Short-Title Catalogue . . . (Charlottesville, VA.:
Bibliographical Society of the University of Vir-
ginia, 1950).
30 "English Books to 1640," 247.
31 Benjamin Nangle, "Preface," The Index of Middle
English Verse, ed. Carleton Brown and Russell
Hope Robbins (New York: Printed for The Index
Society by Columbia University Press, 1943), v.
32 In 1966 the Society became the Index Committee of the
Modern Language Association of America. Ac-
cording to Katherine Cveljo's entry on Donald
Wing in Dictionary of A merican Library Biography
(Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1978), his ex-
tension of 6TC netted the Society some $30,000,
which was used to support publication of other
bibliographies, including the second edition.
53 "Donald Wing, 68, Yale Librarian," The New York
Times, 1 1 October 1972, p. 46, col. 3.
M Published as "The Making of the Short-Title Cata-
logue, 1641-1 700" Papers of the Bibliographical
Society of America 45 (1951): 59-69.
35 Oxford Books: A Bibliography of Printed Works Relat-
ing to the University and City of Oxford or Printed
or Published There ... ,3 vols. (Oxford: Clarendon
Press, 1885-1912). The bibliography listed works
only through 1681, but his collection — and thus
Yale's — actually contained many titles published
after that date.
36 The reasons he came up with were creating a 1 ist of pre-
185 1 Connecticut imprints and flagging all tempo-
rary cards in Yale's card catalog which were ten
years old or older — "a sure-fire way to alienate the
affections of the maturer cataloguers," he discov-
ered (Wing, "Making of theSrC," 62).
37 Ibid., 59.
38 The anonymous reviewer in the Times Literary Supple-
ment no. 2650 (14 November 1952): 752. The 715
reviewer of the first volume (in the issue for 7
September 1 946, p. 432) had likewise tempered his
admiration of Wing's "immense, single-handed"
work with his "misgivings as to the limits of human
capacity for so herculean a task."
29 Catalogue of the Pamphlets, Books, Newspapers, and
Manuscripts Relating to the Civil War, the Com-
monwealth, and Restoration, Collected by George
Thomason, 1640-1661 . . „ 2vols. (London: British
Museum, 1908; rpt. 4 vols., Ann Arbor: University
Microfilms, 1977); Harry O. Aldis, List of Books
Printed in Scotland Before 1700 (Edinburgh:
Edinburgh Bibliographical Society, 1904); E. R.
McC. Dix, Catalogue of Early Dublin-Printed
Books, 1601-1700 (Dublin: T. G. O'Donoghue,
1898-1905).
^Hofroann, review of vol. 3 of New Wing, 384.
41 A. N. L, Munby, "Wing's STC," The Book Collector!!
(1974): 390.
42 Karl J. Holzknecht, review of Wing in Papers of the
Bibliographical Society of America 46 (1952): 400.
Ai Edwin Eliott Willoughby, review of Wing in Library
Quarterly 16 (1946): 250. Interestingly, no review
of the first edition of Wing ever appeared in the
Bibliographical Society's official organ, The Li-
brary.
"Wing, "Making of the STC," 63-64. Carolyn Nelson
and Matthew Seccom.be 's British Newspapers and
Periodicals 1 641-1 700: A Short-Title Catalogue of
Serials Printed in England, Scotland, Ireland and
British America (New York: Modern Language
Association, 1987) admirably describes each sepa-
rate extant issue of more than 700 periodicals. See
Michael Harris's review in The Library, 6thser„ 1 1
(1989): 378-83.
45 For example, John Alden, in "Pills and Publishing:
Some Notes on the English Book Trade, 1660-
1715," The Library, 5th ser., 7 (1952): 21-37,
which appeared after the final volume of Wing,
states (p. 22) that Wing includes only 16 of 64
printed items Alden found on the relation between
the book trade and the proprietary medical trade.
But six years later, in Wing Addenda and
Corrigenda: SomeNotesonMaterialsin the British
Museum (Charlottesville, VA,: Bibliographical
Societyof the University ofVirginia, 1958), Alden
concluded (p. 1), on the basis of a sampling of Wing
againsttheBritish Museum's holdings, thai Wing's
"hope for a margin of title omissions within twenty
per cent may not have been idle."
Ai Holzknecht, review of Wing, 40 1 .
41 N. Carol Evans, "Wing's STC," The Book Collector 23
(1974): 392.
^Hofmann notes (p. 384) that in particular the 1970
catalog of the Folger Library still has Wing books
listed on accessions slips on virtually every page of
its 28 volumes.
258 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
m
49 Stanley Pargellis, review of the first edition of Wing,
College & Research Libraries 14 (1953); 98-99.
50 WMoughby, review of Wing, 250.
51 Sol Malkin, obituary of Donald Wing, AB Bookman 's
Weekly, 50 (16 October 1972): 1204.
52 Wing himself provides citations for these and 20 other
checklists of pre- 1 701 books, mostof which use his
numbering, on p. ix of the preface to the revised
edition.
53 Some biographical information on Pantzer is available
in Jacob L, Chernofsky, "New STC Climaxes a
Century of Scholarship," AB Bookman 's Weekly ;
78 (10 November 1986): 1872-77. Of particular
interest is the fact that, 1 9 years after entering the
doctoral program in Harvard's English Depart-
ment, Pantzer successfully submitted the first vol-
ume of STC2 as her dissertation.
54 Pollard, "Future Work on the STC," 380.
"Richard W. Clement, review of STC2, The Sixteenth
Century Journal 19 (1988): 520-21.
J6 « STC » The 3ook Collector 35 (1986): 421-22. Al-
though unsigned, the reviewer is probably the
journal ' s editor, Nicholas Barker. The review makes
the excellent point that STC cannot be used as an
accurate view of either the English booktradeorthe
reading tastes of the public, particularly the cultural
elite, during the period covered since there were
several times more books both sold and read in
Latin, French, Italian, and Dutch than there were in
English.
57 Ibid, 429.
ss "Wing on Wing," The Yale University Library Gazette
44(1969-70): 2.
5 * In his personal life, too, Wing has been called an
"amiable loner" by a Yale colleague, Herbert W.
Liebert, in "In Memoriam Donald G. Wing," Yale
University Library Gazetted (1972-73): 134.
60 David McKitterick, in "Changes for the Better?" The
Book Collector 37 (1988): 463, provides several
examples: "A discovery of the education of the
schollars of Cambridge" is not as useful withoutits
subtitle, "By their abominations and wicked prac-
tises acted upon, and against, the despised people,
in scorn called Quakers."
61 Ibid., 461.
62 D. F. McKenzie, "Type-Bound Topography," Times
Literary Supplement no. 4159 (17December 1982):
1403.
63 Munby and Evans, "Wing's STC,"* 392.
64 McKenzie, "Type-Bound Topography," 1403.
65 The best source of information on ESTC is its own
occasional newsletter, Factotum (London: Refer-
ence Division, British Library, 1978- ). Two good
descriptions of the database itself are Daniel
Uchitelle's "RLIN in the Eighteenth Century: An
Introduction to the ESTC SpecialDatabase,"Z>afa-
base 7 (August 1984): 30-33, and David Hunter's
"Searching ESTC on RUN "Factotum Occasiojial
Paper 5 (1987). ESTC is searchable in the United
States through the RLIN database and in Great
Britain through BLAISE-LINE.
66 Slightly different printed versions of the proposal
Snyder made orally to the International Committee
on the ESTC in November 1987 were published in
The Library, 6th ser., 10 (1988): 191-93 and in
Papers of the Bibliographical Society of America
82 (1988): 333-36.
67 The project is essentially converting the pre- 180 1
American imprints in Evans and all of Marie
Tremain's A Bibliography of Canadian Imprints,
1 751-1800 (Toronto: University of Toronto Press,
1952) into MARC format.
68 The year 1800 is, conveniently, the approximate date
for the introduction of printing by machine. The
English language may not be the first to have a
comprehensive bibliography of its books to 1 800:
a Short-Title Catalog of the Netherlands (STCN)
should be substantially completed by the end of the
century. See J. A. Grays, et al., "Dutch National
Bibliography, 1540-1800: The STCN," Querendo
13(1983): 149-60.
Continuity in a Changing World:
Statesman y s Year-Book
David M. Pilachowski
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
The Statesman's Year-Book enjoys a well
earned reputation as a reference book that
deserves a place inmost libraries. The familiar
red 5" x VA" volumes have appeared like
clockwork each year since 1864. 1 Long a
staple of reference collections, the Year-Book
provides unbiased political, social, and eco-
nomic background on the countries of the
world. Besides giving accurate, up-to-date
information on individual countries and, more
recently, on international organizations,
Statesman 's Year- Book, through its longev-
ity, also provides broad historical coverage of
the evolution of the political world. At the
same time, the changes within and among
countries can also be studied by examination
of the Year-Book. Indeed, new volumes do not
supersede earlier ones since the newer occa-
sionally make reference to earlier editions. 2
It is difficult to argue with recently retired
editor John Paxton's statement that the Year-
Book "is found in most reference libraries of
the world. " J The Year-Bookenj oys the longest
reign of any annual handbook of countries
currently being published. At the same time,
praise of the work has been both uniform and
vocal. A 1 905 review sums it up well: "There
are some annuals that have made themselves
absolutely indispensable — not a large num-
ber, possibly half a dozen — and one of them is
The Statesman 3 s Year-Book. ... It has always
been good, it grows better each year: when
will its improvement cease* because further
betterment is impossible?" 4
Statesman's Year-Bookhas changed and
been improved over time, in part in order to
reflect political change and in part due to the
introduction of new features. Yet, one re-
markable aspect of the publication is the con-
tinuity that it has enjoyed. Beyond simple
longevity, Statesman 's Year-Book has been
published by one firm and its subsidiary, has
had but six editors, included one firm's maps
for over 90 years, and has been printed and
bound by but two firms since its inception. It
is this stability and the quality of these long
standing contributions that has helped set
Statesman 's Year-Book apart from other works
and has helped ensure its continued success.
Origins of the Year-Book
Macmillan and Company, founded by
Alexander and Daniel Macmillan in 1 843 , has
been the original and, with the inclusion of its
subsidiary St. Martin's Press, the only pub-
lisher of Statesman 's Year-Book. It seems
clear that Macmillan and Company has sup-
ported the Year-Bookiwm the outset and has
recognized the importance of editorial excel-
lence and continuity. Perhaps more amazing
than the fact that the Year-Book has had the
same publisher, is the longevity of its editors.
As noted above, the work has had but six
editors during its 125-plus years.
The original suggestion that led to the
creation of Statesman 's Year-Book has been
attributed to Sir Robert Peel. The preface to
the first Year-Book reported that "The
Statesman 's Year-Book is intended to supply
260 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
a want in English literature—a want noticed
and commented upon more than fifteen years
ago by the late Sir Robert Peel . , . he often felt
the want of a hand-book presenting in a com-
pact shape, a picture of the actual condition,
political and social, of the various states of the
civilized world." 5
Perhaps further discussion of the Peel
connection is tucked away somewhere in the
Macmillan archives. While there is no reason
to doubt that the original suggestion for
Statesman 's Year-Book came from Peel, this
fact is not mentioned in either Morgan's cen-
tennial history of Macmillan nor in the pub-
lished letters or biographies of Daniel or
Alexander Macmillan nor of Peel.
With the idea of such a handbook before
him, Alexander Macmillan, who directed the
firm after his brother's death in 1857, next
faced the task of identifying an editor for such
an ambitious enterprise. Here, the publisher
receivedadvicefromhistorianThomasCarlyle
and politician W.E. Gladstone, who intro-
duced and recommended Frederick Martin to
Alexander. 6 Martin was born in Geneva in
1830, educated in Heidelberg, and settled in
England. 7 He had been working since October
1856 as Carlyle's secretary and amanuensis, 8
In December 1862, Martin and Alexander
Macmillan entered into an agreement for "A
Statistical, Genealogical and Historical Ac-
count of the States and Sovereigns of the
Civilised World." 9
Editor Martin's Model
Former Statesman 's Year-Book editor
John Paxtonhas credited Martin with creating
much of the format and reputation that the
annual has enjoyed over the years. Paxton
lauded Martin for "build[ing] the foundations
of its reputation for accuracy, impartiality and
usefulness. Whatever changes The Statesman 's
Year-Book has undergone at the hands of his
successors, the basic features established by
Martin have been preserved." 10 The editor's
goal was to produce a work that "contains a
full account of all the states of Europe, and the
principal states of Asia, America, and
Australasia, considered under their political,
social and commercial aspects.'* 1 1
The format of the first edition consisted of
entries on each country divided into the fol-
lowing sections: Reigning Sovereign andFam-
ily, if applicable; Constitution and Govern-
ment; Church and Education; Revenue and
Expenditure; Army and Navy; Population;
and Trade and Commerce. These categories,
conceived in 1864, differ somewhat from
today's; but the intent and approach remains
the same: to present in narrative and statistical
form basic information about the countries of
the world. Selected colonies were also in-
cluded in the original edition of Statesman 's
Year-Booh The colonies of European coun-
tries were included in the accounts of their
respective imperial powers. India, Canada,
and the Australasian colonies of Great Britain
were treated separately while its lesser British
colonies were ignored.
In that first Year-Book, the countries of
the world were presented in two unequal sec-
tions. Parti, "The States of Europe," listed 16
countries and their dependencies and colonies
in 525 pages. One is reminded how different
the world was then, Sweden and Norway
existed as a personal union under one mon-
arch, with entirely separate governments . Fin-
land and Poland were under the control of
Russia, while Turkey was a major power,
controlling Egypt, Romania, and Serbia. Ger-
many alone received detailed treatment at the
level of individual States of Confederation in
an overall entry of nearly a hundred pages.
This level of detail may have resulted from
editor Martin's background and from the de-
centralized nature of Germany at that time.
The second part of the 1864 edition of
Statesman 's Year-Book, titled "Principal States
Not in Europe," consisted of 156 pages. This
section was divided into three subsections:
America (Argentine Republic, Brazil, Canada,
Chili, Confederate States, Mexico, and United
States); Asia (China, India, and Japan); and
STATESMAN'S YEAR-BOOK 26 1
Australasia (New South Wales, New Zealand,
Queensland, South Australia, Tasmania, and
Victoria). While the number of countries in-
cluded in that first edition was limited, that
was by design and would change in subse-
quent editions. Indeed, one of the few criti-
cisms heard about the early editions of
Statesman's Year-Book was the omission of
many countries. 12
Besides giving information about coun-
tries, editor Martin had other objectives in
mind for Statesman 's Year-Book. In the pref-
ace of the 1864 edition he stated:
It has been considered an object of paramount
importance to give only facts, and exclude
opinions from the Statesman 's Year-Booh No
form of government is criticised, or com-
pared, from a theoretical point of view, with
any other form of political organisation; and
no judgment is attempted on any of the thou-
sand features of activity by which the social
life of nations manifests itself." 13
John Paxton identified Martin's legacy as his
"dissociation from any party — political and
denominational considerations (and) his firm
resistance to pressure groups of any descrip-
tion." 14
A critical factor in gathering and present-
ing information on the countries included in
Statesman 's Year-Book was the source of the
data to be included in the work, Martin placed
a premium on the accuracy of his information,
stating that:
The great aim, kept in view throughout,' has
been to insure an absolute correctness of the
multiplicity of facts and figures given in the
Statesman 's Year-Book. For this purpose, none
but official documents have been consulted in
the first instance, and only where these failed,
or were manifestly imperfect, recourse has
been had to authoritative books, and influen-
tial newspapers, magazines, and other reliable
information. In all the latter cases, the source
i s given, so as to furnish a means for verifyi ng
the statement, as well as to present a guide for
further investigations. 15
"Official documents" were put aside by the
early 1 870s in favor of direct contact with the
authors and editors of those documents. Be-
ginning with Martin and continuing to the
present, editors have relied upon the people in
the "governments departments, embassies,
learned societies, (and) statistical offices" for
their information. 16 Yet Martin always re-
served the right of final decision in using
official sources, as he did in rejecting the
reported, expenses of the Tsarist court "as
ridiculously low in view of the boundless
pomp and splendour displayed on all occa-
sions." 17
Beyond the change in sources, the next
significant alteration of Statesman's Year-
Book was the increase in the number of coun-
tries covered. Within ten years of its original
edition, many new countries had been added.
Algeria, Liberia, Natal, and Morocco were
added from Africa and coverage of Asia ex-
panded to include Ceylon, Hong Kong, Java,
Persia, and Siam. By 1884, several additional
counties had been added, and Egypt, Serbia,
and Romania were given individual entries
separate from Turkey. 18
Difficulties During Martin's Tenure
Martin ' s tenure as editor, although lauded,
was not without its difficulties, for Martin's
dealings with the Macmillan firm were not
entirely smooth. He was critical of decisions
madeby his publisher and "He never ceased to
tell the Macmillans how to run their business
more profitably, what discounts to give to
wholesalers and retailers, or how to make The
Statesman's Year-Book pay." 19
Relations between the editor and his pub-
lisher were exacerbated in October 1882 dur-
ing the preparation of the 1883 edition of the
Year-Book. After rejecting Alexander Mac-
millan' s suggestion that he receive editorial
assistance, "Martin lost a large portion of his
revised proofs in a railway carriage." 20 Against
Martin's wishes, John Scott-Keltie 21 was en-
listed to assist the editor with the completion
of the 1883 edition. That edition would be the
founding editor's last, as he died on January
27, 1883. Scott-Keltie then succeeded to the
editorship. 22
^LBEII^^^O CLASSJCS OF REFERENCE PUHLlSHINli
/
John Scott-Keltie's Editorship
John Scott-Keltie was named the second
editor of Statesman's Year-Book in 1884 a
position that he held until his death in 1927.
Scott-Keltie, like the Macmillans a Scot, was
born m Dundee in 1840, Scott-Keltie was
educated at Perth, with university studies at St.
Andrews and Edinburgh. He later completed
his studies for the Presbyterian ministry al-
though his developing interest as a journalist
while a student persuaded him to follow that
career instead. 23
Scott-Keltie's first position in journalism
in 1861 was with W. & R. Chambers, where he
workedon Chambers 's Encyclopedia. In 1 871
he joined the editorial staff at Macmillan, with
an appointment as sub-editor for Nature in
1873.
Statesman 's Year-Book underwent sev-
eral significant changes during Scott-Keltie's
editorship. Maps were added as a standard
feature of the work beginning in 1892. Four
maps appeared in that volume: the density of
world population, the British Empire, the par-
tition of Africa, and the frontiers of the Pamirs
(north of Afghanistan). Scott-Keltie's inter-
ests made the addition of maps to the Year-
Book very appropriate. His DNB entry refers
to him as a geographer. Indeed, Scott-Keltie
edited the Royal Geographical Society's Pro-
ceedings > later renamed Geographical Jour-
nal? 4 He has been called the "architect and
builder" of that prestigious journal. 25 When
Scott-Keltie was awarded the Victoria Medal
of the Royal Geographical Society in 1917,
Society President Douglas Freshfield remarked
of Scott-Keltie that "He has madehimself, and
in doing so he has made the Society, a geo-
graphical center round which all good travel-
lers revolve. . . . His correspondence has
extended over the civilized world, and ... Dr.
Keltie has remained in the eyes of all men the
incarnation of British geography." 26 Among
Scott-Keltie's admirers was former United
States President Theodore Roosevelt. Roose-
velt felt indebted to the editor of Geographical
J 0H r«a/forhavingpublishedinthatperiodical
several maps from Brazilian explorations
which otherwise would have likely remained
unknown.' 7
Maps
The maps commissioned for Statesman 's
Year -Book were noteworthy on two counts.
First, they always dealt with a timely topic or
place. Forexamplc, the Panama Canal schemes
were included in the 1902 and 1911 editions,
the division of Bengal in 1905, the strategic
importance of Singapore in 1938, and the
Burma RoaJ in 1939. The number of maps
included in the annual volumes ranged from
four to ten until 1919, after which it stabilized
almost without exception at two.
Secondly, the maps were always beauti-
fully and accurately executed by John George
Bartholomew and his successors. John George
Bartholomew ( 1 860-1920) was the fourth gen-
eration of Bartholomews engaged in map-
making, Following his education at the Uni-
versity of Edinburgh, he began working with
his father in their family firm. He took over the
business at the age of 28 and named it "The
Edinburgh Geographical Institute. 1 ' 28 The
Bartholomew firm continued to produce the
maps incorporated in Statesman \s Year-Book
until the 1 984-85 edition at which time maps
were discontinued.
Changes in Organization and
Contents
Scott- Keltic's interest in geography helps
explain another major expansion of the Year-
Bouk, Rather than focus on Europe, as Martin
had done, Scott-Keltic's tenure as editor saw
Statesman \ Year-Book include every country
"that can be regarded as a state, however
rudimentary "^ Beginning in 1890, the ar-
rangement of states changed. The first part of
the work wan devoted to the British Empire
and the second to all other countries. In the
words of the centennial essay in the Year-
Book, "the mid-Victorian distinction between
'civilized' and uncivilized nations was shed." 30
\i
memm
STATESMAN'S YEAR-BOOK 263
Rather than being arranged by continent, as
had been done previously, the non-British
states were for the first time arranged alpha-
betically.
Another feature of Statesman 's Year-Book
given increased prominence by Scott-Keltie
was the information on navies. John Leyland
had reported on naval strength through 1 899.
With the 1900 edition, a name that would
become prominent in its own right in refer-
ence publishing, Fred T. Jane, appeared for
the first time in Statesman 's Year-Book.
John Frederick Thomas Jane 31 sketched
the naval bombardment of Alexandria at the
age of seventeen, reportedly placing his broth-
ers and sisters to depict the warships. 32 Jane
"wangledatrip onH.M.S.Northampton s which
was to take part in British fleet maneuvers" in
1 899." According to Janis Bolander, this voy-
age and others on Royal Navy ships "laid the
foundation for a knowledge of the navies of
the world that has seldom been equaled." 34
The first edition of Jane's All the World's
Fighting Ships was published in November
1897 (London: Sampson, Low, Marston, &
Company). Scott-Keltie's characterization of
Jane as "the well-known naval authority" in
his Statesman 's Year-Book preface in 1900
was certainly justified. Jane presented de-
tailed statistics on the number and types of
ships possessed and under construction by the
world's naval powers. The detail of informa-
tion presented by Jane is suggested by one of
the charts he prepared for the 1913 edition:
"Graphic Diagrams to Illustrate the Varying
Ratio between Weight of Heaviest Gun, its
Penetrative Power, and the Protection Af-
forded to Ships during the Last Fifty Years."
Coverage of the United States
The coverage of the United States in
Statesman 's Year-Bookv/as altered consider-
ably under Scott-Keltie. The Macmillan Com-
pany opened an office in New York City in
1896. Two years later, Frederick Macmillan
suggested to Scott-Keltie that additional space
and attention be devoted to the United States. 35
The first step in expanded coverage was the
issuance of an American edition of the Year-
Booh Instead of the roughly 40-page article
on the United States that had customarily
appeared, the 1899 American edition included
approximately 300 pages on the U.S. in a
section that preceded the regular Year-Book
text.
A second major expansion of the Ameri-
can section occurred in 1906, when each of the
then 46 states was given individual treatment.
Scott-Keltie explained:
In compliance with influential suggestions
from America, separate notices have been
introduced of the States comprised in the
American Union, on the same lines, as far as
practicable, as the section dealing with the
United States as a whole. In view of the fact
that these States are, in the main, quite as
important as the separate States of the German
Confederation, this step will be regarded as
justifiable. 36
The influential suggestions came in the form
of "a friendly hint" by the occupant of the
White House, Theodore Roosevelt. 37 Begin-
ning in 1906, the United States was given its
own numbered section in the Year-Book, Part
I in the American edition and Part II in the
British version.
While Scott-Keltie nominally remained
editor of Statesman 's Year-Bookmti\ his death
in 1927, Mortimer Epstein becamejoint editor
in 1919. Epstein formally became editor in
1927. This promotion was long overdue, for,
"from that time [i.e., 1919] onward [Scott-
Keltie] merely lent the lustre of his name to the
title-page, whereas all the actual work fell to
Epstein." 38
Mortimer Epstein
Mortimer Epstein was born in Lithuania
in 1880 and came to England and settled in
Manchester in about 1885. Epstein received
his B.A. and M.A. degrees in history and
economics at Owen's College in the Univer-
sity of Manchester. He received his Ph.D.
264 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
from Heidelberg in 1908. 39 Epstein was by all
accounts a hard worker, a necessary trait for
anyone in charge of Statesman's Year-Book
beginning in 1 919 and of the Annual Register
beginning in 1921. Besides being vigorous,
Epstein was an organized person. One of his
lasting legacies toStatesman 's Year-Bookvf&s
his development of a regular team of editorial
assistants who remained loyal to the publica-
tion for decades. 40
The major changes in Statesman's Year-
Book during Epstein's years as editor mir-
rored the changes in the world. Increased
attention was given to transportation, commu-
nications, and civilian aviation. These changes
also were in keeping with Epstein's descrip-
tion of himself "as a great believer in the
participation of university men inbusiness." 41
In 1938 as the age of empire drew to a
close with the approach of the Second World
War, Epstein changed the section title for
Great Britain and related countries and pos-
sessions from "British Empire" to "British
Commonwealth of Nations." The arrange-
ment within the section remained very struc-
tured, however, with the countries in the em-
pire listed first, followed by the independent
countries or dominions.
In the 1946 edition of the Year-Book,
which would be his last, Epstein included
information about the newly formed United
Nations, the International Court of Justice,
and the International Labour Organization.
This information was included in an introduc-
tory table at the beginning of the volume. No
doubt Epstein did not know how else to handle
the international organizations since there was
no precedent for such material.
For several reasons, 1946 was a water-
shed year for Statesman's Year-Book,
Mortimer Epstein, its third editor, died on June
23, 1946. Furthermore, the official sources
and contacts upon which the Year-Bookrelkd
for accurate data had been disrupted by the
Second World War. Finally, the world was a
far different place politically after the war
concluded, and this necessitatedmajor changes
in the Year-Book
Sigrid Henry Steinberg
The fourth editor of Statesman Year-Book,
Sigrid Henry Steinberg, was a match for the
task before him. Steinberg was born on Au-
gust 3, 1899, in Goslar, Germany. He studied
at the University of Munich and the University
of Leipzig before receiving his Ph.D. in his-
tory from the University of London in 1 922. 42
Steinberg, an exile from Nazi Germany, came
to England in the mid- 1930s. 43 He was a
voluminous author whose works included Five
Hundred Years of Printing, and he also served
as assistant editor of Chambers 's Encyclope-
dia from 1946-1950. 44
In some ways Steinberg' s most important
task was to secure new sources of accurate
information for Statesman 's Year-Book since
such sources had been cut off or altered by the
war. Steinberg's assistant editor of five years
and eventual successor, John Paxton, credits
Steinberg with establishing the necessary
sources of information:
[Steinberg] was faced with the task of making
entirely new arrangements with the host of
new countries, old countries under new re-
gimes, and newly created international agen-
cies His astonishing gift of acquiring the
friendship as well as the professional services
of people he never methelped considerably in
re-establishing the vastnetwork of correspon-
dents following the war/ s
The growing importance of international
organizations led Steinberg to expand their
coverage and in 1 949 to devote Part I to them,
an arrangement that continues today. Atten-
tion was given to the U.N. organs and to the
specialized agencies. Member nations are
listed, together with the percent of the
organization's budget that each has contrib-
uted. Six otherinternational organizations were
included in 1949, a figure that would grow
over time. The British Commonwealth and
Empire became Part II, the United States Part
III, and Other Countries Part IV.
Once again, the arrangement of countries
was revised by Steinberg in the 1962-63 edi-
tion. Previously arranged by continent, the
nations in the Commonwealth were arranged
STATESMAN'S YEAR-BOOK 265
according to the order in which its members
achieved complete sovereignty. Whilethe edi-
tor assured readers that this "new arrangement
adopts clear historic and constitutional prin-
ciples," 46 one wonders how clear and under-
standable this arrangement was to users. For-
tunately, Statesman 's Year-Book has always
included a table of contents and an index that
includes countries. The 1960s was a decade in
which numerous African countries gained
independence. These changes are well docu-
mented year-by-year in Statesman's Year-
Book,
Steinberg was also responsible for a change
in the timing of the publication of 'Statesman 's
Year-Book and the dates appearing on vol-
umes. Beginning in 1960, the volumes include
in their title the present and the following year.
Thus, 1960 becomes 1960-61, 1961 is labeled
1961-62, and so on. The rationale for this
change in dating was explainedtothearmual's
readership in 1964 and that change relates to
the timing of publication. Statesman 's Year-
Book was published originally each year in
January to coincide with the normal opening
of Parliament. That arrangement continued
but gave way after decades to a May publica-
tion date. Reportedly this shift was made in
order to include current budget information
from countries whose fiscal year ends at the
end of March and in June. 47 Steinberg ex-
plained further that July or August publication
was still intended to cover 1 2 months , thereby
justifying the hyphenated dates in the title. 48
John Paxton
With Steinberg's death on January 28,
1969, assistant editor John Paxton was el-
evated to the position of editor. Paxton was
born in 1923. He has published widely, often
with A.E, Walsh and C. Cook. Most of his
works lie in the fields of political science and
history, such as European Political Facts (3
vols., New York: Facts On File, 1975-1986),
Commonwealth Political Facts (New York:
Facts On File, 1979), and Companion to the
French Revolution (New York: Facts On File,
1988).
Beyond updating Statesman 's Year-Book
to reflect the political changes in the world,
Paxtonmade three notable contributions to the
publication. The first and most important al-
teration was the removal of the imperial bias
of the work. Beginning with the 1978-79
edition, the Year-Book's organization was sim-
plified into two sections . The first continued to
cover international organizations. The second
listed all of the countries of the world in
alphabetical order. This arrangement has
greatly facilitated access to the information
contained in the work. No longer does one
have to know whether a certain country for-
merly had a dependent relationship with Great
Britain or when such a state realized it inde-
pendence. The year after the change was
made, Paxton noted the positive response re-
ceived from readers to the simplification of
the arrangement of countries. 49
Paxton further facilitated use of the work
by introducing two new indexes and a chro-
nology. A commodities index was added in
1976-77, This information had previously
been included in the main index but the ap-
pearance of the separate index makes product
information easier to locate. A personal name
index was introduced in 1987-88, a com-
pletely new access point. In addition, a chro-
nology was added to the introductory section
of Statesman's Year-Book in 1984-85. This
feature provides a handy way to track political
changes that occur during a given year.
The third recent shift in the Year-Book
was the changing emphasis onmaps. Paxton's
early years as editor were marked by an in-
creased use of topical maps. These had ap-
peared during John George Bartholomew's
time but had given way almost entirely to
political maps. Beginning with the 1969-70
edition, interesting and informative topical
maps began appearing again in Statesman 's
Year-Book, To mention but a few, the 1969-
70 annual included a wonderful map titled
"Changes of Sovereignty since 1944." This
266 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
two-page map contained a wealth of informa-
tion in easy-to-use format. Another notewor-
thy map was included in the 1976-77 volume
titled"WorldNatural Disasters (1960-1 975),"
This map detailed the sites, causes, and death
totals of catastrophes. After being placed in-
side the front and back covers of the annuals
during the 1 980s, maps were no longer in-
cluded in the Year-Book beginning with the
1984-85 volume.
Paxton also undertook two special projects
related to Statesman's Year-Booh In 1988,
Macmillan commemorated the 125th anni-
versary of Statesman 's Year-Bookby publish-
ing Statesman 's Year-Book Historical Com-
panion. This book lists the countries of the
world included in Statesman 's Year-Book in
1988 with a one-to-two-page summary of the
political history of the nation. In addition,
Paxton wrote an essay for the Historical Com-
panion about the first 125 years of the work;
his essay is very useful in highlighting key
developments in the Year-Book. Paxton also
edited the Statesman 's Year-Book World Gaz-
etteer, most recently updated in 1991. 50 This
work, in the editor's words, "is available for
those who want more details about towns and
regions" that are included in the Year-Book. 51
The Future
The future of Statesman 's Year-Book
seems assured. The Macmillan interest in the
annual is evidenced by the dedication of the
1987-88 edition to the memory of Harold
Macmillan. His was the fifth generation of
Macmillans to take an active interest in the
Year-Bookaxid "gave helpful advice to four of
the five editors." 52
Statesman 's Year-BookviiM undergo two
types of changes soon. First, the rapid and
dramatic political changes in Eastern Europe
and the Soviet Union in the winter of 1 990
have resulted in almost unbelievable changes
for the staff of the Year-Bookto incorporate in
their publication. Those changes and any oth-
ers, such as the recent election in Nicaragua,
are included in the 1990-91 edition," That
such political changes can appear in a bound
volume so promptly is testimony to the con-
tinuing value of Statesman 's Year-Book to
libraries.
The other change that recently occurred
with the Year-Bookwas the retirement of John
Paxton after nearly 30 years of involvement
with the publication. Paxton stepped down as
editor in the summer of 1990; Brian Hunter
then assumed the position of editor. Hunter
has worked closely with Paxton on the Year-
Book for years and has worked on the articles
on Eastern European nations.
Statesman 's Year-Book is truly a work
based on continuity that reports on a changing
world. While the Year-Book personnel and
contents will change, the goal of providing a
full account of all the the states of the world
has been reaffirmed over the years and will
remain the guiding principle of this landmark
reference work.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Statesman 's Year-Book. London: Macmillan,
1864- . Annual. Through 1959, date on volume
was the same as the year of publication. Begin-
ning with 1 960 and continuing to the present,
dating has been the year of publication and
following year (edition published in 1 960 titled
1960-61, 1961 titled 1961-62, and so on).
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The most useful sources for understand-
ing the hi story and development of Statesman 's
Year-Book are the volumes of Year-Book it-
self. In addition, two short articles cover the
history of the publication: "First Century of
the Statesman 's Year-Book" written but not
signed by Sigrid Steinberg, and John Paxton' s
"The First One Hundred and Twenty Five
.ii
STATESMAN'S YEAR-BOOK 267
Years of the Statesman's Year-Book" The
former is particularly useful in describing the
first three editors and the latter the trends and
changes in the Year-Book over time. Charles
Morgan's The House ofMacmillan describes
the first 100 years of the publishing house and
Alexander andDaniel Macmillan, fhoughlittle
is said about the origins or development of
Statesman 's Year-Book. One of the interest-
ing aspects of the Year-Bookhthc connection
to other outstanding reference works. The
Bolander and Dempsey articles provide use-
ful information on FredT, Jane. The contribu-
tions of John George Bartholomew and suc-
cessors to Statesman 's Year-Bookand to pub-
lishing in general are described in detail in
Allen's article.
Allen, Douglas A. "John George Bartholomew; a
Centenary." Scottish Geographical Magazine
76 (September, 1960): 85-88.
Bell, Barbara. Review of Statesman 's Year-Book.
American Reference Books Annual 14 (1983):
30.
Bolander, Louis H. "Jane's Fighting Ships " United
States Naval Institute Proceedings 74 (Novem-
ber, 1948): 1384-85.
Brown, R. N. Rudmose. "John Scott Keltie." Dictio-
nary of National Biography, 1922-19 BO, Lon-
don: Oxford University Press, 1937.
Dempsey, David. "Jane's World." New York Times
BookReview. Section VII (December 9, 1951):
8.
Espinasse, Francis. Literary Recollections and
Sketches. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1 893.
"First Century of the Statesman's Year-Book."
Statesman 's Year-Book, 1963-64. New York:
St. Martin's, 1963, v-xi.
Goodwin, Gordon. "Frederick Martin." Dictionary
of National Biography. Vol. 12 reissued ed.
London: Smith, Elder & Company, 1909.
Graves, Charles L, ed. Life and Letters of Alexander
Macmillan. London: Macmillan and Company,
1910.
Hughes, Thomas, ed. Memoir of Daniel Macmillan.
London: Macmillan and Company, 1882.
Macmillan, George A., ed. The Letters of Alexander
Macmillan. Glasgow: Privately Published, 1908.
Martin, Frederick. "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book,
1864. London: Macmillan, 1864.
Mill, HughRobert. "Obituary: Sir John Scott Keltie."
GeographicalJoumal 69 (March, 1927): 281-
84.
Morgan, Charles. The House ofMacmillan (1843-
1943). London: Macmillan, 1944.
"Obituary: Sir John Scott Keltie." Geographical
Journal 69 (February, 1927): 189.
Paxton, John, ed. "TheFirstOneHuridredandTwenty-
Five Years of the Statesman 's Year-Book."
Statesman 's Fear-2?00&Historical Companion.
London: Macmillan, 1988,vii-x.
"Preface." Statesman's Year-Book, 1964-65. New
York: St Martin's, 1964.
"Preface." Statesman 's Year-Book, 1979-80. New
York: St. Martin's, 1979.
"Preface." Statesman 's Year-Book, 1987-88. New
York: St. Martin's, 1987.
"Preface." Statesman 's Year-Book, 1989-90. New
York: St Martin's, 1989.
Review of Statesman's Year Book. In English His-
torical Review 20 (July 1905): 617.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In Nation 12
(March 16, 1871): 183.
Review of Statesman's Year Book. In Nation 14
(April 25, 1872): 278.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In New York
Times \0(3\a»3 t 1905): 356
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In Scottish Re-
view9 (April, 1887): 432,
Review of Statesman's Year Book. In Scottish Re-
view 19 (April, 1892): 480.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book, la Spectator 117
(August 12, 1916): 192.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In Times Literary
Supplement no. 1064 (June 8, 1922): 381.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In Times Literary
Supplement no. 1584 (June 9, 1932): 428.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book. In Times Literary
Supplement no. 1898 (June 18, 1938): 421.
Review of Statesman 's Year Book in Times Literary
Supplement x\g. 3581 (October 16, 1970): 1202.
Review of Statesman's Year Book in. Times Literary
Supplement no. 3626 (August 27, 1971): 1025.
Statesman's Year-Book World Gazetteer. 4th ed.
New York: St. Martin's, 1991.
Scott-Keltie, John. "VxQfoaz? Statesman 's Year-Book,
1906. New York: Macmillan, 1906, v.
Seccombe, Thomas. "Daniel Macmillan." Dictio-
nary of National Biography. Vol 12. reissued
ed. London: Smith, Elder & Company, 1909.
"Sigrid Henry Steinberg." Contemporary Authors
Permanent Series, vol. 1. Detroit: Gale, 1975,
599.
Steinberg, Sigrid Henry, ed. "Preface." Statesman 's
Year-Book, 1962-63. New York: St. Martin's,
1962.
Thomas, Wade. Review of Statesman's Year-Book.
American Reference Books Annual 20 (1989):
89.
Wilson, David A. Carlyle to Threescore-and-Ten
(1853-1865). London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
Trubner&Co., 1929.
Wilson, David A., and David W. MacArthur. Carlyle
in Old Age (1865-1881). New York: E. P.
Dutton, 1934.
Wynar,Lubomyr, Review of Statesman 's Year-Book.
American Reference Books Annual 11 (1980):
44.
268 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
NOTES
1 Inthe mid-1980s the size increased slightly to 5 'A" x 8".
1 BarbaraBell, review of Slatesman 's Year-Book, Ameri-
can Reference Books Annual 14(1983): 30.
3 John Paxton, "Preface," Statesman's Year-Book His-
torical Companion (New York: St. Martin's, 1988):
xi.
4 Review of Statesman's Year-Book, New York Times, 3
June 1905, sec, 2, p. 356. For other reviews, see:
Scottish Review 9 (April 1887): 432; Scottish Re-
view 19 (April 1892): 480; English Historical Re-
view 20 (July 1905): 617; Times Literary Supple-
ment no. 1064 (8 June 1922): 381; Spectator 117
(12August 191S): 192; Times Literary Supplement
no. 1584(9 June 1932); 428; limes Literary Supple-
ment no. 1898 (18 June 1938): 421; Times Literary
Supplement no. 3581 (16 October 1970): 1202;
Times Literary Supplement no. 3626 (27 August
1971): 1025.
1 Frederick Martin, "Preface," Statesman's Y ear-Book,
1864 (London: Macraillan, 1864): v.
6 John Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty- five
Years of the Statesman's Y ear-Book," Statesman 's
Year-Book Historical Companion (London:
Macmillan, 1988), vii.
7 Gordon Goodwin, "Frederick Martin," Dictionary of
National Biography, vol. 12, reissued ed. (London:
Smith, Elder, 1909), 1160.
8 David Alec Wilson, Carlyle to Threescore-and-Ten
(1853-1865) (London: Kegan Paul, Trench,
Trubner, 1929), 249. See also Francis Espinasse,
Literary Recollections and Sketches (London:
Hodder and Stoughton, 1893), 260-63.
* John Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years," vii.
10 Ibid., viii.
'•Martin, "Preface," v.
12 Reviews of Statesman 's Year-Book in Nation 12 (16
March 1871): 183; and in Nation 14 (25 April
1872): 278.
13 Martin, "Preface," vii.
14 Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years/' viii.
ls Martin, "Preface," vii.
16 Ibid.
17 Ibid.
18 Sigrid Henry Steinberg, "First Century of the
Statesman's Year-Book," Statesman's Year-Book,
1963-64 (New York: St. Martin's, 1963), x.
19 Ibid., vi.
20 Ibid.
23 Even though John Scott-Keltie 's name is almost always
listed under "Keltie" in standard reference sources
such as the DNB and in his obituaries in the Geo-
graphical Journal, we are told that he always used
the hyphen. In that spirit, his name is consistently
hyphenated in this essay.
21 Steinberg, "First Century of the Statesman's Year-
Book," vii.
23 R. N. Rudmose Brown, "JohnScott Keltie," Dictionary
of National Biography, 1922-1930 (London; Ox-
ford University Press, 1937), 463-64.
"Hugh Robert Mill, "Obituary: Sir John Scott Keltie,"
Geographical Journal 69 (March 1927): 282-83.
""Obituary: Sir John Scott Keltie," Geographical Jour-
nal 69 (February 1927); 189.
26 Ibid.
27 EltingE. Morison, The Letters of Theodore Roosevelt,
vol. 8 (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1954),
904.
"Douglas A. Allan, "John George Bartholomew," Scot-
tish Geographical Magazine 16 (September I960):
85.
" Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years," ix.
30 Steinberg, "First Century of the Statesman's Year-
Book," ix.
31 Louis H. Bolander, "Janes' Fighting Ships," United
States Naval Institute Proceedings 74 (November
1948): 1384.
12 David Dempsey, "Jane's World," New York Times
Book Review, 9 December 1951, sec, 7, p. 8.
33 Ibid.
34 Ibid., and Bolander, "Janes' Fighting Ships," 1384.
35 Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years," ix.
36 John Scott-Keltie, "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book
1906 (New York: Macmillan, 1906), v.
37 Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years," ix.
38 Steinberg, "First Century of the Statesman's Year-
Book," viii.
3(, 3bid.
40 Ibid.
■"Ibid.
42 Contemporary Authors, Permanent Series, vol. 1 (De-
troit: Gale Research, 1975), 599.
43 Ibid. See also Paxton, "The First One Hundred and
Twenty-Five Years," ix.
M Contemporary Authors, 599.
45 Paxton, "The First One Hundred and Twenty-Five
Years," ix-x.
4<s S. Henry Steinberg, "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book,
1962-63 (New York: St. Martin's, 1962).
47 S. Henry Steinberg, "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book,
1964-65 (New York: St. Martin's, 1964).
48 Ibid.
49 JohnPaxton, "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book, 1979-
80 (New York: St. Martin's, 1 979).
50 JohnPaxton,.S7a/£w»tfH 's Year-Book World Gazetteer,
4th ed. (London: Macmillan, 1991).
J! John Paxton, "Preface," Statesman 's Year-Book, 1989-
90 (New York: St. Martin's, 1989).
52 John Paxton, "Preface," Statesman s Year-Book, 1987-
88 (New York: St. Martin's, 1987).
53 GarrettKiely, Marketing ManagerforReferenceBooks
at St. Martin's Press, conversations with the author,
6 March 1990,
Permanently Definitive: Strong's
Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible
Edward D. Starkey
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
James Strong's The Exhaustive Concordance
of the Bible, first published in L894, is a
reference key to another book, the Bible, in the
English-language translation first published
in 1 6 1 1 and known in Great Britain, and much
of the world as the Authorized Version and in
North America as the King James Version. In
order to understand the significance of Strong's
work, it is necessary to have some feel for the
importance of the King James Version.
The King James Version of the
Bible
At the beginning of the seventeenth cen-
tury, English Puritans found every current
Bible translation supported at leas t s ome theo -
logical positions they could not agree with.
King James I found the notes in some transla-
tions seditious. 1 Accordingly, in 1604 the king
set forth a plan whereby 54 scholars from
Cambridge and Oxford Universities as well as
Westminster Cathedral would engage in a
new translation. The translation was com-
pleted and printed in 161 1. Called in common
parlance "the Authorized Version," it was in
fact never authorized by royal decree for sole
use in churches. For the next few decades it
was fiercely criticized from some quarters and
saw competition in sales from earlier English
translations. Eventually, however, this "au-
thorized" version "acquired a sanctity prop-
erly ascribable only to the urrmediated voice
of God; to multitudes of English-speaking
Christians it has seemed little less than blas-
phemy to tamper with the words of the King
James Version." 2 Attempts to document its
influence on the development of English lit-
erature and the language have been frequent,
but in truth its influence is beyond calculation.
One need only read the speeches of Abraham
Lincoln or Martin Luther King, Jr., to note its
influence on American discourse. Indeed the
translation acquired a cultural power far be-
yond anything its originators would recog-
nize. 3
So widely read a document as the Bible
calls for support literature in every 1 anguage in
which it is read. In the Middle Ages, the device
known as the concordance came into being.
"Concordance'Ms made up of two Latin words,
cum, "with," and cor, "heart," and carries the
sense of agreement or harmony. It originally
was used in the plural, concordantiae, mean-
ing passages which are in agreement with one
another. 4 These passages were understood to
form a unified system of truth. For modern
usage, the Oxford English Dictionary defines
a concordance as "an alphabetical arrange-
ment of the principal words contained in a
book, with citations of the passages in which
they occur." The making of concordances
cries out for the use of computer technology,
but the lack of it did not daunt nineteenth-
century scholars frornproducingunsurpassable
concordances of the English Bible and of the
original Hebrew and Greek texts of the Bible.
270 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Early Concordances
The earliest known concordance* to the
Latin Vulgate Bible, was compiled by a team
of French Dominican scholars under the di-
rection of Hugh of Saint-Cher and was pub-
lished in 1240. The first concordance to the
Hebrew scriptures was compiled by Rabbi
Isaac Nathan ben Kalonymus in the mid-
fifteenth century and printed in Venice in
1 5 23 . s It became the source upon which later,
fuller Hebrew concordances were based. In
1602 Conrad Kircher published a concor-
dance to the Greek Septuagint, the Greek text
of the Hebrew Scriptures published in Alex-
andria in the third century bc. In 1546 Basel
saw the publication of the first Greek concor-
dance to the New Testament. From the six-
teenth through the twentieth centuries these
concordances of the Scriptures in their origi-
nal languages were improved upon as more
definitive texts of the Bible were themselves
published.
The earliest concordances were by no
means as useful as we have come to expect
from a reference tool. They were neither com-
prehensive nor exhaustive. Lacking a defini-
tive scholarly text of the Bible, the compilers
could refer to a word that was available in one
text but not in another. Moreover references
could only be made to books of the Bible or to
some idiosyncratic referencing system, not to
the individual verses. In the thirteenth century
Stephen Langton, Archbishop of Canterbury,
divided the Bible into the chapters we use
today, although other chapter divisions had
been proffered and continued in use for some
time. Only in 1551 did the present day verse
numbering system come into being when
Robert Stephanus published his Greek Bible
in Geneva. This numbering system came to be
accepted in most later Protestant, Catholic,
and Jewish translations and imprints and thus
could be relied on as a standard reference
system.
In 1535 Thomas Gibson, or Gybson, pro-
duced the first concordance to the English
New Testament The Concordance of the New
Testamant, most necessary to be had in ye
handes of all soche as [delyte] in the
comunycacion of any place contayned in ye
New Testament (London: Thomas Gybson,
1535). John Marbeck published a concor-
dance to the complete English Bible in 1 550 as
A Concordance, thatis to sale, a workewherein
by the order of the letters oftheA.B. C. ye male
redely finde any word conteigned in the whole
Bible, so often as it is there expressed or
mencioned . . . (London: Richardus Grafton,
1550). Both Gybson and Marbeck based their
concordances on early English translations of
theBible. One Clement Cotton began work on
a concordance to the Authorized Version, and
this was taken up and completed by Samuel
Newman, who published A Large and Com-
plete Concordance to the Bible in English,
according to the latest translation. First col-
lected by Clement Cotton, and now much
enlarged and amended for the good both of
schollers and others; far exceeding the most
perfect that ever was extant in our language,
both in ground-work and building, by Samuel
Newman, apoor labourer in theLord 'svinyard
. . . (London: T. Downes and J. Young, 1643)
just over 30 years after the initial publication
of the Authorized Version,
Cruden's Concordance
Nearly a century later this was supplanted
in accuracy and comprehensiveness by
Alexander Cruden's A Complete concor-
dance to the Old and New Testament: or, a
dictionary and alphabetical index to the Bible
(London: Warne, 1737). Cruden, whose life,
sadly, was punctuated by periods of madness,
chose what he considered the most important
words in the Bible and recorded many, but not
all, instances of their use sequentially through
the Old and New Testaments in the Autho-
rized Version. A single line of context is given
for each use as well as the name of the book
quoted and chapter and verse . Although Cruden
remains to this day a popular concordance —
it was reprinted through the 1950s — it has
STRONG'S EXHAUSTIVE CONCORDANCE OF THE BIBLE 271
majorshortcomings: itisnotanaiytical; itdoes
not include all the words in the Bible; it does
not include all the references to even the
important words; and it lacks most proper
names of persons and places.
An analytical concordance leads the re-
searcher back to the Hebrew and Greek origi-
nal words, and a complete, or exhaustive,
concordance contains all words and names
used in the Bible and records all references to
them. While Cruden singled out what he felt
were the most important words, neither he nor
his subsequent publishers have listed those he
excluded.
In essence, in producing the first concor-
dance to the Authorized Version which
achieved wide use, Cruden posed the prob-
lem. A biblical concordance has many uses:
the theologian must find every application of
a term to understand its doctrinal impact, the
preacher looks for examples in preparing a
sermon and has to have all the examples
available, and the serious reader searches for
full understanding of the whole text. Cruden' s
concordance could not advance scholarship
and could only fill the needs of the preacher
and reader in a casual manner. The answer to
more serious needs would be met by two
concordances published in the late nineteenth
century.
Robert Young
In 1 879, Robert Young of Edinburgh pub-
lished his Analytical concordance to the Bible,
containing every word in alphabetical order,
arranged under its Hebrew or Greek original,
With the literal meaning of each, exhibiting
about 31 1,000 references. With the latest in-
formation on Biblical geography and antiqui-
ties (Edinburgh: G. A. Young, and Co., 1879)
in which he alphabetically listed all but the
most common words of the Authorized Ver-
sion and under each gave in succession the
various Hebrew or Greek words which the
English word is used to translate. Then under
each Hebrew or Greek word he listed the
book, chapter, and verse of the reference as
well as a single line of context. Thus under
"morning" Young listed eight Hebrew and
four Greek words each with references to their
proper uses.
This arrangement has the virtues of lead-
ing the researcher back at once to the exact
Hebrew or Greek word used in the original
text, giving a definition of this original word,
and offering references to all the instances of
it. Young included all proper names of persons
and places and attempted to define and date
them. At the end of the concordance he added
a Hebrew lexicon to the Old Testament, a
Greek lexicon to the New, and a relisting of
proper names from the Old Testament with the
exact form of the original Hebrew. The lexi-
cons are arranged by the transliterated Roman
alphabet. Young's was a strong entry in the
field of concordances and remains in print to
this day; in 1982 Thomas Nelson Publishers
brought it out under the title Analytical Con-
cordance to the Bible . . . Newly revised and
corrected (Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson).
Young solved a basic problem of an "ana-
lytical" concordance, accounting for the fact
that a single English word can be the transla-
tion of many Hebrew or Greek words, by
lining up each Hebrew and Greek word under
the English word which translates it. But this
arrangement itself creates another difficulty
which biblical scholar Donald Guthrie identi-
fies in his introduction to the 1982 Thomas
Nelson edition. The Bible reader who turns to
a concordance is often trying to fmd a full
reference by means of a certain keyword he or
she has remembered. If many Hebrew and
Greek words have been translated by that
English keyword, the researcher must look
through just so many lists under the keyword.
In searching what may indeed be a multitude
of lists, the verse becomes elusive. In short,
Young's concordance, while being thorough
and scholarly, is cumbersome. Moreover,
Young did not include every English word
used in the Authorized Version; words of
great frequency, such as articles and common
conjunctions, were excluded but not listed in
prefatory matter, a serious drawback.
■3JJU-.
272 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Strong's Approach
James Strong took a different approach
with his Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible.
He first listed every word used in the Autho-
rized Version except 47 of the most common:
a, an, and, are, as, etc. 6 He included proper
names. Following each entry he gave a single
listing of all uses of the English word, ar-
ranged in the order of the books of the Autho-
rized Version, and by chapter and verse within
each book. As did Cruden and Young, Strong
offered a single line of context, usually not a
complete thought. Strong solved Guthrie's
problem, mentioned above, by providing this
unified list of all references to the English
word. Thus the word "morning" in Strong is
followed by a list of all its Old Testament uses,
beginning in Genesis and ending inZephaniah,
and this is followed by New Testament uses,
beginning in the Gospel of Matthew and end-
ing in Revelation.
However, it remains that the English word
may in fact be the translation of more than one
Greek or Hebrew word. Strong led the reader
back to the original word via reference to two
lexicons he included at the end of the concor-
dance: Hebrew and Greek. He listed each
Hebrew word according to the Hebrew alpha-
bet and gave each a reference number. (By this
we know that there are 8 ,674 Hebrew words in
the Old Testament.) A transliteration of the
word into the Roman alphabet, a phonetic
spelling, and a brief definition follow. Strong
did the same for the Greek vocabulary of the
New Testament (with 5,624 Greek words). In
the main concordance, at the end of each line
of context Strong added the reference number
of the original Hebrew or Greek word to
which the reader can turn for definition. If the
reference number is in Roman type, the word
is to be found in the Hebrew lexicon; if in
italics^ntheGreeklexicon.Tovisitthe "morn-
ing" example once again, where Young had
eight lists for Hebrew words and four for
Greek, Strong has a unified list with nine
reference numbers for Hebrew words (he has
split two Hebrew forms into separate words)
and four reference numbers for Greek words.
With entrepreneurial instinct he separately
paginated his Hebrew and Greek lexicons for
publication independent of the concordance
as reference pocketbooks for seminarians and
students, and they are thus reprinted to this
day. Strong's reference numbers to the Greek
and Hebrew words have become standard and
have been added to succeeding biblical refer-
ence books.
Strong further strengthened his work by
adding an appendix in which he listed the 47
common words excluded from the main con-
cordance and including every reference to
each by biblical book, chapter, and verse. The
difference in treatment between these com-
mon words and the words in the main concor-
dance is that Strong did not add a line of
context, since doing so would have expanded
the workout of reasonableproportion, in some
cases almost repeating the entire Bible under
a word. The fact remains, however, that this is
the first truly exhaustive concordance, and the
scholar who wishes can trace each single use
of "and" and "the" in the Authorized Version.
A second appendix of some 262 pages is
a comparative concordance, showing where
the changes of the new late nineteenth-cen-
tury translation known as the Revised Version
differ from the Authorized Version. This was
of benefit only during the useful life of the
Revised Version and was dropped from mid-
twentieth century reprints of the concordance
when other English translations had gained in
popularity.
The Career of James Strong
James Strong's career as abiblical scholar
coincided with a quickening of biblical schol-
arship spurred by advancements in textual
studies and archaeology in the century pre-
ceding publication of his concordance. 7
Strong was born in New York City in
1822 and died in Round Lake, New York, in
August 1894, four months after his concor-
dance was published. Although raised an Epis-
STRONG'S EXHAUSTIVE CONCORDANCE OF THE BIBLE 273
copalian, he underwent a conversion to
Methodism, and graduated from Wesleyan
University in Connecticut in 1 844. He studied
and taught biblical languages throughout his
life, his most important appointment being at
Drew Theological Seminary in New Jersey
between 1868 and 1893. Conversant in the
French and German as well as the English
literature of biblical science, he served on the
committee which updated the Old Testament
translation for the Revised Version (supplanted
in the mid-twentieth century by the Revised
Standard Version and more recently by the
New Revised Standard Version). A member
of the American branch of the Palestine Ex-
ploration Society, he went on an expedition to
Palestine and Egypt in 1874, and he chaired
the Archaeological Council of the Oriental
Society.
In his quarter century of teaching atDrew,
Strong gave evidence of great learning, cre-
ative scholarship, and immense drive. Schol-
ars of his kind defined the path for biblical
specialists in the twentieth century: accom-
plishment in all biblical as well as several
modern languages, study in Palestine at the
sources, concern with biblical texts and their
translation to modern languages, and persis-
tent application to tasks. Strong's exactitude
as a scholar was coupled with a conservative
bent. He maintained that the prophet Isaiah
was the sole author of the book that bears his
name, that Moses wrote the first five books of
the Hebrew Scriptures, and that the creation
took place as the book of Genesis records it —
all positions attacked by liberal nineteenth-
century scholars. Strong remained a critical
scholar, however, and stated that his positions
were based on his research and not on the blind
acceptance of authority. 8
Although he wrote widely on biblical
matters and published some 30 books in his
lifetime, Strong's monumental contribution,
in nineteenth-century eyes, was the ten-vol-
ume Cyclopaedia of Biblical, Theological,
and Ecclesiastical Literature (New York:
Harper and Brother, 1 867-188 1), begun with
John McClintock in 1867 and completed in
1881. McClintock died after the third volume
was published, and Strong took over the
editorship. He added two supplementary vol-
umes in 1885-1886. This lengthy work was
the first compilation in English of the great
amount of information in biblical studies that
had been collected in the preceding decades.
Lengthy bibliographies follow each alphabet-
ized entry, but the work lacks an index. Al-
though the information in this encyclopedia is
now dated and has been much augmented and
corrected by the labors of another prolific
century, the work was reprinted as recently as
1981. 9
Although in the nineteenth century
Strong's encyclopedia was considered his most
important work, his concordance marks his
fame in the twentieth. "This is James Strong' s
monument. It tells of his inventive faculty, his
organizing mind, his boundless energy, and
his capacity for unremitting toil." 10 Unfortu-
nately, a lecture Strong gave in Round Lake
just before his death, "How I Made My Con-
cordance," appears not to have been pre-
served. However, there are occasional refer-
ences which indicate that he organized his
students, as many as 100 of them, to help him,
and that the task took 35 years. 11 Once com-
pleted, accurately and exhaustively, the result
is definitive, never has to be done again, and
will be of use as long as the King James
Version is studied.
Strong's Legacy
The reviewing of reference works was
not a widespread art form in the 1890s; how-
ever, one reviewer in The Critic, a New York
literary magazine, did make salient comments
on the new concordance. 12 Cruden, he noted,
"occupied the whole field" until the appear-
ance of Young's concordance in 1880.
Cruden's weakness was in being incomplete;
Young fully replaced him but included Greek
and Hebrew words in their original alphabets
in the text itself, thus putting off those who did
274 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
fel
not know these languages. Strong, the critic
noted, "contrived the same end [complete-
ness] in his book by another method, that will
not perplex those who have no special knowl-
edge of the sacred tongues, and do not wish to
be hindered by the presence of characters in a
language they cannot understand." Here he is
referring to Strong's reference number sys-
tem and his Hebrew and Greek lexicons. The
appendix of the 47 common words "is an
evidence of enormous labor, andwill not often
be used." The writer offered the useful com-
parative note that while Cruden quoted the
word "King, etc." 665 times, "Strong has
2,813 references to the same group." He fin-
ishes by praising the concordance's "excep-
tional accuracy" but noting that "its great size
. . . will probably prevent its coming into
universal use."
This anonymous critic need only be faulted
for his final words because Strong's concor-
dance has indeed been widely published in the
twentieth century. Copyrighted in 1 890, it was
first released in New York and Cincinnati in
April 1894. Hodder & Stoughton brought it
out in London the same year. The Methodist
Book Concern held the rights to the concor-
dance and reprinted it several times during the
first four decades of the twentieth century. In
1938 following a merger of two Methodist
Churches, Abingdon-Cokesbury became the
imprint, to be followed simply by Abingdon
Press. Sales of the concordance increased
during the 1950s, 1960s, and 1970s with a
surge in Bible reading; a 1977 Abingdon edi-
tion is the thirty-sixth reprint with 50,000
copies brought off the press at that time and
35,000 sold annually throughout the 1980s, 13
At the beginning of the 1980s Abingdon reset
the type and in 1986 produced a "red letter"
edition, wherein quotations of the words spo-
ken by Jesus in the New Testament are printed
in red letters. The rights to print this edition
were then sold to World Bible Publishers
which has subsequently brought it out un-
changed under its imprint.
A second event occurred which greatly
influenced the distribution of Strong's con-
cordance was the lapsing of the copyright in
1946. The concordance came into the public
domain. 14 This was the occasion for a host of
reprints, often from photographs of the early
text, some of passable, some of lesser quality.
Thus the concordance has appeared under the
imprints of 1 6 publishers in the United States,
with another version printed in England. So
popular did this concordance become by mid-
century and so important was it to its publish-
ers to distinguish it from its competitors that its
cover title changed on most editions from the
original The Exhaustive Concordance ... to
Strong's Exhaustive Concordance. . . .Many
of these imprints were sold with descriptions
such as "compact edition," "student version,"
"popular edition," or "abridged." A compari-
son of the page numbers indicates that it is
usually the comparative concordance to the
Revised Version and sometimes the appendix
to the 47 common words which are left out
rather than a reworking of the main text to lead
the user to fewer references.
It is the continuing popularity of the Au-
thorized Version of the Bible among Protes-
tant conservatives that keeps the market alive
for reference works based on this version.
Reader's Digest reworked the actual text of
Strong to produce its Reader 's Digest Family
Guide to the Bible: A Concordance and Refer-
ence Companion to the King James Version^
edited by John C.L. Gibson and Ian A. Moir
(Pleasantville, NY: Reader's Digest, 1984).
Here the editors limited entries to 7,000 key-
words followed by 100,000 context lines and
included essays on various aspects of the
Bible as well as reproductions of master paint-
ings.
The most important edition outside the
Methodist Book Concern-Abingdon- World
Bible track has been The New Strong's Ex-
haustive Concordance of the Bible put out by
Thomas Nelson Publishers in 1984. This pub-
lisher reset the type by computer and rear-
ranged the design of Strong's lines: scripture
references (book, chapter, and verse) are
placed in a uniform manner (left justified)
after the context line and before the reference
number to the Hebrew or Greek lexicon. Strong
originally had the scripture reference first
STRONG'S EXHAUSTIVE CONCORDANCE OF THE BIBLE 275
followed by the context line and, lastly, the
lexicon reference number, with the context
line often intruding into the column of lexicon
reference numbers. Thomas Nelson also has
inserted variant spellings of biblical names
from twentieth-century translations so that the
reader of the Revised Standard Version or the
New International Version can find a biblical
name in the concordance according to the
spelling from the newer version and then be
cross- referred to the entry as it is spelled in the
Authorized Version. Strong can in this man-
ner be used as a concordance for newer trans-
lations . Definitions have been added for proper
names such as "Joseph" for which there is
more than one person. A "Key Verse Com-
parison Chart" is a major addition to the Tho-
mas Nelson edition, which profits the general
reader more than the scholar; here 1,800 major
verses, chosen from every book in the Bible,
are printed in six translations for comparison;
the King James Version, the New King James
Version, the New American Standard Bible,
the New International Version, the Revised
Standard Version, and Today's English Ver-
sion. The editors at Thomas Nelson did not
reset the type for the Hebrew and Greek
lexicons, but since the originals are clear this
has not proven problematic. They do claim
that "no section from the original Strong's has
been eliminated" (Publisher' s Preface) , which
is not entirely true since the 262-page "Com-
parative Concordance of the Authorized and
Revised Versions" has been dropped as it
indeed had been for most reprints after the
1 940s when the Revised Version had fallen
into disuse and been replaced by the Revised
Standard Version.
One of the enduring contributions James
Strong made in the design of his concordance
is his numbering system for Hebrew and Greek
words. The numbering system has proven so
popular it has been adopted by editors of other
biblical reference books who can assume that
a copy of Strong will be handy to mo st readers .
Notable among these are such recent editions
of biblical dictionaries as An Expository Dic-
tionary of Biblical Words. (William Edwin
Vine, Merrill F. linger, and William White,
Jr., [Nashville, TN: Thomas Nelson, 1985]). IJ
Thomas Nelson Publishers included Strong's
reference numbers in their edition of the com-
peting, as it were, Young's Analytical Concor-
dance to the Bible.
Concordances produced for twentieth-
century translations oftheBiblewouldhaveto
live up to Strong's standards unless they were
designed for a less scholarly purpose: they
would have to be analytical, exhaustive, and
easily read. Strong's influence can be clearly
seen in the newest concordance available in
book format, The NIV Exhaustive Concor-
dance (Edward W. Goodrick and John R.
Kohlenberger III, eds., Grand Rapids, MI:
Zondervan, 1990). Inadditionto the similarity
in title, the design of this concordance is much
like that developed by Strong. Each English
word of the New International Version is
listed in alphabetical order with all occur-
rences of it listed by biblical book. With each
occurrence is chapter, verse, context line, and
reference number. For this last, the editors
have departed from Strong and created a new
reference numbering system since they felt
that after a century of use Strong' s system was
no longer adequate to the task. Advances in
the linguistics of the biblical languages, the
need to treat Hebrew and Aramaic as separate
languages (Strong interfiled vocabularies from
Hebrew and "Chaldee" or Aramaic), and the
correction of Strong's factual and typographic
errors necessitated their decision. However,
so prevalent has Strong's numbering system
become, Goodrick and Kohlenberger needed
to append two indexes to their concordance:
an index of Strong's numbers to theirs and an
index of their numbers to Strong's. Nor did
they depart from Strong in using Roman type
for Hebrew/Aramaic (with the Aramaic al-
phabet following the Hebrew) and italic type
for Greek.
Inapre-computer age, Strong's standards
for accurate and thorough scholarship, as well
as his energy and dedication to task, were
among the highest in the field of biblical
studies. His contemporaries, somewhat awe-
struck, criticized him for his appendix which
records each application of the 47 common
276 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
words— "sheer intellectual waste" 16 — but
these were men who could not know the value
of word-comparison studies for the simple
reason that in that age, without computers,
such could not yet be done. All concordances
are now done with computers, and evert these
take years to produce. Strong did the most that
could be done before computers were avail-
able. His work significantly advanced En-
glish-language biblical scholarship of the twen-
tieth century, and it remains permanently de-
finitive for the Authorized Version.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
As noted in the text, the concordance has
been frequently reprinted. The original edi-
tion, noted first below, was reprinted through-
outthe twentieth century by official Methodist
publishing houses, known variously as the
Methodist Book Concern, Abingdon-
Cokesbury Press, and Abingdon Press. Re-
editing in the 1980s led to the "red letter"
edition of 1986, the rights to which Abingdon
sold to World Bible Publishers. Many publish-
ers reprinted the earliest version when the
work came into the public domain. Chief
among these was Thomas Nelson Publishers,
which reset the type and added features.
The Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible: Showing
Every Word of the Text of the Common English
Version of the Canonical Books, and Every
Occurrence of Each Word in Regular Order;
Together with a Comparative Concordance of
the Authorized and Revised Versions, Including
the American Variations; Also Brief Dictionar-
ies of the Hebrew and Greek Words of the
Original, with References to the English Words:
by James Strong. New York: Hunt & Eaton;
Cincinnati: Cranston & Curts, 1894. London,
Hodder& Stoughton, 1894.
Strong 's Exhaustive Concordance oftheBible: Show-
ing every word of the text of the King James
Version of the canonical books of the Bible and
every occurrence of each word in regular order,
together with the words of Jesus identified in
boldface red letter and a key-word comparison
ofselectedwords andphrases in the King James
Version with five leading contemporary trans-
lations: also brief dictionaries of the Hebrew
and Greek words of the original with references
to theEnglish words. Nashville: Abingdon Press,
1986.
The New Strong's Exhaustive Concordance of the
Bible with main Concordance, Appendix to the
Main Concordance, Key Verse Comparison
Chart, Dictionary of the Hebrew Bible, Dictio-
nary of the Greek Testament. Nashville: Tho-
mas Nelson Publishers, 1984.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The Dictionary of American Biography
offers a brief but perceptive overview of
Strong's life, based on some of the other
biographical reminiscences listed. The article
in The Critic is a contemporary review of the
concordance. The Cambridge History of the
Bible, three volumes in all, treats the transmis-
sion of the biblical text down to our times and
its translation into modern languages; although
it is written in essay format, it is so filled with
factual information on the Bible and is in-
dexed so well that many libraries have in-
cluded copies of it in their reference collec-
tions.
Buttz, Henry A. "Prefatory Memoir.' 1, In. The Student s
Commentary: The Book of Psalms, by James
Strong. New York: Eaton & Mains; Cincinnati:
Curts & Jennings, 1896.
Dictionary of American Biography, s.v. "Strong,
James,"
"Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible." The Critic
26 (March 9, 1895): 178-79.
Greenslade, S. L,, ed. The Cambridge History of the
Bible: The West from the Reformation to the
Present Day. Cambridge: Cambridge Univer-
sity Press, 1963.
Joy, James Richard, ed. The Teachers of Drew:
1867-1942. Madison, NJ: Drew University,
1942.
MacMullen, Wallace. "A Legacy of Inspiration." In
Drew Theological Seminary: 1867-1917, ed-
ited by Ezra Squier Tipple. New York: Method-
ist Book Concern, 1917.
Pernon, Walter Newton. The United Methodist Pub-
lishing House: A History. Vol. II: From 1870 to
1988. Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1989.
STRONG'S EXHAUSTIVE CONCORDANCE OF THE BIBLE 111
NOTES
1 S. L. Greenslade "English Versions of the Bible,
1525-1611" in The Cambridge History of the
Bible; The West/font the Reformation to the
Present Day (Cambridge: Cambridge Univer-
sity Press, 1963), 164.
2 Ibid., 168.
3 The apotheosis of a Bible text is not limited to the
King James Version. Erasmus of Rotterdam
printed the first Greek text of the New Testa-
ment in 1515, using for his edition what Greek
manuscripts he could lay his hands on. For one
small section where he could not locate a Greek
manuscript, he translated the Latin Vulgate
back into Greek, producing a version quite
unlike the original . This edition, with Erasmus' s
later emendations, came to be known as the
"Textus Receptus," the Received Text, and was
used for many translations into the vernacular
throughout Europe including the King James
Version. So important was it considered for so
long a period that when in the nineteenth cen-
tury scholars produced more accurate texts de-
rived from very ancient manuscripts, they were
accused of meddling with the sacred.
4 Encyclopaedia Britannica, 1 1th ed., see "Concor-
dance." This essay offers the best brief histori-
cal treatment of the development of concor-
dances.
3 Ibid.
*The entire list of forty-seven: a, an, and, are, as, be,
but, by, for, from, he, her, him, his, I, in, is , it,
me, my, not, O, of, our, out, shall, shalt, she,
that, the, thee, their, them, they, thou, thy, to,
unto, up, upon, us, was, we, were, with, ye, you.
7 A good biographical essay is to be found in the
Dictionary of American Biography (New York:
Charles Scribner's Sons, 1936), but additional
facts can be gleaned from The Twentieth Cen-
tury Biographical Dictionary of Notable Ameri-
cans (Boston: The Biographical Society, 1904)
and from Appleton 's Cyclopaedia of American
Biography, rev. ed. (New York: D. Appleton,
1900). Interestingly, this last does not even
mention the concordance among Strong's pub-
lications. Evaluations of Strong's work by his
colleagues are found in the reminiscences noted
in books listed in the bibliography.
^Dictionary of American Biography, see, "Strong,
James."
9 Cyclopedia of Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesias-
tical Literature, (Grand Rapids, MI: Baker Book
House, 1981).
10 The Teachers of Drew, ed. James Richard Joy
(Madison, NJ: Drew University, 1942), 80.
11 "Publisher's Preface" to the New Strong's Exhaus-
tive Concordance of the Bible (Nashville: Tho-
mas Nelson, 1984), v.
n The Critic, 26 (9 March L895): 178-79.
13 Walter Vernon, h.,The United Methodist Publish-
ing House; A History, vol. 2 (Nashville, TN:
Abingdon, 1989), 267.
14 Though the concordance was first published in
1894, Strong had copyrighted it, the two lexi-
cons, and the comparative concordance sepa-
rately in 1890. The 56 years of copyright protec-
tion expired in 1946.
15 This combines the earlier dictionaries of Vine on
the New Testament and Unger and White on the
Old.
1 6 Quoted by but not agreed to by "Wall ace MacMullen
in Ezra Squier Tipple, ed., Drew Theological
Seminary; 1867-1917 (New York: Methodist
Book Concern, 1917), 98.
The World in One's Hands: Times
Atlas of the World
Mary L. Larsgaard
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Atlases hold a firm place in today's libraries
and homes, and not just by virtue of their heft
and size — both of which generally exceed that
of most other volumes — but rather by the solid
worth of their contents. There are several
different major kinds of atlases — general ref-
erence, thematic, national. This essay is con-
cerned with an exemplar, the general refer-
ence atlas.
"Atlas" is a word usually applied to a
collection of maps, all adhering to some gov-
erning idea, usually either bound or boxed
together. In libraries, the most frequently used
type of atlas is the general reference atlas. The
general reference atlas of choice must be
accurate, have as much topographic detail as
possible, treat place names uniformly, have a
logical sequence of scale and balanced cover-
age, have a distinct style, be composed mainly
of geographical maps (with a minimum of
thematic maps), be comprehensive within the
limits of the scales used, and be carefully and
systematically arranged and equally carefully
edited. 1
Today's general reference atlas is usually
thought to have for its remotest forebear
Ptolemy's Geographia of the fifteenth cen-
tury, which with its listing of place names and
spellings aroused interest in map making. Ac-
cording to legend, it was accompanied by a
group of maps, butno physical copies survive.
Even if these maps existed, they were an
accompaniment to another book, not an inde-
pendent publication as a true atlas is. In the
sixteenth century, Antonio Lafreri's collec-
tions of maps — constructed to match abuyer' s
needs, tastes, and funds — were also progeni-
tors; but the maps making up these volumes
were not done in a uniform style as maps in
today's atlases must be. It was Lafreri who
used a special title page (in about 1570),
showing Atlas with the world on his shoulders,
although it would not be until Mercator' s 1 5 94
atlas that such a publication would be called an
atlas. 2
Itisonly with Abraham Ortelius 1 Theatrum
orbis terrarum of 1570 that a volume recog-
nizable as a general reference atlas by today's
definition of the genre appeared. The
Theatrum— rolling off the press of Christo-
pher Plantin in Antwerp — was a stupendous
success, with its 70 maps on 53 sheets; there
were two additional printings in 1570. It in-
cluded maps of the world arranged in what
was called Ptolemaic order, an order suppos-
edly based on Ptolemy' s system of descriptive
geography. Since tables of contents were not
yet standard, this was a handy aide-m&moire
for educated users.
Such a succesfou encouraged more of the
same, and the sixteenth and seventeenth cen-
turies became the first important period of
commercial map publishing, Before the end of
the century, Mercator, whose idea the atlas
originally was, had issued his Atlas sive
Cosmographicae meditationes de fahrica
mundi et fabricati figure ("Atlas, or cosmo-
graphical meditations upon the creation of the
TIMES A TLAS OF THE WORLD 279
universe, and the universe as created"). With
this impetus, the atlas became the dominant
cartographic form of the seventeenth century.
Anyone who would like to compare these
early examples of the atlas with today's ver-
sion may look at the excellent facsimiles pub-
lished by Theatrum Orbis Terrarum Publish-
ing Company, Ltd.
The German atlases (e.g., those by
Homann) of the seventeenth and eighteenth
century had considerable detail, while the
English atlases (e.g., those by Speed, Ogilvie,
Senex, Jefferys, Kitchens) were more crowded
in appearance, but similar to the Dutch atlases:
accurate (in as far as knowledge of the time
permitted); well presented; and, often, deco-
rated. In the eighteenth and nineteenth centu-
ries, the Dutch hegemony gave way to the
German. 3
The Bartholomew Family
Enter the Bartholomew family. George
Bartholomew (1784-1871) began as an ap-
prentice map engraver at the age of 1 3 for the
engraving and publishing firm of W. & D.
Lizars; his son John Bartholomew (1805-
1 861). began an apprenticeship with that firm
in 1820, at the age of 15. John did excellent
work and was recognized for it. He estab-
lished the firm of John Bartholomew in 1826,
which in 1 860 became John Bartholomew and
Son, with offices at 4A North Bridge and
printing works in nearby Carrubber's Close.
John died in 1861. Another John (1831-1 893)
was first a trainee and later a partner. In 1870
the business moved to 1 7 Brown Square and in
1879 to 31 Chambers Street. Toward the end
of the 1870s a third Bartholomew introduced
the use of contour layer coloring to depict
relief in commercial maps, a very important
innovation.
In the next generation, John George
Bartholomew (1 860-1 920), after education at
the University of Edinburgh, joined the family
business shortly after 1879, In 1888 John
George, at the age of 28, took over the business' s
management and a year later moved the Firm
to Park Road and named it the Edinburgh
Geographical Institute. From 1888 until 1892
John George had a partnership with Thomas
Nelson; from 1893 to 1919 a cousin, Andrew
G. Scott, was hisparrner. In 191 1 the firm was
movedtoanew building in Duncan Street, and
in 1919 became John Bartholomew & Son,
Ltd. 4 Before his father's death in 1920, Cap-
tain Ian Bartholomew, John George's eldest
son, became a partner in the firm.*
By the early 1900s, the firm was doing a
large number of map-and-atlas jobs for British
and American publishers; and Bartholomew
atlases— with titles such as The Handy Atlas
(1 87 1), The Student 's Atlas (1 875), The Cen-
tury Atlas and Gazetteer of the World (1890),
TheHandyReferenceAtlasoftheWorld{mi,
the ninth edition ofThe Handy Atlas ), and The
Citizen's Atlas of the World (1912)— were
omnipresent in. the bookshelves of educated
persons. 6 It was this solid experience and
reputation that persuaded The Times to break
the precedent of having a German publisher
continue to work on the editions of its atlas.
The Times Atlas — The Early
Editions
The Times first published a world atlas in
1895 — mainly using German cartographers
and printers, at the time reputed to be the best
in the world — and again in 1 900. With its 1 17
(1895) or 132 (1900) pages of maps (about
half of which were of Europe), it remained a
standard work until after World War I, when
it became clear that substantial political
changes necessitated a new atlas. Lord
Northcliffe, proprietor of the Times, negoti-
ated with John George Bartholomew to pro-
duce what would be called The Times Survey
Atlas of the World. This was published in
loose-leaf format with an index-gazetteer in a
separate volume between 1920 and 1922. The
volume drew upon 15 years of geographical
research and was a standard work for a gen-
eration. It was soon hailed as the foremost
British-produced world atlas. Its layer color
system of relief representation was especially
280 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
welcomed, and the only negative criticisms
concerned the omission of railway lines in
Asia, transliteration of Russian names, and the
lack of dates on maps. Important features were
the inclusion of thematic maps and the ex-
tremely limited use of textual material with the
emphasisoverwhelminglyplacedonthemaps.
Its 259-page index had over 130,000 place
names and included map grid and latitude and
longitude references. 7 This atlas was appar-
ently also published in one volume under the
same title by Macmillan in New York.
The Mid-Century Edition
The end of the Second World War again
required a new atlas, so the third one was
planned. This effort resulted in the massive
and supremely important five-volume Mid-
Century Edition, very thoroughly revised from
the 1 920-1 922 edition. The five volumes (each
with its own index-gazetteer bound in) were:
vol.1, World, Australasia andEastAsia(1958);
vol. 2, Southwest Asia andRussia (1959); vol.
3, Northern Europe (1955); vol. 4, Southern
Europe and Africa (1956); vol. 5 , The Ameri-
cas (1957). The volumes were numbered in
accordance with approximate order of longi-
tude from the International Date Line west-
ward.
The atlas makes good use of more than 20
types of projections; for the seven introduc-
tory world plates, eight different projections
are used, ranging from the Mercator projec-
tion (first employed at Duisburg in 1569) on
Plate 6, "World Surface Routes," to the
Bartholomew "Lotus" projection (in its first
appearance) on Plate 2 ("World Oceanogra-
phy"). Each map shows latitude and longitude
as well as key letters and numbers. Scale is
given on the back and at the foot of each plate,
with a bar scale (showing distance in statute
miles and in kilometers) also at the foot; scale
ranges from 1:250,000,000 used for four of
the five maps of Plate 2 ("World Oceanogra-
phy") to 1:21 ,000 for an inset map of Rome on
Plate 80 ("Italy, Central"). In the main, scale
for large countries ranges from 1 : 1 ,000,000 to
1:5,000,000. Elevation is shown by layer
(color) tints and by spot heights, the latter
especially for such areas as mountains; color
tints and spot depths are used for oceans.
Other symbols are shown at the foot of
each plate, and include roads, railways, ca-
nals, oil pipe lines, airports, deserts* swamps,
glaciers, and ice caps. Boundaries are drawn
as they stood at the time of going to press, with
disputed international boundary lines indi-
cated; different types of boundaries (e.g., in-
ternational, states) are clearly differentiated.
Where practicable, the population of a town or
city is indicated on the maps by virtue of
various type sizes; no population figures are
given except for the ones in the section on
states, territories, and principal islands in the
first volume.
Meant to serve as an atlas of international
coverage for use in office, home, and library,
the Mid-Century Edition accomplishes this
purpose through several approaches, butprin-
cipally through cartographic images. Textual
material is extremely limited, pleasing atlas
purists. Volume 3, actually the firstpublished,
carries an introduction to the entire atlas in its
preface (statement of purpose, sequence of
volumes, etc.); the preface of volume 1 offers
a brief history of atlas making; and the other
volumes' prefaces contain suitably brief in-
formation to enable the user to deal with the
maps in those volumes. Volume 1 also con-
tains an illustrated article, "Progress of World
Mapping," by Major-General R. LI. Brown,
formerly director general of the British Ord-
nance Survey, and an alphabetical list of states,
territories, and principal islands of the world.
This serves as a finding list for all volumes,
with information including political status,
location, area, population, and volume and
plate number.
The 1 20 double-page plates — 24 plates to
a volume — are numbered consecutively
throughout the set, including two frontispiece
maps (volume 1 with a 1957 geographical
disposition of world power blocs, and volume
m
TIMES ATLAS OF THE WORLD 281
5 with a map showing the Americas). The
contents page of each volume indicates the
title and scale for each map plate and for each
inset map; this is followed by a list of "Ac-
knowledgments," including names of persons
and institutions.
Each plate of this monumental edition
measures 24" by \9 l A"\ on the back of each
plate are plate number, title of map, projec-
tion, standard parallel, scale, and outline map.
The outside of plates depicting the USSR
(Plates 3 8 through 47) also carry a glossary of
Russian geographical terms and abbreviations
for the principal administrative areas; and the
plate for Southern Arabia (Plate 33) carries a
glossary of Arabic geographical terms. The
outline map on the back of each plate shows
the area mapped, or serves as a key to adjoin-
ing plates by showing volume and plate num-
bers, or shows insets, as required.
In the first seven plates thematic world
maps deal with physiography, oceanography,
climatology, vegetation, mankind, and world
surface and air routes. What makes this atlas,
and the other editions of the Times Atlas, so
outstanding in the field is that aesthetically
pleasing maps present accurate information in
a balanced, impartial fashion.
The inset maps, on a larger scale, provid-
ing detail for major regions, cities, andislands,
are another important feature — with eleven
for the U.S. (ten of cities, and one for the San
Francisco Bay area); six for Canadian cities,
five for India (four for cities and one for the
Damodar Valley); and four for the Soviet
Union (two for cities, one each for the Fergana
Basin and the industrial Urals). Eleven of the
then 1 5 largest cities of the world are shown in
inset maps. In a slight touch of surely forgiv-
able favoritism, London has its own separate
plate (Plate 55).
It is with this edition that the atlas solidi-
fied its reputation as the next best source to a
country-specific gazetteer for place names; it
gave as many place-names as possible, prefer-
ably for each country in the spelling used by
the places' inhabitants. Place names followed
the Permanent Committee on Geographical
Names (London) and the United States Board
on Geographic Names, with the exceptions of
China (forms used by Chinese Post Office);
Mongolia (simplified) ; and Syria and Ethiopia
(French and Italian transliterations changed to
letters with English values). The English form
of importantplaces followed the local name in
brackets, with both names appearing in the
index. William Clowes & Sons, Ltd., Beccles,
England, produced the indexes. Directions
anda list of abbreviations appeared on the first
page of each index, followed by a list of place
names arranged alphabetically letter-by-let-
ter. Each entry gave the name of the place's
major political or geographical area (e.g.,
country, state, ocean), latitude, longitude, map
plate number, and key letter and number.
Throughout, the atlas achieved its aim of a
high degree of comprehensiveness and accu-
racy. In 1965, the supremely useful index
(345,000 place names) was published sepa-
rately as the Times Index-Gazetteer of the
World.
To look at and to use, the volumes are
large (19 l A v x 12 3 //)but relatively lightweight
(since they are only 3 A" thick), unlike other
atlases which require two healthy persons to
lift. The volumes published in England have a
blue binding with gold lettering on front and
spine, while those published by Houghton
Mifflin in the U.S. have a red binding with
gold lettering. In both cases, as one can ob-
serve in almost any library, the atlas has held
up well under heavy use.
Reviewers of the Mid-Century Edition
were unanimous in considering it to be the
most significant world atlas in English at least
since the Second World War. 8 It was upon this
singularly firm foundation that Bartholomew
and the Times launched their first "Compre-
hensive" edition in one volume, with the stated
reason that updating a five- volume set would
be extremely complex, and thus even more
expensive than atlas-making customarily is.
No other five- volume edition has appeared.
282 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
The Comprehensive Edition
The Comprehensive Edition — largely
based, of course, on the plates of the Mid-
Century Edition — first appeared in 1 967 . The
plates were updated and a collection of maps
on world resources and an illustrated guide to
space ilight and lunar exploration were added.
The index of more than 200,000 place names
was bound in, rather than issued as a separate
volume. The index maps were a singularly
useful feature, one that has continued through
subsequent editions. An index map is a two-
page spread of the world, with plate areas and
numbers overlain so that simply by looking at
it one may quickly learn which plate or plates
cover one's area of interest, Brief text illus-
trated with thematic (i.e., subject) maps ap-
peared at the beginnings of the volume. These
number 1 6 pages or plates, e.g., "Resources of
the World," "The Earth and Its Atmosphere,"
"The Universe." The transliteration and spell-
ing recommended by the Permanent Commit-
tee on Geographic names and by the U.S.
Board on Geographic Names have been used.
Wade-Giles transliterations were used for lo-
cations in China and Mongolia.
The second edition (1 968) of the Compre-
hensive Edition showed some updating (e.g.,
population figures), but changes were rela-
tively slight, perhaps based on the feeling that
since it wasn' t broken, there was no need to fix
it. By this time it was common for the Times
Atlas to be referred to as a "best atlas value,"
and "by far the best English-language atlas,
perhaps even the best atlas in the world.'" The
third edition (1971) was published in the U.S.
only, and shows no obvious signs of change.
The fourth edition (1972) featured only
slight changes — in the introduction (p. v), it is
termed the fourth revision of the 1967 edition.
Typical of revision was the plate on the "The
Solar System" (p. xxxiv) of the 1967 edition,
considerably reworked and mo"ved earlier in
the volume (p. xxix in the 1972 volume). As
with other Comprehensive editions, the width
of the page margins was narrower than those
in the Mid-Century Edition, and the maps
were printed on both sides of sheets (rather
than having sheets tipped in, as was done for
the Mid-Century Edition) without reducing
the size of the maps or diminishing the con-
tents. 10
The 256-page fifth edition (1975) con-
tained the expected: the excellent index-gaz-
etteer, good balance of coverage, attractive
maps, and careful attention to design. Except
for updating of maps, the only changes were in
the introduction and the index. The index of
about 210,000 place names was for the first
time compiled by computer to facilitate future
revisions. The introductory pages on world
physiography and oceanography had been
completely revised; African frontier changes
plus plans for more cities appeared. 11 The
reviewer for Choice called it, "the essential
foundation of any general reference atlas
case." 12
The sixth edition appeared in 1980, At
first glance it looks very much the same as its
predecessor (e.g., an increase in the length of
the gazetteer by only four pages). But the
maps were printed in eight colors rather than
in six, making for brighter and denser layer
colors, and the boundaries were reinforced by
a purple rather than a gray tone for improved
legibility. The index was preceded by a one-
page discussion of the transcription of Chi-
nese place names, since a major innovation in
the maps was the replacement of Wade-Giles
romanization with Pinyin for mainland China
names. An estimated 30,000 changes were
made on maps and in the index, including the
addition of much new cartographic informa-
tion (some of it gathered from satellite photo-
graphs, such as a huge reservoir in Siberia
shown for the first time). The new edition cost
an estimated $1.4 million to produce. At the
time of publication a reviewer proclaimed that
it "remains the authoritative reference" of its
kind. 13
The seventh edition (1985) retained the
previous edition's format and structure, with
substantial updating of information through-
TIMES ATLJS OF THE WORLD 283
out. Some changes were introduced in the
preliminary textpages. The geographical-com-
parisons data (e.g., text onpopulation of major
countries, heights of mountains, area of oceans
and seas) expanded to a second page and were
accompanied by inset-sized maps; population
tables were dropped; the thematic pages at the
front were revised; and the population figures
in the alphabetical listing of states and territo-
ries were updated. A group of world thematic
maps (minerals, food, energy, climate) was
moved from the introductory section to the
atlas proper, and sheets on physiography,
oceanography, and air routes present in the
1980 edition were dropped. A new set of
double-page physical maps of the continents
was added, and inset maps of Jiddah and
Riyadh replaced those of Aden and Kuwait on
the Arabian Peninsula plate (Plate #33).
The eighth edition (1990) interestingly
enough notes its editorial board as the New
York Times staff. This author looks forward to
examining it, and is reasonably confident that
the new edition will enable the Times Atlas to
retain its position as "the best world atks in
print." 14
Reasons for Its Preeminence
From the moment the Bartholomew firm
took it on, the atlas rose to the top of its field
and has retained that position. It has set the
standard by which all other world atlases are
judged; in particular, its use of relief maps as
a standard feature has denoted superiority in
the world-reference-atlas world for some time.
In the English-language publishing world,
Rand McNally's International Atlas {Chicago:
Rand McNally), first published in 1969 and
known since 1980 as The New International
Atlas, comes closest; but the Bartholomew
reputation for accuracy and for beautiful maps
gives the Times Atlas a definite edge. In par-
ticular, the unrivaled ability of the maps to
show relief sets it apart from other atlases and
always has, since showing relief on maps is
expensive and is generally done only in the
more expensive atlases; yet it is essential if the
atlas user is to have a good comprehension of
the area being studied,
The Times Atlas has always emphasized
physical-political maps and its index, with
very brief introductory text and a bit longer
section of thematic maps. Balance of cover-
age is a matter frequently mentioned in re-
views of the atlas; this seems to be a matter of
the publisher's balancing number of pages of
coverage per continent with the continent's
share of world land coverage, the density of its
population, and the interests of the atlas's
audience. Thus Europe — -just 3 percent of
world land coverage, 10 percent of world
population, but an area of substantial interest
to British, and Americanusers — receives about
30 percent of the plates in the atlas. This
percentage is down from 43 percent in the
1920-1922 edition, a comforting sign that its
audience is becoming more global in its inter-
ests.
A key to the atlas's success has been the
close association with it, since the 1 920-1922
edition, of the Bartholomew family and firm
working with the Times. Its critical reception
and reputati on have been excellent, especially
since the Bartholomew name became associ-
ated with the atlas. The atlas's influence is
substantial in the scholarly world; if one can
have only one world atlas, it should be the
Times Atlas. As for future plans for new edi-
tions, nothing had appeared in print on this
matter as of mid- 1990, a time when certainly
all map librarians — along with a good many
other persons — were looking forward to see-
ing the imminent eighth edition of this classic
atlas. The computer may play a more impor-
tant part in forthcoming editions as the use of
computer cartography increases. Although
rapidly becoming essential for base mapping
(i.e., large-scale topographic mapping), com-
puterized cartography has been used in atlases
from time to time over the last ten years or so,
but generally not to completely successful
aesthetic effect. Perhaps once again the firm
of Bartholomew can take a lead in innovation.
284 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
PUBLICATION HISTORY
Only new editions, not reprints, non-Brit-
ish/U.S. editions, nor atlases derived from The
Times Atlas, are included in the following list.
"The Times" Atlas. London: The Times, 1895. iv>
117p. of col. maps, 118p.
The Times 'Atlas.Nevted. London: The Times, 1900.
iv, 132 p. of col. maps, 120p,
The Times Survey Atlas of the World, edited by John
Bartholomew. [2nd ed.] London: The Times,
1920-1922. 2 v.; vol. 1, 112 col. maps; vol. 2
(index), xii, 259p.
The Times Atlas of the World, edited by John
Bartholomew. Mid-Century [3rd] ed. London:
The Times; Boston: Houghton Mifflin., 1955-
1959. 5 v.: v. 1, World, Australasia and East
Asia (1958); v. 2, Southwest Asia and Russia
(1959); v. 3, Northern Europe (1955); v. 4,
Southern Europe and Africa (1956); v. 5, The
Americas (1957).
Index-gazetteer of the World. London; The Times,
1965. xxxi, 964p. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,
1966. xxxi, 964p.
The Times Atlas of the World. [1st comprehensive
ed.] London: The Times. 1967. xliii, 123 col.
maps, 272p.
The Times Atlas of the World. 2nd ed. rev. London:
Times Newspaper. 1968. xliii, 123 col. maps,
272p.
The Times Atlas of the World. 2nd ed. rev. [sic; 3rd
ed.; for U.S. only] Boston: Houghton Mifflin,
1971. xliii, 123 col. maps, 272p.
The Times Atlas of the World. 4th ed rev. London:
Times Newspapers, 1972. xl, 123 col. maps,
272p.
The Times Atlas of the World. 5th ed. London: Times
Books, 1975. xl, 123 col. maps, 223p,
The Times Atlas of the World. Comprehensive ed.,
6th ed. London: The Times, 1980. xl, 123 col.
maps, 227p.
The Times Atlas of the World. Comprehensive ed.,
7th ed. London: The Times, 1985. xl, 123 col.
maps, 227p.
The Times Atlas of the World. Comprehensive ed.,
8th ed. London: Times Books, 1990. xlvii, 245
col. maps, 225p.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The secondary literature is composed al-
most entirely of reviews in serials and other
reference works; the most notable exception is
Gardiner's history of the Bartholomew firm.
While this is surprising — considering the
prominence of the atlas — the indexes, most
notably Bibliography of Cartography,
Bibliographica Cartographies and Social
Sciences and Humanities Index, are obdurate
on this point.
Allan, Douglas A. "John George Bartholomew, A
Centenary." Scottish Geographical Magazine
76 (1960): 85-88.
Alonso, Patricia Greechie. "The First Atlases." Ca-
nadian Cartographer 5 (1968): 108-21.
Bagrow, Leo. "The Century of Atlases." InHistoryof
Cartography, byR.A. Skelton, 179-89. 2nd ed.
rey. & enl.Chicago: Precedent, 1955.
Balchin, W.G.V. Review of The Times Atlas of the
World, 6th ed. In Geographical Journal 147
(1981): 120-21.
"Bartholomew (John) and Son, Ltd" Choice 13
(May, 1976): 344.
Brown, Lloyd A. The Story of Maps. Boston: Little,
Brown, 1949.
Brown, R. N. Rudmose. "Bartholomew's "New Atlas
(The Times Survey Atlas of the World, 1920)."
Scottish Geographical Magazine 36 (July 15,
1920): 180-81.
"Dr. J. G. Bartholomew, 1860-1920." Scottish Geo-
graphical Magazine 36 (July 15, 1920): 183—
85.
Gardiner, Leslie. Bartholomew, 150 Years.
Edinburgh: Bartholomew, 1976.
Gomez-Ibanez, Daniel A. "World Atlases for Gen-
eral Reference." Choice 6 (August, 1 969): 625-
30.
Gray, Richard A. Review of The Times Atlas of the
World: Comprehensive Edition. American Ref-
erence Books Annual (1976): 277.
Katz, William A. "World Atlases." In Introduction
to Reference Work; vol. 1, Basic Information
Sources. 4th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1 982.
Kister, Kenneth F. Kister's Atlas Buying Guide.
Phoenix: Oryx Press, 1984.
Piggott, Charles. "Atlas Classic." Geographical
Magazine 53 (November, 1980): 148-49.
Review of The Times Atlas of the World, Mid-
Century ed. Booklist and Subscription Books
Bulletin 58 (September 1, 1961): 1-5.
Review of The Times Atlas of the World, 6th ed.
Booklist W (May 15, 1982): 1273.
Review of 77ie Times Atlas of the World., 7th ed.
Booklist 82 (June 15, 1986): 1524-25.
Walsh, S. Padraig. General World Atlases in Print,
1972-1973: AComparativeAnalysis.~NewYoTk:
Bowker, 1973.
Watson, J. Wreford. "Obituary, JohnBartholomew."
Geographical Review 53 (January, 1963): 145-
46.
TIMES ATLAS OF THE WORLD 285
NOTES
1 Daniel A. Gomez-Ibiinez, "World Atlases for General
Reference," Choice 6 (August 1969): 625-27.
2 Leo Bagrow, "The Century of Atlases," in History of
Cartography, 2nd ed. rev. & enl., by R.A. Skelton
(Chicago: Precedent, 1985), 179.
3 Patricia Greechie Alonso, "The First Atlases," Cana-
dian Cartographer 5 (196S): 108-10, 119; Bagrow,
187-59; Lloyd A. Brown, The Story of Maps (Bos-
ton: Little, Brown, 1949), 165-73,
4 Douglas A. Allan, "John George Bartholomew, A
Centenary," Scottish Geographical Magazine 76
(1960): 85-86.
J "Dr. J,G. Bartholomew, 1860-1920," Scottish Geo-
graphical Magazine 36 (1920): 183-85; Douglas
Allan, "John George Bartholomew, A Centenary,"
87.
6 Leslie Gardiner, Bartholomew, 150 Years (Edinburgh:
Bartholomew, 1976), 6-53.
7 R.N. RudmoseBrown, "Bartholomew's New Atlas (The
Times Survey Atlas of the World, 1920)," Scottish
Geographical Magazine 36 (15 July 1920); 180-
81; Allan, 86.
8 See, for example, review of The Times Atlas of the
World, Mid-Century ed.. Booklist and Subscription
Books Bulletin 58 (1 September 1961): 1-5.
9 Gomdz-Ibaiiez, 628.
10 S. Padraig Walsh, General World Atlases in Print,
2972-1973: A Comparative Analysis (New York:
Bowker, 1973), 33-35.
11 Richard A. Gray, review of The Times Atlas of the
World: Comprehensive Edition, American Refer-
ence Books Annual (1976): 277.
n "Bartholomew (John) and Son, Ltd.," Choice 13 (May
1976): 344.
n Charles Piggott, "Atlas classic," Geographical Maga-
zine 53 (November 1980): 148-49.
14 Review of The Times Atlas of the World, 7th ed.,
Booklist 82 (15 June 1986): 1525.
Legacy of Noah Webster: The
Merriam- Webster Family
of Dictionaries
Marie C. Ellis
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
When George and Charles Merriam purchased
thepublishingrightstoNoahWehster's^men'-
can Dictionary of the English Language from
his heirs in 1 843 , they could not have foreseen
that 150 years later their name and that of
Webster would continue to be linked in a
successful dictionary publishing enterprise.
Over the years, the G. & C. Merriam Company
(which officially changed its name to Merriam-
Webster Inc. in 1982) has survived the chal-
lenges of controversies and intense competi-
tion through its successful combination of
dedication to editorial excellence and adroit
marketing skills. In preserving and enhancing
the legacy ofNoahWebster,Merriam- Webster
has become one of the preeminent publishers
of English-language dictionaries and other
wordbooks, creating an entire family of dic-
tionaries that bear the Merriam-Webster colo-
phon and trademark.
Although the first Merriam-Webster dic-
tionary was published in 1 847, its roots can be
traced back to the 1 780s when Noah Webster
.first contemplated the idea of compiling a
dictionary reflecting American usage of the
English language. Webster publicly revealed
his intentions to publish a series of dictionaries
with an announcement in the New Haven
newspapers on June 4, 1800, indicating that he
planned to compile "a small Dictionary for
schools, one for the counting-house, and a
large one for men of science." Observing that
"a workof this kind is absolutely necessary, on
account of considerable differences between
the American and English language " Webster
concluded that those differences "will con-
tinue to multiply, and render it necessary that
we should have Dictionaries of the American
language" 1 A man of many talents and wide
interests, Webster drew on a broad range of
experience for his new endeavor, having served
variously as a schoolmaster, journalist, lec-
turer, editor, lawyer, and legislator, before
becoming a lexicographer.
Noah Webster
Born on a farm near Hartford, Connecti-
cut, in 1758, Webster was more inclined to
scholarly pursuits than to agrarian life and
attended Yale University from 1774 to 1778,
"a time when religious fervor was declining
and secular interests were paramount." 2 With
a college degree, but apparently with no par-
ticular professional inclination, Webster un-
dertook both school teaching and law practice
during the 1780s. His teaching experience led
him to prepare a series of textbooks, an ac-
complishment for which he became widely
known and which served as the springboard
for his interest in language. In 1 783 the first of
these texts appeared. Bound in blue cloth, A
Grammatical Institute of the English Lan-
guage . . . Parti soon came to be known as "the
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 287
blue-backed speller," and the first edition of
5,000 copies sold out in nine months , 3 In 1 788 ,
its title was changed to The American Spelling
Book, and later it became The Elementary
Spelling Book. 4 By 1801, one and one-half
million copies had been sold, and Merriam-
Webster now estimates that total sales of the
speller eventually reached 70 million copies. 5
The otherparts of Webster's textbook system,
a grammar and a reader, were published in
1 784 and 1 785, respectively, and also enjoyed
a great deal of success. 6
In preparing his speller, reader, and gram-
mar, Webster had accumulated numerousnotes
relating to etymology, language usage, spell-
ing inconsistencies, and variances in pronun-
ciation. In addition, he had become aware of
the many new meanings and terms that had
come into the English language since Samuel
Johnson compiled his A Dictionary of the
English Language in 1755, and he became
convinced that what the nation needed was an
American dictionary of the English language
that would reflect the rapid changes that were
taking place in the vocabulary of the average
citizen. 7 It was this goal that Webster revealed
in his press release of 1 800. His work was not
to be the first American dictionary, however,
since, by the time of its publication, six other
small dictionaries had already appeared.
Webster's first dictionary, A Compendi-
ous Dictionary of the English Language , con-
taining approximately 40,000 words, was pub-
lished in 1 806. Basing his compilation on John
Entick's New Spelling Dictionary (a work
originally published in London in 1764 and
widely available in the United States in a
variety of editions), Webster added about 5,000
words, improved Entick's definitions, revised
the orthography to reflect his own ideas re-
garding uniformity and analogy, and appended
tables of currencies and weights and mea-
sures, chronologies, population statistics, and
a directory of post offices. Since Webster was
greatly interested in simplifying American
spelling, it is not surprising that he chose to
sanction only one version of words in certain
categories that had evolved with variant spell-
ings . For example, he listed words like "honor"
and "favor" without giving their historical
variants ending in "-our," "music" and "pub-
lic" without the final "k," "defense" and "of-
fense" with an "s" instead of a "c," "theater"
and "c enter" instead of their counterparts end-
ing in "-re," and "check" and "mask" rather
than "cheque" and "masque." While these
spellings were controversial at the time, they
ultimately came to be the preferred spellings
in the United States. However, many of
Webster's proposed spellings, such as
"imagin," "crum ," "wimmen," and "soop,"
never gained acceptance, and they were even-
tually dropped from later versions of his dic-
tionaries. 8 The 1806 Compendious Dictionary
was followed in 1807 and 1817 by concise
versions for schools. Although his early lexi-
cographical efforts were only moderately suc-
cessful commercially, the indefatigable
Webster was undaunted and turned his atten-
tion to compiling the first unabridged Ameri-
can dictionary, the work from which today's
Webster 's Third New International is directly
descended. Published in 1828 when Webster
was 70 yeaTS old, An American Dictionary of
the English Language was priced at $20 for
two large quarto volumes. 9 An announcement
in a contemporary newspaper noted that the
compilation had been completed "at the ex-
pense of twenty years of labor, and thirty
thousand dollars in money." 10 However, the
price and size of the work prohibited ready
sales, and it was 13 years before the printing of
2,500 copies had sold. 11
Although contemporary critics generally
praised Webster's skill at writing definitions,
they were less receptive to some of his unor-
thodox spellings and even more skeptical of
his etymologies. However, both proponents
and detractors generally acknowledged the
magnitude of Webster's accomplishment.
Twentieth-century scholars have corroborated
the assessments of their nineteenth-century
counterparts. James A.H. Murray, editor of
the Oxford English Dictionary, praised
28 8 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
"Webster as "a bom definer of words'" who
"produced a work of great originality and
value." George Krapp called it a "significant
contribution to the growth of English lexicog-
raphy" but noted that Webster's 1828 work
was "only partially successful." While ac-
knowledging that "Webster's work had seri-
ous flaws," Joseph Friend concludes that "he
wrote definitions that were more accurate,
more comprehensive, and not less carefully
divided and ordered than any previously done
in English lexicography." Richard Rollins
observes that Webster's "finisnedproduct was,
by all standards, a monumental achievement.
With 70,000 words all written out by his own
hand, it was indeed a massive work, the last
major dictionary ever compiled by a single
individual." 12
Prominent individuals such as John Jay
praised Webster's work, andpublishers, courts,
colleges, schools, and other establishments
began using it as their authority. 13 An abridged
edition, compiledby Joseph Emerson Worces-
ter, became available in 1 829 in a reasonably
priced octavo volume. This version sold well
and insured the distribution and influence of
Webster's dictionary among ordinary indi-
viduals in addition to the institutions and
monied class who had been able to purchase
the two-volume edition. In 1841 a second
edition of the unabridged appeared, contain-
ing an additional 5,000 words. However, the
price of $15 for the two- volume set placed it
beyond the reach of many potential purchas-
ers, and anumber of unbound copies remained
at the time of Webster's death in 1843. 14
George and Charles Merriam
Fortuitously, it was atthispointthatGeorge
and Charles Merriam made a decision to enter
the dictionary publishing business. The
Merriam brothers had moved to Springfield,
Massachusetts, in 1831 to establish a book-
store and printing office. Advertisements from
the period indicate that they sold a variety of
merchandise ranging from wallpaper and
church music to pencils and toothbrushes. 15
They also began publishing textbooks, Bibles,
and legal works. Thus, when the opportunity
arose for them to purchase the remaining
unbound sheets ofthcAmerican Dictionary of
1841 from the Amherst, Massachusetts, firm
of J.S. & C. Adams, the Merriams were ready
to expand their publishing venture in that
direction. Astute businessmen, the brothers
also purchased from Webster ' s heirs the rights
to publish revisions. 16
Soon after making the investment that
would permanently change the nature of their
enterprise, the Merriams developed plans to
issue a revised and enlarged edition of the
dictionary. Recognizing that the task was too
large for any one individual, they enlisted
Chauncey A. Goodrich, a professor at Yale
and Webster's son-in-law, as principal editor
and then assembled a distinguished group of
scholars and specialists to assist him. Among
the other editors were William Tully, who had
edited the scientific terms forthe 1 841 edition;
Noah Porter and S.W. Barnum, both profes-
sors at Yale University; and William G.
Webster, Noah Webster's son. Other Yale
scholars were asked to serve as specialists for
certain disciplines, such as chemistry, math-
ematics, astronomy, and law, while James D.
Dana, a renowned scientist and editor of the
American Journal of Sciences and Arts, was
responsible for geology. 17 Thus began the
Merriam- Webster tradition of using a schol-
arly corps of editors and specialists to produce
lexicographical works.
The new one-volume revised edition of
An American Dictionary of the English Lan-
guage was published in 1847 at a price of $6.
"Merchandisers with a keen eye for a market
and a sound knowledge of how to sell books in
quantity," the Merriam brothers predicted
correctly that the lower price would stimulate
sales so that the total amount of profits would
increase even though the profit per copy would
decrease. 18 In 1 850, in accordance with an act
of the state legislature, about 3,000 copies of
the dictionary were distributed to the school
m*
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 289
districts of Massachusetts, and similar pro-
grams were adopted by New Jersey and the
state of New York. 19
Praise poured in from all directions. A
statement signedby 104 members of Congress
read: "It is with pleasure that we greet thisnew
and valuable contribution to American litera-
ture. We recommend it to all who desire to
possess the most complete, accurate and reli-
able dictionary of the language." 20 Three presi-
dents — James K. Polk, Zachary Taylor, and
Millard Fillmore — also provided glowing en-
dorsements, but perhaps the most unexpected
approval came from England when John
Ogilvie wrote in his preface to the The Impe-
rial Dictionary, published in 1850, that
Webster's was "acknowledged both in this
country and in America to be . . . superior to
. . . every other dictionary hitherto pub-
lished.'* 21
Reviews in the press were equally favor-
able. A lengthy commentary published in the
NeH>i?«g/art<ie/moted that Professor Goodrich
"has given to the work, a completeness, full-
ness, and accuracy, hitherto unattained in a
work of this kind" and concluded that
we can not but view it as a sort of representa-
tive of the English mind in its present ad-
vanced state — as a transcript in miniature of
the intellectual progress of the age — as a
synopsis of arts, science, philosophy, truth in
nature and truth in morals; in fine of all
knowledge within the range of human investi-
gation, so far as these maybe exhibited through
the great medium of thought. 22
Moreover, the London Literary Gazette de-
clared the work "a noble monument of erudi-
tion and indefatigable research; and the style
and accuracy of its typography would do
honorto the press of any country in Europe" 23
The success of the 1847 edition of the
American Dictionary was due not only to its
reasonable price but also to Goodrich's re-
moval of "most of the Websterian crotchets
which still remained from the original (1828)
work." 24 Mindful of the numerous objections
to Webster's orthographic practices, Goodrich
eliminated many of Webster's more radical
reform spellings (e.g., "chimistry," "fether,"
"melasses," "ribin,""zink") andrestored those
words to their more acceptable forms. In addi-
tion, he showed both forms of other controver-
sial spellings (e.g., "center" and "centre,"
"defense" and "defence"). Pronunciations
were also revised to reflect the most recent
authorities. 25 The new work included approxi-
mately 85,000 entries in the main section and
also contained supplementary tables of scrip-
ture names, Greek and Latin proper names,
and modern geographical names. 25
War of the Dictionaries
Following the 1847 publication of the
American Dictionary ; competitive skirmishes
between the Merriams and the publishers of
another lexicographer, Joseph Emerson
Worcester, increased and eventually esca-
lated until they came to be called "the War of
the Dictionaries," Stemming from events that
had transpired prior to Noah Webster' s death,
the war was fought in several stages and on
various fronts and is generally conceded to
have lasted from 1834 to 1864. A number of
studies of this fascinating bit of Merriam-
Webster's history treat thisperiodin far greater
detail than space allows in this chapter. 27
The opening stage for the first battle in
this war was set when Joseph Worcester, the
lexicographer who had been responsible for
the 1 829 abridged edition of Webster's Ameri-
can Dictionary, published his own dictionary
in 1830. Worcester's Comprehensive Pro-
nouncing and Explanatory Dictionary of the
English Language (Boston: Hilliard, Gray,
Little, and Wilkins) was favorably received,
particularly by those factions who had op-
posed Webster's somewhat unorthodox spell-
ings and pronunciation, including "the Anglo-
phile group in Massachusetts and those of
conservative tendencies around the country." 28
As sales of Worcester's dictionary climbed,
Webster for the first time had a formidable
American rival. On November 26, 1834, an
article appeared in the Worcester Palladium
290 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
accusing Worcester of taking advantage of his
earlier association with Webster and "appro-
priating to his own benefit the valuable labors,
acquisitions, and productions of Mr.
Webster." 29 Worcester's dignified response,
published in the Palladium of December 3,
1834, denied any plagiarism while providing
particulars on his agreement with Webster in
working on the abridgement and pointing out
the variety of differences between his work
and Webster' s. In a letter in the December 1 1 ,
1834, issue of the Palladium t Webster re-
sponded to both the original editorial and
Worcester' s reply, acknowledging that he felt
some plagiarism had occurred. For more than
a year, letters between Worcester and Webster
on this issue were published in the Palladium,
with the cycle ending on March 25, 183 5. 30 Of
this first phase of the War of the Dictionaries,
Friend concludes: "In genera], Worcester's
defense is a good deal more impressive than
Webster's accusations, which tend to grow
querulous toward the end of the duel and
reveal clearly that the older man felt his live-
lihood endangered by the popular acceptance
of the Comprehensive" 31
The second phase of the war was not quite
as civil as the first. Carried out primarily by the
publishers of the competing dictionaries, this
phase of "Worcester vs. Webster came to
mean not only linguistic conservatives and
moderates vs. radicals and liberals, but, with
some inevitable extremist distortion and over-
simplification, Anglophiles vs. Americanizers,
Boston-Cambridge-Harvard vs, New Haven-
Yale, upperclass elegance vs. underbred Yan-
kee uncouthness." 32 This second stage of the
controversy was sparked by fierce competi-
tion for sales following the publication of
Worcester's Universal and Critical Dictio-
nary of the English Language in 1846 and
Goodrich's unabridged edition of Webster's
American Dictionary in 1847. Accusations
and counter-accusations were made through
the press, and pamphlets fanning the flames
were distributed by both G. & C. Merriarn and
the publishers of Worcester's dictionaries.
Each side extended the competition to garner-
ing and publishing endorsements and testimo-
nials from prominent individuals, including
college presidents, statesmen, authors, and
booksellers. Matters were exacerbated by an
unfortunate incident in 1 853 when Worcester's
dictionary was published in London with the
added notation on the title page "compiled
from the materials of Noah Webster, LL.D,,
by Joseph E. Worcester." 33 Although the Brit-
ish publisher was obviously at fault, the
Merriams were quick to claim this statement
as an acknowledgement of Worcester's debt
to Webster.
In the course of planning anewprinting of
the 1847 edition to be published in 1859, the
Merriams learned that Worcester was prepar-
ing a third edition of his work that would be
illustrated. Deciding that the new words and
supplements, including a 300-page section of
synonyms, they were adding would not be
sufficient to compete with an illustrated
Worcester, the Merriams hastily made ar-
rangements to insert a special section of illus-
trations at the front of their edition since there
was no time to place the illustrations within the
text. Thus, the title page of the 1859 edition
includes the claim that it is the first illustrated
American dictionary. 34 Upon the publication
of Worcester's illustrated^ Dictionary of the
English Language in 1860, the controversy
between the two rivals began anew. Again
reviewers in newspapers and periodicals made
claims for their favorites, and the publishers
issued pamphlets supporting their respective
publications by reprinting favorable notices
and reproducing endorsements from promi-
nent individuals. While the business tactics
and advertising strategies used during this
period appear to have frequently been unscru-
pulous, there is no doubt that the fierce com-
petition led to improvements in both works,
prompting a reviewer for theiVew York World
to conclude: "In some respects, Worcester and
Webster supplement each other, and every
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OP DICTIONARIES 291
literary man who can, will choose to have the
two." 35
The Merriams, however, were already
making plans for an entirely new edition.
Chauncey Goodrich had died in 1 860 but not
before choosing Noah Porter to be his succes-
sor. On Porter's advice, the German philolo-
gist C. A.F. Mann had been selected to replace
Webster's outmoded etymologies with ones
that reflected current scholarship. In addition,
a team of approximately 30 scholars hadbeen
chosen to serve as consultants in specific
fields, while an additional corps of readers,
writers, and editors worked on various other
aspects of the compilation.
In September 1864, during the midst of
the Civil War, the Royal Quarto Edition of An
American Dictionary of the English Language
rolled off the presses. Known as the Webster-
Mahn edition, it marked the beginning of the
end of the War of the Dictionaries, "ironically
by abandoning everything characteristic of
Webster and adopting Worcester's virtues." 36
As Raven I. McDavid has observed, the
Webster-Mahn edition was "the foundation of
the Merriam tradition; with professional edi-
tors and a growing file of citations, it soon
achieved preeminence — aided by the death of
Worcester and the failure of Worcester J s pub-
lishers to provide for further revisions," 37 The
removal of many of the controversial aspects
of Noah Webster's lexicography paved the
way formore general acceptance of the Ameri-
can Dictionary. Prominent literary figures
such as Ralph Waldo Emerson and John
Greenleaf Whittier acknowledged its author-
ity and superiority, and business establish-
ments, schools, legislative bodies, courts, and
publishers adopted it as their standard. It even
came to be the authority for the United States
Government Printing Office and the Supreme
Court. 38 In addition, the American Dictionary
enjoyed commercial success in Great Britain,
where it was distributed by George Bell &
Sons, and it was also sold throughout the
British Empire as well as to various Asian
countries. 39
Continuous Revision and
Expansion
Following the death of George Merriam
in 1 8 80 „ Orlando M. B aker became the driving
force in the company. Baker had joined the
firm as a representative of Ivison, Blakeman,
Taylor & Co. after they purchased Charles
Merriam' s shares in 1S77. 40 Concerned be-
cause the copyright on the 1847 edition was
due to expire in 1889, after which any printer
would be able to sell "Webster's Dictionary,"
Baker established a program of continuous
revision, with the goal of eventually produc-
ing an entirely new edition, while in the in-
terim offering several updated versions with
new features. Thus, the 1879 edition intro-
duced a biographical supplement that included
listings for 10,000 individuals, while the 1884
version added a gazetteer identifying more
than 22,000 place names. Other projects com-
pleted during this period included an 1882
edition designed specifically for subscription
purchase and several revisions of the National
Pictorial abridgement, which later was to
become Webster's Collegiate Dictionary, 41
Clearly the Merriam- Webster family of
dictionaries was expanding rapidly. By 1858
ten versions in addition to the unabridged
were available; the Royal Octavo, National
Pictorial, University, Counting House, Aca-
demic, High School, Common School, Pri-
mary, Pocket, and Army and Navy Pocket. 42
Some of these abridgements were leased to
other publishers, and the series of Webster
school dictionaries was later contracted to the
American Book Company, a New York firm
which agreed to publish and sell the books
while the Merriam Company maintained the
editorial content. 43
In 1 890 the culmination of ten years of
preparation by a large staff of editors, subject
authorities, and editorial assistants appeared
under the new title Webster's International
Dictionary. William A. Neilson, editor-in-
chief of the 1934 edition, observed that this
title change reflected "both the extension of
292 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
the vogue and authority of the work through-
out the English-speaking world, and ... the
inclusion of foreign scholars among its con-
tributors." 44 Produced again under the able
editorship of Noah Porter, assisted by Loomis
J. Campbell serving as general editor, the
work contained more than 175,000 entries,
56,000 more than the 1 864 edition. The effort
had cost the Merriams approximately
$334,000. As Robert Leavitt concluded, "Dic-
tionary making had become a task that could
be carried out only by a major business and
editorial institution." 45 The first Webster's
Collegiate Dictionary was published in 1 898.
The largest of the abridged dictionaries based
on the unabridged edition, its intent was "to
present the most essential parts of Webster's
International Dictionary in a compact and
convenient form, suited to the general reader
and especially to the college student." 46
Webster's New international
Dictionary
In 1900 a revision of Webster 's Interna-
tional with an additional 25,000 entries ap-
peared, and in 1 909 a completely new edition,
Webster's New International Dictionary, was
published at a cost of approximately half a
million dollars. Dr. William T. Harris, former
United States commissioner of education,
served as editor-in-chief of this edition, while
F. Sturges Allen was general editor. Their
staff included 50 specialists, 10 revising edi-
tors, and alarge number of readers, proofread-
ers, and other assistants. Noted scholars asso-
ciated with this edition included George Lyman
Kittredge and John Livingston Lowes of
Harvard and A.T. Hadley, president of Yale. 47
Containing more than 400,000 entries, the
New International initiated the use of the
divided page with less frequently used terms,
such as obsolete words and spellings, foreign
words and phrases, and abbreviations, re-
moved from the main alphabetical sequence
and placed in a separate section at the bottom
of each page. Since the lower section was in
finer print, this technique saved space. While
the 1 909 edition was not widely reviewed, the
critiques that did appear were mixed. The
reviewer for the Educational Review reacted
favorably, while the reviewer in the Nation
was less enthusiastic, finding the "treatment
of synonyms very satisfactory," but noting
that "the New International is extremely sus-
ceptible to the appeal of slang." 48 Reviewers
for Life and the New York Sun were generally
positive and were particularly impressed by
the increase in the number of words covered,
twice as many as in the 1890 edition. 49
The Second New International
Many of the specialists who had compiled
the 1909 edition were retained to continue
adding to the company's growing citation files
and to work on revising the other titles in the
Merriam-Webster family: the Collegiate (of
which new editions based on the 1909 un-
abridged edition were published in 1910, 1916,
and 193 1), the Reference History Edition of
the unabridged for subscription purchasers,
and the various dictionaries for schools that
were published by the American Book Com-
pany. Preparation for the next major revision
of the unabridged got underway in the 1920s,
and it developed into "perhaps the most ambi-
tious project in co-operative scholarship ever
undertaken in America up to that time." 50
William Allen Neilson, a Shakespeare scholar
and president of Smith College, was ap-
pointed editor-in-chief, while Thomas A.
Knott, formerly professor of English at the
University of Iowa, served as general editor.
Paul W. Carhart continued as pronunciation
editor while also serving as managing editor,
and Harold H. Bender of Princeton University
was appointed to revise the etymologies, In
addition to the staff in Springfield, the enter-
prise also depended on a corps of consultants
composed of 207 scholars, scientists, and other
authorities from throughout the country who
were responsible for "collecting, choosing,
and defining terms in their respective fields." 51
Another group of trained, professional read-
ers, as Thomas Knott recounts, "attacked thou-
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 293
sands of books, magazines, newspapers, and
catalogues in search of new or unrecorded
words, new meanings of old words, and evi-
dence about capitalization, accents, hyphens,
italics for foreign words, and plurals," a search
thatresulted in the collection of approximately
"1 ,665,000 citations with 'defining quotations,'
and nearly as many more from special fields
that called for further research." Knott went
on to describe the final stages of preparation
as a
pouring together of all the contributory
streams — literary and vernacular, geographi-
cal and biographical, scientific and technical,
pictorial, etymological, and pronunciations];
the exact 'styling' of the manuscript for spell-
ing, compounding, capitalization, etc; the
checking and correcting of hundreds of thou-
sands of cross references; and the final adjust-
ment and condensation of materials to make
themfitinto the allotted space of 3 ,350 pages.* 2
Heralded by its publishers as "the most
notable publishing event of the century" and
even "greater than its famous predecessors,"
the second edition of Webster '$ New Interna-
tional Dictionary appeared in 1934. 53 Pre-
pared at a cost of $1,300,000, the completely
revised work contained more than 550,000
vocabulary entries, "the largest number ever
included in a dictionary of any language." 54
The 36,000 names in the gazetteer, 13,000 in
the biographical dictionary, and 5,000 listings
in the new table of abbreviations brought the
total number of entries to more than 600,000.
All aspects of the work, including the illustra-
tions, had been examined and updated, or
replaced as necessary. In the preface, Neilson
pointed out the difficulties of finding space
"for thousands of new terms and new uses of
old terms " stemming from scientific advances,
new inventions, and changes in art, as well as
the effects of World War I on almost every
field of endeavor. In order to make room for
these new terms, most words that had become
obsolete before 1 500 were omitted, thus greatly
reducing the size of the section containing
obsolete words and cross-references at the
bottom of each page. Neilson noted that "tra-
ditional features that have stood the test of
time have been retained. . .but more important
has been the task of making the dictionary
serve as an interpreter of the culture and
civilization of today, as ISfoah Webster made
the first edition serve for the America of
1828." 55
For themostpart, reviewers of the second
edition of the New International agreed that it
admirably achieved this goal. The Saturday
Review of Literature and the American Mer-
cury both praised the work. 56 Writing in the
Nation, H.L. Mencken criticized the inconsis-
tent coverage of derivative terms and the
inclusion of English forms without specifying
the American preference (e.g., "tire," "tyre").
He also questioned the utility ofthe illustrative
quotations. However, Mencken concluded that
"the new Webster comes close enough to
completeness to be a very useful work." 57
William Lyon Phelps' commentary in
Scribner 's Magazine extolled the encyclope-
dic nature ofthe volume and added "it would
be difficult to praise ittoo highly." 58 The New
Yorker reviewer was particularly impressed
with the way in which the Merriam "corps of
citation-hunters" had gathered more than a
million examples of word usage by reading
"among other things, every word in
Shakespeare, the King James Bible, Fannie
Farmer's Cook Book, Sears Roebuck's cata-
logue, the works of Milton, Spenser, and
Tennyson, thoEncyclopaediaBritannica, four
hundred magazines, five hundred manu-
facturer's catalogues, countless menu cards,
and fifty daily newspapers." In addition, the
reviewer noted that the editors had solicited
the advice of 1 14 consultants throughout the
country in determining pronunciations of ques-
tionable words. 59
Reviews in scholarly journals tended to
be more critical, particularly regarding the
system of pronunciation, which Kemp Malone
in Modern Language Notes characterized as a
"relic of a pre-scientific age,"* The review in
American Speech concurred, observing that
the pronunciations were often "provincial and
294 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
unrepresentative" and that the failure to use
the International Phonetic Alphabet "hampers
the whole enterprise." 61 However, this was the
only serious complaint, and the remainder of
the review praised other aspects of the dictio-
nary, such as format, definitions, and etymol-
ogy. By the time the third edition of Webster 's
New International was published in 1961, the
second edition had become as revered as its
namesake.
Introduction of Specialized
Dictionaries
In the nearly 30 years that elapsed before
the publication of a new edition of the un-
abridged, the Merriam staff was busy with
revisions of the other dictionaries in their
charge as well as with compiling entirely new
works. The fifth and sixth editions of the
Collegiate appeared in 1936 and 1949, re-
spectively, while the first Webster 's Dictio-
nary of Synonyms was published in 1 942. This
new compilation allowed the editors to treat
synonyms in greater depth than in the New
International and to provide more extensive
coverage of antonyms and analogous and con-
trasted words. In addition, the work incorpo-
ratedmany illustrative quotations gleaned from
the firm's vast file of citations. In 1942, the
company issued Webster 's Biographical Dic-
tionary, which provided brief biographical
information for more than 40,000 significant
individuals from throughout history and also
indicated pronunciation and syllabic division
for the names included.
Perhaps in response to the criticisms of
the pronunciation system used in the second
edition of the New International, the Merriam
Company published A Pronouncing Dictio-
nary of American English in 1944. Compiled
by John Samuel Kenyon and Thomas Albert
Knott, the work utilized the International Pho-
netic Alphabet "to show the pronunciation of
cultivated colloquial English in the United
States." 62 Since regional differences frequently
affect pronunciation, the editors made an ef-
fort to record all acceptable variant pronun-
ciations. As this highly productive decade—
which is even more remarkable considering
the far-reaching effects of World War II —
drew to a close, the firm produced its first
Webster's Geographical Dictionary in 1949.
This gazetteer provided historical and geo-
graphical information on more than 40,000
places throughout the world. In addition, en-
tries indicated pronunciation for each place
and included population, area, and economic
data. A variety of maps and tables supple-
mented the text. The Geographical Dictio-
nary, the Biographical Dictionary, and the
Dictionary of Synonyms soon became staples
in even the smallest of reference collections.
Webster's Third
During the 1950s the Merriam staff con-
centrated on preparing a completely new edi-
tion of the unabridged dictionary. Philip Gove,
a member of the firm since 1946, became
general editor in 1952, and was appointed
editor-in-chief early in 196 1 . w Webster 's Third
New International Dictionary was published
in September of that year. In his preface to the
new edition, Gove calculated that it had been
produced at a cost of more than $3,500,000
and had "absorbed 757 editor-years," a figure
that did not include the time of the approxi-
mately 200 consultants or of typists and other
clerical assistants. Describing Webster 's Third
as "a completely new work, redesigned,
res ty led, and reset," Gove emphasized that
"every line of it is new." In order to provide
adequate treatment of the more than 450,000
words covered, the editors deleted most words
that had become obsolete by 1755. They also
revised the pronunciation key and included a
greater variety of acceptable pronunciations,
reflecting regional differences in "general
cultivated conversational usage . . . through-
out the English-speaking world." S4
In preparing Webster's Third, the edito-
rial staff continued the kind of citation-gather-
ing that had been used in compiling the previ-
THE MBRRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 295
ous edition, The resulting file of over
10,000,000 citations provided the basis for
writing definitions of new words and identify-
ing new usages of old words, a monumental
undertaking since the 1961 edition included
approximately 100,000 new words or new
meanings. The definitions were supplemented
by more than 3,000 black-and-white illustra-
tions and 20 full-color plates. 65 Remarking
that the English language "has already be-
come the most important language on earth,"
Gove asserted that the "new Merriam- Webster
unabridged is the record of this language as it
is written and spoken." 66
Instead of the acclaim that might have
been expected for this new edition of a vener-
ated work, the appearance of Webster 's Third
sparked an unprecedented critical controversy
that had repercussions for more than a decade.
Early rumblings of discontent following
Merriam' s press releases soon reached earth-
quake proportions. Thus began a new episode
in the history of the Merriam company that
was to test the firm's staff much as the War of
the Dictionaries had tested their nineteenth-
century forebears. The news media and popu-
lar press launched scathing attacks on the
Third's permissiveness, with reviewers' sen-
timents reflected in such headlines as
"Webster's Lays an Egg," "Keep Your Old
Webster's," "Sabotage in Springfield," and
"It 'Ain't' Good." 67 The New York Times,
which termed the work a "disastrous" devel-
opmentand faulted the editors fornot livingup
to their public responsibility to provide "a
peerless authority on American English," later
directed its staff "to follow Webster's Second
Edition for spelling and usage" and use
Webster's Third "only for new, principally
scientific words." 68 An editorial in Life an-
nouncing that the publication would continue
to depend on Webster 's Second for such mat-
ters as style and good English, deplored the
inclusion in Webster's Third of such "non-
words" as "irregardless" and "finalize" and
accused the dictionary of "joining the say-as-
you-go school of permissive English" and all
but abandoning "any effort to distinguish be-
tween good and bad usage." 69
In his response to the New York Times
editorial, Philip Gove commented:
When a peerless newspaper that in 110 years
has proved itself again and again to be the
most respected and reputable everyday pro-
fessional user of words in the United States
attacks an established organization that has
been from an even longer time a respected and
reputable observer and recorder of word us-
age, the impact is bound to disturb a good
many people.
He observed that the compilers of Webster's
Third relied heavily on the evidence gathered
from daily newspapers and general periodi-
cals to determine current patterns of language
usage and had in fact quoted the New York
Times more than 700 times. Govt concluded
that "whether you or I or others who fixed our
linguistic notions several decades ago like it or
not," the language of the 1960s is not the
languageof the 1920s and 1930s. 70 Ina shorter
missive to the editor of Life, Gove asserted:
"The responsibility of a dictionary is to record
the language, not set its style. For us to attempt
to prescribe the language would be like Life
reporting the news as its editors would prefer
it to happen." 71
Gove must have soon decided, however,
that he could not respond to every negative
review of Webster's Third, for such reviews
continued to appear with depressing regular-
ity. The editor of the American Bar Associa-
tion Journal aligned that publication with the
New York Times and Life, calling the third
edition "a serious blow" that "has recently
befallen the cause of good English" and con-
cluding that it "will be of no use to us." The
reviewer for Library Journal termed the dic-
tionary "indispensable for its new (and re-
vised old) material, deplorable for its whole-
sale abridgements — as well as its obfuscation
of the boundaries between prestige and non-
prestige usages." In one of the most vicious
reviews, Wilson Follett, writing for the Atlan-
tic, proclaimed that "the anxiously awaited
work that was to have crowned cisatlantic
linguistic scholarship with a particular glory
turns out to be a scandal and a disaster." Follett
faulted the editors for whittling away at "tra-
a" 'JJUJW^
296 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
ditionary controls " for excessive use of con-
temporary quotations, and for defining terms
with "some of the oddestprose ever concocted
by pundits.*' 72
In a lengthy review for the New Yorker,
Dwight Macdonald found little to praise and
much to disparage, concluding that the lexi-
cographers who compiled Webster's Third
"have untuned the string, made a sop of the
solid structure of English, and encouraged the
language to eat up himself." 73 Macdonald's
review expounded on many of the objections
and concerns voiced by other critics. Most of
these early complaints fell into five major
categories: (1) the elimination of certain usage
labels, such as "colloquial" and "vulgar," and
the drastic reduction of terms labelled "slang,"
which resulted in words such as "ain't," "fi-
nalize," "goof," and "enthuse" being listed
with no restrictive labels; (2) the use of illus-
trative quotations from many contemporary
individuals who were not noted for their facil-
ity with language, e.g., Ethel Merman, Polly
Adler, and Willie Mays; (3) the omission of
much of the encyclopedic material, including
the biographical dictionary and gazetteer; (4)
the use (with the exception of "God") of
lower-case letters for words traditionally capi-
talized, e.g. "hawaiian," "christmas"; and (5)
the omission of the pronunciation key at the
bottom of each page. In short, as one favorable
reviewer put it: "The essential complaint
against Webster 's Third is that it professes to
be authoritative, while its critics want it to be
authoritarian." 74
Not all of the reviews in the popular press
were negative, however. The Louisville Times
noted that "no language remains constantfrom
one generation to another" and concluded that
Webster's Third "is the new authority on our
language." Describing the work as "all that the
seekers after truth could hope for," the St.
Louis Post-Dispatch considered it "a stagger-
ing accomplishment," while the Christian
Science Monitor characterized the third edi-
tion as "an intensely interesting and distin-
guished scholarly work, an important mile-
stone in the history of a particularly living,
flexible, and beautiful language."Referringto
the various negative reviews and editorials as
"a flurry of nitwitted commentary," the re-
view in Editor & Publisher pointed out that
"the Webster editors are conforming with
scholarly conclusions that have developed
over the last half-century and are now so
firmly established as to be beyond question."
Moreover, in an article in the Atlantic, Bergen
Evans called "the storm of abuse" that the
popular press had showered on Webster's
77»>^a"curiousphenomenon.''Afterrespond-
ing to a number of the specific criticisms
regarding the dictionary's "permissiveness,"
Evans concluded: "anyone who solemnly an-
nounces in the year 1 962 that he will be guided
in matters of English usage by a dictionary
published in 1934 is talking ignorant and pre-
tentious nonsense." 75
In addition, the reception of Webster's
Third abroad was generally very positive.
Observing that "the new Webster is first and
fore-most a dictionary of present-day En-
glish," the London Times Literary Supplement
noted that its American origin should not
trouble British users since "the British forms
are included as well." Randolph Quirk, writ-
ing in the New Statesman, termed the new
edition "magnificent and meticulously com-
plete," and, while he criticized certain edito-
rial decisions, he concluded that "the publica-
tion of the new Webster is a major event in the
lexicography ofEnglish."Reviewers for other
British publications, such as the Glasgow
Herald, the Scotsman, and the Manchester
Guardian Weekly, wrote in a similarly admir-
ing vein, with no evidence of the vitriolic
prose penned by their American counterparts. 76
Most of the initial reviews of Webster's
Third in the popular American press were
written by journalists or other lay writers.
Following a delay of about a year, however,
calmer, more rational commentary began to
appear in scholarly journals. Written by En-
glish teachers and professors, linguists, and
lexicographers, these reviews tempered criti-
cism of various aspects of the Third with
mm
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 297
recognition and understanding of the linguis-
tic principles upon which the dictionary was
based and with admiration for the work's
many positive features. Clarence L. Bamhart,
who considered Webster's Thirdly far the
largest andbest descriptive dictionary of mod-
em English," provided a detailed synthesis of
many of the scholarly reviews in an article
published in American Speech? 1
Representative of some of the scholarly
commentary is an article in College English in
which Atcheson L. Hench criticized the work' s
inadequate labelling and inconsistency in pro-
viding historical explanations but concluded
that it was "on the whole a magnificent com-
pilation." R.W. Burchfield, editor of the
Supplement to the Oxford English Dictionary,
commended the editors of Webster 's Third for
using contemporary quotations as a basis for
much of the dictionary; however, he ques-
tioned other editorial decisions, such as the
use of lower-case initial letters for proper
names and the abandonment of many restric-
tive labels. In his critique, Harold Allen re-
marked that Webster's Third "already has
established its worth among responsibleschol-
ars and critics ." The noted Hungarian lexicog-
rapher, Ladislas Orszagh, was more whole-
heartedly enthusiastic about Webster's Third
than his American and English colleagues,
calling it "not only a monument of learning,
the significant and welcoming breaking of
fresh ground in English lexicography, but also
a matchless precision instrument, a standard
work not likely to be surpassed in the remain-
ing years of our century." 78
The controversy over Webster's Third
generated a remarkable number of reviews
and scholarly articles. It even resulted in works
devoted to the controversy itself. In 1962,
James Sledd and Wilma Ebbitt compiled a
casebook of many of the early newspaper and
magazine reviews, while Raven I. McDavid
later analyzed the critical commentary that
had appeared prior to the official date of
publication of Webster's Third. Noting the
many similarities in content and wording
among the various news stories about the
Third published between September 6 and
September 28, 1961, McDavid concluded that
the articles were based on information con-
tained in Merriam' s initial press release, which
apparently focused on such aspects of the
dictionary as the use of illustrative quotations
from contemporary sports and entertainment
figures, the inclusion of various terms (such as
"beatnik" and "goof) generally considered
slang orinformal, andthe description of "ain't"
as "used orally in most parts of the United
States by cultivated speakers." The news me-
dia seized on these and other statements in the
release as novelties or innovations and then
reacted to them. Thus, ironically, by identify-
ing and promoting those very features that
were most controversial, the press release
played a significantrole in provoking the early
negative publicity. 79
Other scholars have tried to identify the
reasons why many reviewers responded with
such intense hostility. Karl W. Dykema attrib-
uted the excessive criticism in part to cultural
lag, terming some of the reviewers "medi-
eval" in their thinking about language. Walter
J. Ong agreed with Dykema but also proposed
the theory that people were accustomed to
dictionaries based almost entirely on the writ-
ten language and thus were not prepared for
Webster 's Third, which had achieved a break-
through by representing oral communication
to a much greater degree. A decade later,
Rosemary M. Laughlin traced the vehemence
of the negative reviews to the "social and
psychological milieu" oftheearly 1960s. More
recently, David Gold viewed the debate from
the perspective of 25 years later, concluding
thatmostof thejustified criticisms centered on
the Third's underlabeling, which was seen as
permissiveness. 80 Today, most people would
agree with the recent assessment in General
Reference Books for Adults that "Webster's
Third New International Dictionary is widely
recognized as the most authoritative general
American dictionary of its kind." 81
For the Merriam-Webster staff who had
labored so long and hard over the third edition
of the unabridged, the "lexicographical don-
298 DISTINGUISHED CLAS SICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
nybrook" that greeted its publication must
have been disheartening, 82 To make matters
worse, in 1962 they were faced with the pos-
sibility of a takeover by American Heritage
Publishing Company, whose president, James
Parton, had been particularly critical of the
Third. Forbes reported that if Parton gained
control of the Merriam firm, he intended to
"retire the Third Edition, reissue the Second,
and undertake a revision of the badly botched
Third." Parton' s attempts to purchase control-
ling shares were unsuccessful, however, and
in September 1 964 Encyclopaedia Britannica,
Inc., acquired the G. & C. Merriam Co. 83
Other Merriam-Webster
Dictionaries
Meanwhile, the task of compiling and
revising dictionaries continued unabated. In
1963, the first collegiate dictionary based on
Webster's Third was published. Webster's
Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary, contain-
ing approximately 130,000 entries, received a
much warmer reception than did its parent
volume, perhaps because some of the features
that had been criticized in the Third were not
replicated in the collegiate version. For ex-
ample, theSeventh New Collegiate retainedits
encyclopedic material, such as its gazetteer
and biographical section; capitalized proper
names; and provided a brief pronunciation
key at the bottom of every other page. 84 How-
ever, one disgruntled reviewer compared the
1963 Collegiate with its 1949 predecessor,
particularly in the wording of definitions and
in usage labels, and concluded that the Sev-
enth "presents a mess the like of which has
perhaps been unknown since the Augean stable
before Herakles' visit." 85
Appearing in 1973, the eighth edition of
the Collegiate was entitled simply Webster's
New Collegiate Dictionary. With salesof more
than a million copies a year, the eighth edition
became thebest-selling dictionary in the United
States. Kenneth Kister attributed this phe-
nomenal success to one reason: ''Webster's
New Collegiate is an outstanding dictionary."
Realistically, however, some credit must be
given to the innovative advertisements used to
promote the dictionary, described by Publish-
ers Weekly as "one of the most imaginative ad
campaigns conducted for any hardcover book
every published." 86 The New Collegiate added
approximately 22,000 new words and mean-
ings, including almost all of the previously
taboo common terms referring to sexual and
other bodily functions and organs. It also
revised its treatment of synonyms to a brief
statement providing the shared meaning of
similar terms. 87
Having added an eight-page Addenda
Section to Webster's Third in 1966 and then
doubling it to 16 pages in 1971, the Merriam
editors produced a separate supplement, 6, 000
Words, in 1976. Reflecting the tremendous
growth in the English language over a 1 5 -year
period, 6,000 Words also demonstrated that its
publisher couldbe receptive to criticism, since
the editors used capital letters for proper nouns
and adjectives. Merriam continued to update
the Addenda in Webster's Third every five
years and published additional cumulative
supplementary volumes, 9,000 Words and
12,000 Words, in 1983 and 1986, respectively.
Webster's New Dictionary of Synonyms ap-
peared in 1968, while Webster's New Geo-
graphical Dictionary, expanded to 47,000 en-
tries, was published in 1972. These revisions
were followed by two new titles: Webster 's
Secretarial Handbook in 1974 and Webster's
Collegiate Thesaurus in 1976.
The 1980s were an especially active de-
cade for the Merriam Company, which offi-
cially changed its name to Merriam-Webster
Inc. in 1982. In 1983, two of its established
publications appeared in new editions:
Webster's Ninth New Collegiate Dictionary
and Webster 's New Biographical Dictionary.
The Ninth New Collegiate introduced several
new features: usage notes accompany ap-
proximately 100 entries "for words posing
special problems of confused or disputed us-
age," and generic terms are followed by the
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 299
date of the earliest established occurrence of
that sense of the word. 88 Surprisingly, shades
of the controversy over the 1 96 1 edition of the
unabridged surfaced in some of the reviews of
the Ninth Collegiate. The review in the Nation
referred to the new Collegiate as "a model of
scholarship, a delight to read and a genuine
description of our language," while American
Speech termed it "the best Collegiate to date."
On the other hand, Fortune commented that
"it is hard to believe that the lexicographers'
new permissiveness is good for our language,"
and a mixed review in New York regretfully
observed that "the new Collegiate seems to
demonstrate a preference for allowing two
words to function interchangeably rather than
reserving each to mean something slightly
different." 89 Nonetheless, Webster 'sNinth New
Collegiate Dictionary is the best-selling dic-
tionary in the United States today, with more
than 6.4 million copies sold between its pub-
lication in 1983 and the end of 1989. 90
Other publications revised during the
1 980s included the three dictionaries designed
to span the years from elementary grades
through high school. Variously titled and for-
matted over the years, the series now includes:
Webster 's Elementary Dictionary (previously
Webster's Beginning Dictionary and before
that Webster 's New Elementary Dictionary),
intended for students in the fourth through
sixth grades; Webster's Intermediate Dictio-
nary, aimed at students in grades five through
eight; and Webster's School Dictionary (for-
merly Webster's New Students Dictionary),
designed for high school students.
In the second half of the decade Merriam-
Webster published a number of new titles.
Webster's Standard American Style Manual
and Webster's Medical Desk Dictionary ap-
peared in 1986, followed in 1989 by Webster's
Word Histories and Webster's Dictionary of
English Usage. The approximately 2,300 en-
tries in the latter treat many of the disputed
usages that made Webster 's Third so contro-
versial. Entries include illustrative quotations
of both historical and contemporary usage and
also summarize the opinions of noted authori-
ties on usage. Clearly Merriam- Webster is not
prepared to rest on its laurels and confine itself
simply to publishing revisions of its standard
publications.
Merriam*Webster Today
As the twentieth century draws to a close,
Merriam-Websteris in the process of convert-
ing all of its publications to machine-readable
form. The company plans to begin publishing
electronic versions of its dictionaries in con-
junction with its corporate affiliate Britannica
Software, and it may eventually release some
electronic products on its own. 91 Meanwhile,
Merriam- Webster has authorized other com-
panies to use its works in electronic formats.
For instance, in 1989 Webster's Ninth New
Collegiate Dictionary became available on
CD-ROM for use with the Macintosh personal
computer. Frederick C. Mish„ Merriam
Webster's current editorial director, points
out that this product's graphic capability
"makes it different from other electronic dic-
tionaries. It reproduces the dictionary page in
its entirety, including pronunciation charac-
ters, etymologies, illustrations, and tables." 92
In addition, the CD-ROM includes "digitally
recorded pronunciations of each main entry
word." 93 Mish observes that the CD-ROM
gives only one pronunciation for each entry;
therefore, the Merriam- Webster editors were
faced with the difficult decision of choosing
which pronunciation to include since the first
one listed in the dictionary is not necessarily
more common or better than the others. The
editors also checked all of the recorded pro-
nunciations for accuracy. 94
Another product utilizing Merriam-
Webster publications is the NeXT computer
academic workstation introduced by Steven
P. Jobs in 1988. At the time of its release,
William A. Llewellyn, president of Merriam-
Webster, noted that the system provides ac-
cess to the "entire contents of the Ninth Colle-
giate Dictionary, including the illustrations
300 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
and the tables, phis the entire contents of the
Collegiate Thesaurus.^ 5 In addition,
Canpton's Multimedia Encyclopedia, pro-
duced in 1989, provides access to the defini-
tions of the approximately 60,000 words in
Webster's Intermediate Dictionary and in-
cludes an audio component that gives the
pronunciation of approximately 1,500 of the
terms . ss
The Merriam-Webster firm currently pub-
lishes more than 30 dictionaries, handbooks,
and other reference books. The editorial staff
continues to rely heavily on the citation file,
which now includes more than 14 million
citations, In addition, each editor spends a
portion of the day reading a variety of maga-
zines, newspapers, and books and marking
new citations to be recorded on 3" x 5" slips,
adding between 12,000 to 25,000 slips to the
file each month. Editors look not only for
"examples of new words and for unusual
applications of familiar words" but also for
"evidence of the current status of variant spell-
ings, inflected forms, and the stylings of com-
pound words" as well as for "examples that
maybe quotable as illustrations of typical use"
and other useful information. Beginning with
the mid-1980s, citations have alsobeen stored
in machine-readable form. Since the citation
file includes not only the specific citation but
also the surrounding text, the machine-read-
able version can be searched to establish evi-
dence of frequency of certain collocations as
well as to determine changes in traditional
words and meanings. 97
In addition to its mammoth citation file,
the Merriam-Webster staff maintains a pro-
nunciation file, which currently includes ap-
proximately 750,000 slips. Each 3" x 5" slip
contains a transcription of the pronunciation
of a word and also notes the date, the name of
the speaker, and other appropriate identifying
information. Pronunciation editors gather the
evidence for these slips by listening to radio
and television broadcasts, by monitoring short-
wave radio broadcasts, and by taking notes
during meetings, conferences, and other en-
counters with live speech. 98
When asked in early 1990 about rumors
that Merriam-Webster was not planning to
publish a fourth edition of the unabridged,
Frederick Mish responded: "I am confident
that there will be a fourth edition in time but
not very soon," explaining that the company
first had to create a machine-readable version
of Webster 's Third and that preliminary steps
hadbeen taken in thatregard. Mish added that
he did "not expect the fourth edition to be as
different from the third as the third was from
the second," noting that the Merriam-Webster
editors still subscribe to the same definition of
the role of the dictionary promulgated by the
previous edition."
Even before 1 889, the year that the copy-
right expired on the 1 847 edition of Webster's
American Dictionary of the English Lan-
guage, the Merriam Company had to contend
with the problem of other publishers produc-
ing "Webster's" dictionaries and thus taking
advantage of the prestige and salability of the
Webster name. For more than a century, the
firm was involved in various litigations in an
attempt to retain the name "Webster" for its
exclusive use. Decisions in such suits as those
involving the Saalfield Co. in 1917 and the
World Publishing Company in 1949 have,
while restricting the advertising claims of
other publishers, indicated that the name
"Webster' s" is in the public domain and there-
fore can be used by any publisher. In its 1 949
ruling, the Federal Trade Commission con-
cluded: "The greater weight of the evidence is
that to the public the word 'Webster's ' simply
means a dictionary. It does not mean any
particular dictionary, nor the dictionary of a
particular publishing company." 100 Therefore,
to protect its heritage as literary successors to
Noah Webster, the Merriam firm uses several
registered trademarks to identify its publica-
tions, including the familiar colophon consist-
ing of a wreath encircling Noah Webster's
monogram, the words "A Merriam-Webster,"
and the word "Collegiate." 101
As the 150th anniversary of the publica-
tion of the first Merriam-Webster dictionary
approaches, the firm's position as one of the
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 301
most prestigious publishers of dictionaries in
the world remains secure. Thus, it is safe and
comforting to assume that Merriam-Webster
trademarks, symbolizing a commitment to
scholarship and editorial excellence, will grace
the title pages of dictionaries and other refer-
ence works for many years to come.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
The Unabridged
An American Dictionary of the English Language, by
Noah Webster. 2 vols. New York: S. Converse,
1828.
An American Dictionary of the English Language:
First Edition in Octavo, Containing the Whole
Vocabulary of the Quarto, with Corrections,
Improvements, and Several Thousand Addi-
tional Words . . ., by Noah Webster. 2 vols. New
Haven: The Author, 1841.
An American Dictionary of the English Language,
by Noah Webster; revised and enlarged by
Chauncey A. Goodrich. Springfield, MA:
George and Charles Merriam, 1847.
An American Dictionary of the English Language, by
Noah Webster; thoroughly revised, and greatly
enlarged and improved by Chauncey A,
Goodrich and Noah Porter. Royal Quarto Edi-
tion. 2 vols. Springfield, MA: G. & C. Merriam,
1864.
Webster's International Dictionary of the English
Language, revised and enlarged under the su-
pervision of Noah Porter. Springfield, MA: G.
& C. Merriam & Co., 1890.
Webster 's New International Dictionary of the En-
glish Language, W.T. Harris, editor in chief; F.
Sturges Allen, general editor. Springfield, MA:
G. & C. Merriam Company, 1909.
Webster's New International Dictionary of the En-
glish Language, edited by William Allan Neilson,
Thomas A. Knott, and Paul W. Carhart. 2nd ed .,
unabridged. Springfield, MA: G. & C. Merriam
Company, 1934.
Webster 's Third New International Dictionary of the
English Language, edited by Philip Babcock
Gove and the Merriam-Webster editorial staff.
Springfield, MA: G. & C, Merriam Co., 1961.
Supplements to the above have been pub-
lished as follows:
6,000 Words: A Supplement to Webster's Third New
International Dictionary. Springfield, MA: G.
& C. Merriam Co., 1976.
9, 000 Words: A Supplement to Webster '$ Third New
International Dictionary. Springfield, MA:
Merriam-Webster Inc., 1983.
J 2,000 Words: A Supplement to Webster's Third
New International Dictionary. Springfield, MA:
Merriam-Webster Inc., 1986.
The Collegiate
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. Springfield, MA:
G.&C. Merriam, 1898.
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. [2nd ed.] Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1910.
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. 3rd ed. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1916.
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. 4th ed. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1931 .
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary. 5th ed. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co,, 1936.
Webster 'sNew Collegiate Dictionary. 6thed. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1949.
Webster's Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary.
Springfield, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1963.
Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary. [8th ed.]
Springfield, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1973.
Webster's Ninth New Collegiate Dictionary. Spring-
field, MA: Merriam-Webster Inc., 1983.
Selected Other Dictionaries
Webster 's Biographical Dictionary. Springfield, MA:
G. & C. Merriam Co., 1943.
Webster's New Biographical Dictionary. Spring-
field, MA: Merriam-Webster, Inc., 1983.
Webster's Dictionary of Synonyms; A Dictionary of
Discriminated Synonyms with Antonyms and
Analogous and Contrasted Words. Springfield,
MA: G. & C Merriam Co., 1942.
Webster's New Dictionary of Synonyms; A Dictio-
nary of Discriminated Synonyms with Antonyms
and Analogous and Contrasted Words. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1968.
Webster's Geographical Dictionary. Springfield,
MA: G. & C. Merriam Co., 1949.
Webster's New Geographical Dictionary. Spring-
field, MA: G. & C Merriam Co., 1972.
Note: At frequent intervals between ma-
jor editions, Merriam-Webster dictionaries
are issued in revised versions with new copy-
right dates.
302 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The amount of secondary material per-
taining to Merriarn-Webster and its publica-
tions is remarkably rich and varied. More than
100 articles and reviews have been written on
Webster's Third New International Dictio-
nary alone. This bibliography is, of necessity,
highly selective. The following articles and
books were chosen either for their coverage of
variousperiods inMerriam- Webster' s history
or for their representative commentaries on
Merriam-Webster's major dictionaries. This
selection, includes a mixture of scholarly and
general publications to insure that a certain
percentage of the items will be readily avail-
able in most public and academic libraries.
Algeo, John. "American Lexicography." In
Warterbucher: Ein Internationales Handbuch
zur Lexikographie/Dictionaries: An Interna-
tional Encyclopedia ofLexicography .... vol. 2,
edited by Franz Josef Hausmann, 1987-2009.
Berlin; Walter de Gruyter, 1990.
Barnhart, Clarence L. "American Lexicography,
1945-1973." American Speech 53 (Spring,
1978): 83-140.
Beriet, William Rose, "Noah's Ark: The Origin and
Making of Webster's International Dictionary."
Saturday Review of Literature 15 (January 2,
1937): 3-4,14-16.
Burkett, Eva Mae. American Dictionaries of the
English Language before J 861. Metuchen, NJ:
Scarecrow Press, 1979.
Carter, Robert A. "The War of Words." Publishers
Weekly (October 2, 1987): 27-28, 33-36.
Chadbourne, Robert. "Keeping Up with the Conver-
sation: Merriam- Webster Is on the Job." Wilson
Library Bulletin 62 (September, 1987): 41-44.
Dykema, Karl W, "Cultural Lag and Reviewers of
Webster III." AAUP Bulletin 49 (December,
1963): 364-69.
Friend, Joseph H. The Development of American
Lexicography, 1798-1864. The Hague: Mou-
ton, 1967.
G. & C. Merriam Co. 100th Anniversary of the
Establishment ofG. & C. Merriam Company,
Springfield, Massachusetts, 1831-1931. Spring-
field, MA., 1931.
Gold, David L. "The Debate over Webster's Third
Twenty- five Years Later: Winnowing the Chaff
from the Grain." Dictionaries 7 (1985): 225-
36.
. "An End to Dictionary-Bashing or Just a
Lull? (On Some Published Reactions to
Webster's Ninth New Collegiate Dictionary).^
Dictionaries 10 (1988): 81-91.
Gove, Philip B. "Lexicography and the English
Teacher." College English 25 (February, 1 964):
344-57.
Gove, Philip B., ed. The Role of the Dictionary.
Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1967.
Gunderson, Robert D., ed. "New Books in Review:
Webster's Third New International Dictionary:
A Symposium." Quarterly Journal of Speech
48 (December, 1962): 431-40.
Kraus, Janice A. "Caveat Auctor; The War of the
Dictionaries," Journal of the Rutgers Univer-
sity Libraries 48 (December, 1986): 75-90.
Laughlin, Rosemary M. "The Predecessors of That
Dictionary." American Speech 42 (May, 1967):
105-13.
. "Prescriptivism, Psychology, and That Dic-
tionary," In Studies in Linguistics in Honor of
Raven I. McDavid, Jr., edited by Lawrence M.
Davis, 377- 95. University, AL: University of
Alabama Press, 1972.
Leavitt, Robert Keith. Noah 's Ark, New England
Yankees and the Endless Quest. Springfield,
MA, 1947.
Marckwardt, Albert H. "Dictionaries and the English
Language." English Journal 52 (May, 1963):
336-45.
McDavid, Raven I., Jr. "False Scents and Cold
Trails: The Pre-Publication Criticism of the
Merriam Third . " Journal of English Linguistics
5 (1971): 101-21.
Moss, Richard J. Noah Webster. Boston: Twayne
Publishers, 1984.
Pei, Mario. "The Dictionary as a Battlefront: English
Teachers' Dilemma." Saturday Review 45 (July
21, 1962): 44-46, 55-56.
Read, Allen Walker. "That Dictionary or The Dictio-
nary?" Consumer Reports 28 (October, 1963):
488-92.
Sledd, James, and Wilma R. Ebbitt, eds. Dictionar-
ies and THAT Dictionary: A Casebook on the
Aims of Lexicographers and the Targets of
Reviewers. Chicago: Scott, Foresman and Co.,
1962.
Wells, Ronald A. Dictionaries and the Authoritarian
Tradition: A Study in English Usage and
Lexicography. The Hague: Mouton, 1973.
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER. FAMILY OP DICTIONARIES 303
NOTES
1 Quoted in Harry R. Warfel, Noah Webster: Schoolmas-
ter to America (New York: Macmillan, 1936), 289.
Italics in original.
J Richard J. Moss, Noah Webster (Boston: Twayne,
1984), 2.
'Richard M. Rollins, The Long Journey of Noah Webster
(n.p. : University of Pennsylvania Press, 1 980), 34-
35.
"Robert Keith Leavitt, Noah 's Ark, New England Yan-
kees and the Endless Quest (Springfield, MA: G. &
C. Merriam Co., 1947), 7.
5 Rollins, 35.
6 Noah Webster, A Grammatical Institute . . . Part II
(Hartford, CT: Hudson and Goodwin, 1784);
Webster, A Grammatical Institute , . . Part III
(Hartford, CT: Barlow and Babcock, 1785).
7 Leavitt, 14, 16.
a HX, Mencken, The American Language: An Inquiry
into the Development of English in the United
States, 4th ed. (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1938),
38 1-87; Chris M. Anson, "Erroursun&Endeavors:
A Case Study in American Orthography," Interna-
tional Journal of Lexicography 3 (Spring 1990):
35-63.
9 Leavitt, 29.
10 Quoted in Leavitt, 29.
11 G. & C. Merriam Co., 1 00th Anniversary of the Estab-
lishment of G. & C. Merriam Company, Springfield,
Massachusetts, 1831-1931 ([Springfield, 1931]),
[2]-
12 James A.H, Murray, The Evolution of English Lexicog-
raphy (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1900; reprint ed.,
College Park, MD: McGrathPublishingCo., 1 970),
43; George Philip Krapp, The English Language in
America,vol. 1 (New York: Frederick Ungar, 1925),
362-63; Joseph H. Friend, The Development of
American Lexicography, 1798-1864 (The Hague:
Mouton, 1967), 36; Rollins, 123.
"Leavitt, 34-35.
w Ibid., 37.
!J G. & C. Merriam Co., The House That Merriam-
Webster Built ([Windham, CT: Printed atHawthom
House] 1940), 7.
"Leavitt, 45.
"Ibid., 49.
18 Ibid., 48.
19 Eva Mae Burkett, A merican Dictionaries of the English
Language before 1861 (Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow
Press, 1979), 1 84; G.&C. Merriam Co., The Ho use
That Merriam-Webster Built, 9.
10 Quoted in Leavitt, 50.
21 Ibid, 51.
22 New Englander 6 (January 1848); 30,40.
"Burkett, 185.
M Leavitt, 50.
"Burkett, 183.
25 Leavitt, 50; Burkett, 184.
21 See, for example, Burkett, 221-57; Friend, 82-103;
Janice A. Kraus, "Caveat Auctor: The War of the
Dictionaries," Journal of the Rutgers University
Libraries 48 (December 1986): 75-90; Sidney L
Landau, "Webster and Worcester: The War of the
Dictionaries," Wilscn Library Bulletin 58 (April
1984): 545-^9; Allen Walker Read, "The War of
the Dictionaries in the Middle West," in Papers on
Lexicography in Honor of Warren N. Cordell, ed.
by J.E. Congleton, J. Edward Gates, and Donald
Hobar (Terre Haute, IN: Dictionary Society of
North America, 1979), 3-15.
28 Janice A, Kraus, 82.
29 Quoted in Burkett, 222.
30 Burkett, 223-26
31 Friend, 83-84.
32 Ibid., 85. Italics in original.
33 Ibid., 86.
34 Leavitt, 58.
3i New York World, June 1 5, 1 860, quoted in Burkett, 249.
36 Sidney L Landau, Dictionaries: The Art and Craft of
Lexicography (New York: Scribner's, 1984), 64.
57 Raven I. McDavid, "Dictionary Makers and Their
Problems," in Language and Language Teaching:
Essays in Honor of W. Wilbur Hatfield^ ed. by
Virginia McDavid ([Chicago]: Chicago State Col-
lege, 1969), 73.
"Leavitt, 67.
39 Ibid., 69.
*■ Ibid., 69,71,
4l Ibid.,73,75.
42 Merriam-Webster Inc., "Merriam- Webster TimeLine"
(three-page typescript), [1].
43 Leavitt, 75.
44 William A. Neilson, "Preface," Webster's New Inter-
national Dictionary of the English Language, 2nd
ed. (Springfield, MA: G. &C. Merriam Co,, 1934),
v.
"Leavitt, 77.
" 6 Quoted in "Merriam Celebrates 100 Years of Publish-
ing Merriam-Webster Dictionaries," Word Study
22 (February 1947): 3.
47 Leavitt, 82; G. & C. Merriam Co., The House that
Merriam-Webster Built, 10-11; "Merriam Cel-
ebrates 100 Years of Publishing Merriam-Webster
Dictionaries," 2.
Ai Educational Review! 8 (November 1 909): 425 ; Nation
89 (4 November 1909): 435,
Ai Rosemary M. Laughlin, "The Predecessors of That
Dictionary," American Speech 42 (May 1967):
106-07.
50 Leavitt, 83.
5 'Neilson, "Preface," vi.
"Thomas A. Knott, "The New Webster Dictionary,"
American Scholar 4 (May 1935): 372-73.
i3 Advertisement in back of Webster's New International
Dictionary, 2nd ed,
54 "Publisher's Statement," Webster's New International
Dictionary, 2nd ed., iv; Neilson, "Preface," vi,
55 Neilson, "Preface, 1 * v.
56 Saturday Review of Literature 1 1 (12 January 1935):
419', American Afercwy 36 (December 1935): 507.
57 Nation 139 (17 October 1934): 450-51.
304 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
58 WilliamLyonPhelps,"As ILikelt," Scribner's Maga-
zine 96 (December 1934): 381.
99 New Yorker 10 (6 October 1934): 18.
60 Kemp Malone, "Some Linguistic Studies of 1933 and
1934," Modern Language Notes 50 (December
1935): 515.
61 American Speech 10 (April 1935): 140.
62 Quoted in Word Study 19 (May 1 944): 4.
63 Word Study 36 (February 1961): [8],
64 Philip B. Gove, ''Preface," Webster's Third New Inter-
national Dictionary (Springfield, MA: G. & C.
Merriam Co., 1961), 6a-7a.
""Announcing the Publication of Webster's Third New
International Dictionary," Word Study 37 (October
1961): 1-2-
6 *Gove, "Preface," 7a,
'""Webster's Lays an Egg," Richmond News Leader, 3
January 1962, reprinted in James Sledd and Wilma
Ebbitt, Dictionaries and THAT Dictionary (Chi-
cago: Scott, Foresiruin and Co. 1962), 121-22;
"Keep Your Old Webster's," Washington Post ( 1 7
January 1962), reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt, 125-
26; Wilson Follett, "Sabotage in Springfield," At-
lantic (January 1962), 73-77, reprinted in Sledd
and Ebbitt, 11 1-1 9; "It 'Ain't' Good," Washington
Sunday Star (10 September 1961), reprinted in
Sledd, 55- 56.
68 "Webster's New Word Book,"Afew York Times, 12
October 1961, reprinted in Sledd andEbbitt, 78-79;
"A Directive Issued to the Staff of the New York
Times," Winners & Sinners (4 January 1962), re-
printed in Sledd and Ebbitt, 122-23.
69 "A Non-Word Deluge," Life (27 October 1961), 4,
reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt, 84,
70 PhilipB. Gove, "ALetterto the Editor ofthe New York
Times," New York Times (5 November 1961), re-
printed in Sledd and Ebbitt, 88-90.
71 Philip B. Gove, "A Letter to the Editor of Life Maga-
zine," Life (17 November 1961), 13, reprinted in
Sledd and Ebbitt, 91-92.
n "Logomachy-Debased Verbal Currency," American
Bar Association Journal (January 1962), 48-49,
reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt, 105-08; B. Hunter
Smeaton,"AReviev/ of Webster's ThirdNew Inter-
nationa] Dictionary," Library Journal 87 (15 Janu-
ary 1962): 2 11, reprinted in Sledd andEbbitt, 123—
25 (italics in original); Wilson Follett, "Sabotage in
Springfield," Atlantic (January 1962), 73-77, re-
printed in Sledd and Ebbitt, 111-19,
73 Dwight Macdonald, "The String Untuned," jv*e>v Yorker
(10 March 1962), 130-34, 137-40, 143-50, 153-
60, reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt, 166-88.
74 Harold E. Maynard, "The Battle of the Dictionaries,"
Public Relations Journal 19 (August 1963); 11.
75 Norman E. Isaacs, "And Now, the War on Words,"
Louisville Times, 18 October 1961, reprinted in
Sledd and Ebbitt, 79-80; Ethel Strainchamps,
"Words, Watchers, and Lexicographers," St. Louis
Post-Dispatch (29 October 1 96 1), reprintedin Sledd
and Ebbitt, 86-88; Millicent Taylor, "The New
Dictionary," Christian Science Monitor (29 No-
vember 1961), 13, reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt,
99-101; Roy H. Copperud, "English As It's Used
Belongs in the Dictionary," Editor & Publisher (25
November 1 96 1 ), 44, reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt,
96-99; Bergen Evans, "But What's a Dictionary
For?" Atlantic (May 1962), 57-62, reprinted in
Sledd and Ebbitt, 238-48.
76 "New World of Words," London Times Literary Supple-
ment (16 Much 1982), 187, reprintedin Sledd and
Ebbitt, 197-98; RandoIphQuirk, The New States-
man (2 March 1962), 304, reprinted in Sledd and
Ebbitt, 151-54; Christopher Small, "A Review of
Webster's Third New International Dictionary,"
Glasgow Herald (27 February 1962), reprinted in
Sledd and Ebbitt, 136-37;Moray McLaren, "Twenty
Guineas Worth of Webster," Scotsman (10 March
1962), 4, reprinted in Sledd and Ebbitt, 161-62;
Alan S.C. Ross, "Words without End ," Manchester
Guardian Weekly ( 1 5 March 1 962), 1 0, reprinte d in
Sledd and Ebbitt, 194-96.
"ClarenceL. Barnhart, "American Lexicography, 1 945-
1973," American Speech 53 (Spring 1978): 100-
13.
78 Atcheson L. Hench, "Notes on Reading Webster HI"
College English 24 (May 1963): 613-18; R. W.
Burchfield, "Webster's Third New International
Dictionary," Review of English Studies, n.s., 14
(1963): 3 19-23; Harold B. Allen, "Webster's Third
New International Dictionary: A Symposium,"
Quarterly Journal of Speeches (December 1962):
431-33; Ladislas Orszagh, "Webster's Third New
International Dictionary of the English Language,"
Hungarian Studies in English 1 (1963): 133-39.
79 Sledd and Ebbitt, Dictionaries and THAT Dictionary;
Raven I. McDavid, Jr., "False Scents and Cold
Trails; The Pre-PublicationCriticismoftheMerriam
Third" Journal of English Linguistics 5 (1971):
101-21.
80 Karl W. Dykema, "Cultural Lag and the Reviewers of
Webster III," AAUP Bulletin 49 (December 1963):
364-69; Walter J. Ong, "Hostility, Literacy and
Webster 111," College English 26 (November 1 964):
106-11; Rosemary M. Laughlin, "Prescriptivism,
Psychology, and That Dictionary," in Studies in
Linguistics in Honor of Raven I. McDavid, Jr., ed.
Lawrence M. Davis (University, AL: University of
Alabama Press, 1972), 377-95; David Gold, "The
Debate over Webster's Third Twenty-five Years
Later: Winnowing the Chaff from the Grain," Dic-
tionaries 7 (1985): 225-36.
81 Marion Sader, ed., General Reference Books for Adults:
Authoritative Evaluations of Encyclopedias, At-
lases, and Dictionaries (New York: Bowker, 1988),
395.
"James B. McMillan, "Dictionaries and Usage," Word
Study 39 (February 1964): [1].
""Battle of the Book," Forbes 89 (15 April 1962): 47;
"Encyclopaedia Britannica Will Buy G. & C.
lAemam," Publishers Weekly, 21 September 1964,
36-37.
84 David M. Glixon, "The Best of References," Saturday
Review 46 (23 March 1963): 36; Booklist and
Subscription Books Bulletin 59 (15 July 1963):
909-1 l;Priscilla Tyler, "AnEnglishTeacherLooks
at Webster's Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary,"
Word Study 38 (April 1963): [l]-8.
THE MERRIAM-WEBSTER FAMILY OF DICTIONARIES 305
!J John J. Enck, "The Ruptured Duck Flies Again:
Webster's Seventh Collegiate," College English 27
(January 1966): 302-09.
as Kenneth F. Kister, Dictionary Buying Guide: A Con-
sumer Guide to General English-Language Word-
books in Print (New York: Bowker, 1977), 92;
Publishers Weekly (22 July 1974), 60.
87 Clarence L. Barnhart, "American Lexicography, 1945-
1973 ^American Speech 53 (Spring 1978); 121.
88 Frederick C. Mish, "Preface," Webster's Ninth New
Collegiate Dictionary (Springfield, MA: Merriam-
Webster, 1983), 6.
8 »JimQuinn, "Lingo," Nation 237 (23-30July 1983): 90;
Thomas L. Clark, "Praise for Webster's Ninth,"
American Speech 59 (Spring 1984): [70]; Andrew
Hacker, "A Do-Your-Own-Thing Dictionary,"
Fortune 108 (3 October 1983): 272; Peter Devine,
"Webster's NinthNew Collegiate Dictionary," New
York 16 (21 November 1983): 105.
90 Daisy Maryles, "A Decade of Megasellers," Publishers
Weekly, 5 January 1990, 26.
M Jane Tencza, secretary to Joseph J. Esposito, President
of Merriam-Webster Inc., letter to the author, 2
April 1991,
92 Dr. Frederick C. Mish, Editorial Director, Meiriam-
Webster Inc., telephone conversation with the au-
thor, 20 March 1990.
93 Brochure from Highlighted Data, Inc., Washington,
DC
94 Mish, telephone conversation with author, 20 March
1990.
95 "News Release: Webster 's Ninth New Collegiate Dic-
tionary and Webster's Collegiate Thesaurus Fea-
tured on New NeXT Computer System," Merriam-
Webster Inc., 1 November 1988.
96 Booklist/Reference Books Bulletin 86 (15 November
1989): 689.
97 "The English Language in the Dictionary," Webster's
Ninth New Collffgiats Dictionary (Spnr\gtie\d,MA:
Merriam-Webster Inc., 1989),28; also Dr. Frederick
C. Mish, telephone conversation with author, 20
March 1990.
n "Guide to Pronunciation," Webster 's NinthNew Colle-
giate Dictionary, 33; also Dr, Frederick C. Mish,
telephone conversation with author, 20March 1990.
s *Mish, telephone conversation with author, 20 March
1990.
100 "Another Decision in Webster's Dictionary Case,"
Publishers Weekly (20 January 1917), 160-65;
quoted in "FTC Defines World's Use of 'Webster 5
Name," Publishers Weekly (10 December 1949),
2375-76.
101 WordStudy22(April 1947): 4; Merriam-Webster Inc.,
"Is There More Than One Webster?" (1-page type-
script, no date).
Afternoon Tea, Parliament, and . . .
Who 's Who
Linda K. Simons
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
This is the story of a book which slumbered
through its childhood and youth, underwent a
midlife transformation at age 47, and emerged
to become not only one of the best known
reference works in English but also the re-
spected ancestor of a whole family of refer-
encebooks. Soon tobea century and ahalf old,
it remains the prototype for biographical dic-
tionaries which contain short entries supplied
by the subjects themselves. It has spawned
dozens of imitators in countries all over the
world. This is the story of Who 's Who.
Antecedents
Information about famous people has ex-
isted for along time. The earliest biographical
dictionaries in modern Europe concerned
themselves with royal and noble families. One
of the oldest was the Almanack de Gotha,
begun in 1763 , which listed the families of the
royal houses of Europe and also listed "the
principal executive, legislative, and diplomatic
officials" 1 of selected countries of the world.
This work was published regularly until 1 960.
In England two publishers in particular are
associated with records of landed and titled
families, Debrett's published The New Peer-
age starting in 1 769. Known by various names
in later editions, Debrett's Peerage continues
to be published. It was supplemented by The
New Baronetage of England also begun in
1769. This work has also changed names but
continues to exist. John Burke began publish-
ing Burke's Genealogical and Heraldic His-
tory of the Peerage, Baronetage, and
Knightage in 1826. Several years later Burke
published his Genealogical and Heraldic Dic-
tionary of the Landed Gentry of Great Britain
and Ireland, The men (and some women)
listed in these works were included because
they were born into the aristocracy. There
were also books which listed people by virtue
of the positions they held. Some examples of
these works include the New Law List, a direc-
tory of the legal professions, started in 1798;
the Medical Directory, started in 1845; and,
later, Crochford's Clerical Directory, started
in 1858, and listing the name and address of
every clergy member in the Church of En-
gland.
The first Who 's Who appeared in 1 849, a
small book published by Alfred Head Baily.
His firm, Baily Brothers, had offices in the
Cornhill section of London. 2 As editor for the
first edition Baily Brothers chose Col. Henry
Robert Addison, an Irishman in his forties. He
had been a soldier and a police magistrate as
well as a writer of verse, plays, novels, and
even an opera. 3 The first edition of Who 's Who
was merely a group of lists: members of the
Houses of Parliament, bishops, and so forth.
No biographical information was given ex-
cept for members of Parliament whose age,
political affiliation, and constituency were
listed. 4 Who 's Who was evidently a success
because it was published annually in an un-
changed format through 1896.
WHO'S WHO 307
The Blacks
By that year the copyright for Who 's Who
had passed from Baily Brothers to the firm of
Simkin, Hamilton, Kent, and Company who
decided to put it up for sale. One of the
publishers interested in buying the copyright
was A and C Black. Adam Black had founded
the company in Edinburgh in 1807. Under his
leadership and then his sons ' management, the
firm had prospered and had moved to London
in 1889. It was known chiefly for being the
publisher of Sir Walter Scott's novels, but its
list also included serious books of scholarly
interest. Blacks had published three editions
of the Encyclopaedia Britannica, including
the great ninth edition. That work, even today
considered one of the greatest encyclopedias
ever published, consumed much of the firm' s
energies between 1875 and 1888. By 1896,
however, the sales of the Britannica had
slowed. The first and second generations of
the family were dead or retired, and the firm
was in the hands of two grandsons of the
founder, cousins who were both named Adam.
Looking for new works to publish, the cousins
had contemplated buying Men and Women of
the Times. This publication, which attempted
to be a sort of national biographical dictionary
of the living, had appeared irregularly since
1 852. When its current owner, G. Routledge
and Sons Ltd., insisted on a price of 1,000
pounds sterling, however, the Blacks decided
against purchase. (Blacks did eventually buy
Men and Women of the Times, in 1900). 5
When Adam Black learned that Who's Who
was to be auctioned at the London auction
house of Hodgsons, he saw an opportunity to
acquire a work similar to Men and Women of
the Times. The day of the sale he met his friend
George Whitaker, publisher of Whitaker's
Almanack, at Hodgsons. The two men discov-
ered that they were both interested in purchas-
ing Who 's Who and sensibly decided not to bid
against each other. They tossed a coin to
decide who would bid. Black won the toss and
bought the copyright for 30 pounds. 6 Thus
chance dictated that A and C Black rather than
J. Whitaker and Sons became the publishers of
Who's Who.
Adam Black immediately started work-
ing on changing the scope and format of the
book. He hired anew editor, Douglas Sladen,
a man whose background looked curiously
similar to that of the first editor, Addison.
Sladen was 40 years old and a prolific writer
of novels, poetry, and travel books. 7 He had
taken a firstinhistory at Oxford andhad taught
at the University of Sydney in Australia. 8
Since some of his books hadbeenpublishedby
Blacks, the publishers had some idea of his
abilities. 9 Together with the Black cousins,
Sladencompiledalistofpotential biographees.
Names from the original lists were supple-
mentedbypeople whose biographies mightbe
of interest to the public. The Blacks decided
that people would be chosen for their refer-
ence merit alone. No one could pay for an
entry, and biographees would not be able to
purchase the book at a reduced price. This
fundamental decisionplaced Who 's Who above
charges of being a vanity work.
A second fundamentalpolicy was that the
biographees themselves would supply the in-
formation for the entries. The Black cousins
and Sladen created a list of headings (virtually
unchanged today) and designed a question-
naire which biographees were asked to com-
plete. The form asked for standard biographi-
cal items such as address, birth date, parents'
names, spouse' s name, schools attended, clubs,
occupation, publications, and so on. In 1896
Who's Who invited 5,000 people to partici-
pate. The firm mailed the questionnaire and
invitation in a specially designed blue enve-
lope with a dark blue seal, similar to those used
for British Cabinet mailings, to distinguish it
from other mail. They hoped that recipients
would be curious enough to open the enve-
lope, read the invitation, and accept the Blacks'
offer. Since Sladen had obtained permission
from the Duke of Rutland and A J. Balfour to
use their biographies as samples, these were
included in the mailing as well. 10
308 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
The originality of the Blacks' plan lay first in
a wider choice of subjects than those covered
by the existing reference books, which were
limited to the titled and the wealthy, and
secondly in giving a degree of latitude to the
biographee so that, while critical comment
was excluded, the entries might have some
personal and revealing quality — an intention
which was greatly assisted by the decision to
ask an entrant to declare his recreation. 11
Of the 5,000 asked to participate in the
1897 edition, all but two, Lord Salisbury and
Joseph Chamberlain, eventually agreed to do
so. Sladen used a number of tactics to induce
people to complete their forms. When W.S.
Gilbert refused to fill out his questionnaire,
Sladen sent him a completed form which said,
"W.S. Gilbert, journalist, writes thelibretti for
Sir Arthur Sullivan's operas." Gilbert, who
always believed that his most important work
consisted of his serious plays, immediately
filled out his questionnaire in greater detail! 12
Sladen also completed a form for one woman,
deliberately adding 10 years to her age. When
he sentitto her for her approval, she sent back
a corrected form, omitting her age altogether
but adding other interesting biographical de-
tails. 13 In the end, nearly everyone submitted
to Sladen's flattery or threats and returned the
questionnaire.
Besides overseeing preparation of the lists
and entries, Sladen composed the preface to
the 1 897 edition. In it, he explained the changes
in the book and noted what distinguished it
from its competitors. He emphasized the great
number of writers included in Who 's Who,
noting that journalism and literature had not
been adequately covered in the other works.
He stated his goal of including all prominent
English people, regardless of their family back-
ground, and he pointed out that many women
were included in the list. (On this last point,
Sladen's perception of "many women" was
not shared by Julian Huxley. In 1935 he as-
serted that only 3 percent of that year's entries
were claimed by females. 14 A random check
of the 1990 edition suggests that percentage
has increased to 6 percent, still a relatively
small number.) Finally, Sladen noted the many
tables and lists carried over from the old
Who 's Who. These were placed in the front of
the volume and the biographies of the persons
named in the lists were integrated into the
alphabetical order. A and C Black issued the
1 897 edition in the late fall of 1896, advertis-
ing it in the firm's fall catalog:
Who's Who 1897. Forty-ninth year of issue.
Entirely remodelled. Crown 8vo. Price 3 s. 6d.
net. Contains a complete list of all who have
the right to bear any British title; also biogra-
phies,mostly autobiographies, of all the promi-
nent persons in the United Kingdom. 13
Sladen's Departure
Although the book did not make money at
first, it eventually became an important item
of Black's list. In 1898 the Black cousins and
Sladen disagreed over terms of employment
and payment and the Blacks decided to take
the editorship inside the house. 16 Sladen went
on to a distinguished career as a travel writer.
Adam Rimmer Black took on the job of editor,
one he kept until his death in 1936. As the
years passed, he devoted more and more time
to Who 's Who until he was spending virtually
all his time on it. 17 He worked anonymously,
and at his death the editorial duties were
assumed by another anonymous staff mem-
ber. To this day, the firm guards closely the
name of the editor.
Who 's Who has been published continu-
ously since 1897, including through the two
world wars. During the Second World War the
female staff of the publication was evacuated
to a village in the Cotswolds where work could
proceed without fear of bombing attacks. 18
The wartime paper shortage was another prob-
lem. Before 1943 no entries had ever been
dropped except when a person died, but the
paper shortage impelled the firm to drop sev-
eral thousand names of marginal interest.
Nevertheless, it took the personal intervention
of Prime Minister Winston Churchill to assure
the full publication and distribution of Who 's
Who despite the paper rationing. 19
WHO'S WHO 309
An Enduring Format and Process
The format of the work has remained
essentially the same since 1897, The preface
is followed by a table of abbreviations; an
annual necrology; a genealogical chart of the
British Royal Family; and the alphabetically
arranged biographies. The many tables car-
ried over from the original work were dropped
from the volume in 1903 to provide more
space for the biographies. The number of
persons included has grown from 5,500 to
more than 28,000. Currently the number of
biographies is increasing by 150-200 each
year 20 and the physical size of the volume has
grown to accommodate the additional entries.
Throughout its existence, however, Who's
Who has kept its red binding with gold letter-
ing, and the current issue would be instantly
recognizable to Douglas Sladen. The entries
would also appear essentially the same to him.
The editorial staff of Who 's Who monitors
newspapers and other sources of information
to discover names of potential biographees
each year. A Selection Board chooses about
half of the new entries for each edition. The
other 50 percent are automatically chosen
when people are elected or appointed to cer-
tain posts (such as member of Parliament) or
succeed to certain titles of nobility. Although
the majority of biographees are British, agreat
many foreigners are included. In a 1 93 5 article
for Saturday Review, Julian Huxley estimated
about 12 percent of the entries were non-
Britishers, and in a second article written in
1946, he noted the inclusion of Hitler (com-
plete with telephone number!), Mussolini,
Stalin, and other heads or former heads of
state. 21 An estimated 30 percent of the 1990
Who 's Who subjects are not British.
A new biographee is invited to complete
a questionnaire which is then editedby Who 's
Who so that it conforms to the style of the
publication. Each year thereafter abiographee
checks and corrects the next edition's proof.
The editorial staff also monitors changes
through its reading of the press. Since 1943
biographies have occasionally been shortened
or otherwise made to conform with the book's
overall style. But the entries are essentially
autobiographies since each entrant chooses
what to say about himself or herself Who 's
Who does not verify all details, but only those
which the editor suspects to be untrue. If a
person does not return the questionnaire, the
staff will write a biography, but Who 's Who
will not print it without the person's consent.
In fact, in the last 20 years the editors have
included only fourpeople against their wishes,
"all holders of prominent public office." 22
The questionnaire and resultant biogra-
phies emphasize one's career and publica-
tions, but the subject which has aroused the
most comment is the category "recreation."
Devised by Adam Black as a way to personal-
ize the entry, "recreation" hasprovided amuse-
ment to many readers. As early as 1898 the
Times book reviewer noted that Cecil Rhodes'
leisure activities, including riding two hours
each morning, collecting old china, and keep-
ing lions and uncaged zebras, scarcely lefthim
time to do any work! 23 JulianHuxley delighted
in quoting recreations from the 1 93 5 and 1945
editions, including George Bernard Shaw's
"Anything except sport" and Ernest
Hemingway's "Drinking." 24 He quoted one
Lawrence Meynell whose entry "ends on a
pathetic note— 'walking, canoeing, tree-fell-
ing, reading, trying to write a play!'" zs
Despite allthe fuss about recreation, how-
ever, the standard biographical details are
what constitute the real reference value of
Who 's Who. Generally, an entry follows this
form;
Name; Position; Beginning date of current
position; Birthdate; Parents ' names; Marriage
date and spouse's name; Number of sons and
daughters; Education; Information about ca-
reer, positions previously held, and accom-
plishments; PubUcations;Recreation; Address;
Telephone; Clubs.
Within this format, there is much leeway.
Some people choose to leave out various cat-
egories such as recreation or clubs. Some
detail their education very carefully while
others skim over it with phrases such as "edu-
cated privately" or "at home." Some authors
meticulously list everything they have written
310 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
while others list only their most important
works. One of the longest entries in the 1990
edition is that of Barbara Cartland, the writer
of romance fiction, who seems to have listed
everything she has ever published.
When, a biographee dies, the publisher
transfers the entry with death date added to the
next volume of Who Was Who. Thus, the
record of notable living becomes a record of
past notables as well. The first Who Was Who
was published in June 1920, and additional
volumes have been issued at approximately
10-year intervals. Generally, the biographical
information is the same as it last appeared in
Who 's Who with the death date added. 26
Imitators
Who's Who has inspired a great many
imitators, including Who 's Who in America
and similar volumes for many other countries.
Albert Nelson Marquis published the first
Who 's Who in America in 1 899, just two years
after Black started its new format, and Mar-
quis admitted his book was a copy of the
British title. 27 Besides the national biogra-
phies inspired by Who 's Who there are innu-
merable specialty biographical dictionaries
such as Who 's Who in Finance and Industry
(Chicago: Marquis) and even Who's Who
Among American High School Students (Lake
Forest,IL: Educational Communications, Inc.).
The most recent edition of Eugene Sheehy's
Guide to Reference Books lists 123 titles be-
ginning "Who's Who"; this count does not
include foreign titles such as the German Wer
1st Wer? 2S Nor does it count local publications
nor biographical compendia whose titles be-
gin with other words.
Wiio 's Who remains the reference book of
choice if a reader wishes to find basic bio-
graphical information about a British subject
or a famous non-Britisher. Indeed, it fulfills its
task so well that it has eliminated any impor-
tant competition in its own niche. Debreit's
Handbook concentrates on the nobility and
business people and has many fewer entries.
As its patron, Sir Iain Moncreiffe of that Ilk,
notes in the preface, Debrett 's concerns itself
more with social status while Who 's Who is
more concerned with academic status or per-
sonal achievement. 29 Whitaker's Almanack
contains many of the lists that the original
Who 's Who contained, but does notprint biog-
raphies. The Dictionary of National Biogra-
phy still limits itself to those who have been
dead long enough that an objective view of
their lives can be attempted. The other bio-
graphical dictionaries are more specialized
and not as broad-based. Moreover, since the
nineteenth century the British, because of
their huge empire and, later, Commonwealth,
have had a remarkably cosmopolitan attitude
toward events and persons. Because Who's
Who contains biographies of African, Asian,
andlndianpoliticians, writers, and otherpromi-
nent people, its usefulness is certainly not
limited to the British Isles.
Although the term "who's who" was not
originated by the publication, it owes its fame
to the association with the book. The Oxford
English Dictionary cites Who 's Who in one of
its definitions for "who" and quotes several
uses of the term "who's who" meaning "who
each of a number of persons is, or what posi-
tion each holds." One colorful example is
from the 1917 National Police Gazette: "We
don't believe that Ed W. Dunn's latest effu-
sion would win a place for him in the poet's
'Who's who!' corner." 30 To say that a list is a
"who's who" of something implies that it
contains people with the best or most of a
certain quality. In this respect, "Who's Who"
has entered the language of people who have
never consulted the original publication.
Who 's Who continues to publish annu-
ally, adding more names each time. The page
size was enlarged in 1985, and the editor does
not anticipate enlarging it again soon. Nor are
there current plans to issue the book in an
electronic form. 31 Who 's Who will continue to
do what it does best, provide basic biographi-
cal information about "people who, through
their careers, affect the political, economic,
scientific and artistic life of the country," 31
Like afternoon tea and Parliament, Who's
Who represents the best of British tradition
and contemporary excellence.
PUBLICATION HISTORY
WHO'S WHO 311
Who 's Who; An Annual Biographical Dictionary.
1849- Annual. Absorbed Men and Women of
the Time with volume 53, 190 1 . Subtitle varies;
volumes for 1849-1898, 1904-1912 issued with-
out subtitle.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
The best source for information about
Who 's Who is the history of Adam & Charles
Black Ltd. which provides good background
on the company and a fair history of the
publication from 1896 to 1957, JulianHuxley's
two articles address the issue of who is in-
cluded and quote many of the more amusing or
unusual entries. In an early article, Joseph
Jacobs studied Who 's Who to see what influ-
ence place of birth, career choice, and educa-
tion have had on obtaining an entry in the
book. Unfortunately, this study appears not to
have been replicated, although a number of
similar studies exist for Who 's Who in America,
Douglas Sladen's preface to the 1897 edition
is essential to understanding his vision of what
the new Who 's Who should be.
Adam & Charles Black; 1807-1957; Some Chapters
in the History of a Publishing House, London:
Adam & Charles Black, 1957.
"A Century of 'Who's Who,"' Times (London), July
7, 1948, p, 3.
Harris, Leon. "What's What with America's Who 's
Who ." Smithsonian 12 (November, 1981): 204-
206-h
Huxley, Julian. "The Analysis of Fame; A Revela-
tion of theHumanDocuments in 'Who's Who. '"
Saturday Review of Literature 12 (May 11,
1935): 12-13.
. "Berlin 116191 Does Not Answer." Satur-
day Review of Literature 29 (April 13, 1946):
11-14.
Jacobs, Joseph. "The Paths of Glory." Living Age
Littell's 224 (February 24, 1900): 515-522.
Sladon, Douglas. My Long Life; Anecdotes and Ad-
venture. London: Hutchinson & Co., 1939.
— . "Preface" in Who's Who. London: A. & C.
Black, 1897, iii-vi,
"Who's Not Who in England." Literary Digest 104
(February 1, 1930): 44-45.
"'Who's Who' Celebrates 100th Anniversary."
Publisher's Weekly 154 (December 25, 1948):
2479.
NOTES
'Eugene P. Sheehy, ed,, Guide to Reference Books, 10th
ed. (Chicago: American Library Association, 1 9 86),
867.
^Adam & Charles Black; 1807-1957; Some Chapters in
the History of a Publishing House (London: Adam
& Charles Black, 1957), 71.
'David James O'Donoghue, ed., The Poets of Ireland; A
Biographical and Bibliographical Dictionary of
Irish Writers of English Verse (Dublin: Hodges,
Figgis & Co., 1912), 6.
A Adam & Charles Black, 71.
5 Ibid., 70-71.
6 "A Century of 'Who's Who,'" Times (London), 7 July
1948, p. 3.
^Who Was Who 1941-1950 (Loudon: Adam & Charles
Black, 1952), 1062.
*Adam & Charles Black, 73.
'Ibid., 60.
'"Douglas Sladen, My Long Life; Anecdotes and Adven-
tures (London: Hutchinson & Co., 1939), 190-91.
n Adam & Charles Black, 72.
u Sladen, 191.
13 Ibid., 191-92.
"Julian Huxley, "The Analysisof Fame; A Revelation of
the Human Documents in ' Who's "Who,"' Saturday
Review of Literature 12(11 May 1935): 12.
li Adam & Charles Black, 73.
"Sladen, 193-94.
11 Adam & Charles Black, 99.
,s Ibid„ 103.
"Ibid., 108.
i0 A & C Black (Publishers) Ltd., letter to the author, 14
March 1990.
2i Huxley, "Analysis," 12; Julian Huxley, "Berlin 1 1
6191 Does Not Answer," Saturday Review of Lit-
erature 29 (13 April 1946): 11-12.
" A & C Black (Publishers) Ltd., letter to the author, 14
March 1990.
""Who's Who, 1899," Times (London), 6 December
1898, p. 4.
24 Huxley, "Analysis," 13,
"Huxley, "Berlin," 14.
312 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
" Sheehy, 300. 30 Oxford English Dictionary,2nA<s±{Ox£ai&: Clarendon
27 Leon Harris, "What's What with America's Who's Press, 1989), see "who."
Who," Smithsonian 12 (9 November 1981): 204. " A & C Black (Publishers) Ltd., letter to the author, 14
2S Sheehy, 1553. March 1990.
^DeBrett 'sHandbook 1982 (London: Dehrett's Peerage » Who 's Who (London: Adam &Charles Black, 1990X7.
Limited, 1981), 12-13.
m
i]
s for All People:
brld Almanac
Margaret Morrison
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
"Doth the moon shine the night we play our
play?" asks Snout in A Midsummer Night's
Dream (III, i, 52-53), to which Bottom cries
"A calendar, acalendar! look in the almanack;
find out moonshine, find out moonshine" (III,
i, 54-55). Bottom certainly knew his refer-
ence sources; he and his friends neededmoon-
light for their production of Pyramus and
Thisby, and an almanac was definitely the
place to look. In fact, by the time Bottom
called for his almanac in 1590, centuries of
common folk and royalty alike had relied on
almanacs for their knowledge of the seasons,
the phases of the moon, and much more.
Today, 400 years later, people still consult
almanacs for a great variety of questions, from
the colors of their favorite college teams to the
height of the world's mountains, Without
doubt, the almanac most consulted in the United
States is the World Almanac and Book of
Facts, now well into its second century of
publication.
Calendars, the physical recording of peri-
ods of time, have existed for at least 5,000
years. They were essential to agriculture and
have been found in ancient civilizations
throughout the world. So important was the
match between calendar time and solar time
that in the sixteenth century Pope Gregory
himself adjusted the existing calendartomake
up for lost days . Calendars and almanacs were
once nearly identical, although by Bottom's
time an almanac usually included at least two
kinds of calendars: a list of days, weeks, and
months with annotations for ecclesiastical fes-
tivals, saint's days, and other religious obser-
vances; and an astronomical table showing the
phases of the moon, position of the planets,
eclipse predictions, and weather forecasts. 1
History of the Almanac
Manuscript almanacs may have existed in
Alexandria in the second century a.d. The
earliest Christian almanac appeared in 354 on
parchment. The thirteenth and fourteenth cen-
turies saw a number of manuscript almanacs,
while the ornate Books of Hours, which re-
flected many features of the almanac, flour-
ished between the thirteenth and seventeenth
centuries. Johann Gutenberg composed the
astronomical calendar in 1448 in Mainz, and
another printer, Johann Mueller, known as
Regiomontanus, produced the Kalendarium
novum, the oldest existing copy of which is
dated 1476. Printed in red and black on 12
leaves, or 24 pages, it was illustrated, con-
tained a calendar, table of eclipses, the posi-
tion of the planets — and a complete and deco-
rated title page. A title page did not appear in
another book for 20 years.
The first English almanac, The
Shepheard's Kakndar by Richard Pynson,
appeared in 1495. During the first half of the
sixteenth century, the infamous Michel de
Nostradamus created almanacs forecasting
3 14 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
royal deaths, natural disasters, and political
events. During this and the next century, as-
trology gained in influence, and predictions of
all sorts abounded. These worried the royalty
and clergy of the time. Henry III of France
forbade political prophecies, as didLouisXIII,
while the Archbishop of Canterbury and the
Bishop of London oversaw the publication of
English almanacs. 2 Throughout Europe alma-
nacs grew in popularity, some becoming quite
specialized, appealing to particular political
parties or religious groups.
Almanacs in North America
In North America in the seventeenth cen-
tury, almanac printing was a major industry.
Almanacs served as almost the only secular
source of information in the colonies, and the
number of almanacs published in the 1600s
and 1700s exceeded the number of all other
books combined, including religious litera-
ture. Since the first American newspapers and
magazines did not appear until the first half of
the eighteenth century, the early colonial al-
manacs found an audience for literary expres-
sion as well as for factual data. Early Ameri-
can almanacs were of very high quality, thanks
to their capable editors. Before 1687 most
almanacs produced in Massachusetts were
edited by Harvard graduates who were "tu-
tors," or graduate students. These included
Cotton and Nathaniel Mather, the Puritan min-
isters, and Uriah Oakes, a future president of
Harvard, who included extra space below his
calendars to provide a summary of the events
of each century. These almanacs, known as
Cambridge or philomath almanacs, seem to
have offered an opportunity for young schol-
ars to display both their mathematical abilities
and their poetic talents.
As almanacs became increasingly worldly
in the eighteenth century, two new kinds ap-
peared. One, the pocket almanac, specialized
in current affairs. The other, the register, was
larger than the pocket almanac, contained no
literature and included more miscellaneous
government data. 3 This reference volume ob-
viously prefigures almanacs like the World.
Almanacs of this time often voiced political
opposition to British rule and took on a variety
of social issues. Benjamin Banneker,
America's only black almanac-maker, cre-
ated almanacs which contained essays on sla-
very; and Mary K. Goddard, postmistress of
Baltimore, printed beautiful almanacs with
special features for women.
Prominent families of Americans special-
ized in printing almanacs. James Franklin, Sr.,
brother of Benjamin, printed The Rhode Is-
land Almanac, "Poor Robin," in 1728. Anne
Franklin, his widow, was one of six women,
including M.K. Goddard, who printed alma-
nacs before 1800. James Jr., Ben's nephew,
wrote the "Poor Job" almanacs in the 1750s.
Benjamin Franklin, however, enjoyed the
greatest fame with his Poor Richard's Alma-
nac, which survived from 1732 to 1 758. Adbpt-
ingthecharacterofRichardSaunders,Franklin
created a uniquely witty and colloquial style
for the usual aphorisms that had appeared in
almanacs for centuries. Franklin's wit and
talent for self-promotionhelpedPoori?zc/*<3raf
sell well, approximately 10,000 copies annu-
ally, one for every 100 colonists. 4 After 1748
PoorRichardbecamGPoorRichardlmproved,
with 36 pages instead of 24 and woodcuts.
Although the humor was more sophisticated,
it did not seem as much fun, and the almanac
ceased publication in 1758.
In thenineteenth century, almanacs broad-
ened their scope, presenting fewer astronomi-
cal data, fewer moralizing tracts, and more
practical reference information. In 1793 Rob-
ert B. Thomas began production of the most
popular of all nineteenth-century almanacs,
the Old Farmer 's Almanac, which survives to
this day under the same family's leadership.
Religious almanacs by denomination were
common. The first medical almanac, the
Physician 's Almanac from Boston, appeared
in 1817, and in 1844 the first almanac to be
produced by a commercial firm, this one ad-
vertising patent medicine, came on the scene.
WORLD ALMANAC 315
Historian Peter Force printed the National
Calendar from 1 820 to 1836 and included in
it brief histories of federal government depart-
ments and agencies. Even more contemporary
in format, the American Almanac, published
from 1830 to 1861 and again from 1878 to
1889, contained information on state govern-
ments, colleges, railroads, and an annual chro-
nology of events. In addition to these factual
compendia, a wide variety of comic almanacs ,
filled with jokes and pictures, found an eager
audience. Among these was Davy Crockett's
Almanack of Wild Sports of the West, and Life
in the Backwoods, which contained tall tales,
humorous stories, and vivid drawings of
woodsmen and wild animals. Begun in Ten-
nessee in 1835, this almanac survived
Crockett's death in 1836 by 20 years.
The newspaper almanacs had their origin
in the political almanacs that promoted the
people and platforms of political parties. The
Democrat's Almanac was one such volume;
its rival, the Whig Almanac and Political Reg-
ister, was published in New York by Horace
Greeley. Started in 1836, the Whig Almanac
changed its title several times and in 1856
became the Tribune Almanac, the oldest of the
newspaper almanacs. However the Herald
Almanac of 1 849, also published inNew York,
was the first to carry a newspaper's name. 5
The First World Almanac
In 1 860 Alexander Cummings, a newspa-
per publisher from Philadelphia, established
the World in New York City as a one -cent
religious daily. The Worldhad immediate and
continuing financial problems; and within a
year the very capablejournalistMantonMarble
became its part-owner and editor, redefining it
as a calm, conservative newspaper supporting
the Democratic Party of New York, By late
1869 Marble had full control of the paper. Its
style was sophisticated, its readers upper class,
and its circulation weak.
The World Almanac, named for itsparent,
was first published in 1868. While there are
very few records of the history of the Alma-
nac, it may have been Marble's demands for
accuracy in the newspaper that prompted the
creation of this handbook used to provide
background information, names of prominent
people, and statistical data about the U.S. The
1868 Almanac cost about 20 cents, was 120
pages long, and carried 12 pages of advertis-
ing appearing at the front and back of the
volume. After the title page and index, the
calendars and astronomical data opened the
text. Fourteen pages discussed the ongoing
issues of Reconstruction. Election returns for
1866 to 1868 occupied 17 pages. In addition,
4 pages heralded the excellence of the World,
but other than a listing of state political offi-
cials , there is surprisingly little information on
New York. The type face was fancy and the
print minute.
In 1876 when Republican Rutherford B.
Hayes was chosen president by the Electoral
College over Democrat Samuel J. Tilden who
had won thepopular vote, Marble despaired of
chances for the Democrats and for apaper that
supported them. He offered the paper to his
associate editor, William Henry Hurlbert, who
found financing from Thomas A. Scott, presi-
dent of the Pennsylvania Railroad. Hurlbert's
style was even more elegant — and stuffier —
than Marble's. The Almanac, which had been
published annually since its inception, died
the year of the sale.
Scott had wanted to use the paper as a
voice for his own investment plans but grew
tired of losing money on it. In 1 879 he sold the
World to Wall Street shark Jay Gould as a
minor part of the sale of the Texas & Pacific
railroad. Gould claimed that he never wanted
the World, but the paper did give him a vehicle
of his own in the city. Gould's reputation was
so bad, however, that even the World's tradi-
tion of solid, stodgy journalism could not halt
the paper's decline, and it cost Gould $40,000
a year to run.
Joseph Pulitzer contacted Jay Gouldabout
purchasing the World. After some negotia-
tions Pulitzer paid $346,000 for the languish-
316 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
ing newspaper in 1883. WithPulitzer' s acqui-
sition of the Worlds William Henry Hurlbert
resigned; his brand of dry, conservative, aca-
demic journalism was not compatible with
Pulitzer's tight, colloquial, sensational style.
Withnew editorial staff brought in by Pulitzer,
the World thrived.
The Pulitzer Renewal
As a newspaperman, Pulitzer demanded
"Accuracy, accuracy, accuracy. Also terse-
ness . . ." 6 Perhaps to encourage these quali-
ties, he recreated the World Almanac in 1886.
Pulitzer desired to make the Almanac a "com-
pendium of universal knowledge," and al-
though it remained primarily a reference tool
for journalists, its scope broadened with each
year's publication. More than twice as long as
the first issue of the World Almanac, with
twice the advertising pages and priced at 25
cents, the renewed World Almanac wore an
illustrated cover and, following some of the
advertising, a title page that trumpeted the
success of the parent newspaper. For ten years
a thermometer on the left side of the title page
registered the World's circulation statistics,
climbing from zero in 1882 to 605,980 in
1 892. The index followed the title page; then
came the calendars and astronomical and
weather data. As in the earlier issues, election
returns concluded the volumes. New features
of the Pulitzer-era Almanac included more
statistical tables on religion, education, labor,
and public finance and a six- to eight-page
summary of the accomplishments of the World,
a boastful vehicle that nevertheless pointed
out many of the sensational events in New
York city and state politics. Also recorded
were college cheers ("'Rah, 'rah!, 'rah, 'rah!,
'rah, 'rah!" for Brown, Harvard, Swathmore,
Tufts, and Yale); sports data, especially horse
racing and sailing; lists of state holidays and
marriage laws; a list of members of the British
Parliament; and some statistics for foreign
countries, including a category titled "Mur-
derous nations" on those countries with the
highest homicide rates past and present.
Five years after its revival, the World
Almanac was strong and healthy. The 1892
edition had 450 pages, about 50 of which were
advertisements. The volume's introduction
pointed out that it had added 40 pages of local
New York City information — names and titles,
maps, lists of businesses. Contents included
statistical tables of all sorts, a list of living
Union and Confederate generals, and sports
records, including those for pool and cricket.
The discussion of scientific achievements in-
cluded the discovery that liquid oxygen is
blue. As for the results of the recent 1890
census, the preface lamented, "Disappoint-
ment will naturally be felt that greater progress
has not been made by the Government in the
publication of statistics gathered by the census
takers." 7 The 1893 edition added several pages
of information about and a map of Chicago.
The new title adopted in 1894, the World
A Imanac and Encyclopedia, reflected broader
scope. By 1922 the Almanac ran about 750
pages with more than 200 pages of advertise-
ments, including a 2-page spread for an eti-
quette book that described a bride's abject
humiliation for some unnamed blunder at her
wedding.
Robert Hunt Lyman
With the 1923 edition the title became The
World Almanac and Book of Facts. While the
editor or editors of the earlier volumes toiled
anonymously, this new title was in the care of
Robert Hunt Lyman, a graduate of Yale and a
man of considerable newspaper experience.
He had edited the Yale News while in college,
was a reporter and editor for the New York
Herald, working for two years as the manag-
ing editor of the Herald's London edition.
Back in New York he went to work for the
World, where he became night editor, then
assistant managing editor, then acting manag-
ing editor, and served on Pulitzer's secretarial
staff. Lyman spoke about the Almanac to the
Special Libraries Association:
WOULD ALMANAC 317
After this long experience, when editorial
charge of The Almanac was given to me in
1922, 1 had one fixed idea in my mind: — To
make The Almanac as valuable as possible for
the man at the copy desk and for the man
preparing an article. The special aim now was
to make the accumulation of figures and facts
as available as possible. 8
So closely linked were Lyman and the
Almanac that Lyman's entry in the National
Cyclopaedia of A merican Biography includes
a lengthy tribute to the Almanac:
Under Lyman 's direction it grew steadily and
late issues contained more than 1000 pages,
some of the pages containing as many as 577
facts. At the time of his death it had an annual
circulation of 300,000. It became virtually
indispensable for reference in newspaper,
magazine, and publishing offices generally
and it became perhaps the most widely and
frequently consulted book of general refer-
ence in existence. Executives in business and
finance often use it, and probably no other
book extant came into so much use for the
settling ofbets, particularly on sporting events .
Lyman's long and varied newspaper experi-
ence, his interest in science and his passion for
accuracy made him particularly competent to
edit such a work, 9
Lyman's first volume had more than 850
pages, 200 of which were advertisements,
each carrying a structured subject heading at
the top of the page — "Advertisements — Mus-
cular Development" or "Advertisements —
Cure for Stammering." Three text pages cov-
ered the enforcement of the new prohibition
laws. Information on foreign policy and inter-
national affairs greatly expanded. The 1925
issue marked the first appearance of the regu-
lar feature "Biographies of the Presidents and
their Wives." These are wonderful, very per-
sonal glimpses of national political figures.
George Washington "attended horse shows
and races, took part in card games, fox-hunt-
ing, cock fighting, and was a regular
theatregoer." Andrew Jackson, whose marital
difficulties are clearly laid out, "was shot at, in
the Capitol in Washington, January 29, 1835,
by Richard Lawrence, a house painter. The
weapon missed fire. Jackson was a Presbyte-
rian, tall and thin." Polk "was a Methodist in
his later days, wore his hair long, was demo-
cratic and affable."
Lyman struggled to give the book a more
predictable structure. He added a table of
contents before the index, which still appeared
at the front of the volume following advertise-
ments, and he grouped statistical tables by
general subjectsuchas agriculture, education,
and population. Election results, as always,
were last. Lyman explained that this complex
organization resulted from the printing sched-
ule for the Almanac. Because of the large
number of copies to be published and the
requirement for current data, the book had to
be put together in pieces, or forms, from the
inside out, Robert Lyman had to do this by
hand. For his 300,000 copies, the first forms
had to be printed by October 1 and the last ones
by December 20 in order to have the book on
the market by the first week of January. To
make the Almanac as current as possible, the
first forms, those at the center of the book,
reflected those features (e.g., the text of the
Declaration of Independence, the Monroe
Doctrine, or the descriptions of foreign coun-
tries) that changed very little and so could be
ready early. The most recent information,
especially election data and sports results, are
included in the later forms which appear at the
beginning and end of the book. 10
After Pulitzer's death in 1911, the news-
papers,by nowthe Morning World, thoEvening
World, and the Sunday World, were held in
trust by his three sons. By 1930, the Press
Publishing Co., as the new enterprise was
known, saw both its circulation and its profits
slipping. That year the brothers entered into
conference with Roy W. Howard of Scripps-
Howard for the possible sale of the papers. In
January 1931, a sale contract was signed, but
the deal had to go through the court to deter-
mine if the sale met the conditions of Pulitzer's
will. When the court allowed the sale in Feb-
ruary, two days of frenzied activity occurred
as the staff of the World tried to buy the papers
on their own, but the sale of the World to
3 1 8 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Scripps-Howard became final. If the
Almanac 's staff felt any turmoil, none showed.
Lyman continued, apparently unruffled.
New Editors
After Lyman's death in 1 937 the editorship
of the Almanac passed to E. Eastman Irvine.
Irvine too was an old newspaper hand, with 35
years experience before becoming the editor,
including 14 years with the New York World-
Evening Telegram. Eastman continued
Lyman's general editorial direction. During
his tenure, however, the Almanac made a
major change. On the title page of the 1945
edition, this notice appeared:
This edition of The World Almanac — the
sixtieth — appears with all advertising elimi-
nated to maintain the policy of making the
publication of greatest interest and value to
the greatest number of people. The acute
paper shortage has curtailed supplies but the
elimination of advertising has permitted The
Almanac to continue its high volume of
coverage of previous years of factual infor-
mation in all the important fields of Ameri-
can and world activity.
The current Almanac editor, Mark S. Hoffman,
sees in the decision to cut advertising revenues
rather than information a clear outline of the
priorities held by the publication. 11
Irvine, who died on his way to work one
day in 1 949, was succeeded by Harry Hansen,
another journalist of long experience. Hansen
had been a war correspondent during the First
World War and had come to the World in
1926. During Hansen's editorship the Alma-
nac continued its traditionally broad cover-
age. In response to changing tastes and phi-
losophies of journalism, the biographies of the
presidents became less personal and more
academic — and not as much fun to read.
George Washington was described as "re-
sourceful, a stern disciplinarian," and Polk's
long hair and affability were not mentioned.
Hansen gave up the editorship in 1965 and
continued with other publishing ventures until
his death in 1977.
Luman H. Long became the Almanac's
editor in 1966 after working at the New York
Sun and the World-Telegram and Sun for
almost 25 years. To Long fell the inclusion of
zip codes in 1966, the first colored maps in a
center section in 1967, and the addition of
colored pages of national flags in 1970. The
1972 edition of the Almanac carried Long's
obituary. He had had thoracic surgery three
days before his death. "Concerned with meet-
ing the deadline of the 1972 edition of the
Almanac, he had worked intensely up to the
day before he entered the hospital." 12 George
Delury assumed the editorship in 1973; the
first woman editor, Hana Umlauf Lane, began
in 1981; and Mark S. Hoffman has served
since 1987.
An Abiding Structure
The Almanac of today retains Robert
Lyman's sense of organization and his vision
of making accessible all kinds of data. Tables
are still grouped by subject, although the cal-
endars and astronomical data which used to
come first now appear 300 pages into the
volume. Elections returns have moved to the
front part of the Almanac. The lists of promi-
nent people have grown to include artists,
scholars, and entertainers of all sorts. Feature
articles discuss such topics as stress, personal
finance, consumer information, and space
exploration. Sports items, now among the
categories near the back of the book, have
become less aristocratic and cover the major
team sports, both professional and college (the
cheers have disappeared), as well as golf,
tennis, and fishing. Clearly, the Almanac has
grown but it has not abandoned its original
intentions.
Publication problems similar to those
Lyman faced also remain. Fifty years after his
time, in 1985, editor HanaUmlauf Lane talked
■ about the constraints she felt. The final publi-
cation date has been moved to November, so
her print run of 1 .8 million copies had its first
deadlines in early August and its last just two
WORLD ALMANAC 319
days after the elections in November. Al-
though at that time all of the World Almanac
data resided on a computer, only 20 percent
was updated online. 13 With the most recent
annual issues of the A Imanac, the same pattern
is repeated. The now more than two million
copies are made up of 15 percent relatively
stable information, such as the Constitution or
the flags, 60 percent updatable information,
such as government statistics, biographical
data, and geopolitical information, and 25
percent that is completely new each year, like
the "Chronology of Events" and specialty
articles. Lyman's "Table of Contents" had
been renamed "Quick Reference Index" in
1968 and moved to the back of the volume in
1975. The index, vastly expanded from the
days when Lyman wrestled to perfect it, still
must be produced last and occupies, as ever,
the volume's opening pages.
The editors of the Almanac who face
these deadlines often suffer from the vagaries
of world events. Lane lamented that the 1982
Falklands crisis occurred on a final deadline
day, and so the story had to wait until the 1 983
edition. 14 Mark Hoffman saw the San Fran-
cisco earthquake disrupt the 1989 World Se-
ries, so that the 1990 World Almanac contains
incomplete Series information for the first
time since coverage of the event began in
1 903 . Hoffman jokes, "Even though I am a big
baseball fan, since working for the World
Almanac, I find myself torn between rooting
for my favorite team and hoping for no rain
delays and a sweep. My job has also altered
my political feelings come election time, as I
am now more concerned (at least for one
night) with the election being clearly decided
by early Wednesday morning than with who
wins." 15
Along with the timeliness of its informa-
tion, the World Almanac has always valued
the accuracy and authority of its data. Since its
early issues, the Almanac has tried to indicate,
at least in some general way, the source of its
material. Lyman took pains to explain his use
of international reference tools, survey ques-
tionnaires, government documents, telephone
inquiries, and subject experts to collect his
data. He boasted that although typographical
errors may occur, he himself let only one get
into finalprint — the date ofPresidentGarfield's
death being listed as September 10 instead of
September 1 9. 16 The accuracy of ih& Almanac's
data was such that Lyman felt that one of the
book's greatestuses was in settling bets. "Daily
I get telephone calls. . . . The winner never
splits with me. Never! Sometimes the loser
will send an indignant protest, hinting that he
lost $5,00." 17 No doubt it is due to stories like
Lyman's that the verso of the title page of all
recent issues of fas Almanac states "The World
Almanac does not decide wagers."
Critical Reception
While the World Almanachashzen. around
for a good while, reviews have been infre-
quent until fairly recently. Sol Linowitz, writ-
ing for the Saturday Review in 1956, humor-
ously discussed the biographical sketches; 18
another very brief note appeared in Saturday
Review in 1969. 19 The Almanac appeared with
its three closest cousins, thQlnformationPlease
Almanac, the New York Times Encyclopedic
Almanac, and the Reader 's Digest Almanac,
in the first volume of Bohdan Wynar's^meri-
can Reference Books Annual™ and again in
ARBA in 1977, where it was noted that the
Almanac has sold more copies that any other
book except the Bible. 21 Wynar again in-
cluded the Almanac in his selection of Best
Reference Books 198J-1985. 22 Catholic Li-
brary World called the Almanac, "perhaps the
best one- volume resource of its kind," 23 The
American Library Association's Reference
and Subscription Books Review called it "one
of the best known and most often consulted of
ready-reference books." 24 Most of these re-
views have cited the variety of information
available, the updating of its data, and the
usefulness of its index.
Not everything about the Almanac has
received praise. Wynar, with sympathy, criti-
320 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
cized the aesthetics of the publication: "As
one can expect, the physical format of The
World Almanac represents an obyious com-
promise between the factors of price, size and
usability. The volume is especially marred by
the 7-point typeface which is slightly difficult
to read, The layout is decidedly utilitarian
rather than aesthetic." 25 The complaint was
echoed by the American Library Association' s
Reference and Subscription Books Review
Board: "Fine print, crowded lines, harsh beige
paper do not make World Almanac pleasing to
sight and touch; but then it is produced as an
inexpensive and utilitarian work, not as an
aesthetic object." 26
Julia Miller and Jane Bryan studied in
detail four similar almanacs: the World; the
Hammond Almanac of a Million Facts,
Records, Forecasts (originally the New York
Times Encyclopedic Almanac, then the Offi-
cial Associated Press Almanac, then the CBS
News Almanac), which began in 1970; Infor-
mation Please Almanac, begun in 1947; and
HheReader'sDigestAlmanac,startedm.l966. 21
The authors asked each almanac 20 questions,
like "How many women own major league
baseball teams?" "What magazines have the
highest circulation?" and "How many Bud-
dhists are there in America?" They also ana-
lyzed each volume's coverageof business and
economics, and sports, entertainment, and the
arts. The World Almanac could answer or
partly answer 13 of the reference questions,
got praise for its entries on business and con-
sumer directories and for its wide coverage of
entertainment and sports. Information Please
fared much the same. Hammond responded to
1 8 of the reference questions but did not rank
quite as high on its business and directory
information. Reader 's Digest, the researchers
decided, envisioned a different purpose for its
much more text-oriented almanac.
Currently, of these 4 titles, only the World
Almanac misinformation Please still publish.
Hammond ceased publication in 1982 and
Reader's Digest in 1987. In fact, many of the
more recent reviews of the World Almanac
also mention Information Please, not as an
alternative but as a companion reference tool.
In its long history, the World Almanac has
had wide influence. Mark Hoffman tells sto-
ries he has heard around the Almanac of-
fices — that World War II GIs carried the
Almanac in their footlockers along with pin-
ups of Betty Grable; that the oath of office
taken by Lyndon Johnson after John Kennedy's
assassination was read from the World Alma-
nac, that a copy of the Almanac was somehow
smuggled to the hostages in Tehran, Iran, in
1979 — their only news link to the outside
world. 28
The Almanac promises to continue its
distinguished traditions. The new political or-
ganization of Europe, scientific discoveries of
space exploration, and new prize winners of
all sorts will take their place alongside the
dates for Easter for the past and future centu-
ries and the carefully documented phases of
the moon. After almost a century and a half,
the World Almanac andBookofFactsvemams
a valuable and fascinating reference tool for
everyone.
3
PUBLICATION HISTORY
World Almanac. New York: Press Publishing Co.,
1868-1893. Annual. Publication suspended
1 876, reinstituted 1886.
World Almanac and Encyclopedia. New York: Press
Publishing Co., 1894-1922. Annual.
World Almanac and Book of Facts. Press Publishing
Co., 1923; the New York World, 1924-1931;
the New York World-Telegram, 1932-1950;
theNew York World-Telegram and Sun, 195 1-
1 966; Newspaper Enterprise Association 1967-
1986; Pharos Books, 1987- . Annual.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
In spite of its age and wide availability,
the World Almanac has received very little
attention in print. The lengthiest treatment
comes from Robert Hunt Lyman, the
WORLD ALMANAC 321
Almanac's editor for 15 years during the sec-
ond quarter of this century, who described in
detail how information was gathered and the
book was produced. No one else has done so
in the 65 years since. The Saturday Review
twice paid it brief tribute as a fact-filled and
entertaining volume. The only analytical study
ever published was done by Miller and Bryan
more than ten years ago. Indeed, more has
been written about the distinguished editors of
the Almanac than about the Almanac itself.
American almanacs in general offer great
opportunity for researchers. Research centers
on almanac makers, especially Benjamin
Franklin. In contrast to the colonial period,
nineteenth-century almanacs, mass produced
and usually edited anonymously, have not
been studied thoroughly.
"Answers to a Manufacturing Task That Aren't in the
World Almmac." Publishers WeeklylTl (March
1, 1985): 66-68.
Barret, James Wyman. Joseph Pulitzer and His
World. New York; Vanguard Press, 1941.
Drake, Milton. Almanacs of the United States. New
York: Scarecrow Press, 1962.
Linowitz, Sol M. "The Fact Arsenal." Saturday
Review39 (March 24, 1956): 42.
Lyman, Robert Hunt. "Saving Time in Research."
Special Libraries 17 (1926): 352-59.
Miller, Julia E., and Jane G. Bryan. "Wealth of
Information: A Review of Four 1979 Alma-
nacs." Reference Services Review 17 (1979):
67-78.
Sagendorph, Robb. America and Her Almanacs.
Dublin, NH: Yankee; Boston: Little, Brown and
Co., 1970.
Seitz, Don C. Joseph Pulitzer, His Life and Letters.
New York: Simon and Schuster, 1924.
Stowell, Marion Barber. Early American Almanacs:
The Colonial Weekday Bible. New York: Burt
Franklin, 1977,
. "Revolutionary Almanac-Makers." Biblio-
graphical Society of America Papers 73
(1979):41-61.
Swanberg, W.A. Pulitzer. New York: Charles
Scribner's Sons, 1967.
NOTES
1 Milton Drake, Almanacs of the United States, vol. 1
(New York: Scarecrow Press, 1962), p. viii.
^MarionBarberStowell.ii'flWv American AlmanacsQ^ew
York: Burt Franklin, 1977), 7.
J Ibid., 65.
4 Ibid., x.
'Clarence S, Brigham, "Report of the Librarian," Pro-
ceedings of the American Antiquarian Society, new
ser., 35 (1925): 217.
6 Don C. Seitz, Joseph Pulitzer, His Life and Letters (New
York: Simon and Schuster, 1924), 126-27.
1 World Almanac, 1892,7.
8 Robert Hunt Lyman, Special Libraries 1 7 ( 1 926): 3 52-
53.
9 National Cyclopaedia of American Biography, see
"Lyman, Robert Hunt."
10 Lyman, "Saving Time in Research," 353.
1 ' Mark S. Hoffman, speech given to Rockland County,
New York, public librarians, 18 April 1990,
12 World Almanac and Book of Facts, 1972, 3.
13 "Answers to a Manufacturing Task That Aren't in the
World Almanac," Publishers Weekly 227 (1 March
1985): 68.
14 Ibid., 66.
"Hoffman, speech, 18 April 1990.
14 Lyman, 358.
17 Ibid.
18 SolM. Linowitz, "The Fact Arsenal," Saturday Review
39 (24 March 1956): 42.
"David W. Qlixon, "Where to Look It Up," Saturday
Review 52 (17 May 1969): 31.
20 American Reference Books Annual 1 (1970): 31,
21 Review of World Almanac and Book of Facts; Ameri-
can Reference Books Annual 8 (1977): 62.
"Bohdan S, Wynar, ed., Best Reference Books 1981-
1985 (Littleton, CO: Libraries Unlimited, 1986), 5.
23 Review of World Almanac and Bookof Facts, Catholic
Library World 19 (1978): 358.
24 Review of World Almanac and Book of Facts, Refer-
ence and Subscription Books Reviews ( 1 December
1981): 518.
2i Review of World Almanac and Book of Facts, Ameri-
can Reference Books Annual 1 (1970): 31.
26 Review of World Almanac and Book of Facts, Refer-
ence and Subscription Books Reviews (1 December
1981): 518.
27 Julia E. Miller and Jane G. Bryan, "Wealth of Informa-
tion: AReviewofFoiir 1 979 Almanacs," Reference
Services Review 17 (1979): 67-78.
"Hoffman, speech, 18 April 1990.
"The Best of Its Type":
World Book Encyclopedia
Holly D. Rogerson andE. Paige Weston
fo.
0m
DEVELOPMENT AND HISTORY
Early in this century, World Book was recog-
nized as the "best of its type." 1 It was also the
first of its type: a comprehensive family ency-
clopedia for North Americans. Over its long
history, World Bookhas not strayed from its
original intent: to make information acces-
sible to its primary audience of families with
children while meeting the needs of users of
all ages. Indeed, World Book's early and in-
creasingly sophisticated efforts to keep in
touch with its audience are the very story of its
success.
On June 24, 1915, James H. Hanson,
president of the Hanson-Bellows Company,
wrote to Michael Vincent O'Shea, a nation-
ally known educator and expert on child de-
velopment. Hoping to interest O'Shea in re-
vising The New Practical Reference Library,
a moderately successful six-volume general
encyclopedia first published in 1907, Hanson
said, "the needs of the boy and girl in the
grades are to be our first consideration. In style
we are determined to write down to the mind
of the child in all those articles in which
children are mainly interested." 2 O'Shea took
the bait, and Hanson signed him on as editor-
in-chief. Within weeks, however, it was clear
O'Shea was shaping not a revision, but a
wholly new work — a family encyclopedia
eventually named World Book: Organized
Knowledge in Story and Picture?
The process by which the title of the new
work was chosen is perhaps symbolic of the
link World Book would always have with the
education systems in the United States and
Canada. The publisher solicited suggestions
from over 25,000 leading educators and of-
fered cash prizes not only for a winning title,
but also for useful editorial comments. What
started out as a publicity device became an
early finger on the pulse of the educators.
Ninety-six of the nearly 5,000 naming-contest
submissions included the word "world" and so
World Book was born.
From its beginnings, making information
accessible to a broad audience has been World
Book's goal. Over the years its editors have
refined their techniques for assuring attain-
ment of that goal. Today World Bookis its own
best example of a family encyclopedia as
defined in its article "Encyclopedia": "Family
encyclopedias aim to meet the reference and
study needs of students in elementary school,
junior high school, high school, and beyond.
They are also designed as everyday reference
tools for the entire family, for teachers, for
librarians, and for other professional and busi-
ness people." 4 In the 75 years since Hanson
first wrote to O ' Shea, World Bookhas doubled
its size, developed its "style," and broadened
its scope; but it has never needed to redefine its
audience. In 1947, Dorothy Canfield Fisher
wrote,
Don't forget that all of us, in many facets and
aspects of our personalities, are "young" in the
sense of being uninformed and inexperienced.
For instance, I am quite my own age (close to
seventy) as to French literature, because that
WORLD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 323
has been a special interest of mine nearly all
my life. But in the matter of information
about, say, ocean currents, or the ethnology of
the people of Nicaragua, I cannot claim a
mental age of more than twelve. That is the
age for which these cheerful, colorful vol-
umes of bright red and blue were produced.
For me too, this outward aspect is encourag-
ing. It suggests to me (as to the eighth-grader)
that what I find inside will not, by its cold
scholarly rigidity, swamp and drown my not
very deep or keen (but all the same living)
interest in a subject, aroused perhaps by a
casual reference in something I have been
reading. 5
The view from within the World Book organi-
zation echoes this. Executive Editor A. Rich-
ard Harraet attributes World Book's success to
its remarkable continuity of purpose, sus-
tained in large measure by the loyalty and
longevity of its editorial personnel; by the
belief that "World Bookers," from salesper-
son to CEO, have in the World Book product;
and by its appropriateness for American
homes. 6
Michael Vincent O'Shea
O'Shea set World Book on its path by
making a decisive break in content between it
and its forebears. However, he recognized
those elements in the Hanson-Bellows opera-
tion that would further his purpose for his new
creation. Notable among these was the Con-
sultation Department of the New Practical
Reference Library. This department, estab-
lished by Arno Roach, a forceful Missouri
book jobber who handled the New Practical
Reference Library, the American Educator,
and World Book, answered mail queries from
subscribers so that they were not limited to the
information contained in the encyclopedia
they had purchased. When an inquiry came
into the Consultation Department, "Roach
would ask himself whether the information
requested should actually be included in the
encyclopedia itself, and, if so, it was prepared
for inclusion in the ensuing edition. This way,
he and his staff kept their fingers on the public
pulse. " 7 A popular selling point, the consulta-
tion service was an early model for the now
finely honed curricular responsiveness of
World Book.
O'Shea also took note of the successful
communication-through-sales strategies used
with the American Educator and the New
Practical Reference Library. He felt that the
sales force was an important conduit for feed-
back about readers. O'Shea, "a salesman's
editor " believed that the only people quali-
fied to make a judgment and give advice on
what should be included in World Book "were
those who were in daily communication with
the public " 8 It is this level of attention to its
audience's needs and interests that even today
sets World Book apart from others of its kind.
Although the current edition of World
Book looks, naturally enough, vastly different
from the first edition, founding editor O'Shea
would recognize its commitment to the stan-
dards he set. Some of the central features
present in the first edition can be seen in
today's World Book: articles on topics of high
interest, written in simple language and with
illustrations of key concepts. As an early indi-
cation of World Book's close ties with the
education system, the first edition of World
Book contained a variety of special articles on
education topics, such as "Modern Educa-
tion" and "Measurement of Intelligence."
Many other articles, on topics such as "Home-
making" and "Cooperation Between Home
and School," were aimed at helping families.
Four Major Revisions
Since its inception, World Book has un-
dergone four majorrevisions, each time intro-
ducing features that have made it a more
responsive reference tool for its family audi-
ence. Across intervening editions, however,
only World Book's physical growth, from 8 to
22 volumes, can be easily charted. Most of the
changes — to the selection of topics, the num-
ber and type of illustrations, the vocabulary,
the finding aids, and the structure of the ar-
ticles and of the work overall — were intro-
duced gradually, as editors and staff analysts
324 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
learned new and better ways to tailor their
product to the inclinations, abilities, andneeds
of American families.
The first major revision to World Book
resulted in the 13-volume 1929/30 edition. For
the first time, the final volume of the set was
devoted toa"Reading and Study Guide."This
500-page separate volume, designed prima-
rily for teachers, contained approximately 40
outlines that attempted to integrate the various
articles dealing with a given subject area in the
encyclopedia. Also included were projects
illustrating the application of bookknowledge
to practical life; reviews of major school sub-
jects with page references to the other vol-
umes of the encyclopedia; and reading lists.
Also for the first time — possibly in the history
of reference work publishing — the print size,
line length, and overall page design of the set
were systematically tested through classroom
experiments conducted by the School of Edu-
cation at the University of Chicago, to ensure
that World Book was easy to read. The next
year World Bookptoudly introduced the modi-
fied unit-letter arrangement, in which each
letter of the alphabet is covered by one volume
(with two volumes devoted to a few of the
more frequently used letters). World Book
continues to use a modified unit-letter ar-
rangement today. While the unit-letter ar-
rangementresults in volumes ofuneven length
rather than the uniform volume length favored
by some other encyclopedia publishers, editor
Harmet believes that this arrangement helps
readers in their search for information. 9 In
1933 the set expanded to 19 volumes, and
included a bibliography of books for further
reading. The much-lauded bibliography,
placed in the final volume, was in the form of
a classified book list and indicated the level of
each book as adult or juvenile.
In 1936 World Book secured its ties with
the American educational system by estab-
lishing its first Editorial Advisory Board, with
six distinguished educators as members. Dr.
George H. Reavis, assistant superintendent in
the Cincinnati school system, served as chair-
man. Reavis strongly urged that World Book
articles, at that time written at the seventh
grade level or higher, be written at the level of
the grade for which the topic was appropriate
(so that, for instance, the article "Dog" would
be written in a much simpler style than the
article "Donizetti"). Editors agreed, and the
Advisory Board began a series of research
projects with the goal of grade-appropriate
articles in mind. Aside from Reavis, two men
played central roles in the original research
process. Dr. Hollis L. Caswell, who would
later become president of Columbia
University's Teachers College, surveyed what
was taught at each grade level across the
country. William Scott Gray, a reading spe-
cialist at the University of Chicago, studied
students' reading levels in each grade and
established the editorial guidelines to be used
in World Book to ensure readability. Other
researchers examined various subject areas,
as well as how students of different ages used
encyclopedias. 10 Funds made available by the
Field family after the Marshall Field purchase
of World Book in 1945 strengthened the re-
search activities behind World Book. Thus,
the World Book ethos of writing for "the girl
and boy in the grades" was made more prac-
ticable with the development of such system-
atic analysis of the schools and the students.
The results of the studies were incorpo-
rated into World Book's second major revi-
sion, the 1947 "post-war" edition, still nine-
teen volumes long but enormously different in
style and content. For the first time, each
article had been written or rewritten at the
level of the school grade in which its topic was
taught, as specified by Caswell's study. While
the celebrated contributors to the edition in-
cluded such diverse individuals as J. Edgar
Hoover writing on the Federal Bureau of
Investigation, Emily Post on etiquette, and
Monsignor Fulton J. Sheen on a variety of
religion-related topics, a painstaking 15-step
editorial process retained each author's style
but insured the suitability of reading level. 11
In the 1948 edition, graded bibliographies
attached to major articles replaced the longer
bibliography at the end of the set. Then, in
WORLD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 325
I960, came the third major revision, and an
expansion to 20 volumes. "Although the only
real innovation was the Trans- Vision®, a vi-
sual aid showing various layers or levels of a
subject [such as the anatomy of a frog] by
means of a series of acetate overlays in color,
everything in the new set had been freshly
approached and executed." 12 By this time, as
S. Padraig Walsh has noted, "the work had
almost doubled in size (11,600 pages) from
the original edition, and the number of illustra-
tions had more than doubled to more than
21 ,000, with a very substantial increase in the
use of color," 13
In 1971 the set expanded again to 22
volumes, with the final volume consisting of
theResearch Guide and anlndex with 150,000
entries. The Research Guide portion of the
volume contained an instructional section en-
titled "How to Do Research" and more than
200 subject-specific Reading and Study Guides
designed to help students and teachers plan
independent study units. During the 1 970s and
1980s World Book introduced a computer-
compiled index to supplement its abundant
internal cross-references; metric equivalents
for all measurements; and many more color
illustrations. Also during these years, World
Book editors worked both to eliminate sexist
and racist stereotyping from text and illustra-
tions and to meet, with expanded coverage,
the growing public and curricular interest in
the history of women, blacks, and Native
Americans. But there was not another major
overhaul to the set until the 1988 edition for
which nearly 1,000 entries were completely
revised, and since which approximately one-
third of the space in 21 volumes has been
devoted to illustrations, in color wherever
appropriate.
Critical and Popular Reception
World Book's popularity has never wa-
vered. It is difficult, in fact, to distinguish its
critical reception from its popular reception.
The many hundreds of book reviews of World
Book that have been published over the years
are more celebratory than critical. Reviewers
have tended only hesitatingly to mention mi-
nor flaws. The following, from a 1943 review
by Lucile Fargo, is typical:
'Continuous revision' has anintriguing sound,
but is such a complicated process that the
encyclopedia maker who does not every once
in a while stub his toe is among the thrice
blessed, For what he cuts out or inserts or fully
rewrites in one spot starts embarrassing reper-
cussions throughout the set. The World Book,
twenty-fifth anniversary edition, probably does
as well in continuous revision as is humanly
possible. But anyone who takes the trouble to
run down inconsistencies in the resulting patch-
work will find them. 14
The favorable critical reviews were rou-
tinely mentioned in sales talks, of course.
Long after the first edition, for instance, sales-
men quoted a one-liner about it from the
October 1918 issue of Booklist: "thebestofits
type." Stringent editing, thoughtful illustrat-
ing, and rigorous testing made World Book
"best of its type"; salesmanship, however,
made it best selling. For most of its life, World
Book has been sold door-to-door to parents.
According to William Murray, World Book
ranked as the bestselling encyclopedia of its
kind as early as 1 935, I5 and this title has never
since been challenged. Interviewed for
Murray's 1966 book, World Book salesman
Bill Hayes said:
It's been a tremendous growth, though it was
a gradual thing. We didn't have an increase
every year, just a general trend upward. We
didn't have public relations and advertising
programs to back us up either. I doubt if there
was any one year under Quarrie when the
Company spent as much as $25,000 for adver-
tising. It was all accomplished largely by the
sweat of the brow of the people who were
doing it." 16
To read the secondary literature is to realize
that "World Book" refers to a selling organi-
zation, as well as a high caliber publication.
When Scott & Fetzer acquired World Book
from Field Enterprises in 1978, they were
buying a sales force as much as a product.
Editor A. Richard Harmet now says: "Ency-
clopedias need to be sold. They're a little like
326 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
insurance in that way. A person doesn't wake
up in the morning and say, 'I feel like buying
an encyclopedia today.' The salesperson needs
to demonstrate the need, use, and value of an
encyclopedia. But since we have a nonprofes-
sional sales force, you have to know they
believe in the product." 17
Maintaining High Standards
How does World Book remain the high-
quality encyclopedia in which its sellers be-
lieve so strongly? Expert contributors, of text
and illustration, have never been enough. From
the World Book, Inc., internal document"Sub-
ject: Editorial Objectives," comes the topic
sentence, "World Book's aim is to present
information from the vast reservoir of knowl-
edge in the most accessible and usable form."
In support of this objective, World Book's
researchers and editors put tremendous effort
into six complementary strategies:
1 . analyzing current school curricula, to
ensure that World Book covers topics
of interest;
2. writing every article "to grade level,"
so that each article is accessible to
readers at the grade level at which the
topic is most likely to interest;
3. using all vocabulary advisedly, and
defining "difficult" words in context
wherever possible;
4. maintaining stringent editorial stan-
dards for clarity and organization, while
striving to maintain the individual char-
acter of contributors' own prose;
5. designing an easy-to-read index vol-
ume and an admirable system of cross-
references, from one article to others,
and from unused headings to valid
entries; and
6. systematically testing World Book in
real classrooms, to learn whether stu-
dents can, in fact, use it successfully.
The first strategy, school curricula analy-
sis, began with the studies by Caswell in 1 936
and to this day are an ongoing process at World
Book. Caswell himself chaired the Editorial
Advisory Board for 19 years and remained on
the Board for 30 years. In the 1950s Caswell
and Dr. William H. Nault concluded a bench-
mark study of the curricula in grades kinder-
garten through 12 in hundreds of U.S. and
Canadian schools. This study, the Caswell-
Nault Analysis of Courses of Study, was fol-
lowed by a number of similar studies commis-
sioned by World Booh Today, the 61 -volume
Nault-Caswell-Brain Analysis of Courses of
Study and its 30-volume supplement serve as
essential research tools to help World Book
editors design articles and place them at the
appropriate grade level. The studies, collec-
tively referred to as the Curriculum Analysis at
World Book, show which topics are taught in
which grades, and the actual information cov-
ered each time the topic is discussed in a cross-
section of North American schools. The Cur-
riculum Analysis has also served as an impor-
tant tool for the World Book salespeople, en-
abling them to convey to the customers how
closely World Book is geared to the school
curriculum.
A second study accomplished by a survey
of curriculum guides and other instructional
materials is the Typical Course of Study, which
lists by grade and academic discipline topics
usually covered in schools, While the Typical
Course of Study might seem to serve much the
same purpose as the Nault-Caswell-Brain
Analysis of Courses of Study, the two studies'
purposes and formats are complementary rather
than identical. A careful comparison of sub-
jects in World Book reveals how well the
encyclopedia covers the topics determined in
the Typical Course of Study. On the other
hand, the Curriculum Analysis lets the editors
know what questions students are likely to
have at each level on a given topic. 18
Writing each article "to grade level" and
using all vocabulary advisedly, including de-
fining difficult words in context, are strategies
involving painstaking editorial control. Since
1976, editors have referred to Edward Dale
WOULD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 327
and Joseph O'Rourke's Living Word Vocabu-
lary for information on how well known a
particular word is — even a particular sense of
a particular word. According to Dale and
O'Rourke, "... a word with a [recognition]
score of 50% or less is generally a hard word
and should be reconsidered before using in
writtenmaterial." 19 Harmetreports that World
Bookuses a score of 67 percent to indicate "an
understandable word." 20 Since 1981, when
the most recent edition of The Living Word
was published, Harmet says, "we have up-
dated the database with some 5,000 new and
retested words. It remains a key editorial
source." 21 However, World Book's editorial
policy is not one of using a "controlled vo-
cabulary." Difficult words are used, but all
new or difficult vocabulary used in World
Book articles is defined in context if possible.
The WorldBook, Inc., internal document "Easy
Reading is Hard Writing" instructs new edi-
tors on word definition.
We always put a new word (or old word used
in a new sense, which makes it also a new
word) in italics. Sometimes merely putting a
word in italics is enough.
After roll call, the men wash and shave,
and then go to the mess hall for break-
fast.
Even an unskilled reader would realize that
the mess hall is a room in which meals are
served. And putting mess in italics identifies
an uncommon use of the word. 22
Readability, however, depends on a vari-
ety of factors in addition to vocabulary level.
Therefore, the length and structures of sen-
tences and paragraphs are carefully moni-
tored by WorldBook editors. The readability
of longer, more complex articles is also pur-
posely pyramidal in structure, with the initial
paragraphs written much more simply than
later ones describing more complex aspects of
the topic if it is of interest to various age
groups. The obvious effect of such pyramidal
structure is that of potential access by a broader
audience.
Although WorldBook editors have never
made a secret of their role in achieving the
remarkable clarity of World BookpxosQ, many
reviewers over the years have commented on
this clarity, as if it were one of life's mysteries.
World Bookh&s, in fact, always been "heavily
edited," says Richard Harmet. "It has never
been a collection of scholarly essays like the
[Britannica] Macropaedia.'" n Articles for the
First edition of WorldBook went through seven
careful readings before being committed to
type. 24 The "Basic steps in the preparation of
a WorldBook article," which are listed in the
"Encyclopedia" article in the current edition
of WorldBook, make clear the editing process
is even more involved today, Reflecting on her
work for the 1947 edition, Martha Simmonds,
then supervising editor for WorldBook style,
wrote:
Of course, styling means rules. They differ.
We had to choose what we considered the best
authorities in grammar, sentence structure,
punctuation, spelling, and pronunciation, be-
cause we could not take some rules here and
others there. But we made exceptions in spe-
cial cases, and always on good authority. For
instance, our spelling authority prefers amoeba,
but we decided to use ameba, in line with the
most up-to-date science textbooks. For the
same reason, we wrote sulfur instead of sul-
phur, except in the case of a name, such as
Sulphur Springs. 25
But under Simmonds, as today, World Book
copy editors retained an author's own style, as
far as possible. Simmonds quotes with plea-
sure the following, from the 1947 edition's
article "Camel:"
There is nothing romantic about the camel's
personal appearance. It is a shaggy, awkward,
stiff-legged, goose-necked, humpbacked beast.
It has a split upper lip, popeyes, loosely hung
jaws, and a stupid, sad expression on its too-
small face. Its temper is sad and sullen, inter-
rupted by fits of anger and rage. The camel's
personal habits are so bad that it has few
friends, even among other camels.
World Book's editorial policy on access,
including indexing and cross-referencing, has
resulted in a system allowing easy location of
information. Describing a late 1980s' edition
of World Book, Kenneth Kister noted that its
index included an entry for every 70 words of
: ■ : I
».~,\;
328 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
text. "Only the Academic American Encyclo-
pedia (1:45), Collier's Encyclopedia (1:50),
and Merit Students Encyclopedia (1:65) have
better ratios." 26 In addition to this index are
abundant cross-references. Speaking in 1976,
Harmet told his audience that World Book
editors "were aware that Americans generally
were not index users, and so we developed a
carefully designed system of short articles,
cross-references, and other features to guide
readers in their search for information." 27 Sig-
nificantly, even the Preface of the current
edition includes a cross-reference to another
World Book entry.
When the five strategies described so far
are not enough to ensure that World Book is
easy to use, the sixth strategy, testing World
Book in more than 400 real classrooms across
the U.S. and Canada, finds where they have
failed. Housed in large metal filing cabinets in
the World Book editorial offices in Chicago is
perhaps the world's most charming database:
a database of cards filled out by students. It is
a database of the questions World Book's real
users pose of it, of the "search strategies" they
used, and of the success they met with. Harmet
chuckles over questions: How does salt get in
the ocean? Do fish close their eyes when they
sleep? Editors are on the alert for "tellable
facts," he says, to bring out in the articles.
"The information may be there, but if a fourth
grader ' s the one who would want to know, and
it' s not in a place a fourth grader can find it, or
in a form a fourth grader can understand, that ' s
not good enough." 28
However, World Book editors see the
hands-on testing of materials by their intended
audience as much more than a mop-up opera-
tion, designed to catch problems that made
their way by the first five strategies. Rather,
the Classroom ResearchProject, as itis called,
constitutes another aspect of audience and
curricular responsiveness. The 100,000-plus
cards returned to the World Book Research
Department each year from students in the test
classrooms are processed by computers to
provide editors with summaries of data on
article usage in each grade and subject. Thus,
the results of testing affect not only the mate-
rial tested, but also subsequent editorial deci-
sions on later articles. 29
Graphics
World Book works hard to match its clear
writing with graphics that are equally helpful.
The visual appeal of a set of books like World
Book is significant, as both book reviewers
and World Book researchers will confirm. As
part of the major revision effort for the 1929/
30 edition, then owner William F. Quarrie
commissioned experiments, at the University
of Chicago's School of Education, on the
relative readability of various page designs,
type styles, and type sizes. At the time, 9-point
Baskerville on pages 6.5" x 9.75" was deter-
mined to be optimum. Before the 1988 con-
version to anew sans-serif font, dubbed "World
Book Modern," World Book likewise under-
tookacareful study of modern readers' tastes.
World Book publishers have also been cau-
tious in introducing new bindings. Overcom-
ing a long reluctance to use the color green, the
now-familiar white and green "Aristocrat"
binding was made available in 1955, after a
specially bound white and green set was pre-
sented to, and well-received by, Pope Pius
XII.
The other aspect of World Book's visual
appeal, of course, is its abundant illustrations.
Illustrations have never been superfluous to
World Book, clear though its prose has been.
Reviewing the 25th anniversary edition, Lucile
Fargo wrote, "What was of primary impor-
tance in 1917 (as now) was that pictures
should illustrate the text and not simply deco-
rate it. The skill with which illustrations are
now used to illuminate and clarify the text is
remarkable. Almost as in a movie, processes
are broken down into series of operations
pictorially displayed. And of the use of charts
and pictographs there is no end." 30
Important and impressive as they were,
the illustrations were accomplished on a shoe-
string budget. Historically the most thinly
staffed department in the company, the Art
WORLD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 329
Department was allowed to grow briefly while
work on the 1947 edition was under way, but
then was pruned back again. Not until 1960
and the next major revision, with new Field
Enterprises money and new rotary presses that
could reproduce illustrations more inexpen-
sively, did the Art Department begin to ex-
pand once more. As further technological
advances have allowed, illustrations havebeen
added, enlarged, colored, and more fully inte-
grated with the texts they supplement. The
relative importance of illustrations, and the
relative contribution of illustrators, has also
been allowed to grow. Today, article illustra-
tions are reviewed, edited, and verified by
experts, as carefully as article texts. The use of
color in the 1988 edition, product of a major
revision, was greeted with enthusiasm byre-
viewers.
The infusion of color in the state and province
articles is but a small part of a welcome
overhaul of the look of World Book. , . . Color
photos and drawings appeared through previ-
ous World Book editions, but not in the num-
bers used in the 1988 edition. The total num-
ber of illustrations, approximately 29,000,
remains aboutthe same. However, now 24,000
of them — a remarkable one-year increase of
10,000— are in color. 31
In the 1990 edition, according to the "Re-
viewing Aid," illustrations account for ap-
proximately one third of the space used. "The
use of color extends to all subjects, except for
small biographical portraits, historical black-
and-white photographs and drawings, and ' one
of a kind' illustrations." 32
Accuracy
Clear prose and visual appeal would mean
little without accuracy and World Book's re-
searchers meticulously verify all data included.
For this purpose, World Book* s own reference
library contains 22,000 volumes and 450 pe-
riodical titles. Many other libraries in Chicago
and throughout the country are used in the
research effort, as well as thousands of phone
and letter inquiries. The internal document
"Research behind World Bool? (undated, but
presumably still current) says, "World Book's
researchers, under the direction of Mary
Norton, use an average of 20 sources for each
article they authenticate." 33 Another internal
document, "Subject; Editorial Objectives,"
urges staff members to maintain accuracy by
thinking critically and checking all informa-
tion, against primary sources, when possible.
If only secondary sources are available, ex-
tensive research in multiple secondary sources
is advised. 34
Though book reviews and sales records
suggest World Bookhas sailed from strength
to strength, it has, over the years, weathered
some storms. For instance, although it is now
known for the expert contributors who sign
their articles, and for the staff researchers who
verify every fact, World Book was once open
to acharge ofplagiarism, and narrowly averted
a damaging lawsuit. On November 16, 1930,
the New York Times published a piece under
the headline: "Plagiarism Charged in
Encyclopaedia Suit: Britannica Concern Asks
Writ and $250,000 Damages from Chicago
Publisher." 35 The article elaborated, "The
plaintiff . . . charges that the defendant com-
pany not only openly plagiarized material
contained in the plaintiff s publication but re-
wrote other material tomake it seem original."
When it became clear to W.F. Quarrie & Co.
that the charge was in earnest, the publishers
mobilized a dozen researchers to prove that
the Britannica and World Book articles in
question drew their facts, and their phrasing,
from a common source. These researchers
managed to establish only that about half of
the 77 articles in question drew from a com-
mon source. Further investigation by World
Book's Robert Preble, however, showed that
"certain changes had been made in the quota-
tions taken from Britannica itself to conform
more closely to the claims made in the suit." 3 *
At this point, though it had become clear that
some of the World Book articles in question
did, in fact, contain instances of "heavy crib-
bing," 37 the Britannica publisher agreed to
330 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
drop the suit. After this time, World Book
contributors were required to fill out three
cards with each submission: one certifying
they had not committed plagiarism, a second
listing their primary sources, and a third giv-
ing pertinent biographical data about them-
selves. This practice continues today.
Foreign Sales and Marketing
World Book has also found marketing
abroad to be a challenge. World Book is in-
eluctably an American product. Versions of
the encyclopedia have sold internationally
(primarily in Great Britain), but overseas sales
have always been eclipsed by U.S. and Cana-
dian sales. In 1936 the New Era Publishing
Company, of London, did bring out a 10-
volume World Book: British Empire Edition.
Harold Shelton was general editor of this
venture; Lord Gorell was advisory editor, "a
purely nominal position," according to Walsh.
Then, in 1961, Field Enterprises renewed the
effort. From 1966 to 1968 they published a 12-
volume International Edition, edited by Gil-
bert C.E. Smith. While not a disaster, the
International Edition lacked the strengths of
World Book at home, and sold accordingly.
The International Edition was not so off-
puttingly tied to American school curricula,
but then neither was it tied to British or Aus-
tralian curricula. Since 1968 the domestic
edition has been sold abroad. World Book as
sold abroad, however, whether in the Interna-
tional Edition or in the domestic edition, sac-
rifices some of its famous ease-of-use, since it
has been sold abroad in two alphabetic se-
quences, with the first sequence consisting of
the domestic World Book and the second se-
quence consisting of two additional volumes
treating topics from the point of view of the
readers in that area of the world.
World Booh has kept its text up to date
with world news and with American attitudes
through research and technology. The "Re-
viewing Aid" for the 1 990 edition emphasizes
that research "provides the basis for the an-
nual revision of World Book and for the long-
range planning that makes World Book a. con-
tinuously evolving resource. In this respect,
the current edition is one point on a continuum
of effort. It reflects the experience gained
from the past and points the way for the future
as new data and experience provide further
guidance." 38 In more concrete terms, how-
ever, it is the printing presses, text manage-
ment software, and telecommunications lines
in which World Book's publishers have in-
vested that allow the kind of currency World
Book's readers now expect. "From 1947 on,"
Murray wrote, "the type for every page was
kept standing in racks instead of being de-
stroyed, as had previously been done once the
printing plates had been made. This enabled
the editors to make any changes they desired
in a particular page." 39 And as early as 1975,
FieldEnterprises Educational Corporation an-
nounced that World BookEncyclopedia would
soon begin the move to an electronic editorial/
composition system specifically designed for
encyclopedia operations. 40 According to
Kister, this system was then the most ad-
vanced in the encyclopedia industry. 41 Today
the text and illustrations of World Book ar-
ticles canbechanged, almost at the last minute.
The "Reviewing Aid" is worth quoting at
length:
A newly copyrighted and revised edition of
World Book is available to subscribers late in
the calendar year prior to the year of the
copyright. For example, shipment of the up-
dated sets for the 1990 edition began on De-
cember 20, 1989. An elaborate typesetting
and printing schedule was necessary to assure
that new sets were available on that date.
Because of the large pressrun, it was neces-
sary to begin the printing in early September
to assure the availability of books late in
December. The binding of completed vol-
umes began in mid-November.
In developing a production schedule, the
editors attempted to identify those pages that
seemed most likely to require revision and
placed them later in the printing schedule. For
example, the World Series table in the Base-
ball article was handled in this way. Changes
in pages at the end of the printing schedule
WORLD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 331
could conceivably be made as late as the third
week of November.
The editors also reacted to late-breaking
events affecting the content of World Book
that occurred after the deadline for those pages
... In November, the presses were stopped to
revise the Germany article to include men-
tion of the opening of the Berlin Wall. 42
Family purchasers of World Book, of
course, are unlikely to take advantage of the
"continuum of effort" that produces a new
edition every year. They are unlikely, that is,
to purchase many new editions. Many fami-
lies and many more libraries, however, decide
they can afford an annual supplement to their
aging encyclopedia. Supplements have been
available to World BookpxtrchasQTS since 1 92 1 .
From 1922 until 1940 W.F. Quarrie & Co.
(later the Quarrie Corp.), published a Loose-
Leaf Annual. In 1941 this was abandoned for
the softcover World Book Encyclopedia An-
nual Supplement, In 1 962, in turn, this evolved
into the hardbound World Book Year Book.
Interestingly, World Book publishers have
long recognized that annual supplements are
not used as a reference work the way their base
sets are. Murray writes that Roy Fisher, who
oversaw the first World Book Year Book,
knew that the supplement "was almost always
opened and read as a magazine. Therefore, he
designed the book to be leafed through and to
catch the casual browser's attention, exactly
as a good magazine does. Visually and textu-
ally, the approach was based on good reporto-
rial techniques. 'We knew that once the book
went up on the shelf, its active life was gener-
ally over,' [Fisher] observed." 43
Editor Harmet does not fear for the active
life of World Book Encyclopedia. He is confi-
dent there will continue to be a role for printed
general reference works. The advent of televi-
sion did not change World Book's, readership,
he claims, because people still need to be able
to learn the "who, what, where, when, and
why" of topics of their own choosing, rather
than of topics that come to them on the evening
news. In the 1990 edition of World Book,
Harmet' s "Encyclopedia" article contains a
section on "How to judge an encyclopedia"
which does not take into account any format
other than paper. In the event that CD-ROM
readers or broadband network connections
become commonplace in American homes,
however, World Bookintendsto be ready. The
new Information Finder, "A CD-ROM Refer-
ence Based on the World Book Encyclope-
dia" hit the market in December 1989. The
CD contains the text of 17,800 articles. It
likewise includes tables, cross-references,
reading lists, and an index. According to the
Reference Books Bulletin Editorial Board re-
view, "Information Finder is especially im-
pressive in the way it facilely incorporates
1 39 ,000 definitions from the World BookDic-
tionary, allowing the user to make quick look-
ups at any point in a search session." 44 Infor-
mation Finder does not include any of the
superb, and hitherto essential, World Book
illustrations, although some illustrations may
be included in an update.
While formats may change, the editorial
strategies that have ensured the accessibility
of World Book's information to generations of
families will assuredly not waver. Editor
Harmet intends for World Book to remain the
"best of its type."
PUBLICATION HISTORY
From the beginning, World Bookhas been
published under a system of "continuous revi-
sion." The following are editions which re-
sulted from extraordinary revision efforts.
World Book: Organized Knowledge in Story and
Picture. Michael Vincent O'Shea, editor in
chief. Chicago: Hanson-Roach-Fowler Co.,
1917. 8 vols.
World Book Encyclopedia: Modern, Pictorial, Com-
prehensive. Michael Vincent O'Shea, editor in
chief. Chicago: W.F. Quarrie & Co., 1929-
1930. 13 vols.
332 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
The World Book Encyclopedia, J. Morris Jones,
managing editor. Chicago: Quarrie Corpora-
tion, 1947. 19 vols.
The World Book Encyclopedia. J, Morris Jones,
editor in chief. Chicago: Field Enterprises Educa-
tional Corporation, I960. 20 vols.
The World Book Encyclopedia. Robert O. Zeleny,
editor in chief. Chicago: World Book, Inc.,
1988. 22 vols.
It should be noted that World Book has
also been published in several special edi-
tions:
The World Book Encyclopedia. (Braille ed.) Louis-
ville, KY: American Printing House for the
Blind.1961.
The World Book Encyclopedia. (Large print ed.)
Chicago: Field Enterprises Educational Corpo-
ration, 1964.
The World Book Encyclopedia. (Recorded ed.) Lou-
isville, KY: American Printing House for the
Blind, 1980.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Literature about The World Book Ency-
clopedia falls into four categories: book re-
views, corporate histories and memoirs, news
stories, and inhouse publications, Reviews of
World Book Encyclopedia are myriad. The
few listed below are selected for their depth,
and for the edition of World Book they treat.
Only reviews of milestone editions (anniver-
sary editions or largely revised editions) have
beenincluded. Of histories, William Murray 's
Adventures in the People Business, commis-
sioned on the occasion of World Book's 50th
anniversary, is the most significant. Murray
himself is indebted to "a brief history of the
Company's early years" by William V. Miller
(1953), but this history was evidently never
published, and could not be located in the
company archives. Of inestimable value to
this chapter were the various inhouse publica-
tions (anonymous and undated) furnished by
Executive Editor A. Richard Harmet.
Baurnbach, Donna, Ann Barron, and Mary Bird.
"Electronic Encyclopedia: Searching for the
Right One," CD-ROM End User 2 (August,
1990): 58-60.
Corrigan, Adeline. "Reference." Review of World
Book. Library Journal 85 (November 15, 1960);
4235-36.
Dale, Edgar, and Joseph O'Rourice. The Living Word
Vocabulary: A National Vocabulary Inventory.
Chicago : World Book-Childcraft International,
1981. Second edition of The Living Word Vo-
cabulary; The Words We Know: A National
Vocabulary Inventory. Chicago: Field Enter-
prises Educational Corporation, 1976.
"Door-to-Door Conglomerate." Forbes 122 (August
21, 1978): 112.
"Door-to-Door Selling: Scott & Fetzer Finds It a
Lucrative Line of Business." Barron 's6\ (July
6, 1981): 29, 31.
Fargo, Lucile F. "The World Book Twenty-fifth
Anniversary Edition." Review of World Book.
Horn Book 19 (July, 1943): 246-50.
Fisher, Dorothy Canfield. "Books That Edify." Re-
view of World Book. Atlantic Monthly 180
(August, 1947): 122-25.
"General Reference Work to Be Published inBraille."
ALA Bulletin 53 (June, 1959): 528.
Harmet, A. Richard. "Encyclopedia." World Book
Encyclopedia. 1989 ed.
. "Finding Devices and Visual Aids in a
Major American Encyclopedia." In "The Mak-
ing of a General Encyclopedia." Booklist 73
(September 15, 1976): 206-07.
Hill, Elsie Isabel. "Salute to the New Campion's and
World Book." Horn Book23 (September, 1947):
348-53.
Kister, Kenneth F. Best Encyclopedias: A Guide to
General and Specialized Encyclopedias. Phoe-
nix: Oryx Press, 1986.
. Encyclopedia Buying Guide: A Consumer
Guide to General Encyclopedias in Print. 3rd
ed. New York: R. R. Bowker Company, 1981.
Murray, William, Adventures in the People Busi-
ness: The Story of World Book. Chicago: Field
Enterprises Educational Corporation, 1966.
Nault, William H., Hollis L. Caswell, and George B.
Brain. Analysis of Content of Courses of Study.
Chicago: Field Enterprises Educational Corpo-
ration, 1972. Supplement, 1978. Supplement,
1987.
"Plagiarism Charged in Encyclopaedia Suit:
Britannica Concern Asks Writ and $250,000
Damages from Chicago Publisher." New York
Times, 16 November 1930, sec. 1, p. 3, col. 3.
Rasmussen, Carol. Review of World Book Encyclo-
pedia. IxiAmerican Reference Books Annual 15
(1984): 23-26.
Review of World Book Booklist 85 (October 15,
1988): 386.
WORLD BOOK ENCYCLOPEDIA 333
Review of the Information Finder. Booklist 86 (June
1,1990): 1918-21.
Reviewing Aid for "The World BookEncyclopedia ":
22 volumes: 1990 Edition. Chicago: World Book,
Inc., 1990.
Rudolph, Barbara. "'It Comes with the Territory/"
Forbes 130 (September 13, 1982): 84-85,
Saporito, Bill. "A Door-to-Door Bell Ringer." For-
tune 110 (December 10, 1984): 83-88.
Scheib, Charlene M. Review of the Information
Finder . CD-ROM End User 2 (August, 1990):
62-64.
Simmonds, Martha F. "Styling the New World Book
Articles." Spotlight (June 7, 1947): 2a-2b.
Walsh, S. Padraig. Anglo-American General Ency-
clopedias: A Historical Bibliography, 1703-
1967. New York: R. R. Bowker Company,
1968.
"World Book Editors, Artists to Create, Revise En-
cyclopedia Pages on Terminals.' 1 Publishers
Weekly 208 (September 1, 1975): 46-48.
"World Book Encyclopedia to Publish Special Edi-
tion for Partially Blind." Library Journal 88
(May 1, 1963): 1850.
NOTES
1 Review of World Book, Booklist 15 (October 19 1 8): 5.
2 Quoted from William Murray, Adventures in the People
Business: The Story of World .ffou/c (Chicago: Field
Enterprises Educational Corporation, 1966), p. 8.
3 Ibid., 22.
4 World Book Encyclopedia , 1989 ed., see "Encyclope-
dia."
'DorothyCanfieldFisher, "Books That Edify, "review of
World Book, Atlantic Monthly 180 (August 1947):
122.
6 A. Richard Harmet, Executive Editor of World Book,
interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
7 Murray, 15.
8 Ibid., 31.
9 Harmet, interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
i0 Murray, 109.
11 Ibid., 136.
12 Ibid., 190.
13 S. Padraig Walsh, Anglo-American General Encyclo-
pedias: A Historical Bibliography, 1703—1967,
(New York: R. R. Bowker, 1968), 185.
14 "The World Book Twenty-fifth Anniversary Edition,"
Horn Book 19 (July 1943): 249.
15 Murray, 108.
" Ibid., 64.
17 Harmet, interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
18 "The Research Behind World Book," photocopied
(Chicago: World Book, Inc.), 3.
19 Edgar Dale and Joseph O'Rourke, "Appendix," The
Living Word Vocabulary: The Words We Know: A
National Vocabulary Inventory (Chicago: Field
Enterprises Educational Corporation, 1976).
20 Harmet, interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
21 Harmet, letter to the author, 20 June 1990.
22 "Easy Reading is Hard Writing," photocopied, (Chi-
cago: World Book, Inc.), 45.
23 Harmet, interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
"Murray, 17-18.
25 "Styling the New World Book Article," Spotlight (June
7, 1947): 2a-2b.
26 Kenneth Kister, Best Encyclopedias: A Guide to Gen-
eral and Specialized Encyclopedias (Phoenix: Oryx
Press, 1986), 205.
"Harmet, "Finding Devices," 207.
28 Harmet, interview with the author, 24 April 1990.
29 Reviewing Aid for The World BookEncyclopedia: 22
Volumes: 1990 Edition, (Chicago: World Book,
Inc.), 11.
30 Lucile Fargo, "The World BookT^enty-TifWi Anniver-
sary Edition," 248-49.
31 James Rettig, review of World Book Encyclopedia,
Wilson Library Bulletin 62 (March 1988), 103.
33 Reviewing Aid for The World Book Encyclopedia: 22
Volumes: 1990 Edition, (Chicago: World Book,
Inc.), 13.
33 "Research Behind World Book," 5.
34 "Subject: Editorial Objectives," photocopied, (Chi-
cago: World Book, Inc.), 37-38.
33 New York Times, Nov. 16, 1930, sec. I, p. 3, col. 3.
36 Murray, 87.
"Ibid.
u "Reviewing Aid for The World Book Encyclopedia ,"
10.
" Murray, 138.
40 "World Book Editors, Artists to Create, Revise Ency-
clopedia Pages on Terminals," Publishers Weekly
208 (1 September 1975), 46.
41 Kister, Best Encyclopedias, 201.
42 "Reviewing Aid for The World Book Encyclopedia,"
16.
43 Murray, 231.
44 Booklist 86, (1 June 1990), 1918.
Contributor Profiles
Mary Biggs is director of libraries at
Mercy College, a multi-campus institution in
Westchester County and the Bronx, New York.
She is also a lecturer at the Columbia Univer-
sity School of Library Service where she
teaches courses in information services. She
was formerly on the full-time faculty at Co-
lumbia and at the University of Chicago Gradu-
ate Library School. She has published widely
on reference, bibliographic instruction, edu-
cation for librarianship, library and informa-
tion science research, and publishing, with an
emphasis on literary publishing.
Pamela S. Bradigan is assistant profes-
sor and assistant director at The Ohio State
University Health Sciences Library. She re-
ceived her law degree in 1981 from Capital
University and she has written several articles
on legal dictionaries, bibliographic instruc-
tion, and end-use database searching. Bradigan
is currently a consulting editor for the Bulletin
of the Medical Library Association.
William S. Brockman is English librar-
ian at the University of Illinois at Urbana-
Champaign. He is the author of Music: A
Guide to the Reference Literature (Libraries
Unlimited, 1987) and serves as bibliographer
of the James Joyce Quarterly, He was for-
merly reference librarian at Drew University.
Charles Bunge is professor in the School
of Library and Information Studies at the
University of Wisconsin-Madison where his
primary teaching area is reference materials
and services. He has given talks and work-
shops in various parts of the country on the
selection and use of reference sources. He is
the author of numerous articles on this subject
in professional journals including "The Pub-
lishing of Heavily Illustrated Reference
Books," Reference Services Review (Spring
1983). Hehas served aspresidentof the Ameri-
can Library Association' s Reference and Adult
Services Division and in 1983 received its
Isadore Gilbert Mudge Citation for "signifi-
cant contributions to reference librarianship."
Jo A. Cates served as chief librarian of
The Poynter Institute for Media Studies in St,
Petersburg, Florida, from 1985 to 1991, and
continues to act as an associate of the Institute.
She is currently director of the Transportation
Library at Northwestern University in
Evanston, Illinois. She has served as head of
reference at the Lamont Library at Harvard
College. Cates is author of Journalism: A
Guide to the Reference Literature (Libraries
Unlimited, 1990) and numerous articles, and
reviews books for Library Journal and Choice.
Kerry L. Cochrane is currently acting
head of the Reference Department of the Main
Library at the University of Illinois at Chi-
cago . She has been at the University of Illinois
since 1 984 and has written on hypertext appli-
cations in academic libraries
Milton H. Crouch has held library posi-
tions at the University of Florida, The Penn-
sylvania State University, and, since 1969, the
University of Vermont. He served as presi-
dent of the Vermont Library Association in
k
336 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
1988 and as the VLA's American Library
Association councilor from 1983 to 1987.
Richard D. DeBacher is editorial direc-
tor of Southern Illinois University Press. He
began his publishing career at the University
of Chicago Press in 1 970 where he worked for
1 1 years. Subsequently, he held various mar-
keting, editorial, and general management
positions with the American Library Associa-
tion and the Oryx Press.
Marie C. Ellis is English and American
literature bibliographer at the University of
Georgia Libraries where she previously served
as head of the Reference Department and as
interlibrary loan librarian. She has been a
reviewer for American Reference Booh An-
nual since 1982 and served on the American
Library Association 's Reference Books Bulle-
tin Editorial Board from 1987 to 1991.
Mary W. George is head of the General
and Humanities Reference Division of the
Firestone Library at Princeton University. She
was coauthor of Learning the Library (Bowker,
1982) and wrote the chapter "Instructional
Services" in Academic Libraries: Research
Perspectives (American Library Association,
1990). From 1983 to 1990 she was coeditorof
the library instruction journal Research Strat-
egies.
Richard W. Grcfrath is reference librar-
ian at the University of Nevada, Reno. He is
author of "Eating Clams with Your Fingers: A
Survey of Contemporary Etiquette Books" in
Collection Building (Winter 1985).
Marta Lange is head of reference at
North Carolina State University Libraries. In
1990-91 she was chair of the Law and Political
Science Section of the Association of College
and Research Libraries, American Library
Association. She has chaired the Standards
and Guidelines Committee of ALA' s Refer-
ence and Adult Services Division. She is the
former secretary and a current member of the
NCSU Faculty Senate.
Mary L. Larsgaard is assistant head of
the Map and Imagery Laboratory Library,
University of California, Santa Barbara. She
is the author of Map Librarianship: An Intro-
duction (2nd ed., Libraries Unlimited, 1987)
and serves as editor of the Western Associa-
tion of Map Libraries Information Bulletin.
She has served as chair of the Special Librar-
ies Association Geography and Map Division,
the American Library Association Map and
Geography Round Table, the Western Asso-
ciation of Map Libraries, and the Map Online
Users Group.
John R.M. Lawrence is reference/
interlibrary loan librarian at the College of
William and Mary. He has worked previously
as a reference librarian in the University Re-
search Library at UCLA, the Carolina Popula-
tion Center at the University of North Caro-
lina, andthe Documents Department of Perkins
Library at Duke University.
William A. McHugh is a reference li-
brarian at Northwestern University and has
worked for more than ten years in reference
departments in public and academic libraries.
He is currently at work on a book on the origin
of the Union List of Serials.
Robert W. Melton is bibliographer for
English and American literature and assistant
special collections librarian at the University
of Kansas Libraries.
Stuart W. Miller is sales support man-
ager for NOTIS Systems, Inc. He has served
as chair of the American Library Association' s
Reference Books Bulletin Editorial Board and
is author of the Concise Dictionary of Acro-
nyms and Initialisms (Facts On File, 1988).
Margaret Morrison is coordinator of
public services at the University of Central
Arkansas in Conway, Arkansas. She has par-
ticipated in the Intern Program at the Library
of Congress where she worked for six years as
a specialist in automated reference services in
the General Reading Rooms. During 1990-91
she served as a Council of Library Resources
academic management intern at the Univer-
sity of Chicago Library.
Harold M. Otness is professor of library
science and collection development librarian
at Southern Oregon State College. He is au-
CONTRIBUTOR PROFILES 337
thor of The Shakespeare Folio Handbook and
Census (Greenwood Press, 1990) and numer-
ous articles in such journals as Libraries &
Culture, Library Journal, Reference Services
Review, Asian Culture Quarterly, Public Li-
brary Quarterly, and the Western Association
of Map Librarians Information Bulletin. Two
of his papers have been selected for Library
Lit — The Best of. . . (Scarecrow Press).
David M. Pilachowski is director of li-
braries at Denison University in Granville,
Ohio. Previously he served as associate uni-
versity librarian at Colgate University. He has
reviewed and written in the fields of political
science, Asian area studies, and library auto-
mation. He was also a member of the Asian
Studies faculty at Colgate and has been an
active member of the American Library
Association's Machine- Assisted Reference
Section.
James Rettig is assistant university li-
brarian for reference and information services
at the College of William and Mary. Since
1981 he has been editor/author of the "Current
Reference Books" column in the Wilson Li-
brary Bulletin. He has written numerous ar-
ticles on reference services and the role of
reference sources. He has served in various
editorial and advisory positions tot Reference
Services Review and developed that journal's
popular "Desert Island" feature. In 1987 the
American Library Association's Reference
and Adult Services Division awarded him its
Isadore Gilbert Mudge Citation for "signifi-
cant contributions to reference librarianship."
He is currently vice president/president-elect
of the Reference and Adult Services Division.
Holly D. Rogerson, a librarian and former
teacher, is the author of anumber of English as
a Second Language textbooks in vocabulary
and grammar.
Charles Scribner, Jr., was head of
Charles Scribner's Sons from 1952 to 1986.
His memoir of his career in publishing, In the
Company of Writers: A Life in Publishing
(Scribners, 1990), includes a chapter on
Scribner reference books. He served as presi-
dent of the American Book Publishers Coun-
cil from 1966 to 1968, as a trustee of Princeton
University from 1969 to 1979, and as a trustee
of the Princeton University Press from 1949 to
1981.
Johan nah Sherrer is head of reference at
Perkins Library at Duke University. She has
served as editor of Colorado Libraries and has
published articles on automation and refer-
ence services.
Linda K. Simons is coordinator of infor-
mation services at Roesch Library at the Uni-
versity of Dayton. She has written for Refer-
ence Services Review and American Refer-
ence Books Annual. She is currently at work
on a book-length guide to reference sources
for the performing arts.
Edward D. Starkey is university librar-
ianand associate professor atthe University of
SanDiego. He is author of Judaism and Chris-
tianity: A Guide to the Reference Literature
(Libraries Unlimited, 1991). He is an active
leader in the San Diego ecumenical move-
ment. He has served as a librarian at Indiana
University, the University of Dayton, and
Urbana College; prior to a career in
librarianship, he taught high school and col-
lege for eight years.
Carol M. Tobin is head of reference at
the Thomas Cooper Library at the University
of South Carolina. She has served on the
Reference and Adult Services Division's Ref-
erence Sources Committee. She is author of
"Online Computer Bibliographic Searching
as an Instructional Tool" in Reference Ser-
vices Review (Winter 1984), andhas reviewed
books and databases for RQ, College and
Research Libraries, Online, and Database.
David A. Tyckoson is head of the Refer-
ence Department of the University Libraries,
State University of New York at Albany. He
has also served as a reference librarian at Iowa
State University and as a science librarian at
Miami University in Oxford, Ohio. He has a
B.S. in physics and an M.L.S. in library sci-
ence, both from the University of Illinois at
Urbana-Champaign. He has been a reviewer
I
33 8 DISTrNGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
for several sources and has written exten-
sively in the area of reference services, He is
also the compiler of annual bibliographies on
AIDS published by the Oryx Press.
Sarah B. Watstein is head of the Refer-
ence Division at the Library at Hunter College
of the City University of New York. She is
coeditor of End-User Searching in Libraries
(American Library Association, 1988) and
On Account of Sex: Annotated Bibliography
on the Status of Women in Librarianship,
1982-1987 (American Library Association,
1990), and coauthor of AIDS & Women, A
Sourcebook (Oryx Press, 1990). She has also
written numerous articles on artificial intelli-
gence, burnout, online and instructional ser-
vices, reference services, and "women's stud-
ies.
E. Paige Weston is systems librarian and
assistant professor at the University of Illinois
at Chicago. She has served as an assistant
reference librarian at U1C. As a systems li-
brarian, she has wished for systems documen-
tation to be written as comprehensively and
comprehensibly as the World Book Encyclo-
pedia.
Sandy Whiteley is editor of Reference
Booh Bulletin, the reference reviewing sec-
tion of Booklist. She has worked for the Ameri-
can Library Association's Association of Col-
lege and Research Libraries and for North-
western and Yale University libraries, She is
the editor of Purchasing an Encyclopedia (3rd
ed., American Library Association, 1989) and
has contributed articles on book publishing,
bibliographies, and indexes to the ALA Year-
book (American Library Association).
Christine C. Whirtington has been arts
and architecture librarian and head of the Arts
Library at the Pennsylvania State University
since 1989. She was a reference librarian at
Penn State's General Reference Section from
1983 to 1989. She is author of "General Social
Sciences" in The Social Sciences: A Cross-
Disciplinary Guide to Selected Sources (Li-
braries Unlimited, 1989) and "John Muir" in
Read More About It: An Encyclopedia of
Information Sources on Historical Figures
and Events (Pierian Press, 1989). She was a
member of the American Library Association' s
Reference Books Bulletin Editorial Board from
1985 to 1989 andchaired the board from 1987
to 1989.
Elizabeth J. Wood is business librarian
and associate professor at Bowling Green
State University Library in Ohio . She is author
of Strategic Marketing for Libraries (Green-
wood Press, 1988), has contributed to Busi-
ness Serials of the U.S. Government (2nd ed.,
American Library Association, 1988), has
written articles about business reference works
and library marketing, and has given work-
shops on marketing academic libraries. With
Floris Wood she has coauthored She Said, He
Said (Visible Ink Press, 1991), a compendium
of public opinion information.
Index
by Linda Webster
Aarsleff, Hans, 182, 195
Abbot, Edwin, 56
Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 274, 276
Abingdon Press, 274, 276
Abridged Readers' Guide, 205, 207
Academic American Encyclopedia, 328
ACLS. See American Council of Learned Societies
Adams, W. Davenport, 26
Adams (J.S. & C), 288
Addison, Henry Robert, 306, 307
Adler, Mortimer, 83, 84
A.L.A. See American Library Association
A.LA. Booklist, 130
A.L.A. Index to General Literature, 201
Alamancs. See also World Almanac
history of, 313-14
in North America, 314-15
Alexander, Mary D., 36
Algeo, John, 195
All the World's Fighting Ships (Jane), 263
Allen, Douglas A,, 267
Allen, F. Sturges, 292
Allen, Harold, 297
Allibone, Samuel Austin, 227
Almanack de Gotha, 306
Altick, Richard, 29
American Almanac, 315
American Antiquarian Society, 253
American Bibliography (Evans), 248
American Book Company, 291, 292
American Council of Learned Societies, ix, x
American Dictionary of the English Language, An
(Webster), 181, 286, 287-89, 291, 300
American Doctoral Dissertations, 71
American Educator, 323
American Heritage Publishing Company, 298
American Imprints Inventory, 164
American Language (Mencken), 47
American Library Association
cataloging code of 1949, 169
Committee on Wilson Indexes, 204-5, 207
and Guide to Reference Books, 129-34
interest in printed catalog cards, 161
and National Union Catalog, 165, 166,
166-67
and Poole 's Index to Periodical Literature,
200
American Spelling Book, The (Webster), 287
Analyses Publishing Company, 151
Analytical Concordance to the Bible (Young), 271
Anderson, Margaret, 231
Andrews, Charles R., 204-5
Anglo-American Cataloging Rules, 169
Animal and Vegetable Physiology Considered
with Reference to Natural Theology (Roget),
221-22
Annals of English Printing (Pollard), 247
Annan, Noel, 60-61,63
Annual Register, 264
Apel, Willi, 123
Appleton (D.) & Company, 214
Arber, Edward, 243
Arnold, Matthew, 55
Arts and Humanities Citation Index, 234
Ashmore, Harry, 83
Association of Research Libraries, 164, 165
Association Periodicals, 94
Associations. See Encyclopedia of Associations
Atherton, Gertrude, 103, 111
Atlas of Ancient Geography, Biblical and
Classical, An (Smith), 118
Atlas sive Cosmographicae meditationes de
fabrica mundi et favricati figure (Mercator),
278-79
Atlases. See also Times Atlas of the World
definition of, 278
early works, 278-79
Avenel Books, 28
Babbage, Charles, 222
Babson, Roger W., 150
Baby and Child Care (Spock), 140
Baedeker, Eva, 2
Baedeker, Karl, 1, 2
Baedeker, Karl (grandson), 4
s gre^ri^ta: , .mmZ8aM8B£Sgg&&3^ Si j^ ii! ^te ! £
340 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Baedeker guidebooks
beginnings of, 1-2
bibliography on, 7-8
comments on, 3
development and history of, 1-6
as family enterprise, 2-3
format of, 5
maps in, 5
modern guidebooks, 5-7
Murray's contribution to, 2
publication history of, 6-7
quality of, 2-3
value of, 4-6
and World Wars, 3-4
"Baedekeriana," 7
Baedeker's Autoguides, 5-6
Baier, Andrew, 116
Bailey, Nathan, 180
Baily, Alfred Head, 306
Baily Brothers, 306-7
Baker, John, 95, 96
Baker, Orlando M., 291
Baker, Theodore, 121
Balay, Robert, 129, 134
Balding and Mansell, 1 67
Balfour, A. J., 307
Ballou, Robert O., 35
Banks, Margaret A., 21 8
Banneker, Benjamin, 3 14
Bannister, Roger, 139
Bannon, Barbara A., 21 1, 2 14
Bantam Books, 140
Barnes <fc Noble Book of Modern Parliamentary
Procedure (Jones), 212
Barnhart, Clarence L., 297
Barnum, S. W., 288
Bartholomew, George, 279
Bartholomew, Ian, 279
Bartholomew, John, 279
Bartholomew, John George, 262, 265, 279
Bartlett, John, 9-10, 11,12
Bartlett's Familiar Quotations
bibliography on, 16
development and history of, 9-15
early editions of, 9, 10
features of, 10-1 1
future of, 14-15
newer editions and new editors, 1 1-14
publication history of, 15-16
Baruch, Bernard, 82
Barwick, G. F., 245, 256n6
Barzun, Jacques, 50
Bateson, Mary, 59
Baynes, Thomas, 79
Bean, Donald P„ 34-35
Beatty, Jerome, 109
leaver, Sir Hugh, 138, 139
leek, Emily Morison, 1344, 16
leddoes, Thomas, 220
Beethoven (Sadie), 123
Bell, Andrew, 77-78
Bell, Vanessa, 55
Bell & Howell, 67, 175
Bell Syndicate, 104
Bemrose Publishing Company, 167
Bender, Harold H., 292
Benet, William Rose, 25
Bentham, Jeremy, 221, 227
Benton, William, 83, 84
Berger, Meyer, 174
Bible, 269-70, 277n3. See also Strong's Exhaus-
tive Concordance of the Bible
Bibliographical Society, 243, 244, 250
Bibliographical Society of America, 248
Biographia Britannica, 54
Biographical Dictionary of Musicians (Baker),
121
Biographical sources. See also Dictionary of
National Biography; Who 's Who
early works, 54-55, 306
examples of, 310
Biographie universelle (Fetis), 54, 121
Biographisch-bibliographisches Quellen-Lexikon
der Musiker and Musikgelehrten (Eitner), 120
Bishop, William W., 165, 246-47
Black, Adam, 79, 307
Black, Adam Rimmer, 308, 309
Black, Caroline Campbell, 19
Black, Henry Campbell, 19-20
Black, Rev. John Henry, 19
Black (A &C), 79, 80,307-8
Black on Judgments (Black), 19
Black's Law Dictionary
bibliography on, 22-23
criticism of, 20-21
current edition of, 21-22
development and history of, 18-22
early editions of, 19-20
early English-language antecedents of, 18-
19
publication history of, 22
Blakemore, Maurice N., 152
Blom, Eric, 121, 122-23, 126
Blount, Thomas, 18
Blue Guides, 4
Blume, Friedrich, 123
Boehm, David, 140, 144
Bolander, Janis, 263
Bolander, Louis H., 267
Bonk, Wallace, 26
Book of Days (Chambers), 25
Book of Knowledge, The, 80
Books on Demand, 67
Bookshelf, 38-39
Boorstin, Daniel, ix
Borroff, Marie, 41, 50
Botstein, Leon, 124
Boulter, Rev. W. C, 60
•jJ/M
INDEX 341
Bouvier, John, 18-19, 20
Bowker, R. R„ 95, 206-7
Boyle, L. Lawrence, 7
Bradley, Henry, 185-86
Bradley, Philip, 96
Brake, Laurel, 63
Brett, William Howard, 199, 200
Brewer, Ebenezer Cobham, 24-25, 26, 27, 29
Brewer's Dictionary of Phrase and Fable
antecedents of, 24-25
bibliography on, 29
critical reception for, 25-26
current edition of, 28
development and history of, 24-29
evolution and editions of, 26-28
publication history of, 29
value of, 28-29
Brewton, John, 115
Brewton, Sara, 115
Bridgen, Lilian E., 33
Bridgman, Percy, xi
Britannica. See Encyclopaedia Britannica
Britannica Book of the Year/Britannica World
Data Annual, 83,85
Britannica Learning Centers, 83
Britannica Software, 83, 299
Britannica 3, 84-86, 87
Britannica Year Book, 81
British Museum's General Catalogue of Printed
Books, 167
British Poets, 1914-1945 (Stanford), 114
Bronte, Charlotte, 55
Brown, R. LI., 280
Browning, Robert, 186
BRS DISS, 72
Bruncken, Herbert, 115
Bryan, Jane G., 320, 321
Buchanan-Brown, John, 25, 27, 29
Buckman, Peter, 142
Bullen, George, 243
Bunge, Charles, 110, 130
Burchfield, R. W., 49-50, 297
Burchfield, Robert, 180, 189-90, 191, 194
Burgess, Anthony, 50
Burke, John, 306
Butler, Nicholas Murray, 81
By Motor to the Golden Gate (Post), 106
Byron, Lord, 2
Calcareous Cements: Their Nature and Uses
(Redgrave), 244
Cambridge University, 82
Cambridge University Press, 81
Campbell, Loomis J., 292
Cardinale, Susan, 250
Carhart, Paul W., 292
Carlyle, Thomas, 260
Carr, Mrs. Walter, 120
Carroll, Mark, 31
Cartland, Barbara, 310
Cassell, John, 24, 25, 29
Cassell (publishing company), 25, 27-28, 29
Castle, Irene, 82
Caswell, Hollis L., 324, 326
Catalog of Books Represented by Library of
Congress Printed Cards Issued to July 31,
1942, 165
Catalogue of Books in the Library of the British
Museum, 243
Catalogue of Books Printed in theXVth Century
Now in the British Museum, A, 243
Cawdrey, Robert, 180
CBI. See Cumulative Book Index
CBS News Almanac, 320
CD-ROM
Compton 's Encyclopedia, 86
Dissertation Abstracts International, 72
Gale Global Access: Associations, 94
Granger's Index to Poetry, 1 15
Guinness Disc of Records, 144
Information Finder, 331
Magazine Article Summaries, 206
Moody's manuals, 156, 157
Oxford English Dictionary, 192-93, 194
Readers' Guide to Periodical Literature,
202
Roget'8 II: The New Thesaurus, 230
Science Citation Index, 239
Webster's Ninth New Collegiate Dictionary,
194, 299
Wilsondiso, 206
CDI. See Comprehensive Dissertation Index
Century Atlas and Gazetteer of the World, The,
279
Chalmers, Alexander, 54
Chamberlain, Joseph, 308
Chambers, Ephraim, 77
Chambers, Robert, 25
Chambers (W. & R.), 262
Chambers's Encyclopedia, 77, 262, 264
Chapman, R. W., 43
Chapman, Robert, 230
Chapman, Robert L., 230
Chataway, Christopher, 138
Checklist of Works of British Authors Printed
Abroad, in Languages Other Than English
(Shaaber), 247
Cheney, Frances Neel, 91, 130
Chernofsky, Jacob L., 255
Chicago Guide to Preparing Electonic Manu-
scripts, The, 38, 39
Chicago Manual of Style
bibliography on, 39-40
challenges for editors, 37-38
commercial viability of, 34
early history of, 32-33
eighth and ninth editions of, 34-36
first edition of, 33
342 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Chicago Manual of Style (continued)
history and development of, 31-39
later editions of, 33
modern manual, 36-37
present and future of, 38-39
publication history of, 39
tenth and eleventh editions of, 36
thirteenth edition, 38
Chisholm, Hugh, 80
Choice, 134
Churchill, Winston, 41, 308
Citizen 's Atlas of the World, The, 279
Claxton, Rerasen and Heffelfinger, 28
Cleary, James W., 216
Clemente, Nancy N., 3 1
Coleridge, Herbert, 181, 182-83
College & Research Libraries, 130
Colles, Henry Cope, 121-22
Collier's Encyclopedia, 86, 328
Colling, Patricia M., 73-74
Collison, Robert, 87
Columbia Granger's Guide to Poetry Anthologies,
The (Katz and Katz), 115
Columbia Granger 's Index to Poetry, 114
Columbia University, 129, 131-32, 133, 134
Columbia University Press, 113, 115
Commander, John, 167, 170, 171
Commonwealth Political Facts (Paxton), 265
Companion to the French Revolution (Paxton),
265
Compendious Dictionary of the English Language,
A (Webster), 287
Complete Concordance to Shakespeare 's Dra-
matic Works and Plays (Bartlett), 9-10
Complete Concordance to the Old and New
Testament, A (Cniden), 270-71
Composer Biography Series, 125
Comprehensive Dissertation Index, 72, 74
Comprehensive Pronouncing and Explanatory
Dictionary of the English Language (Worces-
ter), 289-90
Compton 's Encyclopedia, 83, 86
Compton 's MuliiMedia Encyclopedia, 300
Compustat, 155
Conant, James B.,ix
Concise Oxford Dictionary of Current English
(Fowler and Fowler), 42-43, 194
Concordance of the New Testamant, The (Gibson),
270
Concordances. See also Strong's Exhaustive
Concordance of the Bible
definition of, 269
early works, 270-71
Connolly, M. J., 21
Constable, Archibald, 78-79
Constitutional Law Review, The, 19
look (C), 265
Cooperative Index to Periodicals (Fletcher), 200
Copyright, 80
Cornhill Magazine, 55-56
Cotton, Clement, 270
Coulton, G. G., 50
Coussents, P. W., 113
Cowell, John, 18
Cox, William, 82
Crabb, George, 224
Craigie, William Alexander, 186-87, 188
Craik, George, 1 19
Creighton, J. E., 59
Crist, Timothy J., 253
Crockford's Clerical Directory, 306
Cronin, John, 167, 168, 170, 171
Crowell's Handbook for Readers and Writers, 25
Cruden, Alexander, 270-71, 273, 274
Crystal Palace, 118
Cummings, Alexander, 315
Cumulative Book Index, 199-200, 205, 206
Cumulative Catalog of Library of Congress
Printed Cards, 166
Cumulative Index to Periodicals (Brett), 199, 200
Cuppy, Will, 103
Cushing, Luther Stearns, 212
Cutter, Charles A., 161
Cuvier, Georges, 224
Cveljo, Katherine, 255
Cyclopaedia of Biblical, Theological, and
Ecclesiastical Literature (Strong), 273
Cyclopaedia or Universal Dictionary of Arts and
Sciences (Chambers), 77
DAB. See Dictionary of American Biography
DAL See Dissertation Abstracts International
Daiches, David, 50
Dale, Edward, 326-27
Dana, James D., 288
Daniells, Lorna M., 159
Danilov, General, 81
Dannreuther, Edward, 120
Datastream, 157
DATRIX, 72, 73
Daub, Peggy, 126
David, Charles, 171
David Cox and Peter De Wint (Redgrave), 244
Davis, Mary Ellen Kyger, 96
Davy, Humphrey, 220
Davy Crockett 's Almanack of Wild Sports of the
West, and Life in the Backwoods, 315
Dawson, Lawrence H., 27
De Quincey, Thomas, 79
Debrett's, 306
Debrett 's Handbook, 3 1
DeBruhl, Marshall, x
Delury, George, 318
Demeter's Manual of Parliamentary Law and
Procedure, 212
Democrat 's Almanac, 315
Dempsey, David, 267
Dentt, Edward, 121
INDEX 343
Deterioration of Structures of Timber, Metal, and
Concrete Exposed to the Action of Sea-Water
(Redgrave), 244
Deutsches Wdrterbuck (Grimm and Grimm), 182
Dewey, John, 82
Dewton, Johannes L., 167, 168, 169, 170, 171
DIALOG, 72, 94, 157
DIALOG Ondisc Standard & Poor's Corporation
Records, 157
Dickens, Charles, 24, 27, 100
Dictionaries, early works, 286-88. See also
Merriam-Webster family of dictionaries;
Oxford English Dictionary
Dictionary (Johnson), 181
Dictionary of American Biography, ix, x
Dictionary of American English on Historical
Principles, A, 187
Dictionary of American Library Biography, 136
Dictionary of American Regional English, 190
Dictionary of American-English Usage, A
(Nicholson), 48-49
Dictionary of British History, 27
Dictionary of English Literature (Adams), 26
Dictionary of Modern English Usage (Fowler)
advent of, 43
author's imprint on, 44-45
bibliography of, 50-51
contribution and influence of, 47-48
critical reception of, 43-44
deference to Latin in, 45-47
development and history of, 41-50
Gowers' revision of, 49
index to, 49
prescriptive nature of, 45
publication history of, 50
relevance of, 49-50
revision of, 48-49
style of, 47
Dictionary of Musical Terms (Baker), 121
Dictionary of National Biography
bibliography on, 63-64
critical reception for, 60-62
development and history of, 54-62
editorial standards for, 58-59
extension and revision of, 62
men responsible for, 55-60
precursors of, 54-55
publication history of, 63
purpose of, 57-58
Who's Who compared with, 310
Dictionary of Scientific Biography, ix-xii
Dictionary of the Bible (Smith), 118
Dictionary of the English Language, A (Johnson),
287
Dictionary of the English Language, A (Worces-
ter), 290
Dictionary of the Older Scottish Tongue, The, 187
Diderot, Denis, 77
Diehl,Digby, 141
Dissertation Abstracts International
bibliography on, 73-74
charges for dissertations, 68, 69, 75-
76nnl7-18
development and history of, 66-72
early volumes titled Microfilm Abstracts,
68-70
indexing of, 71-72,73
nonprint forms of, 72
origins of, 67-68
publication history of, 73
scope changes in, 70-71
subscription costs for, 70, 76n26
Dissertation Abstracts Ondisc, 72, 73
Dissertation Abstracts Online, 72, 73
Dissertations, availability of, 66-67
DNB, See Dictionary of National Biography
Doctoral Dissertations Accepted by American
Universities, 71
Dole, Nathan Haskell, 10, 11, 12
Donnelley Company, 34, 35
Donnelly, T. E. s 34
Donnelly Corporation, 108
Dougan, Alice, 203
Dreiser, Theodore, 3
DSB. See Dictionary of Scientific Biography
DuBois, W, E. B., 82
Duff, E. Gordon, 243, 245
Duffy, Richard, 99
Dun & Bradstreef, 153, 154
Dun & Bradstreet Financial Services of North
America, 157
Dutch, Robert A., 228, 231
Dwyer, William O,, 154
Dykema, Karl W., 297
EA. See Encyclopedia of Associations
EAA. See Encyclopedia of American Associations
Early English Text Society, 183
Early Modem English Dictionary, 187
EB. See Encyclopaedia Briiannica
Ebbitt, Wilma, 297
Edge of Objectivity, The (Gillispie), ix
Edinburgh Geographical Institute, 279
Editor, 39
Edwards Brothers, Inc., 68, 165
Eighteenth-Century Short-Title Catalogue, 253- 54
Einbinder, Harvey, 83-84
Einstein, Albert, 82
Einstein, Alfred, 121
Eitner, Robert, 120
Elements of Style, The (Strunk and White), 31
Eliot, T. S„ 41
Emblen.D.L.,230,231
Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 9, 291
Emily Post Cookbook, 101
Emily Post Institute, 107
Emily Post 's Etiquette (Post), 1 1
Encore, 126
344 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Encyclopaedia Britannica
article for also submitted to Dictionary of
National Biography, 57
bibliography on, 87-88
Britannica 3, 84-85, 87
development and history of, 77-87
early editions of, 77-78
eleventh edition of, 81
fourteenth edition and continuous revision,
82-84
future of, 86-87
Macropaedia, 84-85, 327
Micropaedia, 84-85
ninth edition of, ix, 79-80
organization of, 77
origins of, 77
plagiarism charges against World Book,
329- 30
Propaedia, 84-85
publication history of, 87
publishers of, 307
refinements in procedures and content, 78-
79
revision of Britannica 3, 85-86
sale and resale of, 81-82
supplements of, 221
in twentieth century, 80-81
University of Chicago and, 82, 83-84
yearbooks for, 81, 83, 85
Encyclopaedia Britannica Films, 83
Encyclopaedia Britannica, Inc., 86, 298
Encyclopedia Americana, 80, 82, 86
Encyclopedia of American Associations, 89-90
Encyclopedia of Associations
bibliography on, 96
compilation of, 89-90
computerized production of, 94-95
critical reception of, 90-91
development and history of, 89-95
expanding scope of, 92-94
origins of, 89
publication history of, 96
second edition and beyond, 91-92
supplement to, 92
Encyclopedias. See Encyclopaedia Britannica;
World Book Encyclopedia
Encyclopedic (Diderot), 77
English Association, 50
English Dialect Dictionary, 1 90
English Historical Review, The, 59
English Synonymes Discriminated (Taylor), 224
English Synonymes Explained, in Alphabetical
Order (Crabb), 224
Enoch Pratt Free Library, 92
Entick, John, 287
Epstein, Joseph, 43, 50
Epstein, Mortimer, 263-64
Erhard Ratdoh and His Work at Venice
(Redgrave), 244
Essay and General Literature Index, 201
Essay on the Constitutional Prohibitions Against
Legislation Impairing the Obligation of
Contracts and Against Retroactive and Ex
Post Facto Laws (Black), 19
Essays of an Information Scientist (Garfield), 240
Essentials of Parliamentary Procedure (Auer),
212
ESTC. See Eighteenth-Century Short- Title
Catalogue
Etiquette (Post)
bibliography on, 1 1 1-12
critical and popular reception to, 103-4
development and history of, 98-1 10
early revised editions of, 104-7
first edition of, 99-103
origins of, 98-99
publication history of, 1 10-1 1
reprint facsimile of first edition, 109
revisions by Elizabeth L. Post, 108-10
tenth edition of, 107-8
European Political Facts (Paxton), 265
Evans, Bergen, 296
Evans, Ivor H., 27, 29
Evans, N. Carol, 253, 255
Evans, William J., 216
Evelyn Wood Reading Dynamics, 83
Everett, LouellaD., 11-12
Everyman's Dictionary of Music (Blom), 122
Expositiones terminorum legum Anglorum
(Rastell), 18
Expository Dictionary of Biblical Words, An
(Vine, Unger and White), 275
Facts On File (company), 143-44
Facts On File, 143
Familiar Quotations (Bartlett), See Bartlett's
Familiar Quotations
Fargo, Lucile, 325, 328
Federal Yellow Book, 93
Fellowes, E. H., 121
Ferguson, F. S., 250
Field Enterprises, 325, 329, 330
Fifteenth Century Books, 243
Fifty Year Review of Moody's Investors Service, A
(Moody), 148
Find It in Fowler, 49
Firth, C. H., 59
Fisher, Dorothy Canfield, 322-23
Fisher, Roy, 331
Fitzgerald, F. Scott, 103
Five Hundred Years of Printing (Steinberg), 264
Fletcher, Ewen, 195
Fletcher, W. I., 200
Florio, John, 180
Flower, Desmond, 27
Follett, Wilson, 295-96
Force, Peter, 315
Forster, E. M., 3
INDEX 345
Forster, Walter E„ 89
Fortnightly Review, 119
Fowler, Frank G., 42-43
Fowler, Henry W., 41-47
Francis, F. C, 250, 255
Franklin, Anne, 314
Franklin, Benjamin, 314
Franklin, James, Jr., 314
Franklin, James, Sr., 3 14
Fraser's Magazine, 55
Frazer, James G., 79
Frey, Alexander Hamilton, 20
Friend, Joseph, 288
Fritze, R. H., 63
Fritze, Ronald, 195
Fuller, Henry, 45
Fuller Maitland, J. A., 120, 121
Funk& Wagnalls, 99, 103, 105, 108, 109
Furnivall, F. J„ 56, 181, 182, 183, 184
Gale Global Access: Associations, 94
Gale Research, 89, 93, 95
Gallery of Ghosts, A (Wing), 252
Ganly, John V„ 158,159
Gardiner, Leslie, 284
Garfield, Eugene, 234-35, 238, 240
Garrison, Fielding H., 20
Garvin, James, 82
Gaskell, Mrs., 55
Geiringer, Karl, 122
Genealogical and Heraldic Dictionary of the
Landed Gentry of Great Britain and Ireland,
(Burke), 306
Genealogical and Heraldic History of the
Peerage, Baronetage, and Knightage (Burke),
306
General Science Index, 235
Geographia (Ptolemy), 278
George Bell & Sons, 291
Gephart, Joseph C, 174
Gerwig, Henrietta, 25
Gibson, John C. L., 274
Gibson, Thomas, 270
Gilbert, W. S., 308
Gillispie, Charles, ix-x
Gladstone, W. E., 260
Glaisher, James, 67
Glynn, Jennifer, 63
Goddard, Mary K., 314
Goering, Hermann, 4
Goetz, Philip, 84, 86
Gold, David, 297
Goodrich, Chauncey, 288, 291
Goodrick, Edward W., 275
Gordon, Alexander, 117
Gorell, Lord, 330
Gould, Jay, 315
Gould and Lincoln, 229
Gove, Philip, 294-95
Gowers, Sir Ernest, 45, 49, 50
Graham, Bessie, 26
Grammatical Institute of the English Language, A
(Webster), 286-87
Granger, Edith, 113,114, 115
Granger 's Index to Poetry
bibliography on, 116
critical reception of, 1 14-15
development and history of, 1 13-15
expansion of, 114
indexes to, 113-14
publication history of, 115-16
Gray, J. C, 195
Gray, William Scott, 324
Great Books of the Western World, 83
Greek-English Lexicon Based on the German
Work of Francis Passow (Liddell and Scott),
182
Greene, Graham, 3
Greenwood Press, 5
Greg, W. W., 243, 244, 254, 256nl 1
Griggs (S.C.), 214
Grimm, Jacob, 182
Grimm, Wilhelm, 182
Grofman, Bernard N., 21 1, 213
Grolier Society, 80
Grosart, Alexander Balloch, 57
Grossman, John, 37, 39
Grotzinger, Laurel, 136
Grove, George, 117-21, 125
Grove Concise Dictionary of Music, 125
Grove's Dictionary of Music, 123
Grove 's Dictionary of Music and Musicians
American Supplement of , 121, 122
bibliography on, 126-27
Blom's editorship of, 122-23
Colles's editorship of, 121-22
critical reception of The New Grove, 124-25
development and history of, 117-25
first edition of, 119-21
Fuller Maitland's editorship of, 121
Grove's editorship of, 117-21
origins of, 118-19
publication history of, 125-26
Sadie's editorship of, 123-24
Guide to Reference Books
bibliography on, 136
and Columbia University, 131-32
critical reception of, 133
development and history of, 129-34
future of, 133-34
genesis and characteristics of, 129-30
publication history of, 135-36
sales figures for, 130, 137n20
as textbook, 133-34
updating of, 130-31, 136-37n7
Guide to Science (Brewer), 24, 25
Guinness, Benjamin, 140-41
Guinness Book of Almost Everything You Didn 't
Need to Know About the Movies, The, 141
346 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Guinness Book of Everything You Didn 't Need to
Know About Dogs, The, 141
Guinness Book of Olympic Records, The, 141
Guinness Book of Records
American publisher and American title for,
143-44
bibliography on, 144-45
critical reception of, 141
development and history of, 138-44
first American edition of, 140
first edition of, 139-40
format and organization of, 142-43
McWhirter Brothers and, 138-39
popularity of, 140-41
publication history of, 144
types of records in, 141-42
ways to use, 143
Guinness Book of Superlatives, The, 140
Guinness Book of World Championship Boxing,
The, 141
Guinness Disc of Records, 144
Guinness, Ltd., 143
Guinness Oddfax Series, 141
Guinness Sports Record Book, 141
Guinness Superlatives, Inc., 139
Gustafson, David, 36
Gutenberg, Johann, 313
Guthrie, Anna Lorraine, 202-3
Guthrie, Donald, 271
Hadley, A. T„ 292
Hammond Almanac of a Million Facts, Records,
Forecasts, 320
Handbooks in Music Series, 125
Handel (Sadie), 123
Handy Atlas, The, 279
Handy Reference Atlas of the World, The, 279
Hansen, Harry, 318
Hanson, James H., 322
Hanson, Lars, 251
Hanson, Robert, 154
Hanson-Bellows Company, 322, 323
Hardy, Thomas, 186
Harmet, A. Richard, 323, 325-26, 327, 328, 331,
332
Harper, William Rainey, 32
Harper and Brothers, 184
Harper & Row, 28, 108, 110
Harris, William T., 292
Hart, H. G., 42
Harvard Dictionary of Music, 123
Harvard University, 7 1
Hatsell, John, 212
Hayes, Bill, 325
Hayman, P. M. C, 24-25, 29
Haynes, Henry W., 9
Hazlitt, William, 79
Hellman, Geoffrey, 107
Hemingway, Ernest, 309
Hench, Atcheson L., 297
Henry Altemus, 28
Herald Almanac, 315
Herbert, A. P., 1
Herschel, J. F. W„ 67
Highet, Gilbert, 50
Hill, David, 22
Hinrichsen, Alex, 5, 6, 7
Hipkins,A. 1,120
Hiscock, W. G., 250
Historic Notebook (Brewer), 24
Historical Records Survey, 164
Historical Research, 60
History of Opera (Sadie), 125
History of the Railroads and Canals of the Unite,
States, A (Poor), 147
History of Water-Colour Painting in England, A
(Redgrave), 244
Hitchcock, H. Wiley, 125, 126
Hodder & Stoughton, 274
Hoffman, Herbert, 115
Hoffman, Mark S., 318, 319, 320
Holmes, Harvey L., 175, 176, 177, 178
Holmes, Harvey L., Jr., 178
Holschuh, Louis, 150
Hone's Every-Day Book, 25
Hooper, Franklin, 80, 82
Hooper, Horace Everett, 80-82
Hoover, J. Edgar, 324
Hopkins, Edward, 120
Hoskins, George, 150
Houghton Mifflin, 281
How to Analyze Railroad Reports (Moody), 1 5 1
How to Give Buffet Suppers (Post), 102
Howard, Roy W„ 317
Howell, John, 31
Hugh of Saint-Cher, 270
Hughes, Anselm, 121
Hunter, Brian, 266
Hurlbert, William Henry, 315-16
Husk, W. H., 120
Hutcmns, Robert Maynard, 83, 84
Huxley, Aldous, 3
Huxley, Julian, 82, 309, 311
Huxley, Leonard, 63
Huxley, T. H„ 79
Huxley, Thomas, 81
IBM United Kingdom, Ltd., 191
ICC. See International Computaprint Corporation
(ICC)
Index Society, 247-48
Index to American Doctoral Dissertations, 71
Index to Children 's Poetry (Brewton and
Brewton), 115
Index to Early Twentieth Century City Plans
Appearing in Guidebooks, 5
Index to Nineteenth Century City Plans Appearing
in Guidebooks, 5
Index to Subjects Treated in the Reviews and
Other Periodicals to Which No Indexes Have
Been Published (Poole), 200
■ <stu, t ja-nsffttoedfii^fl-^^jarf.
US
INDEX 347
Indexing. See also names of specific indexes
Dictionary of Modern English Usage
(Fowler), 49
Dictionary of Scientific Biography, xi
Dissertation Abstracts International, 71-72
Encyclopedia of Associations, 93
Granger 's Index to Poetry, 113-14
New York Times Index 174-78
Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature,
202-4
Science Citation Index, 23 6
Times Atlas of the World 28 1
Washington Post, 175
World Book, 327-28
Information Bank, 176
Information Bank Abstracts, 178
Information Finder, 331
Information Please Almanac, 319, 320
Inquiry into the Human Mind on the Principles of
Common Sense (Reid), 226
Institute for Scientific Information, 234-35
Institute of Historical Research, University of
London, 60
Interactive Data, 157
International Catalog of Scientific Literature, 161
International Computaprint Corporation (ICC),
191
International Copyright Law, 80
International Index to Periodicals, 205
International Inventory of Musical Sources, 123
International Thomson, 95
Interpreter, The (Cowell), 18
Irvine, E. Eastman, 318
Italian Touring Club, 4
Iveagh, Rupert Guinness, Earl of, 139, 142
Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor & Co., 291
Jackson, Walter Montgomery, 80-81
Jackson, William A., 250
Jacob, Giles, 18
Jane, John Frederick Thomas, 263
Jay, John, 288
Jefferson, Thomas, 212
Jesperson, Otto, 46, 48, 50
Jewett, Charles Coffin, 161
Jobs, Steven P., 299
John Bartholomew & Son, Ltd., 279
Johnson, Samuel, 180-81, 190, 227, 287
Jones, Breckinridge, Jr., 178
Jones, George W. ( 28
Judkins, C. J., 89
Kalendarium novum, 313
Kalonymus, Rabbi Isaac Nathan ben, 270
Kaplan, Justin, 14-15, 109, 111
Karl Baedeker GmbH, 6
Karl Baedeker Verlag, 6
Katz, Bill, 115, 132, 136, 198
Katz, Linda, 115
Keesey, Ray E., 212
Kellough, Jean, 157, 159
Kelvin, Lord, 79
Kenyon, John Samuel, 294
Kern, Richard, 95
Kemfeld, Barry, 125
Kiedaisch, Howard, 154
King, A. Hyatt, 122, 123
King's English, The (Fowler and Fowler), 42, 43,
46, 47, 48
Kingsforth, C. L., 59
Kirby, J. L., 63
Kircher, Conrad, 270
Kirkpatrick, Betty, 229
Kirshenbaura, J., 141
Kister, Kenneth, 87, 298, 327-28, 330-31
Kittredge, George Lyman, 292
Klein, Johann August, 1
Kletsch, Ernest, 163, 170
Knight, Floyd, 186
Knott, Thomas A., 292-93, 294
Know: A Magazine for Britannica People
Everywhere, 88
Knowledge Access International, 94
Kodansha publishing firm, 125
Kogan, Herman, 87
Kohlenberger, John R., Ill, 275
Krapp, George, 44, 288
Kraus Periodicals, 205
Krause, Roy A., 154
Kroeger, Alice B., 26, 129
Kropotkin, Prince, 79
Kruisinga, E., 46, 50
Krummel, D. W,, 125
Kuhn, Thomas, x
Lacey, Robert, 142
Lafreri, Antonio, 278
Laing, Gordon, 34-36
Lambert, Sheila S., 154, 155
Lane, Hana Umlauf, 318, 319
Lang, Paul Henry, 123
Langenscheidt publishing group, 6
Langton, Stephen, 270
Laqueur, Maria, 169
Large and Complete Concordance to the Bible in
English, A (Cotton), 270
Larsen, John C, 26
Laski, Marghanita, 187-88, 191, 192, 193
Laughlin, Rosemary M., 297
Law dictionaries, early works, 18-19. See also
Black's Law Dictionary
Lav! Dictionary Adapted to the Constitution and
Laws of the United States of America and
Several States of the American Union
(Bouvier), 18-19
Lawler, John, 203, 208
Lawrence, T. E., 3
Leavitt, Robert, 292
Lee, Sidney, 55, 56-61, 62
Lewicky, George, 200, 202, 205, 206
348 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Lewis, Sinclair, 103
Leyland, John, 263
Leypoldt, Frederick, 199
Library Journal, 130
Library of Congress
and cataloging of dissertations, 69
editorial processes for the National Union
Catalog, 168-69
Interlibrary Loan Service of, 165
National Union Catalog Publication Project,
167-68
and new technology, 169-70
plans for book catalog, 165-67
printed catalog cards and, 162
Project "B," 163, 164
Union Catalog Division of, 163-66
Library of Congress Author Catalog, 166
Library of Congress Catalog— Books: Authors,
166
Library of Congress Subject Headings, 202, 203
Library Research Service, 82-83
Liddell, George, 182
Liebert, Herman, 255
Lightner, Lennie, 38
Linowitz, Sol, 319
Lippincott, 28
List of American Doctoral Dissertations Printed in
1912-1938, 71
Little, Brown & Co., 9, 12-13, 80
Little Oxford Dictionary of Current English, 194
Living Word Vocabulary (Dale and O'Rourke),
327
Lizars (W. & D.)> 279
Llewellyn, William A., 299-300
Lloyd, Susan M., 228-29, 230, 23 1
Loewenberg, Alfred, 122
Long, Luman H., 318
Longman, 227, 230
Longman, Brown, Green, and Longmans, 226
Longmans, Green and Co., 228, 229
Lonsdale, Dame Kathleen, x~xi
Lowell, James Russell, 186
Lowes, John Livingston, 292
Lurie, Charles R, 177
Lyman, Robert Hunt, 316-18, 319, 320-21
Macauley, Thomas Babington, 79, 82
Mc Arthur, Tom, 231
McCall's magazine, 104
McClintock, John, 273
McChirg and Company, 113
McDavid, Raven I., 291, 297
Macdonald, Dwight, 296
McFarlan, Donald, 144
McFarland, A. C, 35
Macfarquhar, Colin, 77-78
McHenry, Robert, 86
McKenzie, D. F., 253
McLuhan, Marshall, 48, 50
Macmillan, Alexander, 118, 259, 260, 261
Macmillan, Daniel, 259, 260
Macmillan, Frederick, 263
Macmillan, Harold, 266
Macmillan and Company, 118, 119, 122, 123, 184,
259,260,261,262,266
Macmillan 's Magazine, 1 1 8, 1 1 9, 121
McMurtie, Douglas C, 164
Macropaedia. See Encyclopaedia Britannica
McVaugh, Julia, xi
McWhirter,Norris, 138-39, 140, 142-43, 144
McWhirter, Ross, 138-39, 141, 142-43, 144
McWhirter Twins, Ltd., 138-39
McWhorter, Diane, 16
Maczewski, A., 120
Madan, Falconer, 248
Magazine Article Summaries, 206
Magazine Index, 206
Mann, C. A. F„ 291
Mairs publishing group, 5-6
Maitland, Frederic William, 59, 63
Majority Rules: A Manual of Procedure for Most
Groups, The (Farwell), 212
Malone, Kemp, 47, 293
Malthus, Thomas, 79
Manners and Social Usages (Sherwood), 103
Manns, August, 118
Mansell Information/Publishing Ltd., 167, 169
Manual of Design (Redgrave), 244
Manual of Industrial and Miscellaneous Corpora-
tion Securities, The, 147, 148-50
Manual of Parliamentary Practice (Jefferson), 212
Manual of Parliamentary Practice Rules of
Proceedings and Debate (Cushing), 212
Manual of the of Railroads of the United States,
The (Poor), 148
Marbeck, John, 270
Marble, Manton, 315
Marquis, Albert Nelson, 3 10
Marra, Jean, 204, 205
Marshall, John David, 16
Marshall, Mrs. Julian, 120
Marshall Field, 324
Martin, Frederick, 260-61
Martineau, Harriett, 55
Masaryk, Thomas, 81
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 71
Masters Abstracts, 69
Mather, Cotton, 314
Mather, Nathaniel, 314
Maugham, W. Somerset, 47, 48, 61
Mawson, C. O. Sylvester, 229
Maxtone Graham, J. A., 138
Mead Data Central, 178
Meckler, Alan Marshall, 74
Medical and Chirurgical Society, 221
Medical Directory, 306
Mellon, Andrew, 82
Men and Women of the Times, 307
Mencken, H. L., 47, 82, 293
Mendelldoff, Nathan N., 167
^
4ii M^g
Mercator, 278
Meredith, Robert, 186
AferoV Students Encyclopedia, 328
Merriam, Charles, 286, 288-91
Merriam, George, 286, 288-91
Merriam (G. & C.) Company, 286, 290, 291, 297-
98
Merriam-Webster family of dictionaries
bibliography on, 302
competition for, 289-91
continuous revision and expansion of, 291-
92
current status of, 299-301
development and history of, 286-301
and George and Charles Merriam, 288-89
other Merriam-Webster dictionaries, 298-99
publication history of, 301
specialized dictionaries, 294
and Webster, 286-88
Webster's International Dictionary, 291-92
Webster 's New International Dictionary,
292
Webster 's New International Dictionary
second edition, 292-94
Webster's Third New International
Dictionary, 294-98
Merriam-Webster Inc., 83, 286, 298-301
Messner, Robert H., 154
Methodist Book Concern, 274, 276
MEU. See Dictionary of Modern English Usage
(Fowler)
Meynell, Lawrence, 309
MGG, See Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart,
Die
Michaelson, Robert, 129, 131
Michelins, A
Michelle, Stacy, 39-40
Microfilm, 67-68
Microfilm Abstracts, 68-70, 71
Microfilming Corporation of America, 177
Micromedia, Ltd., 70
Micropaedia. See Encyclopaedia Britannica
Microsoft, 38
Microsoft Bookshelf 230
Middle English Dictionary, The, 187
Middleton, Miss, 120
Millar, James, 78
Miller, Julia E. } 320, 321
Miller, Newman, 32-34
Miller, William V., 332
Mish, Frederick C, 299, 300
MLA. See Modern Language Association
MIA International Bibliography, 71
Modern Language Association, 39, 253
Moir, Ian A., 274
Moncreiffe, Sir Iain, 310
Monograph Abstracts, 69
Moody, Anna, 147
Moody, John, 147-54
INDEX 349
Moody Manual Company, 150
Moody 's Analysis of Mai Iroad Investments, 1 5 1
Moody's Bank & Finance Manual, 153, 154, 155
Moody's 5000 Plus, 156, 157
Moody 's Industrial Manual, 1 54
Moody 's International Manual, 155
Moody 's International Plus, 1 56
Moody's Investors Service, 150, 153, 154, 157
Moody's manuals
bibliography on, 158-59
continuing expansion of, 155
critical reception of, 156-57
development and history of, 147-57
first manual of, 148-50
modern manuals of, 150-52
Moody's influence on, 147-53
and Poor's manuals, 147-48
Porter's tenure with, 152-54
publication history of, 158
purchase by Dun & Bradstreet, 154
reorganization for electronic services, 157
technological advances of, 155-56
Moody's Municipal & Government Manual, 154,
155,156
Moody 's OTC Industrial Manual, 1 54
Moody's OTC Plus A56
Moody's OTC Unlisted Manual, 154, 155
Moody's Public Utility Investments, 152
Moody's Public Utility Manual, 154, 155
Moody's Transportation Manual, 154
Moon, Eric, 92
More, Sir Thomas, 18
Morgan, Charles, 267
Morgan, Paul, 251
Morley, Christopher, 11-13
Morrison, John J., 253
Morrison, Paul G., 247, 250
Mortensen, Charles M., 89
Mozart (Sadie), 123
Mudge, Isadore Gilbert, 132
Mueller, Johann, 313
Muirhead, Francis, 2
Munby, A. N. L., 255
Murphy, Cullen, 195
Murray, Elisabeth K. M„ 195
Murray, James A. H, 182, 184-85, 187, 188, 189,
191,193,194,287-88
Murray, John, 2, 54-55
Murray, William, 325, 33 1, 332
Murray publishing house, 62
Music. See Grove 's Dictionary of Music and
Musicians
Music Printing and Publishing (Sadie and
Krummel), 125
Musical Association, 119
Musical Times, 119
Musik in Geschichte und Gegmwart, Die, 123
Musik-Lexikon (Riemann), 120
Myth of the Britannica, The (Einbinder), 83-84
350 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Nangle, Benjamin, 245, 249
Napier, Macvey, 79
National Associations of the United States, 89,90,
91
National Calendar, 315
National Library of Canada, 70
National Science Foundation, x
National Union Catalog
antecedents of, 161-62
bibliography on, 171-72
development and history of, 161-70
editorial flexibility in, 169
editorial processes of, 168-69
Edwards Brothers as publisher of, 68
expansion of union catalog on cards, 162-63
new technology and, 169-70
plans for a book catalog, 165-67
plans for a retrospective union catalog, 167-
68
publication history of, 171
regional union catalogs, 164-65
union catalog on cards, 162
National Union Catalog, Pre- J 956 Imprints, 161,
170, 171
National Union Catalog Publication Project, 167-
68
Nault, William H., 326
Near East National Union List, 170
Neilson, William A., 291-92, 292, 293
Nelson, Thomas, 279
New American Roget's College Thesaurus in
Dictionary Form, 230
New and General Biographical Dictionary, The,
54
New Associations, 92
New Associations and Projects, 94
New Baronetage of England, The, 306
New Book of Knowledge, 80
New Dictionary of the English Language, A
(Richardson), 181
New Emily Post Etiquette, The (Post), 110
New Encyclopedia of Music and Musicians, The,
121
New English Dictionary, 27
New Era Publishing Company, 330
New General Biographical Dictionary (Rose), 54
New Grove Dictionary of American Music, The,
124-25
New Grove Dictionary of Jazz, The, 125
New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians,
The, 123-25
New Grove Dictionary of Opera, 125
New Grove Mozart, The, 125
New International Atlas, The, 283
New Law Dictionary (Jacob), 18
New Law List, 306
New Peerage, The, 306
New Practical Reference Library, The, 322, 323
New Primer in Parliamentary Procedure, the
(Suthers), 212
New Spelling Dictionary (Entick), 287
New Strong's Exhaustive Concordance of the
Bible, The, 274-75
New York Times Book Review Index, 176
New York Times Encyclopedic Almanac, 3 19, 320
New York Times Index
bibliography on, 178-79
computerized production of, 177-78
development and history of, 174-78
early days of, 174-75
publication history of, 178
reform and renaissance, 176-77
stability and growth, 175-76
training indexers for, 177
New York Times Information Bank, 178
New York Times Obituaries Index, 176
New York Times On Microfilm, 177
New York Tribune, 175
Newspaper Index Project, 175
Newspapers in Microform, 163
Newton, Sir Isaac, x
NEXIS, 178
NeXT computer academic workstation, 299-300
Nicholls, C. S., 62
Nicholson, Margaret, 48-49, 50
9,000 Words, 298
Nineteenth Century Readers ' Guide, The, 205
NTV Exhaustive Concordance (Goodrick and
Kohlenberger), 275
Nolan, Joseph R., 21
Nomo-Lexikon (Blount), 18
North American Imprints Project, 253
Northcliffe, Lord, 279
Northwestern University, 133
Norton, Mary, 329
Norton (W. W.), 125
Norton/Grove Concise Encyclopedia of Music,
The, 125
Nostradamus, Michel de, 313-14
Not Generally Known (Timbs), 25
Notebook II Plus, 39
Noted Names in Fiction (Wheeler), 25
Notes and Queries, 60
Nowell-Smith, Simon, 29
NUC. See National Union Catalog
NUCPP. See National Union Catalog Publication
Project
Oakes,Uriah,314
Oberson Resources, 39
Ochs, Adolph S., 174
OCLC, 169-70
O'Connell, Brian, 218
OED. See Oxford English Dictionary
Official Associated Press Almanac, 320
Old Farmer's Alamanc, 314
Omnigraphics, 95
Ong, Walter J., 297
Onions, Charles Talbut, 47, 186, 186
Orgren, Carl, 71,74
O'Rourke, Joseph, 327
Orszagh, Ladislas, 297
INDEX 351
Ortelius, Abraham, 278
Osborn, James M., 252, 253
O'Shea, Michael Vincent, 322, 323
Oxford American Dictionary, 194
Oxford Children's Dictionary, 194
Oxford Dictionary of English Etymology, 194
Oxford English Dictionary
antecedents of, 25, 180-81
bibliography on, 195-96
and Bradley, 185-86
Burchfield's editorship of, 189-90
Coleridge's editorship of, 182-83
critical reception of, 186-87
definition of concordance, 269
development and history of, 180-94
and Dictionary of Modern English Usage,
42, 43-44
first supplement to, 188-89
flaws in, 187-88
FurnivaU's editorship of, 183
future directions for, 192-94
as incomplete record of English language,
190-91
Murray's editorship of, 1 84-86
and Philological Society, 181-82
publication history of, 195
second edition of, 191-92
supplement to, 50
and Who's Who, 310
Oxford Minidictionary, 194
Oxford Universal Dictionary, 194
Oxford University, 62
Oxford University Press, 42, 43, 47, 48, 49, 50,
60, 180, 184, 185, 188, 189, I9l t 193, 196n2
Paine, Gregory, 36
Pall Mall Gazette, 55
Panassie, Hugues, 122
Panizzi, Anthony, 246
Pantzer, Katharine F., 247, 250-51, 252
Pargellis, Stanley, 249
Parliamentary Law (Robert), 214
Parliamentary Practice (Robert), 214
Parliamentary procedure. See Robert 's Rules of
Order
Parry, Hubert, 120, 122
Parson, George H., 154
Parton, James, 298
Partridge, Eric, 45, 50
Pascal, Naomi, 3 1
Passow, Francis, 182
Patnode, Darwin, 215, 217-18
Pausanias, 1
Paxton, John, 259, 260, 261, 264, 265-66
Peel, Sir Robert, 259-60
Peet, Creighton, 199
Penguin, 230
Peninsula Publishers, 123
Pergamon Compact Solution, 144
Periodicals Clearing House, 205
Perry, William, 224
Personality of a House: The Blue Book of Home
Design and Decoration (Post), 102
Peterson, Frank, 163
Phelps, William Lyon, 293
Philipson, Morris, 37
Philological Society, 181-82, 183, 184, 185, 188,
190, 194
Physician 's Almanac, 3 14
Pius XII, Pope, 328
Plain Words (Gowers), 49
Plan for a Dictionary of the English Language
(Johnson), 180
Planclc, Max, xi
Plantin, Christopher, 278
Plotnik, Arthur, 208
Pocket Oxford Dictionary of Current English, 42,
43
Pocket Oxford English Dictionary of Current
English, 194
Poetry. See Granger's Index to Poetry
Poetry Index Annual, 115
Poetry Index Press, 1 15
Pohl, Carl Ferdinand, 120
Pokomey, Pamely, 38
Pollard, A. F., 59, 60, 61
Pollard, Alfred William, 243-45, 247, 250, 251,
256n6, 256nl 1
Pollard and Redgrave's Short-Title Catalogue. See
Short-Title Catalogue (Pollard and Redgrave)
Poole, William Frederick, 200, 202
Poole 's Index to Periodical Literature, 1 6 1 , 200
Poor, Henry Varnum, 147-48
Poor, Henry William, 148
Poor Richard's Almanac (Franklin), 3 14
Poor's Manual, 147-48, 153
Poor's manuals, 150
Poor's Publishing Company, 150, 153, 155
Popular Magazine Review, 206
Porter, John Sherman, 152-54
Porter, Noah, 288, 291, 292
Porter, Roy, 150
Post, Bruce Price, 98
Post, Edwin Main, 98
Post, Edwin Main, Jr., 98, 107, 1 1 1
Post, Elizabeth L. 5 } 08-10
Post, Emily
as contributor to World Book, 324
critical and popular reception to Etiquette,
103-4
death of, 107
early revised editions of Etiquette, 104-7
family of, 98
and first edition of Etiquette, 99-103
marriage and divorce, 98-99
McCall's magazine column of, 104
as novel writer, 98-99
"Social Problems" newspaper column of,
104
tenth edition of Etiquette, 107-8
352 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Potter, Marion E., 199, 202-3, 204, 206, 208
Poulter, Cameron, 37
Pound, Roscoe, 82
Powell, John A., 33
Power, Eugene, 67-68, 72, 75nl3
Pratt, Waldo Selden, 121
Preble, Robert, 329
Preece, Warren, 84
Prentice-Hall, 6
Press Publishing Co., 317
Price, Bruce, 98
Proctor, R. G. C, 243
Pronouncing Dictionary of American English, A,
294
Propaedia. See Encyclopaedia Britannica
Proposal for the Publication of a New English
Dictionary by the Philological Society, 183,
190
Psychological Abstracts, 71
Ptolemy, 278
Public Administration Clearing House, 91
Public Administration Organizations, 91
Publishers' Weekly, 199, 206-7
Pulitzer, Joseph, 315-16, 317
Putnam, Henry, 165, 170
Putnam, Herbert, 162
Pyle, Ernie, 106
Pynson, Richard, 313
Quaritch, Bernard, 243
Quarrie, William F., 328
Quarrie Corp., 331
Quarrie (W.F.) & Co., 329, 330
Quirk, Randolph, 46-47, 48, 50, 296
Quotations. See Bartlett's Familiar Quotations
Rackliffe, Jack, 13
Rail Guide to Europe, 1
Rakestraw, Beatrice B., 208
Ran d McNally 's International Atlas, 283
Rastell, John, 18
Rayleigh, Lord, 79
Raymond, Henry Jarvis, 178
Reader's Digest, 108, 109,274
Reader's Digest Almanac, 319, 320
Reader's Digest Family Guide to the Bible
(Gibson and Moir), 274
Reader's Encyclopedia (Benet), 25
Readers' Guide Abstracts, 200, 206
Readers' Guide Supplement, 205
Readers ' Guide to Periodical Literature
bibliography on, 208-9
change and continuity in, 201-2
development and history of, 198-207
and existing periodical indexes, 200
first issue of, 200-1
indexing practices in, 202-4
other products related to, 205-6
publication history of, 208
related Wilson indexes, 205
selection of sources indexed, 204-5
service basis pricing of, 207
success of, 206-7
and Wilson, 198-200
Reader's Handbook of Famous Names in Fiction
(Brewer), 24
Reavis, George H., 324
Redgrave, Gilbert Richard, 243, 244-45
Redgrave, Richard, 244
Redlich, Hans, 122
Reference books guides. See Guide to Reference
Books
Reference Sources for Small and Medium-sized
Libraries, 133
Regional union catalogs, 164-65
Reid, Thomas, 225-26
"Reiseleben," 7
Research Abstracts, 69
Retrospective Index to Dissertation Abstracts, 72
Reynolds, Horace, 16
Rhode Island Almanac, The, 314
Rhodes, Cecil, 309
Ricardo, David, 79
Richards, Pamela Spence, 136
Richardson, Charles, 181
Richardson, Ernest Cushing, 163, 170
Riddick's Rules of Procedures (Riddick and
Butcher), 212
Rider, Philip R., 247, 252
Riemann, Hugo, 120
Ripley's Believe It or Not, 142
RISM (Repertoire international des sources
musicales), 123
RUN, 170
Roach, Arno, 323
Robert, Henry M., Ill, 214, 216
Robert, Henry M., Jr., 214
Robert, Henry Martyn, 213-15
Robert, Isabel H., 216
Robert, Sarah Corbin, 216, 218
Robert 's Rules of Order
bibliography on, 218-19
critical reception of the 1970 edition, 217
development and history of, 21 1-18
editions under other editors, 214-18
first edition of, 214
1970 edition, 216-17
1989 edition, 217-18
and other guides to parliamentary proce-
dure, 212
publication history of, 21 8
reputation and influence of, 21 1-12
and Robert, 213-14
and value of procedure, 212-13
Robinson, Sarita, 203, 204, 208
Rockefeller, John D., Jr., 163, 170
Rockstro, William S., 120, 122
Rogers, Pat, 63
Roget, John, 229
Roget, John Lewis, 227-28
INDEX 353
*nfe*
Roget, Peter Mark, 220-27
Roget, Samuel Romilly, 228
Roget 's International Thesaurus, 229-30
Roget 's Pocket Thesaurus, 230
Roget's Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases
American editions, 229-30
antecedents of, 224
bibliography on, 231-32
classification scheme of, 224-26
development and history of, 220-30
editions by others, 228-29
first edition of, 226-27
future of, 230
later editions edited by Roget and his
descendents, 227-28
as multi-purpose tool, 223-24
publication history of, 230-31
and Roget, 220-23
Roget's Treasury of Words, 230
Roget's II: The New Thesaurus, 230
Rollins, Richard, 288
Room with a View (Forster), 3
Roosevelt, Theodore, 262, 263
Rosenwald, Julius, 81, 82
Ross, Harold, 41
Rossetti, Dante Gabriel, 79
Rothman, John, 175-76, 177, 178
Routledge (G.) and Sons Ltd., 307
Royal Musical Association, 1 19
Royal Society, 221, 222
Ruffher, Frederick G„ 89-90, 92, 94, 95
Ruffher, Mary, 89
Rules for a Printed Dictionary Catalogue (Cutter),
161
Ruskin, John, 55
Russell, Bertrand, 3, 81
Rutland, Duke of, 307
Saalfleld Co., 300
Sader, Marion, 87
Sadie, Stanley, 123-24, 125, 126
St. Clair, Frank, 154
St. Martin's Press, 122, 230, 259
Salisbury, Lord, 308
Sayle, Charles, 243
SchSfer, Jiirgen, 187, 190, 193
Schlessinger, Bernard, 157, 159
Schubert, Franz, 118
Schumann, Robert, 118
Schwegmann, George, 164-65
Schwegmann, George, Jr., 170, 171
SCI. See Science Citation Index
Science and Common Sense (Conant), ix
Science Citation Index
backward and forward process of citation
searching in, 237-38
bibliography on, 240-41
citation access to, 236
development and history of, 234-39
as multi-faceted tool, 236-37
problematic issues in, 238-39
publication history of, 239-40
selective coverage of, 235-36
significance of, 234-35
subject access to, 236
Scott, Andrew G., 279
Scott, Ralph, 72
Scott, Robert, 182
Scott, Thomas A., 315
Scott, Sir Walter, 79, 307
Scott & Fet2er, 325
Scott, Foresman and Company, 214
Scott-Keltie, John, 261-63
Scribner's, ix~x, 80
Scripps-Howard, 317-18
Sears, Rev. Bamas, 229
Sears & Roebuck, 81,82, 83
Selection of English Synonyms, A (Whately), 224
Service basis pricing, 207
Seybold, Catharine, 31, 32, 33, 35, 37-38, 39
Shaaber, M. A., 247
Shakespeare Folios and Quartos (Pollard), 244,
256nll
Shakespeare 's Fight with the Pirates and the
Problem of the Transmission of his Text
(Pollard), 244
Shaw, George Bernard, 309
Sheeny, Eugene P., 10, 92, 129, 130, 131, 133,
134, 136n4, 137n8, I37nl3, 158,255, 310
Sheen, Fulton J., 324
Shelton, Harold, 330
Shenker, Israel, 72, 74, 195
Shepard's Citations, 234
Shepheard's Kalendar, The (Pynson), 313
Sherwood, Elizabeth J., 113, 201
Sherwood, Mrs., 103
Shores, Louis, 91
Short-Title Catalogue (Pollard and Redgrave)
bibliography on, 254-55
creation of, 245-46
development and history of, 242-47
future editions of, 253-54
impact of, 246-47
justification for, 242-43
origins of, 243-44
and Pollard and Redgrave, 244-45
publication history of, 254
revision of, 250*52
Short-Title Catalogue (Wing)
bibliography on, 254-55
future editions of, 253-54
history and development of, 247-54
publication history of, 254
revision of, 250, 252-53
and Wing, 247-50
Shorter Oxford English Dictionary, The, 189, 194
Shugg, Roger, 36-37
Sikkink,Don,218
SilverPIatter, 94
Simkin, Hamilton, Kent, and Company, 307
Simmonds, Martha, 327
jMniTrm*
354 DISTINGUISHED CLASSICS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Simson, Maria, 145
Sinai and Palestine (Stanley), 118
Singing Class Circular, 119
6,000 Words, 298
Sladen, Douglas, 307-8, 309, 3 1 1
Slavens, Thomas P., 158
Sledd, James, 297
Sloane, Richard, 21, 22
Slonimsky, Nicolas, 121
Smcaton, B. Hunter, 26
Smellie, William, 77, 78
Smith, David A., 169, 170, 171
Smith, George M., 55-56, 57, 59, 60, 62
Smith, Gilbert C.E., 330
Smith, Hilda L., 250
Smith, Mrs. George, 62
Smith, W. Robertson, 79-80
Smith, William, 118
Smith, William James, 114
Smith, Elder and Company, 55, 62
Snyder, Henry L., 253, 254
Social Sciences and Humanities Index, 205
Social Sciences Citation Index, 234
Society for Pure English, 46
Sonneck, Oscar, 121
Sorkin, Sophie, 3 1
Spaulding, C. Sumner, 166
Spock, Benjamin, 140
Squire, William Barclay, 120
Stagg, Amos Alonzo, 82
Stamboul Train (Greene), 3
Standard & Poor's Corporation, 150, 155, 156,
157
Standard & Poor's Corporation Records, 157, 158
Standard Reference Library, Inc., 108
Standard Statistics, 155
Stanford, Donald E., 114
Stanley, A. P., 118
Statesman 's Year-Book
bibliography on, 266-67
changes in organization and contents, 262-
63
coverage of the United States, 263
development and history of, 259-66
Epstein's editorship of, 263-64
future of, 266
maps in, 262
Martin's editorship of, 260-61
origins of, 259-60
Paxton's editorship of, 265-66
publication history of, 266
Scott-Keltie's editorship of, 262
Steinberg's editorship of, 264-65
Statesman 's Year-Book Historical Companion,
266
Statesman 's Year-Book World Gazetteer, 266
STC. See Short-Title Catalogue (Pollard and
Redgrave)
Steinberg, Sigrid Henry, 27, 264-65, 266
Stephanus, Robert, 270
Stephen, Leslie, 54, 55-61, 62
Stephens, Earl, 154
Sterling Books, 140, 143
Stevens, David H., 34-35
Stevens, Denis, 123
Stevenson, Robert Louis, 81
Stewart, Zeph, 13
Stiles, Kenneth, 47
Stokes, Roy B., 242
Strong, James, 269, 272-73
Strong's Exhaustive Concordance of the Bible
antecedents of, 270-71
approach of, 272
bibliography on, 276
critical response to, 273-74
development and history of, 269-76
publication history of, 276
significance of, 275-76
and Strong, 272-73
Strunk, William, Jr., 31
Student's Atlas, The, 279
Slurgis Standard Code of Parliamentary Proce-
dure, 212
Style manuals. See Chicago Manual of Style
Subject Index to Poetry (Bruncken), 1 15
Sullivan, Arthur, 118
Sutcliffe, Peter, 50
Swinburne, Algernon Charles, 79
Synonymous, Etymological, and Pronouncing
English Dictionary (Perry), 224
Syracuse University, 133
Table Alphabetical!, A (Cawdrey), 180
Taylor, William, 224
Tennyson, Alfred Lord, 186
Terms de la ley, 1 8
Thackeray, William, 55
Theatrum orbis terrarum (Ortelius), 278
Thesaurus of English Words and Phrases. See
RogeVsThesaurus of English Words and
Phrases
Thomas, Dylan, 227
Thomas, Michael Tilson, 124
Thomas, Robert B., 314
Thomas Nelson Publishers, 271, 274-75, 276
Thomas Y. Crowell & Company, 108, 229-30
Thoreau, Henry David, 9
Timbs, John, 25
Times Atlas of the World
and Bartholomew family, 279
bibliography on, 284
Comprehensive Edition, 282-83
development and history of, 278-83
early editions of, 279-80
Mid-Century Edition, 280-81
preeminence of, 283
publication history of, 284
Times Index-Gazetteer of the World, 281
tfjiii
Tocqueville, Alexis de, 94
Topping, Seymour, 178
Tout, T. F., 59
Traill, Thomas Stewart, 79
Travel guidebooks. See Baedeker guidebooks
Trench, Richard Chenevix, 181-82, 183, 186, 192,
194
Tribune Almanac, 315
Triggs, Jeffery, 193
Trotsky, Leon, 82
Truelson, Judith, 157, 159
Truth About the Trusts, The (Moody), 149
Tally, William, 288
Tunney, Gene, 82
Turner, Frederick Jackson, 81
Twain, Mark, 3
12,000 Words, 298
Tytler, James, 78
UML See University Microfilms International
Unger, Merrill F., 275
Union List of Serials, 163
Universal and Critical Dictionary of the English
Language (Worcester), 290
Universal Etymological English Dictionary, An
(Bailey), 180
University Microfilms International, 67, 68, 75n9,
177
University of Chicago, 71, 82, 83-84, 86, 328
University of Chicago Press, 32, 37, 39
University of London, 60
University of Washington Press, 31
University Publications of America, 5
Untermeyer, Louis, 82
Urdang, Laurence, 31,38
US Government Manual, 93
Van Doren, Carl, 82
Victoria, Queen, 60
Vine, William Edwin, 275
Von Palkenhorst, General, 4
Waddell, John N., 136
Wagman, Frederick H„ 166, 170
Walford, Albert John, 92, 158
Wall Street Journal, 175
Walsh, S. Padraig, 87, 324
Walsh (A.E.), 265
Warming, Louis, 32, 33
Washington Post, 175
Wasserman, Paul, 91
Waugh, Evelyn, 3,41
Webster, Noah, 181, 286-88, 289, 290, 300
Webster, William G., 288
Webster 's Biographical Dictionary, 294
Webster's Collegiate Dictionary, 291, 292, 294
Webster's Collegiate Thesaurus, 298
Webster's Dictionary of English Usage, 299
Webster's Dictionary of Synonyms, 294
Webster 's Elementary Dictionary, 299
INDEX 355
Webster's Geographical Dictionary, 294
Webster's Intermediate Dictionary, 299, 300
Webster's International Dictionary, 291-92
Webster's Medical Desk Dictionary, 299
Webster's New Biographical Dictionary, 298
Webster's New Collegiate Dictionary, 298
Webster's New Dictionary of Synonyms, 298
Webster's New Geographical Dictionary, 298
Webster's New International Dictionary, 229, 292
Webster 's New International Dictionary, second
edition, 292-94
Webster's Ninth New Collegiate Dictionary, 194,
298-300
Webster's School Dictionary, 299
Webster 's Secretarial Handbook, 298
Webster's Seventh New Collegiate Dictionary, 298
Webster's Standard American Style Manual, 299
Webster 's Third New International Dictionary,
189,294-98
Webster's Word Histories, 299
Weekley, Ernest, 186
Welland, Jennie, 1 77
Wellesz, Egon, 122
Welsh, William J., 171
West Publishing Company, 19, 21
Western Association of Map Libraries, 5
WESTLAW, 21
Whately, Elizabeth Jane, 224
Wheeler, William Adolphus, 25
Whig Almanac and Political Register, 3 1 5
Whipple, E. P., 227
Whitaker, George, 307
Whitaker (J.) and Sons, 307
Whitaker 's Almanack, 3 07, 3 1
White, E. B., 31
White, William, Jr., 275
Whitehead, Alfred North, 8 1
Whittern, Jessie D., 35
Whittier, John Greenleaf, 291
Who Was Who, lib
Who's Who
antecedents of, 306
bibliography on, 311
the Blacks and, 307-8
development and history of, 306-10
format and process of, 308-9
imitators of, 310
publication history of, 3 1 1
Sladen's departure from, 308
Who 's Who Among American High School
Students, 310
Who's Who in America, 310
Who's Who in Finance and Industry, 310
Wild, Michael, 7
Wilhelm, Kaiser, 1
Willard, Hannah Staniford, 9
William Benton Foundation, 86
Williams, Gordon R., 171
Willoughby, Edwin E., 249
/s3v / "idLi,':
EX'JEE^^czssrasxi '■» ii»i » »■
356 r>TRTTMrjnsHF.n PT.AKSTCS OF REFERENCE PUBLISHING
Wilson, Edmund, 103
Wilson, Halsey William, 166, 198-200, 206-07
Wilson, J. Dover, 244, 245, 254, 256nll
Wilson, Justina, 199
Wilson, Woodrow, 81
Wilson (H.W.) Company, 198, 199-200, 204-5,
207
Wilson Library Bulletin, 130,208
Wilsondisc, 206
Wflsonline, 206
Winchell, Constance, 92, 131, 132, 133
Wind, Herbert Warren, 7
Wing, Donald G., 247-49, 252-53
Wing's Short-Title Catalogue. See Short-Title
Catalogue (Wing)
Winkler, Max, 152
Winsor, Justin, 26
WLN, 170
Wodehouse, Mrs. Edmond, 120
Wolf, Edwin, 250
Women and the Literature of the Seventeenth
Century (Smith and Cardinale), 250
Woolf, Virginia, 55
Worcester, Joseph Emerson, 288, 289-91
Works Projects Administration, 164
World Almanac
bibliography on, 320-21
critical reception of, 3 19-20
development and history of, 3 13-20
first World Atamanc, 315-16
and Lyman, 316-18
new editors of, 318
publication history of, 320
and Pulitzer, 316
structure of, 318-19
World Bible Publishers, 274, 276
World Book Encyclopedia
accuracy of, 329-30
bibliography on, 332-33
critical and popular reception of, 325-26
development and history of, 322-31
executive staff of, 83
foreign sales and marketing, 330-31
graphics in, 328-29
high standards of, 326-28
O'Shea and, 323
plagiarism charges against, 329-30
publication history of, 331-32
readability of, 326-27
revisions of, 82, 323-25
yearbooks for, 331
World Book, Inc., 326, 327
World Publishing Company, 300
World War 1, 43, 81
World War II, 4, 106-7,165
Worlde ofWordes, A (Florio), 180
Woy, James, 158
Wyatt, Euphemia Van Rensselaer, 106, 1 1 1
Wyckoff, Ralphj x-xi
Wynar, Bohdan, 92, 319-20
Xerox Corporation, 67
Yale University Library, 247-48, 252
Young, Bruce, 31, 37-38
Young, Mark, 143-44
Young, Percy, 118, 126
Young, Robert, 271
Young's Analytical Concordance to the Bible, 275
Youth Serving Organizations Directory, 94
Yust, Walter, 82, 83
Ziolkowski, Theodore, 66